SES
gis

EASE
IHN
mR adeesabteay serch

; wtghctreeh

Bett ane
aaah

I
i
Me

rat
Ki

ii

Vol. XI, No. 1

SATURDAY, JULY 4, 1936

Annual Subscription, $2.00
Single Copies, 30 Cents.

THE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY AT
COLD SPRING HARBOR

Dr. Eric PONDER

TheBiological Laboratory at Cold Spring
Harbor, having struggled through the difficult
years to a point where its future appeared rosy,
suffered a terrible loss last January by the death
of its Director, Dr. Reginald. “

THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORA-
TORY IN 1935

Dr. M. H. JAcoss

Attendance. Following the sharp decline in
attendance in 1932 from the previous high figure
of 362, the number of regularly registered inves-
tigators at the Laboratory has remained almost

<f stationary, with only minor

G. Harris. Scarcely a phase
in its growth and in the de-

WM. WH. LU. Calendar

fluctuations from year to year.
The exact figures for the past

velopment of its reputation
was not due to him, and with
his going we were left like a
ship without a pilot. But a
ship which has gone so far on
its chartered course cannot be
lightly abandoned, and so the
Laboratory continues to do
what it set out to do.

The principal activity dur-
ing the summer will be the
fourth Symposium on Quan-

| Dr. C. Ladd Prosser:

TUESDAY, July 7, 8:00 P. M.

Seminar: Dr. Alfred M. Lucas:
Nerve cells without central pro-
cesses in the fourth spinal gang-
lion of the frog.

Dr. José F. Nonidez: Receptor
areas in the venae cavae and the
pulmonary veins, and their rela-
tion to Bainbridge’s reflex.

Extinction
of reflex responses in the rat.

Dr. R. W. Gerard: Factors influ-
encing the electrical activity of

5 years are: 362 in 1931, 314
in 1932, 319 in 1933, 323 in
1934 and 315 in 1935. The
number of students in the
courses has likewise remained
practically constant at the lim-
it set by the sizes of the avail-
able class-rooms. The _ total
number of students and inves-
tigators together, after allow-
ing for duplications, of 429 in

titative Biology, this year on the brain.
the subject of excitation phe-
nomena. Most of the papers
to be read and discussed dur-
ing the first week are con-
cerned with fundamental phy-

Lecture:
versity of

FRIDAY, July 10, 8:00 P. M.

Prof. W. C. Allee, Uni-
Chicago:
studies in mass physiology.

1935 represents approximately
the optimum for the present
facilities of the Laboratory
since it is just sufficient to fill
all the available space com-
fortably and without undue
crowding. Particularly note-

Recent

sico-chemical phenomena re-
lated to the excitatory state; then come, if not
altogether in order, papers on the physical, chem-
ical, and mathematical aspects of excitation in
muscle and nerve, and (Continued on page 5)

TABLE OF
The Biological Laboratory at Cold Spring

Ue On moO TE, MIC WP ONGET:: rc... +. c-04.-.<tusenceansonenees 1

The Marine Biological Laboratory in 1935,
Dr. M. H. Jacobs

Student Activities

Mt. Desert Island Biological Laboratory,
PTV AUIUT AES ONE Goes. tsce. cs. censacncvasccseesenaceeebece cas

Electron Tube Relay, Dr. K. C. Fisher.

worthy in 1935 was the large
number of institutions represented by investi-
gators. Both this number, which was 111, and
the total of 143 for investigators and students
combined, were the largest in the history of the

CONTENTS
Editorial Page, Items of Interest............ 10, 11, 12

The Effect of Methylene Blue in Hemoglobin,
Dr. Matilda M. Brooks

The Phosphatase Content of the Chick Em-

bryo, Harry J. Lipman
Extra Curricular Activities ..... 0.0.00...
Book Department
Woods Hole Log ...

WIOH SGOOM JO SAINOLVYORVT TVOIDOTOIN ANIMVW AHL

OFT 0st

Jury 4, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET aS

Laboratory. The usual tabulation of the seasonal
distribution of attendance at ten-day intervals for
the past 9 years follows:

92/2 See O29)

May S10) ccceestMtncect ceased 7 15 9
June ORs Redon eis coasted 50 64 55
a 140 139

" 240 197
July 281 238
282 = 242

ss Zeca?
August 250 256
5 226 86.243
183 220
September p10 2... 110 112 IBY
7 50 43 59

- 12 14 14

The Report of the Treasurer. In 1935, for the
first time in four years, the annual decline in the
income of the Laboratory from its endowment
funds has been replaced by a slight increase.
Though this increase amounted to slightly less
than a thousand dollars, and though the total in-
come from endowment of $47,950.76 is still near-
ly ten thousand dollars below that of pre-depres-
sion years, it is nevertheless very gratifying to be
able to report an actual reversal of the previous
trend. An inspection of Exhibit B from the
Auditors’ Report also reveals an increase of ap-
proximately $1,000.00 in the net income from the
Supply Department (though the gross receipts
were less than those for 1934), and similarly, for
the first time in 4 years, there has been a slight
but encouraging increase in the receipts from the
rental of research space. Particularly helpful to

the Laboratory at a time when its regular income
was at nearly its lowest level since the establish-
ment of its present endowment fund was a second

LOSO LOS oS2 OS Selo S4 985
6 6 8 11 12 11
50 Sil 54 46 54 43
153 153 127 129 137 127
208 217 172 184 196 174
253 258 225 235 249 226
250 273 245 253 256 232
253 281 248 255 248 257
254 302 257 261 264 245
245 280 236 244 250, 235
204 239 190 205 211 192
122 136 129 117 93 94
44 69 58 45 38 26
8 14 13 12 9 11
special dividend from the General Biological

Supply House, this dividend representing profits
accumulated but not distributed during a period
when business uncertainties made a relatively
large reserve seem desirable.

‘hough in view of all the circumstances the
present financial situation of the Laboratory is
very satisfactory, it should nevertheless be noted
that the annual gross income in 1935 was nearly
forty thousand dollars less than that in 1931 and
that throughout the period of the depression the
budget has been kept balanced only by drastic
economies of various sorts, some of which can-
not much longer be continued without detriment
to the scientific activities of the institution. It
should likewise be remembered that for a con-
siderable number of years to come the income of
the Laboratory will be adversely affected by the

CAPTION OF AERIAL PHOTOGRAPH ON ADJACENT PAGE

The Marine Biological Laboratory (30-118)

The Dormitory (29-100)

The Apartment (25-108)

The Old Lecture Hall (25-113)

The Old Main Building (28-115)

The Botany Building (28-114)

The Mess Hall (25-124)

The M. B. L. Wharf (29-135)

The M. B. L. Tennis Club Beach Courts (20-80)
The M. B. L. Tennis Club Mess Hall Courts (24-116)
The Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution (34-127)
The United States Bureau of Fisheries (25-135)
The Bureau of Fisheries Residence (26-134)

The United States Coast Guard Wharf (18-127)
The Woods Hole Yacht Club (10-102)

The Breakwater Hotel (18-85)

The School House (38-104)

Town Wharf (28-94)

The Eel Pond (33-95)

The Steamboat Wharf and Station (38-148)
Church of the Messiah—Episcopal (49-115)
Nobska Beach (51-142)

Nobska Light House (54-139)

Little Harbor (44-130)

Water Tower (51-66)

M. B. L. Clubhouse (33-127)

THE COLLECTING NET has been entered as second-class matter July 11, 1935, at the Post Office

at Woods Hole, Massachusetts, under the Act of March 3, 1879.
It is published weekly tor ten weeks between June 1 and September 15

marine biological laboratories.

from Woods Hole and printed at The Darwin Press, New Bedford.
the third floor of the Woods Hole station of the United States Bureau of Fisheries.

It is devoted to the scientific work at

Its editorial offices are situated on
Between June 1

and October 1 communications should be addressed to Woods Hole, Massachusetts; at other times they
should be directed to THE COLLECTING NET, Garrison, N. Y. Single copies cost 30c; a subscription

(containing not less than 280 pages) costs $2.00.

49591

A THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. XI, No. 92

gradual maturing of securities in its endowment
fund, the proceeds from which must of necessity
be reinvested at lower rates of interest. While
the financial position of the Laboratory is there-
fore sound, and indeed extremely fortunate as
compared with that of most other scientific and
educational institutions, it is not at present such
as to justify any departure from the very con-
servative policy with regard to expenditures that
has been followed for the past four years.

The Report of the Librarian. Though it has
not yet become possible to restore the earlier rate
of growth of the library, temporarily checked by
the reduction in the income from endowment
funds, it is nevertheless encouraging to record
very satisfactory gains during the past year. In
particular, the increase in the number of journals
currently received, amounting to 74 for the year
in question, has been the largest for any single
year since 1931. Substantial progress in the com-
pletion of back sets of journals has also been
made. As the number of reprints in the library
approaches the 100,000 mark, the attention of all
members of the Corporation is invited to the de-
sirability of transferring to this collection reprints
in their own possession which are little or not
at all used, but which might be of great value to
other workers at the Laboratory.

Lectures and Scientific Meetings. The number
of general lectures was 11, while there were also

special types of equipment of whose use they have
expert knowledge, and who in cooperation with
the Technical Manager can determine questions
of general policy with regard to the most effective
use of the valuable apparatus already in the pos-
session of the Laboratory. To meet this need,
following authorization by the Executive Com-
mittee, President Lillie in the early summer of
1935 appointed a Committee of three consisting
of Drs. Garrey, Harvey and Heilbrunn, which
was later enlarged to the following membership :
Drs. W. R. Amberson, D. J. Edwards, W. E.
Garrey, E. N. Harvey, M. H. Jacobs and LE: V.
Heilbrunn, Chairman. During the summer of
1935 extremely useful work was accomplished by
the original committee of three in making a gen-
eral survey of all the apparatus belonging to the
Laboratory and in securing from individual in-
vestigators a large number of valuable sugges-
tions. At a meeting of the full committee held
in September a series of general recommendations
based on the information so obtained was drawn
up. These recommendations should serve as a
very sound basis for the future policies of the
Laboratory in this important and highly technical
field.

Board of Trustees. At the meeting of the
Corporation held on Tuesday, August 13, 1935
the long and valuable services on the Board of
Trustees of Professor G. H. Parker, whose

THE GROWTH OF THE LIBRARY SINCE 1925

1925 1926 1927 1928
Serials received cur-
rently 500 628 764 874
Total number of bound
volumes

Reprints

held 8 evening meetings and an all-day scientific
session devoted to work accomplished at the La-
boratory during 1935, at which 67 shorter papers
were presented and discussed. Abstracts of most
of these shorter papers, which cover a wide range
of scientific activities, will be found in the Bio-
logical Bulletin for October, 1935.

Apparatus Committee. The great diversity in
the character of the investigations carried on at
the Marine Biological Laboratory and particularly
the increasing complexity of the apparatus need-
ed for their successful prosecution has for some
time rendered desirable an advisory body, analo-
gous to the Library Committee, the members of
which can give advice concerning the purchase of

1929

985

1930 193i 1932) 1933 19345ReIg35

1060) 1EOS0) 13126, 15137) Glo aaa

15,000 18,200 22,800 26,500 28,300 31,500 33,800 36,000 37,400 38,600 40,200
25,000 38,000 43,000 51,000 59,000 64,000 70,000 76,000 81,000 86,000 92,000

membership began in 1908, and of Professor W.
M. Wheeler, whose membership began in 1919,
received recognition by the election of both to
the permanent position of Trustee Emeritus. To
fill the vacancies thus created the Corporation
elected Professor C. E. McClung (Class of 1936)
and Dr. A. H. Sturtevant (Class of 1939) re-
spectively. Professor Laurence Irving was also
chosen to succeed Professor W. C. Curtis as a
member of the Class of 1939.

NOTE: This report of the Director is a section
of the “Thinty-eighth Report” of the Marine Biologi-
cal Laboratory which will be published in the
August issue of “The Biological Bulletin.”

Jury 4, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET_

lon

THE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY AT COLD SPRING HARBOR

(Continued from page one)

these are followed by papers on somewhat more
specialized subjects, such as the effects of pres-
sure and the properties of the synapse. Most of
the last week is devoted to the consideration of
cerebral potentials, and a glance at the program
will show that this Symposium will be one of un-
usual physiological interest.

PROGRAM
Tuesday, June 23
GrorRGE S, DE RENYI:
Nervous Action.
Wednesday, June 24
F. O. Scumitr: X-ray Diffraction in Nerve.
Thursday, June 25
Duncan MacInnes and L. G. LoncswortH:
The Potentials of Galvanic Cells with Liquid
Junctions.
L. R. Brinks: Potential and Current Flow
Studies in Valonia, Halicystis, and Nitella.
Friday, June 26
THEODORE SHEDLOVSKY: Distribution of Elec-
lytes between Non-miscible Solvents.

KATHERINE B, Bropcetr: Demonstration of
Methods for the Study of Interfacial Phenom-
ena.

Morphological Basis of

Saturday, June 27
W. J. V. Osterunout: Some Ways to Control
Bioelectrical Behavior.
Wednesday, July 1
H. A. Buartr: The Kinetics of the Excitatory
Process.
Thursday, July 2
KENNETH S. COLE:
on Nerve.
Emit BozLter: The Change of Conductivity of
Tissues during Activity.
Friday, July 3
Lours Laprgue: Connection between Subordin-
ation-Chronaxie and Reflex Excitability.
A. M. Monnier: Physical and Chemical As-
pects of Neuromuscular Transmission.
Monday, July 6
Nerve Metabolism.

Impedence Measurements

F, O. Scumitr:
Tuesday, July 7

Wittram R. AmpBerson: The Mechanism of
Production of Membrane Potentials.

C. C. Spemwet: Experimental Induction of Visi-
ble Structural Changes in Single Nerve Fibres
in Living Frog Tadpoles.

Wednesday, July 8

ALEXANDER ForsBes: Conduction in Axon and

Synapse.

GEORGES COPPEE:
Currents.

Stimulation by Alternating

Thursday, July 9
DetLev W. Bronk: The Activity of
(Calls,

Arturo RoseENBLUETH: Neuromuscular Trans-
mission in Somatic and Autonomic Systems.
Friday, July 10
McKeen Catrett: On the Significance of the

Initial Heat and Its Application to the Meas-
urement of Muscular Efficiency.
Harry GruNprest: Excitation and Recovery in
Nerve as Modified by High Pressure.
Monday, July 13
W. O. Fenn: Isotonic Contractions in Muscle.
DuGALp Brown: The Sequence of Events in the
Contraction of Muscle at High Pressures.
Wednesday, July 15
G. Karo: On the Excitation, Conduction, and
Narcotisation of Single Nerve Fibres.
Thursday, July 16

Nerve

W. O. Fenn: The Electrolyte Equilibrium in
Muscle.

R. W. Gerard: On the Metabolism of Nerve
Cells.

Friday, July 17
Hupson Hoactanp: Some Pacemaker Aspects
of Rhythmic Activity in the Nervous System.
Iernst Fiscuer: The Submicroscopic Structure
of Muscle and Its Changes during Contraction
and Stretch.
Saturday, July 18
N. RaAsHeEvsky: Physico-mathematical Aspects
of Excitation and Conduction in Nerves.
Monday, July 20
HALLoweELL Davis: Some Aspects of the Elec-
trical Activity of the Cerebral Cortex.
RK. W. Gerarp: Factors Controlling the Nery-
ous Activity of Neurones.
Tuesday, July 21
G. H. Bisttop: The Interpretation of Cerebral
Potentials.
Wednesday, July 22
Heresert H. Jasper: Cortical Excitatory State
and Synchronism in the Control of Bioelectric
Autonomous Rhythms.
Thursday, July 23
C. Lapp Prosser: Rhythmic Activity in Isolated
Nerve Centres.
Friday, July 24
Hupson Hoacranp: On the Mechanism of
Adaptation (Peripheral Sensory Inhibition) of
Mechanoreceptors.

[ Vor. XI, No. 92

6 _THE COLLECTING NET

As in past years, the reading of each paper will
be followed by discussion of it by the group pres-
ent, and, in order to give others an opportunity
to take part, proof of many of the papers is being
sent to scientists, both in this country and abroad,
who are unable to attend personally. Anyone, in-
deed, who feels that he has something to contrib-
ute to the discussion of any of the subjects dealt
with can get a copy of the proof of any paper by
writing to the Laboratory, and can send his com-
ments by mail to be read when the paper is for-
mally discussed. This method of dealing with
the more controversial points has worked well in
the past, and this year’s Symposium is conspicuous
for the number of contributors who will be actu-
ally in residence at the Laboratory, some for the
entire time, and some for shorter periods; the re-
sult ought to be that the topics to be dealt with
will be dealt with very completely.

It always takes some time for the results of
any new venture to become apparent, but the
value of these annual Symposia is being most
clearly shown this year by the increased amount
of independent research which is to be carried out
at the Laboratory. Dr. Kenneth Cole, Dr. H. J.
Curtis, Dr. Theo. Jahn, and their assistants, plan
to work throughout the summer on the impedance
of muscle, nerve, and various sorts of membrane,
and another research team, consisting of Dr. Jas-
per, Dr. Andrews, Dr. Rheinberger, and Dr. Sol-
omon is expected to be working on cerebral po-
tentials during the Symposium period. Dr.
Abramson and Dr. Moyer are going to continue
their research on electrophoretic phenomena, as
well as their teaching in the General Physiology
course, and we expect Dr. Rudolph Katz during
July and August to carry out investigations on
the x-ray diffraction patterns of muscle. Dr. J.
Z. Young, visiting from England, intends to con-
tinue his investigations on the giant nerve fibres,
some of which are as much as 1 mm. in diameter,
found in the cuttle-fish and squids, and we hope
to have at the Laboratory, Professor F. O.
Schmitt, to study these giant fibres with the po-
larising microscope, as well as to take part in the
Symposium. Dr. A. A. Schaeffer is continuing
his work on spiral movement, Dr. T. L. Smith
his work on the genetics of Galleria mellonella,
Dr. Samuel Morris his investigations of parasites
of Limulus, and Dr. Bert Cunningham his meas-
urements of the water exchange in the eggs of
the turtle. This list of investigators is not nu-
merically so imposing as that which would pro-
ceed from a larger laboratory, but is enough to
tax our existing space to the limit, particularly
when it is remembered that it is a seasonal addi-
tion to the all-year research in biophysics and
physiology.

The other summer work at the Laboratory re-
mains much as it was in 1935. The number of
students is about the same (30 to 35), and is as

great as we can comfortably accommodate. Dr.
George WW. Corner, of the University of Roches-
ter School of Medicine and Dentistry, is again in
charge of the course in Surgical Methods, and is
assisted by Dr. E. W. Blanchard. There seems
to be great demand for this course, not only
among graduate students, but among faculty
members from various universities, and the large
number of applications received has enabled us to
hand-pick the students. The course in General
Physiology is again in the charge of Dr. I. R.
Taylor of Brown University, and is being given
on the same plan as last year, with lectures by
Symposium members and visitors as well as by
the staff, and with Drs. Abramson, Cole, Fricke,
and Moyer taking charge of special phases of the
work. In the second part of the summer the
course in Marine and Fresh Water Zoology will
be given by Drs. Spieth, Castle, and Van Cleave,
and the course in Plant Sociology will be in the
charge of Dr. Stanley Cain, as heretofore.

I realize that the foregoing is more of a “news
note” than a “report” such as THE COLLECTING
Net usually publishes in its first issue each year.
This, however, is scarcely the time to write about
the future; it is enough to quote from the Annual
Announcement: “The sudden death of Director
Harris on January 7, 1936, in the midst of his
rapidly expanding program for the Laboratory,
has left the Board of Directors of the Association
shocked but entirely resolved to carry on that
program.”

THE EMBRYOLOGY COURSE

Dr. CHARLES PACKARD
Assistant Professor of Zoology, Columbia
University Institute for Cancer Research

The essential feature of the Embryology
Course, which distinguishes it from the usual
courses offered in college, is the opportunity to
watch the development of various eggs from the
moment of fertilization until they become com-
plex organisms. The subject ceases to be a study
of separate stages: it becomes a study of con-
tinuous, vital processes. The forms used in the
laboratory illustrate the phenomena of the en-
trance of the sperm into the egg, maturation,
various types of cleavage, of gastrulation, and
the formation of the embryo and larva. Some
can be carried through to almost the adult con-
dition. The course is a valuable background for
the teaching and the experimental biologist.

The experimental phase of embryology is em-
phasized throughout, both in the laboratory and
the lectures. Each week some investigator, not
connected with the course, presents the results of
his work. The students are encouraged to under-
take problems. Those who make good progress
in their investigation have the opportunity of con-
tinuing after the formal ending of the course.

Jury 4, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET. 7

THE MT. DESERT ISLAND BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY
Dr. WiLLIAm H. Cote, Director

Professor of Physiology and Biochemistry, Rutgers University

In 1898, Dr. J. S. Kingsley of Tufts College
opened the Harpswell Laboratory at South
Harpswell, Maine, for biological study and in-
vestigation, Although the location and name of
the laboratory have changed since then, there has
been no interruption of biological investigation.
In 1921 the laboratory was moved to Salsbury
Cove, Maine, on Mt. Desert Island, and the name
was changed to the Mt. Desert Island Biological
Laboratory. It is incorporated, and has at pres-
ent a membership of fifty-six.

The present location of the laboratory allows
easy access to the unusually rich collection of ani-
mals and plants of the Gulf of Maine, which are
typical of the Acadian fauna extending from
Newfoundland to the northern shore of Cape
Cod. A tide averaging twelve feet, and many dif-
ferent types of bottoms, coves and bays provide
unusual collecting opportunities. Among the
animals easily obtainable, besides the com-
moner species found elsewhere, are: Cyanea,
Cerebratulatus lacteus, Echiurus, Terebratuli-
na, Pecten maximus, Acmaea, Echinarachnius
(sexually mature from June to October),
Crossaster, Holaster, Cynthia, Boltenia and many
other genera of hydrozoa, nemerteans, annelids,
molluscs and crustacea. The marine fishes, Myx-
ine, Petromyzon, dogfish, skates and numerous
others are also abundant.

The annual Bulletin is published in January,
and contains abstracts of research accomplished
during the previous summer. Copies are avail-
able upon request to the Director.

During the past two summers, an exploratory
study of the structure and physiological activities
of the hypophysis of marine animals has been un-
der way. Preliminary studies indicated that the
gland of the dogfish and skate affords particular-
ly favorable material for investigation of the dif-
ferent types of hypophyseal gland cells and their
secretions. Last summer six workers cooperated
in morphological, physiological, and pharmaco-
logical studies. It was shown that the gland is
composed of six lobes, each one easily separable
from the others. The intermediate lobe, which is
lacking in certain animals or is small and closely
associated with neighboring lobes in other ani-
mals, is the largest lobe of the gland in the car-
tilaginous fishes, and can be easily separated from
the other tissues. Cytological studies indicate

that each lobe is composed of glandular tissue
made up of cells characteristic for it. In other
words, there is a segregation of a special sort of
cell in each lobe, instead of an intermingling as
among the cells of the mammalian gland. ‘This
segregation of special cells in the lobes and their
tissue culture offers an unusual opportunity for
the isolation of the various active principles or
hormones, for the determination of the cells from
which they are derived and for the determination
of the effects produced by each hormone. Oper-
ations for the removal of part or of the whole
of the gland from living dogfish have been car-
ried out successfully, so that future experiments
on such operated animals seem assured.

A partial list of investigators and their subjects
of study for the current season is as follows:
Dr. and Mrs. Warren H. Lewis, Carnegie Insti-
tution, “Ti
and of cancerous tissues’; Dr. Earl O. Butcher,
Hamilton College, “The histology and cytology
of the dogfish hypophysis and the effects of its
secretion on the reproductive system”; Dr. Rob-
ert W. Clarke, New York University, “The de-
velopment of operative procedures and the inter-
relationships between the gland and the kidney” ;
Dr. J. T. Halsey, Tulane University, “Effects of
the gland’s secretions on the circulatory system” ;
Dr. William H. Cole, Rutgers University, “The
effect of the gland’s secretions on the pigmenta-
tion of the skin and on ciliary activities”; Dr. D.
E. Minnich, University of Minnesota, “The be-
havior of certain annelids and crustacea’; Dr.
George B. Roth, George Washington University,
“Pharmacological studies on the circulatory sys-
tem’; Dr. Ulric Dahlgren and assistants, Prince-
ton University, “Survey of the marine inverte-
brates of the Mt. Desert region”; Mr. Samuel S.
Miles, Princeton University, “Studies on the
hydroid, Primarius”; Mr. E. L. Young, III, Har-
vard University, “The wasting disease of eel-
grass”; Dr. Vera Koehring, Deaconess Hospital,
Boston, Mass., ““The heart beat of molluscs”; Dr.
A. A. Boyden, Rutgers University, “Phylogenet-
ic relationships as measured by the precipitin
estes

The laboratory is open each summer from
June 15th to Sept. 15th. All inquiries should be
addressed to the Director, Prof. William H. Cole
(from Sept. 15th to June 10th: Rutgers Univer-
sity, New Brunswick, N. J.).

8 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 92

THE ELECTRON TUBE RELAY

Dr. KENNETH C. FISHER

Demonstrator in Biology, University of Toronto

Many of tke control or signalling devices
which are most useful in the laboratory are “‘re-
lays” in which a comparatively large amount of
power is controlled by a relatively much smaller
amount. These are most satisfactorily operated
electrically and are therefore applicable whenever
the operation in question can be arranged to open
or close an electrical contact. In general it
is desired that such an appartus operate on
the least possible current and at the same
time control the greatest current likely to be
encountered. Of late years electron tubes of
many varieties have been developed which, when
combined with the necessary accessory equipment,
are peculiarly and in certain cases specifically
adapted to such service. Several of the possible
arrangements embodying these have been given
a more or less extended trial in the laboratory for
experimental biology at Toronto and as a result
one of them has particularly commended itself by
virtue of its general utility and its adaptability to
a rather wide range of applications, Though not
in any sense new, the possibilities of the appara-
tus do not appear to have been made sufficiently
clear to biologists and since it is likely that this
versatile device will become an increasingly im-
portant tool to those concerned with the experi-
mental phases of biology, a description is present-
ed herewith together with an outline of services
it now performs routinely in our laboratory.

The diagram below shows the electron tube re-
lay complete as we have set it up but without
switching arrangements, pilot lamps, and so on.
It can be assembled in “‘breadboard” style for
$10-$15 and can be mounted in a metal case and
the switching refinements added for another $5
exclusive of labor, $20 in all. So far as the
writer 1s aware, only one of the usual scientific
supply houses lists such an instrument, and its
cost is more than double this. The design char-
acteristics indicated here were for operation on
the three wire 220 volt D. C. system of the labo-
ratory. For use on any other power supply, such
as lower voltage D. C. or A. C., slight changes in
the circuit are necessary. These do not alter the
fundamental operation of the unit, and they would
not increase the cost by more than $5.

As the circuit indicates, the electron tube relay
is a combination of an ordinary electric relay and
an electron or vacuum tube. The relay found to
be quite suitable is the single pole contactor (con-
tacts normally open) type CR2810-1265G for
96 volts D. C. made by General Electric, while

Control
Contacts

Relay
Contacts

5 megohms

SOL 160 Watts SOS. /60 watts

the tube used is a common type made for radio

receivers, the '45 (two tubes are used in parallel —

to reduce resistance). On first setting up the
components R; and Re are adjusted to give the
largest possible plate current change on opening
and closing the control contacts at the same time
maintaining the filament current at its rated value.
The switching abilities of the combination de-
pend on the fact, that when the grid of the tube
is negative with respect to the cathode, electrons
do not pass from this electrode to the plate; there
is thus no current through the relay winding and
springs keep the contacts open. However, if
the grid is allowed to come to the same potential
or nearly the same potential as the cathode, then
electrons pass over to the plate, current flows
through the relay energizing it and conse-
quently the contacts are closed. The cur-
rent made and broken at the control contacts is
of the order of 10 microamperes, while the cur-
rent controlled by the relay specified may be 15
amperes, a current amplification for control pur-
poses of over one million times. As will be
described later, the instrument can be adjusted to
operate on much less current even than 10 micro-
amperes when conditions make this desirable.

For many relay requirements, time delay ele-
ments are necessary. This characteristic, with-
in limits, is very simply obtained in the elec-
tron tube relay by the inclusion of a condenser
(Cy) in the grid circuit. The various types of
control possible are obtained by changing certain
connections in the grid circuit. These are tabu-
lated here and will be referred to by number.

On making control contacts the relay: (1)
immediately opens for connections S; open, By
and Bs connected, Bs and By connected; (2) im-
mediately closes for c’s. S; open, By and By con-

Jury 4, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

9

nected, Bs and Bs connected; (3) opens after a
slight delay (approximately 0.1 second) for c’s.
Rs = 0.5 meg., Ci = 0.2 mfd., Si closed, B; and
B» connected, Bz and By connected; (4) closes
after a slight delay for c’s. Rs = 0.5 meg., Ci
= 0.2 mfd., S; closed, By and By connected, Bo
and Bs connected; (5) immediately opens for c’s.
Si open, Bs and By unconnected, By and By con-
nected.

On making but then immediately breaking the
control contacts the relay: (6) momentarily
opens for c’s as in (1) above; (7) momentarily
closes for c’s as in (2) above; (8) opens, but af-
ter approximately 10 seconds closes (time set by
Rawatic Gn) etOmcs. Si closed); — 2/0) mid;
B, and Bs connected, Bz and By connected; (9)
closes, but after approximately 10 seconds opens

for ¢s. S; closed, CG; = 2:0 mfd., Bi and Bx
connected, Bs and Bs connected. c's = connec-
tions.

The most common use of the vacuum tube re-
lay in the laboratory is in the control of thermo-
stats by means of the familiar types of thermo-
regulator which close a contact as the bath heats
up. This use calls for set-up number one. Be-
cause of the low current drawn and the high
resistance through which the control contacts may
be satisfactorily closed, the efficiency of thermo-
regulators is increased, and they require very little
attention. The function of the circuit may be al-
tered from on-off to off-on by shifting the con-
nections to number two, so that, for example, a

-_ refrigerating device may be turned on as the bath
becomes too warm. Where the control contacts
are unavoidably subject to mechanical vibration,
the relay chattering which would otherwise be
inevitable may be greatly reduced by linking with
number one or two a slight delay characteristic,
so that the relay operates only after the control
circuit has been made or broken for an appreci-
able period of time (schema three and four).

Since the control contacts may he closed
through as high a resistance as 500,000 ohms with
satisfactory operation, either connection six or
seven enables the instrument to be used as a drop
recorder, the drops being caused to fall between
two control contacts. For this purpose, each
drop is signalled somewhat more positively if in
addition S; is closed and C; made about 0.02 mi-
crotarads.

The contacts on the clocks used to provide time
signals in the laboratory are usually not capable
of handling much current, and, as a result, fre-
quently requiring cleaning. This is particularly
true when the time signals are wired to an entire
class. The inconvenience of burned contacts is
effectively eliminated if the clock first activates
an electron tube relay which in turn controls the
signalling circuit.

Certain experiments proceeding in our labo-
ratory required that an electrically driven kymo-
graph be run for ten seconds out of each minute.
‘his was accomplished automatically by means of
the clock and a tube relay with connection schema
nine. Each minute the clock momentarily closes
the control contacts. This closes the relay which
then starts the kymograph motor. Ten seconds
or so later the relay opens, and it stops.

This tube relay is proving of considerable
value both experimentally and clinically in con-
trolling slow perfusions; for if the perfusion fluid
be passed as drops between the control contacts,
then the perfusion rate may be estimated from
the drop frequency, or if schema eight be em-
ployed, so long as the drops come fast enough,
the relay will remain closed. When the drop
frequency becomes slower than once every ten
seconds approximately, the relay will close for a
period after each drop and, therefore, signals
that the perfusion rate has slowed. The exact
frequency at which this occurs (over the range
from about 3 or 4 per second to 1 per 10 seconds )
can be made variable by making Ry adjustable.
Changes of frequency of about 20% are sufficient
to start the relay signalling.

It should be pointed out that the instantaneous
current across the control contacts, when large
condensers are being used in the grid circuit, is,
of course, much greater than the 10 microamperes
mentioned earlier, though the average current is
not appreciably altered.

Special circumstances may require that the re-
lay unit be activated through resistances greater
than 500,000 ohms. This we had occasion to do
in devising a mechanism to supply 99.8% alcohol
to the alcohol test flame in a closed circuit calori-
meter. To maintain a constant head of pressure
at the alcohol supply, the control contacts of the
relay device were closed through a column of the
alcohol. Connection schema five permits opera-
tion through such an extremely high resistance.
The very low current which is sufficient in this
case entails excellent insulation of all wires in
the grid circuit; otherwise current leaks occur
which effectively close the control contacts render-
ing the outfit inoperative.

One possible objection to these relay units is
the tube life which on the average amounts to only
1000 hours, the equivalent of some 40 days of
continuous use. For long period operation, it
would be advisable to replace the type ’45’s with
some one of the tubes developed for commercial
purposes where the tube life may be ten times
this figure.

We would be glad to hear of the experiences
of any others who have used this type of instru-
ment and to communicate with any who might
like further details concerning the units we have
constructed.

10 | THE COLLECTING NED

[ Vor. XI, No. 92

The Collecting Net

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
at marine biological laboratories

Editorial: Ware Cattell, Elizabeth Thornton, Ur-
sula Reinhardt, Annaleida Snyder Cattell and
Francis McInnis.

Business: Arthur C. Stirling, Amy Gamble and
Boris Gorokhoff.

Entered as second-class matter July 11, 1935, at
the U. S. Post Office at Woods Hole, Massachusetts,
under the Act of March 3, 1879.

THE FUNCTION OF THE COLLECTING NET

Ture Cottectine Net is an independent jour-
nal devoted to marine biological laboratories ; no
institution or society controls its policies. Its edi-
torial content reflects the wishes of our subscrib-
ers in so far as we can ascertain them.

One of the most useful functions of the jour-
nal is to serve as a medium for the discussion of
problems on which there is a difference of opin-
ion. The very question, itself, is open to debate
for some individuals at Woods Hole strongly feel
that the journal should be devoted entirely to re-
porting the results of research work in the bio-
logical sciences.

We have always thought that THE COLLECTING
Net should treat of matters pertaining to the
biologist as a member of society as well as a
worker in biology. In general we have not en-
couraged discussion of the general organization
and policies of marine laboratories. For example,
a few years ago there was active discussion as to
whether the Marine Biological Laboratory should
continue to train students in biology or devote it-
self entirely to providing facilities for research
work; the journal printed nothing concerning this
matter.

Possible topics for discussion are:

Should marine biological laboratories concern
themselves officially with recreational facilities
for its workers? Should they assist financially m
providing opportunities for social intercourse, for
tennis and for bathing ?

Might it not be desirable for some of the larger
marine biological laboratories to include on their
board of trustees the directors of their sister in-
stitutions ?

Should THe CotvectinG NET encourage dis-
cussion of matters such as those given as ex-
amples above? [] yes no

Should Tur Cottectinc Net conduct an edi-
torial page analogous to those in certain other
scientific magazines such as the Journal of En-
gineering and Industrial Chemistry, the Journal
of the American Medical Association and Na-

ture? [o]) yes [] no

Name

Might it be feasible to arrange between marine
biological laboratories a kind of “exchange pro-
fessorship ;” that is an exchange of investigators
so that they would be provided with complimen-
tary research facilities ?

Should expensive apparatus be duplicated in
several laboratories, or should there be some co-
ordinating committee which would guide the de-
velopment of the several institutions so that as
a whole they would be as useful as possible in
promoting biological research ?

Should they formally adopt THE COLLECTING
Net as their official organ?

Might each laboratory appoint a committee
which would assist the journal in better serving
the interests of marine biological laboratories ?

Might each laboratory appoint a committee to
assist Tur Cottectinc Net Scholarship Fund
Association in raising money which would be ap-
portioned among the different laboratories in ac-
cordance with the number of investigators work-
ign at each?

We take the liberty of seeking the advice of the
readers of THE CottectinG Net. We shall ap-
preciate it if they will answer the questions on the
“coupon” at the bottom of the adjacent column.

SCHOLARSHIPS FOR 1937

Since its formation in 1926 THE COLLECTING
Net has awarded over $4,000 in the form of
scholarships to young investigators in the biologi-
cal sciences. In order to insure their permanency
an organization to be known as THE COLLECTING
Net Scholarship Fund Association is in the pro-
cess of formation. Certain prominent individuals
have consented to serve on its Board of Trustees ;
their names will be announced next week.

The annual membership fee will be $5.00;
other classes of membership will be provided for
individuals who care to make a larger contribu-
tion. Members will receive not less than four
bulletins a year reporting upon the condition of
the Fund and the work carried out with its as-
sistance. So that membership fees can be applied
in full to scholarships Tur Cottectine Net will
undertake to finance the entire cost of administra-
tion.

BATHING BEACHES

The Bay Shore bathing beach is in poor condi-
tion this year; people who have cars swim at the
Nobska Beach a mile away, but many must use
the rocky beach on the Bay Shore or forgo their
between-work-and-supper swim. Some believe
that it is within the province of the laboratories
at Woods Hole to take the initiative in improving
the situation. The Marine Biological Laboratory
contributes directly or indirectly to the support of
the M. B. L. social and tennis clubs, yet more
biologists “‘sun and swim’ than visit the club-
house or the tennis courts.

oe

JuLy 4, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 11

ITEMS OF INTEREST

PROFESSOR CONKLIN’S TRIP TO EUROPE

Dr. Edwin G. Conklin, emeritus professor of
biology at Princeton University and trustee of the
Marine Biological Laboratory, and Mrs. Conklin,
sailed for Plymouth, England, aboard the SS
Vollendam on June 24.

Dr. Conkin’s first attended the centenary cele-
bration of the University of London. In the
latter part of this month he will be a delegate to
the Second International Congress for Microbi-
ology at University College, London. From
August 10-15 he will be present at the Fourth In-
ternational Congress for Experimental Cytology
which will meet in Copenhagen. Edinburgh will
be Professor Conklin’s next stop where he will at-
tend the International Congress of Geophysics
and Oceanography. He will end his attendance
at conferences with the one hundred and fifth an-
nual meeting of the British Association for the
Advancement of Science which convenes during
the second week in September.

Dr. Conklin is chairman of a committee of the
American Philosophical Society which well super-
vise the spending of the income from the very
large Penrose bequest; therefore he will devote
much of his time abroad studying the methods of
the Royal Society in assigning grants-in-aid for
promoting scientific work.

From his fellow trustees and associates at
Woods Hole, Professor Conklin received the fol-
lowing telegram on the boat. “Advantages and
disadvantages go together. You will have the
former, we, without you, will have the latter. We
are going to miss you. Your genial presence and
wise counsel do much to make Woods Hole sum-
mers pleasant and profitable. We go with you in
spirit enjoying what you do knowing that in time
we shall get it anyway from you, and we shall be
all the more happy to get you back again. Our
best wishes go with you and may you get a big
return on your venture. All who are registered
at the M. B. L. would be glad to subscribe to this
wish which a few of us sign asrepresentatives of
all. Good luck to you and to Mrs. Conklin.”

Dr. Conklin wired this reply: “Please express
to all signers of the delightful message of friend-
ship and best wishes which we have just received
the gratitude and thanks of Mrs. Conklin and
myself.”

Dr. RAtpu S. Liter, professor of physiology
and zoology at the University of Chicago and
trustee of the Marine Biological Laboratory, re-
ceived the honorary degree of Doctor of Science
at the June convocation of the University of To-
ronto.

DR. REDFIELD’S EVENING LECTURE

On Friday, June 26, the first evening lecture of
the season was given by Dr. Alfred C. Redfield,
professor of biology at Harvard University and
physiologist at the Woods Hole Oceanographic
Institution. The speaker was introduced by Dr.
Frank R. Lillie, president of the Corporation of
the Marine Biological Laboratory and dean of
the division of biological sciences at the Univer-
sity of Chicago.

Dr. Redfield’s subject was the “Ecological Sig-
nificance of the Gulf of Maine” prepared from
observations in the Gulf of Maine area which
covered a period of two years. Dr. Redfield dis-
cussed his findings in some detail, but the conclu-
sions that he made are as follows: The animal
life in the sea follows a circular path around the
Gulf, coming in at the north and circulating
around in an anti-clockwise direction, and that
it seems to follow in the wake of a body of water
of a fairly constant temperature and salinity in-
troduced north of George’s Bank during the win-
ter. He indicated that the animal life in the Gulf
is related to this yearly flow of water. As an
aside, Dr. Redfield cited a few observations that
he made of birds in that region as indicators of
abundant animal plankton. The greatest number
of birds seems to follow fairly closely in a cycle
similar to the life in the water.

Charts and graphs which gave results of his
tabulations in the various sections of waters
showed the relationship of temperature, birds,
and animal life; they also showed that these con-
ditions followed the current through its circular
course.

Dr. Eric G. Batt will be in charge of the
Chemical Room while Dr. Oscar W. Richards is
at the Tortugas Laboratory studying the growth
and development of the ascidian Phallusia migra.
Dr. Richards who sails today will return to
Woods Hole on August 25.

Dr. WALTER E. Garrey, professor of physiol-
ogy, Vanderbilt Medical School, Nashville, Tenn.,
was rushed to the Baker Memorial Hospital in
Boston on June 2 with a severe attack of kidney
stones. Dr. Garrey recuperated rapidly and re-
turned to Woods Hole several days ago.

Dr. Fevix A. BerNstTEIN, formerly director of
the Institute of Mathematical Statistics and pro-
fessor at the University of Goettingen in Ger-
many, has been appointed professor of biometrics
at New York University. Dr. Bernstein is spend-
ing the summer at Woods Hole doing research
work with the assistance of his daughter, Mari-
anne, of Barnard College.

12 THE COLLECTING NED

[ Vor. XI, No. 92

THE WOODS HOLE MEETING OF THE
GENETICS SOCIETY OF AMERICA

This year’s meeting, scheduled for Friday and
Saturday, September 4 and 5, is timed to come
just before the biological program of the Har-
vard Tercentenary Conference so as to make it
possible for members to attend both.

The program will consist of two round table
conferences and one session of demonstration
papers. In addition, a regular Marine Biological
Laboratory lecture will be given Thursday eve-
ning. Brief formal papers will not be presented.
The round table conferences will consist of gen-
eral discussions dealing with problems of broad
interest. Each conference will be in charge of a
leader, and the subject will be introduced by the
short presentations of two introducers. One
demonstration session will be available for infor-
mal presentation and discussion of current prob-
lems. Whenever feasible, charts, specimens, and
other exhibit material will be used in connec-
tion with demonstration papers. A limited num-
ber of microscopes have been made available for
demonstration purposes.

The Marine Biological Laboratory is offering
the Society its facilities for meeting purposes.
Rooms are available in private houses for approx-
imately $1.00 to $1.50 per day per person or at
special rates per week. There should be plenty
of rooms early in September. Past experience
indicates that it is not always successful to make
a room reservation ahead of time. Signs on the
doors of the houses advertise available places, and
members may select their own rooms upon arri-
val.

Abstracts of demonstration papers (up to 250
words) should be in the hands of the Secretary
not later than August 15. These abstracts will
be available in mimeographed form at the time of
the meeting and they will be published in the
Records in December. The full program will be
published in an early issue of THE COLLECTING

NET. —M. D.
The Atlantis, research vessel of the Woods
Hole Oceanographic Institution, returned to

Woods Hole last Monday after a three weeks’
trip. The object of the trip was a hydrographic
survey of the slope water between the north edge
of the Gulf Stream and the continental shelf.
The tests were conducted in the waters between
the east side of Georges Banks and the tail of the
Grand Banks. This was the third of a series of
four cruises which will cover one year’s observa-
tions. Columbus Iselin, physical oceanographer,
was in charge of the scientific work of the trip.

FROM THE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY
AT COLD SPRING HARBOR

Dr. E. W. BLANCHARD is here to assist Dr.
Corner in the course in surgical methods in ex-
perimental biology. Mrs. Blanchard will join
him later in the summer for a week or two.

Dr. Davin R. CLiMENKo has been doing re-
search here for the Calco Chemical Company dur-
ing the winter and will continue during the sum-
mer.

Dr. KENNETH S,. CoLe and Mrs. Coe will be
here all summer. Dr. Howard J. Curtis, Dr.
Cole’s research associate, and Mrs. Curtis also
plan to spend the summer here. Drs. Cole and
Curtis will teach in the course in general physiol-
ogy as well as continue their research.

Dr. Grorce W. Corner will be in residence
until the end of July, to direct the class in Sur-
gical Methods. Miss Hester Ann Corner will be
here for the same time, and Mrs. Corner will visit
for a part of July.

Dr. Huco Fricke will spend his three months
leave of absence in Europe.

Dr. LAuRENCE Moyer has been appointed an
assistant in the course in general physiology. He
will also carry out some investigations with Dr.
Abramson.

Dr. Eric PoNber lectured June 23 on “The
Act of Blinking.” Mr. Julius Abels, the holder
of the John D. Jones Scholarship this summer, is
assisting Dr. Ponder during the summer; and Mr.
John MacLeod will continue to assist Dr. Ponder
and to teach in the general physiology course.

Dr. I. R. Taytor is again in charge of the
course in general physiology. Mrs. Taylor and
their children will not be here this year.

Dr. Joun Z. Younc of Oxford University,
and Mrs. Younc, have been at the Laboratory
since the middle of June. Dr. Young is doing
research on giant nerve fibres, and is taking part
in the conference-symposia.

Dr. Homer Smitu has been appointed chem-
ist in the Biophysics laboratory in the place of
Dr. Edwin J. Hart, who is now with the U. S.
Rubber Company. Mr. Thomas T. Goldsmith,
Jr. is physicist, in place of Dr. Howard J. Cur-
tis who is now research associate with Dr. K. S.
Cole.

The program of evening lectures scheduled for
the first part of the summer follows:

Tuesday, June 30th—Dr. George W. Corner:
The History of the Discovery of the Lympha-
tic System.

Tuesday, July 7th—Dr. E. H. Anthes: The His-
tory and Development of the Microscope.

Tuesday, July 14th—Dr. R. W. Gerard: Brain
Waves.
Tuesday, July 21lst—Dr. A. F. Blakeslee: Dif-

ferences Between People in Thresholds for
Taste and Smell.

Jury 4, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 13

THE EFFECT OF METHYLENE BLUE ON THE SPECTROPHOTOMETRIC PICTURE
OF HEMOGLOBIN, CO-HEMOGLOBIN AND CN-HEMOGLOBIN

Dr. MatitpA Mo_LpENHAUER BrRooKS
Research Associate, University of California

The purpose of these experiments was to find
out the effect of methylene blue on the spectro-
photometric picture of hemoglobin (hb) and of
CO-hb and CN-hb of rabbits. The blood was
taken by heart puncture, diluted to 1% with .4%
NH,sOH and then analyzed immediately in the
spectrophotometer. The extinction coefficients at
wave lengths 540/560 mu=R were determined.
‘Yhese values indicate the per cent. of oxy-hb
present.

There were three main results in the visible
spectrum; the absorption maximum of the CN-
hb curve and the curve for blood containing
methylene blue were found to be identical with
that for oxy-hb; the time curve for blood con-
taining CO and methylene blue showed 100%
oxy-hb in a short time. When these results were
compared with u. v. spectra, no differences in the

absorption of hb or CN-hb were found. How-
ever, in the infra red spectrum there was a great-
er absorption in blood containing KCN. Eggert
found differences in the absorption spectrum of
the infra red region between blood containing CO
and oxy-hb. He also found that blood containing
methylene blue after being subjected to CO, gave
the absorption for oxy-hb, thus corroborating the
writer’s findings.

The conclusions are as follows; the evidence
for the change of CO-hb to oxy-hb by the action
of methylene blue without invoking the methe-
moglobin formation theory seems unequivocal.
This may be caused by a catalytic action on the
part of methylene blue or a poising effect on the
oxidation-reduction potential of the system mak-
ing it compatible with the re-formation of oxy-hb.

THE PHOSPHATASE CONTENT OF THE DEVELOPING CHICK EMBRYO

Harry J. LipMANn
Instructor in Embryology and Physiology, University of Pittsburg

Phosphatases have been discovered in a great
variety of plant and animal tissues. The sub-
strates upon which these enzymes act are phos-
phoric esters which are hydrolyzed by the action
of the enzyme.

An excellent review of the literature on the
Phosphatases is found in the recent volume of
“the Ergebnisse der Enzymforschung” by Folley
and Kay. In the introductory chapter the au-
thors state that the accumulation of evidence
points to the key position held by the substrates,
phosphoric esters, in many of the processes tak-
ing place in living organisms. Alcoholic fermen-
tation, muscular contraction, bone formation and
lactation are all associated with the action of the
phosphatases. The authors speak of the radical
importance of these enzymes.

According to the classification attempted by
these authors we distinguish five classes of phos-
phatases and a number of unclassified phospha-
tases. Class A includes the phosphomonoester-
ases which can be divided into at least four sub-
classes. The work reported here confines itself
to Subclass I of Class A.

This enzyme occurs in kidney, bone, intestine,
mammary gland, lung, blood plasma, leucocytes,
etc. Its optimum pH lies between 9-10. As a
substrate for this phosphatase beta glycerophos-
phate is used.

Although our interest in the enzyme was con-
cerned primarily with its role in ossification, the

present work did not give any direct answer to
this question, because the phosphatase activity
was determined for the embryo of the developing
chick as a whole. However, a rapid increase of
phosphatase activity coincides with a high ossifi-
cation activity in the embryo.

For the determination of phosphatase activity
the Brigg’s modification of the Bell-Doisy colori-
metric method for the determination of phos-
phorus was used. In the technique the amount
of inorganic phosphate formed by the enzyme ac-
tivity is measured and calculated in total milli-
grams (absolute values) and in milligrams per
gram of wet bady weight (relative values). The
phosphatase content of the white, of the yolk and
of the embryo was determined in eggs from white
leghorn hens. The determinations were made in
intervals of three days during the process of in-
cubation.

The absolute values and the relative values for
the whole egg have two maxima, one at six days
and the other at fifteen days of incubation. The
high activity of bone formation falls between the
twelfth and the fifteenth day. The relative and
the absolute values run parallel.

The relative phosphatase values for white, yolk
and embryo show the same two maxima. The
absolute values for white and yolk follow the
same type of curve. However, the absolute data
for the embryo give a fairly good S-type curve.
As has been said before, the steepest part of the

14 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. XI, No. 92

curve coincides with the period of high ossifica-
tion activity. \When the absolute and relative
values for the embryo are plotted together on the
same graph, the drop of the relative values after
the fifteenth day stands out conspicuously against
the continuous S-type rise of the absolute values.
This drop can be interpreted by the fact that
from this day on the growth of the embryo pro-
ceeds at a very rapid rate with which the increase
in phosphatase activity does not hold pace.

It was found that the material used had a high
coefficient of variation. This was also true for
the experimental data. These facts make the
results less significant than was expected.

(This article is based on a seminar report given
at the Marine Biological Laboratory on June 30).

THE PHYSIOLOGY COURSE

Dr. LAURENCE [RVING
Director of the Course and Professor of
Experimental Biology, University of Toronto

The course in physiology has begun work with
the same staff as that of last year. The plan ot
work is also similar to that of previous years.
Each instructor offers laboratory work in the
subjects of his own special interest, according to
the following titles:

Drs. Chambers and Sichel—micromanipulation ;

Dr. Ferguson—tissue respiration, the enzyme
carbonic anhydrase, and carbamino compounds ;

Dr. Fisher—the relation of oxygen and oxidation
to the heart beat;

Dr. Hober—permeability and secretion in the
perfused tissues of frogs;

Dr. Irving—examination of the acid-base equilib-
rium in tissues and in sea water;

Dr. Michaelis—potentiometric determination of
oxidation—reduction potentials ;

Dr. Prosser—characteristics of excitation, central
nervous systems and rhythmic action.

Each subject of the laboratory work covers
technical methods, but it also presents the relation
of the methods to the particular biological ma-
terial and the physiological significance of the re-
sults which can be obtained.

In addition to the regular laboratory work
special demonstrations are to be given each
Wednesday, along with conferences and discus-
sions.

The first lectures are given by the staff of the
course, followed later by other lectures in various
physiological subjects which are related to the
course. Any member of the local scientific com-
munity is welcome to attend these lectures and
to enter the discussion.

After the formal part of the course is com-
pleted, there remains about a week for special
work upon methods or problems arising out of
the earlier laboratory work. This extra period

may be useful in extending or perfecting some
methodical procedure, or it may lead to the better
formulation of a plan of research.

THE PHYSIOLOGY CLASS NOTES

The physiology class accepts with vigor the
challenge of the embryology class to a soft ball
game. They are trying, literally, to have the
faculty on their side.

With equal vigor plans are being made for a
picnic under the chairmanship of Dr. Marie An-
dersch. The rest of the committee consists of
Miss Judith D. Smith, Mr. Daniel E. Lilly, and
Mrs. Alburta B. Wood. Most of the scientists
have indicated that they will take the prosaic
chicken or lobster which was suggested. Several
epicurians have indicated that they prefer the
delicate flavor of fundulus or limulus. —E. T.

THE EMBRYOLOGY CLASS NOTES

Almost from the start the embryology class
decided that every man (and woman) must have
his play; therefore they set about organizing it,
as all good scientists should. Charles Klamer was
unanimously appointed chairman.

Perhaps the most important point in their pro-
gram is their daily swim. So many people at
the Mess complain that it was a lovely day for a
swim, but they just did not have the time. Not
so with the embryology class. Most of the class
departs at three for a dip in the briny deep, mak-
ing the work up in the dark hours of the night.
Perhaps that accounts for the healthy complex-
ions of the class as a whole.

Early this week, a notice to this effect appeared
on the Physiology Bulletin Board, addressed to
the Physiology Class; “We, the members of the
1936 Embryology Class of the Marine Biological
Laboratory of Woods Hole, Massachusetts, do
hereby challenge the members of the 1936 Physio-
logy Class of said institution to a game of Soft
Ball to be played at 7:15 P. M. on July 8, 1936, at
a place later to be designated. Acceptance of this
challenge will be expected in the next 48 hours
or we shall consider physiologists of 1936 as com-
pletely lacking in any physical prowess!”

With this practically irresistible challenge un-
der their belts, the class is relaxing from all its
cares today at a beach party at Tarpaulin Cove.
Baseball, swimming, picnic supper, and songs
part of the program. Professors Grave, Packard,
and Schotté have been invited to join the party.
The Winifred was chartered for the occasion.

Pictures and notices announce the progress of
social life to the world at large. The committees:
Don Bauer—collecting money, Katherine Hum-
mel—recreation (baseball and bat), Betsy Con-
ant—bulletin board; Helen Froelich—food.

—E. T.

Jury 4, 1936 ] THE COLLECTING NET 15

%

® JENA FRITTED GLASS FILTERS

e JENA GAS DISTRIBUTION TUBES, type 33cG, with a

permanently fused-in fritted glass filter disc for the distribution

of gases in liquids deliver a continuous stream of uniform size

bubbles through the liquid. The size of bubble varies with differ-

ent liquids and porosities of the filter.

e JENA BACTERIA PROOF FILTERS: The latest develop-

ment in filters. Consists of a disc of No. 5 porosity over a disc

of No. 3 porosity—designated as No. G5/3. The upper disc has an

average pore diameter of 1.5 microns which seems to be dense

enough to retain ordinary bacteria. Further details on request.

e JENA BUECHNER SLIT-SIEVE FUNNELS: These fun-

nels have a fused-in glass disc, having elongated slit holes. The Aeration Tube
shape of the slits over the large surface permits fast filtration. The disc has a plane

surface, an exact inside diameter and is uniform in size, preventing the filter paper from tearing
during filtration.

6 JENA K P G PRECISION BORE TUBING

| Bore exact within 0.001mm. Available in bores ranging from 0.5 to 50mm., in lengths up
| to 40”, This tubing can be supplied with various bores—round, square, oval, conical, etc. Supplied
in different grades of Jena glass for special purposes, such as for barometers, manometers, flow
meters, viscosimeters, pumps and other special apparatus. Bulletin No. 4548 E on request.

® JENA COLORED OPTICAL FILTER GLASSES
Uniform Stable Selective Transmission in all Regions of the Spectrum:—
Ultraviolet — Visible _— Infra-Red
For: Technology — Photography — Spectroscopy

Catalogue No. 4892 E and further information on request.

& Royal Berlin Ultra-Filtration Balloons, Crucibles, Etc.
(BECHHOLD-KOENIG)

Made of a new especially porous Royal Berlin Porcelain Mass. The inner sur-
faces are unglazed throughout while the outside is glazed three quarters of the
way down to the filtering surface.

The construction and type of porcelain provide great mechanical strength and
resistance to acid.

Filter Funnel

Catalogue RB 250 on request.

@ HOEPPLER VISCOSIMETER

For Determining the Absolute Viscosity of Gases, Fluids, Oils,
Viscous Tars or Greases
Based on the Falling Ball Principle. Direct reading in centipoises.
Small sample required. Constant and reproducible results. Range 0.01 to
1,000,000 centipoises—Accuracy 0.1 to 0.5%. Bulletin HV 251 on request.

e ULTRA-THERMOSTAT after HOEPPLER

Maintains temperatures of circulating bath constant within 0.02°C
and, in instruments controlled by a circulating bath, within even closer
limits. Delivers 5 liters of temperature controlled liquid per minute. The

Filter Balloon

= regulator is quickly and easily adjusted to the desired temperature with
a E Z the use of a magnet. Range — 35 to + 300°C
en For: Bacteriology Serology Viscosimetry Refractometry

Bulletin HT 254 on request.

Precision Model B

@ PRECISION STOPWATCH after HOEPPLER

Developed to give the extremely precise timing of dropping intervals. Readings with an
accuracy of plus minus 0.01 second. Scale readings up to 300 seconds, face 2” diameter, divided
into 10 seconds, subdivided into 1/10 second. :

Bulletin HS 255 on request.

AVAILABLE AT LEADING LABORATORY SUPPLY DEALERS
U. S. Distributors

@ §=€6FISH-SCHURMAN CORPORATION

230 EAST 45th STREET NEW YORK CITY |
— ee

16 ice THE COLLECTING NET _ __[Vot. XI, No. 92

ee

DISSECTING SETS

©

This is set No. A-195,
one of the ten dissecting
sets illustrated in our
catalog No. 38, from the
simplest to the most com-
plete. Also largest variety

of dissecting instruments,

as well as laboratory ma-

terials such as

Micro Slides and Cover Glasses

Slide Boxes---Magnifters--Centrifuges

Insect Pins---Riker Mounts

Museum Jars---Petri Dishes--Rubber Tubing
Hemacytometers and Hemometers

We have separate catalogs, gladly sent on request, of Charts, Models, Specimens and

Preparations in the following fields: Human and Comparative Anatomy, Physiology,

eee cam «ee 0 ce ee 0 ee 0 | | ee ee es ee ee ee ee ee

Neurology, Zoology, Botany, Embryology, Entomology, Ecology, etc.

CLAY=ADAMS COMPANY. INC.

25 EAST 26th STREET NEW YORK

Jury 4, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET y/

DIRECTORY FOR 1936

KEY

Laboratories
Botany Building ........ Bot
Brick Building...
Lecture Hall

Main Room in Fisheries
Laboratory ..............-- M

Old Main Building....OM

Rockefeller Bldg.....Rock

In the case of those individuals not living on
laboratory property, the name of the landlord and
the street are given. In the case of individuals
living outside of Woods Hole, the place of residence
{s given in parentheses.

MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY

Residence

Apartment ....
Dormitory ..
Drew House
Fisheries Residence......F
Homestead ....
Hubbard .

THE STAFF
Jacobs, M. H. director. prof. gen. phys. Pennsyl-
vania.
EMBRYOLOGY
Investigation
Instruction

Barth, L. G. asst. prof. zool. Columbia.

Goodrich, H. B. prof. biol. Wesleyan. (absent 1936)

Grave, B. H. prof. biol. De Pauw. y

Hoadley, L. prof. zool. Harvard.

Packard, C. asst. prof. zool. Inst. of Cancer Re-
search, Columbia.

Schotté, O. asst. prof. biol. Amherst.

PROTOZOOLOGY
Investigation

Instruction
Calkins, G. N. prof. proto. Columbia.
Drumtra, Elizabeth instr. zool. Wilson.
Kidder, G. W. instr. zool. City of New York.

PHYSIOLOGY

Investigation
Amberson, W. R. prof. phys. Tennessee.
Bradley, H. C. prof. phys. chem. Wisconsin.
Garrey, W. E. prof. phys. Vanderbilt Med.
Lillie, R. S. prof. gen. phys. Chicago.
Mathews, A. P. prof. biochem. Cincinnati.

Instruction
Chambers, R. prof. biol. New York.
Ferguson, J. K. W. asst. prof. phys. Western On-
tario.
Fisher, K. C. demon. biol. Toronto.
Hober, R. visit. prof. phys. Pennsylvania.
Irving, L. prof. expt. biol. Toronto.
Michaelis, L. mem. Rockefeller Inst.
Prosser, C. L. instr. biol. Clark.
Sichel, F. J. M. instr. zool. Pennsylvania.

BOTANY

Investigation
Allen, C. E. prof. bot. Wisconsin.
Brooks, S. C. prof. zool. California.
Duggar, B. M. prof. phys. & econ. bot. Wisconsin.

Lewis, I. F. prof. biol. Virginia.
Robbins, W. J. prof. bot. Missouri.

Instruction
Drouet, F. res. fel. Missouri.
Prescott, G. W. asst. prof. biol. Albion.
Taylor, W. R. prof. bot. Michigan.

INVESTIGATORS

Abramowitz, A. A. res. asst. zool. Harvard. Br 213.
Ka 24.

Albaum, H. G. grad. zool. Columbia. Br 314. Ka 22,

Algire, G. H. grad. Maryland Med. Rock 3. Hamb-
lin, Government.

Allee, W. C. prof. zcol. Chicago. Br 332. A 101.

Amberson, W. R. prof. phys. Tennessee. Br 109.
Gansett.

Angerer, C. A. instr.
Stevenson, School.

Appel, Elizabeth McK. grad. bact. School of Hy-
giene, Hopkins. Bot 1. Daniels, Millfield.

Appel, F. W. assoc. prof. biol. St. John’s (Annapo-
lis). Bot 1. Daniels, Millfield.

Armstrong, P. B. asst. prof. anat. Cornell Med. Br
318.

Ashton, Miriam instr. biol. British Columbia (Cana-
da). Bot upstairs. WA.

Ball, E. G. assoc. phys. chem. Hopkins Med. Br 110.

zool. Pennsylvania. Br 111.

D 315 B.

Ballard, W. W. asst. prof. biol. Dartmouth, Br 217
h. D 112 B.

Barth, L. G. asst. prof. zool. Columbia. Br 210. D
101.

Bernstein, F. visit. prof. math. Columbia. Br 122 b.
Cassidy, Millfield.
Bernstein, Marianne E. Barnard. Br 122 b. Cassidy,

Millfield.

Brinley, F. J. asst. prof. zool. North Dakota. OM 38.
D 302.

Brooks, Matilda M. res. assoc. biol. California. Br
343. D.

Brooks, S. C. prof. zool. California. Br 343. D.

Brown, D. asst. prof. phys. New York Univ. Med.
Br 214. Hyatt.

Buchheit, J. R. Br 319. Howe, School.

Budington, R. A. prof. zool. Oberlin. Br 218. Or-
chard,

Cable, R. M. asst. prof. parasit. Purdue. Br 126. D

110

Calkins, G. N. prof. proto. Columbia. Br 331. Buz-
zards Bay.

Cannan, R. K. prof. chem. New York Univ. Med. Br
309. Gardiner.

Carmichael, J. C. Vanderbilt Med. Br 233. Dr 2.

Chambers, R. prof. biol. New York. Br 328. Fal-
mouth,

Cheney, R. H. prof. biol. Long Island. Br 118. A 302.

Child, G. P. res. asst. gen. Amherst. Br 204. Plough,
Agassiz. ~

Churney, L. instr. zool. Pennsylvania. Br 220. Cow-
ey, School.

Clement, A. C. asst. prof. biol. Charleston. Br 217 g.
Rogers, Quisset.

Clowes, G. H. A. dir. Lilly Res. Labs. Br 328 b. Nob-
ska.

Coe, W. R. prof. biol. Yale. Br 323. A 202.

Coker, R. E. prof. zcol. N. Carolina. Bot 6. Jennings,
Whitman.

Compton, A. D, Jr. asst. biol. Yale. Br 323. Bar
Neck.

18 DEE VCOLEECRING

NET [ Vor. XI, No. 92

Copeland, D. E. asst. biol. Amherst. Br 204. K G.
Copeland, M. prof. biol. Bowdoin. Br 334. Gardiner.
Corey, H. Irene res. asst. cyt. Pennsylvania. Br 219.

D 308.
Corson, S. A. res. assoc. phys. New York. Br 330.
Young, West.

Cowdry, E. V. prof. cyto. Washington (St. Louis).
Br 305. Millfield.

Crowell, S. instr. biol. Brooklyn. L 25. Bar Neck.

Denny, Martha asst. zool. Barnard. Br 217 f. Grin-
nell, Bar Neck.

Dildine, G. C. instr. zool. Northwestern. Br 315. Hil-
ton, Water.

Donaldson, H. H. mem. Wistar Inst. Br 115. Buz-
zards Bay.

Donnellon, J. A. grad. zool. Pennsylvania. OM Base.
Mendel, High.

Dornfield, E. J. asst. zool. Wisconsin. OM 34. D 111.

Dowding, Grace L. lab, asst. Maryland Med. Rock
6. D 212.

Dreyer, W. A. instr. zool. Cincinnati. Br 334. D 214.

Drouet, F. res. fel. bot. Missouri. Bot 23. Young,
West.

Drumtra, Elizabeth instr. biol. Wilson (Penn.). OM
22. A 307.

Embden, Maja res. asst. Johann Wolfgang Goethe
(Germany). Br 107. D 310.

Emerson, H. S. res. asst. exper. emb. Amherst. Br
204. Dr 6.

Ets, H. N. assoc. prof. pharm. Loyola Med. (Chica-
go). L 22. A 203.

Evans, Gertrude res. asst. zool. Chicago. Br 332. K
3

Fennell, R. A. grad. biol. Hopkins. Br 329. Dr 210.

Ferguson, J. K. W. asst. prof. phys. Western On-
tario. Br 108. Savery, Falmouth.

Figge, F. H. J, assoc. prof. anat. Maryland Med.

Rock, D 210.

Fisher, K, C. demon. exp. biol. Toronto. OM 9 & 7.
Ka 1.

Flynn, C. M. instr. zool. Maine. OM 41. Griffin,
High.

Forman, R. C. Amherst Med. Br 204. Dr attic.

Frankenstein, N. A. Marquette. OM 34. D 111.

Garrey, W. E. prof. phys. Vanderbilt Med. Br 215.
Gardiner.

Gerard, R. W. assoc. prof. phys. Chicago. Br 339. D
205.

Glassman, H. N. res. asst. phys. Pennsylvania. Br
205. Ka 22.

Godrich, J. res. asst. Columbia. Br 210. McLeish,
Millfield.

Goffin, Catherine E. res. asst. cyt. Lilly Res. Labs.
OM Base. F,

Goldin, A. asst. biol. Brooklyn. OM 39. Ka 23.

Grave, B. H. prof. zool. De Pauw. Br 234. K 10.

Greey, Elizabeth L. res. asst. exp. biol. Toronto. Br
107. D 310.

Grubden, Maria E. Frankfurt Med. (Germany). Br
107, D 310.

Gurwen, Alice O. asst. prof. anat. Woman's Med.
Penna. Bot, K 3.

Halbreich, M. A. grad. phys. Pennsylvania. Br 122.
K 12.

Hartline, H. K. lect. biophysics Pennsylvania, Br
339. Lucké, Minot.

Harvey, Ethel B. invest.
Gosnold.

Heilbrunn, L. V. assoc. prof. phys. Pennsylvania, Br
221. Edwards, School.

Hershkowitz, S. G. New
Leish, Millfield.

Hess, W. N. prof. zool. Hamilton. Br 122d. A 301.

Hill, E. S. res. asst. biochem. Washington Med. (St.
Louis). Br 207. D 317,

biol. Princeton. Br 116.

York Med. OM 25. Mc-

Hill, S. E. res. asst. phys. Rockefeller Inst. Br 209.
Veeder, West.

Hoadley, L. prof. zool. Harvard. Br 115. D 308.

Hober, Josephine invest. phys. Pennsylvania. Br 313.
D 301.

Hober, R. visit. prof. phys. Pennsylvania. Br 313.
D 301.

Hobson, L. B. grad. asst. zool. Cincinnati. L 26. Ka
af

Hopkins, D. L. asst. prof. zool. Duke. OM 5. Metz,
Hyatt.

Holtfreter, J. privatdozent. emb. Miinchen. Br 312.
Lewis, Buzzards, Bay.

Hornor, Helen B. teach. asst. biol. Barnard. Br 314.
W E.

Horstadius, S. assoc. prof. zool. Stockholm, Br 125.
Wilde, Gardiner.

Horton, R. G. grad. phys. Cornell. OM 3. Clough,
Millfield.

Hunninen, A. V. asst. parasit. Sch. Hygiene, Hop-
kins. Br 217. K 7.

Hunter, F. R. teach. asst. phys. Princeton. Br 231.
Ka 24.

Hunter, Laura N. grad. zool. Pennsylvania. Br 217d.
WA.

Irving, L. prof. exp. biol. Toronto. Br 107. D 303.

Jacobs, M. H. prof. gen. phys. Pennsylvania. Br 102.
(Sippewissett).

Jenkins, Betty grad. asst. zool. George Washington.
OM 46. Gosnold.

Jenkins, G. B. prof. anat. George Washington Med.
OM 46. Gosnold.

Johlin, J. M. assoc. prof. biochem. Vanderbilt Med.
Br 233. Park.

Kaliss, N. grad. asst. zool. Columbia. Br 314. Vin-
cent, East.

Kaylor, C. T. fel. emb. Princeton. Br 127, Kreke,
Buzzards Bay.

Keil, Elsa M. asst. prof. phys. Rutgers. OM base.
WE

Keltch, Anna K, res. chem. Lilly Res. Labs. Br 319.
Howe, School.

Kidder, G. W. instr. biol. City of N. Y. OM 21. Park.

Knower, H. McK. res. assoc. biol. Yale. Br 323. Pe-
terson, Millfield.

’ Knowlton, F. P. prof. phys. Syracuse Med. Br 226.

Gardiner.

Kopac, M. J. res. assoc. biol. New York. Br 328. A
106.

Korr, I. M. fel. phys. Princeton. Br 231. Young,
West.

Krahl, M. E. res. biochem. Lilly Res, Labs. Br 333.
Howe, Main.

Lancefield, D. E. assoc. prof. zool. Columbia. Br 335.
Sturtevant, Agassiz.

Lancefield, Rebecca C. assoc. bact. Rockefeller Inst.
Br 208. Sturtevant, Agassiz.

Lederman, E. undergrad. asst. zool. Miami. Br. 341.
K 15.

Levin, L. DePauw. Br 234. Dr 2.

Levine, D. S. instr. biol. Theodore Roosevelt High
(N. Y. C.). Bot 1. Fletcher, Bar Neck.

Lillie, F. R. prof. zool. Chicago. Br 101. Gardiner.

Lillie, R. S. prof. phys. Chicago. Br 326. Gardiner.

Lindeman, V. F. asst. prof. zool. Syracuse. Br 226.
Crowell, School.

Lipman, H. J. instr. emb. Pittsburg. Rock 7. Ka 21.

Loomis, W. E. assoc. prof. plant phys. Iowa State.
Br 223. Dodge, Shore,

Lucas, A. M. assoc. prof. zool. Iowa State. Br 223.
K 8.

Lucas, Miriam 8S. Br 223. K 8.

Lucké, B. prof. path. Pennsylvania Med. Br 311,
Minot.

(Continued on Page 23)

[UE Sn ES Aa

THE COLLECTING NET ey 19

TO RESEARCH
ACCOMPLISHMENT

The 250,000th microscope manufactured by B &
L, a DDE, was awarded to Dr. Frederic George
Novy for his contributions to science at the
—— AAAS meeting at Rochester, N. Y.

Microscope DDE incorporates the latest developments in research microscope
design and is fully equipped to perform any type of research microscopy. Yet
this sweeping statement does not do justice for it omits the many features
contributing to your convenience and comfort.

Starting with the inclined binocular body tube, most comfortable for ex-
tended observations, you find such conveniences as front arm location which
gives free access to object, stage, objectives, substage and mirror. Counter-
balanced rack and pinion, and extra long fine adjustment operating heads are
added conveniences. Stage operation is extremely handy. Substage with
patented supplementary condenser on swing arm is another time saver.

These and many other conveniences make Microscope DDE the ideal time
and labor saving companion for your research hours. Write for catalog
D-164. Bausch & Lomb Optical Co., 671 St. Paul St., Rochester, N. Y.

WE MAKE OUR OWN GLASS TO d
INSURE STANDARDIZED PRODUCTION

FOR YOUR GLASSES, INSIST ON Bal
ORTHOGON LENSES AND B & L FRAMES

(eee cece amram em een eee emiemoan sis

For the

BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

MODELS
SKELETONS
CHEMICALS

LANTERN
DISPLAY
PRESERVED

SLIDES
MATERIAL
MATERIAL

NATURALISTS’

SUPPLIES

STAINS

AND

REAGENTS

MUSEUM

PREPARATIONS

LABORATORY
BIRD SKINS AN
DISSECTING

INSTRUMEN'

GLASSWARE
D MOUNTS

SUPPLIES

BACTERIOLOGICAL

MICROSCOPE

SLIDE

PREPARATIONS

CHARTS,

BOTANICAL

AND

ZOOLOGICAL

the biological sciences.

THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. XI, No. 92
APPARATUS AFFORD PRECISE CONTROL
Van Slyke Constant Volume, for de- GASES AND LIQUIDS
USES the Bekiss be Blood and Whether your problem involves
similar liquids. high pressures or high vacuum,
corrosive or non-corrosive ma-
Micro Gas Analysis Apparatus, for terials, there is a Hoke valve
ia ernie ll tities of gas for your particular need. They
testing very small quantities of gas, are used extensively wherever
using dry reagents, high standards of accuracy, re-
liability, and safety are essen-
— Also many other types — tial. Numerous types are avail-
" a < | able, constructed of a wide
choice of materials including
Pi ees ST ONAN forged brass, stainless _ steel,
Write, advising your requirements. Monel. and’ Eearaien
| High vacuum valve, illustrated above, is designed
especially for service as a controlled and repro-
& ducible leak. It may be used at pressures as low
* ea as 10-6 mm. of Hg. Both inlet and outlet sides
Est. 1851 Inc. 1897 of the valve are leak proof against atmosphere.
ABORATORY ae 5 . bad
Be eae EMERGENCE L Hema TS Write for Bulletin HU describing these and other
Hoke controls for compressed gases.
Third Ave., 18th to 19th St.
ps a aa HOKE INCORPORATED
F 2 > 122 Fifth Avenue, New York City
\
= = = nd es =

he PURINA
UNIFORM RATIONS

—Are Constant in Analysis
and Formula

Pea LABORATORY CHOWS

(being changed only for im-
provements). Thus they pro-
mote uniform results.

Fon

INSECT LIFE HISTORIES and COLLECTIONS ) Me N
MICROSCOPES, MICROTOMES and ACCESSORIES help you avoid variations in » é
é ats — Mice
i ee ; A ea feeding your control and stock jogs — Cats
romp CTVICE uaranteec YP UALUEY animals. All Chows are kept at Guinea Pigs
A copy of our 300-page illustrated Catalogue constant standards of analysis, ee
No. 7 will be sent on request to teachers of formula and vitamin content Pouleey |

New York Scientific Supply Co.

Formerly N

Y. Biological Supply Co.

LO OO OS OS 0S 0) OE OED |

Sample and Literature on request

PURINA MILLS

ew York, N. Y.
New Yo 861 Checkerboard Square, St. Louis, Mo.

111-113 East 22nd Street

lee ee ee a OD) OC

OO OT OT OOO OE OS OS OSC) A AS OS OE

*

Jury 4, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

EQUIPMENT YOU SHOULD
KNOW ABOUT

Microscopes and
Microtomes

—of all types, of the famous Reichert
manufacture.

Analytical Balances

All types—world’s most accurate
balances. Micro-balances in various
models.

pH Apparatus and
Buffer Tablets

For testing highly colored, turbid, or
viscous liquids. Range 1.4 to 12.6.
Buffer tablets with range 3.0 to 11.0.

Fixanal Method

—for preparing standard solutions.
All the usual solutions as well as
others for special work.

May we send you descriptive material?
PFALTZ & BAUER, Inc.,
Send details of ......

Name

Address

Photoelectric Apparatus

Ultra-sensitive cells. Colorimeters
for liquids, semi-solids and solids.
Light Meters.

Stains
The famous Original Gruebler-Holl-

born Stains. Combinations for mul-
tiple staining.

Filtration Apparatus

Using membranes of cellulose esters,
graduated according to porosity, for
filtrations of bacteria, colloids, etc.

Roland Camera

A “miniature” camera which takes
photos of useable size without en-
largement, but a superb lens, gives
needle sharpness when enlargements
are wanted.

If what you need is not listed—inquire :

EMPIRE STATE BLDG., NEW YORK

Institution

22 be... THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. XI, No. 92

WE HAVE SERVED NEW ENGLAND FOR 100 YEARS—
WE SHOULD SERVE YOU

Blackstone Microscope Slides

»>
A non-corrosive slide of the same quality We will gladly mail you samples.
as our specially selected H & F Brand
Slide. We believe the Blackstone Slide to be

és ae the best value offered today.
Packed 72 to the box at 85c gross. we

Discount of 10% in 12 gross lots. If you do not agree, tell us.

Larger quantities at a substantial discount. If you agree, send in your order,
INCORPORATED

99 BROAD STREET BOSTON, MASS.
“New England’s Laboratory Supply House”

Internationally known

CENTRIFUGES:

—many types, large and small; finest of materials and
workmanship; flexibility as to speed and capacity; in-
corporation of new principles as developed by advanced
technique; accommodation of universally standard ae-
cessory equipment ;—avoiding ‘‘extreme styling,’’ costly
to both user and maker.

New---CONICAL HEADS

Streamlined for High Speed.

Sloping Sedimentation Principle.
Greater Number of Tubes.

Light Weight and Strong.

Designed to take Standard Glassware.

Interchangeable with other regular Inter-
national Heads.

There is a Conical Head for every model International
Centrifuge—a wide variety of types, all affording easy
manipulation of tubes and rapid sedimentation.

INTERNATIONAL J
Size 2 Centrifuge and Stand showing Conical Head Send for New Bulletins

INTERNATIONAL EQUIPMENT COMPANY

352 Western Avenue Makers of Fine Centrifuges Boston, Mass.

Jury 4, 1936] _

Luyet, B. J. assoc. prof. biol. St. Louis. Br 217.
(Left June).

Maclean, Bernice L. instr. emb. Hunter. L 28. Smith,
East.

Magruder, S. R. res. assoc. zool. Cincinnati. L 31.
Neal, Bar Neck.

Marsland, D. A. asst. prof. biol. New York. Br 123.
Ferris, Glendon. ,

Martin, E. A. prof. biol. Brooklyn. OM 39. Newman,
Gardiner.

Martin, W. E. instr. biol. Purdue. Br 126. D 211.

Mast, Elisabeth T. res. asst. psych. Hopkins. Br 329.
Minot.

Mast, S. O. prof. zool. Hopkins. Br 329. Minot.

Matthews, A. P. prof. biochem. Cincinnati, Br 222.
Buzzards Bay.

Mayo, Virginia teach. biol. Dana Hall Sch. (Welles-
ley). Br 217b. H 8.

Mazia, D. fel. zool. Pennsylvania, Br 122. Edwards,
School.

McClung, C. E. dir. zool. Lab. Pennsylvania. Br 219.
A 201.

Michaelis, L. mem. Rockefeller Inst. Br 207. Dant-
chakoff, Gansett.

Miller, F. W. invest. gen. Amherst. Br 204. K 9.

Monke, J. V. teach. fel. phys. Tennessee Med. Br
1109: Dr 2:

Moore, J. A. asst. zool. Columbia. Br 303. Dr.

Moser, F. grad. biol. Pennsylvania. Br 111. D 318.

Nabrit, S. M. prof. biol. Atlanta. L 33. A 105.

Nestler, H. A. reader, biol. Brooklyn. OM 39. Ka 25.

Newman, M. grad. phys. Pennsylvania. OM base. Dr
attic.

Nonidez, J. F. asst. prof. anat. Cornell Med. Br 318.
Whitman.

Novikoff, A. B. tutor. biol. Brooklyn. Br 314. K 15.

Nunnemacher, R. F. asst. hist. Harvard. Br 315e.
Nickelson, Main.

O’Brien, J. P. grad. emb. Hopkins. Bot 1. Mendel,

High.

Odlaug, T. O. grad. biol. New York. Br 232. Dr at-
tic.

Orr, P. R. instr. biol. Brooklyn, OM 44. Hilton, Hil-
ton.

Osterhout, W. J. V. mem. Rockefeller Inst. Br 209.
MacNaught, Whitman.

Packard, C. asst. prof. zool. Columbia Inst. Cancer
Res. OM 2. North.

Painter, Elizabeth E. instr. phys. Maryland Med.
Br 225. D 212.

Pappenheimer, J. R. Harvard. Br 208. Rohmeling,
Pleasant.

Parker, G. H. emer. prof. zool. Harvard. Br 213. A
308.

Parpart, A. K. asst. prof. phys. Princeton. Br 231.
Jacobs, Minot.

Peabody, Elizabeth B. prof. biol. St. Elizabeth Con-
vent (N. J.). L 24. Veeder, West.

Prescott, G. W. asst. prof. biol. Albion. Bot 26. D
107.

Prosser, C. L. asst. prof. phys. Clark. Br 228. Cowie,
School.

Puckett, W. O. instr. anat. & emb. Princeton. Br
344. Silvia, Quisset.

Ricca, R. A. res. asst. biophysics. Pennsylvania. Br
339. Stuart, School.

Richards, O. W. instr. biol. Yale. Br 8. D 307. (Ab-
Sent between July 4 and Aug. 25).

our on, C. W. asst. biol. New York. Br 123. D

4.

Robinson, R. A. Col. Physicians & Surgeons. OM 24.
Robinson, Quisset.

Rose, E. T. worker. Iowa Conserv. Com. Bot. D 107.

Rugh, KR. instr. zool. Hunter. OM 43. Hubbard Bun-
galow, East.

__ THE COLLECTING NET \ i238

Salk, J. fel. biochem. New York Univ, Med. Br 309.
Dr 5. \

Saslow, G. asst. prof. phys. New York. Br 214. Gig-
ger, Gardiner.

Schechter, V. instr. biol. City of N. Y, Bot 1. Dr 6.
Schenthal, J. E. res. fel. anat. Marylanil Med, Rock
6. Hamblin, Government.
Schotté, O. E. asst. prof. biol.

Lehy, Millfield.
Schwab, J. J. asst. biol. Chicago. Br | 10. White,

Amherst. OM 4.

Water. \

Scott, A. C. instr. biol. Union. OM base. Metz, Hy-
att.

Scott, Birdie L. grad. asst. biol. Atlante! & Spelman,
L 33. D 208. ;

Seitchik, J. Pennsylvania. Br 217. K .2.

Shaw, I. res. asst. zool. Long Islay Br 118. Bos-
worth, North.

Sichel, F. J. M. fel. Royal Soc. Canada. biophysics.
Pennsylvania. Br 228. Dr 2.

Smith, C. C. sen. res. asst. chem. DePauw. Br 221.
Dre

Smith, D. C. instr. phys. Tennessee. Br 109. (Left
June).

Smith, J. A, asst. zool. DePauw. Br 234. Dr 2.
Solberg, A. N. fel. zool. Coluynbia. Br 314. D 206.
Specht, H. asst. phys. N. Y. Univ. Med. Br 214.

Mast, Minot.

Speicher, B. R. res. fel. cyt. Columbia. Rock 2. Metz,
Hyatt.

Speidel, C. C. prof. anat. Virginia Med. Br 106. D
315a.

Stanbury, J. B. Harvard Med. Br 109. McLeish, Mill-
field.

Steinbach, H. B. instr. zool. Minnesota. Br 210. Ed-
wards, School.

Stern, K. G. visit. lect. phys. chem. Yale. Br 328.
Howes, Water.

Stock, C. C. grad. phys. chem. Hopkins Med. Br 224.
D 215b.

Stockard, C. R. prof. anat. Cornell Med. Br 317.
Buzzards Bay.

Stunkard, H. W. prof. biol. New York, Br 232. Buz-
zards Bay.

Summers, F. M. instr. biol. Bard (N. Y.). Br 217k.
Oaks, Park.

Szepsenwol, J. chef des travaux Anatomie. Geneva.
Br 312. D.9.

Taft, C. H., Jr. assoc. prof. pharm. Texas Med. L
23. Whitman.

Tashiro, S. prof. biochem. Cincinnati Med. Br 341.
Park.

Taylor, J. F. grad. phys. chem. Hopkins Med. Br
319. Howes, Water.
Taylor, W. R. prof. bot. Michigan. Bot 24. Whitman.
Teitelbaum, H. A. instr. anat. Maryland Med. Rock
3. Hamblin, Government.
Thompson, J. U. res. fel. anat.
Rock 3. Hamblin, Government.

Thornton, C. S. asst. biol. Princeton Br 344, Silvia,
Quisset. .

Tracy, H. C. prof. anat. Kansas Med. L 32. Hilton,
Glendon.

Uhlenhuth, E: prof. anat. Maryland Med. Rock 3.
Brooks.

Walker, R. instr, biol. Rensselaer Polytechnic. OM
43. Dr 10.

Warren, M. R. grad. asst. zool. Cincinnati, L 26. Ka
1

Maryland Med.

Wichterman, R. Temple. L 217.

Wilson, E. B. emer. prof. zool. Columbia. Br 322.
Buzzards Bay

Wolf, E. res. assoc. phys. Harvard. Br 110. D 202.

Wolf, E. A. assoc. prof. biol. Pittsburgh. Rock 7.
Elliot, Center.

24 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 92

Wolf, Opal M. lect. zool. Barnard. OM 1. Cassidy,
Millfield.

Yntema, C. L. instr. emb. Cornell Med. L 27. D 102.

Young, Roge: A. asst. prof. biol. Howard. Br 315.
A 304.

Young, S. B. tech. phys. Rockefeller Inst. Br 209. D
218.

Youngstrom, K. A. instr, anat. Kansas. L 32. Hil-

ton, Glendon.

STUDENTS
Ades, H. WV. teach. asst. zool. Illinois. emb. (Hyan-
nis).

Andersch, Marie asst. prof. phys. chem. Womans
Med. ( ‘hiladelphia). phys. Cowey, School,
Arthur, J. aK., Jr. lab. asst. Amherst. emb. Dr

6

Ballentine, R.. ° Princeton. phys. D 316.

Bauer, D. de #. Dartmouth. emb. Dr attic.

Berenberg, Naomi R. N. J. Coll. for Women. proto.
W B.

Bloch, Janet E. Sarah Lawrence. emb. H te

Boeskey, S. C. asst. prof. biol. Notre Dame, proto.
White, Water.

Brooks, Jeanne R. Oberlin. emb. W iI.

Brush, Ruth M. Hunter. proto. Kreke, Buzzards
Bay.

Bush, Aeleta N. grad. biol. Emory (Georgia). proto.
D 203.

Cameron, J. A. C. instr. zool. Missouri. phys. Young,
West.

Chambers, A. H. Swarthmore. phys. Dr. 7.

Claff, C. L. alum. Bowdoin. proto. A 208.

Clark, Beatrice instr. biol. Brooklyn Botanic Garden.
emb. Young, West.

Colie, Elizabeth S. grad. biol. Columbia. emb. Goo-
gins, Quisset.

Conant, Betsy D. Rochester. emb. H 4.

Culberson, Mabel H. instr. bact. Simmons & Farm-
ington St. Normal. emb. Sylvia, Quisset.

Cunningham, Katherine American (D.C.). proto. H 4.

Danner, E. C. asst. instr. biol. Illinois. emb. Ka 2.

Dewey, Virginia C. tech. Harvard Med. proto. Syl-
via, Quisset.

Dugal, L. P. instr. biol. Montreal. phys. McLeish,

~ Millfield.

Ferenbach, C. Princeton. proto. Cahoon, Falmouth.

Forbes, T. R. fel. anat. Rochester Med. emb. K 6.

Fowler, W. S. Swarthmore. emb. K.

Froelich, Helen L. lab. asst. zool. Stephens (Mo.)
emb. D 304.

Fronezak, M. I. asst. advis. biol. Seton Hall (N. J.)
emb. Mendel, High.

Gayer, H. K. Oberlin. emb. Ka 4.

Giles, G. H. teach. biol. Beaver Creek H. S. (Wyo.).
bot. Ka 2.

Goldwasser, S. res. asst. physic. chem. Amherst.
phys. (Hyannis).

Greenfield, S. S. Brooklyn. proto. Ka 4.
Grossman, Cecelia M. teach. biol. Abraham Lincoln
H. Sch. (Brooklyn). proto. Howes, Water.
Grossman, J. grad. biol. Columbia. phys. Vincent,
East.

Henson, Margaret Smith. emb. D 204.

Hudson, Grace P. Hunter. proto. D 103.

Hummel, Katharine P. instr. zool. Mt. Holyoke. emb.
Smith, East.

Johnson, D. F. instr. biol. Southern (Florida). emb.
Bosworth, North.

Joslin, S. L. lab. asst. Wesleyan. emb. K 6.

Kennedy, Kathleen M. demon. biol. Memorial (New-
foundland). emb. H 2.

Klamer, C. H. Wabash (Ind.) emb. Dr 5.

Kriete, B. C. undergrad. asst. DePauw. emb. Dr 2.

Lee, G. O. instr. biol. Canal Zone, H.S. and Jr. Col.
proto. Lewis, Buzzards Bay.

Lewis, Lena A. tech. bact. Lancaster Gen. Hosp.
(Pennsylvania). phys. D 204.

Lewis, Wilma undergrad. asst. biol. State Teachers
(Montclair). proto. Cassidy, Millfield.

Lilly, D. M. instr. gen. biol. Providence. phys. Smith,
North.

Lipman, H. J. grad. asst. biol. Pittsburgh. emb. Ka
2

Magalhaes, Hulda grad. asst. phys. Mt. Holyoke.
phys. W D.

Magers, Elizabeth J. asst. prof. phys. Vassar. phys.
A 306.

Margolis, F. J. Pittsburgh. phys. Ka 21.

McCarrell, Jane D. instr. phys. Vassar. emb. A 305.

McDonald, Margaret R. sen. tech. chem. Rockefeller
Inst. Med. Res. phys. Swain, Millfield.

Meglitsch, P. A. grad. biol. Ilinois. proto. Young,
West.

Mendoza, G. teach. asst. zool. Northwestern. emb.
Hilton, Glendon.
Metcalf, S. H. grad, teach. asst. hist. Columbia.
proto. High.
Mills, Katharine O.
phys. W G.
Mitchell, Alison M. N. J. Col. Women (New Bruns-
wick). proto. W B. \

Mock, Sarah H. teach. biol. Trenton Junior (Mo.).
proto. D 207.

Moragues, V. grad. med. Barcelona (Spain). phys.
Dr 8

tech. & asst. zool. Missouri.

Morgan, T. J. fel. biol. Washington and Jefferson.
emb. Dr 5.

Pack, Virginia L. Sarah Lawrence. emb. H 8.

Palmer, C. M. asst. prof. bot. Butler (Indiana). bot.
Kreke, Buzzards Bay.

Poole, Margery G. Radcliffe. bot. W G.

Price, J. W. assoc. prof. vert. zool. Ohio St. emb.
(Falmouth).

ee O. D. Phys. and Surg. (Columbia). phys.
D 216.

Reddick, Mary grad. asst. gen. biol. Atlanta and
Spelman (Georgia). emb. D 208.

Reed, E. A. teach. asst. zool. California. phys. Dr
attic.

Richardson, Estelle D. grad. biol. New York. phys.
Grennell, West.

Rosenfield, R. E. Pittsburgh. phys. Ka 21.

Russell, Alice M. instr. biol. Illman Carter (Penn-
sylvania). emb. Gray, Buzzards Bay.

ue? Beatrice A. asst. bot. Connecticut. bot. D
05.

Schneider, Ruth Skidmore. emb. H 7.

Shurtleff, Rosamond L. Wheaton. bot. H 3.

Shykin, Pearl Radcliffe. emb. H 2.

Smith, G. L. undergrad. asst. biol. DePauw. emb.
Dr attic.

seer ae D. asst. phys. Wellesley. phys. Young,

est.

Smith, P. E. grad. asst. bot. Rochester. phys. K 3.

Thurlow, Martha grad. biol. Goucher. bot. H 3.

Trombetta, Vivian V. asst. bot. Barnard. bot. D 305.

Velasquez, G. T. grad. bot. Michigan. bot. Dr 14.

hile alesse S. grad. asst. zool. Missouri. emb.

Williams, Jean L. asst. bot. Wellesley. bot. A 205.

Wood, Alburta B. phys. Albert, Spencer Baird.

NOTE: The directory for 1936 will be issued in
phamplet form at the end of next week and will be
complete up to July 8. It will include the staff of
the several departments of the Marine Biological
Laboratory as well as those of the Woods Hole
Oceanographic Institution and the United States
Bureau of Fisheries. It will also contain the ‘A BC
oe Woods Hole” and a map. Single copies will cost
OC,

3p.

Juty 4, 1936 ]

*,
St kk ee he ae et

Now in 4 Sizes

a ological
Specimen
Dishes

Originally listed in one size only, the in-

creasing demand for Biological Specimen
Dishes first led us to introduce a larger size.
Now, in response to many requests, we have

made these Dishes available in four sizes.

Biological Specimen Dishes are applicable to
work in embryology, especially with chick
embryos; to small aquatic organisms, living
or preserved ; to the development of Echino-
derms and other eggs. They serve as ideal
containers for distribution of class material
as they are sturdy but inexpensive.

The smaller sizes fit conveniently under a
microscope.
easy cleaning. When stacked or nested the
dishes can be easily transported and stored.
The bottoms are flat; the dishes of a size
stack perfectly; and evaporation of liquids
contained in them is inhibited because of the

accurate fit.

The rounded inside permits

6734 - Biological Specimen Dishes.

Diam., outside, mm...100 112 125 200
Height over all, mm... 48 50 55 80
Capacity, ml. .......... 200 350 470 1750
No. in original barrel.216 168 132 36
Each: ......!.... $.22 .25 .44 1.00

10% discount in dozen lots, 25% discount
in original barrels.

WILL CORPORATION

LABORATORY APPARATUS AND CHEMICALS
ROCHESTER,.N.Y.

_THE COLLECTING NET

!
!
!
!
!
!
!
|
!
!
|
|
z
i
!
!
!
:
!
|
!

MADE IN U.S. A.

VERNIER ANALYTICAL BALANCE #1008AA

With patented device enabling a range of
weighings from 0-100 milligyams to be made
without handling weights, and controlled by
knob shown at lower right’hand side of illus-
tration. Can be operated yvhile beam is in mo-
tion and without opening front door of balance.

Manufactured by

VOLAND AND SONS, INC.
(Established 1888)

NEW ROCHELLE, N. Y.
Send for our Complete Catalog K

MACHLETT AUTO-BURETTE

Eliminates All Fussing

—A half turn fills—A half turn
empties

Now in Use the World Over

Self-Filling
Self-Setting at
Zero Point
Sturdy, Timesaving,
Non-Flooding
Overflow Solution Returned
Automatically to Reservoir
All Graduations as per Bureau
of Standards Specifications

We supply this instrument in |
micro sizes with delivery tip
ground to fit standard Luer
needles for those wishing great- |
est possible control. |

Write for Bulletin ‘‘A-B’’ giving
full particulars

Pat. Applied For
E. MACHLETT & SON
| Est. 1897
| 220 East 23rd Street
| Special Apparatus Supplied Reasonably and
Promptly to Order

New York, N. Y.

THE COLLECTING

NET [ Vou. X

, No. 92

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE
BIBLIOGRAPHIC SERVICE AND
AIJTHORS’ ABSTRACTS

If you publish in any Wistar Institute jour-
nal, your/paper, in abstract form, is announced
on two Aeparate occasions, prior to the ap-
pearance ‘of the complete article in a journal:

1st. In ‘the Advance Abstract Sheets of the
B bliographic Service, issued on the
15 h of each month.

2nd. In tie form of Bibliographic Service
Cards, issued semi-monthly.

Subscriptior. to the Advance Abstract

Sheets—$.'.00 per year.
Subscription) to the Bibliographic Service
Cards—$5.00 per year.
The following journals are published by The
Wistar Institute:
Journal of Morphology 4
The Journal of Comparative Neurology
The American Journal of Anatomy
The Anatomical Record
The Journal of Experimental Zoology
American Journal of Physical Anthropology
Journal of Cellular and Comparative Physiology
The Journal of Nutrition
Reprints of artici2s appearing in the above
journals may be pu.chased at prices quoted
on the Advance Abstract Sheets.
For further information address

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE OF ANATOMY
AND BIOLOGY
36th Street and Woodland Avenue
Philadelphia, Pa.

HUMAN ECOLOGY
By J.W.

In this illuminating study, Professor Bews
applies the methods and outlook of biology
to a consideration of the history of mankind
as related to his place upon the earth, to his
environment, and to the conditions of his life.
Passing to a discussion of man’s control over
his environment, which leads to culture, he
devises a philosophy of ‘pattern.’ Price $5.00

LIFE FORMS OF PLANTS

And Statistical Plant Geography
The Collected Papers of C. Raunkiaer

Professor Raunkiaer established and elab-
orated the system of “life forms” of plants
which is now almost universally used in the
modern study of vegetation. ‘A valuable
service has been rendered to ecologists by col-
lecting Professor Raunkiaer’s papers from the
somewhat inaccessible journals in which they
were published and in translating them from
Danish into English.” Quarterly Review of
Biology. Price $14.00

1936 Science Catalogue

OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
114 Fifth Avenue, New York

Bews

Write for our

LEA AND FEBIGER |
PUBLICATIONS

New Works and New Editions
To Be On Exhibit

Bell's Text-Book of Pathology, 2nd edition

Boyd's Pathology of Internal Diseases, 2nd
edition

Bridges’ Dietetics for the Clinician, 2nd edition

Bridges’ Food and Beverage Analyses

Calkins’ Biology of the Protozoa, 2nd edition

Cowdry’s Histology

DeRivas’ Clinical Parasitology and Tropical
Medicine

DuBois’ Basal Metabolism, 8rd edition

Kuntz on The Autonomic Nervous System,
2nd edition

Laboratory Methods of the United States
Army, 4th edition

Musser's Internal Medicine, 2nd edition

Nicholson’s Laboratory Medicine, 2nd edition

Scott and Kendall's Microscopic Anatomy of
the Vertebrates

Visscher and Smith’s Experimental Physiology

Wiggers’ Physiology in Health and Disease

AND OTHER STANDARD TEXT-BOOKS

LEA & FEBIGER
600 Washington Square Philadelphia, Pa.

> 0) 0 a cm ee

BIOLOGICAL PUBLICATIONS
OF THE

UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
PRESS

Papers of the Michigan Academy of
Science, Arts, and Letters
Volume XXI ready about July 1
Cloth, $4.00; paper, $2.25, postpaid

More than half of the papers in this volume
relate to botany, zoology, and forestry.

The Lichen Flora of the United States

By BRUCE FINK
$4.00, postpaid
Most complete manual of American lichens,
published 1935.
Occasional Papers of the Museum of Zoology
Miscellaneous Publications of ithe Museum of
Zoology
Contributions of the Laboratory of Vertebrate
Genetics
Short papers and monographs;
prices on request.

titles and

Address inquiries and make checks payable to

THE UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
Ann Arbor, epi

Jury 4, 1936 ]

9
poem

THE COLLECTING NET

2 valuable additions to the field of biology

METHODS OF TISSUE CULTURE
IN VITRO AND OUTLINES OF
HISTOLOGICAL METHODS

3y RaLpH BucHsBaAum, Ph. D.
Department of Zoology, University of Chicago

and

CLAytTon G. Loosti, Ph. D.
Department of Anatomy, University of Chicago

Part I presents a simplified method of tissue
culture for a single investigator in an ordinary
biological laboratory. Part II is an outline of
methods for fixing, embedding, sectioning and
staining cultures and control tissues.

Dr. W. C. Allee, Professor of Zoology, Uni-
versity of Chicago, says: ‘‘Extremely useful
not only to tissue culturists but to those of us
in related fields.’’

60 pages planographed

paper $1.00

ANIMAL _
MICROLOGY

3y MicHAEL F, GUYER
Professor of Zoology, University of Wisconsin

First publication in English to explain the
new Dioxan method as opposed to the old
dehydration technique.

For thirty years a standard guide for
zoology students and teachers interested in
microscopic technique.

Entirely revised and brought up to date. The
Dioxan method has been in use for two years in
the author’s laboratory.
cloth

331 pages, illustrated $2.50

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

Blakiston Books

Will be exhibited in the lobby
of the Main Laboratory, between

° YOU VARE ‘CORDIALLY

INVITED TO EXAMINE

July 17th and July 31st

THIS

SPLENDID COLLECTION OF TEXTBOOKS AND REFERENCE

WORKS.

AMONG THE NEW BOOKS, ARE

WaARDLE—General Entomology

NEAL AND RAND—Comiparative Anatomy
BREMER—Textbook of Histology, 5th Ed.
THomas—Plant Physiology

WALTON AND Foss—Social Biology

Evans—Recent Advances in Physiology,
5th Ed. ;
Ciayton—Theory of Emulsions, 3rd Ed.

PUBLISHERS P, BLAKISTON’S SON & CO., Inc. PHILADELPHIA

OS EE OS a ee a a aU.

SS He

28 THE COLLECTING

NET [ Vot. XI, No. 92

THE M. B. L. CLUB MIXER

With a record breaking attendance, a birthday
celebration, and a five-piece orchestra the M. B.
L. Club opened the social season with a gala
Mixer last Saturday night at the clubhouse.

The affair was open to everyone in the colony
and on Saturday evening lights in the laboratories
were few and far between. At nine-fifteen, when
the hall was packed to capacity, a birthday cake
was presented to Dr. Frank Lillie, President of
the M. B. L. Corporation and past Director of
the Laboratory, in honor of his sixty-sixth birth-
day. The cake was a surprise to everyone, in-
cluding Dr. Lillie; after a short thank-you speech,
he succeeded in blowing out all the candles with
the assistance of a young lady upon whom he
called for help.

The cutting of the cake was the signal for gen-
eral refreshments, and soon everyone was sup-
plied with punch and cakes. By this time it was
evident that the social committee was a decided
success, first in its plan for labeling everyone who
entered the club with his name and institution,
and later with its action in keeping everyone cir-
culating and meeting new people. When the or-
chestra arrived many newly-formed acquaintances
were chatting in friendly groups in various parts
of the rooms.

Dancing began at half past ten to the sprightly
tunes of Freddie Joseseck and his orchestra from
New Bedford. ‘The dance floor, both upstairs
and down, was crowded with couples until the
dancing stopped a minute or two after midnight.

Arrangements for the Mixer were capably car-
ried out under the direction of three committee
chairmen. The refreshment committee consisted
of Stewart Joslin, chairman, J. B. McKeen Ar-
thur, Phyllis McClure, and Jeanne Brooks; the
social, Elisabeth Mast, chairman, Margaret Mast,
Persus Crowell, Alice Gigger, Helen Froelich,
Paul Smith, and Howard Liljestrand; the decora-
tion, Kenneth Gayer, chairman, Marie Ancersch,

Virginia Pack, Janet Blich, Elizabeth Thornton,
and Carl Ferenbach; the publicity, Charles Nla-
mer, chairman, Mary Connor, Elsa Keil, Amy
Gamble, and Ursula Reinhardt.

The rooms of the club were beautifully decor-
ated with flowers, and crepe paper and balloons
added a festive touch to the whole affair. Cut
flowers and ferns were supplied through the cour-
tesy of Nichols of Falmouth; palms, potted flow-
ers and plants through the courtesy of Lawre.ce,
also of /almouth. —E.T.

CHORAL CLUB

The Woods Hole Choral Club, an old and
established institution, began its tenth season
Thursday, July 2, under the direction of Profes-
sor Ivan Gorokhoff of Smith College. The
chorus is made up of Laboratory workers and
residents of the community who like to sing good
music. Some of the present members have been
connected with it from its beginning in 1926, but
a large proportion each year consists of singers
who are new to Woods Hole.

Among the. musical numbers selected for this
season's practice are compositions by Handel and
Wagner, Russian and German folk songs, and
English madrigals. The public performance will
be given in the Marine Biological Laboratory
Auditorium about the middle of August. All who
like to sing and are willing to attend the rehears-
als regularly are invited to become members;
the rehearsals are every Tuesday at 9 P. M. and
Thursday at 8 P. M. This opportunity to sing
good music under able direction has been ap-
preciated by many students and investigators.

Dr. FreD W. APPEL, associate professor of
biology at St. John’s College in Annapolis, was
married on June 18 and recently returned to
Woods Hole with his bride. They are living in
Daniel’s cottage on Millfield Street.

DEPARTMENT OF BOOKS

A TREATMENT ON THE VARIATIONS IN
NERVOUS ORGANIZATION
THE COMPARATIVE ANATOMY OF THE NERV-
OUS SYSTEM OF VERTEBRATES, INCLUD-
ING MAN, Kappers, C. U. Ariens, Huber, G. C.,
and Crosby, E. C., 2 vols., xxvi & 1845 pp., 710

figs. 1936. $16.00. The Macmillan Company, New
York.

This monumental work makes available for the
first time in the English language an adequate
account of the comparative anatomy of the nery-

ous system of vertebrates. In preparation for
nearly ten years, these volumes present in a
greatly detailed, yet clear, orderly, and interest-
ing fashion, the present-day knowledge of the
subject.

In 1920-1921, one of the authors (Kappers)
published “Die vergleichende Anatomie des Nery-
ensystems.” An English translation and revision
of this was at first planned. However, the more
recent contributions to the knowledge of the com-
parative anatomy of the neryous system were so

Jury 4, 1936 ]

Ver

3

THE COLLECTING NET

ew MACMILLAN

Hegner’s
COLLEGE ZOOLOGY

has been completely revised, reset and printed
from new plates for the new Fourth Edition pub-
lished this spring. Although the original plan of
study has not been altered, there has been much
new material incorporated, a whole series of new
drawings and reproductions of the best photo-
graphs made available by modern methods of pho-
tography. There is a new section on the grasshop-
per, new chapters on the Relations of the protozoa
to Man and Parasitism in Animals, considerable
new material on the vertebrates and many other
important additions to the text throughout. $3.50

Newman’s

Outlines of GENERAL
ZOOLOGY

has been very largely rewritten and reorganized
to meet the requirements of the new broader, gen-
eral courses in the biological sciences. Significant
interrelations between zoology and the other
sciences are brought out and broad _ biological
principles fully explained in several new chapters.
Summaries have been added to the end of many
chapters to emphasize further the significance of
coordinating principles. $3.50

and

A Laboratory Manual
for General Zoology

by Professor Newman and Katherine McClure
Roehl has been prepared to accompany the new
edition of Newman’s text. The manual contains
full, specific directions for laboratory exercises on
representative types and problems. The inelusion
of optional material makes this manual adaptable
for use either in the year or in the semester
course. $1.00

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY

.. Basic texts for college courses
in General Biology and Zoology

Woodruff’s

FOUNDATIONS OF
BIOLOGY

long one of the most widely used texts in its field,
has now been published in a thoroughly revised
Fifth Edition. The most noteworthy points of re-
vision are the addition of two new chapters giving
a synoptic view of the representatives of the plant
and animal kingdom and the addition of about
100 new illustrations. All material has been
brought up-to-date, but the basie spirit of the
book in its presentation of a broad survey of the
fundamental prineiples of biology has not been
changed. $3.50

Baitsell’s
MANUAL OF BIOLOGY

primarily for use with Woodruff’s text, has also
been revised to incorporate new material on plant
types, especially with regard to the Algae, Fungi,
and Seed Plants, a new section on the Grasshop-
per, and new sections at the end of the chapters on
related facts of importance. Many of Harrison’s
magnificent habitat groups have been used as il-
lustrations for this new edition. Although the
Manual follows Woodruff’s text, it is so full that
it can be used with any other standard text. $2.50

Mavor’s
GENERAL BIOLOGY

a new text by Professor James Watt Mavor of
Union College, will be published in July. The
book is divided into five main sections on the Na-
ture of Life, Plant Life, Invertebrates, Verte-
brates, and Principles. In so far as is compatible
with scientific treatment, the author has taken
pains to satisfy the wish of every student begin-
ning the study .of biology to learn about his own
life. The relation of animals to man is constantly
pointed out, and the services of biology to man-
kind indicated at appropriate points in the study.
The whole text is very full, and, in order to give
latitude to the teacher, alternative types have
been discussed in several instances. An aceom-
panying laboratory manual will be ready in the
fall.

60 FIFTH AVENUE, NEW YORK

29

30 THE GCOLEECRING NET

[ Vou. XI, No. 92

extensive that it was decided to rewrite the text
completely. The present volumes are therefore
a new piece of work, and not a translation. Fur-
thermore, they are thoroughly up to date (to
1935).

Following the preface and brief introduction,
come ten chapters with the following titles: I,
The Evolution and Morphology of Nervous Ele-
ments; II, The Comparative Anatomy of the
Spinal Cord; III, The Medulla Oblongata ; Ve
The Lateral Line and Acoustic Systems; V, The
Effectory System of the Midbrain and the Med-
ulla Oblongata; VI, The Coordinating Appara-
tus; VII, The Cerebellum; VIII, The Mesence-
phalon and the Diencephalon; IX, The Submam-
malian Telencephalon and the Mammalian Telen-
cephalon Exclusive of the Non-Olfactory Cor-
tex; X, The Development of the Cortex in Mam-
mals. These chapters are characterized by an
orderly and logical arrangement of the material
presented under many sub-headings. A large
number of well-chosen illustrations are included
throughout the book. An author index and a
subject index are given at the end. The text
throughout is singularly free from errors.

Although it is not possible to give a satisfac-
tory brief review of a technical work of this mag-
nitude, attention may be called to a few out-
standing features. Perhaps the most noteworthy
is the extraordinary completeness of the work.
Practically nothing that has been done in the field
by the investigators of this or other countries
has escaped the attention of the authors. This is
reflected in the extensive and extremely valuable
bibliographies to be found at the end of each
chapter. For example, the first chapter dealing
with the evolution and morphology of the nervous
elements covers 94 pages; the appended bibliog-
raphy for this chapter takes up 40 pages. Pre-
sentation of the results obtained by so many
workers necessarily requires a somewhat synop-
tic manner of writing in many places.

A brief résumé is given at the end of each
chapter. In the case of a long chapter several
résumés are given, spaced at appropriate inter-
vals. These résumés are of special interest in
some cases since they include important generali-
zations and conclusions based on the foregoing
detailed accounts. Thus, the résumé for Chap-
ter III begins as follows: “The medulla oblong-
ata differs from the spinal cord in the greater de-
velopment of its dorsal roots as compared with its
ventral roots. The underlying cause for the hy-
pertrophy of the dorsal roots is to be found in
the development of the gill apparatus and the
sense organs of the region. The nerves of the
branchial arch apparatus must be regarded as
specialized components of the dorsal roots which
originally contained, in addition to somatic affer-

ent and visceral afferent fibers, visceral efferent
as well.”

An excellent balance has been maintained be-
tween the facts of observation on the one hand
and the theories of interpretation on the other
hand. The book is rich in explanations of the
probable significance of the points of difference
in the patterns Of various vertebrate systems.
The continual attempt on the part of the authors
to analyze the “why” of nervous organization
from both the ontogenetic and phylogenetic stand-
points makes a fascinating account. The first
chapter, for example, is made especially interest-
ing by the presentation of the “structural laws
of the nervous system.” This includes “the prin-
ciples of neurobiotaxis” with its important im-
plications for the arrangements of nerve cells, the
factors responsible for “monoaxonism and poly-
dendritism,’ and the functional activities and as-
sociations that underlie “selectivity in the con-
nections of neurons.” These are points of fun-
damental significance. A consideration of them
forms a fine introduction to the following chap-.
ters in which are given the neuroanatomical de-
tails.

Chapter V which deals with the effectory sys-
tem ends with an excellent review of the varia-
tions in position of the efferent nuclei of the cra-
nial nerves in the various classes of vertebrates.
It is pointed out that these changes in position
are associated with the functional development
of other centers within the nervous system. Thus,
“the caudal migration of the neurons constituting
the main efferent nuclei of the facial undoubted-
ly is an expression of the tendency of this center
to approach the gustatory centers. This migra-
tion is least marked in those animals in which
gustatory sensation is poorly developed, as in cy-
clostomes and especially in birds.” It is pointed
out also that marked selectivity is shown in mi-
grations of this type. ‘‘Thus an increase in the
medial longitudinal fasciculus leads to a migra-
tion of the neurons of the abducens nucleus into
its vicinity, since the impulses which it carries are
of major importance in the functioning of the
abducens nerve. That impulses over the medial
longitudinal fasciculus do not affect the nucleus
of the facial nerve in a similar manner is due to
the fact that the impulses carried by this fascicu-
lus are not related primarily to the functional ac-
tivity of the facial nerve... Thus the primary law
of neurobiotaxis is expressed best by saying that
the position of a nucleus is determined by those
fiber systems which are correlated with it and
over which the major number of stimuli are con-
ducted to it.”

Chapter X contains an illuminating account of
“phylogenetic and functional significance of mye-
logenetic studies of the cortical areas,’ from
which a few sentences may be quoted. “One of

Jury 4, 1936 ] THE COLLECTING NET

31

Some Outstanding Textboooks in

BIOLOGY

TEXTBOOK OF GENERAL ZOOLOGY
By Winterton C. Curtis, Professor of Zoology, and Mary J. GuTurtr,
Associate Professor of Zoology, with the collaboration of KATHARINE R.
JeFFErRS, Research Associate in Zoology, all at the University of Missouri

“Curtis and Guthrie’ continues to be one of the leading textbooks in the field, as shown by the fact
that ninety-four colleges and universities have used it during the present school year. ‘Teachers
concur in the opinion that this book is ‘the best elementary text of its kind on the market."

Second Edition 588 pages; 6 by 9; $3.75

Laboratory Directions in General Zoology
By Winterton C, Curtis, Mary J. Gutrrie, and Farris H. Woops,
Assistant Professor of Zoology at the University of Missouri
Second Edition 164 pages; 6 by 9; $1.50

AN INTRODUCTION TO THE VERTEBRATES

By Leverett A. Apams, Assistant Professor of Zoology, University of
Illinois

Eighty-nine adoptions for the current year amply illustrate the favor in which this introductory
textbook is held. ‘‘Adams"’ is famous for its breadth of content, thoroughness and conciseness of
presentation, and ease of style. The teachability of the book is attested by the quickened interest
of the students, by their progress in the work itself, and by the facility with which they enter upon

subsequent work in advanced fields.
414 pages; 6 by 9; $3.50

By Watpo Suumway, Professor of Zoology, University of Illinois

This book long ago won the respect and admiration of teachers for its excellent qualities. Of the
third edition they say, ‘‘The generous use of cytological material in the early chapters, the illustra-
tions of several types of development, the introduction of much material from recent experiments

from the field of experimental embryology adapts the book for the liberal arts college. The section
devoted to anatomy of the vertebrate embryos is a distinct contribution in itself.”

Third Edition 390 pages; 6 by 9; $4.00

AN INTRODUCTION TO HUMAN PARASITOLOGY
By Asa C. CHanpter, Professor of Biology, The Rice Institute

This book is so well and favorably known that it hardly needs detailed comment. The recently pub-
lished fifth edition, which incorporates the most up-to-date material in the subject, has been so
enthusiastically received that it bids fair to surpass its own previous popularity. Nearly one hun-
dred different colleges and universities have used this book in earlier editions,

Fifth Edition 661 pages; 6 by 9; $5.00
e

Essentials of Human Embryology An Elementary Course in General

By Gipron S. Dopps, Professor of Histology Physiology

and Embryology, School of Medicine, West By G. W. ScarrH, MacDonald Professor of

Virginia University. Botany, aud F. E. Luoyp, MacDonald Profes-

316 pages 53, by 9 $4.00 sor of Botany Emeritus; both at McGill Uni-

versity.

Outline of Comparative Embryology 258 pages ‘ 6 by 9 $2.75

By Aute Ricuarps, Professor of Zoology and

Head of the Department, Director of Biologi- Textbook of General Biology

cal Survey, University of Oklahoma. By WaLpo SHUMWAY

444 pages 6 by 9 $5.00 361 pages 6 by 9 $3.00
e

John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 440- 4th Avenue, New York, N. Y.

32 AN Ena;

COLLECTING

NET [ Vor. XI, No. 92

the important contributions which the myeloge-
netic studies have made is to show where the first
projection tracts are to be found. The first fields
becoming medullated are those in which sensory
impulses are located. Of these, the first are the
olfactory fields, the paleocortex and the archicor-
tex, an indication of their early phylogenetic ori-
ein. Then follow the regions of the neocortex,
which are also projection centers, such as the re-
cio centralis, the calcarine area, and the upper
temporal (particularly Heschl’s) convolutions.
Myelogenetic studies show very clearly the func-
tional interrelations of the regio precentralis and
the regio postcentralis. Although the precentral
convolutions give rise particularly to the cortico-
spinal and cortico-bulbar paths and the postcen-
tral convolution is sensory, the two central con-
volutions become medullated at the same time,
and the regio giganto-pyramidalis and the regio
postcentralis retain a position close to each other
during the course of phylogenetic development.”

Also during ontogeny, “late myelinating fields
are, on the whole, fields which appear late in phy-
logeny and are concerned chiefly, if not wholly,
with higher associative functions of the brain.
Thus a knowledge obtained from a study of the
myelogenesis of the cortex is of great importance,
not only for an understanding of its ontogenetic
and phylogenetic history, but also for a compre-
hension of its functional activity.”

The book closes with a consideration of the
areas of the gray matter of the cerebral cortex
and conclusions as to their functional and phylo-
genetic significance. The final paragraph pre-
sents a point of view worth quoting: “In conclud-
ing the discussion and summary of the cortex
gray and its various functional fields, it should be
emphasized that the cortex gains prominence and
dominance, in phylogeny and even in ontogeny, in
direct proportion to the development and differ-
entiation of the subcortical centers. Furtherance
of knowledge concerning any part of the nervous
system, in the end, increases our understanding
of the cortex, and an increase of the knowledge
of any part of the nervous system of any verte-
brate, from fishes to primates, in ultimate analy-
sis contributes to a better understanding of the
nervous system of man, with its highly differen-
tiated neocortex gray.”

For investigators and teachers in neurology this
book will be of particular value. The fields of
the known and the unknown are clearly indicated.
The vast array of facts assembled from so many
vertebrate forms makes it invaluable as a refer-
ence. The fertile, explanatory generalizations
offered by the authors are helpful and stimulat-
ing.

In the final sentence of the preface the authors
state that they will feel well repaid for their labor
in preparing the book if “it in any way aids some

of those who are working in this field to a better
comprehension of the problems involved in the
study of the nervous system and the possibilities
offered by such study.” “This reviewer has al-
ready found new facts and ideas presented which
are of aid to him in a related field of investiga-
tion, and ventures the prediction that other read-
ers will have a similar experience.

This book of Kappers, Huber and Crosby may
well be compared with the great book of Cajal
(1928) on degeneration and regeneration of the
nervous system and with the stimulating volumes
edited by Penfield (1932) on the cytology and
cellular pathology of the nervous system. All
three represent distinctive landmarks in the prog-
ress of neurological work.

C. C. SPEIDEL

HOW ANIMALS DEVELOP.
13 + 128 pp.
$2.00.

Waddington, C. H.
Illustrated. W. W. Norton. 1936.

To those of us who have been asked in recent
years to suggest readings in the physiology of
development for the elementary student or the
layman, Waddington’s ““How Animals Develop”
is very welcome. In the past we have had the
little volume of DeBeer which is well written,
concise, and contains a very good list of general
references as well as more specific citations for
supplementary reading. Recently the subject has
been more completely reviewed for the more ad-
vanced student by Huxley and DeBeer. Wad-
dington, however, has kept his presentation on
the more elementary level. Without attempting
to discuss different views as to the causal rela-
tionships responsible for divergence in the course
of individual development, the author has stated
in a clear and interesting way his interpretation
of the processes involved and has outlined the
experimental approaches which have proved of
value in their analysis. He has drawn his materi-
al from both of the larger divisions of the animal
kingdom though it is to be regreted that he has
not included some of the material on the annelids
and the molluscs. The echinoderms are mentioned
with some of the experiments of Horstadius;
the insects with the experiments of Seidel; mo-
saic development is outlined with references to the
tunicates. The remainder is concerned with the
development of the vertebrates. There are chap-
ters on the “Organization Center,” differentia-
tion, and pattern. ‘The final section is on ‘‘Final
Adjustments” in terms of food, respiration, and
excretion; growth; function; the nervous system;
sexuality; and genetics. The book would be of
added value if it contained a list of well selected
references for collateral reading, and a glossary.
The latter would haye enabled the writer to be
slightly more exact in the description of material.

Leicit HoapLey

Jury 4, 1936 ] THE COLLECTING

NET abe . 33

PROCEDURE IN TAXONOMY

Epwarp T. ScHENK and Jonn H. McMasrers

A brief, clear-cut, well-organized statement of the principles of taxonomy,
suited alike to the student and the professional systematist. Includes the Inter-
national Rules of Zoological Nomenclature and Summaries of Opinions Rendered
to the present time, with complete index to both. $2.00

BETWEEN PACIFIC TIDES

Epwarp F.. Rickerrs and Jack CaLvin

An account of the habits and habitats of some five hundred of the common,
conspicuous seashore invertebrates of the Pacific Coast between Sitka, Alaska, and
northern Mexico. The classification is ecological, by habitat, tidal zone and sta-
tion. A phylogenetic index is provided and a bibliography which concentrates
most of the scattered important reference to Pacific Coast invertebrates.

Fall. $7.50

CLASSIFICATION OF FISHES

Davin Srarr JORDAN

Reproduced from the original edition by photolithography for the benefit
of the many scientists who were previously unable to secure copies.

Paper, $3.50; cloth, $4.25

FAMILIAR BIRDS OF THE
PACIFIC COAST

FLorRENCE V. V. DIcKEY

Contains 102 colored plates and a size
and color key which makes rapid iden-
tification possible, as well as descrip-
tive text material. ‘A handy, attrac-
tive and valuable guide.’’—Nature Maga-
gine. $3.75

WEST COAST SHELLS
JostaH KEEP
Revised by
Josuua L. Batty

Marine, freshwater, and land mollusks
of Alaska, British Columbia and United
States west of the Sierra. The Ameri-
can Malacological Union, at its 1934
meeting, passed a resolution urging the
publication of this revision. Illustrated.

$3.75

Stanford University Press

Stanford University, California

CE 0) SD SE) ED SD 0) 0D 0-0-0 0-0-0 (0) De

g
!
:
|
|
i
!
t
i
|
1 INCLUDING FAMILIES AND GENERA AS FAR AS KNOWN

0

em ence em anreamamlamoencemcamo ee oem ace cam oem cams

re

34 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. XI, No. 92
SSIVIIINNNUUOTANULINANULUUUUUTAUUL TALULA

G.E. STECHERT & CO.

31 EAST 10th STREET - NEW YORK

LEIPZIG LONDON PARIS
Hospitalstr. No. 10 2 Star Yard Carey St. 16 Rue de Conde
W. C. 2

For over sixty years our business has been the foremost source for obtaining
Books and Periodicals. The following departments are maintained:

AMERICAN —

All domestic books are supplied at publishers’ prices, with educational discounts.
Special efforts are made to secure out of print items. All orders are carefully
checked as to prices of both domestic and English editions.

ENGLISH —

OUR OWN office in London is engaged only in filling orders from the home office.
New—Secondhand—Out of print.

FRENCH — ITALIAN — SPANISH —

An extensive stock of books in all branches of literature and science is carried in
New York. OUR OWN Paris office is in constant touch with all publishers and
secondhand dealers in these countries.

GERMAN —

The largest stock of German books to be found in the United States is in OUR
OWN building in New York. New books reach us regularly. It is our aim to have
as complete a stock of scientific and general literature as may be found in any book
store here or abroad. Books—new or out of print—are promptly obtained through
OUR OWN Leipzig office.

SECONDHAND — OUT OF PRINT —

Approximately 15,000 square feet on four floors in OUR OWN eight-story building
are filled with books and periodicals in all languages, Science, General Literature, etc.
A large assortment of complete sets and runs of periodicals, domestic and foreign,
is on hand. Catalogues are issued periodically.

PERIODICALS —

A separate department is maintained for subscriptions to magazines, domestic and
= foreign. Every country where journals are printed is represented. Over one-million
= subscriptions are handled at present.

PNUD

HNN

Agents for over 600 Universities and Colleges.
Foreign books charged at current rates of exchange.
Freight shipments received weekly from abroad.
Rush orders included in our daily cables.
Bibliographical information given upon request.

EM

_ NG ES

THE

COLLECTING

NET

; 28S SS) TD) DT) DD) DS EL

An coe Mathews New “Mathews”

Bee’ of Biochemistry

P, MatHews, Ph.D., Carne-
gie Woh on of Biochemistry, University
of Cincinnati. Buckram, 6 x 9, 512 pages,
$4.50. (Ready late July)

This is an entirely new and separate book
poe the well known standard text, Math-

: Physiological Chemistry. Written at
the repeated and urgent request of many
teachers it embodies in a shorter form much
of the famous author’s thorough knowledge
of the subject plus his forty years of ex-
perience in teaching biochemistry to medical
students.

This long and eagerly awaited volume
will prove itself a blessing to teachers and
students at medical and premedical schools
where the time allotted to instruction in bio-
chemistry has been reduced. Where time
permits the use of the standard Mathew’s
textbook is still advisable. The new Seok
will also prove just right for a large number
of dental, pharmacal, agricultural and gen-
eral colleges, being easily adaptable to
courses of various lengths, and carrying all
the authority and reliability of the large
complete standard work.

Realizing that biochemistry is one of the
most difficult subjects for the av erage stud-
ent Dr. Mathews has endeavored to so sim-
plify and coordinate the general principles
and principal facts as to make them easier
to grasp and remember. In matters open to
more than one interpretation he gives the
best he knows in the light of present infor-
mation, endeavoring to leave in the student’s
mind a definite conclusion even though it
may later require modification. All practi-
cal exercises have been omitted since they
are otherwise available such as Koch: Prac-
tical Methods in Biochemistry. Also to keep
the book short almost all references to the
literature have been omitted. Here then is
the most up-to-date, authoritative, short, yet
reasonably complete presentation of modern
biochemistry available.

ALBERT

Send for a Copy

WILLIAM WOOD & CO.

BALTIMORE, MD.

PS OS OS OT) OO OT OS) SD CD 0

Me

a

RECENT HOLT
_ TEXTS IN BIOLOGY

ELEMENTS OF
MODERN BIOLOGY
By Charles R. Plunkett

A brief and clearly written text in biolo-
gy which requires no previous training in
the physical and chemical sciences. $3.00

“*The book is a splendid one, of the dynamic
type.’’—Charles A, Kofoid, University of Cali-
fornia

AN INTRODUCTION TO
PLANT LIFE
By C. L. Wilson and Julia M. Haber

A thoroughly interesting treatment of in-
troductory botany. Emphasizes practical
material closely related to the student’s own
experience. $3.00

“*Very well done from the angle of broadening
the view of the general student.’’—F. H. Billings,
University of Redlands

GENERAL ZOOLOGY
By Frederick H. Krecker

A simply written text for the elementary
course. $3.50

“*T have looked over this book with considerable
interest and find it to be very readable and alto-
gether an excellent text.’’—John E. Guberlet,
University of Washington

ANATOMY OF THE CAT,
Third Edition
Reighard, Jennings, and Elliott
A standard and widely used text. In-

cludes a dissection manual. $4.75
(Separate dissection manual $1.25)

‘We have adopted the present edition for our |

course in mammalian anatomy. The tabular sum-
maries, and the material covering the sympathetic
nervous system are, in my opinion, valuable addi-
tions.’’—H. O. Haterius, New York University

HENRY HOLT & COMPANY

1 PARK AVENUE, NEW YORK

36 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. Xe Nomez

peewee ee ee ee eT EE TORO RETO AS

THE WOODS) HORDE Eee

<,
—_
Sema.

WOODS HOLE NEWS
Frances McINNES

Many of the summer residents of Woods Hole
are interested in what has happened here during
the past winter; we therefore think it appropri-
ate to inform them of the more important events.

There were three fires of consequence during
the winter months, the most outstanding being
the home of Mr. M. C. Draper at Penzance
Point. The fire, with a damage estimated at
$35,000, completely destroyed the house. Plans for
rebuilding were started immediately after the fire.

The home of R. C. Hathaway at Gunning
Point was destroyed by fire last December. The
damage was estimated at $10,000.

Shortly after the Hathaway fire, the home of
L. C. Wittigg on Vineyard Sound Avenue was
destroyed, the damage being $10,000.

Two new fire alarm boxes have been installed
in Woods Hole. One is located on Nobska Road
opposite the George Wright estate; the other at
the corner of Glendon Road and the State High-
way.

Experts claim that Woods Hole suffered its
severest winter in years. The frost, in places,
reached to a depth of four feet; water mains
were frozen and had to be thawed by means of
electricity. Temperature was recorded as low as
10 degrees below zero.

The steam boat channel through the Hole was
frozen for nearly a month, and it was necessary
for the steamer to go up the Sound by way of
QOuick’s Hole. The Island of Nantucket was iso-
lated for several weeks; all provisions and mail
were transported by plane.

The extreme cold weather made it impossible
for sea fowl to secure food, causing great num-
bers to perish along the shores.

A sudden squall caused a boat—chartered to
Dr. Douglas Marsland and owned by Oscar Hil-
ton—to capsize in Little Harbor last week. Dr.
Marsland was accompanied by Mrs. Marsland
and two friends. Captain Walter Dow of the
Gosling came to the rescue. The estimated dam-
age was “‘a good ducking.”

The Woods Hole team of the Twilight League
is fighting for the lead with Falmouth. A win by
Falmouth Sunday gave them a slight advantage.

OOS OS OE ES ES OSE OS OS 1S OS AS SD SD 1 Do

SUMMER COLONY NEWS
ELIZABETH THORNTON

The Yacht Club has announced a change in
rates for this season. ormerly five dolla.s a
person, the dues are now twenty-five dollars for
a family of not more than four with a five dollar
charge for each additional member of the family.
Mr. Albert Borden, Jr., is in charge of the club
for the summer. Miss Peggy Clark, who is a
student at the Yale Drama School, plans to do
the club’s secretarial work.

The new clubhouse will be used for the first
time this season. Furniture which has already
been ordered is expected to, arrive soon. The club
has put out its floats and it plans to have a new
flagpole for the end of the pier.

Racing will start Monday. Races for small
boats will be held every Monday afternoon; races
for large boats every other Wednesday. ‘The
classes of boats this year will be Cape Cod knock-
abouts, Buzzards Bay knockabouts, and sea class
cat boats.

Mr. Samuel Cahoon of Woods Hole has pur-
chased the Maywine, an 18 foot Cape Cod knock-
about. His daughter, Frances, will enter it in the
community races.

Mr. Manton Copeland, Jr., and Mr. Preston
Copeland have sailed for an extended tour of
Germany. They plan to meet and travel with
their brother, Mr. Frederick Copeland, who has
had a fellowship in biology at the University of
Munich. Dr. and Mrs. Manton Copeland and
their daughter Betty are recent arrivals in Woods
Hole.

Dr. and Mrs. Edward B. Meigs of Washington
have opened their cottage on Gosnold Road. Mr.
Wister Meigs has just received his master’s de-
gree from Princeton University. The Misses
Sarah and Mary Meigs have completed their
freshman year at Bryn Mawr.

Mrs. Dorothy M. Glasser and her family will
not be at Woods Hole for the summer. Mr. Com-
stock Glasser, who has a position in Cambridge
for the season, will pursue graduate work at Har-
vard next year. Miss Victoria Glasser has a
scholarship to the Concord School of Music for
the summer; she plans to enter Radcliffe in the
fall.

JuLy 4, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 37

RUTH E. THOMPSON

WOODS HOLE, MASS.
DRY AND FANCY GOODS — STATIONERY

School Supplies—Kodaks and Films
Printing—Developing—Enlarging

EXPERT WATCH, JEWELRY AND OPTICAL
REPAIRING

Oculist in Attendance

FALMOUTH JEWELRY SHOP

MAIN ST. Phone 567-J FALMOUTH

FALMOUTH COAL COMPANY

COAL — WOOD

Distributors Gulf Refining Co.

— When In Falmouth Shop At —

ISSOKSON’S

WALK-OVER SHOES, BATHING SUITS
SPORT CLOTHES

Shoe Repairing While You Wait

THE OASIS LUNCH

QUALITY LUNCH AND QUALITY SERVICE
Stationery
Sick Room and Photographic Supplies
Ballantyne’s Ale and Beer
— On Draught —

IT’S NOT MUCH — ONLY 5c
FOR A REALLY SATISFYING
LUNCH
at
ANGELUS SWEETS
New Malchman Bldg., opp. Town Hall

A MACHINELESS PERMANENT WAVE at

Barber DONNELLY’ S Beauty

Shop Shop
Specializes in WOMEN’S Hairdressing

opp. Public Library
FALMOUTH, MASS.

FOR SALE
CEDAR SKIFFS

Double Oar Locks — One Set of Oars

$35

H. L. CASSIDY ———— MILLFIELD ST.
Opposite Bell Tower

Tel. 211

CAPE COD

FROM THE AIR

AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHS OF

Woods Hole, Elizabeth Islands, Quisset,
Falmouth, West Falmouth, Sippewissett,
Chapoquoit, Megansett, Cataumet, Pocas-
set, Patuisset, The Canal, Sagamore,
Menauhant, Osterville, Centerville, Hy-
annisport, Dennisport, Harwichport, etc.
ESTATES, HOTELS AND TERRAIN
PHOTOGRAPHED ON ORDER

HOWARD M. WOOD
122 Bedford Street New Bedford, Mass.

THE CHINESE SHOP
JEWELRY — LINENS
BRASS — EMBROIDERY
At the Sign of the Red Geraniums
NORTH STREET
1:30 to 3 P. M. daily and by appointment

MARGUERITE PACKARD

“AND YOU’LL LOOK SWEET

UPON THE SEAT OF A

Be YiChE
BUILT FOR TWO”

BICYCLES

LADIES’ — $31.95
FOR SALE:

MEN’S — $29.95
Wheels Repurchased Next Fall If Desired

ALL TYPES
FOR RENT:

25c an Hour

Parties by Appointment

HARVEY’S HARDWARE STORE

FALMOUTH

249 MAIN STREET

a8" ee ___ THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. XI, No. 92

LEITZ PANOPAK ILLUMINATOR

NEW

A combination illuminator for opaque objects, permitting almost in-
stantaneous change from Vertical to Ultropak illumination while the
objective remains in focus.

This equipment, and many other new Leitz instruments and acces-
sories, will be exhibited during August, 1936 at

R. G. THOMPSON'S
Main Street
Woods Hole, Mass.

FF. LEQGGZ. Inc.

60 EAST 10th STREET NEW YORK CITY

Branches: Western Agents:
Washington, D. C. Spindler and Sauppe, Inc.

Detroit, Michigan Los Angeles and
Chicago, Illinois San Francisco, California

SPECIALIZATION | For eae

The fact that the entire staff of the General Biological is a monthly bulletin, estab-

Ss, epee ave Wey lished in 1923 and devoted to
Supply House devotes its efforts to just one end- the notes/and AnHieeiees Tae
preparation of the best possible biological materials— tory Methods, Field Work, Mi-

crotechnic, New Teaching De-
Z j velopments, and announcements
a little better than it could if a biology department was of new Turtox Biological items.
It is mailed gratis to teachers
, : in all parts of the world.

your orders for physical or chemical apparatus or If you are not receiving Tur-
; tox News regularly ask us to
: ‘ F ; place your name on the mailing
experience in supplying schools with everything needed list.

means that this organization is able to serve you just
merely one division of its business. We cannot fill
janitor supplies—but we've had over twenty years’

in their Biology courses.

4

\OLOGICAy
SS Y
Za,

GENERAL BIOLOGICAL SUPPLY HOUSE

Incorporated

IG 761-763 EAST SIXTY-NINTH PLACE
SEA AE ace, CHICAGO

Satisfaction

JULY 4, 1936 |

NEW MICROSCOPES

Are Now Available in 3 Distinct Types

LARGE MODEL L FOR RESEARCH
MEDIUM MODEL Lg FOR LABORATORY
SMALL MODEL Lr FOR TRAVELING
|

L and Lg can be supplied with various substages and
condensers, different stazes, straight or inclined mon-
ocular or inclined binocular tube. An outstanding
feature of the Binocular L is that it increases the
normal total magnification of objectives and eyepieces
by 50 percent.

The available range is from 22.5x to 5400x.

485 Fifth Avenue Cc 4 Ei JESS INC 723 So. Hill St.,
New York & e Los Angeles

50 0 0-0 08 2 0 0D 1D ED OS EE OE OO OED OD ODDO

SPECIAL APPARATUS

Designed — Developed — Constructed

| to Order | RESPIRATION APPARATUS

LEN | Tor all temperatures between -30°C and 60°C
For the Methods of
WARBURG
_ BARCROFT
Research in Applied Physics DICKENS & SIMER
Pp DIXON & KEILIN
FENN
Ask for Bulletins 800, 801, 803

Mechanical and Electrical Engineering

~

CALIBRON PRODUCTS, INC.

West Orange, New Jersey

AMERICAN INSTRUMENT CO., Inc.

8010-8020 Georgia Ave Silver Spring, Md
9

THE COLLECTING NET

LABORATORY PRECISION IN THE FACTORY

oy ae

|

PRODUCES TRADITIONAL SPENCER QUALITY

Walls

Sar Test

TF research department of Spen-

cer Lens Company has devised
special instruments for control of
factory routine which show the qual-
ity of design and workmanship of
Spencer optics.

The “Star” Test provides a labora-
tory method of proving precision
of lenses, not only individually but
as a complete optical system in the
Spencer objectives.

The image of a bright point of light,
formed by the objective under test,
is examined and interpreted by an
expert.

FOR SPENCER MICROSCOPE OBJECTIVES

This method is so sensitive that any
errors in the objective optics are
immediately and clearly apparent.
If errors should be found, the expert
is able to interpret the image to
determine the source of the error.
Corrections can then be made and
the recurrence of such errors

eliminated.

Thus, this highly scientific inspection
of Spencer objectives is your guar-
antee of optical perfection... our
guarantee that you will always re-
ceive traditional Spencer quality.

VISIT OUR EXHIBIT

From July 11 thru July 24 in the Exhibit
Room, nearly across the street from the
Oceanographic Laboratory.

Spencer Lens Company
Buffalo &3 New York

[ VoL. XI, No. 92

af BOG \-\
J LIBRARY]S
i z-\ hie Pky / y

ais “ago :
22 1 Y

Vol. XI. No. 2

SATURDAY, JULY 11, 1936

Annual Subscription, $2.00
Single Copies, 30 Cents.

PULMONARY VEINS, AND THEIR RELA-
TION TO BAINBRIDGE’S REFLEX

Dr. Jost F. Noninez
Assistant Professor of Anatomy,
Cornell University Medical College
In 1915 Bainbridge’ found that an increase in

the blood pressure in the superior vena cava re-
sults in acceleration of the heart, and that this

ELECTRICAL STUDIES OF VISION IN
THE LIMULUS

Dr. H. Kerrer HARtTLINE
Lecturer in Biophysics, University of
Pennsylvania
Recent methods developed by Adrian, Bronk,
and their collaborators for recording the electrical
activity of single nerve fibers has made possible
a study of single sensory cells concerned with

reflex is abolished after section of the vagus
nerve. He concluded from his A 2

vision. These elementary pho-

experiments that the afferent
fibers which convey the pres-
sure impulses to the nerve
centers run in the vagus, but
he did not express any opinion
as to the location of the re-
ceptors.

In the course of studies on
the innervation of .the heart |
found circumscribed areas of
afferent nerve endings in the
proximal portions of the two
venae cavae and the pulmon-
ary veins. The material used
consisted of the hearts of new-
born and very young rabbits,
guinea pigs, and kittens, im-
pregnated with the silver ni-
trate method of Cajal and sec-
tioned serially. The advantage
of using the hearts of new-

born animals is obvious, since the nerve endings
appear more closely placed and are not so large
(Continued on page 42)

as in the adult. In

M. B. LE. Calendar

TUESDAY, July 14, 8:00 P. M.

Seminar: |

Dr. A. K. Parpart: “Permeability

of the Erythrocytes of the
Ground-hog.”

Dr. S. C. Brooks: “Ions in Sap
and Protoplasm of Valonia.”
Dr. H. Burr Steinbach: “Effect of |
Salts in the Injury Potentials of

Frogs’ Muscle.’ \

Mr. Daniel Mazia and Dr. Jean M. |
Clark: “Free Calcium in the
Action of Stimulating Agents on
Elodea Cells.”

Dr. Kurt Stern and Dr. Delafield
DuBois: ‘“‘A Photoelectric Meth- |
od for Recording Fast Chemical |
Reactions.” |
FRIDAY, July 17, 8:00 P. M.

Lecture:

Prof. G. H. Parker: ‘““Neurohumors
as the Means of Animal Color
Changes.”

Pulmonary Veins, and their Relation to Bain-

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Nerve Cells without Central Processes in the

toreceptor units, on being
stimulated by light, respond
by discharging a series of im-
pulses in their nerve fibers;
the resulting sensory message
is similar in all respects to that
obtained from other single
sensory cells such as those of
pressure, taste, etc.

A study of the response of
a single visual sense-cell from
the lateral eye of Limulus
shows that it undergoes adap-
tation when the illumination is
prolonged; that it can mediate
intensity differences ; and that
the processes of light and dark
adaptation may be ascribed to
it. In its quantitative behav-
ior it may be shown that Web-
er’s law is an attribute of the

single visual sense-cell, and that the reciprocity
relation between intensity and duration is also to
be described in terms of the behavior of these

Oxidation-Reduction Potentials of Ascorbic

AICP eEOTICe Gr. SAM) oc) ese. cosscsucstevasvesseesenscncese 44
Extinction of Reflex Responses in the Rat,
Dre: Wadd Prosser. ws:.2c.c06s-hececstsonces Peres Uy eas tey note 45

bridge’s Reflex, Dr. José F. Nonidez.............. 41

Electrical Studies of Vision, Dr. H. Keffer Alfred M. Lucas
IRENA DT Tit) echt Ooh creo eRe ececr cnc EPREEE EERE DEE EERE EE ae 41

Oxidative Process maintaining the Frequency Harbor
of the Heart Beat, Dr. K. C. Fisher................ 44

Fourth Spinal Ganglion of the Frog, Dr.

The Biological Laboratory at Cold
Scripps Institution of Oceanography .
Editorial Page
Items of Interest
Department of Books ..
Woods Hole Log

42 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vo... XI, No. 93

sensory units. Likewise the relative brightness
of lights of various wave lengths is determined
by the efficiency with which they are absorbed by
the photochemical system of the single visual
sense-cell. Discrimination of color, however, in
those animals which possess this faculty, probably
requires an additional mechanism.

It is possible to show that visual sense-cells
from even as primitive an eye as that of limulus,
differ sufficiently from one another to have a
true differential sensitivity to wave length. An
adequate central mechanism for integrating the
nerve activity from an aggregate of sensory cells
is, of course, necessary for explaining color
vision on the basis of such differential sensitivity.

Some of the processes which are concerned
with integration of sensory information may be
studied by recording the discharge of impulses
in single optic nerve fibers of the vertebrate retina.
For the vertebrate retina, in addition to its
layer of receptor cells (rods and cones) possesses
extensive ganglionic elements (synaptic layer, bi-
polar cells, horizontal cells, ganglion cells) and
its optic nerve fibers show a diversity in their
response to light which probably is to be attrib-
uted to this complex nervous organization. Thus
the frog retina, in addition to possessing fibers
which discharge continuously in response to
maintained illumination, also contain fibers which
signal only an increase and others which respond
only to a decrease in the level of illumination.
Such fibers are possibly of importance in the de-
tection of movement of the visual pattern.

Rhythmic firing of single ganglion cells in the
frog’s retina, and the synchronization of such
rhythmic bursts in several fibers is additional evi-
dence that the vertebrate retina possesses prop-
erties common to other nerve centers.

(This article is based upon a seminar report given
at the Marine Biological Laboratory on July 7.)

DISCUSSION OF PAPER OF DR. HARTLINE
Dr. R. W. GERARD
Associate Professor of Physiology,
University of Chicago
Dr. Hartline has succeeded admirably in sum-
marizing his extensive experimental analysis of

vertebrate and invertebrate retinae. Little can be
added, in a brief comment, to this mass of ma-
terial. One point of special interest, both to cen-
tral nervous physiology and to the problem of ex-
citation in general, is that in the frog certain
nerve fibers discharge in the dark and are quie-
scent in light. Assuming similar relations in the
cat, this is in harmony with the observation that
a fairly continuous discharge in the optic tract
can be promptly and completely abolished by
shining light in the eyes.

As Dr. Hartline pointed out, the existence of
such “dark active” fibers in the frog eye, as con-
trasted to that of limulus, might document con-
vergence of inhibitory impulses on the ganglion
cells from which they originate, such cells being
absent in limulus. The similar presence, in the
pectin eye, of a discharge on turning off the light
throws doubt, however, on this interpretation. In
fact, there is probably nothing more surprising in
stimulation of a photo-receptor by a decrease in
light intensely than in its stimulation by an in-
crease.

Presumably the cell is maintained in some equi-
librium condition by a balance in rate of a series
of chemical reactions, partially opposed, partially
seriatim. A sudden increase of photo-chemical
break-down would shift the chemical balance in
one direction, a sudden decrease would shift it in
the other. There is no reason for expecting one
and not the other change to set off the additional
physical the chemical events which constitute a
physiological response. It may further be possi-
ble to relate to such a view those cells which con-
tinue a regular discharge during light, and even
the spontaneous discharging of neurons in other
portions of the nervous system which are stopped
by afferent stimulation. In these cases also, one
may think of an equilibrium level displaced to a
new one, in one case towards, in the other from
the “discharging position,’ by the maintained
shift in environmental conditions. Dr. Hartline
is to be congratulated on his skillful analysis by
difficult methods of many important problems as-
sociated with vision and general sensory physiol-
ogy.

PULMONARY VEINS, AND THEIR RELATION TO BAINBRIDGE’S REFLEX
(Continued from page 41)

the latter a single arborization would probably be
contained in several sections, and its cut branches
might be interpreted as portions of a plexus of
independent nerve fibers.

The receptor areas of the venae cavae and the
pulmonary veins occur in that portion of the vein
1 Bainbridge, F. A. The influence of venous filling

upon the rate of the heart. Jour. of Physiol., Vol.
50, p, 65, 1915.

wall which has lost its smooth muscle fibers, the
latter being replaced by an extension of the myo-
cardium represented by anastomosing — striated
muscle fibers. The receptors are of two types,
namely, subendothelial nerve endings and_peri-
muscular arborizations. In the superior and in-
ferior venae cavae the latter type occurs at the
junction of the vessel with the atrium, and ex-
tends somewhat into the atrial musculature. In

Jury 11, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 43

the pulmonary veins the perimuscular receptors
occur throughout the wall of the vein, which is
occupied by anastromosing muscular trabecule.
The nerve endings of the two types mentioned
are more elaborate in the cat than in the rabbit
and guinea pig.

The subendothelial receptors are either small
and rather compact, or large and diffuse. The
latter arise chiefly from large myelinated fibers,
which course in branches of the vagus carrying
numerous preganglionic fibers. The outstanding
characteristic of the subendothelial receptors is
the proximity of their branches to the endothe-
lium. The branches end as minute rings and
small reticulated swellings which may be in actual
contact with the endothelial elements. Their mor-
phology is essentially identical with that of the
pressure receptors located in the carotid sinus
and the areas of termination of the aortic (de-
pressor) nerves in the arch of the aorta and the
right subclavian artery, respectively.

The perimuscular receptors somewhat resemble
the proprioceptive nerve endings found in skefe-
tal muscle, i.e. the so-called muscle spindles. The
branches of the arborization in this case are
wound around the cardiac muscle fibers in a way
suggesting their mechanical stimulation when the
latter contract. The size of these fibers and the
extraordinary complexity of the arborizations
clearly indicate their afferent nature.

My interpretation of the subendothelial nerve
endings is that.this type of arborizations repre-
sents pressure receptors which are stimulated me-
chanically during the stretching of the vein wall
caused by a rise in intravenous pressure. They
do not differ in any essential point from the other
known pressure receptors, except that they are
placed close to the endothelium, whereas in the
‘carotid and the aorta the receptors are located in
the externa or adventitia. However, this differ-
ence may be due to the loss of the smooth muscle
fibers of the media of the veins as they enter the
heart. The position of the subendothelial nerve
endings suggests that they may be excited by a
slight rise in the intravenous pressure. If this
interpretation can be experimentally confirmed
the anatomical basis for Bainbridge’s reflex will
have been found. This reflex is in a way antago-
nistic to the reflex elicited by stimulation of the
pressure receptors of the carotid and the aorta,
for in this case the blood pressure falls as a re-

sult of vaso-dilatation in other areas of the body,
and the heart beat is correspondingly retarded.
An increase in the blood pressure due to accelera-
tion of the heart would thus be effectively pre-
vented, and this is in accordance with the findings
of Bainbridge.

In regard to the perimuscular nerve endings
the interpretation of their function is more diffi-
cult. As far as I am aware nerve endings of this
type have not been described in the heart. In a
recent brief article McDowall? reports the pres-
ence in cats of a branch of the vagus which if
stimulated causes a rise of pressure, although
stimulation of the central end of the main trunk
of the vagus at this level causes typical depres-
sion. Whether the perimuscular nerve endings
are involved in this reflex is an open question.
At the present time any attempt to explain the
function of the nerve endings under considera-
tion would be speculative. It is to be hoped that
the physiologists will be able to devise methods
to test them differentially, for their function may
be different from the activity of the subendothe-
lial arborizations, which are clearly of the presso-
receptor type.

2 McDowall, R. J. S. A cardio-pressor nerve. Proc.
Phys. Soc., Jour. of Physiol., Vol. 83, p. 37, 1935.

(This article is based upon a seminar report given
at the Marine Biological Laboratory on July 7).

DISCUSSION OF PAPER OF DR. NONIDEZ
Dr. Frank H. J. Frcce

Associate Professor of Anatomy,
University of Maryland

The very concise and definite statements of the
findings of Dr. Nonidez call for little discussion.
While the interpretation or inference that the
observed receptor areas are involved in the Bain-
bridge reflex appears very logical and highly
probable, it must be remembered, as pointed out
by Dr. Nonidez, that this remains to be confirmed
experimentally. The observations of Dr. Noni-
dez thus creates a problem for the physiologist,
1.e., that of isolating the specific vagus fibers that
supply these areas to see if stimulation of these
give rise to the Bainbridge reflex or cardiac ac-
celeration; and to see if they transmit impulses
to the cardio-accelerator center when stimulated
by increased pressure. The problem then, again,
becomes an anatomical one, namely, that of deter-

THE COLLECTING NET has been entered as second-class matter July 11, 1935, at the Post Office

at Woods Hole, Massachusetts, under the Act of March 3, 1879.

marine biological laboratories.

It is devoted to the scientific work at

It is published weekly tor ten weeks between June 1 and September 15
from Woods Hole and printed at The Darwin Press, New Bedford.

the third floor of the Woods Hole station of the United States Bureau of Fisheries.

Its editorial offices are situated on
Between June 1

and October 1 communications should be addressed to Woods Hole, Massachusetts; at other times they

should be directed to THE COLLECTING NET, Garrison, N. Y.

(containing not less than 280 pages) costs $2.00.

Single copies cost 30c; a subscription

44 THE COLLECRING

NET [ Vor. XI, No. 93

mining the distribution of the fibers that mediate
the Bainbridge reflex by degeneration experi-
ments to see if they are distributed to the areas
described by Dr. Nonidez. The observations of
Dr. Nonidez, in addition to their value as contri-
butions and a stimulus to further work, demon-
strate two well-known facts, one of which is all
too frequently overlooked: first that anatomy

and physiology are closely inter-dependent, and
that a discovery in anatomy calls for experimen-
tal substantiation in physiology, and vice versa,
before it is established upon a firm basis; the
second fact is that research in pure anatomy is
not bankrupt for one who has the superb techni-
cal skill and keen powers of observation and cor-
relation of Dr. Nonidez.

THE DESCRIPTION OF AN OXIDATIVE PROCESS MAINTAINING THE
FREQUENCY OF THE HEART BEAT

Dr. KENNETH C. FISHER
Demonstrator, Experimental Biology, University of Toronto

The rhythmic activity of the embryonic fish
heart persists as a physiological process which is
entirely supported by reserves of food in the egg.
Oxidation yields the necessary energy, but there
is a long series of steps between the supply of Os
and food and the rhythmic activity. This series
can be differentiated by the use of CN and CO
which arrest oxidation by specifically eliminating
the atmungsferment from active participation.

The frequency of the heart rhythm can be
properly taken as a measure of the velocity of the
chemical reactions which provide it with energy,
and the time required for a decrease in frequency
is the time required for the exhaustion of an es-
sential reactant. When Oz is entirely removed,
the heart rhythm decreases slowly over several
hours. When the application of oxidative energy
is hindered by CN or CO the decrease in rhythm
is rapid, indicating that only a small reserve exists
between the reaction poisoned by CO and CN
and the maintenance of the normal rhythm.

Upon subjection to CN the frequency of the
heart falls below normal, but it does so only after
intervals which grow longer as the concentration
of the poison is lowered. In most experiments the
lag is taken up by a preliminary acceleration
which, it was felt, was due to nervous activity.
That this is the case in Fundulus embryos seems
establisred fairly satisfactorily, for embryos with-
out a functional vagus do not exhibit the accelera-
tion, while those which have a functional vagus
usually do.

When the lag period has ended, the frequency
of the heart falls in an orderly fashion to about
60% of the normal, where it may be maintained.
At any point during the fall the frequency may

be obtained with considerable accuracy from the
expression :

Ike == thn

Rt

“Rp” is the total amount the frequency is to fall,
“Rt” the amount the frequency has yet to fall at
time “‘t,” and “K’’ a constant. The fit of this
equation to the points obtained by averaging in-
dividual experiments is extremely good. Besides
representing the time course of a unimolecular
reaction this formula likewise represents the
progress of diffusion. If the shape of the ob-
served curves is determined by the rate of diftu-
sion, then the time required to reach the asymp-
totic level should be related to the CN concentra-
tion since the rate of diffusion is proportional to
the concentration gradient. From the data ob-
tained it appears that the presence of some such
concentration as N/12000 in the organism causes
maximum reversible inhibition. Using this for-
mula an estimate may be made of the time re-
quired for the CN concentration to become
N/12000 in the embryos, starting with various
concentrations outside. For N/10000 the calcu-
lated time is close to the observed 20-30 minutes
for the fall to the asymptotic level, but for
N/1000 the calculated time is far shorter than
that observed so that this criterion for the opera-
tion of diffusion is not fulfilled. It seems prob-
able, therefore, that this relation describes the be-
havior of the step from atmungsferment to beat
when the atmungsferment is no longer able to
take part in the carriage of Os or electrons.

(This article is based upon a seminar report given
at the Marine Biological Laboratory on June 30.)

OXIDATION-REDUCTION POTENTIALS AND POTENTIOMETRIC
DETERMINATION OF ASCORBIC ACID

Dr. Eric G. Batr
Associate in Physiological Chemistry, Johns Hopkins Medical School

One of the outstanding chemical properties of
ascorbic acid (Vitamin C) is its reducing ability.
Whether this property is of biological significance

is by no means clear though some evidence has
accumulated to indicate that such reducing prop-
erties may be important in biological processes.

Jory 11, 1936 |

THE COLLECTING NET

49

One step towards clarification of this issue would
be the determination of the oxidation-reduction
potential of the system of which ascorbic acid is
the reductant.

Attempts to measure the potential of this sys-
tem by the usual technique were unsuccessful.
The failure of the system to come rapidly into
equilibrium with noble metal electrodes indicated
that it was electromotively inactive in comparison
to a system such as methylene blue. However,
by employing a system such as the latter to act
as a mediator between the electrode and the as-
corbic acid system it was found possible to re-
cord indirectly the potentials of the ascorbic acid
system. The system acting as a mediator must
of course be present in amounts that are small
relative to the ascorbic acid system so that the
potential recorded will be predominantly deter-
mined by ascorbic acid and its oxidant. With
such a technique it was possible to obtain titration
curves in the acid range that left no doubt as to
the true reversibility of this system. In neutral
or alkaline solutions further difficulties are intro-
duced by the decomposition of the oxidant of as-
corbie acid which, starting at about pH 5.0, be-
comes increasingly rapid as the pH rises. It is
possible to obtain values to a pH of about 8.0 by
extrapolation of the time potential curves. Be-
yond this point the rate of decomposition is more
rapid than the response of the electrodes. At pH
7.4 and 38°C. the half life of the oxidant of as-
corbic acid is about 2 minutes. It appears doubt-
ful that with such a rapid irreversible decompo-
sition of the oxidant this system can act as a cyc-
lic catalyst in the respiratory mechanism of the
living organism. Indeed if it does the process
must be a comparatively rapid one or else some
mechanism to stabilize the oxidant is involved.

The E’, value of the system at pH 7.4 and 30°C.
is + 0.045 y. This value is quite negative to
that of the epinephrine system under the same
conditions. In a previous paper it was shown
that the oxidant of epinephrine was an extremely
unstable compound with a half life of 0.06 sec-
onds. This means that epinephrine must be held
in a reducing environment if it is to be protected
from a destructive oxidation. Ascorbic acid can
produce a reducing environment of the required
intensity for this purpose, and the high content
of this substance in the adrenals is suggestive.

The use of a mediator to obtain titration curves
of ascorbic acid suggested the possibility of using
this method in assaying this compound in natural
products. This has been accomplished with
orange juice buffered with acetate at pH 4.6 and
using thionine as a mediator. The values ob-
tained agreed within 0.5 mv. with those predict-
able for pure ascorbic acid and so indicate that
the assay by this method is quite specific for as-
corbic acid alone. The results moreover show
that only the reductant is present in orange juice
since no distortion of the curve is observed as
would be the case were oxidant also a normal
constituent. The total amount of ascorbic acid
present in orange juice as determined by this
method was about 60 mg. per 100 ml. This value
agrees well with that determined concordantly by
the indophenol titration. This fact should not
however be interpreted to mean that the indophe-
nol method is specific for ascorbic acid when ap-
plied to other natural products. The application
of the titration method to other material is de-
sirable for this reason.

(This article is based upon a seminar report given
at the Marine Biological Laboratory on June 30.)

EXTINCTION OF REFLEX RESPONSES IN THE RAT

Dr. C. Lapp PROSSER
Assistant Professor of Physiology, Clark University

Most of the known changes in excitability of
reflex centers, such as facilitation and inhibition,
last for only a fraction of a second. Yet there
are many behavioral observations, such as Pav-
loy’s conditioning and extinction, which indicate
long-lasting modifications, and occur with stimu-
lation at frequencies much lower than those or-
dinarily used physiologically.

The effect upon reflex responses of stimuli ap-
plied at intervals of 10 to 15 seconds was studied.
The following reflexes were observed: in normal
rats, leg withdrawal in response to a click, prob-
ably a collicular reflex, and in chronic spinal rats,
tail and leg responses to mechanical stimulation
of the tail, electrical stimulation of the tail and
of the central end of the saphenous nerve. Mus-

cle potentials were detected with concentric needle
electrodes.

As the stimuli were repeated each of the re-
sponses diminished in size in that the number of
active motor units decreased and the after-dis-
charge was shortened. There was, however, no
change in latensy of any unit before it ceased to
respond. Ultimately there was no response. This
“extinction” persisted for many minutes if no more
stimuli were given. Further stimuli strengthened
the effect. If, after extinction, general excita-
tion occurred, as by a light flashed in front of the
animal (in the auditory reflexes), or by
a pinch on the foot (in the spinal reflexes), the
animal responded to the next extinguishing stim-
ulus. In Pavlov’s terminology “disinhibition”

46 __THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 93

had destroyed the effect of the “extinction.” The
responses after disinhibition were similar to those
before extinction and could be extinguished again.

That these phenomena are not localized in the
sense organs is shown by the fact that extinction
occurs when a sensory nerve is stimulated direct-
ly. Also, no sensory adaptation has been described
for such low frequencies of stimulation as once
every 10-15 seconds.

If, after extinction of a spinal reflex to me-
chanical stimulation of the tail, the stimulator was
moved 1-2 mm. so that new sensory endings were
excited, a response occurred in some of the same
motor units. This shows that the extinction ef-
fect is antecedent to the final motoneurone, pre-
sumably at some of the internuncial synapses.
We were unable to extinguish a spinal knee jerk

in which probably no internuncial neurones are
involved.

The time relations make it impossible for the
extinction to be inhibition in the Sherringtonian
sense, or equilibration. That it is not fatigue in
the sense of accumulation of waste products or
depletion of metabolites is shown by the fact that
it is more difficult to extinguish a response to a
strong than to a weak stimulus. Further, such
fatigue is inconceivable in a preparation with nor-
mal circulation at such low stimulation frequen-
cies; if fatigue did occur it is unlikely that it
would be wiped out by general excitation. Rather,
it seems that these widely separated stimuli lower
the excitability at internuncial synapses in a rela-
tively lasting manner, and that this effect can be
upset by general excitation.

(This article is based on a seminar report given
at the Marine Biological Laboratory on July 7.)

NERVE CELLS WITHOUT CENTRAL PROCESSES IN THE FOURTH SPINAL
GANGLION OF THE FROG

Dr. ALFRED M, Lucas
Associate Professor of Zoology, Iowa State College

Serial sections of the 4th spinal nerve of the
bullfrog which included the roots, spinal ganglion,
dorsal rami, spinal nerve trunk, ventral ramus,
communicating ramus, sympathetic trunk anterior
to the 4th nerve and the celiac nerve which were
stained in toto with osmic and silver methods,
furnished fiber counts in the regions mentioned.
The number of myelinated fibers found in the
two roots was 667 and about 259 of these passed
to the dorsal rami leaving 408 fibers for the
spinal nerve, but distal to the ganglion 950 mye-
linated fibers were counted. ‘Total fiber counts
from silyer preparations revealed 1372 in the
dorsal root, 648 in the ventral root and 883 sub-
tracted passing to the dorsal ramus left 1137 for
the spinal nerve. Actual count of the spinal
nerve showed 5277 fibers. The additional fibers
arose from the dorsal root ganglion in which was
located 5220 cells. Axons from these cells were
small myelinated and non-myelinated types. It is
concluded, therefore, that some 3500 cells are
present in the spinal ganglion which lack central
processes passing through the dorsal root to the
cord. The distal processes pass through the com-
municating ramus to the celiac nerve.

Other interpretations have been considered. It
is conceivable, for example, that the dorsal root
fibers might branch within the ganglion and
thereby produce the greater number found distal
to the ganglion. Were this the case one would have
some 3500 out of about 5000 cells possessing no
axon processes at all. Since the animals were
large full grown bullfrogs it does not seem to be
a reasonable assumption. Moreover, many ef-

forts were made to find branching fibers by
means of vital staining with methylene blue.
None have been found in the ganglion thus far.

It is conceivable also that during development
of the neural crest the sympathetic ganglion cell
mass fails to separate from the dorsal root and
hence we may be studying two ganglia anatomi-
cally combined. However, were this the case, one
would expect to find axons passing centrally from
the sympathetic trunk to synapse with these
ganglion cells. Such an arrangement would ob-
viously necessitate more axons in the spinal nerve
than nerve cells in the ganglion, but such does not
seem to be the case. It is not on the basis of counts
alone that such a conception is considered to be
an incorrect one. Equally invalidating is the exis-
tence of a sympathetic ganglion normally placed
at the junction of the sympathetic trunk and com-
municating ramus. The number of cells, 1099,
found in this region is adequate to care for the
axons in the sympathetic trunk. Finally direct
evidence obtained from intra vitam staining with
methylene blue and also careful examination of
the serial sections shows that practically all the
fibers in the sympathetic trunk turn distally to-
ward the celiac ganglion. The only fibers which
pass centrally are those constituting the gray ra-
mus. These form a small bundle of very fine
myelinated and non-myelinated fibers.

Finally, the reliability of the silver technique
should be considered. This technique is particu-
larly capricious when applied to frog nerves, and

(Continued on page 55)

Jury 11, 1936 ]

NY. State Fish Hatcheries -

Carnegie Institution + Blackford Hall dormitory

_ THE COLLECTING NET _ - oad

Loboratory buildings + Main Building

Residences

THE- BIOLOGICAL L

c Cold

ABSTRACTS OF SOME SYMPOSIUM PAPERS

Dr. Emit Bozier: “An Analysis of the Proper-
ties of Smooth Muscle.”

It is pointed out that the contractions of
smooth muscle are probably of the same nature
as those of striated muscle, and that the assump-
tion of a special mechanism for the sustained con-
traction of smooth muscle is unnecessary. Ex-
periments on the action of vasodilator nerves
show that they can stop or diminish the response
of vasoconstrictor impulses. The discussion of
the mechanical properties of smooth muscle em-
phasizes their plasticity. The comparison of the
tension changes after stretch and during relaxa-
tion leads to the conclusion that the relaxation is
a passive process, the dissipation of the elastic
energy of the muscle. The energy changes of the
muscle during relaxation, studies by myothermic
methods, can be explained quantitatively on the
basis of this assumption. According to these re-
sults the resting length shortens during the con-
traction. It must be assumed that a change of
the arrangement of the molecules takes place dur-
ing the contraction.

Dr. KENNETH S. Cote and Dr. Howarp J. Cur-
Tis: “Impedance Measurements on Nerve.”

Alternating current measurements on nerve and
muscle have been made over a frequency range
from 20 to 2,000,000 cycles, both transverse and
axial to the fiber axes. The transverse measure-
ments on muscle and stripped nerve may be inter-
preted on the basis of a suspension of uniform
cylinders whose membranes show a polarization
impedance. On the other hand, when a statistical
distribution of fiber diameters and membrane ca-
pacities is assumed, measurements on frog sar-
torius and on frog and cat sciatic lead to static
capacities of the membranes for the average fi-
bers of 1.0 and 0.6 pF /cm.? respectively. The
axial measurements have not been satisfactory
and the lack of an adequate theoretical analysis
has prevented their interpretation in both nerve
and muscle. The nerve problem is further com-
plicated by evidence of several variable impedance
elements. The presence of the sheath on some
nerves largely obscures the characteristics of the

Spring

Harbor

axons. The lack of an understanding of the im-
pedance characteristics of nerve and muscle is a
considerable handicap to the analysis of electric
excitation phenomena.

NEWS NOTES FROM THE BIOLOGICAL LAB-
ORATORY AT COLD SPRING HARBOR
(July 5, 1936)

Visitors during the past week include Dr. and
Mrs. W. R. Amberson, Dr. and Mrs. G. H. Bish-
op, Dr. D. W. Bronk, Dr. McKeen Cattell, Dr.
Georges Coppeé, Dr. Hallowell Davis, Dr. A. J.
Derbyshire, Dr. Alexander Forbes, Dr. Harry
Grundfest, Dr. and Mrs. Rudolph Katz, Dr. G.
Lehmann, Dr. and Mrs. A. M. Monnier, Dr. José
Odoriz, Dr. Arturo Rosenblueth, Dr. and Mrs.
C. C. Speidel, Dr.-F. Toennies.

The evening lecture on July 7 was given by
Mr. E. H. Anthes of the Bausch and Lomb Opti-
cal Company. The subject was “The History of
the Development of the Microscope,” and the lec-
ture was illustrated with a large number of lan-
tern slides, etc.

During the week, Bausch and Lomb held an
exhibit of instruments at the Laboratory, and at
the same time Clay Adams and Company exhibit-
ed apparatus and materials.

Dr. and Mrs. Harotp Agpramson, and their
daughter Alexandra, are at the Laboratory for
the the summer. Dr. Abramson will conduct his
research and will teach in the general physiology
course.

Dr. Bert CUNNINGHAM is spending a month
continuing the experimental work he started here
last summer.

Dr. Asa A, SCHAEFFER is again at the Labora-
tory for the summer. Other Temple University
people with Dr. Schaeffer include Dr. Samuel
Morris and Miss M. Catherine Hinchey, both of
whom are carrying on their own work.

Dr. and Mrs. T. L. SmirH will be here
throughout the summer. Dr. Smith will continue
his research and will be in charge of the stock-
room.

48 __THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 93

SCRIPPS INSTITUTION OF OCEANOGRAPHY
(Received July 10, 1936)

Among recent arrivals at the Scripps Institu-
tion are Professor and Mrs. Leonard Loeb from
the Berkeley campus of the University, who will
spend about two months here; Dr. C. H. Abbott
of the University of Redlands, who is again mak-
ing use of the Institution’s library; and Dr. and
Mrs. E. H. Myers who have returned for the
summer after a year at Compton Junior College.
Dr. Myers is continuing his work on life his-
tories, means of dissemination, and distribution
of living foraminifera. Dr. Robert T. Young,
Jr., a member of the staff of Worcester Poly-
tecnic Institution in Massachusetts who has just
received his doctor’s degree at Harvard, is also
spending the summer at the Scripps Institution
conducting investigations on the penetration of
light into sea water.

On Thursday evening of last week fifty-four
members of the San Diego Dental Association
met in the Institution reading room for the four-
teenth of the series on dental and oral infections
conducted by Dr. C. E. ZoBell in the University
[extension Division in cooperation with the
Southern California Dental Association. Dr. Zo-
Bell lectured on “Oral spirochaetes with special
reference to Vincent’s Angina’; and Dr. R. R.
Rife, of supermicroscope fame, was the guest
speaker on “Recent developments in research mi-
croscopy.” The discussions were illustrated with
lantern slides.

Messrs. D. L. Fox, M. W. Johnson, and C. E.
ZoBell returned last week from their journey to
Seattle to attend the meetings of the Pacific Divi-
sion of the American Association for the Ad-
vancement of Science and other organizations, in-
cluding the Oceanographic Society of the Pacific.
Members of the Scripps Institution staff present-
ed twelve scientific contributions, mest of them
before the Oceanographic Society.

Mr. Bradley T. Scheer, a recent Bachelor of
Science from the California Institute of Technol-
ogy, arrived June 30 to become research assistant
in psysiology to Dr. D. L. Fox of the Scripps
Institution.

Mr. Chesney R. Moe and Mr. Dudley H. Rob-
inson, of the faculty at San Diego State College,
are registered as graduate students for the sum-
mer at the Scripps Institution of Oceanography,
and are studying the carotenoid pigments of ma-
rine organisms with Dr. D. L. Fox.

Dr. Martin Johnson left La Jolla the afternoon
of July 5 to join the U. S. Coast and Geodetic
Survey Steamer Guide at Oakland to take part in
oceanographic work off Cape Mendocino. While
aboard the Guide Dr. Johnson will get records of
surface and subsurface temperatures, collect water
samples for chemical study, and surface and sub-
surface plankton samples.

The boat Scripps, in charge of Dr. Roger Re-
velle, returned on July 1 from a week’s trip of
about 400 miles to San Clemente Island, Cortes
Bank, and to San Nicolas, the most distant and
least visited of the Channel Islands. The trip
was primarily for the purpose of obtaining core
samples of the sediments on the sea bottom, and
thirty cores were collected ranging in length up
to twenty inches. In addition, fourteen samples
from the surface of the bottom muds were pro-
cured and some surface water temperatures and
salinities were observed. In a one-mile deep de-
pression called San Clemente Trough, south of
San Clemente Island, water samples and temper-
atures were obtained for both chemical and bac-
teriological investigations in the Institution’s lab-
oratories.

STAFF MEETINGS AT THE OCEAN-
OGRAPHIC INSTITUTION

At eight o’clock on July 2, Mr. Henry C. Stet-
son of Harvard University delivered the first
paper of the weekly staff meetings on “Sub-
marine Canyons.” These valleys are among the
most puzzling problems confronting the geologist
today and as yet no theories have been advanced
which satisfactorily explain their presence.

A few of these deep valleys at the continental
margin were discovered about sixty years ago by
soundings made by the United States Coast
and Geodetic Survey. These surveys were
continued sporadically up to the last six or seven
years when they were summarily accelerated by
the use of the fathometer. The knowledge of
the shape of these canyons can therefore be at-
tributed to the excellent work of the Government
Survey boats. .

The submarine canyons are quite comparable
in depth to the largest canyons formed on land
such as the Grand Canyon of the Colorado River
as the contour maps of the oceanic canyons also
bring this out quite clearly. Mr. Stetson divided
the canyons into two classes: those formed off
the mouths of master rivers which have a trench
leading across the continental shelf and short,
steep-sided trenches which just cut its edge. Ex-
amples of the former, to mention but a few, are
found near the mouths of the Hudson, Indus and
Congo Rivers while the latter are present all over
the world but are best known on the eastern At-
lantic coast. The floors of these valleys range
from about 8,000 to 10,000 feet below the pres-
ent sea level. The valleys off the Pacific coast
are deeper and come closer to the shore than do
those along our coast.

Jury 11, 1936 }

THE COLLECTING NET » 49

In an attempt to date the canyons by means of
fossiliferous rock fragments dredged from their
walls the Atlantis has made two trips to the can-
yons off our eastern coast. A special type of
dredge of heavy contruction was used in obtain-
ing this material. The fossils have placed the
age of these particular canyons not later than
the upper Tertiary and the extreme youth of
these major features of topography is one of the
most startling things about them. If they are
stream cut, we must postulate a rising of the
land or a sinking of sea level of the order of
10,000 feet, and there is no geological evidence
that such an event could have taken place in the
comparatively short time that has elapsed since
the upper Tertiary.

In an effort to escape from these difficulties
there have been several theories formulated as to
the precise origin of these deep sea valleys, the
most prominent being those of R. A. Daly and

of F. P. Shepard. Mr. Stetson said that there
' was as yet not enough data to warrant the com-
plete acceptance of any one of these causes of
origin.

DONALD ZINN.

PHYSIOLOGY CLASS NOTES

One can not help but observe that the physiol-
ogy course at Woods Hole attracts a varied lot
of people. Probably the way the course is
planned is responsible for it, as the students may
choose four out of a dozen widely varying prob-
lems on which to spend their time and these prob-
lems are quite diverse. Each section of the course
is under the direction of an authority in that par-
ticular field so likewise the staff are quite diverse
in their interests. We thought we would like to
know more about the interests and hobbies of the
group so we plan to do a little prying from time
to time.

Dr. Laurence Irving who is in charge of the
course for the second summer has been an in-
structor in the course since 1931. He gives the
section on acid-base equilibrium and CO» capac-
ity of tissues and sea water and keeps the Van
Slykes, Haldanes and students busy far into the
night. After obtaining his Ph.D. from Stanford
he went to Germany as a National Research
Council fellow in biology. Two years later he
went to the University of Toronto where he is
now associate professor of biology. His main in-
terests have been in the fields of acid-base balance
and the chemistry of muscle, but at present he is
working on the respiratory control and physiolog-
ical adjustments of diving animals. It is said that
he is a very good diver himself, but that in the
winter he takes to skis.

Dr. C. Ladd Prosser who directs the sections
on the nervous system is instructor in the depart-
ment of biology at Clark University. He is an
authority on invertebrate nerve physiology and
spends his spare time tapping the nerve impulses
in the tail of the crawfish. We understand how-
ever that since coming to Woods Hole he has de-
pleted the surrounding waters of dogfish.

The work on tissue respiration and CO» trans-
port is in the charge of Dr. J. K. W. Ferguson
who has been at the University of Western On-
tario. Next year he is taking up his residence in
the United States and will be at the Ohio State
University. Dr. Ferguson is a particularly ar-
dent COz enthusiast having spent a year with
Roughton at Cambridge but he is able to tear
himself away for canoe trips now and then.

The class, as might be expected, is a motley
crew with a wide variety of interests and train-
ing. In it there are undergraduates and medical
students, a physician, several teachers, a bacteri-
ologist and at least two singers with operatic in-
clinations. But in spite of this diversity we get
along (we think) quite well. No major discov-
eries have been made but Miss Magalhaes and
Mr. Lilly have found that the dogfish writes a
very beautiful fin. By attaching a writing point
to a dorsal fin and stimulating parts of the optic
lobes and cerebellum they got some very nice sig-
natures (and exterminated the dogfish as noted
above). The laboratory on Wednesday under-
went a very sudden transformation,—kymographs
disappeared, the Warburgs became silent and in-
to their places popped a flock of brightly colored
perfusion bottles. These are being used in per-
meability and absorption experiments under the
kindly and watchful eyes of Dr. Hober.

ELizABetiH MAGERS

BOTANY CLASS NOTES

On Monday, July 7, the second botany seminar
of the season was held in the botany laboratory.
Dr. Francis Drouet gave an illustrated talk on
his recent trip to Brazil. He had been invited by
the Brazilian government to collect vascular
plants and aquatic algae. He accompanied the
Brazilian Fish Commission which was repopu-
lating the lakes of northeastern Brazil with fish.
Most of Dr. Drouet’s collecting was done in this
region, around the towns of Belem and Fortaleza.
His pictures were of the towns he visited—most
of which consisted of only a shed and a dock.
There were some very fine pictures of Belem and
Fortaleza, which Dr. Drouet classified as “‘up and
coming” little cities. After the seminar tea was
served and Dr. Drouet brought out his photo-
graphs for closer perusal.

Marrua THURLOW

{on
i)

THE COLLECTING NET

{ Vor. XI, No. 93

EMBRYOLOGY CLASS NOTES

The holiday picnic of the embryology class to
Tarpaulin Cove came at the end of a busy week.
From Monday until Saturday, students spent fie
days attending lectures and laboratory instruc-
tion in Tubellaria regeneration and experimental
methods in work on echinoderms. Consequently
the beach party of Saturday, the “Fourth,” was
a healthy diversion.

The week began under Dr. Barth’s direction,
with the study of “‘plant-animals,’ Obelia, Bon-
gainvillia, and Tubularia. Certain theories re-
garding the origin of the classification of these as
animals were humorously advanced by students
from Amherst and Wesleyan. Taxonomists in
the class discovered numerous crustacians and
molluscs among the stem-like hydrocauli and hy-
drorhizae of the zoophytes. These included the
“gate-swinging” <leginella longicornis and Aealis
papillosa.

The work continued under Dr.
advantage of summer study at Woods Hole,
where contact can be made with the eminent
workers in biology, was fully realized on Thurs-
day. In the morning Dr, Horstadius reported to
a classroom crowded with visitors upon his exten-
sive experimental studies with echinoderms.
E. B. Wilson remarked as he left after the lec-
ture “‘His is the most brilliant work ever done in
experimental embryology.” In the afternoon, the
class had the privilege of meeting Mrs. Harvey
(of Princeton) who explained her use of the
high-speed centrifuge and centrifuge-microscope
in the production of merogomes. Certainly some
of the students received immediate inspiration
from such contact with these experimenters ; per-
haps that explains the night watchman’s report
that the embryology laboratory was occupied af-
ter midnight on Thursday night and the night be-
fore the picnic.

Schotté. The

The first report of the presence in this class of
a Jules Verne of embryology came during the
Tarpaulin Cove expedition which ended the week.
A student explained that by combining artificial
parthenogenetic treatment of merogomes with
some ultramicrurgy technique (‘soon to be per-
fected”) we may realize human production of
animals with any desired heredity.

The entertainment, Saturday, consisted of ‘ ‘leap
Rana,” “Arthropoda races,” and baseball. The
baseball game was played under Mid-Western
rules supplied by the protozoologist guest who
owned the bat. There are still some technical
questions (in ecclesiastical circles) which the
rules left undecided. This game was designated
as a practice game for the challenge encounter
with the physiology team. It was proposed that

the protozoologist lend his bat and rules for that
game also.

It may be mentioned that there were a few die-
hards who would not forget their work for an af-
ternoon, but preferred collecting protozoans to
playing baseball.

“Ts it Arbacia?’’ was a game extemporaneously
devised by Captain Klamer and his rowboat crew
who decided upon a hurried investigation just
as the motor of the Winifred was started for the
songful home voyage.

Guests of the class included its professors, rep-
resentatives from the physiology and protozoolo-
gy classes, Dr. Josel Szepsenwol (a Rockefeller
Foundation Fellow), Mr. Dick Forman (an in-
vestigator under Dr. Schotté), and the Misses
Margaret and Janet Rae (visiting Miss Froelich
of the embryology class).

DoNALD BAUER

PROTOZOOLOGY CLASS NOTES

After a few weeks of searching in all available
waters of Woods Hole, and drawing every poor
protozoan that happens to be captured, we proto-
zoologists have turned to making slides of our
prey by various techniques. We have been study-
ing the division rate of Uroleptis mobilis, an or-
ganism to which we cater by preparing fresh
medium, and counting the individuals in each line
every day. But alas for Uroleptis, for his mar-
velous and most intimate life is closely scrutinized
and translated to numbers and graphs on a card.
We continue to study, draw and classify more
protozoa. Experiments in cultural methods are
being conducted and deep concern is expressed
when one’s culture dies off. But nothing can
equal the sadness that prevails when a Uroleptis
dies.

Along with full days of serious work, we man-
age to have a grand time. The laboratory 1s the
scene of much fun, and chief funster is the
charming Miss Drumtra, whose laugh is always
a welcome sound to us.

Many discussions fill our spare moments, one
of the pet argumental themes being philology. It
seems that the different regions of the country so
well represented in our class cannot agree to the
correct pronunciation of almost all words. Each
region sticks to its own speech provincialisms and
we exchange many idiomatic phrases.

The social life of the class consists of attend-
ing the dances, and afternoon trips to the beach.
During the late evening, study is interrupted by a
small tea party or refreshment of other type such
as soft drinks at the soda fountain. After this,
work is resumed until the day is gone.

SYDNEY S. GREENFIELD

Jury 11, 1936 ]

DHE COLLECTING NET 51

IMPROVEMENTS OF NOTE FOR THE SEASON OF 1936 AT M. B. L.

Dr. SAMUEL E. Ponp
Technical Director of the Marine Biological Laboratory

The x-ray suite of the Marine Biological Lab-
oratory is receiving a new x-ray unit, designed
by Dr. G. Failla of Memorial Hospital, New
York City, which will permit more intensive
dosage and allow greater freedom of experiment-
al work in this field.

Two water cooled General Electric tubes
operate simultaneously in this new apparatus and
the living material is placed between the two tar-
gets. Both tubes in operation rectify and radiate
simultaneously; therefore, the outfit requires no
mechanical or “‘valve’’ rectification. Radiations
at 200,000 volts and above have been planned.

All the parts of the new unit have been re-
ceived at the Laboratory from the several manu-
facturers, and will be erected under the general
direction of Dr. Failla and Mr. George D. Bar-
clay of Mt. Vernon, New York. Mr. Morris
Sander, former x-ray technician, and Mr. Robert
Egeland, technician, will assist in the erection and
preliminary operation.

These alterations, when complete, will make it
possible to conduct radiations in a wider field
than previously possible at the Marine Biological
Laboratory.

The Laboratory has set aside space in Room
224 for accurate determination of hydrogen ions,
in so far as equipment can be provided, in order

to render greater assistance to investigators and
particularly to those who may not have the proper
equipment. This year the usual arrangement for
quinhydrone, hydrogen gas-chain and glass elec-
trode devices will be available. The room will
be in charge of Dr. Eric G. Ball with the assis-
tance of Dr. Chester Stock. Investigators should
make arrangements with Dr. Ball for assistance
in determinations.

An improvement in the room for this work is
the dehumidifer made by the Bryant Heating
Corporation of Cleveland. The industrial type
of “silica-gel’” drier has been installed for the
simple drying of the room air. A blower will
circulate a portion of the room air through trays
of silica-gel when required (that is, under the
control of a “Humidistat”) so that the moisture
content is kept below a certain selected amount.
But simultaneously, there is another blower cir-
culating outside air through a similar set of trays
of silica-gel, washing out the collected moisture.
The machine is, therefore, divided into two parts,
with one half being prepared for the dehumidi-
fication while the other half is used in the process
of lowering the moisture of the room air. A
cooling arrangement is adjusted to keep the room
temperature at about 75° F, while the moisture
may be kept below a pre-selected point, probably
below 40% relative humidity.

MR. A. CRESSY MORRISON CONTRIBUTES A SCHOLARSHIP

Mr. A. Cressy Morrison, former president of
the American Institute of the City of New York,
has given $100.00 to THE CotLectinG Net to be
used for its Scholarship Fund. This gift is a
direct contribution to biological research; it has
been awarded to a promising student now work-
ing at the Marine Biological Laboratory.

Mr. Morrison has work and interests which
cover a wide field. As a scientist, he discovered
a method of separating oxygen and nitrogen in
the magnetic field; as an author, he compiled the
“Encyclopedia of Superstition.”

Mr. Morrison is actively interested in promot-
ing knowledge of the American policy of protec-
tion; his work in this field covers a period of
many years. In 1921 he prepared an exhaustive
report on labor conditions, wages, and standards
of living for the United States government; he
compiled a record of private loans floated in the
United States from 1914 to 1927; he has made a

thorough study of the enactment and administra-
tion of tariff laws since 1897.

His affiliations are so numerous that a listing
of even a few of them seems long. He is execu-
tive of the Union Carbide and Carbon Corpora-
tion; member of the executive board of the Na-
tional Research Council; fellow of the New York
Academy of Sciences; member of the American
Chemical Society ; member of the American Min-
ing Congress; secretary-treasurer 1906-1931 of
the International Acetylene Association; chair-
man of the executive committee of the American
Tariff League; vice president of the New York
Electrical Society; member of the Royal Institu-
tion of Great Britain; member of the United
States Chamber of Commerce; director of the
Home Market Club of Boston.

In 1930 Mr. Morrison made it possible for a
student to continue research work at Woods Hole
by a gift of $100.00 to the fund.

52 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No: 93

The Collecting Net

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
at marine biological laboratories

Editorial: Ware Cattell, Elizabeth Thornton, Ur-
sula Reinhardt and Francis McInnis.

Business: Arthur C. Stirling, Amy Gamble and
Boris Gorokhoff.

Entered as second-class matter July 11, 1935, at

the U. S. Post Office at Woods Hole, Massachusetts,
under the Act of March 3, 1879.

MARINE LABORATORIES-SCHOLARSHIP FUND
From the Marine Biological Laboratory

July 10, 1936.
My dear Mr. Cattell:

You have on several occasions raised questions
concerning the relations of the Collecting Net,
which you publish, to the Marine Biological Lab-
oratory. Of the only two possible general rela-
tions, ownership and control by the Laboratory,
and complete independence, the latter alternative
has been preferred and is settled. Under the con
ditions thus established the Laboratory maintains
a most friendly interest in the Collecting Net;
but it should not be expected to assume any re-
sponsibility, which cannot, in the nature of things,
be divided. Nor can it on the other hand admit
any responsibility on the part of the Collecting
Net for the Laboratory, save as critic and friend.

The reply to the specific questions contained
in your letter of July 2 is, therefore, self-evident.
The Collecting Net Scholarship Association as
an independent body can, of course, invite to
membership any persons whom it cares to select;
but the Laboratory as Corporation must de-
cline to appoint representatives. The Laboratory
would admit students or investigators supported
by such scholarships on exactly the same terms
as others. The purpose of the scholarships as
understood by us is regarded as praiseworthy.

The organization to which you refer as
“friends of the Laboratory” was known as the
3iological Association. It was formed in 1894
to meet a specific emergency, and soon there-
after disbanded. The question of its revival has
never been considered.

To the readers of the Collecting Net we would
like to say that the Laboratory as Corporation is
imbued with a trust, not only in its financial af-
fairs, but also in its relations to the biologists
of America to maintain its standards high and
to foster the advance of our science. All its poli-
cies must be measured by these responsibilities.
The aid of all persons of good will in this work
is most highly appreciated.

Sincerely yours,

Executive Committee of the Board of Trustees

of the Marine Biological Laboratory.

(signed) L. V. HerLBprunn, Secretary.

From the Scripps Institution of Oceanography

Dear Mr. Cattell: June 29, 1936

Your letter of June 26 reached me late Satur-
day afternoon after everyone had left the Institu-
tion for the week-end holiday. I am in sympathy
with the aim of THe CoLttectinc Net to estab-
lish a number of scholarships for summer work
in biology at marine stations and I should be glad
to accept appointment as one of your Board of
Trustees, but I think I should make it clear to
you that on August 31 my term of service at the
Scripps Institution terminates, and on September
1 I shall be succeeded by Prof. Harald U. Sver-
drup. Sverdrup, although he is interested in bi-
ology, is not a biologist. He is primarily a geo-
physicist who has specialized in oceanography and
meteorology. You already know from a letter
that I recently wrote you that Dr. Claude E. Zo-
Bell will be the officer in charge of the biological
program at the Scripps Institution. It might be
better to appoint ZoBell as one of your trustees
instead of me.

However, if you care to do so, you may ap-
point me as one of your trustees, and I will pass
the duties over to ZoBell. I have already dis-
cussed the matter with him.

With best wishes, | am

Sincerely yours,
(signed) T. WAYLAND VAUGHAN

From the Biological Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor
Dear Dr. Cattell: July 2, 1936

I shall be very glad to serve on the Board of
Trustees as you request. I need hardly say that
any scheme to provide assistance for young in-
vestigators would have my enthusiastic support,
irrespective of the Laboratory at which they
wished to work.

I hope to see you at Woods Hole sometime
early in August.

Yours sincerely,
(signed) Eric PONDER

From the Mount Desert Is. Biological Laboratory
Dear Mr. Cattell: June 30, 1936

In reply to your letter of June 27th special de-
livery concerning THE CoLLectinG Net Scholar-
ship Fund, may I say that I approve of the plan
and will be glad to assist in any way possible. If
you think I can be of service as trustee of the
fund, I shall be glad to serve. If our laboratory
can have at its disposal a scholarship of about
$100. per year for a deserving young man, I am
sure it will be very much appreciated by us as
well as by the candidate. Please advise me if
there is anything I can do.

Yours sincerely,
(signed) WitttAmM H. Cove

Jury 11, 1936 ]

THE COLEECTING, NET 53

ITEMS OF INTEREST

Dr. Etmer Hicerns, chief of the division of
inquiry of the United States Bureau of Fisheries,
arrived at Woods Hole this week to spend the
summer. Dr. Paul S. Galtsoff, head of the oyster
pest investigation is also here for the summer.

Dr. Rarpu W. GERARD, associate professor of
physiology at the University of Chicago is leav-
ing Woods Hole on Monday morning in his car
for Cold Spring Harbor, where he will give a lec-
ture on Brain Waves for the Biological Labora-
tory there. Soon after he will return to the Uni-
versity of Chicago, where he plans to devote
much of his time during the summer in writing.

Dr. C. P. Lesonp left Woods Hole this week
for Montreal where he sailed for France on Fri-
day. :

A Hopkins beach party was held at Gansett on
July +. Approximately forty people, alumni and
those now connected with the institution, attend-
ed. Fried eel was the novelty refreshment.

Dr. and Mrs. C. E. McCitunecand Miss IRENE
Corry attended the Sigma Xi Conference and
Semi-Centennial in Ithaca on their way from the
University of Pennsylvania to Woods Hole.

Dr. Katsuma Dan, who has been a teacher in
the Marine Biological Laboratory at Misaki for
the past two years, and his bride will spend the
summer in research work at the Marine Biologi-
cal Laboratory. Dr. DAN, son of the late Japan-
ese financier, BARON Dawn, was married on July 4
to an American scientist, Dr. Jean McNair Clark
of Milford, Connecticut, who is the daughter of
the late Mr. and Mrs. Laurence Alden Clark.
The couple were associated in the laboratories
of the University of Pennsylvania where Dr. Dan
received his Ph.D. two years ago. His bride re-
ceived her doctor’s degree last February.

Mr. Water R. Sporrarb, assistant laboratory
instructor of anatomy at Cornell University Med-
ical School and expert falconer, was married to
Miss Mary McClintock, a Cornell medical stud-
ent, on June 18. Mr. Spoffard last summer held
one of THe CotLectrneG Net scholarships award-
ed hy the embryology staff of the Marine Biologi-
cal Laboratory. Mr. and Mrs. Spoffard will
spend the summer at Colorado College at Colo-
rado Springs, where he will study biology and
climb mountains.

Dr. and Mrs. Ropert CoKer have taken the
Jennings cottage on Crow Hill. Dr. Coker is pro-
fessor of biology at Chapel Hill and former di-
rector of the United States Bureau of Fisheries
Station at Woods Hole.

INTRODUCING

Miss Maya Emeppen, medical student at the Uni-
versity of Frankfurt, Germany. Miss Embden
was born in Frankfurt-am-Main in 1912. She is
now a graduate student at the Johann Wolfgang
Goethe University of Frankfurt-am-Main. In
her studies she has worked under Professor Hoh-
mann, Orthopedic Surgery, Professor Felix, Bio-
chemistry, Dr. Volhard, Professor of Internal
Medicine—all of the University of Frankfurt.

Miss Embden is assisting Dr. Irving for a year.
She began her work at the University of Toron-
to shortly after her arrival in May. At Woods
Hole she is working on the problem of changing
blood pressure by stimulating the semi-circular
canals behind the ears. In the fall Miss Embden
will return to the University of Toronto where
she will do research work with Dr. Irving on the
total base determination in developing fish eggs.

When her year’s study in America is finished
next May, Miss Embden plans to return to Ger-
many to complete her studies for her degree in
medicine.

Dr. Sven HOrstapius, one of the most distin-
guished among the foreign workers at Woods
Hole this year, is in the United States only for a
short visit, mainly in connection with his work at
Yale University and with the Rockefeller Foun-
dation.

Dr. Horstadius was born in Stockholm, Sweden,
in 1898 and received his formal education there.
His work in zoology, botany and chemistry at the
University of Stockholm won for him the mas-
ter’s degree; his doctor’s dissertation was con-
cerned with the development of the embryo of
echinoderms, published in German in 1928. Dr.
Horstadius has written several important manu-
scripts since then, one of the chief ones being a
study of the embryology of the sea-urchin. At his
lecture, scheduled for the evening of July 31, he
will discuss these papers and the research werk
he has done since their publication. During the
course of the summer he is also giving a series of
lectures to the class in embryology, in which he
will describe his work in experimental embryolo-
gy in greater detail.

Before Dr. Horstadius came to America last
February as visiting professor and research
worker. He had worked at Naples, Roskov, Ply-
mouth and Utrecht besides the university of his
native city. WAR:

Dr. Emiry W. EmMartr of Johns Hopkins
University who spent the summer of 1928 at the
Marine Biological Laboratory, presented two
papers at the Tenth International Congress of
Medicine at Madrid during the latter part of
September.

54 THE COELE CLINGS NED

[ Vor. XI, No. 93

ITEMS OF INTEREST

The Death of Marquette

‘On Tuesday morning William George Mar-
quette, Jr. failed to report for work at the Chem-
ical Room of the Marine Biological Laboratory ;
an investigation showed that no one had positive-
ly seen him or his bicycle since noon on Monday
when he ate dinner at the laboratory mess hall.
Someone claimed that they had seen him bicycling
northeast on the main road to Falmouth between
the Quisset red light and the railroad tracks near
Falmouth. Dr. Samuel E. Pond and Dr. Eric
Ball organized groups of searchers which were
actively functioning on Thursday, Friday, Satur-
day and Sunday when Marquette’s body was
found in the Sippiwisset woods adjoining the
Beebe estate. The coroners findings stated that
death had been caused on Monday or Tuesday by
self-administered potassium cyanide.

A reward of $200.00 was offered for clews
leading to the location of the missing botanist,
financed equally by the Marine Biological Labora-
tory and the boy’s father, who was associate pro-
fessor of botany at Columbia for seven years be-
fore he became scientific director of Carl Zeiss,
Inc. and vice-president of the company. The
boy’s bicycle was noticed on Wednesday in the
woods ; but the finder did not report it until Sun-
day morning when the notice of the reward was
brought to his attention.

Dr. CASWELL GRAVE, professor of zoology at
Washington University, will also be working at
the Laboratory in the Tortugas.

Dr. Surro Tasntro of the Marine Biological
Laboratory had as his guests this week the
Messrs. Koba and Konishi of the Maruho Com-
pany, Osaka, Japan. Mr. Koba and Mr. Kon-
ishi are on a world tour investigating internal se-
cretions. Their trip across the United States will
be the last lap of a five months’ tour of the im-
portant countries of western Europe.

The Children’s School of Science and Junior
Laboratory of Woods Hole opened Monday for
a six weeks’ course ending August 14. Children
over seven may enter for first year work while
that for more advanced students follows in order.
The staff for this year includes Miss Virginia
Mayo of Dana Hall School, Wellesley, who holds

a COoLLecTING Net Scholarship this summer
Alfred D. Compton Jr. of Yale University
and chief of staff Dr. Allan C. Scott, Union

College, Schenectady. The courses offered are:
Introduction to nature study, Water life, Insects,
Animals of Woods Hole, Elementary biology and
Biological methods.

There are 1385 members of the Federation of
American Societies for Experimental Biology
consisting of four societies: The American Phys-
iological Society, The American Society of Bio-
logical Chemists, The American Society for Phar-
macology and Experimental Therapeutics, and
The American Society for Experimental Pathol-
ogy.

It is interesting to note that among this number
there are only three individuals who are members
of all four societies. They are: Dr. W. M. Booth-
by of the Mayo Clinic; William de B. MacNi-
der, of the University of North Carolina and Dr.
L. G. Rowntree, of the Philadelphia General
Hospital.

Electric Torpedo Ray

A method of lighting a home and ringing a
doorbell without cost was demonstrated Friday
by Dr. C. Ladd Prosser, assistant professor of
physiology at Clark University, at the Marine
Biological Laboratory float. A large electric tor-
pedo ray (Tetronace Occidentalis) brought in
this week by the Bureau of Fisheries collecting
boat, was tested for its electric power ; two sheets
of metal were placed on the ray, one on top and
one underneath it, and the animal was excited to
give off current by prodding at its tail. The
amount of electricity which it produced was suffi-
cent to light a small lamp and ring a door bell.
Shocks were generously passed around to hardy
observers.

The ray contains a store of electricity which it
uses to stun or kill its prey; a human being will
receive a strong electric shock from it. After the
demonstration, the ray was killed and various
parts of it were claimed by the biologists from
the laboratory.

A smaller ray is now on exhibition in the Bu-
reau of Fisheries aquarium along with some new
specimens of shark suckers and a Portuguese man
of war. Bes

Note on the New Animal House

The new animal house of the Marine Biological
Laboratory, located between the boat house and —
the supply building on the south shore of the Eel
Pond, is fulfilling a need that has been felt by
Woods Hole research workers for several years.
Formerly animals were housed in the various
parts of the supply department, but now the
grasshoppers, turtles, frogs, guinea pigs, rabbits,
and cats all live under one roof. Furthermore,
the collecting crew can now tell which are the
fresh water nets and which are the salt water
nets, because the fresh water nets are kept in the
new building!

Jury 11, 1936 |

THE COLLECTING NET 55

NERVE CELLS WITHOUT CENTRAL PROCESSES IN THE FOURTH SPINAL
GANGLION OF THE FROG

(Continued from page 46)

especially is this true of the dorsal root. Have
some 3500 axons been overlooked when the count
was made upon the dorsal root?) Examination of
these slides by Dr. H. A. Davenport confirms our
identification of what should be counted as nerve
fibers. His counts upon this material are almost
identical with our own. The extremely small di-
ameter, about one quarter of a micron, of almost
three quarters of the fibers in the dorsal root
raises the question whether smaller fibers may not
exist whose diameter may be below the limits of
microscopic visibility. If these minute visible en-
tities represent two or three or four axons com-
pressed together within one neurolemma sheath as
has been noted by Dr. Speidel in growing periph-
eral nerves of the frog tadpole, then we are
faced with a situation in which the separate fibers
forming the group are individually below the
limits of microscopic visibility, and if single fibers
of this type exist separately they could not be
seen. To postulate that 3500. nerve fibers were
missed because they were invisible presents such

complications for this and other work that one
hesitates to apply such an interpretation to these
data until other more promising avenues of ap-
proach have been exhausted.

In conclusion, if we assume that the counts and
their interpretation are valid, then we have de-
scribed the architecture of the 4th spinal nerve
which in the hands of a physiologist may well
have interesting significance, especially, in view
of the fact that the axons of these atypical neu-
rons aré distributed almost entirely to the celiac
plexus and hence constitute a large component of
the sympathetic nervous system which supplies
the viscera.

Thus far a study of action currents made by
Dr. George H. Bishop of these various nerve
branches substantiates the neurological findings,
and subsequently other physiological attributes
and functions of these nerves will be investigated.

(This article is based upon a seminar report pre-

sented at the Marine Biological Laboratory on
July 7.)

DEPARTMENT OF BOOKS
EXPERIMENTAL PHYSIOLOGY FOR THE CLASSROOM AND THE LABORATORY

EXPERIMENTAL PHYSIOLOGY, Visscher, Mau-
rice B. and Smith, Paul W., 191 pages, 75 figs.
1935. $3.25. Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia.

This little volume of 191 pages and 75 figures
contains over one hundred experiments appropri-
ate to a class in medical physiology. Following
a brief introduction and directions to stud-
ents, are chapters on the general properties of
protoplasm, muscular activity, the circulatory sys-
tem, respiration, the nervous system, sensations
(mainly the eye), digestion and absorption, me-
tabolism and internal secretion, and urine secre-
tion. The experiments selected cover a wide
range of laboratory procedure and theoretical ma-
terial and are described with sufficient clarity and

completeness so that students should be able to
follow them without additional laboratory disser-
tations by the instructors.

Fortunately the authors have added to the ma-
jority of descriptions a reference or two, which
may encourage the users to do more than slavish-
ly follow a prescribed laboratory program. An
appendix contains useful information on the prep-
aration of common reagents and performance of
many routine procedures as well as such physical
data as are often required and, especially, a con-
densed table of drug dosage for and action in
common laboratory animals. The volume should
prove a useful one in teaching physiology and
handy to have about the laboratory.

R. W. GERARD

BOOKS IN THE BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES PUBLISHED IN AMERICA SINCE SEPTEMBER, 1935

Aymar, Gordon, “Bird Flight’ (Nov. 1935) Dodd,
Mead. "

Baitsell, George A.,
1936) Macmillan.

Belehradek, J., ‘Temperature and Living Matter”
(1935) Stechert.

Biggart, J. Henry, “Pathology of the Nervous Sys-
tem” (July 1936) William Wood.

Bigger, Joseph W., “Handbook of Bacteriology” 4th
ed. (Oct. 1935) William Wood.

“Manual of Biology” (May

Blacklock, D. B.,and Southwell, T., “A Guide to
Human Parasitology’ (Feb. 1936) William
Wood. |

Borradaile-Potts, “The Invertebrata” rev. ed. (Oct.
1935) Macmillan.

Boyd, Edith, “The Growth of the Surface Area of
the Human Body” (Oct. 1935) University of
Minnesota Press.

Colbert, Edwin H., “Siwalik Mammals in the Amer-
ican Musuem of Natural History” (1936) Uni-
versity of Pennsylvania Press.

56 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 93

Cold Spring Harbor Symposia, “Quantitative Biolo-
gy” Vol. III (Nov. 1935) Biological Laboratory,
Cold Spring Harbor, N. Y.

Detwiler, John D., ‘“Neuroembryology” (Experimen-

tal Biology Monograph Series’ (June 1936)
Macmillan.

Dodge, Carroll W. “Medical Mycology” (June 1936)
C. V. Mosby.

DuBois, Eugene, “Basal Metabolism” 3rd ed. (1936)
Lea and Febiger.

Eames, Arthur J., “Morphology of Vascular Plants”
(1936) McGraw-Hill.

Edgeworth, Francis H., “Cranial Muscles of Verte-
brates” (Feb. 1936) Macmillan.

Evans, C. Lovatt, “Recent Advances in Physiology”
Sth ed. (Mar. 1936) P. Blakiston’s Son.

Fernberger, Samuel W., “Elementary General Psy-
chology” (June 1936) William Wood.

Fieser, L. F., “The Chemistry of Natural Products

Related to Phenanthrene” (Mar. 1936) Rein-
hold.
Fink, “Lichen Flora of the United States” (1935)

University of Michigan Press.

Freeman, Graydon LaVerne, “Introduction to Physi-
ological Psychology’”’ (1936) Ronald Press.
Gay, Frederick P., “Agents of Diseases and Host

Resistance” (1936) Charles C. Thomas.

Greene, Eunice C., “Anatomy of the Rat” (1936)
University of Pennsylvania Press.

Gregory, Jennie, “ABC of the Endocrines”
1935) Williams and Wilkins.

Grollman, Arthur, “The Adrenals”
William Wood.

Hardy, William Bate, “Collected Papers of William
Bate Hardy” (April 1936) Macmillan.

Harris, Leslie J., “The Vitamins” (Jan. 1936) Mac-
millan,.

Hartman, Carl G., “Time of Ovulation in Women”
(April 1936) William Wood.
Hayner, J. C., “Regional Anatomy”

Williams and Wilkins.

Hegner, Robert, “College Zoology” 4th ed. (May
1936) Macmillan.

Hegner, Robert, “The Parade of the Animal King-
dom” (Oct. 1935) Macmillan.

Henrici, A. T., “Biology of Bacteria” (1935) D. C.
Heath. -

Huntington, Ellsworth, “Tomorrow’s Children” (Dec.
1935) John Wiley.

Kappers, C. U. A., Huber, G. C. and Crosby, E. C.,
“Comparative Anatomy of the Nervous System
of Vertebrates” (1936) Macmillan.

Krafka, Joseph, “Textbook of Histology” (April
1936) William Wood.

Laboratory of Vertebrate Genetics, “The Estrous
Cycle of the Deermouse, Peromyscus Hispidus”
(1936) University of Michigan Press.

Laboratory of Vertebrate Genetics, “Estrous Cycle
of the Cotton-rat, Sigmodon Hispidus” (1936)
University of Michigan Press.

Landsteiner, Karl, “The Specificity of Serological
Reactions” (1936) Charles C. Thomas.

Manson-Gahr, Philip H., “Tropical Diseases” rey. ed.
(Dec, 1935) William Wood.

Mathews, Albert P., “Principles of Biochemistry”
(July 1936) William Wood.

Mavor, J. W., “General Biology” (July 1936) Mac-
millan.

McCulloch, Ernest C., “Disinfection and Steriliza-
tion” (1936) Lea and Febiger.

Mellen, Ida M. and Lanier, Robert J., “1001 Ques-
tions answered about your Aquarium” (Nov.
1935) Dodd, Mead.

(Nov.

(March 1936)

(Nov. 1935)

Merrill, E. D., “A Commentary on Loureiro’s Flora
Cochinchinensis” (1936) University of Pennsyl-
vania Press.

Meyer, A. W., “An Analysis of the Degenratione
Animalium of William Harvey” (March 1936)
Stanford University Press.

Michigan Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters,
“Papers” (July 1936) University of Michigan
Press.

Neal, Herbert V. and Rand, Herbert W., “Compara-
tive Anatomy” (June 1936) P. Blakiston’s Son.

Newman, “Outlines of General Zoology” 3rd ed.
(June 1936) Macmillan.

Parsons, T. R., “Fundamentals of Biochemistry” 5th
ed. (Nov. 1935) William Wood.

Pearse, A. S., “Migrations of Animals from Sea to
Land” (1936) Duke University Press.
Peattie, Donald Culross, “Green Laurels”

1936) Simon and Schuster.

Roaf, H. E., “A Text-book of Physiology” 2nd ed.
(July 1936) William Wood.

Roberts, Thomas Sadler, “295 American Birds”,
(March 1936) University of Minnesota Press.

Roehl-Newman, “Laboratory Manual for General
Zoology” (June i936) Macmillan.

Romer, Alfred S., “Man and the Vertebrates” (1935)
University of Chicago Press.

Rosendahl, C. O., Gortner, R. A. and Burr, George
A., “J. Arthur Harris, Botanist and Biometri-
cian” (March 1936) University of Minnesota
Press.

Schenck and McMasters, “Procedure in Taxonomy”
(Feb. 1936) Stanford University Press.

Scot, William B. and Jepson, Glenn L., “The Mam-
malian Fauna of the White River Oligocene”
(April 1936) University of Pennsylvania Press.

Scott and Kendall, ‘Microscopic Anatomy of Ver-
tebrates” (1936) Lea and Febiger.

Seifriz, William, ‘“Protoplasm” (1936) McGraw-Hill.

Shennan, Theodore, “Post Mortems and Morbid
Anatomy” 3rd ed. (Dec. 1935) William Wood.

Shull, Aaron Franklin, “Evolution” (1936) McGraw-
Hill.

Singer, Edward, “Fasciae of the Human Body and
their Relations to the Organs they Envelop”
(Oct. 1935) Williams and Wilkins.

Tilden, Josephine E., “The Algae and their Life
Relations” (Oct. 1935) University of Minnesota
Press.

Visscher, Maurice B, and Smith, P. W., “Experi-
mental Physiology” (1936) Lea and Febiger.

Walker, Charles Edward, “Evolution and Heredity”
(April 1936) Macmillan.

Warden, Carl J., Jenkins, Thomas N., and Warner,
Lucian, “Comparative Psychology’ 3. vols.
(1936) Ronald Press.

Washburn, “The Animal Mind” 4th ed. (1936) Mac-
millan.

Weidlein, E. R. and Hamor, W. A., “Glances at In-
dustrial Research” (March 1936) Reinhold.
Wiener, Alexander S., “Blood Groups and Blood

Transfusion” (1936) Charles C. Thomas.

Wiggins, Ira L., “Report on Several Species of
Lycium from the Southwestern Deserts” (1936)
Stanford University Press.

Wodehouse, Roger Philip, “Pollen Grains?’
McGraw-Hill.

Wolf, F. A., “Tobacco Diseases and Decays” (1936)
Duke University Press.

Woodruff, Lorande Loss, “Foundations of Biology”
5th ed. (April 1936) Macmillan.

Zirkle, Conway, “The Beginnings of Plant Hybridi-
zation” (Oct. 1935) University of Pennsylvania
Press.

(May

(1936)

Jury 11, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

57

*,
&

Gc. E. STECHERT & CO.

31 EAST 10th STREET -
LONDON
2 Star Yard Carey St., W. C. 2

LEIPZIG
Hospital Str. No. 10

AUGER, DANIEL. Comparaison entre la
Rythmicite des Courants d’Action Cellulaires
chez les Vegetaux et chez les Animaux. pp.
101. $1.40. Paris, 1936.

CUENOT, L. L’Espece. (Encyclopedie Scien-
tifique). pp. vi-310. $2.10. Paris, 1936.

DACQUE, EDGAR. Versteinertes Leben. ill.
pp. 131. $2.00. Berlin, 1936.

DACQUE, EDGAR. Aus der Urgeschichte der
Erde und des Lebens. Tatsachen und Ge-
danken. 46 ill. 230 pp. $1.78. Muenchen,
1936.

FORTSCHRITTE DER BOTANIK. Unter
Zusammenarbeit mit mehreren Fachgenos-
sen hrsg. von Fritz von Wettstein. Bd. 5.

Berichtueber das Jahr 1935. 39 ill. vi-346
Ppp. $10.66. Berlin, 1936.
LISON, L. Histochimie Animale. Methodes

et problemes. pp. vi-320. $3.50. Paris, 1936.

MONTEIL, G. L’oeuf. Essai de theorie de sa
segmentation. Avec table des planches. pp.
67. $1.25. Paris, 1935.

PLOTNIKOW, JOHANNES. Allgemeine Pho-
tochemie. Ein Hand- u. Lehrbuch f. Studi-
um u. Forschung fuer Mediziner, Biologen,
Agrikulturchemiker, Botaniker etc. ill. 2nd
edition. pp. viii-909. $11.10. Berlin, 1936.

NEW YORK
PARIS
16 Rue de Condé

PETERS, GERHARD. Chemie und Toxikolo-
gie der Schaedlings-bekaempfung. 22 ill. pp.
120. $3.40. Stuttgart, Enke, 1936.

ROCHE, J. Essai sur la biochimie generale
et comparee des pigments respiratoires. pp.
170. $2.80.

SCHERSTEN, BERTIL. Studien ueber das
Vorkommen und die biologische Bedeutung
des Citrats in Geschlechtsdruesensekreten
des Menschen und verschiedener Tiere.
Nebst einem Beitrag zur enzymatisch-chem.
Methode zur Bestimmung von Citrat nach
Thunberg. $2.08. Lund, 1936.

SOUEGES, RENE. Exposes d’Embryologie et
de Morphologie Vegetables. V: La Segmen-
tation. pp. 80. $1.12. Paris, 1936.

VITAMINE UND HORMONE UND IHRE
TECHNISCHE DARSTELLUNG, T. 1. Er-
gebnisse d. Vitamin- u. Hormonforschg. Von
Dr. Hellmut Bredereck, Doz. pp. xi-101.
$2.22. Leipzig, 1936.

Wissenschaftliche Ergebnisse der deutschen
atlantischen Expedition auf dem _ For-
schungs- und Vermessungsschiff ‘‘Meteor’’,
1925-1927. von Albert Defant. Bd. 6, T. 1.
ill. Subscr. price complete, bound, $34.78.
Berlin, 1936.

CAMBRIDGE ELECTROMETERS

Lindemann Electrometer with
Grounding Switch

8Y,” x 1”
High

ror semecen CAMBRIDGE

INSTRUMENT CO., Inc.

of Precision

Instruments

The application of Electrometers to the
measurement of small electrical quantities has
increased rapidly in recent years.

Among the more prominent electrometer
uses are researches in radio-activity, spectro-
scopic investigations and many uses in conjunc-
tion with photo-electric measurements.

The Lindemann Electrometer (illus-
trated) is an exceptionally compact and
robust instrument of high sensitivity,
short period and low capacitance and
does not require levelling.

List 169 describes in detail the Linde-
mann, Tilted Gold Leaf, String, Doleza-
lek, Recording earant and Compton Electro-
meters.

3732 Grand Central
Terminal,
New York

200 OO OS OO OS OSS OE

58 _THE COLLECTING NET - [ Vou. XI, No. 93

RO A as An hin Bs OS A A Oe Ae On hs Bn Bs his Le, Lie fds. > Bo Le Bs. Bm Mh hr Lis Be

PROMAR |

Microscopic Projection and Drawing Apparatus

For all table and wall projection work except large lecture rooms

Excellent for

* Laboratory demonstrations

° Small lecture groups

°® Research workers

Wax reconstructions

The apparatus can readily be shifted from one research
office or classroom to another and can be supplied with

built-in mechanical stage for 3x] or 3x2 Slides.

PROSPECTUS AND OTHER CATALOGS
SENT ON REQUEST

CLAY-ADAMS COMPANY, Inc.

25 EAST 26th STREET NEW YORK

!
|
i
i
3
:
! * Scientific drawings
!
|

WHEN IN NEW YORK RECTANGULAR

VISIT OUR MUSEUM JARS

DISPLAY ROOM

OLD SEAL

NON-CORROSIVE
MICROSCOPE

SLIDES
LASSES |

DO NOT FOG Sizes in Stock
CLAY ADAMS CoO. Write for Circular
25 EAST 26th STREET, NEW YORK CLAY-ADAMS COMPANY

| 25 East 26th Street New York
VvvvvVvVvVvvvvvvvvvvvvevvvvVvvVvvvvvvvvvvvvyv

Made of clear white
glass, free from bub-
bles, stria or sand-
blows. The glass is
triple annealled to pre-
vent breakage result-
ing from temperature
changes or _ internal
strain when jars are on
display or stored. Cor-
responding numbers are
etched on covers and
jars, thus insuring per-
fect fit and sealing,

Complete Range of

0-0-0.

Jury 11, 1936 ] THE COLLECTING NET

Ms

MICROSCOPY of TODAY
demands MICROSCOPES of
GREATEST VERSATILITY

Polarized light, darkfield,

flected light, Ultropak illumin-
ation, are as importa int as or-
dinary transmitted light in al-
most every type of microscop-

ical analysis.

Leitz Universal Microscope
“UA”, a research microscope
of highest precision, rigidity

and greatest versatility.

Interchangeable substages, object stages, illuminators, objective
holders, and tubes, are available for every conceivable type of

microscopic analysis.

FF. LEVIZ. INC.

60 EAST 10th STREET NEW YORK CITY
Branches: Western Agents:
Washington, D. C. Spindler and Sauppe, Inc.
Detroit, Michigan Los Angeles and
Chicago, Illinois San Francisco, California

hed
— ee

a

60 THE COLLECTING

NESE [ Vor. XI, No. 93

eee ee em ema cem emo oem:

<a

THE WOODS, HOEE Lee

S,
Se

THE TRAFFIC SITUATION IN WOODS HOLE

Very few towns are afflicted with a condition
which retards the free passage of motor vehicles
to such an extent as is the case in Woods Hole
on its main street. Time and time again cars pro-
ceeding up or down Main and Water Streets are
stopped, because two cars can barely pass each
other in the middle of the road when cars are
parked on either side. A single car parked on
the south side of the road is often responsible
for stopping traffic in one direction. The present
situation is a source of annoyance to all persons
with cars; it is a source of danger because it may
sometime block the fire engine in an emergency.
The situation is in the hands of the Police De-
partment; parking should be strictly limited on
the south side of Main and Water street. —C. N.

Mrs. Geoffry G. Whitney opened her home on
Little Harbor, Woods Hole, last Wednesday,
July 8, for a sale of goods made by disabled vet-
erans. The Boston headquarters of the Disabled
Ix-Servicemen’s Exchange was in charge. A
wide variety of handicrafts among them wood-
carving, jewelry, pewter, knitting, and embroi-
dery were sold.

Alexander Kirkland, Group Theatre leading
man, will star in George Bernard Shaw’s hilari-
ous play, “Arms in the Man,” which opens
Wednesday, July 15, at the Beach Theatre, West
Falmouth. The play will run through Saturday
with a Thursday matinee.

Other members of the cast are: Beatrice de
Neergaard, Hortense Alden, Horace Sinclair,
Scott Kolk, Edmonia Nolley, Stanley Harrison,
and Robert Bentley, all recruited from Broadway.
This is the second presentation of the season, the
first being “Personal Appearance” with Dorothy
Mackaill.

Dr. and Mrs. Frank R. Lillie have had as guests
their daughter and son-in-law, Mr. and Mrs. Wil-
liam Walton of New York. The couple left
Wednesday but they plan to return to Woods
Hole in August.

Gifford Griffin, a Laurence High School and
M. I. T. student, is employed at the General Elec-
tric Plant at Lynn, Massachusetts.

Robert L. McKenzie, Woods Hole’s gifted mu-
sician, has returned to New Hampshire for the
summer months. He is employed in a hotel at
Crawford Notch. Mr. McKenzie is a student at
the New England Conservatory of Music.

oe

THE ETERNAL BEACH QUESTION

To THE EpiTor:

Coming from New York City with a great de-
sire for relaxation, bathing and basking in the
sun, | dreamed of pleasant beaches on which to
idle away the summer hours, hoped to regain
vigour for my strained and overtaxed nerves, and
to build up a reserve of courage and strength.
The Cape Cod Advancement Plan and the Cham-
ber of Commerce have spent a small fortune in
advertising Cape Cod with all its sunshine and
good bathing, and knowing the Cape extremely
well since early boyhood, I agree that in many
places there are fine sandy beaches. But I hap-
pen to like particularly the quality of many things
about Woods Hole. I like the cool air and the
pleasant and busy harbor, besides which I have
many friends, so that altogether Woods Hole af-
fords me most of what I desire, and my only ob-
jection concerns the painful state of the beach. I
say painful advisedly because I must again re-
mind you that coming from New York City, I
have tender feet, and during my brief stay here
I have seen many adults and children with tender
feet. No wonder that a friend of mine and his
three children recently. picked up and departed
for other shores where the children could play
contentedly for many hours. I am amazed that
the Park Commission and Selectmen of Fal-
mouth have no sympathy with the many who
have to live and study in Woods Hole, and can-
not afford either an automobile or the time to go
to the other beaches which are so ably and admir-
ably kept up. It is no excuse that the beach is
privately owned because the Woods Hole Public
uses it by the hundreds, and they cannot be for-
bidden. It might seem that private ownership is
defeating itself and that perhaps the Council of
Falmouth should take charge and enforce the
public pleasure and rights. Lastly, I am amazed
that each store keeper and boarding house owner
does not protest to the Falmouth Selectmen. I
am only one of the many hundreds who leave a
large part of our yearly savings in these parts,
and I believe we deserve some consideration.

ANONYMOUS

On July 3 the Penzance Players met and elect-
ed officers for the coming season. They are: Al-
bert Borden Jr., President; George Compton,
Secretary-treasurer, Peggy Clarke, Technical-di-
rector, and Nathan Calkins, member at large. The
members also decided to give a play sometime in
August, but the play has not been selected.

Jury 11, 1936 ]

‘THE COLLECTING NET |

o
Do

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE
BIBLIOGRAPHIC SERVICE AND

AUTHORS’ ABSTRACTS

If you publish in any Wistar Institute jour-
nal, your paper, in abstract form, is announced
on two separate occasions, prior to the ap-
pearance of the complete article in a journal:

1st. In the Advance Abstract Sheets of the
Bibliographic Service, issued on the
15th of each month.

2nd. In the form of Bibliographic Service
Cards, issued semi-monthly.

Subscription to the Advance Abstract

Sheets—$3.00 per year.
Subscription to the Bibliographic Service
Cards—$5.00 per year.
The following journals are published by The
Wistar Institute:
Journal of Morphology ‘
The Journal of Comparative Neurology
The American Journal of Anatomy
The Anatomical Record
The Journal of Experimental Zoology
American Journal of Physical Anthropology
Journal of Cellular and Comparative Physiology
The Journal of Nutrition
Reprints of articles appearing in the above
journals may be purchased at prices quoted
on the Advance Abstract Sheets.
For further information address

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE OF ANATOMY
AND BIOLOGY
36th Street and Woodland Avenue
Philadelphia, Pa.

106

AMERICAN TYPE CULTURE COLLECTION

Third Edition of Catalogue Completely Revised

Listing 1300 pure cultures of bacteria, 350 of yeasts,
and 400 of fungi, sent upon request. Special efforts

made to secure cultures not in the collection.
Curator American Type Culture Collection,

John McCormick Institute for Infectious Diseases,
629 South Wood Street, Chicago, IIlinois.

°,
oe

Alcohol
costs in

half

With a Barnstead
Concentrator you get
anhydrous alcohol at
the lowest possible
ost. r this still
converts 95% alcohol
into 100% absolute
aleohol for only a
few cents a gallon.
3arnstead Concen-
trators are easy and
economical to oper-
ate, They require
only a small amount
unslaked lime and
eooling water for
each batch and need

practically no atten-
tion. They come in
all sizes and run on
electricity, gas or
steam,

Send for bulletin.

arnstead

STILL & STERILIZER CO. Inc.

10 Lanesville Terrace, Forest Hills, Mass.

2 ——_— = —

YOU’LL FIND

A COMPLETE
DRUG STORE SERVICE

3—ROWE’S PHARMACY—3
FALMOUTH NORTH FALMOUTH
WOODS HOLE

Texaco Products
Gasoline and Oil

ROBBINS LAUNDRY, INC.

Cape Cod’s Leading

LAUNDERERS
and
CLEANSERS

PENZANCE GARAGE
Coal — Oil — Wood

WATER STREET WOODS HOLE

WHERE?

AT THE

WOODS HOLE GARAGE
COMPANY

OPPOSITE STATION

rl
=

BECKMAN PORTABLE
GLASS ELECTRODE
pH Mee GA RE BENT 10 FP ANY VESSEL

to fit the vessel... give symmetrical and if
d fo 9 > g 3 al ¢ uniform
Accurate to within 0.1 pH unit, and for | distribution of heat ...heating element in center
of heater is separated from outer sheath by insu-
lation resistance of several megohms.

With special capsule suitable for quanti- SOOO OLENT Ee
COOLING

Low heat storage eapacity
assures instant heating
when the current is turned
on, making LoLag immer-
sion heaters ideal for con-
stant temperature work.
Heating elements begin 8
inches from terminals, re-
moving danger of burn-out
in case bath liquid runs
low. Ends of sheath her-
metically sealed.

LOLAG
IMMERSION
HEATERS

solutions in quantities down to 2 ml.

ties down to one drop.

Voltage extender for oxidation and re-
duction tests, extra.

Write for bulletins Nos. 552 and 553,
which give details and prices.

_ EIMER & AMEND

Ine. 1897

WRITE
FOR
BULLETIN
1500

<ai>

AMERICAN INSTRUMENT CO., Inc.

HEADQUARTERS FOR LABORATORY
APPARATUS AND CHEMICAL REAGENTS

Third Ave., 18th to 19th St.
NEW YORK, N. Y.

8010-8020 Georgia Ave. Silver Spring, Md
= = = g
« rd
- “w

The Standard of Excellence :
for 96 Years Quartz Optics

HIGH U. V. TRANSMISSION

Special and Standard Optical Elements
Windows (Plane Parallel Plates )
Lenses
Prisms

Achromat Quartz-Fluorite Lenses

All high transmission Quartz Optics con-
structed from specially selected and test-
ed crystals having a U. V. cutoff of 1455
No. 10 Analytical Balance AU.

CHEMICAL—ASSA Y—ANALYTICAL—
PULP—BALANCES LIGHTS

HENRY TROEMNER BRYDEN COMPANY

SINCE 1840

Scientific Instruments and Optics

911 Arch St. Philadelphia, Pa. 96 CHURCH STREET WALTHAM, MASS.

CATALOG NO. 1929-N

SSO:

THE COLLECTING NET | [ Vor. XI, No. 93

w

Jury 11, 1936 ] RHE, COLLECRING NET

MICROSCOPISTS
INSPECT YOUR

pence /V |icko&cone

The usual mass production methods
have no place in the Spencer factory. Each micro-
scope and its optical and mechanical parts are
individually inspected. We believe the test of a
microscope's perfection lies, not only in the per-
fection of its component parts, but also in the
functioning of the instrument as a unit. Therefore,
each Spencer microscope is submitted to the criti-
cal test of “actual use’ by our skilled microscop-

ists before receiving an official “o.k.”

The microscope, as it will be deliv-
ered to you, is put through its operations exactly
as you will use it. If, by examination of test slides,
the skilled eyes of our microscopists detect even
the minutest flaw, the microscope is rejected. Only
when the microscope's optical and mechanical
perfection has been proven in actual use is the

official “o.k.” given.

This test is your assurance of pre-
cise, accurate performance—it is our assurance
you will always receive the full measure of tradi-
tional Spencer quality.

VISIT OUR EXHIBIT
From July 11 thru July 24 in the Exhibit

Room, nearly across the street from the
Oceanographic Laboratory.

Spencer Lens Company
Buffalo &3 New York

04

THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. XI, No.

93

TO

filled ns RESEARCH JOB

WE MAKE OUR OWN GLASS TO
INSURE STANDARDIZED PRODUCTION

REN,

The B & L Model GG Research Microscope has earned the confidence of every
research microscopist who has used it. This instrument has furnished its users
with accurate results with a minimum of effort on their part.

A wide variety of available B & L Accessories and equipment makes it possible
to select one of these instruments properly equipped for the particular type of
research work you have in hand.

Stability, rigidity and balance are three important characteristics of the GG
Microscope. Other features include a large stage (112 x 115 mm.) and a
complete centering substage. Complete details are contained in Booklet D-129.
Write for it to Bausch & Lomb Optical Co., 671 St. Paul St., Rochester, N. Y.

Bausch & Lomb

FOR YOUR GLASSES, INSIST ON Bal
ORTHOGON LENSES AND B & L FRAMES

——"£
,o8 Are

NY,
Om Py @
a

Vol. XI, No. 3

SATURDAY, JULY 18, 1936

Annual Subscription, $2.00
Single Copies, 30 Cents.

SOME FACTORS CONTROLLING THE
ELECTRICAL ACTIVITY OF THE BRAIN

Dr. Rate W. GERARD
Associate Professor of Physiology,
Umiversity of Chicago

Evidence from isolated neurones, inverterbrate
ganglia and the frog cerebrum, confirms the indi-
cations of im situ observations that individual
neurons are able to show a rhythmical electrical
beat in the absence of imping-

THE CHEMICAL ROOM, ITS PAST AND
ITS PRESENT. II.

Dr. Oscar W. RicHARDS
Instructor in Biology,
Yale University

Nine years have elapsed since Dr. Oliver S.
Strong described the origin and early develop-
ment of the chemical rcom in the first article of
this title.* During this time Dr. Strong has be-
— come Chemist Emeritus by the

ing nerve impulses. The re-
corded rhythms depend in part

M. BH. VU. Calendar

gradual process of turning the
work over to the writer. The

on the frequency of the indi-
vidual neuron, in part on the
degree to which the many
neurons affecting the electrode
are synchronized. An analysis
of some factors controlling
these phenomena has been un-
dertaken. ;
Synchronization is greatly
increased by polarizing the
brain (cat under nembutal)
with a weak constant current.
In sleep also large slow waves
suggest improved synchroniza-
tion. The play of afferent im-

TUESDAY, July 21, 8:00 P. M.

Seminar: Dr. W. W. Ballard: Ob-
servations on lens regeneration
in Amblystoma.

Dr. T. H. Bissonnette: Fertile eggs
from pheasants in January by
night-lighting.

Dr. Roberts Rugh: A quantitative
analysis of
tary-ovulation
frog.

At the close of the meeting a
moving picture entitled Experi-
mentally Induced Coupling in the

relation in the

Toad, Xenopus Laevis, by Dr. H. |

Shapiro of the University of Lon-
don will be exhibited.

FRIDAY, July 24, 8:00 P. M.

the anterior pitui- |

present well developed and ar-
ranged Chemical Room is a
tribute to Dr. Strong’s skill,
patience and industry. His
friendly counsel and continued
interest in the Chemical Room
are among the valuable assets
of the Marine Biological Lab-
oratory.

The Chemical Room meas-
ures the population of the lab-
oratory by the number of or-
der books issued. This num-
ber is less than the total num-
ber of investigators because

pulses ordinarily disrupts pre-
existing rhythms but may en-
hance them on the one hand

Lecture:

Dr. C. E. Renn: The eel
grass situation.

each class is represented by a
single book and one book may
be used jointly by several in-

or even abolish all potentials
on the other. These phenomena can all be seen
in portions of the optic pathways of the cat's
brain. In last (Continued on page 72)

TABLE OF

Some Factors Controlling the Electrical Ac-
tivity of the Brain, Dr. Ralph W. Gerard...... 67

The Chemical Room, Its Past and Its Pres-
ent, Lb) Pr. Oscar W. Richards). .:.i.02...c0.<:.---«: 67

Class Notes ...

Editorial Page

Items of Interest

vestigators from the same
university or working on the same program.
Nevertheless it is a useful unit. Students from the
same university and working in the same room

CONTENTS

Other Biological Laboratories ............c::0cees 77

Trout Lake Limnological Laboratory, Dr. C.
CUNEGEER? be: Ea scciccesonostiacou dene pacenpmaecs- nop netaon inosesanosesodsac0oce 78

The Significance of Mid-bodies, Dr. Henry J.
IEG? Grarogae id soce Bava: cobesore uhrdban-oneop render aBosooucos neanoatereesce A002 80

A Very Rare Specimen for Woods Hole,
George M. Gray

The Woods Hole Log

we rere 7 Lt «
oh peg Page

Jury 18, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

67

now share one book. In so far as possible begin-
ning investigators use the book of the worker
responsible for their work. Several books may
be issued to graduate students from the same
university when they are assigned to rooms in
different buildings to avoid geographical confu-
sion. This reduction in the number of order books
both follows the ruling that the beginning in-
vestigators are to obtain their supplies through
the person responsible for their work and lessens
the labor involved at the times when the cost is
computed for each book.

The main problems of the chemical room are
concerned with the rapid arrival of investigators
who desire to start work as soon as possible, and
the fact that the stocks are idle about two-thirds
of the year. Between the middle of June and
about July 10th sixty-five percent of the books for
the entire season are issued. During these three
weeks, about eight books are issued each day
(Fig. 1) and this number of groups of investi-
gators must be equipped. After this time the
investigators come slowly and the work of the
chemical room reduces to supplying the daily
working needs. In addition, during the same
period of time, four of the five classes must be
equipped; this would not be possible with
the present limited staff if it were not for the co-
operation of the class instructors in giving us
their supply lists sufficiently early to prepare and
assemble the orders before June 15th.

When the depression began seriously to affect
the biologists abéut 1932, fewer of the investiga-
tors stayed late in the season, but the last two
years suggested a trend toward a longer season
and an active force must be kept in the Chemical
Room later than during previous years. In order
to evaluate the change, the departure statistics by
books are being kept and the data so far ayail-
able are shown in Figure 1. The rapid emigra-
tion of investigators at the end of the season
floods the chemical room with the materials com-
ing back but as they will not be needed until the
next year much of the winter may be used to
restore order.

During the first of the depression years prices
declined more rapidly than the chemical room
budget and it was possible to increase stocks of
staple articles such as coplin jars, aquaria, finger
bowls, etc. A stock of heavy glass aquaria was

* The Collecting Net, 1929.

No. of Boorws Issveo OR RETURNED

My 7 ” Aue. °° A szpr ©

Lure oF Issve OR RETURN

FIGURE I.

obtained just before the devaluation of the dollar.
Imported glassware prices are now so prohibitive-
ly high that the Laboratory is not stocking them.
The cost of laboratory supplies has been increas-
ing for about two years. A year ago the NRA
put more or less uniform prices into effect,
but last winter’s bids on the large order showed
a highly competitive market with little agreement
outside of price-fixed items like Pyrex and Kim-
ball glassware. Five different prices were bid on
the same reagent grade chemical of one manu-
facturer. This makes efficient buying very dif-
ficult, requires some experience, and makes im-
perative a knowledge of the sources and factors
back of the laboratory supply house prices. The
only discounts now available are for cash and for
quantity orders.

In 1932 and 1933 many investigators expected
the chemical room to furnish some of the less
usual and more expensive items that they would
have brought with them betore their own budgets
were reduced. In some cases it was not possible
for the chemcial room to furnish these materials,
and in other cases the cost of the special material
was shared by the investigator. The cooperation
of the investigators, both then and now, is greatly
appreciated and has made possible carrying on
under these trying circumstances. As compared
with Dr. Strong’s last figure, the present chemical
room budget is reduced about twenty-six percent.
The budget at present barely covers the replace-

THE COLLECTING NET has been entered as second-class matter July 11, 1935, at the Post Office

at Woods Hole, Massachusetts, under the Act of March 3, 1879.

marine biological laboratories.

It is devoted to the scientific work at

It is published weekly for ten weeks between June 1 and September 15
from Woods Hole and printed at The Darwin Press, New Bedford.

the third floor of the Woods Hole station of the United States Bureau of Fisheries.

Its editorial offices are situated on
Between June 1

and October 1 communications should be addressed to Woods Hole, Massachusetts; at other times they

should be directed to THE COLLECTING NET, Garrison, N. Y.

(containing not less than 280 pages) costs $2.00.

Single copies cost 30c; a subscription

68

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 94

TABER ME

Standardized and Special Solutions (Liters )

Year 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935
Chemist Hale Wilson Hale Laug Laug Laug Laug
N NaOH 15) 8.6 10 1.4 7 2.6 Sal
0.1 N NaOH 7 4.9 3 4.8 2 5.8 a7
N HCl 10 10 9 1.8 1 0.9 3.5
0.1 N HCl 5 4 | 4.7 2 5.4 Dal
N HeSO, 8 0.7 1 1 0.8 0.7 19
0.1 N NasS.03 a Ae ee 4 2.6 5.0
N HAc 3 25 2; 0.5 0.3 0.3 1B
Mise. std. sols. 39.6 35.8
Totals standardized
solutions 48 30.7 29 14.2 17.1 58.9 56.6
Special solutions las | 141 26.1 28.0
Saline solutions 5 we { 91.7 64.3
Buffer solutions 12 10 13 14 31 18 24
Color tube sets (pH) 32 30 42 32 22 40 23
Investigators using
CO2* 5 5) 3 5 4 7
He 5 4 4 5 3 4
No 7 6 6 6 a 7
Oz 9 13 10 i) 13 14
Photographic
developers 38 36 70
Photographic
fixing fluid Bed 43 87 75
Distilled water (gallons) 2316 2215 2491 3422 2816

* Does not include truck size cylinders or lecture bottles.

ment supplies for the season and offers little for
use in building up stocks. The dream of enough
finger bowls, etc. to satisfy the needs of all the
investigators seems to be fading.

A considerable amount of information has been
obtained as to sources of unusual items required
in biological work. This information will be
shared with biologists if they will ask or write to
the person in charge of the Chemical Room.

The most useful single recent addition to the
chemical room is the visible index inventory sys-
tem which gives the location in the chemical room
of every item, shows any restrictions as to its
issuance (e.g., when signatures are required in
the narcotic book), the minimum stock inventory
taken in late August each year, and the amount
ordered on each winter order. The cards carry
this information for six years and have been a
great help in planning orders. This is not the
first inventory but the modern visible methods,
not available hitherto, have replaced the enorm-
ous books which Dr. Strong so ably described in

his previous article on the history of the chemi-
cal room. The index has been especially useful to
the winter force and to members of the staff dur-
ing their first year. There are now about 2,750
different items listed, of which 250 are dyes, 1500
are chemicals, and the rest general equipment.

The changing pattern of biological research
work and the growth of the Marine Biological
Laboratory have forced the shifting of items from
the chemical room to the apparatus room, and
vice versa from time to time. Changes have not
been made without careful consideration and the
occasional inconvenience caused the investigator
by a change is regretted. It is hoped the new
location of the apparatus room in the basement
of the Brick Building (Room 3) this summer,
will make it possible to locate all equipment and
to prevent any investigator losing time or energy
in determining what is real apparatus and what
is to be found with the chemicals and the glass-
ware.

Jury 18, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 69

A solution balance of 20 liter capacity has been
added which makes possible the preparation of
large quantities of special solutions with accuracy
and with economy of time and material. The staff
member responsible for the standard solutions
now has a small room within the chemical room
dehumidified by a stack heater for his balance.
It is possible to weigh accurately in this room
during foggy weather when the rest of the chemi-
cal room may have a relative humidity of over
90%.

Common tools have been made available for
24-hour loans to investigators at times when they
wish to do minor repair work or during packing
and unpacking. The apparatus room furnishes kits
of tools at a moderate rental when the use is re-
quired for the entire summer. The chief difficulty
is in keeping screw drivers, and the staff has
sometimes wished that those people who cannot
seem to remember to return screw drivers might
bring their own.

The chemical room has sponsored and_per-
suaded the Empire Biological Supply House to
make a 10-inch finger bowl which has all the ad-
vantages of the finger bowl and is large enough
to replace the familiar crystalizing dish. These
finger bowls break less easily, both when on the
shelves and in use in the laboratory and the field.

The demand for standard chemical solutions
has continued, and during the past six years the
staff member responsible for this work has had
chemical training equivalent to a Master’s de-
gree or better. For this work certified graduated
glassware is available and the solutions are as ac-
curate or better than stated on the label when they
are issued. The main changes in this branch of
the service have been toward quantity production
with no sacrifice of precision. The fact that these
are used for such a short season only precludes
the cost of some more permanent standards.

The amount of the special chemical work and
changes in its volume are shown in Table 1. The
demand for hydrogen ion color tubes reached a
high of fifty-six sets in 1927 when it was the cur-
rent biological fad. The next year the number
prepared and issued dropped to thirty-two, show-
ing that the hydrogen ion concentrations did not
solve many problems, and since then the demand
has been steady, except that the last year again
showed a marked drop. The year 1934 will al-
ways be remembered as the year of artificial sea
water and profusion fluids.

This year a joint service will be made possible
by the Chemical Room and the Apparatus Room
with a chemist in charge of adequate equipment
for measuring the hydrogen ion concentrations of
biological fluids. He will maintain apparatus in
proper condition and will measure the pH values

_ for investigators, thereby saving the investigator
the trouble of keeping delicate apparatus in order

and giving a greater accuracy than may be ob-
tained by the color tube method. Should this ad-
dition to the service be useful and well received,
it is hoped that it may be possible to extend it in-
to related fields in the future.

The publication of “The Formulae and Meth-
ods”’* by the chemical room staff has aided a great
deal in standardizing biological reagents and has
permitted us to place our policy on record. Special
solutions will be prepared when the formulae are
provided, insofar as the demands on the service
permit. The published formulae do make pos-
sible keeping certain of the more popular and
stable solutions on the shelves.

Some mistakes have been made and the writer
is greatly indebted to those investigators who have
come to tell him about them, thereby making it
possible to avoid making the same errors in the
future.

Many investigators write down in their order
book exactly what they need and their order can
be filled in a short space of time and with a mini-
mum amount of effort. About fourteen round
trips to the far end of the chemical room provides
a mile of walking on a concrete floor. Conse-
quently when investigators change their minds and
require a staff member to cover this distance three
or four times, it becomes a severe physical tax.
It is only apparent to the biologists who have
worked in the chemical room how little standard-
ization of materials there is in biological work.
Few people use the same materials and concentra-
tions, so there is no usual kind except for a very
few items.

Another problem is, how pure should the

chemicals be? For instance, the Fuelgen
reagents require normal hydrochloric acid.
However, that needs to be only approxi-

mately normal, say to the first decimal place,
rather than being accurate to three decimal places.
When the correct accuracy is specified, much ma-
terial and considerable time may be saved by
using the less accurate material when that is ap-
propriate and a more accurate material when it is
required. In recent years there have been less
demands for unopened bottles and every effort
will be made to maintain the purity of the chemi-
cal stocks so as to continue to justify this faith
of the investigators. The labelling of distilled
water carboys has been an aid in preventing their
use for other material and we especially appre-
ciate investigators cooperating in this matter, be-
cause a small contamination in the distilled water
might have far-reaching effects on the work of
the laboratory. Sometimes even careful investi-
gators contaminate the distilled water carboys. I
recall one case where we found chloride in the

* Collecting Net, I 1930, 5 (Suppl.) 12 pp.; IL. Ibid
1932, 7 (Suppl.) 8 pp.

70 THEY COLER CHING INET

[ Vot. XI, No. 94

carboy and upon investigating found that another
carboy had just been placed on the floor where
the salt water spattered into it.

Dr. Strong once told the writer a story about
one of the chemists during the early history of
the Chemical Room which may now be repeated.
It seems that this chemist used always to ask the
investigators to bring their own container when
they ordered a special solution. When the inves-
tigator brought a carefully cleaned and dried bot-
tle the chemist gave him some of his very best
solution, but if the individual just brought in a
wet graduate he dumped in almost anything at
hand, because, as he said, that biologist couldn't
tell the difference anyway. Such a_ procedure
could not be tolerated at the present time, but it
does illustrate how much might be saved if in-
vestigators would always specify the purity of the
reagents required for their work.

Another difficult problem is that of how
much material is required. Sometimes a very
large number of Syracuse watch glasses are
needed for a few days for a special experi-
ment. The requests for large numbers of an
item can ordinarily be cared for by listing
the material in the loan book. Then, should
some investigator arrive late in the season and re-
quire them, it is possible to ask those who have
large numbers to return as many as they can
spare. The investigators have usually approved
of this policy. How much should be kept in re-
serve stock for those investigators who come dur-
ing the middle of the season becomes a problem.
Material should not be idle on the shelves and
yet the person who comes later must have equip-
ment. Only by close cooperation can efficient use
be made of the laboratory equipment.

The modern beginning investigators seem to be
more sophisticated than they were a student gen-
eration ago. It has been a long time since some-
one has asked for a thousand dollars worth of
osmic acid in one solution, though we still get a
few unusual requests. Most of these are now
concerned with the problems of solubility. One
investigator was quite perturbed when we could
not make a molar solution of calcium sulphate.
Another investigator desired a_ considerable
amount of buffer of pH 15, which is not a prac-
tical solution for us to prepare. A few fads
come and go but for the most part they do not
arise from any large body of the investigators.
Most of the people now seem to have definite
problems which they are carrying on over a pe-
riod of years, and it would seem that much bio-
logical progress should follow this trend.

Glassware stored for some nine months is
bound to accumulate a certain amount of dirt on
its surface. When this glassware has not been
returned clean, then the problem of washing it in
the summer is serious. We have noted an in-

creasing tendency among the investigators to
clean their glassware before returning it to the
chemical room stocks, which has made possible
the issuance of much cleaner glassware the fol-
lowing summer. At the present time the single
winter man cannot clean the glassware which has
been returned dirty. Perhaps some day the staff
will be large enough to take care of this matter
so that clean glassware may always be issued. In
the meantime returning the glassware clean will
benefit all investigators.

A few years ago the chemical room was forced
to make up as much as three 180 pound carboys
of sulphuric acid into cleaning fluid. The result
of the use of so much chemical cleaning fluid was
that the sinks and plumbing of the laboratory
were getting possibly more cleaning than the
glassware. ‘here is also danger in the use of
chromium which will be mentioned later in terms
of research. Investigators have been asked not
to use any more than the minimum amount and
as a result it is believed that much of the labora-
tory equipment will be saved and possibly the
errors from chromium poisoning may be elimin-
ated.

During the last three years all fillable orders
which have reached the chemical room by three-
thirty o’clock in the afternoon have gone out the
same day or else the very first thing the next
morning. Frequently people come at four o’clock
and are very anxious to have a special solution
made up so that they may have it about closing
time. It has been observed that when these solu-
tions were put out on the window sill at closing
time they would be found there at opening time
the next morning. In emergencies assistance
will be given in any way possible and investiga-
tors are invited to ask help from the person in
charge at such times.

During a part of one year the Chemical Room
was kept open for two hours in the evening and
for a short time on Sunday. The result was that
a few orders came, but the number of orders was
so small that it did not justify the expense. It
is felt that the present arrangement will take care
of any unusual requirements without keeping the
chemical room open beyond the regular hours.
This may be changed when our budget is in-
creased.

Another type of service that was tried was to
put strings on the order books and send them to
the rooms with the supplies. A member of the
chemical room staff called at each room during
the morning of each day and took any orders to
the chemical room. This did not prove very satis-
factory either, because no one time of collection
was convenient to all of the different investiga-
tors, and we found that so few investigators used
this room service that the extra work was not
justified.

Jury 18, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 71

In making appointments to the chemical room
staff preference is given to those people who can
profit from the advantages to be obtained at
Woods Hole and who usually could not come to
Woods Hole without the small help from the
stipend offered by the positions. This policy has
led to the present members of the staff being
somewhat older, more experienced, and _ better
trained that they were in previous years. Few
junior members are appointed now because it has
been felt that during the depression the funds
should go to those biologists who really needed
the help. Staff members who are earning their
own way may be more efficient.

The members of the staff since the previous
report and the seasons that they have been here
are: Edgar M. Adams, 1933; Muriel Ashley,
1929; Mrs. A. P. Ayling, 1929; Eric Ball, 1936;
J. H. Bentley Jr., 1928; A. L. Chute, 1933-34;
John Deitrick, 1929-31; Mary Derrickson, 1935-- ;
Anna Dunlap, 1929; Pauline Frew, 1930--;
Dorothy Geib, 1930-31; Dorothea Haas, 1928,
1930; J. B. Hale, 1928, 1929, 1931; Katherine
Hawley, 1935; Sally Johlin, 1930-33; Elsa M.
Keil, 1928--; James B. Lackey, 1931-32; E. P.
Laug, 1932-35; Marie Laug, 1934; Anne Litz-
inger, 1929; Helen Lundstrom, 1930; W. G.
Marquette, 1936; Louise Mast, 1928, 1932-34;
Evelyn Mekeel, 1928; Ethyl Parpart, 1929-30;
R. M. Patterson, 1928; Oscar W. Richards,
1927--; Betty Spivack, 1928; Chester Stock,
1936; Sibyl Street, 1930-32; Betty Titlebaum,
1929; Mary C. Tuppez, 1932-33; F. E. Wilson,
1930; W. A. Wolff, 1929; and Anne Wollock,
SES

Staff members have been encouraged to do re-
search work either on problems of their own or
on problems of interest to the Chemical Room.
Of the latter type of problem the purity of chemi-
cals, especially the chlorides, has received study.
Some makes of basic fuchsin have been found
not to decolorize and are therefore unsuitable for
making Feulgen stains. Once that silver was
known to be an impurity of sodium chloride, the
chemical room arranged with Merck and Com-
pany to manufacture a sodium chloride suitable
for biological work. Dr. Laug has worked out
a method for quantitating very small amounts of
chromium such as are left to adsorb to glassware
after cleaning with sulphuric acid by chromate
killing Huid. Knowing the amounts that may
remain it has been possible for the writer to
demonstrate how important these amounts may
be in biological experiment.

Considerable attention has been given to the
problems of making large amounts of solution,
e.g. buffer solutions, with a high accuracy. An-
other problem that is being studied actively at the
present time is how best to prevent mold growing
during the parts of the summer when the rela-

tive humidity is high (80-95% within the Chemi-
cal Room some seasons). Several members of
the chemical room staff have worked on this pro-
ject and it is believed that the present summer
will give conclusions definite enough for a con-
structive program for the future. A serious
problem concerning the chemical room is that of
corrosion. The damp, salt air causes most mate-
rials to rust, and a great deal of the equipment
depreciates through corrosion to an alarming ex-
tent. Means of withstanding this corrosion are
being studied. Some materials like monel metal
withstand corrosion but are toxic to living organ-
isms, so that the problem is more complex than
if it were a mere matter of avoiding corrosion
alone.

The regeneration of Polychoerus and of Pen-
nari has been studied by Elsa Keil. The writer
has measured the rate of conduction of the nery-
ous impulse in W/ytilus and the effect of neuro-
phil drugs on Uca. The growth of Mytilus has
been measured for six consecutive years. The
toxicity of some metals and of Berkefeld filtered
sea water has been studied with the same mussel.
Small amounts of chromium which may remain
after usual washing of sulfuric acid-bichromate
cleaned glassware have been shown to poison
living organisms. Miss Florence Haynes and the
writer have measured the oxygen consumption
and carbon dioxide production of yeast and a
critical study of the yeast detector method for
demonstrating a possible mitogenetic radiation
was made with Dr. G. W. Taylor. The action
of thionyl chloride upon certain amids, urea, and
urethanes was investigated by F. E. Wilson.

In addition to the published studies, Dr. J. B.
Lackey has prepared material on Haminea and
Miss Katherine Hawley has studied means of
killing molds both of which will ultimately be
published. Both Drs. E. N. Adams and J. B.
Hale have prepared compounds used in their re-
search work for the doctorate. The work of Dr.
W. A. Wolff was largely concerned with the
chemical methods necessary for the accurate pre-
paration of large quantities of special solutions.
Miss Louise Mast studied certain protozoa, R. M.
Patterson worked on the nervous system of crabs,
Sibyl Street tested the effect of thyroxin on
embryonic development, and Mary Tupper start-
ed a program of measuring the freezing points
of killing fluids and saline media.

Research work by members of the Chemical
Room Staff usually has to be done outside of
Chemical Room hours and the above summary il-
lustrates that they are taking advantage of the
opportunities offered at the Marine Biological
Laboratory.

Very few changes have been made in the gen-
eral procedures used in handling orders and
materials in the Chemical Room. Since these have

72 THE, COLLECTING NET

[ Vov. XI, No. 94

been adequately described in Dr. Strong’s earlier
report they will not be repeated here. This re-
port has been prepared to show what the present
problems of the Chemical Room are, and how
they are being met. By stating these it is felt
that the investigators will be able to aid us in
improving the Chemical Room service. Criticism
should be given to the person in charge, and each
investigator may be assured that any suggestions
made will be carefully considered.

In closing it seems fitting to quote again the
last paragraph of Dr. Strong’s report, because the
spirit of it aptly expresses the program of the
Chemical Room.

“When it is remembered that the Chemical
Room supplies and distributes material not only
for several classes of quite different character
from each other but also for well over two hun-
dred investigators* working in very many varied

*[Now over three hundred.]

lines of research, it is evident that the problems
presented are quite unique. There is more anal-
ogy to the problems presented by the supplies
for a whole university rather than for any single
university department. As far as the writer is
aware these problems have, in the main, been
successfully met. It might also be delicately in-
timated, when it is remembered that some investi-
gators, especially perhaps those in their earlier
careers, do not welcome suggestions, that diplo-
macy and tact is a very desirable quality in the
members of the Chemical Room staff. The M.
B. L. obviously cannot provide a series of labora-
tories each equipped on a scale equal to that seen
in each university represented at the laboratory
and it is earnestly hoped that any suggestions
made by members of the Chemical Room staff
will not be received as though reflecting upon the
ability or experience of the investigator.”

SOME FACTORS CONTROLLING THE ELECTRICAL ACTIVITY OF THE BRAIN
(Continued from page 65)

analysis, however, the beat of the individual
cell must depend on its metabolic activity
and so on the physico-chemical state of its imme-
diate environment. Changes in the chemical state
of the blood have been shown to modify activity,
especially in the lateral geniculate body (where
most observations were made). Increased blood
potassium exaggerates a fast rhythm, calcium eli-
minates all potential variations except a very
smooth, slow change. Applied locally to the cor-
tex in isotonic concentration, potassium abolishes
responses to light. This effect is reversed by cal-
cium though by itself this also is able to block.
Preliminary experiments indicate that hypo-gly-
caemia induced by insulin acts as potassium, hy-

perglycaemia like calcium. Increased carbon diox-
ide decomposes the slow rhythm in man and in-
creases the rapid waves, while decreased carbon
dioxide tends to increase the magnitude and slow
the usual ten a second rhythm to about three a
second. Cyanide and methylene blue are able to
change the brain potentials markedly.

It is important that the intrinsic factors—chem-
ical, neural, and electrical—which control the beat
and synchronization of neurons be further eluci-
dated before the new electrical techniques are ap-
plied extensively in the field of human pathology.

(This article is based on a seminar report given
at the Marine Biological Laboratory on July 7).

PHYSIOLOGY CLASS NOTES

The past week in the Physiology course has
been one full of interest, curricular and other-
wise. On Wednesday Mrs. Harvey gave a dem-
onstration of her centrifuge microscope, showing
the definite layering which occurs in arbacia eggs
when centrifuged at the rate of 10,000 times per
minute. On Friday Dr. Prosser made a large
electric torpedo ray perform some tricks such as
lighting a lamp, ringing bells and giving electric
shocks to those who got in the circuit. It was
suggested by a student wit that one might be used
for a combination door mat and door bell.

Those people working with Dr. Hober felt
they had earned a night’s repose when they had
successfully cannulated the aorta, abdominal vein
and ureters of a frog. When this phenomenon

occurs, Dr. Hober beams and is glad; and when
it doesn’t, which is often the case, he is sympa-
thetic. But in either case in the midst of turmoil
and clumsiness he may be heard humming the
Soldier’s Chorus or Tannhauser. This is the third
summer Dr. Hober has taught here, so he is fa-
miliar to most of Woods Hole. During the win-
ter he and Mrs. Hober work at the University
of Pennsylvania to which they came two years
ago from the University of Kiel.

We were fifty strong when we started off on
our outdoor group experiment. The weather was
not propitious but there was no alternative. We
had to go on and surely this experiment would
work with the excellent cooperation of practically
all the faculty working right along with us, to say

Jury 18, 1936 |

RHETCOLEHCRING NED, 73

nothing of the resources of the other experts who
were accompanying us from related fields.

A sharp “beep-beep,” all hands signed on, and
the food supply checked by a wary eye. The
Winifred slid from the dock and sailed majesti-
cally out of the Eel Pond under the bridge;
suddenly we found the sun was with us after
all. A short two hours of steady put-put from
the boat and much singing under the direction of
Mr. Dugal and with the assistance of Drs. Hober
and Gerard brought us within reach of our goal.
Through the kind aid of some willing rowers and
the dories, and a few large plunges into the cold
water by our more dashing members, namely,
Messrs. Smith, Reed Fisher, Ratnoff, and Dr.
Irving, all were safe on the very white sands of
Tarpaulin Cove. It had convenient shade trees
and lacked biting insects. A neighborly farm of-
fered a means for the long talked of ball game
to which the male quota retired while the more
gentle sex played ball in the water. Hinally, hun-
ger overcame the best and worst of us and
lunch was served under the trees. We were par-
ticularly delighted to find that the lobsters, clams,
sweet potatoes, and chicken were still warm and
really hot to handle. Sandwiches, fruit, and
cakes supplied by the Mess and soft drinks com-
pleted the feast and with a small excess of every-
thing in full view, congratulations were extended
to the committee.

Very shortly after lunch, the diversions of the
group varied, really to the extreme. Some slept,
others had serious discussions, and one energetic
group, under Dr. Amberson, started off on the
five mile walk to the Point, where they hoped
to be picked up by the boat later. Some of the
true investigators went out in the boats and
found that bell buoys have to be turned off once
having been started to ring. They were unable
to elicit even a polite word from the wife of the
lighthouse keeper who had to trudge down to
stop the bell. The group further divided around
four o'clock and the boat party or softies, as our
former associates called us, pulled out leaving
the hardies to follow the footsteps of the pre-
vious walking party to the Point.

On reaching the Point, the boat left off the
provisions for supper for the second walking
party and took on the members of the first walk-
ing group. So we returned to Woods Hole only
about twenty-five strong but quite at peace with
the world in general.

But our day was as yet unfinished as once
again the weather rapidly became unpropitious
and this time seriously so. A rescue party was
sent out in the midst of much wind, lightning
and thunder to pick up the residue (to use Dr.
Irving’s own term which happened to include
him this time). This was a few hours earlier
than per schedule; so by nine o’clock we were

all safely accounted for with no casualties beyond
colorful sunburns, sore leg muscles, and, for a
few, very wet clothes.

ELizABeEtH Mayers and ALBuRTA Woop.

EMBRYOLOGY CLASS NOTES

This week the chronicle of events should be
written boldly in thick, black squid ink, applied
with a squid “quill.” Several circumstances mark
it important as the class begins to look into the
last part of its stay here.

Highlight number one was the study of the
complexly phototropic Bugula flagellata larva
under the direction of Dr. Grave. The students
were given the opportunity to watch the larvae
attach and multiply by budding into branching
colonies with snatching, “bird-head” avicularia.

Highlight number two: the development of
Loligo pealet, which was also studied under Dr.
Grave. The material had appeal for all types of
students. The vari-colored, pulsating chromato-
phores of a stimulated animal created universal
interest. Some students found the adults had an
efficient water-throwing weapon. The parasit-
ologists discovered a primitive tapeworm in the
viscera. The physicists admired the mechanism
for release of sperm from the spermatophores.
The souvenir hunters (and those who wrote up
the 7 to 6 baseball victory of the class over the
physiologists on Monday night) were united in
agreeing upon the value of the pen-bearing squid.

If the study of Nereis is thought not to be
a highlight in the course, the moonlight gather-
ing of the class at the Eel Pond may be so con-
sidered. The gathering witnessed the lunar-goy-
erned breeding habits of this marine annelid on
Wednesday night. In the morning Dr. Packard
had spoken on details of maturation and fertil-
ization as they may be observed in Nereis. On
Thursday Dr. Packard lectured on cell lineage,
using prepared slides of Crepidulus and develop-
ing eggs of the grotesque Chaetopterus as lab-
oratory material.

In the evening, the students were dragged from
their work by physiologists from the neighbor-
ing laboratory classroom. The softball cham-
pions had been challenged; but they easily car-
ried the day by defeating the embryo-micrurgists
12 to 6.

Highlight number four was the lecture deliv-
ered by Dr. Chambers. He explained, on Friday,
certain features of development as examined and
clarified by him in his work with micro-manipula-
tion.

Highlight number five was the official class
excursion to Tarpaulin Cove which started Sat-
urday under cloudy skies aboard the linifred.
Happily, the weather cleared so that by lobster-
eating-time, the sun was glowing brightly. The

(Continued on page 76)

TAC THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. XI, No. 94

The Collecting Net

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
at marine biological laboratories

Editorial: Ware Cattell, Elizabeth Thornton, Ur-
sula Reinhardt and Annaleida Snyder Cattell.

Business: Arthur C. Stirling, Amy Gamble, Boris
Gorokhoff and Marjorie Higgins.

Entered as second-class matter July 11, 1935, at
the U. S. Post Office at Woods Hole, Massachusetts,
under the Act of March 3, 1879.

THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY AND
THE COLLECTING NET SCHOLARSHIP
FUND ASSOCIATION

In the last number of THe CotLtectinGc Net
we had the privilege of printing letters concerning
Tue CotrectinG Net Scholarship Fund Associa-
tion from four of the largest marine laboratories
in the United States; they were the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory, the Scripps Institution of
Oceanography, the Biological Laboratory at Cold
Spring Harbor and the Mt. Desert Island Bio-
logical Laboratory. The first mentioned replied
in the negative to our suggestion that it appoint
an official representative as a trustee of the Schol-
arship Fund; in the case of the three other labor-
atories the directors of each consented to serve on
the board.

We are likely to be carried away on a wave of
enthusiasm and perhaps be too certain that THE
CoLttectinG Net Scholarship Fund Association
will be successful and, that in the end, with ad-
vice from older men who know more than we do,
it can be a very definite factor in contributing
to the advancement of research work in the bio-
logical sciences in America.

The Marine Biological Laboratory has given
no definite reason why it should not appoint a
representative as trustee and we think that the
question is one of considerable interest and im-
portance. We therefore invite discussion in our
columns concerning this point. Obviously there
are two sides to the question; we are convinced
that they should, the administrative officers of the
laboratory feel equally strongly that there is no
occasion for them to be officially represented in
the association.

Complimentary Research Space for Scholars

The following letter is being addressed today
by special delivery to the directors of several ma-
rine biological laboratories :

The plans for THE COLLECTING NET Scholar-
ship Fund are advancing rapidly; the following in-
dividuals have accepted appointments as trustees
of the fund:

Dr. T. Wayland Vaughan
Dr. Eric Ponder

Dr. William H. Cole
Professor Edwin G. Conklin
Professor C. E. McClung
Dr. Charles S. Dolley

At once another question is raised and I should
be glad to know the attitude of your laboratory
concerning it. In the case of many fellowship
and some scholarship awards for scientific work the
institution at which the ‘‘awardee” is to conduct the
work provides complimentary facilities for the in-
vestigator. It would of course be a great contribu-
tion to the fund if each laboratory could see its way
clear to grant free research space to individuals
holding a scholarship, so that the entire one hun-
dred dollars in each case could be applied towards
traveling expenses, board and room.

The recipients are highly selected. First the stud-
ents or young investigators working in a given lab-
oratory are carefully selected by the individual in-
stitution; the scholarship is then awarded under the
immediate advice of those most competent to know
who the best individual is to receive the award
which has been assigned to a given group. Prob-
ably in your laboratory there are now individuals
who are granted free research space for one reason
or another; it is hoped that you can consider the
possibility of extending this arrangement to recipi-
ents of COLLECTING NET Scholarships.

I shall appreciate it if you can write soon con-
cerning this matter so that an announcement—in
case you react positively to our suggestion—can be
made indicating that at certain laboratories recipi-
ents of THE COLLECTING NET Scholarships can
obtain complimentary facilities to carry out their
research work for the period of a single summer.

It is hoped that at least some of the answers to
the letter can be printed in the next issue of THE
CoLLectTinG NET.

Introducing

Dr. Vincent Moracurs, Medico de guardia
Clinic Hospital, University of Barcelona, Spain.
Dr. Moragues was born in Andraita, Majorca,
Spain, in 1911. He attended school both in Cuba
and Majorca; in 1934 he received his degree of
doctor of medicine from the University of Bar-
celona. While studying for his degree he worked
under Professors Pi Suner, physiologist, and Fer-
rer Solervicens, medical pathologist.

Dr. Moragues assisted at the hospital of the
medical school in Barcelona in his university days.
For the past years he has been guard or resident
physician at the hospital. Since his arrival in
America on May 4 Dr. Moragues has assisted
Dr. Michaelis at the Rockefeller Institute for
Medical Research in New York before his arrival
at Woods Hole. He is now a member of the
Physiology course. In the fall Dr. Moragues
will return to New York to continue his work
with Dr. Michaelis on physical chemistry applied
to medicine. Exele

Jury 18, 1936 |

THE COLLECTING NET 75

ITEMS OF

Dr. Cuarres S. Dottey, founder of the De-
partment of Zoology, at University of Pennsylvan-
ia, has been visiting Woods Hole this week. Dur-
ing their brief sojourn he and Mrs. Dolley were
the guests of Mr. and Mrs. Seward Prosser of
Penzance Point. On Thursday morning Dr. Dol-
ley left by car for Providence; soon after he
planned to return to Philadelphia where he is
completing a biography of Joseph Leidy for the
Philadelphia Academy of Science. Dr. Dolley has
spent the last two years in Japan and the Baha-
mas and will soon return to the latter islands
where he is very much interested in fostering the
study of marine flora and fauna.

The Atlantis, research ketch of the Oceano-
graphic Institution, returned from a ten day
cruise on Wednesday morning. Sailing under
excellent weather conditions, it took up station
about two hundred miles north of Bermuda for
five days in order to take the temperature and
salinity of the sea to a depth of about 2800 fath-
oms. Members of the crew were successful in
landing a nine and one-half foot shark. The ex-
pedition had a good run home, arriving safely
with its mascots, a mother cat and four baby kit-
tens. According to Captain Fred S. McMurray
the ketch made 238 miles on Tuesday, July 14.
Dr. H. R. Seiwell was in charge of the trip.

The Aflantis will leave July 20 under the di-
rection of Dr. Henry Stetson of Harvard for a
week's cruise dredging in the canyons or gorges
at the southern end of Georges Bank.

ADDITIONS TO THE DIRECTORY
Investigators

Clark, J. K. Trinity. OM 28. K 5.

duBuy, H. G. res. fel. phys. Harvard Med. Br 233.
Robinson, Quisset.

Gilchrist, F. G. asst. prof. zool. Pomona
mont). Br 323. Cassidy, Millfield.

Itoh, H. grad. zool. Pennsylvania. Br 220. McGinnis,
Quisset.

Kaufman, A. L. Franklin and Marshall (Lancaster).
OM base. Rohmling, Pleasant.

Kehoe, Catharine E. grad. asst. zool. Oberlin. Br
218. Budington.

Kindred, J. E. assoc. prof. hist. and emb. Virginia.
Br 106. D 311.

King, Jessie L. prof. phys. Goucher. Bot 4. A 305.

Kraatz, C. P. asst. zool. Cincinnati. Br 334. Dr.

Moment, G. B. instr. biol. Goucher. Br 217 J. Rogers.
School.

O’Brien, Helen instr. res. med. Pennsylvania. Br 109
and 311. Young, West.

Robertson, Kathleen M. res. asst. exp. biol. Toronto.
Br 107. H 6.

Strong, O. S. prof. neur. Columbia. Bot 5. Elliot,
Center.

Wheeler, N. C. asst. phys. Purdue. Br 126. K 5.

(Clare-

INTEREST

The “General Greene,” a member of the ice pa-
trol coast guard, arrived at Woods Hole last
Wednesday for a week's stay, with materials on
board for the Oceanographic Institution. Al-
though officially stationed at Woods Hole, the
patrol boat is on almost constant cruise and rare-
ly visits here. This week’s stay is being utilized
tor a general overhauling of the boat.

Mr. Mervin Parmer, professor of botany at
Butler University, Indianapolis, and Mrs. Palm-
er, are guests of the Rey. and Mrs. Kreke for a
short time.

NOTES FROM THE TORTUGAS LABORATORY

The Tortugas Laboratory was opened for work
on May 29. The men occupying tables and gen-
eral titles of the subject of their researches are:
A. A. Boypen, Rutgers University, ‘‘Blood-rela-

tionships among Invertebrates.”

H. H. Darsy, College of Physicians and Sur-
geons of New York, “Process of Differentia-
tion in Crustaceans.”

M. W. vbELAUBENFELS, Altadena,
“Physiology of Porifera.”

CASWELL GRAVE, Washington University, ‘“‘Chem-
ical Accelerators of Metamorphosis ot larvae of
Ascidians.”

F. R. Kriite, Swarthmore College, ‘Regeneration
in Holotheureans.”’

J. L. Lerrcu, University of California, “A Phy-
sico-chemical Study of Eggs of Echinoderms
especially the Sea-urchins, with Special Empha-
sis on the Relationship between Chemical Com-
position and Water Exchanges.”

GorpoN Marsu, University of lowa, ““The Rela-
tion of Light to E. M. F. in Valonia.”

C. E. Moritz, University of California, ““Embry-
ology of Mollusks and Crustacea.”

Paut A. Nicott, Washington University, (with
Grave), “Chemical Accelerators of Metamor-
phosis of larvae of Ascidians.”

H. H. Proucu, Amherst College, “Self Sterility
and Self Fertilization in the Ascidian, Poly-
carpa obtecta, and Related Species.”

B. H. Wittier, University of Rochester, “A
Study of the Early Embryology of the Logger-
head Turtle and of Sharks.”

Others expected during the second half of the
season are: :

L. R. Cary, Princeton University

F. R. Pitts, New York University

D. H. TENNENT, Bryn Mawr College
It is hoped that Dr. W. H. Longley will again

be able to assume charge of the Lahoratory be-

fore the season closes; in his absence Professor

Caswell Grave has been serving as acting execu-

tive officer.

California,

[ Vor. XI, No. 94

76. THE COLLECTING NET

DEAD WHALES ON THE BARNSTABLE DUNES

Dr. William Ballard, assistant professor of
biology, Dartmouth, visited a colony of black-
crowned night herons last week and discovered a
number of whales which were driven ashore last
year on the north side of Sandy Neck, otherwise
known as Barnstable Dunes. Because of their
flabbiness, the whales had been stranded on the
beach and had slowly expired. He found a clean
skull which he brought home.

Others being interested, he led a party of M.
B. L. investigators back; the group consisted of
Dr. Samuel E. Hill, Dr. Alfred M. Lucas, Gardi-

ner Moment, and Dr. William Puckett. The
whales were between 15 and 18 feet long, as far
as the party cared to investigate. They were well-
preserved, but sensitive workers at the M. B. L.
will testify to death at some long past date. In
the two miles which were covered, five whales of
the tooth variety were found.

The party brought home two more skulls, be-
sides a flipper and neck verterbrate. Dr. Bal-
lard’s whale skull is drying and incidentally airing
on the roof of the main building preparatory to
its trip to the Dartmouth Museum. —E.

“Crab Apple” by Theodore Packard is the play
which has been selected by the Penzance Players
for their summer presentation. Written by a
Yale drama student, this play has been presented
only in New Haven and in summer stock; it will
not be produced in New York until next season.
In fact, neither the publisher, Samuel French,
nor the playwright himself had an available script
for the players. Anxious to start immediately,
Miss Peggy Clark, technical adviser and member
of the Executive Board, motored down to Me-
tunik, Rhode Island, where the Yale drama school
runs the Theatre-by-the-Sea. This group was
giving the play, and from them Miss Clark ob-
tained a script with which to start rehearsals.
Try-outs will be held early this week and talent
outside the group will be considered.

CURRENTS IN THE HOLE

At the following hours (Daylight Saving
Time) the current in the Hole turns to run
from Buzzards Bay to Vineyard Sound:

Date A.M. P.M.
July 18 435) eee
July 19 56239530
July 20 O05 (Oeil)
July 21 648 7:04
July 22 AEN) 7 Sy
July 23 8al2"(8k35
July 24 8:58 9:25
July 25 9:40 10:16
July 26 L029) 10
July 27 11:24
July 28 W240} Zell)
July 29 125906
July 30 1535) a7,
July 31 243, 251
August 1 S32) rors
August 2 4:14 4:27
August 3 4:58 5:10
August 4 5:44 5:57
August 5 6:28 6:49

In each case the current changes approxi-
mately six hours later and runs from the
Sound to the Bay.

BOTANY CLASS NOTES

Mr. Earl T. Rose of the Iowa State Con-
servation Commission spoke on his work with
blue-green algae in Iowa lakes at the botany
seminar on July 13. The lakes in Iowa are quite
alkaline, and those which are heavily polluted are
infested with blue-green algae such as Aphani-
zomenon, Anabaena, and Microcystis. These or-
ganisms produce what are known as “water-
blooms.” The decomposition of these algae
causes decidedly unpleasant odors and decreases
the oxygen supply considerably. The fish are
killed, swimming and boating are made practical-
ly impossible, and the drinking water situation
becomes an important problem. Mr. Rose
worked with copper sulphate and was able to
control the algae growth to a considerable extent.
He also studied the life history of Aphanizome-
non while working on this project.

After Mr. Rose's talk, Dr. Drouet continued
his illustrated talk on his trip to Brazil. ... Tea
was, of course, an important part of the eve-
ning’s program. . On Sunday, 80 % of the
botany class descended on various parts of Cape
Cod, with the intention of having a holiday. But
somehow, they couldn’t leave Woods Hole with-
out their pails—and the pails came back full of
interesting specimens. There were also some
grand “Kelps” and two insects—a rhinoceros
beetle and an unidentified bug with lovely green
wings. Our Tuesday field trip had to be
postponed due to rough weather. However, the
sandwiches were almost as good on Wednesday,
and the field trip was a great success.

Martua THURLOW.

EMBRYOLOGY CLASS NOTES
(Continued from page 73)
goodly feed was followed by solicited exhibitions
of talent. Of course there was a baseball game
and of course there was harmony (with some
Irish element) on the homeward voyage.

The faculty and guests included Dr. Packard,
Dr. Schotté, Dr. Grave, Dr. and Mrs. Horstadi-
us, Dr. Holtfrater, and Miss Rebecca Tyson
(visiting Miss Hummell of the embryology *
class). D. de F. BAvER.

Jury 18, 1936 ] THE COLLECTING NET

NI
1 No

a :
THE SCIENTIFIC WORKERS AT WOODS HOLE AND 1000 SUMMER COLONISTS

An exclusive shopping center has developed at a point about a quarter of a mile north of the
center of the town of Falmouth, which is sometimes overlooked by individuals who are in Woods
Hole for the first summer. It is natural that the average person would tend to make his purchases
in the center because that is where he is most likely to go for other reasons. We are convinced,
however, that discriminating people who once become acquainted with the select shops, some of
which are branches of the large Boston stores, will frequently visit The Buyway.

LET YOUR BYWORD BE “BUY ON QUEEN’S BUYWAY”

THE NEW WAT-R-STAT EVERY FEMININE BIOL

ALL STEAM PERMANENT AT WOODS ee OLeGish
ANASTASIA’S will be in d i i
terested in buying one of my hand-
EUGENE BEAUTY SHOPPE made silver seahorse pins for $1.00.
Anne Crowell, Prop. S. G. PANIS

16 QUEEN'S BUYWAY SURE), IASI No. 3 Parkway Shops, Palmer Avenue
Phone 360 Falmouth Massachusetts

FRESH FILENE'’S

NEW CLOTHES of Boston

just arrived Presents an excellent selection of sum-
mer dresses, coats, millinery, sports-
Wherever the smart woman goes in Sum- wear, beachwear and accessories.
mer .. . whatever she does . . . we can

We invite you to visit our shop in the

dress her for it in brand-new things. Im- ; = |
: suyway, a branch of one of New Eng-

portation fresh from the Paris midseason land’s largest stores. Here you will find
collections. Printed chiffons, just from a wide selection of tempting styles for
the designers. Tennis and golf dresses .. . all occasions.
bathing suits... hats ... accessories... . ;
8 . 5 May we look forward to greeting
e, D> a)

tweed topcoats .. . evening things . . . and

you?
all, all, absolutely new.

Fes

Caith oodel Shops

CAPE COD BRANCH 4 PARKWAY, FALMOUTH

Hurwitch Bros.

QUEEN’S BUYWAY
FALMOUTH

DRESSES FOR SPORTS, AFTERNOONS CHIC HATS. WRAPS COATS
AND EVENING WEAR Luo eI2 AISI Wind (ehele: HOSIERY

78 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vov. XI, No. 94

SEALS AND SENTIMENTAL SCIENTISTS

The baby seals of the Fisheries enclosure,
“puppies” to the initiated, fill a unique role in the
life of Woods Hole. If one were to calculate
their value to society, these versatile creatures
would rank as high as many an example of a so-
called “higher” genus at Woods Hole.

Behind that benign, world-wise, though yet so
young, exterior lies a wealth of material for data
on respiration during deep sea diving, etc., for the
scientist. Yet there is more to their role than
that. What person present at Dr. Laurence Irv-
ing’s seminar “Some respiratory characteristics of
the seal and their relation to diving,” when this
Canadian scientist opened his talk on respiration
with a reference to the seals of the Fisheries en-
closure, could help but feel the warm wave of
sympathy and good nature that swept over that
usually cool and reserved audience. For, if the
truth be known, the seals have helped to human-
ize the scientists. Whole droves of laboratory
workers make daily pilgrimages to the enclosure,
and those bored souls, who, in a moment of
weakness consented to accompany their “seal fan”
friends, often themselves succumb to the charms
of the plump lazy little devils. Investigators lean
against the railing in rapt attention, eyes fixed
upon the sleek, usually motionless forms at rest
upon the softly rocking float. The least quiver
of motion, the least flicker of an eyelash, 1s re-
warded with ingenuous sighs of delight. When
the seals on rare occasions stretch to their full
length, arch their backs, and with a tremendous
yawn, describe a complete circle, tip of nose
touching tip of tail, the devotees know perfect
joy.

Excitement runs high when, with an expert
wiggle and a rapid flip-flap of flippers, as comi-
cal as it is unexpected, one of the “puppies” takes
to the water. A mildly surprised and quizzical
expression momentarily appears in the eyes of the
remaining “puppy,” who contemplating such ex-
ertion at first with mild disapproval, later thinks
better of it and joins his playmate in the water.

Perhaps it is their very youth that so captures
the hearts of the onlookers. Perhaps it is the
thought of these two lost little creatures so re-
moved from heir normal environment, so artless-
ly furnishing a Roman holiday for the onlookers,
that transforms matter-of-fact scientists to
shameless sentimentalists. As the sun begins to
set on the baby seals hemmed in by grim stone,
the charming “Seal’s Lullaby” of Kipling recalls
to mind their freer, happier brothers and sisters:

Oh hush thee my baby, the might 1s upon us

And black are the waters that sparkled so green.

The moon o'er the combers looks downward to
find us

At rest in the hollows that rustle between.

Where billow meets billow

There soft be thy pillow.

Ah, weary wee flipperling

Rest at thy ease.

The storm shall not wake thee

Nor sharks overtake thee,

Asleep in the arms of the slow swinging seas.
RitA GUTTMAN.

TROUT LAKE LIMNOLOGICAL LABORATORY
Dr. C. Juday, Director
(August 31, 1935)
DIATOM INVESTIGATIONS

A study of the diatom flora of the lakes of
northeastern Wisconsin is being made by Dr.
Paul S. Conger, Research Associate of the Car-
negie Institution of Washington. Up to the pres-
ent time collections have been made from differ-
ent depths in more than 40 lakes. The lakes se-
lected for this investigation vary widely in chem-
ical content, and also in physical and topographic
features. One of the main purposes of the study
is to determine the specific ecology of character-
istic species of diatoms that are found in the
Trout Lake region. Additional lakes in the dis-
trict will be studied in subsequent years as well
as those in other parts of the state.

Some other phases of this diatom research
upon which studies are being made simultaneous-
ly are the relative abundance and quantity of dia-
toms in soft and hard water lakes, the method of
sedimentation and composition of the lake sedi-
ments, and the dissolved silica relationships in
those lakes that have a very low mineral content.
A marked difference of diatom flora has been
noted in the soft and medium hard water lakes
of this region and the much harder water lakes
of the southeastern part of the state, but more
information is desired on this point. The type
and extent of response of the diatoms to expert-
ments on the fertilization of the water of Weber
Lake by other members of the Laboratory staff
will also be studied.

Dr. J. P. Warbasse of Penzance Point will hold
a Penzance Forum at his home on Sunday, July
19, at 3:30 in the afternoon. The subject of the
meeting will be “The Cooperative Movement”
and will be discussed by Dr. J. P. Warbasse of
the Cooperative League, Mr. R. N. Benjamin of
National Cooperatives, Inc., and Mr. T. W. Metz-
ger of Pennsylvania Cooperatives.

Dr. Rurus WEAVER, noted anatomist of Phil-
adelphia, died in his ninety-sixth year on July 15.
Dr. Weaver had been a member of the faculty of
Hahnemann Medical College which was formerly
known as Pennsylvania Medical College. Dr.
Weaver was distinguished for his work in the dis-
section of the human nervous system.

—

a

Jury 18, 1936 ] THE COLLECTING NET Us}

DEPARTMENT OF NUTRITION!

Do you realize that some of the intelligent members of your group take the opportunity of
relieving the deadening influence of repeated meals by eating outside? Join them and enjoy
our food.

THE BREAKWATER HOTEL THE TOLL HOUSE THE BREAKERS

EAT A GRAND DO YOU RNOW 2

THAT A LOT OF YOUR FRIENDS ARE

CAPE COD SHORE DINNER | | pied cinta ice

ae CAPE COD
THE BREAKERS| | TOLL HOUSE

It will only cost you $1.25 and you and are enjoying the murals of Cape Cod
will enjoy the concert music. which include Woods Hole scenes. Lob-
ster, Steak and Chicken Dinners. Visit us

OLD SILVER BEACH on Main Street in Falmouth.
West Falmouth 2 May FT dWlott

THE BREAKWATER HOTEL

just as cheaply as at the Labora-

Your guests can get luncheon here Tasty Luncheon... . . $1.00
tory Mess Hall. Evening Dinner... . . $1.50

io)

0 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. XI, No. 94

THE SIGNIFICANCE OF MID-BODIES
Dr. Henry J. Fry
Visiting Investigator, Department of Anatomy,
Cornell University Medical College

Mid-bodies are generally regarded as a vesti-
gial homologue of the cell plate of plant cells,
persisting in many animal cells. The hypothesis
is here suggested that they are phenomena of
focalization—the places where the spindle fibers
are pinched together by the cleaving cell—and
that they have no existence as individualized cell
components.

They may be present or absent in cells of the
same type in closely related species, depending
upon whether or not the spindle is still present
when division occurs. In different cell types of the
same species they may be rings, minute dots, ir-
regular masses, or exhibit other configurations.
Their size and structure is closely related to the
detailed manner in which the spindle is focalized.
They often differ from cell to cell of the same
kind on the same slide. If cells which ordinarily
have mid-bodies are subjected to environmental
modifications causing the spindles to disappear
just prior to cleavage, no mid-bodies arise. If
the fixative employed demonstrates coarse spindle
fibers, mid-bodies are relatively large; if delicate
ones are shown, they are small or absent, the de-
tails differing widely under different conditions.

The conclusion is therefore suggested that fo-
calization of the fibers at the mid-region of the
spindle often involves the formation of minute,
sharply demarked structures which look like in-
dividualized cell components, but which are actu-
ally phenomena of focalization. If this conclusion
is valid, we must carefully consider the nature of
those bodies which occur at the ends of the spin-
dles, where the spindle-fibers, and in many cases,
astral rays, are also focalized. It is suggested
that in many cells the supposed central bodies are,
like mid-bodies, transient phenomena of focaliza-
tion, and not individualized cell components. This
suggestion, of course, has no significance for
those central bodies which are also blepharoplasts,
and certain other classes, which are stable struc-
tures, and exist in complete absence of areas of
focalization.

The fact that when the spindle is pinched to-
gether, mid-bodies appear at that place, indicates
that it is not homogeneous in structure, as it
generally appears to be in the living condition.
If it were homogeneous, the pinching should not
result in the formation of bodies. That they do
occur supports the conclusion that the living
spindle has some kind of linear organization.
(This article is based upon a seminar report pre-

sented at the Marine Biological Laboratory on
August 13, 1935.)

A VERY RARE SPECIMEN FOR
WOODS HOLE

GEORGE M. Gray

Curator of Museum, Marine Biological
Supply Department

About August 13th, Mr. Wamsley, the veteran
preparator at the Supply Department, brought to
me a specimen with which he was not familiar,
and which one of the collecting crew, Mr. Riggs,
had dug on one of the trips to Naushon Island.
It proved to be, as at first surmised, Candina
arenata, or “Tailed” Holothurian, one of the very
rarest of the Holothurians of the Woods Hole
region.

This specimen was of a flesh color, deepening
to pink at the anterior end. It was about 314
inches long and a little over 14 inch in diameter
at the anterior and larger end. This tapers back
to form the “tail” which latter is 1/1g inch in di-
ameter at the end. Of course the animal can
change its shape to some extent, but this is the
normal form.

The Caudina arenata was the first living speci-
men I had seen of this creature, and I was over-
joyed to have the pleasure of adding it to the
Laboratory Museum. It was placed in a finger
bowl of clean sea water where it gradually put
forth its tentacles, about fifteen in number. These
were rather short, each one terminating in four
finger-like tips. After the animal was narcotized,
it was preserved and is now on exhibition in the
Laboratory Museum.

As stated above, it is very rare in the Woods
Hole region. According to Dr. H. L. Clark, it
was admitted to this locality on the strength of
Professor Verrill’s report (73b) that Professor
Webster took it at Woods Hole, and on the exis-
tence of three small specimens in the collection
of the U. S. National Museum, labeled ‘‘off Cut-
tyhunk 181% fathoms.”

Sumner in his “Biological Survey” mentions
“Lower half of Buzzards Bay: 8 records;
dredged in 6 to 13 fathoms. One record mouth
of Vineyard Sound, 171% fathoms, sand.” He
also mentions several other dredging stations
where a few were taken.

Caudina arenata sometimes washes up on Re-
vere Beach after heavy storms, and I think it has
been taken at or off Block Island by a Mr. San-
ford. I believe it has not been taken by any of
the Invertebrate classes, and I have not known of
its being taken before on any of the shore or
dredging trips of the Marine Biological Labora-
tory staff. This particular specimen was taken
on the flats, in shallow water (about a foot deep)
at Naushon Island.

Jury 18, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET : 81

THE FITZ MICROMANIPULATOR WITH

twelve important features

Grouped controls which permit selection
and actuation with one hand.

Co-ordinated controls which produce na-
tural movement under the microscope.

Complete bilateral symmetry by means of
a right and left hand arrangement of con-
trols.

A device for immediate return to oper-
ating position after withdrawing for set-
ting or changing the moist chamber, tools,
etc.

Sturdy, wearproof differential screw and
wedge action.

Write for details which are contained in
booklet D-132.
Co., 671 St. Paul Street, Rochester, N. Y.

Bausch & Lomb Optical

6.

7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

May be operated from either side, front,
or rear of optical axis, or from inter-
mediate positions.

Simplicity of technique.

Full attention can be given to observation.
Ease of selection and rotation of controls.
Rapid operation.

Sturdy construction means durability.

Specimen may be attacked from any azi-
muth.

SEE THE B & L EXHIBIT
July 25 to August 1
R. G. THOMPSON
Main Street, Woods Hole, Mass.

Bausch & Lomb

FOR YOUR GLASSES, INSIST ON Ba&L
ORTHOGON LENSES AND B & L FRAMES

MADE IN U.S. A.

a
VERNIER ANALYTICAL BALANCE #1008AA

With patented device enabling a range of
weighings from 0-100 milligrams to be made
without handling weights, and controlled by
knob shown at lower right hand side of illus-
tration, Can be operated while beam is in mo-
tion and without opening front door of balance.

Manufactured by

VOLAND AND SONS, INC.
(Established 1888)

NEW ROCHELLE, N. Y.
Send for our Complete Catalog K

CONSTANT TEMPERATURE
EQUIPMENT and SERVICE

Sensitive Thermoregulators

easily adjustable for air or
liquid immersion
Supersensitive Relays

to control heavy
loads

heating

LoLag Immersion Heaters
flexible, in copper and steel
sheaths; can be furnished
in any length up to 10 ft.,
and any power rating up
to 1500 watts

Constant Temperature Baths
general and special pur-
pose; constant to +0.02°C;
high and low temperatures,
covering the range from
-10°C to 200°C; available
in all sizes and styles

Constant Temperature

Service
Aminco engineers can de-
sign constant temperature
baths of all descriptions.

Above: Aminco Get our quotations on spe-
= s 3 cial equipment and advice
Refrigerated Bath on choice of heaters or

- 5 ‘ontrol 1
No. 1200-30 Con OULU UALS:

Write for Aminco Catalog

AMERICAN INSTRUMENT CO., Inc.

8010-8020 Georgia Ave.

Silver Spring, Md.

__THE COLLECTING NET

*,

20° 0 a 0D 0D) DD

[ Vor. XI, No. 94

{OOO SS) A) 0 6

. s
Collecting Equipment
For every need—from backyard to
sea shore—Turtox collecting equipment
can be depended upon to serve the Biol-
ogist well.

Refer to your Turtox catalog and
write us about special equipment.

TU moa ye UCTS

The Sign of the Turtox
Pledges Absolute Satisfaction

GENERAL BIOLOGICAL SUPPLY HOUSE

(Incorporated )

761-763 EAST SIXTY-NINTH PLACE

LS SS) 0S

CHICAGO

Exhibit |

in !
Lecture Hall j
Under direction of
|

|

Mr. Emil Davidson

Biological Life Histories—“Bren-
del” Botanical Models,
Preparations, Charts:

Spaltholz
Anatomical,
Neurological, etc. Skeletal
terial ; l

ma-
Human and Zoological
models; Anatomical and Zoologi-
cal. Promar Microsopic Projec-

tion and Drawing Apparatus.

CLAY=“ADAMS CO.

25 East 26th Street New York, N. Y.

Jury 18, 1936 ]

__THE COLLECTING NET __ 883

Ort

Vaca eemvemmcamoems% — %

NON-CORROSIVE
MICRO SLIDES |!

0D 0 DDO (DO ED 674

An Entirely New “Mathews”

Principles of Biochemistry

3y ALBERT P. MatuHEws, Ph.D., Carne-
gie Professor of Biochemistry, University
of Cincinnati. Buckram, 6 x 9, 512 pages,
$4.50. (Ready late July).

This is an entirely new and separate book
from the well known standard text, Math-
ews: Physiological Chemistry. Written at
the repeated and urgent request of many
teachers it embodies in a shorter form much
of the famous author’s thorough knowledge
of the subject plus his forty years of ex-
perience in teaching biochemistry to medical
students.

This long and eagerly awaited volume
will prove itself a blessing to teachers and
students at medical and premedical schools
where the time allotted to instruction in bio-
chemistry has been reduced. Where time
permits the use of the standard Mathew’s
textbook is still advisable. The new book
will also prove just right for a large number
of dental, pharmacal, agricultural and gen-
eral colleges, being easily adaptable to
courses of various lengths, and carrying all
the authority and reliability of the large
complete standard work.

Realizing that biochemistry is one of the
most difficult subjects for the average stud-
ent Dr. Mathews has endeavored to so sim-

We offer Microscope Slides in two grades;
First Quality No. 11762 and Clinical
Grade No. 11764.

Both grades are made from non-corrosive, al-
most colorless glass. They are remarkably
uniform in thickness (averaging slightly over
1.1 mm); carefully cut to size, and have bevel-
ground edges. No 11762 Slides have been in-
dividually selected and are offered as the best
slide now available.

No. 11762—Microscope Slides—First Quality.
Special precautions are taken in their manu-
facture to prevent mechanical abrasions to the
surface of the slide during the grinding pro-
cess. Each finished slide is individually select-
ed for freedom from bubbles, scratches, and

0 ES OO

Buea. plify and coordinate the general principles
Price, PCT ZTOSS ......cccccescccscscsssesssesssssessseeees 1.20 and principal facts as to make them easier
10 gross lots, per Bross................... 1.00 to grasp and remember. In matters open to
ae ees oe hee oye eee a : a more than one interpretation he gives the
100 gross lots, per gross (80 best he knows in the light of present infor-

RP MIITG£—Microscope Slides—Olinioal Grade. mation, endeavoring to leave in the student’s
imnadal Slides arelintendéd for student and) all mind a definite conclusion even though it
routine work where a perfect selected slide may later require modification. All practi-
such as our first quality No. 11762 is not re- cal exercises have been omitted since they
quired. They are made from the same special are otherwise available such as Koch: Prac-

non-corrosive colorless glass as our No. 11762 S ] Bes 5 pee ™ sae
Bitte ast individhally selected so that occa- tical Methods in Biochemistry. Also to keep

sional defects may be found. the book short almost all references to the
= ah literature have been omitted. Here then is
HCO) POLS TOSS ac. cattrecsstnciscstesseisecetesieisseeeoee +15 ‘ eee roar A
i) Pees 0Gve, aoe Geese 68 the most up-to-date, authoritative, short, yet
25 gross lots, per gross... 63 reasonably complete presentation of modern
50 gross lots, per gross... 5h) biochemistry available.

100 gross lots, per gross.................. .

Send for a Copy

WILL CORPORATION WILLIAM WOOD & CO.

LABORATORY APPARATUS AND CHEMICALS BALTIMORE, MD.
ROCHESTER,N.LY.

a

iu

ww
ei
Se ee ee

0

“S

9

*%

8 13 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 94

For Anything You Want to Know About
REAL ESTATE

Look for Reports Here
from

KATHRYN SWIFT GREENE

LET THE BAND BOX
Keep You in Readiness for All the
Summer Parties

It'll add a lot of enjoyment to your summer to
always have your wardrobe spic-and-span—fresh-
ly cleaned and ready to go anywhere at a mo-
ment’s notice!

Our prices are reasonable—and the quality of
our cleaning the most satisfactory you can find.
Send your cleaning with your laundry; it will be
returned at the same time, or call Falmouth 137.

Again we emphasize the fact that our laundry
and cleansing work is done in our own plants by
skilled local operators.

THE BAND BOX CLEANSERS
A Division of Robbins Laundry

— When In Falmouth Shop At —

ISSOKSON’S

WALK-OVER SHOES, BATHING SUITS
SPORT CLOTHES

Shoe Repairing While You Wait

To the Visitors and
Residents of Woods Hole

We wish to extend a cordial invitation
to visit either of our gasoline service sta-
tions. In Falmouth village on Depot
Avenue and East Main Street these colo-
nial buildings are the homes of friends
to your car—men who will fuel, lubricate
or render free services to keep your car
in readiness for the road.

GULF PRODUCTS,
GOODRICH TIRES

—and modern equipment await your
service.

Falmouth Coal Company

W. A. Dyer, Prop.

QUALITY LUNCH AND QUALITY SERVICE

Texaco Products

Gasoline and Oil

WOODS HOLE GARAGE

COMPANY

OPPOSITE STATION

SPANISH LINEN SHOP

IMPORTED ART LINEN

Infant Wear — Laces — Handkerchiefs

Corner WALKER ST. and MAIN ST.
Falmouth

THE OASIS LUNCH

Stationery

Sick Room and Photographic Supplies
Ballantyne’s Ale and Beer

— On Draught —

AUTHORIZED BUICK SERVICE
Repairs All Makes of Cars
MOHAWK & GOODYEAR TIRES

AT

BRACKETT’S
GARAGE

DEPOT AVENUE

FALMOUTH

Jury 18, 1936 ] THE COLLECTING NET ’ 85

fer

0S a) ee ee ee:

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE
BIBLIOGRAPHIC SERVICE AND
AUTHORS’ ABSTRACTS

If you publish in any Wistar Institute jour-
nal, your paper, in abstract form, is announced
on two separate occasions, prior to the ap-
pearance of the complete article in a journal:

1st. In the Advance Abstract Sheets of the

Bibliographic Service, issued on the
15th of each month.

2nd. In the form of Bibliographic Service

Cards, issued semi-monthly.

Subscription to the Advance Abstract

!
Sheets—$3.00 per year. :
!
'

°,
Do =

| THE NEW
MACHLETT AUTO-BURETTE
\

Eliminates All Fussing

—A half turn fills—A half turn
empties

Now in Use the World Over

Self-Filling
Self-Setting at |
Zero Point |
Sturdy, Timesaving, |
Non-Flooding |
Overflow Solution Returned |
Automatically to Reservoir
All Graduations as per Bureau
of Standards Specifications

Subscription to the Bibliographic Service
Cards—$5.00 per year.

The following journals are published by The
Wistar Institute:

Journal of Morphology

The Journal of Comparative Neurology

The American Journal of Anatomy

The Anatomical Record

The Journal of Experimental Zoology

American Journal of Physical Anthropology

Journal of Cellular and Comparative Physiology

The Journal of Nutrition

Reprints of articles appearing in the above
journals may be purchased at prices quoted
on the Advance Abstract Sheets.

For further information address

We supply this instrument in
micro sizes with delivery tip
ground to fit standard Luer
needles for those wishing great-
est possible control.

Write for Bulletin ‘‘A-B’’ giving
a full particulars

Pat. Applied For

E. MACHLETT & SON |

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE OF ANATOMY Est. 1897
AND BIOLOGY 220 East 23rd Street New York, N. Y. |
36th Street and Woodland Avenue | Special Apparatus Supplied Reasonably and
Philadelphia, Pa. Promptly to Order

*,
°F) eee em ome em oem.

*,
> > 0) 1 ED)
me i03e

C00 OO SOS 0S 0) 0 OS 0S 0S SE YE REE oy

ZEISS

STEREOSCOPIC
DISSECTING MICROSCOPE XV

with

Inclined eyepieces and large field of view,
Revolving objective carrier,
Built in illuminating device for incident light.

Magnification: 16 to 216x

Leaflet Micro 510 upon request

485 FIFTH AVE., I 728 SO. HILL ST.,
NEW YORK ) NC, Los Angeles, Cal.

Comoe oem cam cam i's

SC Ce ee 0 0 |) ee 0 0 0 0 0 ce

[moan een aen ae ee eee ee ee en as Ce eee amas ame cem:

86 Rie COOLER CRING INE [ VoL. XI, No. 94

WOODS HOLE LOG SCHOLARSHIP FUND

The Woods Hole Log a while ago announced a
scholarship fund the money from which is to be
given to a Woods Hole boy or girl who has com-
pleted his high school education and who wishes
to continue his studies either at college or take
training in some special field such as music, paint-
ing, or in one of the trades.

Lhe following individuals have consented to
serve on a committee to handle the funds and
award the scholarships:

Mr. Paul Dillingham, Superintendent of Fal-
mouth Schools, Mr. Walter Luscombe, Mr.
Charles E. L. Gifford, Mr. J. W. Vallis, Mrs.
Robert Veeder, Mrs. Oscar Hilton, Mr. Henry
Haddon, Mr. Samuel Cahoon.

A year or two ago The Woods Hole Log made
an initial gift of $25.00 to the scholarship fund;
this money will be available for award next fall.
In addition, ten per cent. of the receipts of all lo-
cal advertising in THe CoLLectinG Net during
the present summer will be turned over to the
scholarship committee in the beginning of Sep-
tember. Last year the total value of the local ad-
vertising was $501.22. We shall certainly have
as much local advertising as last year and thus
the committee can be assured of having $80.00 to
award in September.

The decision as to whether the scholarships
shall be awarded as $50.00 scholarships or $100.00
scholarships rest with the committee.

We believe that in the same way that THE Cot-
LECTING Ner has been able to build up its schol-
arships for laboratory students that sooner or
later it might be equally successful in accumulat-
ing a number of small sums that would be a defi-
nite contribution to the residents of Woods Hole.
In this connection it does not seem out of the way
to remark that individuals who purchase from the
stores advertising in THE CoLLectine Ner are
making both a direct and an indirect contribution
to the scholarship fund. We therefore take the
liberty of asking our readers to pay special atten-
tion to the advertisements contained in this issue
with the hope that they will give the firms taking
space special attention when purchasing goods or
service.

THE TRAFFIC SON IN WOODS HOLE.
I understand that my note in the last issue of
Tue CoLLtectinc Net has initiated a certain
amount of discussion concerning the advisability
of permitting cars to park on the south side of
Main and Water Streets. That is what is was
supposed to do! Chief Baker, upon having my
letter of last week called to his attention, said that
he had given a great deal of thought to the park-
ing situation in Falmouth and Woods Hole (as
indeed he has) and that he always sought to com-
promise between the conflicting wishes of the
owners of the cars at rest and those in motion.
The latter group must, for any given day, be in
the majority. May we suggest to Chief Baker
that he take a vote on Saturday afternoon, poll-
ing both groups—and then let his conscience be
his guide! —C. N.

On Sunday afternoon a Ford cabriolet driven
by Evelyn Thompson from Worcester, Massa-
chusetts, crashed into a telephone post on a curve
on the Sippewissett Road near the Cape Codder
Hotel. The owner of the car, Dr. Donald K. Me-
Clusky, also of Worcester, was a passenger in the
car.

The left front end of the car was demolished
and the windshield broken. Both occupants were
injured and medical attention was promptly given
at the Cape Codder where both persons were in —
residence.

The impact of the car against the telephone post
shifted the latter several inches to the East.
Photographs were taken by one of the investiga-
tors at the laboratory after the incident; if they
turn out well one will be printed in the next issue
of THe CoLLectine NET.

Mr. and Mrs. Charles T. Crocker, 3rd, have ©
rented Walter O. Luscumbe’s cottage on Nobska
Road. Their son, Peter, and two daughters, Pa-
tricia and Mary, are expected to arrive soon with -
Mrs. Crocker.

Jury 18, 1936 ] THE COLLECTING NET 87

— REMEMBER —

BEALE’
IS THE PLACE TO 5 BARCLAY

DINE AT THE

FOR
BEACH SANDALS AND
eee” DANCE TO THE MUSIC
SNEAKERS OF
FOR
MEN, WOMEN and CHILDREN JOE SMITH’S ORCHESTRA
STREET SANDALS ON ROUTE 28, WEST FALMOUTH

KID and LINEN
FLATS AND HIGH HEELS

$1.50 TO $3.95
— Shoe Repairing —

MAIN STREET FALMOUTH

pay

OLD: SILVER BEACH THEATRE

WEST FALMOUTH Wednesday Through Saturday Evenings 8:45—Thursday Matinee 2:45

JULY 22nd - 25th Make Reservations

LUTHER GREENE
presents
LYNN RIGG’S COMEDY

“RUSSET MANTLE”

with

DOROTHY GISH

MARGARET DOUGLASS JEANNIE CASSELLE

BEN SMITH JAY FASSETT

EDMONIA NOLLEY MARSHALL GRANT
ROBERT BENTLEY

WATCH THIS SPACE FOR COMING FEATURES

2)

88 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 94

THE WOODS HOLE LOG

NOTES

Starting Wednesday, July 22, Dorothy Gish
will star in “Russet Mantle” at the Silver Beach
Theatre. Jay Fassett will have the same role
which he took in the original production of Lynn
Riggs’ popular work on Boardway this winter.
Ben Smith, formerly cast in Jane Cowl’s starring
vehicle, ‘Rain from Heaven,” and his wife, Mar-
earet Douglass, have important roles. Edmonia
Nolley of “The Children’s Hour,” Charlotte Mac-
Aleer, and Marshall Grant comprise the rest of
the cast.

The Downie Brothers Circus gave two per-
formances on the Scranton Avenue grounds, East
Main Street, Saturday, July 18, at 2 and at 8
P. M. The biggest motorized show in operation,
the circus came to Falmouth from Hyannis; it
will open next in Newport.

In spite of variations in the weather the Choral
Club under Mr. Ivan T. Gorokhoff has had a large
and enthusiastic group at each of its Tuesday and
Thursday evening meetings. Miss Mildred S.
Wilcox, music teacher at the Art School, is ac-
companist. At the last Tuesday meeting twenty
people gave $1.50 each for music.

St. Joseph’s Church held its weekly whist and
bridge party last Wednesday night. Prizes for
high and low score for both men and women in
bridge and in whist were awarded. Refreshments
were served after the card playing ceased. At the
future Wednesday meetings only whist will be
played, Father McLean announced.

The Methodist Episcopal Church gave a lobster
supper last Wednesday night in the vestry of the

Church under the auspices of the Women’s
League.
The W. P. A. Circus which came to Woods

Hole last Wednesday provided free entertainment
which was particularly enjoyed by the children.
The acts consisted of juggling, bicycle acts, death
defying aerial stunts, hoop manipulation, and a
number of clowns who amused the children very
successfully by their antics.

Miss Anita Luscombe, while sailing the Mo-
gul to Quisset, side-swiped another boat and
cracked the Mogul’s mast. The damage is es-
timated at $800.00.

Miss Rosemary Crocker of Fitchburg, Mass.,
who has been visiting Miss Anita Luscombe at
the home of her grandparents the Walter O. Lus-
combes, left Woods Hole last week. Miss Crocker
is the daughter of Mr. and Mrs. Bigelow Crocker.

THE SEEING EYE

Last Wednesday night at the Woods Hole Golf
Course Club House an explanation and demon-
stration of the ‘seeing eye” was given under the
direction of Miss Gretchen Greene.

Talking to a large audience, she told the story
of how these German shepherd dogs came into
prominence in America. In Germany shortly af-
ter the war, Mrs. Hustas saw dogs successiully
leading blind men about. Becoming interested in
the idea, she studied the methods used aud opened
a training school in Switzerland. She then de-
cided to devote all her time to training in Amer-
ica and moved her headquarters to Morristown,
New Jersey.

The remarkable part of it, the lecturer ex-
plained, is that these dogs actually become the
eyes of the blind person, conducting him wherey-
er he needs to go—through traffic, up and down
curbs, steps and inclines and even around low
hanging objects such as awnings if the man is too
tall to clear them. A slight tug by the dog on
the harness-like leash, which the blind man holds
in his hand, gives the necessary warning.

The training of these dogs, she continued, costs
only $150.00 which may be paid over a period of
five years. The additional amount is supplied by
contributions from interested parties and from
blind people who have been successful in earning
a living. If the dog dies within three years, it is
replaced without cost; if the blind person dies,
the dog is returned and retrained. No children or
people over 55 are allowed to take them because
they have not the strength to handle the dog.

There have been only two accidents in the U. S.
to people using these dogs, Miss Greene cited,
and neither of these was the dog’s fault. In one
case a drunken driver hit a blind man; his dog
saved his life by grabbing him and throwing him
back. In the other a truck skidded and injured
both man and dog.

The speaker told of many cases where blind
people have been able to earn their living through
the aid of these dogs.

In connection with the tall she presented a
movie showing the successive steps of training
from the beginning until the person and the ani-
mal are able to work together. Three years are
required for the education of a trainer, three
months for a dog, and one month for a man.

Ems

Sergeant John F. Harrison of Dorchester,
member of the Massachusetts Military Reserve,
was killed by a bolt of lightning Saturday morn-
ing July 11 at the National Guard camp at Sand-
wich. He is survived by a widow and infant
daughter.

Jt LY 18, 1936 |

Make Your “Laundry” Dollar
BIGGER

—by using the Commonwealth Service. Our
courteous routeman is in your neighborhood
serving your next-door neighbor every Mon-
day and Thursday, and would be glad to
give you the same quick and efficient service.

There are four services, one of which will
surely suit your needs.

NO. 1 BACHELOR

Ask the routeman about the reasonable rates.

Description—A service for the bachelor who
wishes special attention to darning socks, re-
placing missing or broken buttons, etc., on
wearing apparel.

Also Three Other Services to Meet the Needs
of Housewives:

FINIST FINISH SERVICE
STANDARD SERVICE
FLAT WORK AND DRY CLEANING

Commonwealth Laundry
348 FRANKLIN ST. CAMBRIDGE, MASS.

“Always Happy to Serve You”

SOME CALL IT REAL ESTATE
When They Are Seeking
BEAUTIFUL LOCATIONS FOR HOMES
Large and Small or COTTAGES

FOR SALE and FOR RENT

But Regardless of What They Call It

KATHRYN SWIFT GREENE

SUPPLIES THE NEED

Phone 17 FALMOUTH, MASS.

WOODS HOLE

SANDWICH
SHOP

SANDWICHES SALADS

Parker Products

MAIN STREET WOODS HOLE

THE COLLECTING NET UK: 89

A NEW MERCHANDISING METHOD

Announcement

Having taken the Jobbing of several lines of
Sport Goods, and not having an outlet through
the stores of Cape Cod, we have decided to
form a

SPORT CLUB

with a membership fee of 25c, which allows
the member special cash discounts on the fol-
lowing lines:

Tennis Golf
Croquet Kapox Cushions
Camp Chairs Sun Mats
Cameras, Films and Photo Supplies

You are invited to join and share in the
savings.

Bring your films to be developed
in Falmouth. 24 hours service.

EASTMAN’S HARDWARE

Tel. 407 FALMOUTH, MASS.

SHOP AT

THE

Lady PEPPERELL Shop

SPORTSWEAR

LORD PEPPERELL SHIRTS

SHEETS AND PILLOW CASES

MAIL ORDERS TAKEN

Phone 515

FALMOUTH Next to Post Office

THE COLERCLING NED

___[ Vor. XI, No. 94

ws

ORY PRECISION IN THE FACTORY

Se Sa eS

7
PRODUCES TRADITIONAL SPENCER QUALITY

lenses be assured.

THE PERFECTION OF

SPENCER OPTICS
IS NOW

HE optical quality of a complete objective sys-

tem is dependent not only upon the quality of
design but also on the quality of the workmanship
by which the lenses are fashioned. The additive
effect of small localized errors of each individual
lens surface is detrimental to the lens unless these
localized errors are held to the order of magni-
tude of a twentieth wave length. Only when this
accuracy is strictly maintained can the best per-
formance of the whole objective combination of

After intense research and study of results, the
Spencer Lens Company has devised methods of
attaining this order of accuracy in the production
of Spencer objectives. Such accuracy can be con-
sistently attained, we find, only by the close coor-
dination of the laboratory and the factory routine.

Thus, by the application of laboratory methods
as routine procedure in the factory the owner of
a Spencer microscope objective is assured of the
best possible performance.

Be sure the optics in your microscope are the fin-
est obtainable... purchase a Spencer.

VISIT OUR EXHIBIT

From July 11 thru July 24 in the Exhibit
Room, nearly across the street from the

Oceanographic Laboratory.

Spencer Lens Company

Buffalo G3 New York

Jury 18, 1936 | THE COLLECTING NET 4 9]

aS ==

&

This is set No. A-195,
one of the ten dissecting
sets illustrated in our
catalog No. 38, from the
simplest to the most com-
plete. Also largest variety
of dissecting instruments,

as well as laboratory ma-

terials such as

Micro Slides and Cover Glasses

Slide Boxes---Magnifiers---Centrifuges

Insect Pins---Riker Mounts

Museum Jars---Petri Dishes--Rubber Tubing

Hemacytometers and Hemometers

We have separate catalogs, gladly sent on request, of Charts, Models, Specimens and
Preparations in the following fields: Human and Comparative Anatomy, Physiology,

Neurology, Zoology, Botany, Embryology, Entomology, Ecology, ete.

CLAY=-ADAMS COMBPARY.. INC.

25 EAST 26th STREET NEW YORK

1 - -D O -D D - ) eemam.

DISSECTING SETS

Spemcemcem encase ance rance e enancancan amram oenome:

92 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vot. XI, No. 94

Just Published

The Comparative Anatomy

of the
Nervous System of

Vertebrates Including Man

By C. U. ARIENS KAPPERS, M.D., Sc.D., LL.D. Director of the Central Institute of
Brain Research, Amsterdam, and Professor of Comparative Neurology in the University of
Amsterdam. G. CARL HUBER, M.D., Sc.D. Late Dean of the Graduate School, Direc-
tor of the Anatomical Laboratories and Professor of Anatomy in the University of Michigan,
and ELIZABETH CAROLINE CROSBY, Ph.D. Associate Professor of Anatomy in
the University of Michigan.

Hrs comprehensive two-volume work is based on Ariens Kappers’

“Die Vergleichende Anatomie des Nervensystems der Wirbeltiere

und des Menschen.” The text has been completely revised and
rewritten to include all the new advances in the comparative anatomy
of the nervous system since the publication of the German work.
Many additions have been made to the figures. References to an
extensive, classified bibliography document the statements.

It will be a valuable work not only for the research work in human
and comparative neurology but for those who desire a general back-
ground in the subject. It will also serve admirably as a reference
work for classes in human and comparative anatomy.

Two Volumes: Vol. I---864 pp., 422 Illustrations.
Vol. II---981 pp., 288 Illustrations. Set $16.00.

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY, 60 Fifth Avenue, New York

Vol. XI, No, 4

SATURDAY, JULY 25, 1936

Annual Subscription, $2.00
Single Copies, 30 Cents.

CULTURE METHODS FOR ASCIDIANS
IDS IN Ve

3ERRILL
Associate Professor of Zoology
McGill University, Montreal

RECENT STUDIES IN MASS PHYSIOLOGY
Dr. W. C. ALLEE
Professor of Zoology,
The University of Chicago

METHODS OF CAPTURE
Ascidians are sessile organisms varying con-
Many forms are littoral, to
be found in greatest quantity immediately above

siderably in habitat.

or below the low water spring
tide level. Others may be found
attached to the under surface
of floating objects, while many
forms are found only in deep-
er water attached to rocky or
hard surfaces, or embedded in

sand or mud without any
strong attachment. In gen-

eral the ideal habitat for as-
cidians is one in which there
is a considerable natural flow
of clear water, yet not suffi-
cient water movement, such as
wave action, to dislodge the
animal. This habitat will vary
according to the size of the
animal and its relative area of
attachment.

Compound ascidians as a
rule tend toward a two-dimen-
tional state with a maximum

area of attachment and minimum thickness.
forms may be found in profusion on the under
surface of rocks and stones in the lower intertidal
zone and upper littoral; (Continwed on page 95)

C. Alee

Berrill

field DuBois

Over-crowding, which is one aspect of mass
physiology, is easily demonstrated and has been
much studied. The emphasis in this lecture was
largely on the less well known phenomena asso-
ciated with under-crowding.

| Seminar:

| Dr. J. E. Kindred: ‘An interpreta- |

When under-crowding occurs,
the optimum population dens-
TUESDAY, July 28, 8:00 P. M. | ity lies at some point above
Dr. Gertrude Evans: | the minimum. When over-
Bee eeeao art. Gea daveval of crowding is found without as-

sociated under-crowding, the

goldfishes in homotypically con- : cre
ditioned water.” optimum and minimum popu-
lations coincide.

Dr. C. P. Kraatz: “A _ possible
endocrine rdle of the eosinophil | i eel 2) ADS eT ”
leticotytes dui the female rate’ Mass effects associated Ww ith
under-crowding are widely dis-
tributed in nature and occur at

| all levels throughout the ani-
mal kingdom. The main dis-
cussion centered on some of
the analyses of mechanisms
which underlie physiological
disturbances when experimen-
tal populations are reduced be-
low their optimum.
Among the cases discussed

RM. B. LU. Calendar

tion of the secondary lymphoid
nodule.”

Dr. Laurence Irving: ‘“Physiologi-
cal adjustments to diving in the
beaver.”

FRIDAY, July 31, 8:00 P. M.

Lecture: Dr. Sven Horstadius:
“Researches on determination in
the early development of the
sea-urchins.”

Recent Studies in Mass Physiology, Dr. W.
Culture Methods for Ascidians,

A Photo-electric Method for Recording Fast
Chemical Reactions and Its Application to
the Study of Catalyst Substrate Com-
pounds, Dr. Kurt G. Stern and Mr. Dela-

in some detail were examples
of mass protection when (a) toxic substances
such as colloidal silver or calcium chloride are
added or (b) when the lethal effect is produced

Such

by extreme hypotonicity of the medium. Experi-
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Effects of Salts on the Injury Potential of
Frog Muscle, Dr..H. Burr Steinbach........ Oe
IDS INE Vo WIESSHINOUCS) occu iie-cessssresscespasesadiseestamsccesneedsruentdeeeeer
Editorial Page
Items of Interest
The Biological Laboratory at Cold Spring
EVER DO Te wahat ners acvorves deieener.: sick etait ante eee 107
Department of Publications «0.0.0.0... 108

‘qJe] euIeryxe 94) ye Uses 9q UBD e1e1Sa SssEqIeM “ICG JO
dy ey} {julog a.uezued ST punorSyoeq 9y} Ul PUL] JO uCggIA oYT, ‘SpURIS[ WeY pue joo S[IAeq ‘auIq :a1e punorsyoBq ay} 0} punoss
-910J 9} WlO1J Sulpeer spuRyst eyL ‘JOS 94} uO 2A0D ued deayg YIM puNoIZaI0J oy] Ul SIvedde jJesseMIeUON Jo pue Yynos 94L

HLOOS FHL OL SGNVWISI GHL GNVY FONVZNGd AO MALIA TVINAV

_ Jury 25, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 95

mentally tested explanations were also advanced
which cover many of the causes that frequently
lead to an increase in rate of division in infusor-
jans when more than one organism is seeded into
the culture medium (Robertson’s effect), and
when in the confused flour beetle, Tribolium con-
fusum, two, rather than more or fewer pairs, re-
produce most rapidly in a given quantity of flour.
_ At low temperatures, and perhaps under other
conditions, inbred strains of mice grow more
rapidly when optimal numbers are present than
when they are isolated or more crowded. This
growth-promoting effect of optimal crowding dis-
appears at higher temperatures.

Goldfishes grow more rapidly in artificial pond
water, and in the natural waters tested, if the
water has been previously “conditioned” by the
presence of other goldfishes. This growth-pro-
moting effect is largely the result of food particles
regurgitated by the conditioning fishes or to the
food value of the faeces or both. Growth of gold-
fishes has also been stimulated by adding a protein
extract from the surface of other goldfishes even
when the dilution is as great as 1 :800,000.

These cases of under-crowding were not chosen
for comment because they are isolated instances,
rather they were selected from many similar mass
effects in which progress has been made in the
analysis of underlying causes. These recent tests
leave little room for the various sorts of X-sub-
stances frequently suggested as the causal agents
in mass effects both of under- and over-crowding.

With regard to the larger aspects of the ques-
tions involved, these modern studies of optimal
population densities give the strongest existing
evidence that the principle of automatic coopera-
tion has general application. Consideration of

cooperation as a biological principle is not new;
the idea was already a seasoned one when Espinas
in 1878 attempted to marshall evidence to prove
its wide spread existence and fundamental im-
portance in biology. Kropotkin, Deegener, Pat-
ten, and especially Wheeler, have written in the
same vein.

All these men labored under a decided handi-
cap in their emphasis on the importance of co-
operation. Sexual reproduction, and for some
unknown reason, hibernation aside, the general
field and laboratory experience of naturalists and
scientists alike, was that crowding was uniformly
harmful in its effects. Only when, by some un-
explained process, groups became sufficiently well
organized so that there was increased likelihood
of warning of danger and/or protection from
it, did cooperation become obvious.

For lack of knowledge of other possible pre-
liminary steps, the origin of cooperative societies
was thought to center wholly about phenomena
associated with sexual reproduction. For this or
other reasons, even the able work of Espinas and
Wheeler has not won suitable appreciation of the
general application of this principle of biological
cooperation at the automatic level. Thanks to the
relatively recent discovery in various arts of the
world of previously unsuspected positive survival
values associated with optimal numbers, and
thanks further to the experimental working out
of relatively simple mechanisms whereby coopera-
tion, or its subconscious equivalent, may be
brought about even among simpler animals, it
now seems possible that biologists and even lay-
men may finally accept the general importance of
this principle approximately as Espinas stated it
nearly sixty years ago.

CULTURE METHODS FOR ASCIDIANS
(Continued from Page 93)

a few species may be attached to algae and eel
grass in the same region. Solitary ascidians are
usually larger and possess a relatively smaller
area of attachment. Their size and water re-
quirements alone may prohibit their attachment
to such surfaces as are occupied by the majority
of compound forms, and they are more typically
to be found attached to the sides and upper
surfaces of rocks, large stones, wharf piles and
under surface of ships and floats, etc., though
very rarely above and often much below the low

tide level. Mud and sand flats at some depth
are typical habitats of some species of Molgula
and Polycarpa, although they become attached to
rock surfaces in very sheltered positions.

The principal methods of capture are thus
three-fold, turning over boulders at low-tide level,
often necessitating the use of a crow-bar; scrap-
ing piles, rocks and ship-bottoms with long-
handled net-scrapers and dredging.

The following is a list of the more common
ascidians of American coastal waters, together

THE COLLECTING NET has been entered as second-class matter July 11, 1935, at the Post Office

at Woods Hole, Massachusetts, under the Act of March 3, 1879.

marine biological laboratories.

It is devoted to the scientific work at

It is published weekly tor ten weeks between June 1 and September 15
from Woods Hole and printed at The Darwin Press, New Bedford.
the third floor of the Woods Hole station of the United States Bureau of Fisheries.

Its editorial offices are situated on
Between June 1

and October 1 communications should be addressed to Woods Hole, Massachusetts; at other times they
should be directed to THE COLLECTING NET, Garrison, N. Y. Single copies cost 30c; a subscription

(containing not less than 280 pages) costs $2.00.

.

96 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vou. XI, No. 95

TABLE I.

All the following species are common shallow water forms; those marked with an asterisk are vivi-
parous; for further information concerning distribution, habitat, and identification, references 3, 10, 11,
13-16 should be consulted.

Species

Distribution

Egg Size in mm.

Breeding Season

Ciona intestinalis Alaska—S. Calif. 0.17 Depends on size of
Cape Cod individual.
*Perophora viridis New England—Florida 0.24 Aug.-Sept.
Bermuda
*Perophora annectens Vancouver—S. Calif. 0.24 July-Sept.
*Perophora bermudensis Bermuda 0.24 Sept.-Oct.
*Ecteinascidia turbinata Bermuda—Tortugas 0.72 June-Aug.
*HEcteinascidia conklini Bermuda—Tortugas 0.58 July-Sept.
Ascidia prunum New England—Fundy 0.18
Ascidia hygomiana N. Carolina—Tortugas 0.17 Not seasonal, de-
Sen 4 pends on size of
Ascidia nigra(atra) Bermuda—Tortugas—Fla. 0.17 individual.
Ascidia curvata Bermuda—Tortugas 0.17
Styela partita Massachusetts Bay— 0.15 June-Sept. by
Florida—Bermuda
Styela plicata N. Carolina—Florida 0.16 June-Sept.
Polycarpa obtecta Bermuda—Tortugas 0.18 May-Sept.
*Polyandrocarpa tincta Bermuda—Tortugas 0.21 May-Sept.
*Symplegma viride Bermuda—Tortugas 0.44 June-Sept.
*Botryllus schlesseri S. New England 0.42 June-Sept.
*Botrylloides niger Bermuda—F lorida 0.26 June-Aug.
*Tethyum pyriforme Maine—Fundy 0.26 July-Aug.
Boltenia ovifera Maine—Fundy 0.16 July-Aug.
*Boltenia echinata Maine—Fundy 0.18 July-Sept.
Pyura vittata Bermuda—N. C.—Fla. 0.16 Summer
Molgula retortiformis Maine—Fundy 0.18
Molgula manhattensis New England—N. Car, 0.11 Probably no definite
*Molgula citrina Fundy—Long Island 0.21 season, individuals
*Molgula verrucifera California 0.13 abo oa ae
g continuous:
Molgula occidentalis N. Car.—Florida 0.11 ly.
Eugyra pilularis Fundy—New England 0.11
*Clavelina picta Bermuda 0.48 July-Sept.
*Clavelina huntsmani Vancouver—S. Calif. 0.26 June-Sept.
*Eudistoma olivacea Bermuda—Florida 0.30( 7?) July-Aug.
*Eudistoma lobatum California 0.30(?) Summer
*Distaplia clava New England—Fundy
*Distaplia bermudensis Bermuda Ceca eee oes
*Distaplia sp. California
- oe ; :
Aplidium pellucidum Cape Cod—Florida | Circa 0.30 Sunimer

*Aplidium sp.

California |

ttt he

Jury 25, 1936 ]

IMeis, COMILIAC MMI, INeAp 97

with their habitat, distribution and the breeding
season in so far as it is known.

BREEDING SEASONS

The breeding season for ascidians of both the
Pacific and Atlantic coasts, including the West
Indian fauna typical of the Gulf of Mexico,
seems to be summer. Certain forms, namely the
various species of Ascidia and probably Molgula
and Ciona have no definite season; individuals
above a certain size are sexually mature and may
breed throughout the year, although the lower
temperatures of winter retard the rate of egg pro-
duction. Most compound ascidians are actively
budding during the winter and the individual
zooids do not attain sexual maturity until early
summer. Some solitary forms such as Styela and
probably most species of the families Styelidae
and Pyuridae have a breeding season limited to
Summer months. With the exception of Styela
partita, the polystyelids Boltenia echinata little is
known concerning the members of these two fam-
ilies from this point of view.

The breeding season so far as is known for the
species most available is given in the table, though
it should be remembered that it may extend
earlier or later and may vary in different locali-
ties.

PROCURING OF Eccs or Empryos

For purposes of rearing, and developmental
studies in general, ascidians are to be divided
into two groups according to whether they are
Oviparous or viviparous. The occurrence of these
two kinds is indicated in the table. Except in a
very few instances oviparous ascidians are com-
paratively large and produce a great many small
eggs, viviparous ascidians are small and produce
a small number of comparatively large eggs.
Thus in one case rearing methods must start with
the unsegmented egg, in the other with the active
tadpole larva. Only after the tadpole larvae have
become attached does treatment become the same
for both kinds.

a, Oviparous Forms.

In Ciona and in the species of Ascidia there is
a long oviduct, accompanied by the sperm duct,
that extends from the gonad to near the atrial
siphon. Once the individual becomes sexually
mature the ova enter the oviduct and there ac-
cumulate, the eggs being shed periodically. Since
the germinal vesicle ruptures as the ova pass from
the ovary into the oviduct, all the eggs in the duct
are ripe. In some species of Ascidia, especially
those that tend to become exposed at low tides to
the warmer temperature of the air, a large per-
centage of the eggs in the distal part of the ovi-
duct may be dead. (1) Eggs from the middle or

proximal part of the oviduct are in any case less
likely to be over-ripe.

To obtain the eggs and sperm the test should
be removed, the wall of the oviduct or sperm duct
punctured with fine scissors and the germ cells
withdrawn in a pipette. This is much more sat-
isfactory than maintaining the parents in aquaria
and waiting for them to spawn naturally.

A similar procedure may be followed in the
case of the oviparous species of Molgula (and
Eugyra), although the oviduct is short and con-
fined to the central part of the gonad, so that this
method is likely to result in the extraction of im-
mature as well as ripe eggs. As unripe eggs are
more resistant generally than ripe eggs, fertilized
or unfertilized, this is no serious drawback as ac-
tive larvae can be segregated.

Such a method used with oviparous styelids
and pyurids is only occasionally successful, and it
is better to maintain the adults in aquaria and col-
lect the eggs as they are spawned and fertilized
in the water. In the case of Styela partita
spawning occurs at sundown, (7) and this may
be so for the majority.

b. Viviparous Forms.

Viviparous species vary considerably in egg
number and egg size. In some species almost all
embryos will be at the same stage of development,
as in Botryllus, Polyandrocarpa, Boltenia echinata
and ‘Tethyum pyriforme. (5) In most species em-
bryos at all stages of development are to be
found. In both groups embryos extracted before
the attainment of the tadpole stage will not con-
tinue development unless certain precautions are
taken. If the developmental stages desired are
those of the tadpole or later it is always safer to
keep the parents alive in aquaria until the tad-
poles are liberated. Alternatively the embryos
may be extracted and those tadpoles exhibiting
signs of activity segregated. In the first method
the risk is that the parent animals will not live
long enough, in the second that they may not con-
tain tadpole larvae sufficiently mature.

REARING OF EMBRYONIC STAGES

Until the tadpole stage is passed and metamor-
phosis completed to form a small ascidiozooid
that is attached and has open siphons and active
stigmata, no food from external sources is
needed.

a. Oviparous Forms.

Eggs and sperm are extracted from ducts after
removal of test, followed by artificial fertiliza-
tion. Some species are self fertile, others self
sterile, others e.g., Ciona, vary with locality. In
any case better cultures are obtained by cross fer-
tilizing. A small quantity of sperm is mixed with
the eggs in a finger bowl of sea-water and proper
mixing ensured by pouring from one bowl to an-

98 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 95

other several times. After fifteen or twenty min-
utes the eggs should have been fertilized and will
lie at the bottom of the vessel. As much of the
supernatant water as possible should then be
siphoned off and replaced with clean water, the
process of allowing the eggs to settle and replac-
ing the water being repeated several times to en-
sure complete elimination of all surplus sperma-
tozoa. Failure to do so leads to abnormal devel-
opment. Development up to the tadpole and be-
yond can take place in fingerbowls, but vessels
holding a larger volume of water are much more
satisfactory. If large cultures are desired in a
limited volume of water, bubbling air through the
water during development should ensure normal
development. In the case of Ciona such proce-
dure is advisable in any case as development in
this form is very prone to become abnormal dur-
ing the period of tail elongation.

If the early development of Ciona or Ascidia
is to be studied the egg membranes may be re-
moved in the following manner. (4) Unfertilized
eges are placed in a vessel of sea water contain-
ing crustacean stomach juice (not liver extract)
in a proportion of about one part stomach juice
to fifty or one hundred parts of sea-water. This
medium digests off the membranes in the course
of a very few hours (usually two or three) and
on complete replacement of the water by clean
seawater the eggs can be fertilized. Eggs remain
viable for about eighteen hours after extraction.
The method will not work with eggs that have
been fertilized as it affects the surface tension of
the dividing eggs. Slight shaking, or decanting
from one vessel into another, during early cleav-
age stages will suffice to separate blastomeres
without resort to the use of Calcium-free sea
water.

b. Viviparous Forms.

The embryos of viviparous ascidians extracted
before the attainment of the tadpole stage usually
stop developing. A percentage at least will con-
tinue to develop under the following conditions.
(5) <A glass T-piece is attached to the stem of
a thistle funnel, the whole is immersed in sea-
water and air bubbled slowly through the T-piece
so that a slow current of water passes into the
mouth of the funnel. This is arranged so that
the mouth opens downwards. A piece of coarse
bolting silk on which rest the embryos is attached
to the mouth of the funnel. The embryos are
thus kept mildly agitated in a gentle stream of
water. For complete success the carbon dioxide
tension of the water needs to be increased slightly.
(6) Whenever possible it is better in the case
of viviparous species to start cultures with the
tadpole stage. It is not essential that the active
stage be used for in most forms immature tad-

poles showing but a trace of sensory pigment will
continue development outside the parent.

REARING OF Post-LARVAL AND YOUNG
ADULT STAGES

In order to rear later stages of ascidians it is
essential that the tadpole larvae become properly
attached to some surface. Tadpoles that fail to
become attached, while they may metamorphose
perfectly, will not continue development and
growth. Most swimming tadpoles if kept in a
large vessel of sea-water, such as an inverted
bell-jar will become attached. It is often an ad-
vantage to lay flat pieces of glass in the vessel
so that the forms which become attached to them
can be studied without damage.

If tadpoles have been reared in small vessels
they should be transferred to the larger vessels
in which they are expected to become attached
and grow while still actively swimming. An al-
ternative method to the use of large culture ves-
sels is to submerge glass plates to which larvae
are attached in the sea in such a position that
water movement will not dislodge the larvae and
detritus will not accumulate on the plates. (12)

In large vessels the water should not be changed
once the larvae show open siphons and functional
stigmata. Replacement with water that presum-
ably is in better condition is rarely tolerated, so
that it is important that the water used in the first
place should be of excellent quality.

Only after attachment and when the siphons
and stigmata are functioning do ascidian larvae
need food from external sources. A mixed as-
sortment of small diatoms and algae etc., has been
found to be at least as satisfactory as a pure cul-
ture of Nitschia, so merely a coarse filtering of
water to remove the larger organisms is all that
is necessary. A small quantity of sodium nitrite
and sodium phosphate should be added to the
water from time to time in order to ensure con-
tinued multiplication of the food organisms. The
ascidians will suffer if the growth, especially on
the walls of the vessel, becomes too thick. This
may be controlled by limiting with shades the —
amount of light that reaches the vessel. A slight
circulation produced by the slow bubbling of air
through the water is an advantage, but is by no
means essential. Under these conditions it should
be possible to rear most ascidians to a compara-
tively large size, even to maturity.

PH REQUIREMENTS

It is most unlikely that the pH of the water
will fall to so low a value that development or
growth becomes affected. Only when the pH
falls to 7.0 does development tend to become ab-
normal and hatching in Ciona and Ascidia in-
hibited. (1) In the other direction normal de-

Jury 25, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 99

velopment is possible up to a pH of 9.0. There
is considerable danger however, that a luxuriant
growth of algae may cause the pH to rise to even
higher values, especially if Saal culture vessels
are used. Tests should accordingly be made at
intervals, and if the pH tends to become too high
the light should be cut off in order to inhibit fur-
ther photosynthesis.

TEMPERATURE REQUIREMENTS

As in the case of many other forms there is for
ascidians a temperature range of about fifteen de-
grees centigrade within which normal develop-
ment is possible. This range may be high or low,
it may vary for the same species in ditferent lo-
calities, or it may vary for the same species in
summer and winter, e.g. Parechinus. (9) Thus
Eugyra pilularis will develop at 18° C. at Woods
Hole (the southern extremity of its distribution
range) but not above 12° C. if taken from the
colder waters of the Bay of Fundy. (2)

In general, however, it is reasonably safe to as-
sume ‘that normal development and growth is pos-
sible when there is little difference between sea
temperature and air temperature, whatever it may
be, and that the temperature of the water in
which development is proceeding should never
exceed by more than 5° C. the temperature of the
water from which the parents were taken. This
margin should be reduced where sea temperatures
exceed 25° C. Culture vessels kept beneath a
small tent with the walls kept saturated with
water has been found to reduce the air tempera-
ture by several degrees. The distribution range
of a species relative to the locality where it is
taken gives some indication of its temperature
tolerance. Species found near the southern end

of their range are not likely to tolerate tempera-
tures higher than that of the water in which
they are found, species from the northern end of
their range will inte temperatures consider-
ably higher.

REFERENCES

1. Berrill, N. J., 1929. Studies in Tunicate Devel-
opment Pt. 1. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc., B, 218,
37.

2. Berrill, N. J., 1931. Studies in Tunicate Devel-
opment Pt. 2. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc., B, 219,

281.

3. Berrill, N. J., 1932. Ascidians of the Bermudas.
Biol. Bull., 62, 77.

4. Berrill, N. J., 1933. Mosaic development in As-
cidians. Biol. Bull., 63, 381.

5. Berrill, N. J., 1935. Studies in Tunicate Devel-

Boe Pt. 3. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc., B, 223,

6. chila, C. M., 1927. Development modification
and elimination of the larval stage in the as-
cidian, Corella willmeriana. J. Morph., 44.

7. Conklin, E. G., 1905. The organization and cell
lineage of the ascidian egg. J. Acad. Nat. Sci.,
Philadelphia, 13, 1.

8. Grave, C., 1927. Studies of the activities of the
larvae of ascidians. Carnegie Inst. Yearbook
No. 26.

9. Horstadius, S., 1926. Ueber die Temperaturum-
passung bei den Paracentrotus lividus (L.).
Biologia Generalis.

10. Ritter, W. E., 1913. The simple ascidians of
the north-eastern Pacific in the collection of
the United States National Museum. P. U. S.
Mus., 45.

11. Ritter, W. E. and Forsyth, R. A., 1917. Ascidi-
ans of the littoral zone of southern California.
Publ. Univ. California, 16.

12. Simkins, C. S., 1924. Origin of germ cells in
Ecteinascidia. J. Morph., 39, 295.

13. Van Name, W. G., 1910. Compound ascidians of
the coasts of New England and the neighbor-
ing British Provinces. Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat.
Hist., 34, 339.

ORNITHOLOGICAL NOTES WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO BIRDS AT WOODS HOLE
I. GULLS AND TERNS
F. N. WHITMAN

The seasonal changes in bird population here
may interest summer folk, who have not seen the
great rifts of waterfowl, or the spectacle of her-
ring gulls feeding at their doorsteps like flocks of
great pigeons. At a feeding station on a Fal-
mouth herring run last winter, came regularly,
eider ducks, mallards, sea ducks, etc.

A few black backed gulls are seen with the her-
ring gulls. The young of the former may be told
by larger size, and light color, while the young of
the latter are dark. Adult herring gulls (pearl
gray mantale and white below) are at least two
years old. The black headed laughing gulls arrive
in April and in the fall we have the small bona-
part gulls (also blackheaded) which play around
the Marine Biological Laboratory piers for sev-
eral weeks.

Terns arrive from South America early in May
and in two or three weeks start nesting. One to
three and even four eggs (buff to greenish,
marked with browns and lilac) are laid in depres-
sions in the sand above high water. The male
feeds the female while she does most of the incu-
bating. Downy young are often shielded from the
sun. They crawl about, swim readily, and squat
flat to escape notice. A parent may coax its off-
spring away from danger, by walking backward,
holding a fish just out of reach. They single their
own out amid the swarms, feeding them shiners,
sand eels, etc.

Even the night 1s not quiet, as some terns are
going and coming. Terns do not often alight on
the water except near their nesting sites.

100

THE COLLECTING NEE

[ Vou. XI, No. 95

A PHOTO-ELECTRIC METHOD FOR RECORDING FAST CHEMICAL REACTIONS
AND ITS APPLICATION TO THE STUDY OF CATALYST-SUBSTRATE COMPOUNDS

Dr. Kurt G. Stern, Visiting Lecturer in Physiological Chenustry, Yale University, and

Mr. Devarietp DuBois, Research Assistant,
Medical School, New

The kinetic theory of enzyme action, as devel-
oped by Henri, Michaelis, van Slyke, and other
authors, postulates the intermediary formation of
an enzyme-substrate compound in the course of
the reaction. The theory makes the further as-
sumption that this intermediate is unstable. Be-
sides dissociating reversibly into its two compo-
nents, it also breaks down irreversibly to form the
free enzyme and the product molecules of the re-
action. However, these equations which are de-
rived by the use of the law of mass action may
likewise be arrived at by postulating a mechanism
of heterogeneous catalysis and the use of Lang-
muir’s adsorption isotherm. This ambiguity has
been pointed out by Hitchcock and by other
workers.

In the case of the catalytic decomposition of
certain peroxides, the following mechanism can be
experimentally verified :

E+S=ES
BS Eee pee

where E stands for enzyme, S for substrate, and
P,, for product molecules. The formation and the
decomposition of the enzyme-substrate compound,
or more generally, of the catalyst-substrate com-
pound may be observed spectroscopically in the
case of the catalase-ethyl hydrogen peroxide cat-
alysis and also in the course of the reaction of
methemoglobin with hydrogen peroxide and ethyl
hydrogen peroxide. Methemoglobin is of special
interest here, since it has been demonstrated that
it has the same prosthetic hematin group as the
enzyme. The two catalysts differ only in respect
to their protein carrier. It has been possible to
transform the enzyme into the blood pigment by
the substitution of globin for the enzymatic pro-
tein.

For the quantitative kinetic study of the optical
changes accompanying the reaction cycle, a photo-
electric method has been developed. The principle
of the method is as follows:

Light of high intensity passes a monochroma-
tor. The monochromatic radiation, selected in
such a manner as to correspond to the position of
the absorption bands to be studied, penetrates a
cell containing the reaction mixture and impinges
on the cathode of a photo-electric cell. The pho-
to-electric current is amplified by a_ one-stage
radio tube amplifier. The latter is connected with
a string galvanometer equipped with a moving

Department of Physiology, Yale University
Haven, Connecticut

film camera. At the beginning of the experiment
the substrate is added to the solution of the cat-
alyst, contained in the absorption cell. Rapid
mixing free from appreciable mechanical, electri-
cal, or optical disturbance is accomplished by the
use of an injector mechanism specially developed
for the purpose. The changes in light absorption
accompanying the chemical reaction will cause de-
flections of the galvanometer string which are con-
tinuously recorded on the photographic film. The
film is provided with a coordinate net. The ab-
scissa permits direct reading of the time lapsed
at any stage of the reaction. The unit of time is
0.025 seconds. The ordinate can be calibrated to
correspond to changes in concentration of one re-
actant. By varying the speed of film transport,
relatively slow and fast reactions may be studied.
Since mixing is complete after 0.025 sec., any ad-
ditional changes on the photographic record rep-
resent changes in the light absorption of the sys-
tem caused by chemical reactions.

The method has been applied to a preliminary
study of the catalytic decomposition of ethyl hy-
drogen peroxide by liver catalase and by methe-
moglobin. Though the results are by no means
complete, the following statements can already be
made: if the fading of the absorption bands of the
two catalysts in the red region of the spectrum
upon the addition of the substrate is taken as the
measure of the rate of transformation of free into
combined catalyst, this rate is contrary to that
which would be expected from the catalytic effi-
ciency of the two catalysts: whereas the over-all
reaction in the case of the enzyme is much faster
than in the case of methemoglobin, the combina-
tion of the latter with the substrate is considerably
faster than the corresponding phase in the enzyme
reaction. The half-time required for the enzyma-
tic reaction was found to be 0.94 sec. (at pH 6.8)
and that for the non-enzymatic catalysis 0.03 sec.
(at pH 5.3). Both changes are rapid compared
with the time required for the formation of the
final reaction products, one of which is acetalde-
hyde. But they are slower than the combination
of molecular oxygen with hemoglobin and hemo-
cyanin. The half-times found for the latter reac-
tions by Millikan, who used a modification of the
flow method of Hartridge and Roughton, are 0.01
sec. for sheep hemoglobin and 0.008 to 0.012 sec.
for Limulus hemocyanin.

(This article is based upon a seminar report pre-

sented at the Marine Biological Laboratory on July
14).

Jury 25, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING

NET 101

EFFECTS OF SALTS ON THE INJURY POTENTIAL OF FROG MUSCLE
Dr. H. Burr STEINBACH
Instructor in Zoology, University of Minnesota

If a living cell or tissue is immersed in an
electrolyte containing medium, an electrical poten-
tial difference usually can be measured between
the two phases. If the nature or the concentra-
tion of the electrolyte of the fluid medium is va-
ried, the potential difference will also change. Then
if for any particular salt one plots the difference
of potential measured between the material and
the fluid medium against the logarithms of the
electrolyte concentrations of the medium, regular
curves are obtained which can be described and
predicted by ordinary diffusion potential equa-
tions. The only important assumption necessary
is that the cell or tissue furnishes an electrolyte
with a slow moving anion and a rapidly moving
cation. Making this assumption it is easy to show
that the shape of the p.d./log concentration curve
for any given electrolyte system can be accurately
calculated. With high concentrations of salt ap-
plied, the slope of the curve is determined by the
nature of the salt used. With low concentrations
the slope of the curve is determined by the un-
known electrolyte of the biological system and is
nearly independent of the nature of the salt of the
environment. A model duplicating the essential
features of such curves may be obtained by allow-
ing salt solutions to diffuse against sodium or po-
tassium: gelatin gels. With such a model the po-
tential differences can be calculated using known
physical constants.

I have investigated the effects of salts and salt
concentration on the injury potential of the frog
sartorius muscle when the experimental solutions
were applied to the uninjured surface. In_ this
tissue it is possible to make a definite suggestion
about the nature of the electrolyte within the
muscle cells which might be responsible for a high
diffusion potential. Frog muscle is rich in potas-
sium ion, the sartorius containing about tenth mo-
lar potassium. It is also known that inorganic
cation is in excess of inorganic anion, the differ-
ence presumably being made up by the protein
content of the muscle. Of the total potassium
present only about a tenth appears to be diffusible
from the normal intact cell. Hence, in my calcu-
lations, using Henderson’s equation, I assumed
that the frog sartorius could be represented as a
solution hundredth normal in potassium protein-
ate. The proteinate anion was assumed to be uni-
valent with a mobility of 25 at 18°C. The mobili-
ties of the other ions were taken from the usual
physical tables.

The experiments were very simple. Frog sar-
torii were removed with as little injury as pos-
sible except to the pelvic end which was sectioned.

The muscles were immediately placed in isotonic
sucrose solution buffered at pH 7.4 for one hour.
They were then removed to special paraffin cham-
bers so constructed that the cut pelvic end dipped
into tenth molar potassium chloride solution and
the uninjured end dipped into the experimental
salt solution. Dilute solutions were made by di-
luting isotonic salt solutions with isotonic sucrose
solution. All solutions were buffered at pH 7.4
but the concentration of buffer was always small
compared to the concentration of salt desired.
Electrical leads were established with the usual
saturated potassium chloride bridges.

Sodium chloride, sodium acetate and potassium
chloride solutions were tested. Calculations pre-
dicted that the p.d./log NaCl concentration curve
should be slightly U shaped. The curves for so-
dium acetate and potassium chloride should not be
U shaped and the values of the injury potential
with isotonic solutions bathing the uninjured sur-
face should be considerably less than the corre-
sponding injury potential with sodium chloride.

The shapes of the sodium chloride and_ the
sodium acetate curves agreed well with the theo-
retical. In order to obtain a quantitative agree-
ment it was necessary to add fifty millivolts to
each calculated value. When this was done, good
agreement was obtained throughout the concentra-
tion range 0.1 to 0.0005 molar.

With KCl, the observed values fell along the
calculated curve (plus forty millivolts correction)
in the range 0.005 to 0.0005 molar. KCI solutions
0.01 molar and greater were progressively more
negative than the corrected calculated curve.
With isotonic (0.1 molar) KCl the observed value
was over forty millivolts negative to the corrected
curve. Since good agreement with the corrected
curves (calculated values plus forty or fifty milli-
volts) was obtained with sodium chloride, sodium
acetate and the more dilute solutions of potassium
chloride, it seems probable that the correction
represents the major part of the normal injury
potential. This large part of the measured injury
potential is not affected by the presence or con-
centration of sodium chloride, sodium acetate or
the more dilute potassium chloride solutions. On
the other hand, potassium, in higher concentra-
tion, must have one of two effects upon this in-
jury potential. Either it must penetrate into the
uninjured surface and destroy a mechanism exist-
ing there which gives rise to the normal injury
potential, or it must act upon the uninjured sur-
face in such a manner as to cause injury and set
up a counter potential difference which nullifies
the one existing at the injured end of the muscle.

ne

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. XI, No. 95

The experiments do not differentiate between
these two possibilities although the latter seems
most probable.

These studies show that so far as the electrical
evidence is concerned, all ions, with the possible
exception of potassium, appear to penetrate the
cell surface at rates which are not modified, in any
differential sense, from their rates of free diffusion
in water. In other words, while there is a possi-
bility that the muscle surface is specifically per-
meable to potassium ions, there is no evidence of
a general permeability to cations in distinction to
anions.

NOTES AND NEWS FROM M. B. L. CLASSES

ROTOZOOLOGY

P= NOTES

Dr. Calkins of the Protozoology course has in-
vited his entire class for tea on Sunday afternoon.

Dr. and Mrs. Frank R. Lillie entertained a
group from the Marine Biological Laboratory at
a tea at their home on Sunday, July 12. Among
the guests were: Mr. and Mrs. Steve Bosckey,
Miss Betty Andersch, Dr. Marie Andersch, Mr.
Paul Dugal, Mr. Daniel Lilly, Rev. Michael
Fronzak, John P. O’Brien, James Donnellon, O.
S. A., Miss Kathleen Kennedy, Miss Elizabeth
Thornton, Miss Alice Russel, and Mr. and Mrs.
Theodore Von Brand.

—E.T.

If there be a “critical” time in the life of the
embryology class at Woods Hole, it is the next-
to-the-last week. The professors had become
aware for the first time of a lag of interest which
has disappeared again during the final week.
Acute writers’ cramp and chronic absence from
the laboratory are the symptoms displayed by
those who are planning the coming weeks of
mountain climbing, sailing, or collecting Canadian
salmon parasites.

During the past week live annelids and mollusks
were provided, for the study of their young.

It is interesting to note that the concentration
of potassium at which the specific effects of this
ion are evident is a rather important concentra-
tion in muscle physiology. At about this point
a slight contracture sets in, oxygen consumption
increases and various chemical changes take place.
It is probable that this break in the concentration
potential curve denotes some drastic change in the
constituents of the cell, presumably the formation
of excess potassium proteinate at the point ef-
fected.

(This article is based upon a seminar report pre-

sented at the Marine Biological Laboratory on July
14).

Methods for inducing spawning and the procur-
ing of eggs were demonstrated, and the eggs were
followed through their development from cleavage
until metamorphosis from trochophores into the
more complicated veliger or the adult form. Speci-
mens included Hydroides hexagonus, Nereis
limbata, Chiton squamosus, Teredo thompsoni,
and Cumingia tellinoides. Mabel Culberson (stu-
dent) discovered in an adult Cumingia, the mir-
acidia of a hitherto undescribed trematode. After
verifying her preliminary observations, Dr.
Stunkard accepted this as one more subject for
his extensive life-history studies.

The scheduled lecturers of the week were Dr.
Packard, Dr. Grave, and Dr. E. R. Clark. After
preliminary work covering a period of ten years
Dr. Clark reported on “Observations on Embryo-
logical Processes Occurring in Adult Animals,” as
observed with the permanent study chambers
which he has succeeded in placing in the ears of
rabbits. He concluded his lecture on Friday with
an invitation to the class for a visit to his Woods
Hole laboratory in which he and his wife are con-
tinuing the investigation this summer. The un-
animous acceptance of the invitation is sufficient
indication of the real interest (even during the
“critical week’’) of the class in a fascinating study.

The Nereis sailed out to the Hole on Saturday
morning with a boatload of embryologists to
demonstrate the collecting net method as applied
to marine larvae. The harmonious vocal exercise,
which is generally expected to accompany the re-
turn voyage of this embryology class from any
boat trip, was lacking. Dampened by the gentle
rain? Prevented by the presence of so many
larvae of the arthropods and mollusks, and the
total absence of young echinoderms (as tater re-
vealed by class investigation of the catch) ?

This review is incomplete, of course, if no
mention be made of the hitherto publicized recrea-
tional activities of the students. Monday night

Jury 25, 1936 ]

ib COLLEECLING NET

103

the embryologists lost (4 to 5) their championship
of the M. B. L. League to the collecting crew
(who are not to be bluffed by Prairie Softball
Rules.) Following the defeat, one despondent
student dwelt upon the towing trip of the coming
Saturday, and realized that there could be no
beach party. The realization spread abroad. In
fact, it was carried bodily to Provincetown, and
Boston, by certain members of the class. It in-
spired a pilgrimage to Plymouth. It was “new
business” at a meeting of the Shykin Camera Club

and the Et Al Photo Finishing Society. A few
embryo-photographers angled for a view of the
night boat on its trip through the canal. There

Was a game of hearts. Saturday afternoon, there
was talk of a bridge game. Sunday, there was
peace in the laboratory.

—Donald Bauer

BOTANY CLASS NOTES

On Monday, July 20, Dr. and Mrs. Taylor in-
vited the Botany class to a delightful buffet sup-
per. After supper, Dr. Taylor showed up our
intellectual abilities with several interesting games.
All too soon the evening was over.

On Tuesday we planned a beach party, the
weather had a few plans of its own, which un-
fortunately did not agree with ours; the beach
party has been indefinitely postponed.

The field trip to Gay Head loomed in a decided-
ly menacing manner. We had been promised
seasickness and all its attendant horrors. Wed-
nesday dawned bright and clear, the sea was
calm, and our last field trip was a grand success.
Gay Head is iideed a lovely sight, and the
swimming (also the collecting) is fine. We came
home in a gay mood, quite reconciled to our last
three days of extra hard work —WM. T.

PHYSIOLOGY CLASS NOTES

On Wednesday Dr. Hartline demonstrated for
the physiology class and its guests his method for
obtaining action potentials from a single fiber of
the optic nerve of Limulus. It was an unusual
opportunity for most of us to accurately see and
hear an optic nerve in action. The electrical ap-
paratus used for amplification of the action poten-
tials was hooked up so that the action potentials
could be heard by means of a loud speaker and
seen by means of an oscillograph. After listening
to a single fiber fire off in response to various
intensities and color of lights it was quite impres-
sive to see the size of the fiber under the dissecting
microscope and one could not but be impressed
with the exactness of technique that is necessary
for the isolation of such a minute fiber.

The inquiring reporter this week went on the
trail of three of the class instructors, two of whom
are Canadians, Dr. Kenneth Fisher and Dr. F.
J. Sichel, and a former Canadian, Dr. Robert
Chambers. Dr. Chambers was found working at

the 1936 model of his micro-dissection apparatus,
which is quite an impressive affair, so he was too
engrossed to tell us how he likes his eggs done
or who is his candidate in the election. The fol-
lowing items were therefore gleaned from “Who's
Who.” Dr. Chambers was born in Turkey of
Canadian parents, and did his graduate work in
Canada, Germany, and the United States. He is
distinguished in the field of cytology and micro-
manipulation. For his work on the physical na-
ture of protoplasm, he was the recipient of two
medals in 1925, one from the city of Philadelphia,
the other from the Linnean Society of London.
During the year Dr. Chambers works in New
York “City where he is research professor of
biology at Washington Square College of New
York University.

Dr. Sichel, who with Dr. Chambers is supervis-
ing the work on micromanipulation, did his un+
dergraduate work at McGill University and much
of his graduate work at New York University.
He later taught at both institutions as well as at
the University of Pennsylvania. Last year he held
a fellowship from the Royal Society of Canada
and worked at the Johnson Foundation of Bio-
physics at Pennsylvania. Most of his work has
been on the physiology of the isolated muscle
fiber. Dr. Sichel is the retiring secretary of the
M. B. L. Club on which he assures us he spends
his leisure time. In the winter when the Club is
not on his mind he skates and skis.

Dr. Fisher, usually known as “Ken” has been
in charge of that part of the course called the
“Fundulus heart’ in which studies are made of
systems involved in maintaining the rhythm of the
heart beat. During the winter he is demonstrator
in experimental biology at the University of
Toronto. He did not make it clear as to what it
is that he demonstrates, but hearts are his parti-
cular interest. That, along with his excellent
tennis, seems a very desirable combination.

This week the laboratory has become a hot bed
of research, studies of many kinds have been
started and each person is tending his own pro-
blem with fervor and devotion, hoping, but not
expecting, that some little sprout may appear in
these two weeks. It may be of interest to know
what some of these problems are.

Mrs. Wood and Miss MacDonald are trying to
tease some of the dehydrogenase out of frog liver
and muscle and beef muscle. They think that the
laboratory should provide as part of the equipment
a complete set of German, French, Scandanavian,
Russian, and Hungarian translators.

Our impressario, M. Paul Dugal, is using vari-
ous treatments to try to soften the hyaline plasma
membrane of arbacia eggs and trying to see if the
membrane has any influence on g; astrulation.

Under the direction of Dr. Prosser, Chambers
(A. H. Jr.) is making strength duration curves

(Continued on page 106)

104

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. XI, No. 95

The Collecting Net

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
at marine biological laboratories

Editorial: Ware Cattell, Elizabeth Thornton, Ur-
sula Reinhardt and Annaleida Snyder Cattell.

Business: Arthur C. Stirling, Amy Gamble, Boris
Gorokhoff and Marjorie Higgins.

Entered as second-class matter July 11, 1935, at
the U. S. Post Office at Woods Hole, Massachusetts,
under the Act of March 3, 1879.

AWARD OF THE NET SCHOLARSHIPS

Circumstances have made it necessary to ad-
dress the following letter to the directors of the
five courses in the biological sciences at the Ma-
rine Biological Laboratory :

It has become so much the custom for THE COL-
LECTING NET to provide a hundred dollar scholar-
ship for a student in the course to re-
turn to the laboratory for work the following sum-
mer that it is perhaps desirable that we write to let
you know that it seems most unlikely that money
can be made available for this purpose during the
present season. We have sought advice from many
sources and it seems to be the consensus of opinion
that the scholarship should be available only to
students or young investigators who are registered
at one of the laboratories who are cooperating in
the work of THE COLLECTING NET Scholarship
Fund Association.

It was with some surprise and chagrin that we
learned that the Marine Biological Laboratory could
not at the present time see its way clear to appoint
an individual on the Board of Trustees of the Schol-
arship Fund Association. We sincerely hope that
next year the whole matter will come up for recon-
sideration and that money for the award of a schol-
arship can again be turned over to the staff of the
course.

It is our intention to divide the available scholar-
ships this summer among the institutions who have
appointed an official representative on the Board of
Trustees of THE COLLECTING NET Scholarship
Fund Association.

The letters referred to in this column last week
were not mailed until Tuesday and most of the
laboratories have not had time to state their policy
in connection with the possibility of granting free
research space to holders of CotLtectinG Ner
Scholarships. An answer to one, the Biological
Laboratory at Cold Spring Harbor, has come,
however, and we take pleasure in reproducing it
in an adjacent column.

THE BIOLOGIST AND HIS TOOLS

THe CoLLectinG Nev will be under obligation
to students and teachers of the biological sciences
if they will give careful consideration to the prod-
ucts sold by these firms before purchasing from
other establishments. This is a natural request
and a natural thing for a reader of the magazine
to do, because the number of pages and the num-
ber of illustrations that we can print is in direct
proportion to the support given to it by manu-
facturers of scientific apparatus, supplies and

books. In turn, the amount of advertising space
that we can sell depends upon the support given
to these firms by the readers of THE COLLECTING
Net. We shall consider it a gracious gesture if
biologists will consult our advertising pages for
the tools that they need in their work; and fur-
ther, mention THe CoLttectinGc Net when it has
been a factor in helping them reach a decision
concerning these tools.

The publication of THr Cottectinc NET is
made possible by the firms listed here.

Scientific Apparatus and Supplies:

American Instrument Company, Inc., American
Type Culture Collection, Barnstead Still & Sterilizer
Co., Bausch & Lomb Optical Company, Calibron
Products Inc., Clay-Aadms Company, Eimer &
Amend, Fish-Schurman Corporation, General Bio-
logical Supply House, Hoke, Inc., Howe & French,
International Equipment Company, E. Leitz, Inc.,
E. Machlet & Son, New York Scientific Supply Co.,
Pfaltz and Bauer, Inc., Purina Mill, Spencer Lens
Company, Voland & Sons, Inc., Will Corporation,
Carl Zeiss, Inc.

Scientific Books:

P. Blakiston’s Son & Co., Henry Holt & Co., Lea
& Febiger, Macmillan Company, Oxford University
Press, Stanford University Press, G. E. Stechert &
Co., The University of Chicago Press, The Univer-
sity of Michigan Press, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,
Williams & Wilkins Company, The Wistar Institute.

Only through its journal has THe CoLLectTinG
Ner Scholarship Fund been made possible. Over
four thousand dollars have been awarded to prom-
ising young investigators because of its publica-
tion; its very existence is dependent upon the
firms whose names are given above. If they band-
ed together and agreed not to announce their
products in THe CoLtLtectinG Net next summer
the journal and its Scholarship Fund would cease
to exist.

We have interesting plans for increasing the
size and usefulness of Tue CoLttectinc Net
which are impeded by a limited budget ; we appeal
to its readers to acquaint themselves with the
products of our advertisers. An editorial appeal
of this kind is not customary, but this journal is
not bound by custom.

The existence of the journal is brought about
by the triumvirate: advertiser—reader—editor ;
weaken one member and the rest are weakened ;
strengthen one and each benefits. Purchase! Sub-
scribe! Contribute!

From the Biological Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor
July 23, 1936
Dear Dr. Cattell:

Thank you for your letter of July 22nd. I
ain glad that the plans for The Collecting Net
Scholarship Fund are going all right.

We shall certainly be very glad to give free
research space to people holding a scholarship,
and to help them with their research in any way
within our power.

(Signed) Ertc PoNDER

Jury 25, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

ITEMS OF INTEREST

Dr. Davip H, TENNENT, Professor of Zoology
at Bryn Mawyr College, is in the Tortugas. Mr.
David Tennent who just graduated from Yale is
working with his father.

Dr. Water E. Garrey, professor of physiol-
ogy at Vanderbilt University Medical School is
recovering from a recent operation; he is still
confined to his house on Gardner Road.

Dr. and Mrs. RALPH WICHTERMAN and baby
son arrived at Woods Hole for the summer. Dr.
Wichterman who teaches at Temple University
received his doctorate at the University of Penn-
sylvania this past year.

Dr. Harotp H. PLoucn, professor of biology
at Amherst College, is at the Tortugas Laboratory
where he is spending the summer working on
tunicates. Mrs. Plough will come to the Plough
cottage in Woods Flole early in August.

Dr. Lionet A. WALFor»D, instructor in zoology
at California State College, has just completed
work on his book, “Marine Game Fishes of the
Pacific Coast from Alaska to the Equator,” which
will be published in November. It is illustrated
with paintings by Rink Mamlinquist and photo-
graphs in natural color by Ralph Emerson.

Dr. Katsuma DAN of the Laboratory had three
visitors from Tokio this week. Dr. M. Kawai,
Tokio cod liver oil manufacturer who has been in-
specting methods of production in Norway, Dr.
S. Miyazaki of the department of pharmocology,
Keio University, and Mr. S. Terai.

Dr. and Mrs. H. B. StrernBacH arrived at
Woods Hole after a two week’s motor trip from
Minnesota where Dr. Steinbach is a member of
the University of Minnesota staff.

Dr. and Mrs. Metz have rented their two cot-
tages on Hyatt Street and have taken a farm at
West Moarland, New Hampshire, for the sum-
mer.

Miss Betry ANperscH of Rock Island, Ili-
nois, who has been visiting her sister, Dr. Marie
Andersch of the physiology class since June, left
last week for Lowa State University, lowa City.
Miss Andersch plans to complete her work for her
masters degree in speech and dramatics at the
summer session of lowa State University.

Miss Martua Reep, recently elected president
of the undergraduate student body of Barnard
College, was the guest of Dr. Opal M. Wolfe, as-
sistant professor of zoology at Barnard, at Woods
Hole last Tuesday. Miss Reed, who is a zoology
major, is spending the summer at Edgartown on
Martha’s Vineyard.

THE BASS BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY

The Bass Biological Laboratory at Englewood,
Florida, offers fellowships to members of staffs
of different institutions who have definite, out-
lined problems which fit in with the equipment
and natural fauna and flora of the laboratory. It
is located on salt water, but there are many fresh
and brackish water ponds and streams in the
neighborhood. The surrounding countryside is
sparsely settled so that the natural fauna and flora
have not been molested. Collection activities are
carried on by car, truck, row boats, motor boats,
and a two masted schooner with auxiliary motor.

The fellowships entitle the accepted applicant
to laboratory space, living quarters, and meals,
free of charge. In cases where the collection
problems entail extra expense and attention a
nomunal charge is made. We have had cases
where research workers desired to bring their
families with them. It is possible for us to rent
cottages in the neighborhood of the laboratory
for twenty-five or thirty doliars a month. Such
fellowships are entitled only to laboratory space
and collection service.

Previously our laboratory has been closed dur-
ing the summer because we felt that there were
adequate facilities at Dry Tortougas. During the
last winter we have established a small supply
department which necessitates our keeping this
laboratory open the year round. It will now be
possible for us to grant fellowships during any
season of the year. The duration of such grants
is wholly dependent upon the research problems
involved.

Should any of the faculty of institutions be in-
terested we would gladly receive application or
forward specific information regarding our loca-
tion and its adaptability to the problem involved.

M. B. L. Club Notes

At a meeting of the M. B. L. Club last Mon-
day, Dr. Charles Packard was elected president,
Dr. Laurence, vice president, and Dr, William W.
Ballard, secretary-treasurer.

The regular Monday concert was interrupted
during the first part of the program when the am-
plifying system refused to function. After work-
ing on the machine Dr. S. E. Hill played the rest
of the program for the fortunate few who hap-
pened to be there. The full program was pre-
sented on Wednesday night.

The second Mixer of the season will be held by
the M. B. L. Club on Saturday, August 1. Mrs.
Heinz Specht has been elected social chairman.

1 06

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vo. XI, No. 95

Iutroducing

Dr. JoHANNES HOLTFRETER, Rockefeller Foun-
dation fellow and assistant professor at the Mu-
nich Zoological Institute. Dr. Holtfreter was
born in Richtenberg, Germany. He attended the
University of Rostock, Leipzig, and the Univer-
sity of Freiburg in Baden, receiving his Ph.D.
from the latter in 1925. At the University of
Freiburg he worked under Dr. Hans Spemann on
the determination of liver and pancreas in the de-
velopment of triton.

Dr. Holtfreter traveled extensively in Europe
and spent nine months at the Naples biological
station as a research worker. In 1927 he went
to Berlin to become assistant in experimental em-
bryology to Dr. Otto Mangold at the Kaiser Wil-
helm Institute. After six years he went to Mu-
nich Zoological Institute of which Dr. Karl von
Frisch is director to become assistant professor.

Just before coming to America he traveled in
Belgium, the Netherlands, and Spain, lecturing
at Santander, Spain. As a Rockefeller fellow he
has worked since September at Yale University
on experimental embryology and at the Carnegie
Institute at Baltimore on the development of the
chick. At the Marine Biological Laboratory he
is working with fish eggs.

In August Dr. Holtireter will go West to Cali-
fornia and from there will take a six months’ trip
through Japan, Indo-China, and the Dutch Indies,
lecturing and visiting universities. He will re-
turn to his post in Munich in February.

Dr. Holtfreter’s publications include some
twenty-eight papers in experimental Sey

PHYSIOLOGY CLASS NOTES
(Continued from page 103)

by stimulation of the giant fibers of the squid, and
Huldah Magalhaes is making some carefully de-
signed shellacked strips of paper to be used later
as wall paper we understand. The designs are
being executed by the clam heart with and with-
out acetyl choline.

Robert Ballentine is diligent (as usual) in his
efforts to find out what effects thyroxin has on the
oxygen uptake of pecten muscle under various
conditions of pH and oxygen tension. He is
rapidly increasing his vocabulary.

Lena Lewis and Judith Smith are work on Dr.
Ferguson’s pet: carbonic anhydrase. They are
working out various quantitative methods of ex-
tracting the enzyme trom different invertebrate
tissue, and studying how certain procedures such
as the use of preservatives effect the enzyme.

—Elizabeth Magers and (Mrs.) Alburtha Wood

PROGRAM OF THE GENETICS SOCIETY
OF AMERICA

Meeting at the Marine Biological Laboratory on
the First Friday and Saturday in ‘September
Thursday, 8:00 P. M. M. B. L. evening lec-

ture by Professor Th. Dobzhansky, California In-

stitute of Technology, Pasadena, Cal. “Genetic
nature of specific and racial differences.”

Friday, 9:30 A. M. Round table conference :
“The nature of mutations.” Leader, Prof. R. A.
Emerson, Cornell University, Ithaca, N. Y., In-
troducers, Dr. R. A. Fisher, Galton Laboratory,
London, England, and Dr. L. J. Stadler, Bureau
of Plant Industry at the University of Missouri,
Columbia, Mo.

2:00 P. M. Demonstration papers.

6:00 P. M. Clam Bake.

Saturday, 9:30 A. M. Round table confer-
ence: “Progress in cytogenetics.” Leader, Karl
Sax, Harvard University, Cambridge, Massachu-
setts, Introducers, Prof. C. L. Huskins, McGill
University, Montreal, Canada, and DimCage:
Bridges, Carnegie Institution of Washington at
the California Institute of Technology, Pasadena,
California.
2

CURRENTS IN THE HOLE

At the following hours (Daylight Saving
Time) the current in the Hole turns to run
from Buzzards Bay to Vineyard Sound:

Date AGM: Beavis
Jialke 2 coc 11:24 aon
uly) 28) eee ee 12:03) eas
Jially 20.e onsen 1:06
July 30 cece ee LESS
ifjtaliyaro geese 243 Sera
Avaeust Ieee 3:32) Sonal
PNWEREEE 2 exroarsccostes 4:14 4:27
PIeUStaro! eeeeeneeree = Abas) sill
August 4 544) ora
August 5 6:28 6:49
August 6 Hey 7 230)
ING RBIE @/ =peeoreoae 8:02 8:28
PNUROSE (SB coo See 8:49 S9F22

In each case the current changes approxi-
mately six hours later and runs from the
Sound to the Bay.

a

BIOLOGICAL SONGS

Tue Cottectinc Net is planning to publish
‘VM. B. L. Songs.” It would like to have these
phamphlets include a representative collection of
the favorite songs of the laboratory people. If any
readers of the journal know any songs, biological
or otherwise, which they consider appropriate to
such a collection (that do not appear in the well
known anthologies) we shall appreciate it if our
readers will send the names of the songs, the
words, and the melodies to us for possible inclu-
sion in these two booklets.

Jury 25, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

107

NY. State Fish Hatcheries + Carnegie Institution - Blackford Hall dormitory

THE BIOLC

SS Se

Cold

BRIEF ABSTRACTS OF SOME SYMPOSIUM
PAPERS

Dr. Harry Grunprest: “Effect of Hydrostatic
Pressure upon the Excitability, the Potential
Sequence, and the Recovery of Frog Nerve.”
Hydrostatic pressure produces changes in the

processes involved in the excitation, the electrical

activity, and the recovery of frog nerve. At low
pressures (below 5000 lbs.) there is a lowering
of threshold, an increase in spike height and dura-
tion, an increase in the negative after potential
and in the amount of positivity, a slowing of the
disappearance of local excitatory state, and a
slowing in the curve of recovery. Above 5000 lbs.
there occurs a new phenomenon, the ability of
some fibers to respond repetitiously to a single
brief shock. Prolonged application of higher
pressures (above 8000 Ibs.) produces an inexcit-
able state. On release from medium pressures
excitability goes through a subnormal minimum,
and the duration of the negative after potential is
prolonged. The effects of pressure are reversible.

From the behavior (under pressure) of the dif-

ferent manifestations of nerve activity, there are

indications that this method of study permits a

separation of the various component processes of

activity.

Dr. Francis O. Scumitr: “The Oxygen Con-
sumption of Stimulated Nerve.”

A description was given of the microtechnique
by which it has been possible to measure the oxy-
gen consumption of single frog sciatics or bull
frog spinal roots whilst at the same time recording
the action potential oscillographically. At low
frequency of stimulation the increase in metabol-
ism is less than would be expected by extrapola-
tion of the curve at high frequencies; it may be
zero. Veratrinized nerves consume much more
oxygen when stimulated at low frequencies than
unpoisoned nerves under similar conditions. Yo-
himbinized nerves stimulated at the same fre-
quencies appear to respire at less than resting rate.
From this it would seem that the effect on respira-
tion which results from stimulation of an un-
poisoned nerve depends upon the balance between
the tendency for the spike to be associated with a
negative or a positive after potential.

+ Laboratory buildings - Main Building + Residences

Dr. McKeen Catteti: “On the Significance of
Initial Heat and its Application to the Meas-
urements of Muscular Efficiency.”

Evidence has been summarized which makes it
clear that the tension developed in a muscle twitch
does not bear a constant relationship to the total
energy mobilized. The older work has established
the fact that the ratio of tension to heat is a fairly
constant one under normal conditions, but we now
know of many conditions which significantly alter
this relationship. The current theories of the
underlying chemical mechanisms associated with
muscular contraction give ample latitude for the
explanation of the large changes in the efficiency
of the process. However, at the present time
attempts to relate the chemical reactions to speci-
fic physical events, such as heat and tension, are
fraught with uncertainty. Until this can be done
the interpretation of the variations in the efficiency
of muscular contraction in terms of the chemical
changes involved must remain a matter for con-
jecture.

(Received July 14, 1936)

Visitors at the Laboratory during the past week
include Dr. and Mrs. McKeen Cattell, Dr. and
Mrs. Hallowell Davis, Dr. and Mrs. W. O. Fenn,
Dr. Ernst Fischer, Dr. Herbert Gasser, Dr. R.
W. Gerard, Dr. and Mrs. Frank Blair Hanson,
Dr. and Mrs. Hudson Hoagland, Dr. and Mrs.
Oscar Wyss.

Members of the courses in Surgical Methods
and General Physiology have organized a series of
informal evening colloquia, and members of the
staff and other investigators have agreed to talk
to them on certain phases of fundamental physio-
logy. One of the purposes is to give the students
an opportunity to discuss with the speakers re-
search problems which have not as yet been at-
tacked. ;

Mrs. F. O. Schmitt and Dr. Arturo Rosen-
blueth gave an informal concert at Blackford Hall.

The baseball games have begun. After a series
of practice matches, the “surgeons’’ defeated the
“physiologists,” 19 to 10.

Dr. R. W. Gerard will lecture on Tuesday eve-
ning, July 14th, on “Brain Waves.” :

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 95

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLICATIONS
FORTHCOMING ARTICLES IN “THE AMERICAN JOURNAL OF PHYSIOLOGY”

Olmsted, J. M. D., Margutti, M., Yanagisawa, K.,
Adaptation to Transposition of Eye Muscles.

Brogden, W. J., Girden, Edward, Mettler, Fred A.
and Culler, Elmer, Acoustic Value of the Sev-
eral Components of the Auditory System in
Cats.

Kriss, M., Influence of the Plane of Nutrition on the
Manner of Heat Disposal by Cattle.

Buell, Mary V., Anderson, Ian A. and Strauss,
Margaret B., On Carbohydrate Metabolism in
Adrenalectomized Animals.

du Buy, H. G. and Coppée, G., The Electric Phe-
nomena of the Crayfish Claw During Repetitive
Stimulation.

Van Liere, E. J., Effect of Prolonged Anoxemina on
the Heart and Spleen in the Mammal.

Wilson, Helene C., The Relation between Rhythmic
Variations in Blood Pressure and Rhythmic
Contractions of the Artery of the Ear of Rab-
bits and Dogs.

Katz, L. N., Gutman, I. and Ocko, F. H., Alterations
in the Electrical Field Produced by Changes in
the Contacts of the Heart with the Body.

Forbes, W. H., Blood Sugar and Glucose Tolerance
at High Altitudes.

Shapiro, A. and Koster, H., The Influence of Bile
on the Excretion of Sterol in the Feces.

Mirsky, I. Arthur, The Site and Mechanism of the
Antiketogenic Action of Insulin.

Gellhorn, E. and Janus, A., The Influence of Partial
Pressure of O, on Body Temperature.

Necheles, H., Levitsky, P., Kohn, R., Maskin, M. and
Frank, R., The Vasomotor Effect of Acetylcho-
line on the Stomach of the Dog.

Apperly, Frank L. and Cary, M. K., The Chloride
and Alkali Content of the Duodenal Secretions
and Their Relation to Gastric Acidity and
Emptying Time.

Katz, L. N., Sigman, E., Gutman, I. and Ocko, F. H.,
The Effect of Good Electrical Conductors In-

troduced Near the Heart on the Electrocardio-
gram.

Farr, Lee E. and Smadel, Joseph E., The Urea
Clearance of Rats.

Gilson, A. S., Jr., The Effects Upon the Heart
Rhythm of Premature Stimuli Applied to the
Pacemaker and to the Atrium.

Edwards, H. T., Lactic Acid in Rest and Work at
High Altitude.

Jacobs, Henry R. and Mason, Elwood W., The In-

nocuousness of Histamine to the Dog.

Hillenbrand, Charles J. and Boyd, T. E., Reflex Res-
piratory Effects from Intermittent Stimulation
of the Vagus and Superior Laryngeal Nerves.

Rosenblueth, A., Davis, H., and Rempel, B., The
Physiological Significance of the Electric Re-
sponses of Smooth Muscle.

Cannon, W. B. and Rosenblueth, A., The Sensitiza-
tion of a Sympathetic Ganglion by Pregang-
lionic Denervation.

Rosenblueth, A. and Cannon, W. B., with the assist-
ance of Rempel, B., The Adequacy of the Chem-
ical Theory of Smooth Muscle Excitation.

Swingle, W. W., Parkins, W. M. and Taylor, A. R.,
Experiments on Intact and Adrenalectomized
Dogs Subjected to Sodium and Chloride De-
pletion by Intraperitoneal Injections of Glucose.

Swingle, W. W., Parkins, W. M., Taylor, A. R. and
Hays, H. W., Relation of Serum Sodium and
Chloride Levels to Alterations of Body Water
in Intact and Adrenalectomized Dog.

Svirbely, Joseph L., The Effect of Diets and Various
Substances on the Vitamin C Content of Some
Organs of the Rat.

Greaves, J. D. and Schmidt, C. L. A., Studies on the
Vitamin A Requirements of the Rat.

Boothby, Walter M., Berkson, Joseph and Dunn,
Halbert L., Studies of the Energy of Metabol-
ism of Normal Individuals.

Berkson, J. and Boothby, W. M., Studies of Energy
of Metabolism of Normal Individuals.

THE TERRY LECTURES OF JOSEPH NEEDHAM

ORDER AND LIFE, Joseph Needham. Lectures
at Yale University on the D. H. Terry Foundation.
175 pp. 1936. Yale University Press. $2.50.

Although the announced purpose of the Terry
Foundation is ‘the building of the truths of sci-
ence and philosophy into the structure of a broad-
ened and purified religion,” rather than the ex-
position of scientific progress as such, Dr. Need-
ham has made his own Terry lectures almost
purely scientific, and has given a general survey
of the central biological problem of morphogene-
sis, considered chiefly in the light of recent ad-
vances in experimental biology and biochemistry.
The philosophical and religious reference is im-
plied rather than stated. In his introduction and
first lecture “The Nature of Biological Order” he
explains briefly his reasons for this. While rec-
ognizing the limitations of a purely scientific ap-
proach to any problem having to do with charac-
teristics that are essentially unique and individual

—as e.g. why the universe has the nature it does
have and not some other nature (p. 12)—he be-
lieves that too much insistence on the ultimate
unanalyzability of vital processes is unfortunate
for biology since it tends to discourage an experi-
mental approach and a rigidly scientific analysis.
Accordingly he makes a strong plea for a purely
naturalistic treatment of the problem of vital or-
ganization. I feel, however, that a certain in-
justice is done to Haldane, and especially to
Driesch, in some of his references to vitalism.
Driesch, besides being a profound student of
scientific method, has always been a convinced
exponent of experimentalism in biology. Both
Driesch and, so far as I can see, Needham take the
same position, essentially, as does Kant in his
“Prolegomena’’ (Carus Edition, p. 123) ; ““Natu--
ral science will never reveal to us the internal
constitution of things which, though not appear-
ance, yet can serve as the ultimate ground of ex-

Jury 25, 1936 ] THE

COLLECTING NET

109

plaining appearance. Nor does science require
this for its physical explanations. Nay, even if
such grounds should be offered from other sources
(for instance, the influence of immaterial things),
they must be rejected and not used in the pro-
gress of its explanations. For these explanations
must be grounded only upon that which as an
object of sense can belong to experience and be
brought into connection with our actual percep-
tions and empirical laws.” Kant appears here as
the radical empiricist and exponent of “physical-
ism” in natural science—considered purely as
science.

The last two lectures are almost purely descrip-
tive and scientific. Needham recognizes the
autonomy of biological science (while taking a
fling at J. Gray ; biological experimentation is
prior to physico-chemical analysis (p. 22), al-
though such analysis is the ultimate aim of physi-
ology, which in its character as objective science
proceeds on the assumption that the same types
of order pervade both the living and the non-liv-
ing worlds. Biological order, although on a dif-
ferent level from physical order, presupposes the
latter as its necessary foundation. Hence radical
physiological analysis converges to physico-chem-
ical types of explanation.

In the second lecture “The Deployment of
Biological Order” the organizer influence in
morphogenesis receives detailed discussion and a
historical review is given. The possible relations
between the chemistry of compounds having
organizer action and the chemistry of sterols and
their related or derived hormones are indicated in
a highly interesting and suggestive manner. Con-
sideration of the physical and biochemical aspects
of the problem of organization is continued in the
concluding lecture, “The Hierarchical Continuity
of Biological Order.” The various different
levels—the higher levels presupposing and based
on the lower—of scientifically definable order dis-
cernible in the living organism are pointed out;
such a “spatial hierarchy” is seen e.g. in the
sequence; gross anatomy, histology, cytology, col-

The Williams and Wilkins Company, publishers
of scientific books and periodicals, have concluded
an arrangement with the F. S. Crofts Company,
college textbook publishers of New York City,
for cooperative publication of basic science texts
for college use.

According to Mr. Samuel Cahoon the fishing
this week is quite poor. Marine Biological
Laboratory fishermen may be interested to know
that butter fish, scup, bass, sword, mackerel, cod,
flukes, and flounders are running now.

loidal structure, biochemistry, atomic physics;
analogous temporal hierarchies (division hier-
archies, genetic hierarchies) are recognized, in
correspondence with the varying time-spans re-
quired for the existence and activity of the spatial
components. The nature of the relations exist-
ing between the living protoplasmic structure and
the enzymatic and other metabolic reactions oc-
curring within it is considered in some detail.
Protoplasmic structure, although hierarchically
on a relatively high level, is regarded as having
close affinities with microcrystalline structure.
Great importance is attached to the results of X-
ray analysis; in general, emphasis is placed on
the genetic continuity of morphology with bio-
chemistry. ‘The author holds that the steriochemi-
cal structure of the biochemical compounds de-
termines ultimately the type of structure develop-
ed in the organism; this structure has a specific
character referable in the last analysis to the
chemical specificity of these compounds, especial-
ly proteins. Examples are given showing the
many striking correspondences between micro-
structure, as illustrated in liquid crystals and the
related paracrystalline (“nematic”) state, and
certain types of organized structure. The mor-
phogenetic polarity shown in limb buds and in egg
cells has as its probable foundation the special
nematic character and polarized arrangement of
the structural compounds. The stability of or-
ganization shown by the egg cell, e.g. in resisting
disruption by centrifuging, is thus explained. The
author’s general conclusion is that the observed
types of biological order do not require reference
to specifically vital or immaterial factors but are
a natural consequence of the properties of matter
(pp. 164-5).

There is no space here to refer to the many
interesting details of treatment and the wide range
of facts and principles cited. Much of the dis-
cussion seems too technical for the non-scientific
reader of the Terry lectures, but it is of none the
less interest to the biologist on that account.

—Ratpu S. LILLIE

SUPPLEMENTARY BOOK LIST

Bews, J. W., “Human Ecology” (1936) Oxford Press.

Borradaile, L. A. and Potts, F. A., “The Inverte-
brata” (April 1936) Macmillan.

Chandler, Asa C., ‘Introduction to Human Parasito-
logy” 5th ed. (1936) Wiley.

Darlington, C. D., “‘Recent Advances in Cytology”
2nd ed. (1936) Blakiston.

Graubard, Mark, “Biology and Human Behavior”
(1936) Tomorrow.

Raunkiaer, C., ‘‘The Life Forms of Plants and Statis-
tical Plant Geography” (1936) Oxford Press.
Walton, E. P., and Foss, Philip E., ‘‘Social Biology”

(1936) Blakiston.

110 ; THE COLLECTING NET

Il Vor, XI, No. 95

0.

BLARISTON

BREMER

!
| Textbook of Histology
5th EDITION
456 Illus. (36 in Colors). 580 Pages. Fab-
rikoid $6.50.

By Dr. J. L. Bremer (Harvard University).
This is a very complete revision. It follows
the same distinctive plan but there has been
considerable reorganization. More emphasis
has been given to the normal functional
changes in cells, their activitity in the living
state as correlated with the usual histological
| picture.

!

NEAL and RAND

Comparative Anatomy

540 Illus. (1288 Figs.) 4 in Colors. Art
Frontispiece Glossary. 739 Pages. Wash-
able Cloth $4.75.
By H. V. Neal (Tufts College) and H. W.
Rand (Harvard Univ.).
It develops the subject primarily as an ap-
proach to an understanding of human struc-
ture and function. The plan is to discuss each
organ or organ system under Phylogenesis,
Ontogenesis and Anatomy.

P. BLAKISTON’S SON & CO., Inc. Publishers

2 0D 00 0S AP D-H,
re

BOOKS

PRATT
Manual of the Common Invertebrate

Animals
(REVISED EDITION)
(Exclusive of Insects)

974 Illus. Glossage. 854 Pages. Wash-

able Cloth $7.50.

By H.S. Pratt, Ph.D. (Haverford College).
It gives a general synopsis, analytical tables
and a description of species. The book has
been entirely reset from new type and con-
tains a number of new illustrations. It brings
up-to-date the nomenclature; revises larger
subdivisions and increases representation.

EVANS

Recent Advances in Physiology
5th EDITION

120 Illus. 500 Pages. Cloth $5.00.
Revised by W. H. Newton, M.D. (Univ.
Coll. Lond.)
The book has been thoroughly revised, and
this edition contains much new material on
human physiology. New and original pictures
have been added.

1012 WALNUT ST.,
PHILADELPHIA

20S OS 1 OOS OO 0S TOY,
eS

G. FE. STECHERT & CoO.

31 EAST 10th STREET - NEW YORK

LEIPZIG
Hospital Str. No. 10

: AUGER, DANIEL. Comparaison entre la

j Rythmicite des Courants d’Action Cellulaires
chez les Vegetaux et chez les Animaux. pp.
101. $1.40. Paris, 1936.

CUENOT, L. L’Espece. (Encyclopedie Scien-
tifique). pp. vi-310. $2.10. Paris, 1936.

DACQUE, EDGAR. Versteinertes Leben. ill.
pp. 131. $2.00. Berlin, 1936.

DACQUE, EDGAR. Aus der Urgeschichte der
Erde und des Lebens. Tatsachen und Ge-

i danken. 46 ill. 230 pp. $1.78. Muenchen,
1936.

FORTSCHRITTE DER BOTANIK. Unter

Zusammenarbeit mit mehreren Fachgenos-

| sen hrsg. von Fritz von Wettstein. Bd. 5.
Berichtueber das Jahr 1935. 39 ill. vi-346
pp. $10.66. Berlin, 1936.

LISON, L. Histochimie Animale. Methodes

et problemes. pp. vi-320. $3.50. Paris, 1936.
i MONTEIL, G. L’oeuf. Essai de theorie de sa
i segmentation. Avec table des planches. pp.
67. $1.25. Paris, 1935.

PLOTNIKOW, JOHANNES. Allgemeine Pho-
tochemie. Ein Hand- u. Lehrbuch f,. Studi-
um u. Forschung fuer Mediziner, Biologen,
Agrikulturchemiker, Botaniker etc. ill. 2nd

edition. pp. viii-909. $11.10. Berlin, 1936.

°,
SO OS OS OS OS EO OD OE OE 1-0 OD 0D OSD 0D 0-1:

LONDON
2 Star Yard Carey St., W. C. 2

PARIS
16 Rue de Condé

PETERS, GERHARD. Chemie und Toxikolo-
gie der Schaedlings-bekaempfung. 22 ill. pp.
120. $3.40. Stuttgart, Enke, 1936.

ROCHE, J. Essai sur la biochimie generale
et comparee des pigments respiratoires, pp.
170. $2.80.

SCHERSTEN, BERTIL. Studien ueber das
Vorkommen und die biologische Bedeutung
des Citrats in Geschlechtsdruesensekreten
des Menschen und verschiedener Tiere.
Nebst einem Beitrag zur enzymatisch-chem.
Methode zur Bestimmung von Citrat nach
Thunberg. $2.08. Lund, 1936.

SOUEGES, RENE. Exposes d’Embryologie et
de Morphologie Vegetables. V: La Segmen-
tation. pp. 80. $1.12. Paris, 1936.

VITAMINE UND HORMONE UND IHRE
TECHNISCHE DARSTELLUNG, T. 1. Er-
gebnisse d. Vitamin- u. Hormonforschg. Von
Dr. Hellmut Bredereck, Doz. pp. xi-101.
$2.22. Leipzig, 1936.

Wissenschaftliche Ergebnisse der deutschen
atlantischen Expedition auf dem _ For-
schungs- und Vermessungsschiff ‘Meteor’,
1925-1927. von Albert Defant. Bd. 6, T. 1.
ill. Subscr. price complete, bound, $34.78.
Berlin, 1936.

2,
0 aD
oe

Jury 25,1936 J

THE COLLECTING NET __ 11

My fy Men fn hr, Lr lr hi Lr. hr, hrs Mi hi Mr, Mi, Mr rs, Mn, Mr, i Mn, Mr, Mn, Mr, Mn, Lr, Mr his. Mr Ln. Lr. Mle. Mr Ls. Ms. Ahn, ds.

25 EAST 26th STREET,

PROMAR

Microscopic Projection and Drawing Apparatus
For all table and wall projection work except large lecture rooms
Excellent for

Laboratory demonstrations
Small lecture groups
Research workers
Scientific drawings

Wax reconstructions

The apparatus can readily be shifted from one research
office or classroom to another and can be supplied with |

built-in mechanical stage for 3x! or 3x2 Slides.

PROSPECTUS AND OTHER CATALOGS
SENT ON REQUEST

CLAY-ADAMS COMPANY, Inc.

25 EAST 26th STREET

WHEN IN NEW YORK

VISIT OUR
DISPLAY ROOM

DO NOT FOG

\
CLAY ADAMS CoO.

Exclusive Wholesale Distributors

VVUVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVTFTVCVVVVVVVVIVVT

LD SEAL

NON-CORROSIVE
MICROSCOPE

NEW YORK

NEW YORK

RECTANGULAR

MUSEUM JARS

Made of clear white
glass, free from bub-
bles, stria or sand-
blows. The glass is
triple annealled to pre-
vent breakage result-
ing from temperature
changes or _ internal
strain when jars are on
display or stored. Cor-
responding numbers are
etched on covers and
jars, thus insuring per-
fect fit and sealing.

Complete Range of
Sizes in Stock

Write for Circular
CLAY-ADAMS COMPANY

25 East 26th Street New York

0 0) ED 0 0-0 0 ES 0-0-0 0 0D 0D OOO OE OD OE OO EO OE OSES ES OT OT OE OT) GOS OS 0 LO LL OL ORS SEED 0 SEO

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. XI, No. 95

etl

t EARLY MORNING CALM i: Dae es FROM:

INDOLENCE?

Why do the natives of Woods Hole possess a
seemingly innate desire to stick by the old adage,
“Hooray for me—to h--- with you?” True, those
who abide faithfully to this old maxim never find
‘themselves in trouble but human nature demands
a more broadminded viewpoint. Speaking in
general, there is—and always has been—a very
apparent lack of interest in anything that goes on
in Woods Hole—be it a baseball game or an effort
on the part of those few, very few, individuals
who are interested enough to want to improve our
promising community.

To cite a few examples: Last fall a group of
citizens formed the Woods Hole Improvement
Association in an effort to improve and beautify
the town. Meetings were held and all those who
were in any way interested were invited to at-
tend. No more than a handfull of people ever
came to these meetings. When a member of the
committee asked for donations with which to carry
on the work the response was so poor that the
organization has done nothing.

Three years ago a group of young men, all
residents of Woods Hole, decided to form a base-
ball team. At a meeting held by this group it
was decided that the only way that they could
raise the funds necessary for such an undertaking
was to solicit money. It was also decided that
they would ask only those who could afford to
donate-—namely, the merchants and summer resi-
dents. The summer residents gave generously,
but the majority of the merchants gave little or
nothing at all.

Why must the lack of interest so prevalent in
this town continue? It is noticed even in the
schools. There is not a spark of school spirit in
Falmouth schools in comparison with schools of
the same size elsewhere.

The sooner the people of Woods Hole wake up
to the realization that cooperation and a little in-
terest will bring about a decided and pleasant
metamorphosis the sooner will Woods Hole be-
come a more friendly and enjoyable place to live.

—F, E. McInus

sate ead Taras yan ead ao. 4 seer esas
=
a]

AN OPEN LETTER TO THE FALMOUTH
BOARD OF TRADE

Gentlemen :—

On July 3 we addressed a letter to you asking
authority to solicit advertising in the Town of
Falmouth for Tur CottectinG Net. On July
16 you wrote that:

Subsequent to your hearing before the Advertis-
ers Protective Committee of the Falmouth Board of
Trade, the Committee voted that I should notify
you that they withheld indorsement of your adver-
tising program on the same grounds as in previous
years.

The last line of your letter naturally caused us
to consult our files for the last letter you wrote
to us, and we found that last year you wrote:

This is to certify that Miss Margaret S. Griffin,
representing THE COLLECTING NET has the au-
thority from the Protective Committee of the Fal-
mouth Board of Trade to solicit advertising.

To the editor of a scientific magazine the
“grounds” for withholding endorsement of our
advertising program do not seem sound. We shall
deeply appreciate it if you will write amplifying
the reasons for your unwillingness to sanction
Tue CoLLectiING Net as a worthwhile medium
for announcing the products of your members.

In asking for reconsideration of the matter may
I call attention to the fact that the last issue of
Tue CotvtectinG Net contained more paid local
advertising than any one in the history of the
journal. To us it seems scarcely possible that so
many members of your organization could mis-
judge its value. Possibly you have information
which indicates that they are wasting their money
by spending it to purchase advertising space im
Tue CoLLecTiING Nev. If that is the case it is
the duty of the Board of Trade to make the facts
known so that its members will not succumb to
any fraudulant statements that we may make.

The circulation of THe CorLtectinGc Net is
growing by leaps and bounds, but the journal can
not hope to retain its subscribers unless it is con-
ducted upon a sound and ethical basis. There-
fore, any advice and criticism—candidly given—
will be gratefully received.

(Continued on page 114)

Jury 25, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 113

FALMOUTH

SHOP AT

Lady PEPPERELL Shop

SPORTSWEAR
LORD PEPPERELL SHIRTS
SHEETS AND PILLOW CASES

MAIL ORDERS TAKEN
Phone 515

A FULL LINE OF LADIES’ AND GENT’S
SPORT AND DRESS APPAREL AT
THE LOWEST PRICES

Featuring

LADIES’ DRESSES
$2.95

MEN’S SHIRTS
$1.50 and $1.95

NEW. BEDFORD
BARGAIN STORE

Across Fire Station
Telephone 779

We are a 3-minute walk from the center
of Falmouth. That is why our prices are
so low.

Next to Post Office

SEAPLANE SERVICE

Schedule

New Bedford and the Islands
Charter

To Anywhere at Any Time

PHOTOGRAPHY AND INSTRUCTION

CAPE COD SEAPLANES, Inc.
COONAMESSETT POND
Telephone Falmouth 1216-J

PILGRIM
LAUNDRY

NEW FAMILY SERVICE
F — MINIMUM — $1.49

QUALITY DRY CLEANSING AT
REASONABLE PRICES

Telephone Hyannis 152-J-4

The Cottage Inn

Cor. No. Main and Depot Avenue
Falmouth

DAILY DINNERS, 50c AND UP

Choice Wines and Liquors

Dancing Every
Thursday and Saturday Night
Lyonaise and His Rhythm

=

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vout. XI, No. 95

eee DE 0S OSS OE OE EE OTT EET) ESE OE OE OE DO SE-O- 6
% ‘

Wgbe

2 ome —_

THE PENZANCE FORUM

At 3:30 on Sunday afternoon, July 19, Dr. J.
P. Warbasse conducted an outdoor forum at his
Penzance Point estate on the subject of coopera-
tives. Dr. Warbasse, the first speaker, outlined
the theory and purpose of cooperatives. Mr. R.
N. Benjamin of the Pennsylvania cooperatives
discussed cooperatives as exemplified in an In-
diana oil company; he pointed out, for example,
the great saving made by members of this co-
operative on a product made according to a stand-
ard formula. Mr. Metzger, editor of the Pennsyl-
vania Farm Journal, dealt with cooperatives as
applied to insurance and stressed the fact that
private insurance companies have adopted the re-
forms made.

According to the speakers about 2% of the
American population belongs to cooperatives and
about one-third of the workers of England.

The subject of the meeting on Sunday, July 26,
will be “American Agriculture, the No Man’s
Land of our Civilization.”

According to Mr. Robert Goffin, director of the
Woods Hole station four thousand, seven hundred
and eighty-five visitors registered at the United
States Bureau of Fisheries Aquarium at Woods
Hole last month. This is probably only a small
percentage of the actual number who came to the
aquarium ; most visitors neglect to sign.

The Penzance Players conducted tryouts last
Wednesday night for the cast of “Crab Apple”
their summer presentation. Those people tenta-
tively chosen for parts are Albert Borden, Jr.,
Betty Copeland, Peggy Clark, Mary Meigs, Gar-
rett McClung, David Smith, and Thomas Faunce.
The first rehearsal will be held Monday, July 27.

Last week we printed a report of the accident
on Sippewissette Road involving Dr. McClusky’s
car. Photographs obtained by Dr. Irving came
out well; next week we hope to be able to print
pictures showing the skid marks on the road, the
damaged car and the displaced telephone pole.

The residents who use Nobska Beach owe Mrs.
Henry Fay a vote of thanks. She has built a
hardened surfaced road in order that cars may be
parked without the danger of becoming embedded
in the soft sand—and the grounds around the
bath house have been improved a great deal. Al-
though the beach is a private one Mrs. Fay has
been kind enough to allow residents to use it.

WOODS HOLE LOG

> 0-0 SD 0-6,
oe

TRAFFIC IN WOODS HOLE. III.

It has been reported to me—although, frankly,
I can scarcely believe it—that Chief Baker of the
Falmouth Police Department was observed peek-
ing through one of the dusty windows of the Com-
munity Hall the other afternoon. The rumor fur-
ther states that he had a watch in his left hand, a
pad of paper on his knee and a chewed black pen-
cil in his right hand. His worried brow was
deeply furrowed—so the story runs—when the
president of the corporation of the largest labora-
tory on Cape Cod was held up in his car behind a
truck which was stopped by a yellow station
wagon (from Penzance) which could not proceed
because one of the town tailors had parked his car
near the Community Hall. Pouring (like frigid
molasses!) toward the Bureau of Fisheries car
after car wended its way slowly, yet impatiently,
for they wanted to look at Mr. Goffin’s beautiful
fish. With frightful vividness a terrible picture
etched itself upon my mind—what if the tinder-
box-Drew-House burst into flames. The fire en-
gine would be forced to pour (like frigid molas-
ses!) along after the other cars (which were
afraid of getting their mud guards scraped) ; the
procession being further slowed because each
driver was sticking his head out of the window to
see which way the engines were going to go.
EDITOR’S NOTE: Some criticised us for printing
C. N.’s note last week because it was ‘‘too flippant.”
However, we are printing another from him and he
threatens to write a fourth next week. We should
like the opinion of our readers as to whether we
should take space from our columns to print these

questionable letters from C. N. Shall we put his
next communication in the wastepaper basket ?

BOARD OF TRADE LETTER
(Continued from page 112)

We deem the matter of so much importance to
the merchants of Falmouth and the readers of
THE CoLiectiInG Net that we are purchasing ad-
vertising space on the front page of The Falmouth
Enterprise for July 30 to reproduce this letter.
Furthermore, we are making reservations for the
same space in following issue in which to print
your reply.

We shall be under great obligations to you for
your prompt reply.

Very truly yours,
THE COLLECTING NET,
(Signed) are Cattell, Editor

Jury 25, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

— When In Falmouth Shop At —

ISSOKSON’S

WALK-OVER SHOES, BATHING SUITS
SPORT CLOTHES

Shoe Repairing While You Wait

IDEAL RESTAURANT

Anselnis Durien
WOODS HOLE

$5 in Meals for a Ticket Costing
$4.50

ROBBINS LAUNDRY, INC.

Cape Cod’s Leading

LAUNDERERS
and
CLEANSERS

THE OASIS LUNCH

QUALITY LUNCH AND QUALITY SERVICE
Stationery
Sick Room and Photographic Supplies

Ballantyne’s Ale and Beer
— On Draught —

TWIN MERITS
Good Food

Reasonable Prices
AT THE

TWIN DOOR

WE SOLICIT YOUR PATRONAGE
Take Advantage of the Special Rates

Texaco Products
Gasoline and Oil

WOODS HOLE GARAGE
COMPANY

OPPOSITE STATION

sale on all shoes

poughkeepsie .
jax

hartford
falmouth
wellesley

THE NATURE OF GROWTH |
b

FREDERICK 4 HAMMETT
A provocative essay for the uncoaguiated.
61 pp. 75 cents
THE SCIENCE PRESS, Lancaster, Penna.

l

CAPE COD

FROM THE AIR

AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHS OF

Woods Hole, Elizabeth Islands, Quisset,
Falmouth, West Falmouth, Sippewissett,
Chapoquoit, Megansett, Cataumet, Pocas-
set, Patuisset, The Canal, Sagamore,
Menauhant, Osterville, Centerville, Hy-
annisport, Dennisport, Harwichport, etc.
ESTATES, HOTELS AND TERRAIN
PHOTOGRAPHED ON ORDER

HOWARD M. WOOD
122 Bedford Street New Bedford, Mass.

foemno. a 9,
e ae

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE
BIBLIOGRAPHIC SERVICE AND
AUTHORS’ ABSTRACTS

If you publish in any Wistar Institute jour-
nal, your paper, in abstract form, is announced
on two separate occasions, prior to the ap-
pearance of the complete article in a journal:

1st. In the Advance Abstract Sheets of the
Bibliographic Service, issued on the
15th of each month.

In the form of Bibliographic Service
Cards, issued semi-monthly.
Subscription to the Advance

Sheets—$3.00 per year.
Subscription to the Bibliographic Service
Cards—$5.00 per year.
The following journals are published by The

Wistar Institute:

Journal of Morphology

The Journal of Comparative Neurology

The American Journal of Anatomy

The Anatomical Record

The Journal of Experimental Zoology

American Journal of Physical Anthropology

Journal of Cellular and Comparative Physiology

The Journal of Nutrition

Reprints of articles appearing in the above
journals may be purchased at prices quoted
on the Advance Abstract Sheets.

For further information address

2nd.
Abstract

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE OF ANATOMY
AND BIOLOGY
36th Street and Woodland Avenue
Philadelphia, Pa.
* qcemcemcamcemcemiem vem cam renvenvemremcencenoenoan.'s

116 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. XI, No. 95

LEITZ PANPHOT

The Most Universal Equipment for Microscopic Research

Equally convenient for visual observation and
photo-micrography.

Equipped with mirror reflex box to facilitate
alignment and focusing for photography.

Usable also for micro-projection, drawing and
photo-macrography in transmitted or reflected
light.

The Leitz PANPHOT can be used for:
Brightfield (transmitted light)
Darkfield (from lowest to highest magnification
including Plankton).
Reflected light (vertical illumination).
Ultropak illumination.
Polarized light (reflected or transmitted).

Catalogue No. 7552 Upon Request

E. LEITZ, Inc.

60 EAST 10th STREET NEW YORK CITY
Branches: Washington, D. C., Chicago, Illinois, De-
troit, Michigan.

Western Agents: Spindler & Sauppe, Inc., San Fran-
cisco and Los Angeles, Calif.

—10°C to 150°C

REAGENTS, CONSTANT ne

SOLUTIONS TEMPERATURE
AND DRUGS BATHS

for Water or Oil

Special Reagents are tested accord-

ing to American Chemical Society.
May be set at any tem-
: 7 pas > : ture between —10°C
ride variety of special So- VEL
A wide variety of special seers
lutions, Stains and Drugs. | Maintaini) bathietermperse
ture constant and uni-
Advise requirements. es eaeeere
Have open, unobstructed
working space

Come to the user com-
plete with built-in re-
frigerator, ready to use.

~ EIMER & AMEND

Wst. 1851 Ine, 1897

HEADQUARTERS FOR LABORATORY
APPARATUS AND CHEMICAL REAGENTS

Third Ave., 18th to 19th St.
NEW YORK, N. Y.

Ask for Bulletin 1200

AMERICAN INSTRUMENT CO., Inc.

8010-8020 Georgia Ave. Silver Spring, Md.

Jury 25, 1936 ] THE COLLECTING NET m7

J bw MACMILLAN Aeol

Ver
Ag

Two New Books in the

Experimental Biology
: Monograph Series

Neuroembryology

By SAMUEL R. DETWILER, Columbia University

This book is designed to meet the need for a monographic survey of the recent ad-
vances which have been made by the method of experimental surgery on the embryo, and
their application to an analytical study of this subject. In its fourteen chapters particular
attention is given to such significant problems as the factors influencing the profliferation
of nerves i vitro and in vivo, forces influencing the growth of nerve cells within the cen-
tral nervous system, and the relationship of developing morphological units of the nervous
system to general somatic activities.

| The Eggs of Mammals

By GREGORY PINCUS, Harvard University

A concise account of the experimental investigations dealing with the behavior of mam-
malian eggs during the various stages of their development. A critical account of ovogene-
sis is followed by an examination of the physiological factors governing the growth, matura-
tion, and atresia of ovarian eggs, and the relation of these processes to the follicular appar-
atus and the gonad-stimulating hormones of the anterior pituitary. The history of tubal
ova is given, with an account of the comparative behavior of fertilized and unfertilized eggs
in vivo and in vitro. An account is given of recently developed techniques for the experi-
mental manipulation of living mammalian ova.

PUBLISHED AND FORTHCOMING VOLUMES: THE RECEPTOR PROCESS IN VISION,
by Selig Hecht; AUTONOMIC NEURO-EFFECTOR SYSTEMS, by W. B. Cannon and Arturo
Rosenblueth; PHYTOHORMONES, by F. W. Went and K. V. Thimann; GEOTROPISM: A }
STUDY OF DETERMINISM IN BEHAVIOR, by W. J. Crozier and Gregory Pincus; THE BI- |
OLOGY AND CHEMISTRY OF OVARIAN HORMONES, by George ‘W. Corner and Willard M.
Allen; THE MECHANISM OF HEARING, by Hallowell Davis; BIOLOGICAL OXIDATIONS,
by E. S. Guzmann Barron; THE HYPOPHYSIS, by J.B. Collip, D. L. Thomson, and H. Selye;
NITROGEN METABOLISM IN ANIMALS, by Henry Borsook; TEMPERATURE CHARAC-
TERISTICS, by W. J. Crozier; CYTO-GENETICS AND PLANT PHYLOGENY, by Ernest B.
Babcock; BIOKLECTRIC PHENOMENA IN PLANTS, by L. R. Blinks; PERIODICITY IN
ANIMAL BEHAVIOR, by T. J. B. Stier.

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 60 FIFTH AVENUE, NEW YORK

F

118 THE COLLECTING NET [ VoL. XI, No. 95

CONICAL HEADS

Hil for INTERNATIONAL CENTRIFUGES —
° Streamlined for High Speed. S 5 a?
Sloping Sedimentation Principle. XS a i rd

Greater Number of Tubes.

Light Weight and Strong.
Designed to take Standard Glassware.

Interchangeable with other regular
International Heads.

cp
BD
Whee

NI Conical Heads No. 813 and No. 838 are
shown at right.

| There is a Conical Head for every model
International Centrifuge—a wide variety of
types, all affording easy manipulation of
tubes and rapid sedimentation.

60—10 ml. tube head

INTERNATIONAL EQUIPMENT COMPANY

352 Western Avenue Makers of Fine Centrifuges Boston, Mass.

SEND FOR NEW BULLETINS

saa

Lindemann Electrometer with The application of Electrometers to the
Grounding Switch measurement of small electrical quantities has

increased rapidly in recent years.

Among the more prominent electrometer
uses are researches in radio-activity, spectro-
scopic investigations and many uses in conjunc-
tion with photo-electric measurements.

The Lindemann Electrometer (illus-
trated) is an exceptionally compact and
robust instrument of high sensitivity,
short period and low capacitance and
does not require levelling.

List 169 describes in detail the Linde-
mann, Tilted Gold Leaf, String, Doleza-

aA oi 1” lek, Recording Quadrant, and Compton Electro-

1B) meters. :

raneer wanascrres CAMBRIDGE | 2% sane contn
of Precision Terminal,

ree E ERROR nn |

ee INSTRUMENT CO, mie.

Jury 25, 1936 ]

THEE COLEECRING SNE ; 119

THE FITZ MICROMANIPULATOR WITH

twelve important features

Grouped controls which permit selection
and actuation with one hand.

Co-ordinated controls which produce na-
tural movement under the microscope.

Complete bilateral symmetry by means of
a right and left hand arrangement of con-
trols.

A device for immediate return to oper-
ating position after withdrawing for set-
ting or changing the moist chamber, tools,
ete.

Sturdy, wearproof differential screw and
wedge action.

Write for details which are contained in

booklet D-132.

Bausch & Lomb Optical

Co., 671 St. Paul Street, Rochester, N. Y.

6.

May be operated from either side, front,
or rear of optical axis, or from inter-
mediate positions.

Simplicity of technique.

Full attention can be given to observation.
Ease of selection and rotation of controls.
Rapid operation.

Sturdy construction means durability.

Specimen may be attacked from any azi-
muth.

SEE THE B & L EXHIBIT
July 25 to August 1

R. G. THOMPSON
Main Street, Woods Hole, Mass.

FOR YOUR GLASSES,_INSIST ON Bal
ORTHOGON LENSES AND B & L FRAMES

120 HHP COLLECTING INET [ Vou. XI, No: 95

VES
GIVING SPENCER OBJECT!

je atime Eppiciency

for YOUR USE

i en [
Metal por Permanent 4lignm t

lens of the oil immersion objective be-
tween two metal shoulders. The lens will
not become loose or drop out due to
the cleaning solution dissolving the ce-
ment used in the usual construction.

ns Rurnished in

Oil Inmersion Le

N 1892 Dr. Henri Van Heurck* wrote in

his book, "The Microscope": The firm
of Spencer ... in 1848 made objectives
noted as surpassing those made in Eu-
rope. In 1852 Spencer manufactured a
1/12 inch objective having 174!/2°, the
first having so large an angle of aper-
ture."

This oil immersion lens is permanently
aligned for life by special machines de-
signed by Spencer and operated by
their skilled craftsmen. It is one of the
many details made possible by the ap-

Since these early days the superiority
of Spencer objectives has been consis-
tently maintained, and mechanical re-
finements introduced to add to their ef-
fectiveness. Today, Spencer is the only
manufacturer who burnishes the front

plication of laboratory technique to fac-
tory routine—that enables you to utilize
completely the perfection of Spencer
optics. It is a definite reason why, in
purchasing a microscope, your choice
should be a Spencer.

* Dr. Van Heurck was President of Belgium Microscopical Society
and a Fellow of the Royal Microscopical Society and others.

Spencer Lens Company

Buffalo New York

\

FZ
-lAuwuaiaj]™
o\?, > OW 2

/ Rr

Vol. XI, No. 5

SATURDAY, AUGUST 1, 1936

Annual Subscription, $2.00
Single Copies, 30 Cents.

A QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS OF ANTER-
IOR PITUITARY-OVULATION RELATION
IN THE FROG: RANA PIPIENS

Dr. Roserts RucH
Instructor in Zoology, Hunter College
Since the original work by Dr. Opal Wolf in
1929, ovulation has been induced in an increasing
variety of amphibia. In 1934 it was first suggest-
ed that while either male or female glands could
be used to induce ovulation,

BIOLOGICAL RESEARCH AT THE
SCRIPPS INSTITUTION OF
OCEANOGRAPHY

Dr. CLaubE E. ZoBELL
In Charge, Biological Program
At the time his retirement from the University
of California becomes effective in August 1936
Dr. T. Wayland Vaughan will leave to his suc-
cessor, Dr. Harald U. Sverdrup, a scientific or-
ganization which has expanded

that there was a potency dif-
ference favoring the female an-

4. BH. UH. Calendar

rapidly during his administra-
tion to include all aspects of

terior pituitary. Since the re-
sponse to anterior pituitary m-
jection was not uniformly de-
pendable, it seemed desirable
to study this relationship quan-
titatively.

The work was divided into
two phases ; first, an attempt
was made to determine any
correlations between sex, body
weight, body length, gonad
weight, and anterior pituitary
weight. The second phase was
a study of the degree of ovu-
lation elicited by quantitatively
determined doses of the gland.

Over 700 frogs were used,

Dr. F. Meser:

TUESDAY, August 4, 8:00 P. M.

Seminar:
vey:
eggs without nuclei:
genetic merogony.

Partheno-

Central changes in
arbacea eggs during fertilization
—a moving picture.

Dr. H. J. Fry: Temperature ef-
fects on mitotic changes in ar-
bacia eggs.

FRIDAY, August 7, 8:00 P. M.

Lecture:
Newer Views of CO,, Transport
and Their Significance to Other
Physiological Processes,

Dr. Ethel Browne Har- |
Development of arbacea |

Dr. J. K. W. Ferguson: |

oceanographic research. Since
his appointment as director of
the Scripps Institution of
Oceanography in February
1924, Dr. Vaughan has gradu-
ally developed an extensive re-
search program in biological
oceanography. Being himself
an authority on corals and
foraminifera and recognizing
the importance of all biological
entities in the metabolism of
the sea, Dr. Vaughan has de-
voted particular attention to
biological research. He has
been instrumental in assembl-
ing a staff of well-trained bi-

covering two periods: Novem-

ologists who are working co-

ber and February. These
months were chosen as representing the beginning
and the end of the normal hibernation period.
Since it was found (Continued on page 126)

TABLE OF
A Quantitative Analysis of Anterior Pitui-
tary-Ovulation Relation in the Frog: Rana
Pipiens, Dr. Roberts Rugh.......................... 121
Biological Research at the Scripps Institution
of Oceanography, Dr. Claude ZoBell.............. 121
The Effect of Ions on the Nerve Membrane
Potential, Dr. Walter Wilbrandt..............0...... 127
Staff Meetings at the Oceanographic Institu-
tion, Donald Zinn
News from other Biological Stations................ 129

operatively with the chemical,
physical, geological and dynamical oceanographers
to advance our knowledge of the “other two-thirds
of the world,” the ocean. While it has been the

CONTENTS

The Course in Invertebrate Zoology, Dr. T.

H. Bissonnette os
Supplementary Directory .
Election of Trustees
Editorial Page
Items of Interest
M. B. L. Club a
Department of Publications
Woods Hole Log

DR. T. WAYLAND VAUGHAN

Retiring director of the Scripps Institution of Oceanography, who recently re-
ceived the Agassiz medal from the National Academy of Sciences, and LL.D. degrees
from the University of British Columbia and the University of California in recogni-
tion of his outstanding work as an investigator and organizer.

Aucust 1, 1936 ]

ASU, COMMIT CMUNE INS ID

123

policy of the Institution to allow the staff members
a high degree of freedom in the selection of prob-
lems for investigation, it has been the common
objective of all to contribute to the science of the
sea and its relation to man.

During the directorship of Dr. Vaughan the
biological research program has been expanded
and improved in several ways. Additional per-
sonnel has been appointed to provide specialists in
bacteriology, fishes and other vertebrates, inverte-
brates, paleontology, physiology, phytoplankton
and zooplankton. More adequate laboratory facili-
ties have been made available as described in THE
CottectinG Net (8:2-7, 1933). The supply of
running sea water has been enlarged and improv-
ed in quality. By the installation of diesel engines
in the boat Scripps its cruising speed and range
and its safety have been increased, thereby extend-
ing its usefulness for the collection of samples
and oceanographic data. The laboratory quarters
as well as the living accomodations on the boat
have been remodeled and an electrically-operated
hoisting device installed with enough cable to take
water and bottom samples and temperature re-
cords from depths as great as 4500 meters and
enough large cable to dredge to depths of 1000
meters. Perhaps the greatest improvement during
Dr. Vaughan’s administration has been made in
the library which now contains over 14,600
volumes, 1100 charts and 30,000 pamphlets. He
has contributed to the Institution his own personal
collection of 1800 volumes and 6000 reprints of
relevant literature besides numerous periodicals.
The library subscribes to 74 periodicals and re-
ceives 236 others on an exchange basis besides 18
periodicals which are presented as gifts. Reports
on nearly all of the important oceanographic ex-
peditions have been or are being obtained. Al-
though there is still much to be desired, the
Scripps Institution library is one of the finest of
its kind in the world.

The broad scope of the research program in
biological oceanography may be judged from the
following summary of projects upon which work
has been done during the year.

Dr. Martin W. Johnson, who has recently taken
charge of the zooplankton work, has published a
report on the seasonal migration of the wood-
borer, Limnoria lignorum in northern waters.
Likewise he has completed a paper on the de-
velopmental stages of the oceanic copepod, Eucal-
anus elongatus var. bungii. Additional study is
being made on the status of the varieties of this
species collected at various stations from Panama
to the Arctic Ocean. Dr. Johnson is continuing
his observations on the zooplankton off the Cali-
fornia coast with particular reference to seasonal
production, relation to the oxygen minimum layer
and other environmental factors. Cultural ex-
periments to determine the life cycle of the littoral

copepod, Thisbe, and of the pelagic copepod, Tor-
danus discaudatus, are in progress. Investigation
of the fouling organisms in the Institution's salt-
water system are being continued.

In collaboration with N. A. Wells and later
with Peter Doudoroff, Dr. F. B. Sumner, in
charge of biology of fishes, has continued the in-
vestigations on the respiratory metabolism of

DR. HARALD U. SVERDRUP

Famous oceanographer and Arctic explorer, who
becomes director of the Scripps Institution Septem-
ber 1, 1936.

marine fishes with special reference to its relation
to their susceptibility to certain anaesthetics and
lethal agents. Investigations on the quantitative
study of melanin production in fishes as influenced
by varied conditions of background and incident
light have been commenced. The intake and out-
put of water and salts by euryhaline fishes in dif-
ferent concentrations of sea water is being studied.
In collaboration with D. L: Fox, the influences of
certain stimuli on the accumulation of carotenoids
in the tissue of fishes are being investigated.
Professor R. B. Cowles from the University of

i _THE COLLECTING NET __——_—_—_—si[ Vou, XI. No. 96

“SCRIPPS,” THE INSTITUTION’S FLOATING LABORATORY

Which is used for the collection of specimens and oceanographic data.

FRINCIPAL BUILDINGS OF THE SCRIPPS INSTITUTION OF OCEANOGRAPHY
Showing the pier which extends 1000 feet out to sea.

j

Aucust 1, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

125

California at Los Angeles devoted part of last
summer to special investigations on fishes and Dr.
B. M. Allen from the same University has been
continuing his studies on the hypophysis of fishes
at the Institution.

Percy S. Barnhart, curator of the biological
collection, has completed a monograph on “Marine
fishes of Southern California” which is illustrated
by 292 figures. In the aquaria tanks about 855
fishes and several hundred invertebrates including
over 50 species have been exhibited. A large col-
lection of mounted fishes has been on exhibit in
the California State Building at the San Diego
Exposition. Various shells, corals, mounted
fishes and other marine organisms have been
added to the Institution’s fine museum collection
during the year.

Professor W. E. Allen is continuing his obser-
vations on the number and kind of phytoplankton
collected daily from the piers at the Institution
and at Point Hueneme. He has such data for
fifteen consecutive years. A report covering cer-
tain general features in the studies of the first ten
years has been published. He has also prepared a
report covering the outstanding results of the
study of the diatom collections obtained by Dr.
Roger Revelle on his mid-Pacific cruise on the
U.S. S. Bushnell in 1934. A taxonomic report
on the diatoins from the Sea of Java has been
published in collaboration with Dr. E. E. Cupp.
The pertinent results of the experimental studies
on “fouling organisms” carried on in cooperation
with Dr. W. R. Coe of Yale University have been
submitted for publication. Miss Sonia Ladoff
from the Allegheny High School of Pittsburgh
has been making observations on the plankton,
algae and other microorganisms of the Pacific
coast.

Dr. E. E. Cupp has completed a paper entitled,
“Seasonal distribution and occurrence of marine
diatoms and dinoflagellates at Scotch Cap, Alas-
ka.” She has given particular attention to the
centrifuge method of phytoplankton analysis. The
effect of low concentrations of deuterium oxide on
the growth of two species of the marine diatom
genus Nitzschia has been investigated and a paper
on this subject in collaboration with Dr. Fox and
Dr. McEwen has been published.

Although not a staff member, M. L. Natland
has continued to work with the Institution in a
study of the ecology of the living foraminifera in
the Gulf of Catalina. Dr. Vaughan assisted by
Dr. W. S. Cole and U. S. Armstrong has com-
pleted several papers on fossil foraminifera. Par-
ticularly meritorius has been the work on the
stolon systems of the foraminifera as a criterion
for their classification. Dr. Shoshiro Hanzawa
from the Tohoku Imperial University has been
studying the orbitoidal foraminifera in collabora~
tion with Dr. Vaughan, and F. B. Tolman spent

several days studying the Institution’s foramini-
fera collection. Dr. Earl H. Myers, now professor
of zoology at Compton Junior College, has con-
tinued his work on life cycles in the Foraminifera.

In the physiological laboratories, Dr. D. L. Fox
is pursuing studies on the carotenoid pigments of
marine organisms. In collaboration with Dr.
Sumner it has been demonstrated that certain
optical environmental factors affect the amounts
of xanthophyll stored by Girella migricans, and
that Fundulus parvipiniis lost none of its xan-
thophyll when maintained for long periods on a
carotenoid-free diet and increased its quantities of
xanthophyll when fed either the latter carotenoid
or carotene. Jointly with Dr. Young it has been
found that certain surf perches selectively absorb
only one of the three different carotenoids in a
species of shrimp which the perches consume. A
xanthophyll ester is hydrolyzed in the gut, stored
in a re-esterified condition in the skin and fins,
and any excess temporarily stored in an unesteri-
fied condition in the rectal segment of the gut.
Dr. Fox has published results indicating that
heavy water has little or no influence on the activ-
ity of certain enzymes. Working with Dr. R.
Craig a slight enhancement by heavy water of the
enzymatic hydrolase of starch was observed. Dr.
Fox, Dr. E. E. Cupp and Dr. G. F. McEwen
report that heavy water seems to retard the
growth rate of the diatom, Nitgschia bilobata, but
apparently stimulates that of V. closterium. A 64
page paper on the habitat and food of the Cali-
fornia sea mussel has recently been published.
Prior to his resignation in October, Dr. G. W.
Marks made important contributions to our
knowledge of the catalase of marine animals and
plants as well as on the comparative copper con-
tent of various marine molluscs.

In microbiology, Dr. Claude E. ZoBell has con-
tinued his studies on the measurement of the
oxidation-reduction potentials of sediments as in-
fluenced by bacterial activity. The O/R potentials
of strata from different depths as well as the verti-
cal distribution of aerobes and anaerobes has been
published. Assisted by D. Q. Anderson, the ver-
tical distribution and relative abundance of bac-
teria in marine sediments which activate the fol-
lowing physiological processes of oceanographic
significance have been estimated :—ammionifica-
tion, nitrate-reduction, denitrification, nitrification,
urea-fermentation, cellulose-decomposition, chitin-
digestion, fat-hydrolysis, sulfate-reduction, starch-
hydrolysis, and various hydrolytic processes. It
has been found that bacterial activity as manifest-
ed-by COs evolution, NH; production, NOx re-
duction and bacterial multiplication is greater in
small than in large volumes of sea water because
of the periphytic habits of marine bacteria. The
investigations of Miss W. A. Landon indicate
that mussels, barnacles and other marine animals

126

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI. No. 96

can subsist on a bacterial diet. Mrs. C. Feltham
has continued the work on the specificity of
marine bacteria. Miss Helen Mathews, a summer
visitor from the University of British Columbia,
finds that the types of bacteria found in air are
indicative of whether air masses are of marine or
terrestrial origin. Mrs. Alice Callaway is working
on the filter-ability of bacteria and the osmotic
pressure tolerance of marine ws. freshwater forms.
An autochthonous bacterial flora in Great Salt
Lake has been demonstrated by the direct mi-
croscopic procedure in collaboration with W. W.
Smith of the University of Utah. Dr. Blodwen
Lloyd spent several months at the Institution
while on sabbatical leave from the Royal Techni-
cal College of Glasgow studying denitrification
and the factors which influence the activity of
bacteria in stored sea water.

Dr. R. T. Young, a visiting scientist who has
been working in the Institution laboratories dur-
ing the last two years, has been especially interest-
ed in parasites. He has collected and preserved
for future reference a large number of cestodes
from fishes and birds. The life histories of the
trematode, Levinsella sp., from the godwit
(Leimosa fedoa) and an indeterminate trematode
from the surf perches (Embiotocidae) have been

A QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS OF THE ANTERIOR PITUITARY-OVULATION
RELATION IN THE FROG: RANA PIPIENS

(Continued from page 121)

that the anterior pituitaries varied in weight from
0.6-1.6 milligrams, in order to lessen observational
error, the glands were removed from frogs of ap-
proximately the same body length and were
weighed in groups of twenty.

While the body lengths of males and females
averaged almost the same for November and Feb-
ruary, there was consistent reduction in average
body weight and average gonad weight, over this
hibernation period. Body length, as measured
from nares to cloacal opening, was the standard
by which other variables were considered. It was
found that males and females with body lengths
less than 71 millimeters were immature; that be-
tween 71-74 millimeters there was the beginning
of gonad growth and maturity: and that males
and females longer than 74+ millimeters showed
sex differences in the relative weights of their an-
terior pituitaries. These differences favored the
males, both in November and in February. Over
this hibernation period there was considerable re-
duction in relative weight of the anterior pitui-
taries in both sexes, at some stages being as much
as 29%, ‘There is a similar reduction, over the
hibernation period, of relative ovarian weights,
with the greatest reduction among the smaller fe-

co

partially determined. A fork-tailed cercaria from
the Bering sea has been described. Dr. Young
is also investigating the influence of pH, distilled
water and various salt solutions on fish to deter-
mine the cause of their death. Various pathological
effects including chemical changes in the blood
which may induce asphyxia have been observed
but it is not known yet whether these effects
cause death or if they are merely incidental.

La Place Bostwick, a special resident investi-
gator, has published the results of his successful
cultivation of pearls in abalones. Dr. Chin Chih
Jao of the Rockefeller Foundation in Natural
Sciences devoted several months to the study of
local sea-weeds and to learning modern oceano-
graphic methods. Professor Loye Miller from
the University of California at Los Angeles has
taken advantage of the cruises of the boat Scripps
to collect data on near-shore birds. Harold Pratt
and Irving McClurkin, both from the University
of Colorado, have been studying the invertebrates
of the intertidal zone.

During the year 22 papers have been published
on subjects appertaining to biological oceano-
graphy, eight others have been accepted for pub-—
lication and a dozen are in preparation.

males. If anterior pituitary weights are plotted
against ovarian weights, it is demonstrated that
there are correlating reductions in the weights of
these two organs, all points falling on a straight |
line for both November and February. :

In respect to the induction of ovulation, it was _
found that in November 8 mgms. of male anterior
pituitary induced about 42% of the eggs to leave
the ovary while 5 mgms. of female gland tissue n=
duced 85% ovulation. In February, 4 mgms. of
either male or female gland tissue would induce~
100% ovulation, and in doses less than this there —
were indicated differences in potency favoring the
female gland. =

The anterior pituitaries removed from females
which had been induced to ovulate showed no de-_
crease in potency in respect to inducing ovulation —
in other females. This supports the thesis that the
injection of the hormone is comparable to the
liberation of the host’s hormone, and that the
host’s hormone is in no way affected. 4

If frogs are selected at random, it will be found
that the average male anterior pituitary is 16%
heavier than that of the average female, but is
only 60% as potent in respect to inducing ovula-
tion. This supports the thesis, first advanced in

Aucust 1, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

127

1934, that the female glands are approximately
twice as potent as those from males.

Like many biological processes, which at first
seem to be simple, this relationship between the
anterior pituitary and ovulation resolves itself in-

~to a number of variables: 1. Size and sexual ma-
turity of the donor. 2. Concentration of the hor-
mone through hibernation reduction in weight. 3.
Activity of the recipient’s own gland. 4. Source
of the hormone, 1.e., from male or female. 5.
Dose of the hormone (mgms. of gland tissue).

6. Size and sexual maturity of recipient, and 7.
Size and susceptibility (maturity) of the ovaries
to ovulation induction.

This quantitative study points to seasonal as
well as metamorphic changes in the anterior pit-
uitary which must be studied from the cytological
point of view. This study is being made on the
bullfrog, Rana catesbiana, and will be reported
subsequently.

(This article is based upon a seminar report pre-

sented at the Marine Biological Laboratory on
July 21).

THE EFFECT OF IONS ON THE NERVE MEMBRANE POTENTIAL

Dr. WALTER WILBRANDT
Rockefeller Fellow in Physiology, University of Pennsylvania

__ The injury potential has been interpreted by the
assumption of a selectively ion permeable mem-
_ brane, surrounding the cell and separating differ-
et electrolyte solutions inside and outside. In-
. yestigating the effect of inorganic ions on the in-
“jury potential of the frog’s sciatic nerve and
using this interpretation, Netter (Pflugers Ar-
chiv 218, 310 (1927/28) ) came to the conclusion
that the nerve membrane must be exclusively ca-
‘tion permeable, since he obtained a change of the
‘potential only by varying the cations, whereas
changing the anions had no effect.

Extension of this work in two directions
seemed desirable. »With regard to the question
of the role of the membrane in impulse propaga-
‘tion it seemed desirable to know whether the
(histologically very different) membrane of the
on-nyelinated nerve would behave similarly.
Furthermore it seemed desirable to obtain infor-
nation as to whether organic ions can influence
‘the potential. Parts at least of the electrical dis-
turbance during activity, the after potentials,
‘seem to be connected with the metabolism of the
nerve, which connection might be based on the
formation of ionised metabolites, acting on the
membrane potential.

_ The experiments were done on leg and claw

Nerves of the spider crab, with a technique not

essentially different from that used by Netter.

_ The action of inorganic cations was found to
be essentially similar to Netter’s results, the ef-

tesults, had a marked, though slight effect, indi-
ating the series Cl= Br<NO3<SCN. _ Diffu-
ion potentials have been shown not to be respon-
ible for the effect, and the effect of lowering the
oncentration of potassium has been taken into ac-
E The membrane of the investigated non-

myelinated nerve therefore seems not to be ex-
clusively, though predominantly, cation permeable.

Organic cations do affect the potential, the ef-
fectiveness lying between that of Na and K, in
the approximate order: choline = tetramethyl-
ammomum < dipropylammonium < dimethylam-
monium = diethylammonium < tetraethylammon-
ium < guanidine < dibutylammonium < diamyl-
ammonium. ‘Thus, ascending in the homologous
series of the dialkylamines, there appears first an
increase, then a decrease of effect.

If we assume that we are dealing with some
sort of porous membrane, to some degree analo-
gous to the porous dried collodion membrane of
Michaelis, this may be accounted for in the fol-
lowing way. The lower members of the series
act according to their ionic sizes. The strong ac-
tion of the higher members is due to their in-
creasing accumulation at the interface. Stalag-
mometric measurements of the interfacial tension
between aqueous solutions of dialkylammonium
salts and liquid petrolatum show an increasing
accumulation at this interface. Hober’s results
on the rate of penetration of organic salts into
erythrocytes indicate that similar accumulations
can take place also at biological interfaces. In
his experiments with organic anions a fairly close
correspondence could be seen to the action of the
salts on the potential across an anion permeable
impregnated collodion membrane. Likewise the
effect of the organic cations discussed above on
the collodion membrane potential agrees qualita-
tively with their effect on the nerve potential.

Organic anions were also shown to affect the
potential, which seems interesting in view of the
possible connection between after potentials and
metabolism. The soaps acetate, propionate, bu-
tyrate, as well as lactate and pyruvate, proved ef-
fective. The effects are about as strong as that
of SCN, the most effective inorganic anion.

bo
~

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI. No, 96

STAFF MEETING AT THE OCEANOGRAPHIC INSTITUTION

Mr. Columbus O’D. Iselin of Harvard Univer-
sity and the Woods Hole Oceanographic Institu-
tion spoke on some results of the German Meteor
expedition at the staff meeting on July 9th.

The reports from this expedition are still being
worked up in Berlin at the Institut fur Meere-
skunde and although far from being finished, they
already contain some excellent ideas new to
Oceanography. One of the main difficulties with
such a monumental and voluminous piece of work
is that it may be accepted in its entirety for some
time to come and without the benefit of construc-
tive criticism from outside sources. But, because
of their completeness, the Meteor reports mark
the end of the first period of the Oceanographic
Exploration of the Atlantic Ocean.

The newness of the methods used in these re-
ports is noticeable particularly in Vol. 6 on “The
Stratification and Circulation of the Atlantic
Ocean” by Wiist and Defant. This work con-
sists of three papers, each with atlases, bearing
the following titles:

1) The Bottom Water and Structure of the At-
lantic Deep Sea—Wust.

2) The Stratosphere—Wust.

3) The Trophosphere.—Defant.

The ‘‘Stratosphere” is a term used to signify
the deeper layer of the ocean and the “tropho-
sphere” the upper layer. These terms, according
to Mr. Iselin, were not very satisfactory, for the
ocean is not quite that easily apportioned. The
terms are more easily justified in meteorology
where they originated.

In the ocean the thermal characteristics are just
the reverse of those in the atmosphere, but the
vertical stability thereby produced is not compar-
able; the speaker making the specific differences
in this respect between the two media clear by il-
lustrations and charts.

The ocean being divided into the stratosphere
and the trophosphere, there must of necessity be
a dividing line between the two regions, and hence
8° isotherm was settled on as a suitable boundary
in the Atlantic. The water just above and just
below this particular layer, although quite impor-
tant, was somewhat neglected in Wust’s treat-
ment of the situation. It is this layer having tem-
peratures between 5° and 11° that is most aftect-
ed by circulatory movements. Iselin, therefore,
prefers a three-layer division of the ocean.

Wiist’s stratosphere paper is monumental; he
has traced the deep water movements in three di-
mensions. It is well to mention here that deep
water movements in the sea start with the char-
acter of tongues. The distance a tongue can be
followed as a maximum or minimum is not great,
because the physical characteristics soon disappear

through mixture. The movements can be traced

further, however, by the salinity-anomaly method.

There are several deep movements of ocean
water traceable through salinity. Thus, the South
Atlantic Ocean can be shown to receive water
from the North Atlantic at mid-depths; off Gib-
raltar the salinity is at a maximum at 1200 me-
ters, but as one proceeds southward, the water be-
comes gradually fresher. Wust has traced this
deep current to high southern latitudes, where
through chilling this water sinks to the bottom
and flows northward again. There is nothing
really known about the actual rate of movement
of these currents.

The chief criticisms of Wust’s paper are: (1)
oxygen is not always a reliable method for trac-
ing deep currents; (2) the whole story of deep
movements is not yet known; (3) no one method
has yet been developed for solving all the types of
movements found in deep water.

The objections to Defant’s paper next taken up
by Mr. Iselin are: (1) we do not yet know the
etfect of the seasonal and annual changes in the
upper 300 meters of water in low latitudes; (2)
the observations from different years and at dif-
ferent seasons can’t always be combined for reli-
able conclusions ; (3) the surface layer studied by
Defant is about 18,000 times as wide as it is deep,
causing tremendous distortion of water layers in
any diagrams showing the vertical changes of
temperature, salinity or oxygen content; (4) the
relative importance of the frictional effect of the
wind and the horizontal variations of surface
density are not yet known. One might conclude
from this paper that the surface layers are far
more complicated than ever thought of before and
that the complexity of surface movements in low
latitudes is tremendous.

In closing, Mr. Iselin stated that the oceano-
graphers of the Meteor today, although they have
made great strides, are not always in accord with
the oceanographers of other countries, and that al-
though at least ninety percent. of the A/eteor pa-
pers described are acceptable, he had tried to
point out wherein the remaining ten percent.
could be easily misinterpreted. :

A very interesting discussion was held after
the speaker finished, the following questions being —
asked :

Dr. Bigelow—What is the effect of the drift of
larval eels in relation to the current? How do
they drift to Europe as they have no mechan-
ism to get them along from the western part of
the Sargasso Sea to the European coastline?

Dr. Allen—What is the relationship between the
outflow of big rivers into the ocean and surface
currents ?

(Continued on page 130)

.

Aucusr 1, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

NEWS OF BIOLOGICAL STATIONS OUTSIDE OF WOODS HOLE

NY. State Fish Hatcheries - Carnegie Institution + Blackford Hall dormitory

Laboratory buildings -

Main Building + Residences

old

“THE= BIOLOGICAL

Spring

: ra pe ees =
svg i ein FS BE

LABORATORY

Eva mba cass

DIRECTORY OF THE BIOLOGIGAL LABORATORY, COLD SPRING HARBOR

STAFF, INVESTIGATORS, AND ASSISTANTS

* Summer Staff.
** All-year Staff.

Abels, Julius, Assistant—N. Y. U. Medical College.
*Abramson, Harold A., Research and Instruction—
College of P. and S., Columbia University.
Bacon, Annette, Assistant—Temple University.
*Blanchard, E. W., Instruction—Bryn Mawr Col-
lege.
*Cain, Mildred, Administration.
*Cain, Stanley A., Instruction—University of Ten-
nessee.
*Castle, William A., Instruction—Brown Univer-
sity.
*Cole, Kenneth S., Research and Instruction—Col-
lege of P. and S., Columbia University.
*Corner, George W., Instruction—University of
Rochester School of Medicine.
*Cunningham, Bert, Research—Duke University.
*Curtis, Howard J., Research—College of P. and
S., Columbia University.
**Fricke, Hugo, In charge Biophysics—The Biologi-
cal Laboratory.
**Gallagher, D. M., Radio Engineer—The Biological
Laboratory.
Goldblatt, Harry, Research — Western Reserve
University School of Medicine.
**Goldsmith, Thomas T., Jr., Physicist—The Biolog-
ical Laboratory.
?*Grout, A. J., Bryologist—The Biological Labora-
tory.
Guttman, Rita, Assistant—College of P. and S.,
Columbia University.
**Harris, Jane D., Administration—The Biological
Laboratory.
Hinchey, M. Catherine, Research—Temple Univer-
sity and University of Pennsylvania.
Huene, Elizabeth, Assistant—Duke University.
Jahn, Theo., Research—State University of Iowa.
Katz, Rudolph, Research—Massachusetts Institute
of Technology.
**Klem, Dorothy,
Laboratory.
Laity, Elsie, Research—Temple University.
*Lytle, Theodore, Administration—Harvard Medi-

Administration—The Biological

cal School.

**MacLeod, John, Assistant—The Biological Labor-
atory.

*Marsh, Phronsie, Administration—The Biological
Laboratory.

Morris, Samuel, Research—Temple University.
*Moyer, Laurence, Research and Instruction—Yale
School of Medicine.
**Ponder, Eric, In charge of Physiology and interim
Director—The Biological Laboratory.
"Schaeffer, Asa A., Research—Temple University.

**Smith, Homer, Chemist—The Biological Labora-
tory.
*Smith, T. L., Research—College of the Ozarks.
Spencer, J. M., Assistant—College of P. and S.
Columbia University.
*Spieth, H. T., Instruction—College of the City of
New York.
*Taylor, I. R., Instruction—Brown University.
*Van Cleave, H. J., Instruction—University of Il-
linois.
**Van Olinda, Ruth, Administration—The Biologi-
cal Laboratory.
*Walzl, Edward, Assistant—Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity.
Yeakel, Eleanor, Research—Bryn Mawr College.
Young, John Z., Research—Oxford University.

STUDENTS

Avis, Frederick, Instructor—Worcester Academy.

Barrett, Harold, Undergraduate—Brown University.

Batlin, Alexander, Graduate student—Johns Hop-
kins University.

Bell, W. Randal, Graduate student—New York Uni-
versity.

Berg, Milton, Undergraduate—Brown University.

Brown, Mary J., Assistant Professor—University of
Wyoming.

Bruner, Jerome, Undergraduate—Duke University.

Candon, Basil, Graduate student—University of Ver-
mont.

Conklin, Ruth E., Assistant Professor—Vassar Col-
lege.

Cummins, George M., Jr., Instructor—St. Ambrose
College.

Davidson, David L., Graduate student—Brown Uni-
versity.

Dow, Thompson, Undergraduate—St. John’s College.

Green, Earl, Graduate student—Brown University.

Kreezer, George, Research Associate, Training
School—Vineland, N. J.

Jones, Sarah, Instructor—Vickery High School,
Texas.

oe Francis, Undergraduate—Ohio State Col-
ege.

McLean, Walter, Undergraduate — University of
Pittsburgh.

Meyer, Eugene, Undergraduate—Yale University.
Nelson, Mary, Graduate student—Tulane University.
Rakov, Jerome, Undergraduate—Cornell University.

Randall, H. Thomas, Undergraduate — Princeton
University.

Reichel, John, Jr., Undergraduate—Princeton Uni-
versity.

Richardson, Philip, Instructor—Simmons College.

Roh, Charles, Undergraduate— Princeton University.

Savage, Eric, Undergraduate—Harvard.

Siegel, Adele F., Undergraduate—Hunter College.

Stewart, Walter A., Undergraduate — Dartmouth
College.

130

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vout. XI. No. 96

FROM THE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY
AT COLD SPRING HARBOR
Received, July 30)

Recent visitors at the Laboratory have included
Dr. Frederick Bedell, Dr. and Mrs. F. A. Gibbs,
Dr. and Mrs. W. G. Lennox, Dr. G. H. Parker,
Dr. C. Ladd Prosser, Dr. N. Rashevsky, Dr. B.
H. Willhier.

Dr. J. R. Katz lectured on Thursday, July 23rd
on “The Application of Ultraviolet Spectroscopy
to Biological Problems.” On Tuesday evening,
July 28th he lectured on “The Submicroscopic
Structure of Starch.”

Dr. and Mrs. Harry Goldblatt will be at the
Laboratory for the remainder of the summier.

The annual Laboratory party was held at
Blackford Hall on Friday evening, July 17th. En-
tertainment, aside from dancing and refreshments,
included an orchestra composed of Mr. D. M.
Gallagher, Dr. E. W. Blanchard, Dr. Morton Ru-
bin, and some neighborhood talent; some Argen-
tine tangoes by Dr. José Odoriz and Miss Vivian
Behrmann ; a trick by Dr. Hudson Hoagland ; folk
songs by Dr. Georges Coppée, who accompanied
himself with the guitar; songs by Miss Marjorie
Van Olinda and Mr. Gallagher.

The men’s tennis tournament was won by Mr.
Eugene Meyer, who defeated Dr. E. W. Blanch-
ard in the finals; Mrs. Hudson Hoagland defeated
Miss Eleanor Yeakel to win the women’s tourna-
ment. Dr. R. W. Gerard was the winner of the
ping-pong tournament, and Mr. John MacLeod
of the pool; the runner-up in each of the last two
was Mr. Philip Richardson.

Dr. Harold Abramson and Dr. Laurence Moyer
have talked at the Carnegie Institution Journal
Club meetings recently on various phases of elec-
trokinetics.

STAFF MEETING AT THE OCEANOGRAPHIC
INSTITUTION

(Continued from page 128)

Dr. Rossby—How do the European and Ameri-
can eels separate in going to Iceland and
Greenland respectively ?

Dr. Renn—What is the relationship of oxygen,
plankton production, etc. to the figures on
Wist’s diagrams ?

Dr. Bigelow—How is the oxygen-deficient layer
at 800 meters interpreted in Wiist’s report?

Donatp ZINN

NOTES FROM THE SCRIPPS INSTITUTION
OF OCEANOGRAPHY
(Received, July 21st)

Dr. N. W. Cummings, Department of Physics,
San Bernadino Junior College, arrived on
Wednesday of last week to complete the develop-
ment of his instrument for recording solar radia-
tion. He plans to work at the Scripps Institution
for the next six weeks, making use of the instru-
mental equipment here for comparisons with his
instruments. In his observations he is including
measurements of evaporation of water which de-
pends upon radiation.

Dr. Martin W. Johnson has returned from a
two-weeks’ trip with the U. S. Coast and Geodet-
ic Survey steamer Guide off Cape Mendocino, on
which he made oceanographic observations, col-
lecting water, plankton and bottom samples at
about twenty stations, besides making hydro-
graphic observations at five stations.

Dr. E. G. Moberg and family have returned
from vacation in British Columbia. During their
absence Dr. Moberg attended the meetings of the
American Association for the Advancement of
Science, the Oceanographic Society of the Pacific,
and the Western Society of Naturalists, all of
which were held in Seattle in June.

Dr. and Mrs. Richard H. Fleming have re-
turned from their vacation trip to Victoria, B. C.,
Dr. Fleming’s old home. Dr. Fleming also at-
tended the scientific meetings in Seattle.

Mr. M. L. Natland of the Shell Oil Company
at Long Beach visited the Scripps Institution on
Saturday for a conference regarding his work on
living foraminifera of this region.

Dr. and Mrs. Nelson A. Wells are visiting the
Scripps Institution for a few days. Dr. Wells
was formerly a research assistant here, working
on physiology of fishes with Dr. F. B. Sumner.
While here they are guests of the Sumners.

On Monday, Commander G. A. French, R. N.,
and Lieut. Commander T. A. Holden, R. N., from
H. M. S. Apollo, came to visit the Scripps Insti-
tution with Mr. M. J. Walsh, chemist of the Kelp
Laboratories of San Diego. They were especially
interested in the hydrographic work of the Insti-
tution.

THE COLLECTING NET has been entered as second-class matter July 11, 1935, at the Post Office

at Woods Hole, Massachusetts, under the Act of March 3, 1879.
It is published weekly for ten weeks between June 1 and September 15
from Woods Hole and printed at The Darwin Press, New Bedford.
the third floor of the Woods Hole station of the United States Bureau of Fisheries.

marine biological laboratories.

It is devoted to the scientific work at

Its editorial offices are situated on
Between June 1

and October 1 communications should be addressed to Woods Hole, Massachusetts; at other times they
should be directed to THE COLLECTING NET, Garrison, N. Y. Single copies cost 30c; a subscription

(containing not less than 280 pages) costs $2.00.

re

Aucust 1, 1936 }

THE COLLECTING NET

131

THE MARINE INVERTEBRATE COURSE AT THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL
LABORATORY

Dr. T. HumE BIssONNETTE
Instructor in Charge; Professor of Biology, Trinity College

This course differs from the courses in Inver-
tebrates usually given at the Universities and Col-
leges throughout the country in that its objectives
are at least three-fold. It presents enough of the
comparative anatomy of the invertebrates, as de-
termined by observation and dissection of the
conventional forms together with much more var-
ied materials than are possible in most colleges, to
enable those who have not taken such courses to
learn at first hand the fundamentals of inverte-
brate structure ; for more advanced students it fur-
nishes a review of this in sight of living material.
In the second place, from the study of many forms
in the living and active condition, the general
physiology and behavior of these forms are
brought to the attention of students. But perhaps
the most important objective and part of the
course is the study of animals in the field in their
various habitats and associations. It enables the
students to learn by name and to recognize at
sight many of the more common or interesting
species native to the district and to become con-
versant with their classification and specific char-
acteristics. This is facilitated by the use of keys,
prepared by the staff of the course, for rapid iden-
tification of common species belonging to the vari-
ous phyla. This part of the course lays a founda-
tion for the more specialized studies on Embryolo-
gy, Physiology, and Ecology.

This third part of the course is presented on
field trips for which the class is divided into six
teams. Each member of a team is taught to use one
or more implements on each trip, aiding the team
in finding, identifying, and learning the habits and
preferred habitats of a comparatively large num-
ber of species in each region visited. Each team

of nine students is accompanied by a different in-
structor on each excursion. These instructors are
interested in different aspects of biology and in
different groups of animals. As in the laboratory,
the method of attack upon the problems in the
field differs with different instructors, thus each
team comes under the influence and guidance of at
least six different instructors or members of the
staff on field trips and of nine in the laboratory.

The animals of the different Phyla will be
studied in the following order: Protozoa, Pori-
fera, Coelenteratos, Ctenophores, Platyhelminths,
Nemerteans, Nematodes, Annelids, Molluscs, Ar-
thropods (including Limulus), Bryozoa, Echino-
derms, and lower Chordates of the region.

Special lectures on Ecology, Marine Zoology,
and Invertebrate Phylogeny will be given by
members of the staff and, if possible, others by
scientists working at the laboratory or visiting it.

It is planned to take field trips to the following
regions: Lackey’s Bay, Nobska Point, Kettle
Cove, Lagoon Pond Bridge near Vineyard Haven,
Cuttyhunk, North Falmouth, Tarpaulin Cove, and
Hadley Harbor, where varied habitats are to be
found near enough together to make it possible to
study many in a short time of collecting while tide
study many of them in a short time of collecting
while tide is low. Students will spend half a day
observing and studying animals freshly dredged
up from different parts of Vineyard Sound. These
studies are made directly on the materials as the
dredges are emptied on the boat. Students will
learn how these animals are secured, and how they
are associated with each other and with different
types of sea floor.

BIRD NOTES
F. N. WHITMAN

Interesting incidents occur on collecting trips.
A large red-tailed hawk passed near me yester-
day, a red-winged blackbird urging it on.

I once surprised a roughed grouse with young.
They vanished. Looking down around my feet I
soon made out several squatting flat. Four half
grown woodcock—met on the Sippewisset Road
—faded like magic on the grassy roadside. I
stood two feet from them several minutes without
seeing them. Finally they moved. Meanwhile

the mother led a young friend of mine a ludicrous
chase down the road.

The abundance of woodcock is appreciated if
one is abroad after dusk in April when these snipe
engage in their interesting song flights.

Several recent records of white herons (white
phase of little blue heron) in Falmouth are note-
worthy.

The singing of the hermit thrushes makes in-
terior Cape points a wonderland.

__THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI. No. 96

SUPPLEMENTARY DIRECTORY

KEY

Laboratories
Botany Building ........ Bot

Residence

Apartment

: aA Dormitory
Brick Building.............. Br DENY EGGS %
ectiure Hallo occ.c.cccsesne L_ Fisheries Residence......F
Main Room in Fisheries Hone

Wa QOLALOLY eerenscinsesesy M UO EEE ine

Bi Kahler ..

Old Main Building...OM kidder .....
Rockefeller Bldg....Rock Whitman

In the case of those individuals not living on
laboratory property, the name of the landlord and
the street are given. In the case of individuals
living outside of Woods Hole, the place of residence
is given in parentheses.

MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY

INVESTIGATORS

Clark, J. K. Trinity. OM 28. K 5.

Dan, Jean C. grad. Pennsylvania. Br 111. Whiting,
Minot.

Dan, K. res. assoc. phys. Misaki Mar. Biol. Stat. Br
111. Whiting, Minot.

Derrickson, Mary B. grad. asst. biol. Duke. Br 8.
WF.

duBuy, H. G. res. fel. phys. Harvard Med. Br 233.
Robinson, Quisset.

Figge, Rosalie Y. res. asst. anat. Maryland Med.
Rock 6. D 210.

Fleisher, M. 8. prof. bact. St. Louis. Br. 304.

Gilchrist, F. G. asst. prof. zool. Pomona (Clare-
mont). Br 323. Cassidy, Millfield.

Gottschall, Gertrude Y. asst. biochem. Cornell Med.
Br 121. D 213.

Hutchings, Lois M. teach. biol.
(Newark). Br 110-F. H 7.

Itoh, H. grad. zool. Pennsylvania. Br 220. McInnis,

Weequahic H. S.

Quisset.

Jones, N. instr. sci. drawing. Swarthmore. Br 221.
D 214.

Jones, Ruth McC. instr. biol. Swarthmore. Br 9. D
214.

Kaufman, A. L, Franklin and Marshall (Lancaster).
OM base. ROhmling, Pleasant.

Kehoe, Catharine E. grad. asst. zool. Oberlin. Br
218. Budington.

Kindred, J. E. assoc. prof. hist. and emb. Virginia.
Br 106. D 311.

King, Jessie L. prof. phys. Goucher. Bot 4. A 305.

Kraatz, C. P. asst. zool. Cincinnati. Br 334. Dr.

Matthews, S. A. assoc. anat. Pennsylvania. OM 24.

D 208.

McBride, T. F. instr. clin. dentistry. Rock 7. Elliott,
Center.

Moment, G. B. instr. biol. Goucher. Br 217 J. Rogers.
School.

Morgan, T. H. prof. biol. Calif. Inst. Tech. Br 320.
Buzzards Bay.

O’Brien, Helen instr. res. med. Pennsylvania. Br 109
and 311. Young, West.

Paaske, Ellen A. sec. Cornell Med. (N. Y.). Br 317.
Paine, West.

Robertson, Kathleen M. res. asst. exp. biol. Toronto.
Br 107. H 6.

Shapiro, H. res. asst. phys. Princeton. Br 127.

Strong, O. S. prof. neur. Columbia. Bot 5. Elliot,
Center.

Varrelman, F. A. res. biol. Vienna (Austria). L 34.
Lyons, Main.

Wells, G. P. lect. zool. University College (London).
D 217,

Wheeler, N. C. asst. phys. Purdue. Br 126. K 5.

Willier, B. H. prof. zool. Rochester. Br 324.

STUDENTS IN INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY

Allen, T. H. Iowa. K 7.

Babcock, Ruth H. teach. biol. Caldwell High. H 7.

Bader, Joan E. Montclair State Teach. W H.

Bishop, D. W. instr. zool. Pennsylvania. Dr 7.

Bonnet, D. D. Harvard. Dr 5.

Bowen, W. J. grad. biol. Hopkins. Hilton, Glendon.

Burlington, Mary grad biol. McGill. Grinnell, Bar
Neck.

Bush, Aeleta N. grad. biol. Emory (Georgia). D 203.

Carson, H. L., Jr. Pennsylvania. Dr 14.

Cassidy, M. H. instr. biol. Hyde Park High (Mass.).

Thatcher, (Falmouth).
Caylor, R. L. assoc. prof. biol. Delta State Teach.
Dr.

Copeland, D. E. asst. biol. Amherst. K.

Cregan, Mary B. prof. biol. St. Xavier (Chicago).
Goffin, Millfield.

Croasdale, Hannah T. res. asst. phys.
Med. Sch. (asst. invert.). W G.

Dawson, R. W. asst. prof. zool. Minnesota. D 107.

Doyle, W. G. asst. zool. Oberlin. Dr.

Faben, Ann R. Goucher. H 9.

Farraday, C. L., Jr. Swarthmore. Dr 7.

Granger, Barbara S. asst. zool. Mount Holyoke.
Young, West.

Grave, C., II. Washington. (St. Louis). Grave, High.

Grobstein, C. City Coll. New York. Ka 4.

Harris, W. A. De Pauw. Dr 2.

Hill, D. L. grad. chem. asst. Iowa. Ka.

Hogan, Stella M. prof. biol. St. Xavier (Chicago).
Goffin, Millfield.

Hollaender, A. invest. rad. comm. N. R. C. Wiscon-
sin. Br 114. Broderick, West.

Hoyt, J. S. Y¥. undergrad. instr. biol. Washington
and Lee. Dr attic.

Huntington, Margaret O. Swarthmore. H 3.

Johnson, R. B. Connecticut State. Dr 8.

Kimball, R. F. grad. zool. Hopkins. Hilton, Glendon.

Knoth, Sibyl C. head science dept. Gulf Park Col-
lege. WI.

Koster, R. grad. biol. Harvard. Ka 2.

Lewis, Wilma undergrad. asst. biol. State Teachers
(Montclair). Cassidy, Millfield.

Morgan, Gwendolynn W. Sarah Lawrence. H 2.

Moyer, Elizabeth K. grad. asst. zool. Mount Holyoke.
Young, West.

Norris, C. H. Hamilton. K 6.

Potts, H. E. grad. biol. New York. Swain, Millfield.

Ray, D. T. asst. prof. zool. Johnson C. Smith (N.
CO) 5D

Reed, Mary V. instr. science and math. Knox Sch.
(Cooperstown, N. Y.). A 306.

Roxby, J. B., Jr. Wesleyan. K 6.

Sarin, L. Colby. Elliot, Center.

Seaton, Jane Penn. Col. for Women. H 8.

Sensenig, W. Haverford. D 316.

Dartmouth

(Continued on page 136)

Aucust 1, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

133

EMBRY-
OLOGISTS

Yet
we have to relate the last inning, the last desper-
ate spurt of work by those who realized that they
might never again enjoy these privileges, and the
sad departure.

The lecturers of the week were Dr. Grave, Dr.

The game is over and the players gone.

Barth, and Dr. Holtfreter. Dr. Grave continued
his work on annelids and molluses, including in
his “hetero” lecture of Tuesday a few words on
the Recapitulation Theory as an element adding
much to the interest of biology. Dr. Barth treated
of the normal and experimental development of
tunicates and ascidians. The material used in lab-
oratory included Peneries (?), Styela, Ciona and
Amaricium. Dr. Holtfreter reported experimen-
tal work done to make more clear the general or-
ganization of the embryo, using amphibian ma-
terial for his illustration. One remark of Dr.
Holtfreter, concerning his handicap in using the
English language as his lecturing medium, ought
to be repeated: “You will please excuse me if I
am not easily understood, because I am a hetero-
plast transplantation into this country where you
speak the English language.”

Monday night Rev. Michael Fronczak of the
embryology class presented a full length movie in-
cluding several travelogues and pictures taken
here at Woods Hole. In a previous program
which he presented some three weeks earlier he
showed two “Felix” crazy cartoons ; but he disap-
pointed the class in this respect at the second
showing.

On Tuesday evening the class met in the lab-
oratory at nine o’clock to study the spawning ac-

SWAN
é SONG

tions of Bennaria (?), an animal which spawns
only at night. It was a busy night. The beasts
were slow to “produce,” and there was much time
before the last person retired at three in the morn-
ing to discuss the class questionnaire. The ques-
tionnaire was an idea sponsored by the class for
putting into statistical form the ideas concerning
the material and arrangement of the course which
would be valuable to those confronted with the
problem of planning and revising it in the future.
Blanks were distributed to the students and to the
faculty by the class committee. The results will be
given to Dr. Packard for the use of the laboratory.

Wednesday night the baseball team played a
return game with the Collecting Crew, regaining
the championship of the M. B. L. softball league
(even without the expert pitching of Dr. Barth!).
To the Invertebrates (really?) who inherit our
laboratory, we pass the honors of defending this
crown.

Came Thursday night, and the first travelers
departed. Friday, Pearl Shykin packed up her
Camera Club, Exchange of addresses (a touch-
ing scene) became a craze; snapshots, fishermen’s
caps, and tuxedo shirts (wups!) were auto-
graphed. The fortunate members of the class who
did not break into tears . . . who are remaining,
are: Katherine (Katrina) Hummel, Mabel (Syr-
up) Culberson, Margaret (Smitty) Hensen,
Michael (Movies) Fronezak, and Harry (Lord
Plushbottom) Lipman. These people will be busy,
for periods varying from two weeks to the rest of
the summer, at research problems.

DoNALD BAUER

CURRENTS IN THE HOLE

At the following hours (Daylight Saving Time)

Buzzards Bay to Vineyard Sound:

Date Paks Wii Lees
August 4 5:44 5:57
PMU EUStR OMe ett nO 2Gu 9 0249
NGOS sdeasoctgocncgn eI 7/2516)
INGORE. se. coon: 8:02 8:28

the current in the Hole turns to run from

Date PNG IIS LEE WE
August 8... 8:49 9:22
August 9 ...... 9:43 10:25
August 10 . LOR Om eluiEZ3
aXoemmste WIL 3. M42

In each case the current changes approximately six hours later and runs from the Sound to

the Bay.

NS
Article entitled Election of Trustees transferred to page 5 of Supplement issued on Saturday, August 1.

134 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI. No. 96

The Collecting Net

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
at marine biological laboratories

Editorial: Ware Cattell, Elizabeth Thornton, Ur-
sula Reinhardt and Annaleida Snyder Cattell.

Business: Arthur C. Stirling, Amy Gamble, Boris
Gorokhoff and Marjorie Higgins.

Entered as second-class matter July 11, 1935, at
the U. S. Post Office at Woods Hole, Massachusetts,
under the Act of March 3, 1879.

THE SCHOLARSHIP FUND ASSOCIATION

Although no formal constitution can be adopted
until the middle of August, things have advanced
so far and so satisfactorily that to all intents and
purposes THE CoLLectinG NET Scholarship Fund
‘Association has hatched; in its infant state it wel-
comes members. We have set as our goal; not
less than one hundred members by October il.
1936; a membership list of two hundred by janu-
ary 1, 1937 does not seem impossible of attain-
ment.

In order that potential members may have
clearly in mind how the money that they contri-
bute is spent it seems appropriate to outline the
salient points of the organization:

(1) The award is for the purpose of promot-
ing original research work in the biological
sciences, by giving financial assistance to promis-
ing young investigators.

(2) The annual membership fee is to be $5.00.
For persons caring to make a larger contribution,
other classes of memberships are provided. For
example contributing and sustaining members are
assessed $10.00 and $25.00 annually.

(3) THE Cottecrine Net has undertaken to
pay the entire administrative costs of the organi-
zation so that the full membership fee in each case
shall apply directly towards a scholarship.

(4) The scholarships, in general, will consist
of a monetary award of $100.00.

(5) Applicants from cooperating institutions
will be eligible for the award. A “cooperating in-
stitution” is here defined as one whose director
serves upon the Board of Trustees or one which
appoints an individual as its official representative
on this Board.

(6) The candidate is to be chosen by the in-
stitution he is affiliated with; that is, the Scholar-
ship Fund Association will assign scholarships to
the directors of the marine laboratories and
they in turn will be responsible for the selec-
tion of the “awardee” and for the purposeful use
of the money assigned.

(7) Candidates must be “deserving students
in the biological sciences.” A combination of three

attributes should prevail: research ability, need of
additional funds and the intangible quality of being
a welcome investigator at any summer laboratory.

(8) In order that these three points can be
weighed with discernment only persons who have
completed a summer’s work at a given laboratory
are eligible for the award of that institution.

(9) The summer following the award, an in-
cumbent is expected to spend not less than eight
weeks devoted to full time research work, prefer-
ably at one of the cooperating marine biological
laboratories.

(10) Successful candidates at the time of their
election shall prepare a note of not more than 500
words for publication in THE CoLLecTinG NEt.
This brief statement should outline their problems,
its importance, and their plans for procedure.

(11) At the conclusion of the work carried
out with the assistance of the award, the scholar-
ship-holder is expected to prepare a statement of
about 1,000 words to be published in THE Cot-
LecTING Net which outlines the work done dur-
ing his incumbency.

Every reader must at once realize that the above
items are perforce tentative. When the organiza-
tion is completed the trustees of the Association,
through their Executive Committee, will have ab-
solute power over the funds and the way in which
they are spent. The following trustees have ac-
cepted appointment as members of the Executive
Committee of the Board of Trustees, subject to
ratification by the Board as a whole: Dr. C. E.
McClung, chairman; Dr. Eric Ponder; and Dr.
William H. Cole.

From The Mount Desert Island Biological Laboratory

Dear Mr. Cattell : July 29, 1936
Please forgive my delay in answering your two
letters about THe Cottectinc Ner Scholarship
Fund. The laboratory will gladly grant free re-
search space to individuals holding a scholarship
from the fund, so that the hundred dollars can be
used for board, room and traveling expenses.

It will be a pleasure to assist the Scholarship
Fund Association by serving as a member of its
executive committee. Since it will be impossible
for me to come to Woods Hole this summer to
attend any meetings, all my help must be through
the mails. Please call me whenever you think I
might be of service.

This laboratory is pleased to note that the Fund
has made available one of the scholarships for a
young man now in residence here. Our executive
committee will recommend a candidate at the end
of the season and notify you accordingly. I note
that the $100. will be payable on or before June
15) 1937

(Signed) Witi1am H. CoLe

ery

ih ee

at the M. B. L. Clubhouse.

Aueust 1, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

135

ITEMS OF INTEREST

SEVENTH INTERNATIONAL CONGRESS
OF GENETICS

An announcement has been received from the
Organization Committee stating that the Congress
of the Seventh International Congress of Genetics
will be held during the second half of August,
1937, in Moscow.

Members of the Organization Committee are as
follows: President: A. I. Muraloy, president of
the Lenin Academy of Sciences; Vice-presidents :
N. I. Vavilov, vice-president of the Lenin Aca-
demy of Sciences, V. L. Komarov, vice-president
of the Academy of Sciences; General Secretary :
S. G. Levit; Other members: N. P. Gorbunoy,
G. D. Karpachenko, B. A. Keller, N. K. Koltzoff,
T. D. Lysenko, G. K. Meister, H. J. Muller, M.
S. Navashin, and A. S. Serebrovsky. :

All those wishing to receive announcements
about the Congress should send their names to
the Organization Committee of the Seventh In-
ternational Congress of Genetics, Institute of
Genetics, Academy of Sciences, Bolshaya Kaluzh-
skaya 75, Moscow, U.S. S. R.

Under the guidance of Dr. E. Alfred Wolf, as-
sociate professor of biology at the University of
Pittsburgh, a class in scientific German has been
meeting on Monday, Tuesday, and Friday eve-
nings at 6:45 in the old lecture hall. Dr. Wolf
conducts the class by associating every new Ger-
man word with an English or an old English
parallel in order-to make it easier to learn. A
rapid survey of the fundamentals in German
which are essential to reading is being made be-
fore starting the study of scientific words. By the
end of the summer Dr. Wolf predicts that all these
people who have had a little German before start-
ing the course should be able to read scientific
German very well.

The new x-ray equipment of the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory was put into use last week af-
ter three weeks of intensive work in its construc-
tion. Mr. Barclay was in charge of the ‘work of
setting it up while Mr. Egeland was in charge of
the apparatus itself.

To the melody of Freddie Josefek and his or-
chestra, THE CoLtectineG Net will hold a dance
for its Scholarship Fund on Saturday, August 8,
Admission charge
for M. B. L. Club members and subscribers to
Tue Cotrectine Net is ten cents per person, for
all others fifty cents. The entertainment commit-
tee promises several novelty dances and refresh-
ments will be served.

Dr. Ruporpn H6zer, visiting professor of
physiology at the University of Pennsylvania,

Mrs. Hober and their daughter Ursula left Woods
Hole on Thursday for New York. They will sail
tomorrow on the SS. Bremen to spend the next
two months visiting their family in Germany.

Dr. SUMNER C. Brooks, professor of zoology
at the University of California, was the victim of
a heart attack last week at the bathing beach after
a swim. He is recovering but is still confined to
his room in the Brick Dormitory of the Marine
Biological Laboratory.

Newcomers are being welcomed to Woods Hole
at a Mixer to be held tonight at the M. B. L.
Club house. Everyone is invited to attend. Mrs.
Heinz Specht, social chairman, has appointed the
following committee chairmen: Elisabeth Mast,
social; Mrs. F. H. Figge, refreshments ; Margaret
Mast, posters; Mrs. P. B. Armstrong, invitations.

The noted brain surgeon, Dr. C. H. Frazier,
died on July 26, in his sixty-sixth year. Since
1922, he had been the John Rhea Barton Profes-
sor of Surgery and Head of the Department of
Surgery at the University of Pennsylvania. He
was also a trustee of the University.

Dr. James Watt Mavor has just completed
work at Woods Hole on his book entitled ‘‘Gen-
eral Biology,” which will be published August 18
by the Macmillan Company. Dr. Mavor is pro-
fessor and chairman, field of biology, Union Col-
lege, Schenectady.

The M. B. L. Tennis Club tournament will be
completed today. The teams for the semi-final
doubles were Kidder and Summers vs. Ball and
Rugh, and Armstrong and Goldin vs. Stunkard
and Speidel. The contestants for the semi-final
singles were Jenkins vs. Hollingsworth and Rob-
ertson vs. Speidel.

At Cornell University Medical College, New
York City, announcement has been made of the
appointment of Dr. Oskar Diethelm, of Johns
Hopkins, as professor of psychiatry and director
of the department, and Dr, Joseph Hinsey, of
Stanford University, as professor of physiology
and director of the department. Other changes
include Dr. McKeen Cattell who becomes associ-
ate professor of pharmacology, and Dr. Dayton J.
Edwards who has been made assistant Dean.

SPECIAL CLUB MEETING ON AUGUST TENTH

The Special Meeting called to consider the New
Constitution of the M. B. L. Club will be held at
seven on the evening of August tenth. It was
erroneously announced for August three in “En-
trée Edition” of Tue Cottectine Net issued on
Saturday, August 1.

136

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. XI. No. 96

ITEMS OF INTEREST

M. B. L. CLUB NOTES CONTRIBUTED BY ITS
ENERGETIC SECRETARY-TREASURER-TO-BE

Special Notice: A meeting for the purpose of
discussion and action on the proposed changes in
the Constitution and By-Laws of the M. B. L.
Club will be held in the Club house on Monday,
August 10, at 7 p. m.

Plans are maturing for the second Mixer of the
season, which will be held on Saturday evening
the first of August. Arrangements are in the
hands of the Social Committee under the chair-
manship of Mrs. Specht. Attendance of all lab-
oratory people is invited, especially the recently
arrived students and newcomers to Woods Hole.
There will be opportunity for everybody to meet
everybody else and later in the evening there will
be dancing. The Mixers are an important infor-
mal function which the Club performs for the
community, and non-members are as welcome as
members.

The question has been raised and widely dis-
cussed as to the advisability of hiring orchestras
for the regular Saturday night dances. The mat-
ter was referred to the Executive Committee, and
it was their opinion after listening to all sides that
under the present financial circumstances phono-
graph music was preferable to orchestral music
for the regular dances. However, it was decided
to accept the offer of THE CoLLectinG Net to
organize an orchestra dance for Saturday the 8th
of August.

The membership drive will be launched next
week with fury and abandon. Reasons why you
should be a member of the Club are: (1) Dues
are only $1.50 (even less than that for students:
$1 for the term of the course). (2) The Club
house is the only congenial non-strenuous escape
from the laboratory that is possible in Woods
Hole, especially in foggy weather. This asset be-
comes incomparably more valuable after a couple
of weeks of fog, which may blow in at any min-
ute now. Read the magazines, sit in comfortable
chairs, talk English rather than Biology, watch the
boats go by. (3) The social life of Woods Hole,
confined entirely to the Club house, is only open
to members, except by special arrangement. Sat-
urday night dances! Monday night concerts!
Checkers, Bridge, Pingpong! Membership is open
to laboratory people and their families on payment
of dues, either to the main office of the Marine

siological Laboratory, to the Secretary-Treasurer
(Ballard, 217H Br.) or to the doormen at the
special dances and concerts.

Mr. and Mrs. Burridge Jennings will arrive in
Woods Hole on August 5 for a stay of several
weeks.

Introducing

Dr. JosEL SzEpsENWOL, fellow of the Rockefeller
Foundation for Medical Research. Dr. Szepsen-
wol was born at Radoszkowice, Poland. He re-
ceived his degree in science from the University
of Toulouse in 1927 and matriculated at the Uni-
versity of Geneva Medical School in 1931, work-
ing under Professor A. Weber, professor of ana-
tomy. He received the prize of the Medical
School of Geneva University im 1936 for a paper
on ‘Development of Nerves.”

At the University of Geneva, Dr. Szepsenwol
held the position of assistant in anatomy for two
years and in 1931 became the chief of the anatomy
laboratory. Coming to the United States last
September as a Rockefeller Fellow, he has worked
with Professor Ross G. Harrison at Yale Univer-
sity on experimental embryology in amphibians.

Dr. Szepsenwol has published some forty papers
in the field of embryology. He has traveled in
Italy and studied at the Naples biological station.
In September he will return to his post in Geneva.

(Bie

Dr. Ellen Fitz Pendleton, until recently Presi-
dent of Wellesley College, died on July 26 at the
age of 71 years. The new science building, hous-
ing the departments of chemistry, physics and
psychology is named after her. Prior to her ap-
pointment as President of Wellesley, Dr. Pendle-
ton was associate professor of mathematics at the
College.

Miss Lora T. JoHNson (Radcliffe, 1935) has
been appointed laboratory and secretarial assistant
to Dr. Paul D. Lamson, chairman of the depart-
ment of pharmacology at the Vanderbilt Univer-
sity School of Medicine. At the time of her ap-
pointment she was assisting with the editorial
work of THE CoLLectinG NE?.

SUPPLEMENTARY DIRECTORY
(Continued from page 132)

Shelton, Meredith Sarah Lawrence. H 2.
Spratt, N. T. temp. instr. biol. Emory (Atlanta). K
4

Stevenson, J. H. grad. asst. zool. Oberlin. K 7.

Stokes, Miriam asst. zool. Mount Holyoke. Young,
West.

Stump, A. B. asst. zool. Virginia. Dr 6.

Swift, Katharine W. Smith. Swift, Gansett Pt.

Twichell, A. R. Wabash. Dr.

Waterman, T. H. Harvard. Ka 4.

Weierbach, Lily A. instr. biol. Simon Gratz High
Sch. (Phila.). Young, West.

Weinberg, S. L. grad. biol. Columbia. Ka 3.

Weir, Ellen H. Wilson. W.

Wheeler, N. C. asst. phys. Purdue. K 5.
Wightman, J. C. grad. asst. biol. Brown. (Asst. In-
vert.). Dr 1.
Wood, Elizabeth C.
Teach. H 9.

grad. biol. Montclair State

Avucust 1, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

137

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLICATIONS
A DISCUSSION OF THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEMS

NEUROEMBRYOLOGY, AN EXPERIMENTAL
STUDY, Detwiler, Samuel R., 213 pp. Illustrated.
The Macmillan Company, New York. 1936. $3.75.

Dr. Detwiler’s monograph deals with various
problems in the experimental embryology of the
nervous system. This has been one of the most
fruitful fields in the experimental analysis of de-
velopment. A large part of the book is devoted
to the author’s own extensive, carefully planned
and beautifully executed researches, carried on
over a period of approximately twenty years.

The first chapters are rather brief. There is a
short historical sketch of the history of the neu-
rone concept, chiefly concerned with the embryo-
logical origin of the nerve fiber; a chapter, equally
brief, on the development of the technique of em-
bryonic transplantation; and an account of the
relation of neuroblast and sheath cell in the devel-
opment of the peripheral nerves.

The other topics are in general dealt with in
greater detail. There is an excellent discussion
of the author’s experiments in changing the direc-
tion of growth of peripheral nerves following va-
rious types of embryonic transplantations. These
have been very suggestive for an analysis of some
of the factors governing the direction of growth
of nerves. Further light on this subject has been
given by the classical experiments of Harrison on
the growth of nerves in tissue culture, and the
more recent work of Weiss. The bearing of these
different lines of approach on a possible explana-
tion of the orientation of the normally growing
nerve fiber is discussed.

A considerable section of the book is concerned
with the general problem of cellular proliferation
within the spinal cord and the spinal ganglia:
Thus the relation between the extent of the
peripheral field to the proliferation of sensory
neurones on the one hand, and motor neurones on
the other (Detwiler’s own work). The discussion
of factors within the cord and brain stem affecting
motor proliferation in the cord follows and is re-
lated to the work of Burr and others on the effect
of the ingrowth of peripheral nerve fibers on the
central nervous system. ‘There is finally an inter-
esting discussion on the relation of mesodermal
metamery to the segmentation of the cord. The
original work of Lehmann on this subject has been
recently modified and greatly extended by the au-
thor.

Certain other problems are taken up, but per-
haps the above will give the reader some idea of
what he may find in this monograph. The book
is amply documented. There is a bibliography of
about 270 titles. As mentioned in the preface, the
work on the earliest stages of nervous develop-
ment, namely the relation of the neural plate to
the dorsal lip of the blastopore, as worked out by
Spemann and his associates, is left out. This
seems an unfortunate omission in a book aiming
at a synthesis of the present state of the subject.
Nevertheless, the material included is covered in
an admirably clear fashion, and the book should be
of great interest and a source of stimulation to all
interested in biological problems.

Oscar E. Scuorre

FORTHCOMING ARTICLES IN OTHER JOURNALS

“THE JOURNAL OF EXPERIMENTAL BIOLOGY”
(August)

McGowan, J. P., Suprarenal Virilism in a Domestic
Hen, Its Possible Significance.

Marshall, F. H. A. and Bowden, F. P., The Further
Effects of Irradiation on the Oestrous Cycle of
the Ferret.

Picken, L. E. R., A Note on the Mechanism of Salt
and Water Balance in the Heterotrichous Cili-

: ate, Spirostomum Ambiguum.

_ Jacoby, Fritz, The Growth and Morphology of Fi-

bro-Blasts in vitro in Relation to Certain Prop-

erties of the Plasma Coagulum.

_ Francis, Eric T. B. and Horton, Frances M., Some
Reactions of the Ammocoete.

Lowenstein, Otto and Sand, A., The Activity of the
Horizontal Semi-Circular Canal of the Dogfish,
Scyllium Canicula.

Le Mare, D. W., Reflex and Rythmical Movements
in the Dogfish.

Eastham, L. E. S., The Rhythmical Movements of
the Gills of Nymphal Leptophlebia Marginata
(Ephemer-Optera) and the Currents Produced
by Them in Water.

Gunn, Donald L. and Kennedy, John S., Apparatus
for Investigating the Reactions of Land Arthro-
pods to Humidity.

Wykes, Ursula, Observations on Pigmentary Co-or-
dination in Elasmobranchs.

Johnson, M. L., The Control of Respiratory Move-
ments in Crustacea by Oxygen and Carbon Di-
oxide. II.

Harris, J. E., The Role of the Fins in the Equilib-
rium of the Swimming Fish.

I. Wind-tunnel tests on a model of Mustelus
Canis (Mitchill).

“THE QUARTERLY REVIEW OF BIOLOGY”
(September)

Schultz, Adolph H., Characters Common to Higher
Primates and Characters Specific for Man.
Adelmann, Howard B., The Problem of Cyclopia,

Part i:

Brues, Charles T., Aberrant Feeding Behavior
Among Insects and its Bearing on the Develop-
ment of Specialized Food Habits.

Gause, G. F., The Principles of Biocoenology.

138 9 THES COLLECTING NET [ Vor. XI. No. 96

eee
|

THE NATURE OF GROWTH

! #
P| y O d f ! FREDERICK S. HAMMETT
ace our raer or | A provocative essay for the uncoagulated.

61 pp. 75 cents
| THE SCIENCE PRESS, Lancaster, Penna.

Dissecting Instruments
COMPLIMENTS OF

NOW JOHNSON

THE JEWELER
Established 1918

and Save Duty Increase Main Street Falmouth

LIVING LUNGFISH
Protopterus aethiopicus

A consignment of living lungfish in their
mud cocoons is on its way to us from Africa
and should arrive by August 10th.

Teachers or others wishing to obtain speci-
mens will be notified as soon as the shipment
arrives and, at that time, prices will be avail-
able.

Those interested in these animals should
write us at once.

GENERAL BIOLOGICAL SUPPLY HOUSE

(Incorporated )

761-763 EAST SIXTY-NINTH PLACE CHICAGO

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE
BIBLIOGRAPHIC SERVICE AND
: AUTHORS’ ABSTRACTS

Treasury Department increases the duty
on imported dissecting instruments by

If you publish in any Wistar Institute jour-
nal, your paper, in abstract form, is announced
on two separate occasions, prior to the ap-
pearance of the complete article in a journal:

1st. In the Advance Abstract Sheets of the
Bibliographic Service, issued on the
15th of each month.

2nd. In the form of Bibliographic Service
Cards, issued semi-monthly.

Subscription to the Advance Abstract

Sheets—$3.00 per year.

. ipti he Bibli i i

ments to place their orders as soon as pos- ey Cantis--§5.00 por nee iographic Service

sible to take advantage of the savings to The following journals are published by The

: Se Wistar Institute:
be made while our present stock is avail- Journal of Morphology
The Journal of Comparative Neurology

able. Current prices on any specific list The American Journal of Anatomy
: f ‘I f ened The Anatomical Record
dissecting accessories will be turnishec The Journal of Experimental Zoology
of dissect i eles American Journal of Physical Anthropology
S z Journal of Cellular and Comparative Physiology
on request. The Journal of Nutrition

A recent decision by the United States ce ee ete
56%. This will naturally increase prices
on future importations but up to the
limits of our present stocks we will con-
tinue to sell dissecting instruments at their

current low prices.

We urge all users of dissecting instru-

Reprints of articles appearing in the above
journals may be purchased at prices quoted
on the Advance Abstract Sheets.

For further information address

WI L L CO R Pp 6) R ATI '@) | THE isn oF ANATOMY

LABORATORY APPARATUS AND CHEMICALS 36th Street and Woodland Avenue
ROCHESTER.N.Y. { Philadelphia, Pa.
Og 0 OO ES OO OE OT OE S008

Aucust 1, 1936 ] THE COLLECTING NET

MICRO CENTRIFUGE
EQUIPMENT

International Centrifuges again show their
adaptability to the demands of science. We
are pleased to announce that the new heads
and tubes for microchemical analysis are in-
terchangeable with the regular heads of the
“Clinical Model” Centrifuge.

Microchemical Heads and Tubes

International Microchemical Heads are made
in three types, two place heads for either
large or small metal tube holders (shown
above at left) or four place combination heads
(at right).

Standard glass tubes of 0.5, 2, 3 and 5 ml.
capacities are now available. The small metal
holder carries the three smaller glass tubes
and the large holder the 5 ml. tube.

INTERNATIONAL EQUIPMENT CO.
352 WESTERN AVENUE BOSTON, MASS.

Makers of Fine Centrifuges

Bailey’s HISTOLOGY

Famous standard text. Almost entirely re-
written new 9th edition. (August 1936). Edi-
ted by Professor Philip Smith with the collab-
oration of Professors Strong, Elwyn, Sever-
inghaus, Copenhaver, Carpenter and Goss, all

of Columbia University. $6.00
Krafka: ELEMENTARY
HISTOLOGY

Entirely new (April 1936) by Professor Joseph
Krafka, University of Georgia. Author urges
biologists to admit histology to the general
college curriculum on the same footing as
comparative anatomy, embryology and gen-
etics. $2.50

Mathews: PRINCIPLES OF
BIOCHEMISTRY

New up-to-date short concise yet reasonably
complete presentation of biochemistry by the
well known author of the larger standard
TEXTBOOK OF PHYSIOLOGICAL CHEMIS-

TRY. (August 1936). $4.50
Best and Taylor: PHYSIOLOGY
OF MEDICAL PRACTICE

Ready late in September. The new University
of Toronto textbook in applied physiology, of
the utmost value and highest authority for
both students and practitioners.

Roaf: PHYSIOLOGY

Second revised (1936) edition of a good Brit-
ish textbook by the Professor of Physiology,
University of Liverpool, formerly of Toronto.

$6.75

Stedman’s PRACTICAL MEDICAL
DICTIONARY, 1936

25th Year. New 13th thoroughly revised edi-
tion of this standard American medical dic-
tionary. Hundreds of new terms. New article
on Medical Etymology. Gives B. N. A., N. K.
and new British Anatomical Nomenclature.
Accords with U. S. Pharmacopoeia 1936, Na-
tional Formulary, British Pharmacopoeia, and
Bergey's bacteriological terminology. Index
of 217 tables, 1300 large pages, semiflexible
binding, thumb index. $7.50

WILLIAM WOOD & CO.

BALTIMORE, MD.

140

THE COLLECIING NET

[| Vor. XI. No. 96

[De Upbeat Hote dak Comment Cond Coane Redland waht spe ER PT

: EARLY MORNING CALM 7:

. GREAT HARBOR |
t32WOops HDEE CAPECOL:

CRITICIZING A CRITIC

As I was walking down Main Street a few days
ago I noticed a gentleman approaching me who,
at a distance appeared quite put out about some-
thing and at closer perusal seemed disturbed yet
amused—if such a thing is possible. This man
possessed an Irvin S. Cobb countenance that was
made more profound by a voice that seemed to
shake the very ground we stood on. He opened
the cavernous gap that was his mouth and from
it, midst a jumble of inarticulate sounds, emerged
the following :

“Young man, your article in this week’s issue
of the Woods Hole Log, which you so inappro-
priately entitled ‘Indolence ?’ was without a doubt
the most atrocious and disgusting piece of litera-
ture I have ever read. Had it possessed the five
canons that Edgar Allan Poe set down as essen-
tial in writing the short story, I would venture to
say that it was the most ridiculous, yet amusing,
short story ever written. What ever made you
think that you had the authority to write such a
thing? What have you against the people in the
town that you were brought up in? However,
time it might be, do you not think that it is the
place of some person who has done something for
the town to write such an article, not a young up-
start who knows nothing about what he is talk-
ing? The people in Woods Hole have always
treated me fairly and squarely and I have been
around a lot longer than you have. I think that
you should apologize to every person in the town
—in fact, I demand it.”

He was then interrupted by a friend, to whom
I am thankful, and he left by saying, “Think that
over young man.”

After meditating on this marvelous oration I
came to the conclusion that I owed no one an
apology but that I would try to make things more
vivid for those who are of the same opinion as
the gentleman mentioned—but who, unlike him,
whispered their opinions among themselves. In-
cidentally, my most esteemed critic was talking so
fast that I could not get a word in. — I believe
that there is not much more in the way of criti-
cism that could be added to my critic’s speech so

I will clarify the situation by remarking upon
each of his accusations or, criticism—in order.

He said that my article was atrocious and dis-
gusting. Possibly he was right. Even the truth
at times can be repulsive and very bad. He then
stated that had the article possessed the five can-
ons of Poe that are essential to the short story he
would venture to say that it was the most ridicu-
lous yet amusing short story ever written. My
most honorable critic, do you not know that the
canons of Poe are seven in number, not five?

I do not think that the question of authority can
be brought up when discussing whether or not I
should write in such a vein; unless the gentleman
is not an advocate of free speech. I will say, how-
ever, that a young person who has not had an op-
portunity to help the town in any way is at more
of an advantage to write or talk about such things
than a person who has done something because
there is not that tendency present to be prejudiced.
As for asking me what I had against the people—
only a person with a child’s mind and a very pro-
vincial attitude would ask such a question. After
all, all that was said was: Why is there not more
interest on the part of Woods Hole people when
there is room for their interest and aid?

F. E. McInNNIs

The fatal attack on sixteen-year-old Joseph C.
Troy, Jr., by a shark at Mattapoisett last Satur-
day has its repercussions in Woods Hole. Mr.
Robert T. Goffin, superintendent of the United
States Bureau of Fisheries, has been besieged with
telephone calls from summer residents and re-
porters on the subject of sharks. Bathers seem
to be more cautious and conversation on the
beaches includes discussion on sharks.

On Sunday, August 2, there will be two speak-
ers at the Forum to be held at Dr. J. P. War-
basse’s home on Penzance Point. Mr. Gardner
Jackson of Washington, D. C., will speak on goy-
ernmental control and administration of industry
and service. Dr. Warbasse will speak on the
voluntary cooperative administration of industry
and service.

(More Local News on page 142)

AUGUST 1, 1936 ] THE COLLECTING NET 141

E. E. C. SWIFT CO. — REMEMBER —
WILL DELIVER BEALE’S

Quality Meats Fine Groceries

IS THE PLACE TO GO

TO WOODS HOLE FOR

CALL FALMOUTH 22, — 421-W BEACH SANDALS

DEPOT AVENUE $1.00, $1.95

SNEAKERS
RUTH E. THOMPSON aS.
WOODS HOLE, MASS. MEN, WOMEN and CHILDREN
DRY AND FANCY GOODS — STATIONERY
School Supplies—Kodaks and Films STREET SANDALS
Printing—Developing—Enlarging KID and LINEN
FLATS AND HIGH HEELS

— When In Falmouth Shop At — $1.50 TO $3.95

ISSOKSON’S — Shoe Repairing —

WALK-OVER SHOES, BATHING SUITS

SPORT CLOTHES MAIN STREET FALMOUTH

Shoe Repairing While You Wait
ROBBINS LAUNDRY, INC. SHEET MUSIC YOUR SHOES
Cape Cod’s Leading Orchestrations
LAUNDERERS Cowboy _Hill-Billy Mended to Look
and and Guitar Music Like New
CLEANSERS

We receive the Latest

Numbers Every Excellent Service

“NEED Month Reasonable Rates
RADIO OR ELECTRICAL
REPAIRING?” :
Then Call McAdams Shoe Repair Shop
ROBERT EGELAND GLENWOOD PLACE FALMOUTH

X-Ray Dept., M. B. L. 307 Br. Bldg.

If YOU ARE

LOOKING FOR TWIN MERITS
A
COTTAGE Good Food | Reasonable Prices
FOR THE eae

REMAINDER OF THE SEASON

CALL TWIN DOOR
KATHRYN SWIFT GREENE WE SOLICIT YOUR PATRONAGE

Phone 17 FALMOUTH, MASS. Take Advantage of the Special Rates

142

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. XI. No. 96

THE WOODS HOLE LOG

THE WEEK IN BOATING

The thirteenth annual regatta of the Edgar-
town Yacht Club, Martha’s Vineyard, was held
last weekend. On Thursday evening July 23,
the Southern Massachusetts Yacht Racing Asso-
ciation had a dinner and meeting at the Harbor
View Hotel. A buffet supper and dancing were
provided for visitors at the Bathing Pavilion. The
racing events which included the “S,” ‘‘Wianno,”
“CC,” and the “BB” classes were postponed from
Friday to Saturday because of the heavy rain.
Over one hundred and ninety sailing craft took
part. Two dances were held at the Yacht Club,
the Annual Regatta dance Friday night and the
regular weekly dance Saturday night.

On Sunday water sports, short and long swim-
ming races and a diving competition were open to
members of invited yacht clubs and their guests.

The Constance belonging to Mr. Seward Pros-
ser of Penzance Point took first place in_ the
schooner class at the regatta. Although sailing
her first race in many years, she covered the dis-
tance of twenty-two miles in two hours and forty-
seven minutes.

The Algonquin, coast guard boat stationed at
Woods Hole, took the Secretary of the Treasury,
Henry Morgenthau, Jr. and a party of ten for a
three day cruise to the Edgartown regatta.

In the Woods Hole Yacht Club races Monday
the boats taking first place were the Bellina under
Anita Luscumbe in the “W”’ class, the Mae Win
under Sam Cahoon in the “CC,” the Bandit under
Mary Draper in the “BB,” and the Sea Goon un-
der Lilly Claire Faust in the “SC.”

EVENING CONCERT

The Methodist Episcopal Church held its an-
nual concert last Thursday night in the Marine
Biological Laboratory auditorium. Miss Catherine
Carver, who was to have played the piano accom-
paniment, replaced Richard Warbasse, violinst, as
the instrumental soloist on the program.

James R. Houghton, baritone, opened the con-
cert with the scheduled numbers, ending the first
part with Moussorgsky’s ever-amusing “Song of
the Flea.” Miss Carver played “A Sigh” by Liszt
and “Prelude in G Major” by Rachmaninoff. Mr.
Houghton sang three Schubert selections among
them the “Serenade” in place of the scheduled
Verdi aria; by request he gave three numbers,
among them “I Love Life” and ‘Floral Dance.”
Miss Carver included in the next group two Span-
ish numbers and Mr. Houghton gave the last
group, substituting the rousing negro spiritual
“Glory Road” for the final number.

The program was impromptu for the most part,
Mr. Warbasse being unable to play because of a
sprained back.

In response to a fire alarm last Monday the two
Woods Hole fire engines rushed to the very small
cottage of Mrs. Mabel Hilton (Mother of “Doc”
Hilton, collector for the Supply Department of the
Marine Biological Laboratory). Several garden
hoses were playing water on the flames when they
arrived. Prompt work with extinguishers, a large
hose, and hatchets put out the fire, but not before
the flames had destroyed all furniture and person-
al articles. In addition windows were broken and
shingles shoveled from the roof, so that the whole
cottage was practically a loss. The fire started
after Mrs. Hilton, a lady of about sixty years,
started cooking lunch on the oil stove and went
out into the yard. When she looked around a
short time later flames were creeping up the walls.
An alarm was given and Mrs. Hilton, who was
badly frightened, was taken into her son’s home.

An eight foot blue shark and a torpedo ray
were brought in by the Bureau of Fisheries col-
lecting boat last week. The shark, which is of the
variety that does not live in captivity, died almost
immediately ; Dr. Edwin Linton, authority on fish
parasites, extracted many parasites from the
shark’s stomach.

(Photograph from Boston Herald)
RAGGED-TOOTH SHARK

Two of a total of six “ragged tooth sharks”
caught between South Yarmouth and West Dennis.

Aucust 1, 1936 }

THE COLLECTING NET ’ 143

SANSOUCI’S BARBER SHOP
AND BEAUTY PARLOR

Next to Post Office

THE OASIS LUNCH

QUALITY LUNCH AND QUALITY SERVICE
Stationery
Sick Room and Photographic Supplies
Ballantyne’s Ale and Beer
— On Draught —

Remember
SAMUEL CAHOON

HAS THE KIND OF

FISH and LOBSTERS
THAT MAKE YOU CALL
FALMOUTH 660 - 661
AGAIN AND AGAIN!

Who’s Who

convenient booklet form.

0 OOOO OOO) OT 1 OD 68

READY JULY 11

FALMOUTH, MASS.

Woods Hole Directory
1936

ABC of Woods Hole

All the information you are always wanting—bound into

You will want two—one at

Iv’S NOT MUCH — ONLY 58c
FOR A REALLY SATISFYING
LUNCH
at

ANGELUS SWEETS
New Malchman Bldg., opp. Town Hall

A MACHINELESS PERMANENT WAVE at
Barber Beauty

’ @
Shop DONNELLY S Shop
Specializes in WOMEN’S Hairdressing

opp. Public Library
FALMOUTH, MASS.

SHOP AT
Lady PEPPERELL Shop

SPORTSWEAR
LORD PEPPERELL SHIRTS
SHEETS AND PILLOW CASES

MAIL ORDERS TAKEN
Phone 515
Next to Post Office

Tel. 211

FALMOUTH

0 0 0 DD DD

>

Up-to-date Map

Ca te lp pt pt eee ee

home, another at the laboratory.

ONLY 25 CENTS

Published by THE COLLECTING NET

2) S00 DS) ) SD) CD 69
Ss

144

[ Vou. XI. No. 96

WITH
VOLAND +800
weighings of
4 GRAMS 200 MILLIGRAMS
can be made without handling weights!

Capacity—200 gms. Sensitiveness 0.05 mg.
Patented vernier and grid, equilibrium adjuster,
which eliminate the handling of riders and all
weights below 4 grams 200 mg.

Manufactured in U.S. A. by

VOLAND & SONS, Inc.

NEW ROCHELLE, N. Y.

Me

_THE COLLECTING NET

SCHAERR HEAVY DUTY
SHAKER

Absolutely Noiseless!

Outstanding for

Really Noiseless Operation

Unusually Sturdy Construction
Self-Anchoring Characteristics
Adjustability to Various Sizes of Con-
tainers Up to 2 Gallons

Practically Vibrationless Motion
Portability

Supplied for 110 Volts AC or DC

Write for Bulletin “S” giving Prices and Particulars

220

Ms

E. MACHLETT & SON
Est. 1897
Scientific Glassware and Apparatus
East 23rd Street New York, N. Y.

ment. Among the items are:

ANALYTICAL AND MICRO-
BALANCES

PHOTO-ELECTRIC CELLS AND
APPARATUS

LIGHT METERS

EMPIRE STATE BUILDING

&

PFALTZ & BAUER, Inc.

FOR YOUR INSPECIIGI.

We will have our representatives in the OLD LECTURE HALL beginning
August the 3rd with an exhibition of new and interesting laboratory equip-

MICROSCOPES AND
MICROTOMES

ULTRA-FILTRATION
APPARATUS

BIOLOGICAL STAINS

NEW YORK CITY

Perse
oxy

Aveusr 1, 1936 ] See CHUPRCORERCTINGINED: (os

Cece em ae a aan em ane eae aea an ee eee ema a mean ama cem ama cemremoamcemoan,%,
x

DISSECTING SETS

e

This is set No. A-195,
one of the ten dissecting
sets illustrated in our
catalog No. 38, from the
simplest to the most com-
plete. Also largest variety
of dissecting instruments,

as well as laboratory ma-

Slide Boxes---Magnifiers---Centrifuges
Insect Pins---Riker Mounts

Museum Jars--Petri Dishes--Rubber Tubing

Hemacytometers and Hemometers

We have separate catalogs, gladly sent on request, of Charts, Models, Specimens and
Preparations in the following fields: Human and Comparative Anatomy, Physiology,

Neurology, Zoology, Botany, Embryology, Entomology, Ecology, etc.

CLAY=“ADAMS COMBARNY. INC.

25 EAST 26th STREET NEW YORK

| a
terials such as
Micro Slides and Cover Glasses

146 THE COLLECTING NET 7 ____[ Vou. XI. No. 96

020) eee 0a 0 ee 0-0 0 0D 0 De Oe

—10°C to 150°C
CONSTANT aK
TEMPERATURE
BATHS

for Water or Oil

Turtox Microscope Slides

Over three thousand different prepara-
tions for Biology and related subjects are
made in the Turtox slide laboratory.
Technicians with specialized training use
modern equipment and methods to pro-
duce slides which will be an asset to any
teaching collection

Ask us to send samples of slides you
would lke to examine.

May be set at any tem-
perature between —10°C
to 150°C

Maintain bath tempera-
ture constant and uni-
form to +0.02°C

tt eet

ong
TURTOX Fs pucs Have open, unobstructed

ht a oo working space

© / ae Come to the user com-
| er. plete with built-in re-

frigerator, ready to use.

The Sign of the Turtox
Pledges Absolute Satisfaction

Ask for Bulletin 1200

(Incorporated )

AMERICAN INSTRUMENT CO., Inc.

8010-8020 Georgia Ave. Silver Spring, Md.

GENERAL BIOLOGICAL SUPPLY HOUSE
761-763 EAST SIXTY-NINTH PLACE CHICAGO

*,
oe

EPI-BAR with STAND L,
. EPI-CONDENSER W & EPI-STAGE
ii

> ;
——— aie Ne
_—— é f we a6 :

Inclined Monocular,

Straight Monocular
or
Inclined Binocular
Tube

| e
Immediate Change

from Bright to
Dark Field

ASK FOR LEAFLETS 476 and 492

CARL ZEIS$S. INC.

485 FIFTH AVENUE, NEW YORK 728 SO. HILL ST., LOS ANGELES

i (CARL ZEISS)
62) woe a eo ee eee eee Cee ee arena

Aucust 1, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

147

In 1876.. the finest objectives made
In 1936..STILL THE FINEST!

N November, 1876, the editor of

American Journal of Microscopy
and Popular wrote,
"Spencer...
ble reputation on both continents
... for they have always been ar-
tists who made objectives, rather

Science,
acquired an envia-

than manufacturers who produced
them in quantity.”

Today . . . this reputation for
Spencer optics is rigidly main-
tained by production operations
that are practically laboratory
methods. For example, the surfaces
of tiny front lenses of oil immer-

sion objectives are polished true

Spencer Lens Co

Mais AGW polished true to one-millionth of an inch!

to one-millionth of an inch! Only
by laboratory technique .. .
coupled with precise machinery
and human craftsmanship of a high
order . . . can such measurements
of one-millionth of an inch be ac-
curately and consistently made.

Thus, by the application of lab-
oratory technique to factory rou-
tine, the many processes of manu-
facture function perfectly to-
gether to produce Spencer optics
of a perfection until recently con-
sidered unattainable.

Optics are the heart of a micro-
scope. For superior performance
—purchase a Spencer Microscope.

Mmpany
Buffalo New York

148 _____THE COLLECTING NET sd Woe XT Neg

A NEW

Be-L WIDE FIELD BINOCULAR MICROSCOPE

Individual
focusing tube to
compensate for
variation in
user's eyes.

An extra long
rack and pinion
gives complete
and positive
adjustment.

Revolving drum
nosepiece tried
and proved in

actual service.

Large Bakelite
focusing buttons
permit more
delicate focusing
adjustment.

Distance from
Optical Axis to
arm is 314”.

Stand is heavier
and more rugge
throughout.

Glass Stage
mounted flush
with metal sup-

ports to give larg-

er working area.

Inclination joint
which allows
tilting.

The new B & L Wide Field Binocular Microscope retains all the desirable features of the previous model
—the exceptionally wide field, the pronouncedly three dimensional view—and the erect and unreversed
image. In addition, this new model has been made larger and sturdier throughout. The moderate
price places it within easy reach of serious workers. This new series of B & L Binocular Microscopes
is described in a special folder. Write for your copy Te ey Rielle eos
to Bausch & Lomb Optical Co., 671 St. Paul Street, y
Rochester, N. Y. ' Bausch & Lomb Optical Co.

671 St. Paul St., Rochester, N. Y.

Please send me complete details on
the new Model Wide Field Binocular
Microscope.

Bausch & | omb ‘= Name Aacctcnamie toe a
Address cieebesncenoeellscedeecsucened ari nlenannn
WE MAKE OUR OWN GLASS TO
INSURE STANDARDIZED PRODUCTION

FOR YOUR GLASSES, INSIST ON Bal
ORTHOGON LENSES AND B & L FRAMES

AuGust 1. 1936 ] SUPPLEMENT

Woods Hole, Mass.,
July 3, 1936.

At the meeting of the Corporation held August 11, 1931, it was voted that “On or about
the first of July of each year, the Clerk shall send a circular letter to each member of the
Corporation, giving the name of the Nominating Committee”, (for considering the names
of candidates for election as officers and Trustees), “and stating that the Committee desires
suggestions regarding nominations.”

Officers and Trustees are elected by the Corporation; members of the Corporation are
elected only by the Trustees. The new officers—viz. Treasurer and the Clerk of the Corpor-
ation, are elected annually,—Trustees are elected for a term of four years. The present off-
cers and Trustees of the Class of 1936, all of whom, except M. J. Greenman, may be re-
elected, are as follows:

Treasurer of the Corporation ; ........Lawrason Riggs, Jr.

Clerk of the Corporation ....... bia eth eR eterna Charles Packard

8 Trustees of the Class of 1936

H. B. Bigelow M. J. Greenman
R. Chambers C. E. McClung
W. E. Garrey : A. P. Mathews
Caswell Grave C. R. Stockard

_ Any member who wishes to suggest names to be considered by the Nominating Com-
mittee should send them to the Chairman before August 1, 1936.

C. E. McClung, Chairman
G. N. Calkins

Charles Packard

P. B. Armstrong

W. S. Root

Charles Packard, Clerk

Suggestions for the Nominating Committee 1936
N. B. Nominees must be members of the Corporation.

iGteMleneaS ihe tery meee ercee ema t a eeaina tevie Rio tet Clerks scenic taker ee eee eere

Note: Dr. Greenman is eligible for election only as Trustee Emeritus.

Entrée

SATURDAY, AUGUST 1, 1936

Annual Subscription, $2.00
Single Copies, 30 Cents.

COME TO THE MIXER AT THE CLUB
TONIGHT!

The second mixer of the season will be held by
the Marine Biological Laboratory Club this eve-
ning, beginning at eight o’clock. Every member
of the scientific community—together with their
friends—are cordially invited to attend the affair

NOMINATION OF TRUSTEES OF THE
MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY

On Wednesday, July 29, the nominating com-
mittee of the corporation posted its slate of eight
members of the corporation for the 1940 class of
the Board of Trustees to replace those retiring on
August 11.

by the officers of the Club.
served; the “amplifier dance”
will begin as soon as the bed-
time hour of the trustees and
members of the corporation
approaches. There will be no
admission charge of any kind
during the evening, and every-
one who comes will enjoy
meeting people, drinking fruit
punch, and the dancing after-
wards. The latter will prob-
ably begin soon, after ten
o'clock, but the exact time will
be set’ by the mood of the
crowd. Mrs. Louise Mast
Specht is Chairman of the So-
cial Committee ; this fact alone
is assurance that the evening
will be a delightful one for all
those who come to the Club
to-night. Miss Elizabeth Mast,
a sister of Mrs. Specht, is in
charge of introducing people

Refreshments will be

EDITORIAL ANNOUNCEMENT

This four page folder will serve
as a vehicle for several things of
current interest which would lose
in value by not being issued be-
fore the fifthcoming issue of THE
CoLLectiINnG Net which will not
be ready for distribution until
Monday or Tuesday.

MM. B. LZ. Club Calendar

SATURDAY EVENING, Aug. 1

Mixer: Everyone welcome; re-
freshments and dancing: at the M.
B. L. Club House.

MONDAY, August 3, 7:00 P. M.

Special meeting of the members
of the M. B. L. Club to consider
the proposed constitution.
MONDAY, August 3, 7:00 P. M.

Music Hour at the M. B. L. Club.
8:00 P. M. This may be delayed a
few minutes owing to the special
meeting.

A member of the corporation has
caught up the Nominating Committee on a techni-

cality, claiming that it came to
a decision too soon ; that is, that
it met and posted its decisions
before many of the suggestions,
requested by the committee it-
self, had been received for con-
sideration. The chairman is
reported to believe that its
committee’s decisions were in
accordance with the wishes of
the corporation as a _ whole,
that it had sufficiently consid-
ered every eligible individual,
and that it would not be worth-
while for the group of five to
reconvene to consider any fur-
ther suggestions from Corpor-
ation members. He pointed out
the opportunity that every
member will have of nominat-
ing a candidate from “the
floor.” The meeting of the
Corporation is to convene on
Tuesday, August 11.

A Quantitative Analysis of Anterior Pitui-
tary-Ovulation Relation in the Frog: Rana
Pipiens, Dr. Roberts Rugh
Biological Research at the Scripps Institution
of Oceanography, Dr. Claude ZoBell.............. 121
The Effect of Ions on the Nerve Membrane
Potential, Dr. Walter Wilbrandt...................... 127
| Staff Meetings at the Oceanographic Institu-

tion, Donald Zinn
News from other Biologica

Editorial Page

to each other.
TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE COLLECTING NET FOR AUGUST 1, 1936

M. B. L. Club

The Course in Invertebrate Zoology, Dr. T.
H. Bissonnette

Supplementary Directory
Election of Trustees

Items of Interest

Department of Publications
Woods Hole Log

bo

THE COLLECTING NET

The Collecting Net

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
at marine biological laboratories
Editorial: Ware Cattell, Elizabeth Thornton, Ur-

sula Reinhardt and Annaleida Snyder Cattell.

Business: Arthur C. Stirling, Amy Gamble, Boris
Gorokhoff and Marjorie Higgins.

Entered as second-class matter July 11, 1935, at
the U. S. Post Office at Woods Hole, Massachusetts,
under the Act of March 3, 1879.

NOMINATIONS FOR TRUSTEES OF THE
CORPORATION

To every member of the Corporation of the
Marine Biological Laboratory we should like to
emphasize the importance of filling out the blank
sheet which is included in this “appetizer” of the
forthcoming issue of THE CoLtectinG Net. Pro-
viding the chairman of the Nominating Committee
is willing to accept such nominations at this time,
they should be promptly given to him; if the
Nominating Committee is of the opinion that its
duties ended on Wednesday, July 29, Tre Cor-
tectinc Net will undertake to place the blanks
in the hands of a committee which will not only
tabulate the results, but also make the appropriate
nominations from the floor at the Corporation
meeting on August 11. This will, of course, not
be necessary if, as the Nominating Committee
must anticipate, the incoming blanks agree with
the slate posted by it.

From The Mount Desert Island Biological Laboratory
Dear Mr. Cattell : July 29, 1936
Please forgive my delay in answering your two
letters about THe Cottectinc Net Scholarship
Fund. The laboratory will gladly grant free re-
search space to individuals holding a scholarship
from the fund, so that the hundred dollars can be
used for board, room and traveling expenses.

It will be a pleasure to assist the Scholarship
Fund Association by serving as a member of its
executive committee. Since it will be impossible
for me to come to Woods Hole this summer to
attend any meetings, all my help must be through
the mails. Please call me whenever you think |
might be of service.

This laboratory is pleased to note that the Fund
has made available one of the scholarships for a
young man now in residence here. Our executive
cominittee will recommend a candidate at the end
of the season and notify you accordingly. I note
that the $100. will be payable on or before June
Ils), WERY A

(Signed) Witviam H. Cove

Concerning “The Collecting Net” Scholarships
To rHe Eprror: July 31, 1936
Tue CottectinG Net Scholarships have assist-
ed a number of students in the physiology course
to continue their scientific work. It often happens
that the possibilities of utilizing marine biological
material are new to the student and that practical
difficulties particularly hamper the student's appli-
cation to summer work. The help of the scholar-
ships is very important and the present positions
of the past recipients prove that the students have
made good use of their resources. Their names
make an excellent list of able and energetic
younger physiologists, and I thiak that we should
use our sincere efforts to continue the line by aid-
ing the scholarship fund.
LAWRENCE IRVING

The Elapse of Negative Time
To THE Epiror: July 26, 1936
I recently wrote the following letter about the
Nominating Committee :

To the President of the Corporation,
The Marine Biological Laboratory,
Woods Hole, Massachusetts.

Sir:—

Under the date of July 3 a “circular letter” was
addressed to members of the Corporation of the
Marine Biological Laboratory stating that the nom-
inating “committee desires suggestions regarding
nominations.” On July 29 the official slate of offi-
cers and trustees was posted on the several bulletin
boards of the laboratory. The Clerk of the Corpora-
tion in his letter sets July 31 as the day upon which
the last suggestions for Officers and Trustees must
be made by its members.

In view of these circumstances, and as a member
of the Corporation in good standing, I request

(1) That the notices of the decision of the Nom-
inating Committee be withdrawn from the bulletin
boards.

(2) That the Committee reconvene on or after
August 1 to give its considered opinion upon the
names of all officers and trustees suggested by
members of the Corporation.

Furthermore, it would be courteous to extend the
time limit from July 31 to a later date in order that
members of the Corporation, who have suggestions
to make and who have been prevented from filling
out the blanks by the premature posting of the de-
cisions of the Nominating Committee, be given the
opportunity to submit their suggestions for con-
sideration.

I shall appreciate a prompt reply to this letter
because I wish assurance that if I fill out the blank
that my suggestions will be considered by the Nom-
inating Committee.

Very truly yours,
( S signed VY MAME here)
Member of the Corporation of
the Marine Biological Laboratory
I submit the above communication for publica-
tion in THE CoLLectinG Net because I think it
may be of interest to your readers.
ANONYMOUS

Aucusr 1, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 3

M. B. L. CLUB NOTES CONTRIBUTED BY ITS ENERGETIC SECRETARY-TREASURER-TO-BE

Special Notice: A meeting for the purpose of
discussion and action on the proposed changes in
the Constitution and By-Laws of the M. B. L.
Club will be held in the Club house on Monday,
August 10, at 7 p. m.

Plans are maturing for the second Mixer of the
season, which will be held on Saturday evening
the first of August. Arrangements are in the
hands of the Social Committee under the chair-
manship of Mrs. Specht. Attendance of all lab-
oratory people is invited, especially the recently
arrived students and newcomers to Woods Hole.
There will be opportunity for everybody to meet
everybody else and later in the evening there will
be dancing. The Mixers are an important infor-
mal function which the Club performs for the
community, and non-members are as welcome as
members.

The question has been raised and widely dis-
cussed as to the advisability of hiring orchestras
for the regular Saturday night dances. The mat-
ter was referred to the Executive Committee, and
it was their opinion after listening to all sides that
under the present financial circumstances phono-
graph music was preferable to orchestral music

for the regular dances. However, it was decided
to accept the offer of THe CoLtectinG NeErT to
organize an orchestra dance for Saturday the 8th
of August.

The membership drive will be launched next
week with fury and abandon. Reasons why you
should be a member of the Club are: (1) Dues
are only $1.50 (even less than that for students :
$1 for the term of the course). (2) The Club
house is the only congenial non-strenuous escape
from the laboratory that is possible in Woods
Hole, especially in foggy weather. This asset be-
comes incomparably more valuable after a couple
of weeks of fog, which may blow in at any min-
ute now. Read the magazines, sit in comfortable
chairs, talk English rather than Biology, watch the
boats go by. (3) The social life of Woods Hole,
confined entirely to the Club house, is only open
to members, except by special arrangement. Sat-
urday night dances! Monday night concerts!
Checkers, Bridge, Pingpong! Membership is open
to laboratory people and their families on payment
of dues, either to the main office of the Marine
Biological Laboratory, to the Secretary-Treasurer
(Ballard, 217H Br.) or to the doormen at the
special dances and concerts.

CONSTITUTION OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY CLUB!

ARTICLE I. Name.
The name of the Club shall be the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory Club.
Object.

The object of the Club is to promote social in-
tercourse among the scientific workers of the
Woods Hole community and their friends.

ARTICLE IT.

ArticLe III. Membership.

The membership of the Club shall consist of two
classes—Active and Associate. The scientific
workers of the Woods Hole community and mem-
bers of their families, 18 years of age or over, are
eligible to active membership, and become mem-
bers on payment of the annual dues. Other per-
sons who are 18 years of age or over may be elect-
ed to associate membership as provided in the
By-Laws.

Only active members in good standing have the
right to vote. With the exception of voting, the
associate members have all the rights and _privi-

_ leges accorded to active members.

1 The sections set in italics are those which are
likely to come up for discussion at the meeting on

Monday.

The families of members are entitled to use the
Clubhouse under the same conditions as members,
provided that this privilege is not extended to any
person less than 18 years of age.

Officers.

The officers of the Club shall be the President,
Vice-president, and Secretary-Treasurer. Only
those active members who are in full standing and
who are also members of the Corporation of the
Marine Biological Laboratory shall be eligible to
these offices.

The officers shall be elected at the annual meet-
ing. They shall be subject to recall as provided
by Article VII. Vacancies occuring at other times
shall be filled as provided in Section I of the Ly-
Laws.

ARTICLE IV.

ARTICLE V. Trustees.

There shall be a Board of Trustees of 6 mem-
bers, one to be elected at the annual meeting each
year and similarly, one to be appointed by the Di-
rector of the Marine Biological Laboratory. Each
member shall serve for three years, excepting that
on constituting the Board there shall be a class of
two, elected and appointed as prescribed, to serve
for one year, and another to serve for two years.

4 THE COLLECTING NET

In addition to these three classes of Trustees,
the President of the Club, if not already a Trustee ;
shall be a Trustee ex-officio.

Articte VI. Annual Meeting.

The annual meeting of the Club shall be held
each year on the third Monday in July, at which
meeting the election of officers and trustees, the
presentation of official and standing committee re-
ports, and other stated business shall be trans-
acted.

ArTICLE VII. Special Meetings.

Special meetings of the Club for any purpose
except that of amending the Constitution may be
called at any time by any officer of the Club; they
may also be called by petition by at least 15 active
members who are in full standing; the purpose
and date of such meeting shall be stated in a no-
tice which shall be posted on the official Labora-
tory bulletin boards and in the Club house, at least
five days before the proposed date of such meet-

ing.
ARTICLE VIII. Amendments.

Amendments to this Constitution can be made
by a two-thirds vote of those active members who
are present at any meeting, provided that at least
thirty such members are present, or provided that
one-third of the total active membership below 90
is present, and provided that the proposed
Amendment and the petition for the meeting to
consider such Amendment or Amendments and
the date of such meeting shall have been signed
by at least 10 voting members and posted on the
official Laboratory bulletin boards and in the Club
house at least 10 days before the date of the meet-
ing.

ArticLte IX. Executive Committee.

There shall be an Executive Committee of
which the officers of the Club shall be ex-officto
members. Other members of this Committee shall
be appointed by the President to serve for one
year, subject to discharge by him at any time.

BY-LAWS

I. The Executive Committee shall consist of
nine members, and shall include the officers of the
Club and the Chairman of the House and Social
Committee.

The duties of this Committee shall be to attend
to such general affairs of the Club as the running
of the Club house and the appointment and dis-
charge of a House Committee, a Social Commit-
tee, a Membership Committee, and such special
Committees as it may deem necessary.

The Committee shall also have the power to fill
vacancies in the offices of the Club occuring at

other times than at the election at the annual
meeting. The Committee shall further have the
power to elect those persons to associate member-
ship who do not, ipso facto, become members by
the payment of dues, as provided in Article III of
the Constitution, but who have been proposed and
seconded by active members of the Club who are
not members of the Executive Committee. The
Committee shall, further, have power to decide all
doubtful cases of eligibility.

Il. A quorum of the Executive Committee
shall consist of a majority of its members.

III. The Executive Committee shall meet at
least twice monthly during the months of June,
July, and August. The Trustees shall meet on
the day following the annual meeting. The
Trustees shall act in a general advisory capacity
to the Executive Committee, and shall have com-
plete charge of all financial matters of the Club
except in so far as this power may be delegated
to the Secretary-Treasurer.

The Secretary-Treasurer shall report monthly
during June, July, and August, and once during
the winter to a Trustee designated by the Board
of Trustees.

IV. The Executive Committee shall appoint
an Assistant Secretary-Treasurer who shall be a
resident of Woods Hole. His function shall be to
collect dues from members and to perform such
other duties as may be delegated by the Secretary-
Treasurer.

V. The Executive Committee shall, not later
than the second Monday in July, each year ap-
point a Nominating Committee to nominate a slate
of Officers and Trustees. This shall not preclude
further nominations from the floor at the annual
meeting.

VI. In the event that an elected Trustee re-
signs before his term of office expires, the Club
at a meeting called for the purpose, shall elect a
Trustee to serve for the balance of the term. Sim-
larly, the Director of the Laboratory shall fill by
appointment, the place left vacant by the resigna-
tion of an appointed Trustee.

VII. The dues for active members shall be
$1.50 per year, except in the case of fully accredit-
ed students in the courses of the Marine Biologi-
cal Laboratory, for whom there shall be an op-
tional rate of $1.00; it being understood that this
covers membership only for the duration of the
course in which they are registered.

The dues for associate members shall be $3.00.

The Executive Committee shall have the right
to assess additional fees should they be deemed
necessary.

VIII. These By-Laws may be altered by a
majority of the Executive Committee, a majority
of the Trustees concurring.

Vol. XI, No. 6

SATURDAY, AUGUST 8, 1936

Annual Subscription, $2.00
Single Copies, 30 Cents.

OPEN OCEAN AND COASTAL SHARKS:
DO THEY ATTACK MEN?

Dr. E. W. GupGer
Associate Curator of Fishes, American
Museum of Natural History

This question of perennial interest is raised
nearly every summer by the accounts of alleged
threatened attacks of sharks on bathers in our
Atlantic coastal waters. To the public generally,

LANTERN SLIDES FOR ILLUSTRATING
LECTURES

Dr. W. E. ForsyTHE
Physicist, Lamp Development Laboratory,
General Electric Company
There is probably no more satisfactory method
for showing extensive results of experimental

work to an audience or for illustrating a lecture
than the use of lantern slides. However, if slides

and particularly to newspaper
correspondents and reporters, |
every shark seen near a bath-
ing beach or caught by sports-
man and fisherman along our |
coast is a man-eater. Practi- |
cally all such allegations have
no foundation; and practically

| Seminar:

miller:

WM. B. LE. Calendar
| TUESDAY, August 11, 8:00 P. M. by
Dr. Laura J. Nahm: “A |
study of the cells of the adrenal —
gland of the ewe during estrus
| and pregnancy.”
Dr. E. A. Wolf and Grace Rieth-
“Studies in calcification: |
III. The shell of the hen’s egg.” |

are used, they should be so
shown that they can be seen
the entire audience, and
this includes that part of the
audience that is the farthest
from the screen. ‘The slides
should be so made that they
illustrate and show just what

|
all of the sharks seen and | Dr. Alexander Sandow: “Diffrac- | they are intended to show.
caught are not man-eaters. | tion patterns of striated muscle | )fany times a lecturer has to
However, under date of oe oe ene Behavior gure | apologize for his slides, giving
July 25, 1936, a report came | Dr FE. H. J. Figge: “The effect some of the many excuses for
from New Bedford, Mass., | of some oxidation-reduction indi- | showing poor pictures. Some
that a boy in swimming near | cator dyes on the eyes and pig- projected pictures are poor

there had had his leg so man-
gled by a shark that he died
shortly thereafter from shock
and loss of blood. This attack
and the subsequent events (the
hunt for the shark, etc.) de-
scribed by New Bedford and

Lecture:
kard:
trematodes.”

mentation of normal and hypo-
physectomized amphibians.”

Dr, Robert Chambers:
ination of neutral
kidney tubules.”

FRIDAY, August 14, 8:00 P. M.
Professor H. W. Stun- |
“Life cycles of digenetic

due to the carelessness of the
maker of the slides; some are
poor because the person mak-
ing the slides did not know
how to make them ; and finally,
others are poor due to the
character of the projecting ap-

“The elim-
red by the |

Woods Hole men who know
sharks, have been written up in such detail in the
Massachusetts and Rhode Island daily papers, and
the facts are so well (Continued on page 156)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Open Ocean and Coastal Sharks: Do They
Attack Men?, Dr. E. W. Gudger.................... 149

Lantern Slides for Mlustrating Lectures, Dr.

IY Ma POES VGH O: fi... costeniscrseste-coesuesntenecsklesarierts 149
Biographical Notes on Possible Trustees of
the Marine Biological Laboratory ................ 159

paratus and screen.

The American Society of Mechanical Engi-
neers has published a report’ on Engineering and
Scientific Charts for Lantern Slides which gives

Invertebrate Class Notes

Editorial Page

MEGS), ]HE UPR RECT E peered socnacesconceess ur poonenmmeeepaaneasct.ecs 163
Department of Publications .................:0:e 166
WVOOGSMELOLE GO rscccsuesnrenccesesscenetuarceetentemteeist ca 168

— -

‘qgui09 }yS11 zeddn jo 10}U90 Ul seTtOJeAOgeT [eoISo[oOlq ~“puNorSe10j 9yeIpsuWIUT ul JOqIey 2193317 pue ‘preX Aong 3uj ‘yuIog sediune
@IOH SGOOM AO MOIA ANWIddTv

Aucust 8, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

151

some suggested practices for the design of charts
for lantern slides. These recommendations, if
followed, would effect a great improvement in the
appearance of many of the projected pictures
shown at technical meetings.

From the appearance of many slides shown at
various technical meetings it must be assumed
that, in general, the lecturer has neither read
these recommendations nor tried out his slides
beforehand. In the use of slides the same rule
should hold as in any other portion of the lecture ;
that is, keep the interest of the audience and dis-
turb them as little as possible. There are two
sides to this problem; one the projection appara-
tus and the other the slides themselves. Some-
times a lecturer prepares good slides and then
finds that adequate facilities are not available for
showing them. Why anyone should invite a lec-
turer and an audience and then not do everything
possible to make the lecture a success is difficult
to understand. Everything possible should be
done to help the lecturer get his story across and
this should include the removal of disturbing ele-
ments.

While projection apparatus and the operation
of such equipment may be criticized, the fact re-
mains that for clear pictures good slides must be
provided. The projected picture can be no better
than the image on the slide and if this is too small
or poorly made, poor pictures will result. If there
is too much material, either lettering, curves, or
pictures, on one slide, nothing can be satisfactori-
ly shown.

If written material is to be shown, the letters
should be of such’ size that when projected on the
screen they can be easily read by anyone in the
audience and this applies, too, to the person who
is farthest from the screen. Letters properly
typed with an ordinary typewriter and photo-
graphed make a good appearance when projected.
One method of making the copy for such a slide
is to use a good black ribbon with a white paper
and to have this paper backed up with a good
black carbon paper turned with the carbon side
toward the sheet, so that the typed letters on the
front of the paper are backed up by the carbon
impression on the back. Since original typewrit-
ing often lacks blackness and breadth of the lines
which comprise the details of a letter, a good car-

1 November, 1932, Z15, 1-1932. See also J. Soc. Mo-
tion Picture Engineers, V23, P. 247, 1934.

bon copy may be better than the original. An ex-
cellent carbon copy can be made on a heavy sheet
of white paper upon which is superimposed a car-
bon sheet and a thin sheet of paper. by remoy-
ing the typewriter ribbon the type hits the thin
paper and makes the carbon copy on the heavy
sheet. An additional refinement of carbon copies
can be made by using two sheets of thin paper. A
carbon sheet is placed in contact with the lower
side of the second sheet in addition to the carbon
paper placed in contact on the upper side, as is
commonly done. In this way the carbon copy is
made as usual, but it is backed up on its lower
side by another carbon copy. In other words,
this carbon copy has carbon imprint on both sides
and the letters are now absolutely opaque and any
irregularities in the blackness of the upper carbon
copy are, in general, reduced by the black letters
on the back; high contrast and perfection of let-
ters are insured. These are excellent ways of
making tables from which lantern slides are to be
made. Such a copy can be photographed so as to
make a good slide. Either the large or small let-
ters may be used but if larger type is desired, the
capital letters only may he used.

It has been found that if a sentence across a
slide that is to be projected onto an ordinary
screen about 8 or 10 feet wide is made up of
about 50 letters, a very satisfactory projection is
obtained for a lecture room of the size used for
ordinary technical meetings. Much larger letters
are not necessary and smaller ones give projected
images that are very hard to read. A good rule
is to keep the number of letters within this limit
if possible and never show a slide that has more
than a seventy letter sentence across it. For let-
tering on curves or pictures, some of the work at
times requires larger and bolder letters than can
be obtained with a typewriter.

Mathematical developments which are difficult
to picture clearly can be shown by a slide made as
described above. Again the lettering, figures, etc.
should not be too small. The rule of having all
letters of at least such size that a 50 letter sen-
tence reaches the full length of the slides gives
very satisfactory projection. It is well to have
the lettering larger than the minimum desirable
since this insures against the condition sometimes
met when the projected pictures are too small.
Lettering for photographic reproduction should
be rather heavy. Thin lines are often lost. The
maximum dimensions of a letter should be at

THE COLLECTING NET has been entered as second-class matter July 11, 1935, at the Post Office

at Woods Hole, Massachusetts, under the Act of March 3, 1879.

marine biological laboratories.

It is devoted to the scientific work at

It is published weekly tor ten weeks between June 1 and September 15
from Woods Hole and printed at The Darwin Press, New Bedford.
the third floor of the Woods Hole station of the United States Bureau of Fisheries.

Its editorial offices are situated on
Between June 1

and October 1 communications should be addressed to Woods Hole, Massachusetts; at other times they
should be directed to THE COLLECTING NET, Garrison, N. Y. Single copies cost 30c; a subscription

(containing not less than 280 pages) costs $2.00.

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI. No. 97

MEASUREMENTS

HY SICA! XTERNAL FA RS

—— al
INCREASING CLEARNESS OF SEEING

NOT MEASURABLE

NOT MEASURABLE

PRESENCE | DETAILS

OF OBJECT | OF FORM CLEAR) SEEING

NO SEEING

THRESHOLD SEEING

CERTAINTY OF SEEING 0% ~~ 100%
RELATIVE BRIGHTNESS 1
RELATIVE TIME REQUIRED 1

——— 10

——_—— 2

PSYCHO- PHYSIOLOGICAL FACTORS

INCREASING BENEFIT TO HUMAN ENS ens

SOME FACTORS ARE BEING MEASURED

POOREST CONDITIONS FOR SEEING
ADEQUATE CONDITIONS FOR SEEING

Fig. 1. A good example of lettering for a slide
chart. Also an illustration of special shadings.
From work of Luckiesh and Moss.

least one-fiftieth of the maximum dimension of
the drawing from which a lantern slide is to be
made.

Unless a person is very skilful he should not
attempt to make a copy for a slide by using free-
hand lettering. Ordinary handwriting should not
be used in making copy for a slide since script
does not make a good appearance when projected.
To letter directly on the slide or to draw a pic-
ture on the slide is unsatisfactory as the appear-
ance of the projected picture or lettering i is apt to
be very bad. One must be very skilful indeed to
get a picture on the screen in this manner that is
worth showing. Figures 1 and 2 show good ex-
amples of lettering for slides.

The use of lettering guide® makes it possible

MAXIMUM EXPENDABLE ENERGY

1. Pee | cee
ery : al oe TT

INTENSITY OF

ILLUMINATION

Fig. 2. A slide chart that very well illustrates a
good method of lettering, shading, and curves.
Taken from work of Luckiesh and Moss.

for even an inexperienced person to do excellent
lettering at a fairly rapid rate. The legibility of
such lettering is usually considerably greater than
that of the best of typewritten copy. In addition,
the possible variations in the size of the letters
formed by means of the mechanical guides is an
advantage in balancing the typography of the
slide and for emphasizing certain details.

At times an audience is asked to look at a very
extended table of data. Very few people read
such data since, in general, they are not interested
so much in the particular values as in the general
trend. With some thought the lettering or num-
ber of words can be reduced materially and often
improved in clarity. If the rule as to the size of
the letters were followed, many of the objections
to extended tables of data would be removed be-
cause it would be impossible to show too much on
one slide.

Some lecturers attempt to show a picture of
their entire set-up. Almost anyone can arrange
ditferent pieces of apparatus into a complete set-
up, but what does the audience care about that?
Many such slides have been shown from which
the people in the audience could learn nothing.
They are interested in the final results and the
special arrangements and precautions necessary to
produce these results.

Whenever it is possible, slides should have
titles. Then the audience will be sure that no
mistake has been made, nor will the lecturer have
to hesitate and seemingly study whether the slide
was the one he intended to show at that time.

When curves are shown, coordinate lines
should be drawn at least for the main divisions,
since a curve does not show up well if there are
no coordinate lines except the one at the bottom
and the left-hand side. Slides look better if one
does not photograph ordinary cross-section paper
but uses cross-section paper where only the main
division lines show. The curves should be drawn
more heavily than the cross-section lines and the
scale should be shown for both axes. In general,
letters larger than those in a standard fifty letter
sentence should be used for curves. Too many
curves and too much lettering should be avoided.
It is better to use another slide if more than three
curves are to be shown unless the curves form a
closely related family. The numerical value of
the coordinates should be so marked that there is
no question as to which line is meant. Someone
in the audience may want to find the value for a
particular condition. In general, all lettering
should be horizontal except the designation of the
vertical coordinate, and that should be on the left

of the picture and run from bottom to top. (See
figure 2).

* Lettering guides may be obtained from the Wood-
Regan Instrument Co., 154 Nassau Street, New —
York City.

Aucust 8, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

153

It is often possible to add much to the clearness
of a chart by proper shading or toning of certain
areas. This is usually accomplished by cross
hatching. This process is tedious, and usually the
results are far from neat unless the work is done
by a capable draftsman. Such difficulties are
easily avoided by the use of a transfer process
for the shading of drawings*. Figures 2 and 3
illustrate this method of improving the back-
ground of certain slides.

Apparently too little study is given to illustra-
tions and the structure of tables in good technical
books by persons making slides. It should be
remembered that the skilled printer has had long
experience and has given a good deal of study
to these matters. ven casual observation of
these by anyone preparing drawings or lantern
slides will insure against some of the prevalent
evils existing in lantern slides.

Most slides as used are about 314 inches high
and 4 inches wide. However, it is well to confine
the illustration to no more than two-thirds the
width and height since this will insure against
some of the illustrations being eclipsed by part of
the projection apparatus and, in the case of the
cheaper projectors, against too much distortion.

It is almost a universal practice to make slides
up as positive since this is then shown on the
screen as a positive picture. It has been noticed
that when a negative is shown there is apt to be
some comment by the members of the audience
to their neighbors. Negative slides often break
due to the excessive absorption of radiant energy,
which is a practical objection to them. Some-
times a lecturer will ask the operator to hold a
copy of some plate in the lantern so as to pro-
ject it on the screen. This is very difficult to
do. Such a sample may easily be mounted on
a slide.

Making a slide by cutting a piece out of a spec-
trum plate or other photographic plate is very un-
satisfactory. Such pictures show up very badly
and often are not even properly orientated. This
method is excused by saying that no time or
money was available to make good slides. The
answer is that the lecturer imposed upon the time
of his audience in trying to show them interest-
ing results that they could not see, except with
some effort.

Lantern slide emulsions are purposely con-
trasty and fine-grained. These characteristics
usually go together in emulsions. While con-
trasty lantern slides are excellent for tabular mat-
ter and line-drawings, they are a great handicap
where a variety of half-tones is to be illustrated.
For example, lantern slides of interiors, of ap-

8 A wide variety of transfer patterns may be ob-
tained from Para-Tone Company, Inc., 416 Ply-
mouth Court, Chicago, Illinois.

.
;

paratus, of lighting effects, etc. are commonly un-
satisfactory because of the high contrast and
short range of shades. Many kinds of photo-
graphic emulsions are available with which the
original negatives can be made. With careful
printing and developing, a lantern slide positive
can be made fairly satisfactory, although it is
often more desirable to use one of the less con-
trasty emulsions for making the positive; for in-
stance, the 3144” & 414,” plate, which can be ob-
tained in a variety of emulsions. Of course one-
fourth of an inch must be cut from its length.
Obviously, panchromatic plates should be used
in making the negative of colored originals if the
relative brightnesses are to be reproduced with
reasonable satisfaction. By a careful use of
plates and proper emulsions, excellent lantern
slides can be made from very poor originals or
from originals which present difficulties for or-

dinary emulsions and contrasty lantern slide
plates.
Fig. 3. A well made siide diagram of a special

instrument showing shading. Taken from work of
Luckiesh and Moss.

The usual mat adds a desirable finish to lan-
tern slides. In special cases ingenuity can be
exercised in making special mats. In fact, lan-
tern slides can be built up of materials and mats
placed between two thin glass plates, although
one must be careful not to make the lantern slide
too thick for the standard holders.

The slides must be put into the machine in the
proper position and in the proper order to ob-
tain the best results. In general, the slides for
any single lecture should be marked in the order
in which the lecturer wants to use them. If the
slides are arranged in order in a slide box or in
a pile, many things can happen to change the or-
der, which may be very disturbing to the lectur-
er. To get the slides into the machine in the
proper position calls for some marking since it
is rather difficult for the operator to inspect each
slide to see how it is to be put into the machine.
If a slide is held between the eye and a light source
in such a manner that the picture as seen on the
slide is properly orientated, a turn of the slide
through 180° in its own plane will bring the slide
into the proper position for the lantern, provid-
ing the operator is facing the screen. A good
plan is to have some mark, such asa small stick-
er, placed on the lower left hand corner ot the
slide, held as above described, and then, when

154

THE COLLECTING NED

[ Vout. XI. No. 97

putting the slide into the lantern, have the slide
so turned that this mark is in the upper right
hand corner as the operator faces the screen.
This method of marking is used so much that it
may almost be considered standard.

Since the size of the slides is standardized, one
would not expect to find slides so made that they
will not go into the slide holder of a standard
projection apparatus. However, at almost every
meeting of a technical society, some one has
slides that are so poorly made that the operator
has difficulty in getting them in and out of the
projection apparatus. Since the size and position
of use of lantern slides are standardized, one
would not expect to find pictures turned through

90°, but at the last meeting of one of the tech-

nical societies three or four of the slides for one
paper, probably through the carelessness of the
maker, were so made that the picture as shown
on the screen was turned through an angle of
90°. It would be better not to show such evi-
dence of carelessness. Some years ago at a meet-
ing of another technical society, the audience was
amused because, due to poor adjustment of the
lantern each slide was slowly destroyed during its
projection by being overheated.

We have all noticed at times that the operator
has a great deal of trouble with his light source.
Often he has to change the carbons or the lamps
during the lecture. This is, in general, inexcus-
able and should be taken care of beforehand. At
times the operator does not seem to know how
to make the various adjustments on the project-
ing machine.

At a recent meeting of a national society one
of the principal lecturers was very greatly an-
noyed by the appearance of his slides; some
showed so poorly that he passed them without
comment. Considering the field this man is in-
terested in, it is certain that he provided good
slides. At the meeting of another society where
a lecture was given at the time a certain prize
was awarded, the lantern failed and a technical
lecture had to be delivered without the help of
slides. A little care beforehand would avoid
such unnecessary annoyances.

At a meeting of the Physical Society the elec-
tric line leading into the lecture rooms was so
small that it was impossible to get sufficient pow-
er to operate the light source so that it would
give enough light to show the slides properly.
Several of the papers had to be presented with-
out slides although slides had been prepared.

The ordinary wall outlet is, in general, not sat-
isfactory for a large lantern. If it is necessary to
use a large lantern, a special source of supply
should be provided so that 10 to 15 amperes can
he delivered to the lantern without very seriously
changing the supply voltage. If this is not pos-
sible, a smaller lantern should be used, since much

better projection can be obtained with a small
machine operated properly than with a large ma-
chine if there is not a satisfactory electrical sup-
ply.

Care should be exercised by the operator in
changing the slides. It is not a good practice to
remove the slide and subject the audience to
either complete darkness or to the glare of a
white screen highly illuminated. Many methods
are used to ayoid this annoyance. Some slide-
holding mechanisms are so made that the new
slide can be pushed into one side of the machine
and the old slide removed from the other side
at the same time. Some machines have a slide
holder so made that one motion pushes the new
slide in and the return motion of the lever re-
moves the old slide. If these work well they are
quite satisfactory.

It is at times annoying to see the slides moving
about as they are being changed. The best
method of changing slides, therefore, is to use a
double projection apparatus with some means of
changing from one to the other. The picture
may be changed by having an iris diaphragm be-
fore each projection lens so connected that a
movement of a lever opens one of them and
closes the other. One lamp may be turned off
and the other lighted by a double throw switch.
Another method is to have the resistance in the
lamp circuit so connected that a movement of the
contact dims one of the lamps and brightens the
other. The last two methods require incandescent
lamps since, in general, it is impossible to dim an
are or turn it off and on quickly. This method
works with less noise and less disturbance than
is possible by the use of a single projecting ap-
paratus. At the present time good lanterns are
so easily obtained that it seems hardly necessary
to use one of the older lanterns which will not
show even the best slides to advantage.

A very good method of showing an audience
some special results is to use two separate lan-
terns and thus project two pictures at the same
time. By this means the experimental arrange-
ment or method of very special work can be
shown on one slide and at the same time the
other picture can show the results of the experi-
ment. This is very effective where the results
depend upon some changing conditions of the ex-
periment. This method can also be used very
effectively to show engineering data on some spe-
cial machine under various conditions of oper-
ation. This could of course be done with a dou-
ble lantern, if sufficient angle adjustment is pro-
vided.

Moving pictures are being used more and more
to show results of research. For some work this
is a good method of showing the data particularly
if changing conditions are to be reported. Again
the operator should be sure he knows how to

AUGUST

8, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET ase

operate the machine. Recently at a_ technical
meeting an audience was kept waiting while the
operator worked out the method of operating the
projecting machine.

At a recent meeting of the Illuminating En-
gineering Society, the slides did not show up
well due to several causes, the principal one be-

ing that the electrical supply was not satisfac-
tory. This meeting was held during the day
time. The windows were not properly screened

and too much light entered the room so that the
pictures did not show up well. This often hap-
pens because the person in charge does not know
just how much outside light can be permitted in
a room and still show the slides. A good plan
is to try such things out beforehand.

To show all parts of the picture equally well
even with the best projection instruments, the
screen should be perpendicular to the line of pro-
jection of the lantern. If a scientific meeting is
held in a room that has a high stage, with the
projection instrument located on the floor of the
room, the angle between the screen and the line
of projection is apt to be such that not only is
the picture thrown out of shape but also it is im-
possible to get all parts of the picture in focus
at the same time.

Sometimes a lecturer has prepared slides for
projection on a screen about 8 or 10 feet wide
and finds that a small machine is being used
where the pictures are thrown on a screen about
4 feet wide. Nothing is more disturbing to an
audience than to have slides shown in such a man-
ner that the resulting picture is too small to be
clearly seen. This was well illustrated at a re-
cent meeting of the Physical Society much to the
disturbance of many of the members. The width
of the projected picture should be about one-
tenth to one-twelfth of the distance to the per-
sons in the audience who are farthest from the
screen.

If a lecturer finds it necessary to use a poor
lantern and then wants a particular part of the
slide better focused, he should point out the par-
ticular part so that the operator will know what
to try. The best that any operator can do is to
adjust the lantern so that the part of the picture
that he considers important is in good focus. The
slides shown at a Chemical Society sectional
meeting were very badly out of shape and one
corner of each picture was blurred. This was
found to be due to poor alignment of the pro-
jection lens and the rest of ‘the lantern. It re-
quired a pair of pliers to loosen a screw so that
the lens could be brought into proper adjust-
ment.

Something should be said concerning the screen
used. Generally, in regular lecture halls, fairly
good screens are available. Sometimes these
screens, due to long use, become so black with

dust that a great deal of light is lost. A screen
with a metallic aluminum surface is satisfactory

in a long narrow room where no one is obliged to
view the screen from a wide angle. The metallic
surface reflects light predominantly in the direc-

tion of the projector and its brightness diminishes
rapidly as it is viewed more and more obliquely
A screen with a white diffusing surface is ap-
proximately of equal brightness as viewed from

all angles, and is universally satisfactory if the
projection lantern is powerful enough. Alumi-

num screens are so often used in wide rooms,
where they should not be used, that it would be
a good rule to eliminate them entirely, or to use
them only in the few specific cases where they
would be ee used in narrow rooms. The
screen should be hung in such a manner that it
will not move, because if it does, some part of
the picture at times will be thrown out of focus.

At a recent lecture some good slides were
shown with the lantern located on a_ balcony

across a hall. This put the lantern in such a posi-
tion that the line of projection was not quite
perpendicular to the screen. The man at the lan-
tern focused the instrument so that the upper
edge of the picture was clear, with the result
that the lower part of the picture was slightly
out of focus. In this case, if the center of the
picture had been made sharp, the top and_bot-
tom would have been very good. This difficulty
was made more noticeable due to a back and for-
ward movement of the screen. Sometimes the
screen is so low that those in the back part of
the room cannot see all the picture. In general,
this can be taken care of as the screen can be
raised and then tilted to bring it into the proper
position with respect to the line of projection.
An almost universal mistake is made in show-
ing lantern slides in a dark room. Powerful
projectors are now available at a moderate price
and there is no difficulty in projecting most lan-
tern slides, particularly line-drawings and tabular
matter, in a room which is moderately illumi-
nated. A bright area on a projection screen sur-
rounded by darkness is trying on the eyes of
the speaker and the audience. When the room is
dark the speaker is at the disadvantage of not be-
ing clearly seen. It is not generally recognized
that the language of the speaker consists of more
than words; it consists also of shrugs and ges-
tures, facial expressions, etc. When a lecturer
is speaking in the dark he loses much of his con-
trol of the audience, at least as far as the fine
points are concerned. When he is in the dark
the audience is “merely hearing a phonograph
record’ and somehow phonograph records are
not as appealing as the original presentation. If
the full light of the room is too much for the
projector to overcome and the lighting is not di-
vided into circuits so that a moderate light can

156

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI. No. 97

be obtained from the fixtures towards the rear
of the room, one or two portable lamps do a good
deal to reduce the trying conditions of a dark
room on the audience and speaker.

While it probably does not disturb an audience
seriously to have the lecturer call to the operator
when he wants a slide changed, this is not a ne-
cessary disturbance. It is a simple matter to
signal to the operator by means of a small lamp
or buzzer operated by a switch in the hand of the
lecturer, so that the operator can be informed
when and how to show the slides. A lecture
seems to be much more satisfactory if the slides
appear when they are desired and the room lights
come on when they are wanted, so that the lec-
turer will not need to call to the operator to tell
him what he wants. There should also be avail-
able, without the necessity of the lecturer asking
for it, a pointer of such length that he can point
out anything that he desires on the picture. It
may sometimes be satisfactory before a small
group for a lecturer himself to operate the pro-
jection apparatus, but this should not be at-
tempted at any formal lecture or at a meeting of
any technical society.

Slides may be broken in transporting them to
the place of lecture. However, one wonders if
some of the broken slides shown were not broken
in some other manner. The appearance of a
broken slide on the screen may probably be ex-
cused, but there is no excuse for the soiled and
dirty slides that are displayed from time to time.
Finger marks are particularly objectionable and,
even if slides are clean when handed to the op-

erator, the latter sometimes carelessly leaves
finger marks.
Too many slides should not be shown. It is

well to turn on the lights occasionally and give
the audience a rest from the slides. At times a
lecturer will use a slide to illustrate a particular
point and then will have considerable to say be-

fore the next slide is thrown on. It is better to
turn on the lights for this interval and then turn
them off again when the next slide is needed.

Often a lecturer attempts to show on a slide
a very faint spectral line or some special image
which was brought out very faintly on the ori-
ginal photograph. Perhaps the original was
faint and the experimenter had to look very care-
fully to see what he had found. However, when
showing this to an audience he should make the
slide show to the audience exactly what he wants
it to show. The line, or whatever he is desiring
to show, should be made clear enough so that he
will not have to explain. ‘Those up in front can
see this line right here but those in back probably
can not see it.” No one is going to judge the
value of a piece of research work entirely by what
he sees on the slide—he is also apt to judge it
by what he does not see. A poor slide can be
faked as well as a good one and when a man is
explaining to an audience exactly what he found
on the plate he does not need to ask the audience
to take the pains to see what he saw on the
original photograph. There are methods known
to those skilled in the art of making slides that
can be used to bring out weak lines and other
parts that showed poorly on the original plate.

Almost all the criticisms of slides and every
suggestion as to methods of making better slides
that have been given can be applied to the illus-
trations given in scientific papers. Many papers
would be very much improved if better illustra-
tions were provided.

The author’s colleague at Nela Park, Dr.
Matthew Luckiesh, has helped considerably by
criticism and suggestions, and by furnishing ma-
terial in the preparation of this paper, drawing
upon his experience of making and showing slides
obtained during his many years study and de-
velopment of the general subject of the “Science
of Seeing.” The author wants at this time to
express his appreciation for this help.

OPEN OCEAN AND COASTAL SHARKS: DO THEY ATTACK MEN?
(Continued from page 149)

known in the Woods Hole region, that there
seems to be no room for doubt that it is a genu-
ine case of shark bite.

Sharks certainly do bite men. I have had come
to my office, a resident of New York City, who
showed me the scars on his body left by an en-
counter with a shark in the West Indies. In
certain parts of the world, such happenings are
unfortunately far from infrequent. However,
sharks are for the most part scavengers and timid
fish. In those parts of the world where I have
fished for them they are pretty generally held in

contempt. Thus at Key West, I have seen boys
diving for pennies off the old Mallory Line dock,
while 200 yards away a dead horse, drifting out
with the tide, was surrounded by four or five 10-
foot tiger sharks bucking and surging, trying to
tear it apart so that they could eat it. The point
is plain—the tigers preferred dead horse to live
boy. It may be added that I failed to get any
accounts of shark attacks at Key West.

My fishing for sharks at Key West was mainly
done five miles away from the docks, and off the
slaughter house, where they fed on offal. There,

Aucust 8, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

bY

especially on the days when cattle were being
butchered, 10 and 12-foot tiger and other smaller
sharks could be seen cruising around the big coral
heads seeking scraps. There I cruised also seek-
ing sharks. One day I was steering our launch
with a Key West harpooner up in front. We were
talking about sharks attacking men and to test my
man on the subject, I said, “Griffin, suppose I
were to run the launch up on a coral head and
dump you overboard, wouldn’t we have a funeral
in Key West next day?” He turned to me and
earnestly answered, “No sir! Everybody here
knows that these sharks won’t attack anybody.
If I were to go overboard near them, they would
head for Cuba at top speed.”

To this I said ‘Griffin, I’m no tenderfoot. I’ve
done considerable fishing for sharks. Those big
fellows out there would surely get you alive.”
But, much offended, he answered, “Well, Doctor,
if you don’t believe me, steer me up to those
sharks and I'll jump over on his back, and we
will see him make for deep water scared nearly
to death.”

So sure was I that the man was telling the
truth, that had I not needed specimens I would
have taken him at his word—and to this day I
regret that I did not do so. Such an experiment
has been done—at Calcutta, where the Hooghley
River is full of reputedly dangerous sharks. I
have an authentic account of a drunken sailor
there who, on a wager, jumped overboard and
landed feet first on the back of a shark lying
alongside the ship, and the shark—as well as the
sailor, sobered by his plunge—was scared nearly
to death. :

But sharks certainly do attack men. The earli-
est reputable account of such known to me is in
a book by the old Dutch navigator, Jan Huygen
van Linschoten, who made a voyage to the East
Indies in the late years of the sixteenth century
and published his account at “Amstelredam” in
1595. This is said to have happened at Cochin
near Madras, India. In the Fugger News Letter
(1924), there is a translation of a letter from
Cochin dated January 10, 1580, giving an eye-
witness account of a similar but earlier happening
there.

Many other voyagers have recorded similar at-
tacks, but our most authentic data is contained in
the writings of medical men. The earliest of these
accounts known to me were published in 1828 and
1829, but I cannot give the locality since they
have not been looked up. I have, I believe, all of
these medical references, and I hope some day to
prepare an historical article that will bring to-
gether all the accounts that have been written on
this subject.

As has been indicated, the Hooghley River at
Calcutta abounds in sharks. Sir Joseph Fayrer
was surgeon in chief of the Calcutta Hospital in

the third quarter of the last century and from
1868 to 1873 he recorded five cases of shark bite
on which he had been called to operate. He gives
a figure of the head of a man’s femur which show-
ed grooves made by the teeth of a shark.

Probably this concentration of cases of shark
bite at Calcutta is to be explained by the fact that
many of the Hindoos consign their dead to the
Ganges. As the corpses float down the river, the
sharks feed on these. Having acquired a taste
for human flesh, like the man-eating tiger, the
tiger of the sea presently comes to take his food
in the shape of living men.

The “sharkiest” waters in the world are those
of southeastern Australia and particularly Sydney
Harbor and its bays and coves. So many and
frequent have been the fatalities there, that the
bathing beaches have all been fenced off by wire
enclosures. For the many shark attacks in these
waters, we have two compilations of data that can
be depended on. These can only be briefly sum-
marized here.

In 1933, Dr. Victor Coppleson, visiting surgeon
to two hospitals in Sydney, published in the
Medical Journal of Australia his paper, “Shark
Attacks in Australian Waters.” From doctors’
and hospital records, Dr. Coppleson lists 38 at-
tacks on bathers by sharks since 1919. He an-
alyses the method of attack, the wounds caused
(with two photographs as illustrations) and the
method of treatment. This is a most valuable
paper.

Two years later, Mr. Gilbert P. Whitley, the
accomplished ichthyologist, of the Australian
Museum published a paper, “Australian Shark
Tragedies” (The Victorian Naturalist, 1935, vol.
51, 195-206). From 1803 to August 26, 1934, he
lists “a total of 70 or 80 fairly authentic cases of
sharks attacking human beings in Australia.”
This is indeed a huge list of shark-caused trage-
dies for the smallest continent, and indeed mainly
for its east coast, but this is not the place to enter
into any study of these. No simple explanation,
like that offered for the Calcutta attacks, can be
set out. Much critical study of the accounts will
need to be made. This must be left for the de-
tailed paper at a later date.

Coming nearer home and narrowing down the
range of our investigation, I can assure my read-
ers that I know of but two articles giving definite
accounts of shark attacks in these waters. The
first is so far away—in the Caribbean Sea near
Colon, Panama Canal Zone—that it need not de-
tain us. But when we came so near home as
Charleston, S. C., it is a different matter.

In 1935, Mr. E. Milby Burton, Director of the
Charleston Museum published (The Scientific
Monthly, vol. 40. pp. 279-283, 2 figs.) accounts
of 6 attacks on the South Carolina coast. He gives
times and places, names the person attacked, the

158

THE COLLECTING .NET

[ Vo. XI. No. 97

hospital where treatment was given, the name of
the attending surgeon, and figures of some of the
wounds. This is one of the best authenticated re-
ports known to me.

Coming still nearer home—to the coast of New
Jersey—it will be recalled that in July, 1916, the
newspapers were filled with accounts of swimmers
fatally attacked by a shark or sharks in the tidal
mouths of New Jersey rivers. These accounts
were investigated and found true by R. C. Mur-
phy and Me at, Nichols, whose report was publish-
ed in the Brooklyn Museum Quarterly (1916, vol.
3, 144-160, ills.). Later in July, a white shark
(Carcharodon carcharias), the so-called man-
eater, was captured off South Amboy. In 1919
or 1920, I saw in a fish shop near Eighty-sixth
Street and Broadway, New York, the jaws of a
shark labelled as those of the ““New Jersey man-
eater.’ The characteristic broadly triangular saw-
edged teeth showed the shark to have been a
Carcharodon.

Murphy and Nichols by a process of elimina-
tion narrowed the possible attacker down to the
white shark and their presumptive evidence that
it was this particular fish is strong, but it is not
proof and is not offered as such. The proffered
award by the late Hermann Oelrichs of $500 for
an absolutely authenticated case of a shark-bite-
man north of Cape Hatteras stood for many years
but was never claimed.

The man-eater (or white) shark, has been
sparingly recorded north of Cape Hatteras. In
addition to the New Jersey fish of 1916, one was
reported from Woods Hole in 1871, and two in
1903. These three records of this shark for the
Woods Hole region (which includes the bay be-
tween Woods Hole and New Bedford, only 20
miles away) lend credibility to the account of the
attack at New Bedford. However, no attack has
ever before been recorded from New England
waters. Up to the present time, the “farthest
north” for such attacks is the New Jersey coast
and the time 20 years ago.

What was the shark that did the hurt is a
question easily asked but difficult to answer. The
only way I can go at it is by the Murphy and
Nichols process of elimination. The sharks of the
Woods Hole region capable of such damage are
of comparatively few kinds. The very abundant
but harmless sand sharks have never been known
to attack a swimmer. The hammerhead, grotes-
que in appearance and growing to at least 124%
feet long, is feared, but my experience is that it is
not dangerous. The tiger or leopard shark grows
to 12 or 14 feet and has a huge mouth filled with
sickle-shaped teeth. Its name comes from the
short vertical dark bars on the sides. In my four
seasons’ experience with it in southern Florida,
its name is not borne out by its habits.

These sharks are all shallow water forms, but
there are three surface dwellers out in the open
sea, any one of which might have come inshore
and have hurt the boy. The blue shark grows to
a good size, but there is no record known to me
of its attacking man. Next we come to the fierce
ravenous mackerel sharks. To this group belongs
the mako of Australian and New Zealand waters
where it is held to be a man-eater. Lastly we
have the true man-eater, the white shark, Car-
charodon carcharias. This great shark is found
in the open ocean where it is alleged to follow
ships for fragments from the galley and for dead
bodies consigned to the deep. It seems very like-
ly that it or a mackerel shark is the predator that
bit the boy.

This, however, is belief, not proof. Nor can
the unfortunate death of the boy be absolutely set
down as due to the attack of a shark until record
is made of it by the attending surgeons at the
hospital, or until all the evidence has been col-
lected, critically tested and set out by some scien-
tific man from the Marine Biological Laboratory
at Woods Hole but a few miles away. It is great-
ly to be hoped that such a report will be forth-
coming. The opportunity is an inviting one.

Sharks, almost anywhere, even in our waters,
may attack men under certain circumstances. 1.—
If surprised, cornered or crowded, a_ panicky
shark like a scared rat will bite. The New Bed-
ford shark might have been trying to swim down
a channel, up which the boy may have been
swimming. Under such a condition, any shark
LN) where would pretty surely snap at a swimmer.

—A wounded and angry shark will bite a man.
a Key West I have had a harpooned tiger shark
with every appearance of anger seize the stem of
the boat in its jaws as a dog lays hold of the nose
of a cow. This one left the marks of its teeth in
the wood. And 40 years before my time, C. F.
Holder had a similar experience at the Tortugas.
3.—A_ ravenously hungry shark (and most of
them are hungry most of the time, since their
secretion of hy ‘drochloric acid is prodigious)
would attack a man. Such have been known to
bite oars and boat hooks and have apparently
tried to overturn boats to get at their occupants.
The Woods Hole attacker probably sought his
victim because of hunger. In the absence of
schools of bluefish or mackerel, a shark in the
open sea would be hard put to it for food, and
driven by hunger might come in shore seeking
what he might devour.

But for all this, bathers at Woods Hole and
New York and New Jersey resorts need not be
debarred from their favorite sport by fear of
sharks. For all their bad reputation, most of our
sharks are timid and are kept at a distance by the
splashing of a crowd of bathers. Moreover, the
fierce sharks, the mackerel and the man-eater,

DO Ve PO Mas

Aucust 8, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

i('5}2)

rarely come inshore in our waters. To begin with
they seem to be few in numbers and certainly
there is little food for them near our shores to
entice them in.

Shark hunters have been very busy this past
week in Buzzard’s Bay and contiguous waters.
To the amateurs among them, information as to
how to kill a shark when caught may not be amiss.
A popular book of the day to the contrary not-
withstanding, sharks are not to be killed below

or above water by a simple thrust of a knife in
the throat and heart region. I have never tackled
a harder proposition than to try to “stick” a
shark “pig-fashion’”’ even with its head held above
water. An easier way is, with the shark hooked
or entangled in a net, to pull its head out of water
and hit it a hard blow on the snout with a hatchet,
a piece of iron pipe, or a wooden club. The shock
transmitted through the olfactory nerves to the
brain will at once put the shark hors de combat.

THE ANNUAL MEETINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY

For many investigators of the Marine Biologi-
cal Laboratory, Tuesday is a busy day as three
official meetings will convene. In the morning
the Trustees of the Corporation elect two new
members to their Executive Committee, and the
Chairman of their board; they also elect certain
investigators at the Laboratory to membership in
the Corporation. It is understood that more ap-
plications have been submitted for action than is
usual.

The Members of the Corporation meet at half
past eleven in the morning and when they ad-
journ, the Trustees are given a special dinner at
the Mess Hall. The Trustees will convene again
in the afternoon to assimilate the results of the
Corporation meeting and to consider any “‘con-
tinued” or “new” business that may be brought
before them.

The Corporation meeting promises to be an in-
teresting one and it is unlikely that any member
in Woods Hole will absent himself from the
Auditorium for the hour around noon. Trustees

must be selected by ballot this year, for one or
more Corporation members are submitting nomi-
nations to Dr. Packard, Clerk of the Corporation,
which must be considered by the Corporation as
a whole together with the eight candidates spon-
sored by the Nominating Committee which are:
H. B. Bigelow, Robert Chambers, Walter E. Gar-
rey, Caswell Grave, S. E. McClung, A. P. Math-
ews, C. R. Stockard and Samuel O. Mast. The
last-named candidate has been proposed to replace
Dr. Greenman who is uneligible for re-election
because he has reached the age limit; the Com-
mittee recommends that he be made Trustee Em-
eritus.

A number of desirable candidates made the se-
lection of a successor to Dr. Greenman a difficult
one. Dr. Mast was chosen because of his out-
standing work in biology, his constant attendance
at the Laboratory, and his productivity in gradu-
ate students. Someone has stated that Dr. Mast’s
opposition to certain phases of Jacques Loeb’s
work explains why the Laboratory has been so
long in officially recognizing his accomplishments.

POSSIBLE MEMBERS OF THE CORPORATION FOR THE BOARD OF TRUSTEES

Many members of the Corporation of the Ma-
rine Biological Laboratory are eligible for Trus-
teeship; it seems appropriate at this time to ac-
quaint the members of the Corporation with the
accomplishments of certain of their fellow mem-
bers who are being considered as candidates for
election to the Board of Trustees. The brief bio-
graphical sketches given do not, of course, even
begin to exhaust the many men who deserve to
be honored by trusteeship.

Dr. Henry Bryant Bigelow

Graduating from Harvard in 1901, Dr. Bige-
low carried on further studies there and has held
various positions at the University, his present
title being Curator of Oceanography. His first
work was at the Woods Hole Oceanographic In-
stitution.

During the World War, Dr. Bigelow was a re-
serve officer in the United States Army and
served as special expert on the U. S. Shipping
Board from 1917 to 1919.

He is a Fellow of the American Academy of
Arts and Sciences, of the Royal Geographic So-
ciety of London and of the Boston Society of Na-
tural History.

Dy. Robert Chambers

Born in Turkey and a graduate of Robert Col-
lege of Constantinople, Dr. Chambers also studied
at Queens College in Kingston, the University of
Munich, and has done research work at Columbia
University. He has taught in Turkey, at the uni-
versities of Toronto and Cincinnati and at the
Cornell University Medical School. He is now

160

THE COLLECTING NET SUPPLEMENT

[ Vou. XI. No. 97

research professor of biology at the Washington
Square College of New York University.

Dr. Chambers has carried on summer investiga-
tions at various laboratories, both on this conti-
nent and abroad, but for the most part has de-
voted himself to experimental work at the Marine
Biological Laboratory, first spending a summer
here in 1912. He is the recipient of scientific
honors in recognition of his research contribu-
tions, such as the Traill Medal presented by the
Linnean Society of London and the John Scott
medal.

Dr. W. C. Curtis

Dr. Curtis, a graduate of Williams College and
a former student at the Johns Hopkins University,
has been professor of zoology at the University of
Missouri since 1908. At Woods Hole he was in-
structor in the invertebrate zoology course before
being elected trustee of the Marine Biological
Laboratory in 1923. He was expert witness in
1925 at the Scopes trial in Dayton, Tennessee,
chairman of the biological division of the National
Research Council, as well as editor of the Journal
of Morphology and Physiology, and president of
the Union of American Biological Scientists.

Dr. Caswell Grave

Studying at the Johns Hopkins University af-
ter his graduation from Earlham College in In-
diana, Dr. Grave taught zoology there and at
Goucher College before transferring to the Uni-
versity of Washington, St. Louis, where he is
Rebstock professor of zoology and directs the
work of the department. He has also been Di-
rector of the United States Bureau of, Fisheries
Laboratory at Beaufort, North Carolina, and
Shellfish Commissioner of Maryland. Dr. Grave
has been secretary-treasurer and vice-president of
the American Society of Zoologists. He first came
to Woods Hole in 1901 ; beginning in 1912 he was
instructor in charge of course work at the Ma-
rine Biological Laboratory for seven years.

Dr. W. E. Garrey

Dr. Garrey studied at Lawrence College, the
University of Berlin and the University of Chica-
go. He has held positions in the physiological
sciences at Cooper Medical College, Washington
University (St. Louis), Tulane University and
Vanderbilt University Medical School where he
has been professor of physiology since 1925. He
has held an instructorship in physiology at the
Marine Biological Laboratory since 1924. He is
a member of the Physiological Society and the
Society of Biological Chemistry. His work has
been largely in the field of comparative physiology.

Dr. S. O. Mast

Dr. Mast, professor of zoology at the Johns
Hopkins University, first studied at the Univer-

sity of Michigan, Harvard University and at the
Michigan State Normal College. He has taught
in the field of zoology successively at Hope Col-
lege, Goucher College, and the Johns Hopkins
University. He is on the research staff of the
course in invertebrate zoology at the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory of Woods Hole. Dr. Mast is
a long time resident of Woods Hole and many of
his graduate students have worked here.

Dr. A. P. Mathews

Dr. Mathews, professor and head of the depart-
ment of physiological chemistry at the University
of Cincinnati studied at the Massachusetts Insti-
tute of Technology, Cambridge University, the
University of Marburg and Columbia University.
He has held positions in the biological field at the
Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Harvard
Medical School, Tuits College, Harvard Univer-
sity, the University of Chicago and the University
of Cincinnati where he has been since 1919. He
is a member of the Society of Naturalists, Physio-
logical Society and Chentical Society. He was in
charge of the work in physiology at the Marine
Biological Laboratory from 1904 to 1916.

Dr. Charles R. Stockard

Dr. Stockard, a native of the state of Mississip-
pi, matriculated at Mississippi Agricultural and
Mechanical College. He studied, as well, at Colum-
bia University, the University of Cincinnati and
at the University of Wurzburg. He has held the
position of assistant in zoology at Columbia Uni-
versity and has since then been at the Cornell
University Medical College where he is now pro-
fessor and head of the department of anatomy.
He is managing editor of the American Journal of
Anatomy and co-editor of the Journal of Experi-
mental Zoology. He is on the Board of Science
Directors of the Rockefeller Institute. He has
been president of the Society of Zoologists, secre-
tary-treasurer of the Association of Anatomists
and secretary of the Society of Naturalists as well
as member of the National Academy of Sciences.

Dr. Wm. Randolph Taylor

Dr. Taylor has been professor of botany at the
University of Michigan since 1930 and has been
in. charge of the botany course at Woods Hole
since 1919. He received his Ph.D. degree from
the University of Pennsylvania in 1920 and taught —
at that institution for ten years. He has had edi-
torial connections with such publications as Bo-
tanical Abstracts, Biological Abstracts, Stain
Technology, and others.

Dr. Taylor has done research work in cytology ;
the morphology of chromosomes; algae; marine
algae of Florida, the Caribbean, and South Amer-
ica; and fresh-water algae of British Columbia —
and Newfoundland.

Aucust 8, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

161

SUPPLEMENT TO THE DIRECTORY

Investigators
Nicoll, P. A. asst. zool. Washington (St. Louis). K
10.
Sandow, A. instr. biol. biophys. New York. OM

NDR. Nickerson, Millfield.

Schoenborn, H. W. grad. asst. biol. New York. Br
232. Bosworth, North.

Schmidt, Ida G. asst. prof. anat. Cincinnati. Br 341.
Pond, Prospect.

Schmidt, L. H. fell. biochem. Cincinnati. Br 341.
Pond, Prospect.

Shears, Elizabeth. sec. Rockefeller Inst. (Prince-
ton). Br 206. A 209.

Smelser, G. K. instr. anat. Columbia. Proto lab, D
302.

Steiman, S. E. grad. Boston. Br 228. McLeish, Mill-
field.

Whedon, A. D. prof. zool. and phys. North Dakota
State. OM 38. A 202.

TROUT LAKE LIMNOLOGICAL LABORATORY
The interrelation between sponges and the pre-
sumably symbolic algae usually found in their
tissues provides a host of problems upon which
little has yet been attempted, but which may prove
of primary importance in the explanation of
sponge distribution. ;

The Woods Hole Yacht Club will hold its an-
nual dance tonight at the Woods Hole Golf Club
house. A Boston orchestra, secured through
Ronny Weeks, will supply the music. A meeting
for the election of officers will be held beforehand.

Introducing

Joun Z. YounG, fellow of Magdalen College, Ox-
ford University, and of the Rockefeller Founda-
tion for Medical Research. -

Mr. Young was born in Bristol, England, in
1907 and attended Malborough College and Ox-
ford University. He matriculated at Oxford in
1928, taking his degree in zoology. He now holds
the post of University demonstrator in the de-
partment of zoology, Oxford University.

In connection with his research he has pub-
lished some twenty papers mostly on the follow-
ing subjects: the anatomy and physiology of the
autonomic nervous system of fishes, the pineal
eye and other light receptors of lampreys, the cy-
tology of the nervous systems of Cephalopods and
Crustacea, and nervous degeneration and regen-
eration in Cephalopods.

Since December Mr. Young has been working
at the University of Chicago on the innervation of
the adrenal glands, and the potential changes in
the brain of frogs. At Woods Hole he is studying
the anatomy and physiology of the nervous sys-
tem of squids, which contain giant nerve fibers
over one millimeter in diameter.

Mr. Young will return to England early in
October to resume his work at Oxford University.

INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY CLASS NOTES

The Invertebrate class, only recently arrived at
Woods Hole, makes its bow. It may be seen in
session daily and nightly from ten on. Since its
members have taken to evening dips, sessions be-
gin after the bath.

The latest innovation is Sunday morning lec-
tures. Dr. Nelson delivered an impromptu one
on the Portuguese Man 0’ War which has re-
cently been placed in the laboratory, and his audi-
ence heartily approved. May we have more, Dr.
Nelson ?

Having survived the strain of the search for
protozoa, we are starting the study of the coelen-
terates and, with it, our field work has begun in
earnest. Since we are new, there are many things
to learn. Dr. Hadley tells us that the technique
for demonstrating an unknown form consists in
jerking one’s elbow suddenly, thus sending the
animal back into the Sound and saving the leader
much embarrassment. Dr. Hadley, by the way,
has recently been known to stand blithely on a
large Busycon, without being aware of its pres-

ence. Among the rare forms was one, named by
Dr. Lucas as Ascanna. Ascanna? Well, ask
Hannah !

The Nobska trip was a great success. Not only
was the collecting the best reported for some
years, but this was the first fair-weather trip in
eight or nine. The following are some of its high
spots. Are collectors bathers? May invertebrates
go half unclad. The class has already had a run-
in with the law. The Nobska cop spent an ener-
getic twenty minutes running up and down the
beach like an anxious hen with a family of duck-
lings. No one within reach, no names to call, no
one who would reply to his wild wavings! And
upon our arrival home, after much searching,
Team II produced Triphora perversa, a snail with
a left-handed coil, which was immediately kid-
napped by Dr. Mathews for the permanent mu-
seum collection.

Aside from the intellectual, we have learned
from Dr. Nelson, that “there are other means of
amusement.’ Such we found was the truth when
we trouped to the M. B. L. Mixer on Saturday
night, returning thoroughly mixed and much im-
pressed with the club’s facilities. It furnished a
welcome diversion from our strenuous activities—
such a diversion that we unanimously substituted
funny papers for check lists on Sunday morning.

Altogether, the Invertebrates are enjoying life
at “the Hole” immensely. We feel that the sum-
mer shows great promise, and look forward to the
next adventure.

D. Bisuop, R. Bascock, M. STOKER

162

THE COLLECTING NET

| Vers xc NOmeZ

The Collecting Net

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
at marine biological laboratories

Editorial: Ware Cattell, Elizabeth Thornton, Ur-
sula Reinhardt and Annaleida Snyder Cattell.

Business: Arthur C. Stirling, Amy Gamble, Boris
Gorokhoff and Marjorie Higgins.

Entered as second-class matter July 11, 1935, at
the U. S. Post Office at Woods Hole, Massachusetts,
under the Act of March 3, 1879.

ELECTION OF NEW TRUSTEES

It is the opinion of many members of the Cor-
poration of the Marine Biological Laboratory that,
in principle, nominations for Trustees of the Cor-
poration should be made by individuals as well as
by the nominating committee appointed by mem-
bers of the executive committee, themselves
Trustees. In this way one can be certain that the
choice of each Trustee represents the wishes of
the majority of the Corporation members ; in the
past this has not always been the case. Since the
officers and trustees of the Corporation are elected
by the Corporation members, it should be the duty
of each one to encourage the selection of Trustees
by vote instead of by appointment. Individual or
collective opposition at the meeting to nominations
from the floor, such as has exhibited itself in the
past, emphasizes the real need for them. The fact
that such procedure is frowned upon by influen-
tial Trustees is unfortunate. The function of a
conscientious nominating committee is to serve in
an advisory, rather than in a dictatorial capacity.

If nominations, other than those of the nomi-
nating committee, are submitted for consideration
at the annual meeting on Tuesday, a loyal member
of the Corporation should not vote for an individ-
ual for trusteeship simply because he was chosen
by the nominating committee ; if other candidates
of worth are presented, they should be considered
with the same grace.

Many members of the Corporation, who have
not served on the Board, are eligible for Trustee-
ship. Nominations from the floor are construc-
tive; they should be a custom, not a novelty.

RECOMMENDATIONS OF THE INVESTIGATING
COMMITTEE

The report of the Committees appointed several
years ago to study “the matter of the nomination
of officers and trustees” of the Corporation of the
Marine Biological Laboratory of which Dr. W. C.
Curtis was chairman should be in the minds of all
corporation members today. They made a thor-

ough study of the situation. Some of their recom-
mendations are here reproduced :

(1) After considering various methods by which
those engaged in instruction might be represented
upon the Board of Trustees, it is believed that the
following action by the Corporation will be the best
means of insuring such representation:

“The Corporation affirms its position that instruc-
tion is a fundamental part of the work of the Lab-
oratory and hence this work should be adequately
represented upon the Board of Trustees.”

(2) “That the Committee of the Corporation for
nomination of Trustees consist of five members, of
whom not less than two shall be non-Trustee mem-
bers of the Corporation, and not less than two shall
be Trustee-members of the Corporation.”

(3) “That on or about July first of each year,
the Clerk shall send a circular letter to each mem-
ber of the Corporation giving the names of the
Nominating Committee and stating that this com-
mittee desires suggestions regarding nominations.

(4) “That the Nominating Committee shall post
the list of nominations at least one week in advance
of the annual meeting of the Corporation.”

(5) “That no trustee shall be elegible for re-
election until one year after the expiration of the
term for which he was elected.”

Introducing

Grecorio T. VELASQUEZ, special detail fellow
from the University of the Philippines to the Uni-
versity of Michigan.

Mr- Velasquez was born at Calumbit, Bulacan,
Philippine Islands in 1901 and attended the Uni-
versity of the Philippines. He was made assis-
tant in botany in his third year, assistant instruc-
tor, after receiving his Bachelor of Science degree
in 1925, and instructor in 1930 Working under
Professor José K. Santos, cytologist, Mr. Velas-
quez received his Master of Science degree in
1OSie

Since last February he has been studying at the
University of Michigan, Ann Harbor, Michigan,
under a special detail from the University of the
Philippines and a fellowship from the University
of Michigan. His wife, who is assistant im the
department of zoology at the University of the
Philippines, accompanied him to Michigan where
she is working for her Master of Arts degree in
zoology.

At Woods Hole he was enrolled in the botany
course. His special interest is the algae of the
Philippines, specimens of which he has brought
with him for study; little research has been done
on these in the Philippines.

In the fall Mr. Velasquez will continue his
studies of algae at the University of Michigan un-
der Dr. W. RK. Taylor under whom he has been
working since his arrival in the United States.

Bots

Aucust 8, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

163

ITEMS OF INTEREST

Dr. JosepH Scuwas, instructor in biology at
the University of Chicago, will be research asso-
ciate in the Bureau of Educational Research in
Science at Columbia University for the next year.
Along with five others he will prepare a two year
beginning course in natural sciences. Dr. Schwab
is now working at the Marine Biological Labora-
tory.

Dr. WitttAm H. Cote, director of the Mt.
Desert Biological Laboratory at Salsbury Cove,
Maine, will be at Woods Hole on Tuesday, Au-
gust 11. Dr. Cole is a member of the executive
board of THe Cotrectinc Net Scholarship
Fund.

FATHER FRANK J. O'Hara, formerly of St.
Edwards University, Texas, will occupy the post
of instructor in embryology at Notre Dame Uni-
versity. The new biology building, worth $300,-
Q00, will be opened in the fall. It is equipped on
the first floor with complete facilities for bacteri-
ology in addition to an “ultra-modern lecture
hall,’ on the second for botany and forestry and
on the third for all other branches. Convenient
greenhouses will provide specimens for the botany
courses.

Dr. Henry Drysdale Dakin of Scarborough,
New York, who is editor of the Journal of Bio-
logical Chemistry has had conferred upon him the
honorary degree of Doctor of Literature by the
University of Leeds.

Dr. Epwarp J. Ritey, member of the staff of
the New York University College of Medicine,
died of an acute throat infection last Tuesday at
St. Vincent’s Hospital where he had been visiting
physician for the past 12 years.

Mr. Arcute N. Sovserc, Columbia graduate
student, has received a university fellowship in
zoology at Columbia University. Mr. Solberg,
who worked at Woods Hole during the early part
of the summer is now visiting at his home in Far-
go, North Dakota.

Dr. R. P. WopenHouseE, botanist and chemist
for the Arlington Chemical Company, Yonkers,
is the author of a book on the morphology of
the pollen grain. It is entitled ‘‘Pollen Grains.”

The issue of Science for August 7 contains an
article entitled “The Semiquinone of the Flavine
Dyes, including Vitamin By” by Drs. Leonor
Michaelis, M. P. Shubent and C. V. Smythe. The
last member is a former CoLLEcTING NET scholar.
This same issue also contains “Survival of As-
caris Eggs After Centrifuging” by Professor H.
W. Beams and Professor R. L. King and “Elec-
trical Brain Waves and Temperature” by Pro-
fessor Hudson Hoagland.

The Blakiston Exhibit in the Lobby of the
Brick Building of the Marine Biological Labora-
tory ended on July 31. The W. B. Saunders’
books were on display for several days around
August 1. The Macmillan Company has just
completed its exhibit with three of the staff in at-
tendance. Lea & Febiger has taken the latter’s
place in the lobby with an exhibit of books in the
biological sciences, with special emphasis on medi-
cine,

The Ailantis, Woods Hole Oceanographic In-
stitution research ketch, will sail on Monday
morning to set up current stations off Block Is-
land on the continental shelf. The object of the
trip, which is under the direction of Dr. Henry
Stetson of Harvard University, is to get data on
one complete tidal period.

The Alda from New York, which anchored in
Great Harbor off the laboratory wharfs is owned
by Mr. A. V. Davis, President of the Board of
Trustees of the Aluminum Company of America.
The boat, which arrived shortly before nine last
night, is 154 feet long, with a 24-foot beam; its
displacement is 373 tons, with a maximum crus-
ing speed of 17 knots. Mr. Davis visited Woods
Hole about ten days ago in the black and white
vessel with the glistening metallic trimmings, we
understand he will be here again for several days.
He is here to visit his brother, A. K. Davis, who
owns the Golf Club and course.

The Rose Way of Rock Island, captained and
owned by Harold Hathaway of Taunton, Massa-
chusetts, put into Woods Hole last week with a
catch of swordfish. Captain Hathaway reported
seeing great numbers of sharks; one large shark
even tried to get at a swordfish slung over the side
in a barrel!

The schooner Massoit burned at the water’s
edge near Great Round Shoals last night. The
patrol boat Argo was rushed to the scene, but
what rescues she accomplished are as yet not
known; the Argo will arrive in Woods Hole later
this afternoon.

The German zeppelin Hindenburg was greeted
by the more observant element of Woods Hole
this morning a little after eight o'clock. She was
on her way to moor in Lakehurst, New Jersey,
having taken off from Frankfurt three days ago.

A three-legged: duckling which uses its extra
leg to sit on has been hatched on the Cape. The
third leg is slightly smaller and drags behind
when he is walking.

The aerial photograph of Woods Hole repro-
duced in this issue of THe CoLttectinGc Net was
taken by Howard M. Wood of New Bedford as
well as the other two which were printed in earlier
issues this summer.

164 _

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. XI. No. 97

ITEMS OF

NOTES FROM THE TECHNICAL DIRECTOR OF
THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY

The Marine Biological Laboratory is fortunate
in securing the temporary services of Mr. Ray E.
Phipps, mechanic in the Department of Physiolo-
gy, Cornell Medical School and former mechanic
at the Laboratory here, for repairs and new con-
structions much needed at the present time.

Mr. George D. Barclay who has been at the
Laboratory for the past few weeks, assembling
and erecting the new x-ray outfit will return to
New York this week. He will complete accessory
instruments for x-radiation in connection with the
present equipment, under the direction of Dr. G.
Failla, physicist at the Memorial Hospital, of New
York City.

It is desired that investigators submit recom-
mendations and any helpful criticism concerning
scientific equipment which will be of direct value
in experimental work at the Laboratory. Forms
have been distributed so that the Apparatus De-
partment may know where anyone has been han-
dicapped or will be benefitted. Additional copies
of the information blank may be secured at the
Apparatus Room.

CHANGES AT ROCKEFELLER INSTITUTE

The board of scientific directors of the Rocke-
feller Institute for Medical Research has an-
nounced the following appointments and promo-
tions to the scientific staff. Dr. Irvine H. Page
has been promoted from associate to associate
member; Drs. Alexandre Rothen, John M. Steele
and Robert S. Tepson from assistants to associ-
ates; and Drs. W. Halsey Barker, Rollin D.
Hotchkiss, Hubert S. Loring and George L. Mc-
New from fellows to assistants.

The new appointments include Dr. Rafael Lor-
ente de No, associate; Drs. Robert D. Baird,
George K. Hirst, Horace L. Hodes, Austin L.
Jogner, Charles L. Mehltreller, Benjamin F. Mil-
ler, Carl G. Niemann, John A. Saxton, Jr., and
Mr. Leonard C. Kreider, assistants; Mr. August
A. Di Somma and Dr. Carl G. Harford, fellows.

Louis OLivier, student at the University of
Michigan Biological Station at Douglas Lake and
bachelor of science from the University of Michi-
gan, has been appointed graduate assistant in the
zoology department at New York University. Dr.
Carl Venard, who held this position last year, will
be instructor in zoology at Ohio State University.

INTEREST

“CAPE COD IN COLOR”

Movies reproducing in color the glory of the
Cape, its inland scenery and seascapes, its monu-
ments and historic spots, lighthouses, harbors and
ships and its busy contemporary life will be pre-
sented by the Rev. W. J. Miller of Orleans,
Massachusetts, for the benefit of THE COoLLEcT-
ING Nev Scholarship Fund. The film will be
shown in the Auditorium of the Marine Biologi-
cal Laboratory at Woods Hole on Thursday eve-
ning, August 20th, at 8 o'clock.

br. Miller is not a native of Cape Cod. He
came here four years ago to take a church at Or-
leans. As often happens when a stranger, sensi-
tive to the challenge of exploration, finds himself
in new and historic surroundings, Dr. Miller set
out to learn the history of his new environment
and of its past and present inhabitants. Caught
by the charm and color of old homes, quaint cus-
toms, and characters whose prototypes have been
made familiar through the writings of Joseph Lin-
coln, he took his camera with him to make a
graphic record. He and Mrs. Miller have spent
two years covering the territory between Prov-
incetown and Yarmouth, shooting scenes and
gathering a wealth of knowledge of the folktales,
legends, and history of the Cape, which they have
incorporated in the lecture. Dr. Miller does not
consider the film yet complete but hopes to cover
the rest of the Cape before he must return West.

He considers himself an amateur, and this, to-
gether with the fact that even professionals con-
sider color photography to be still in its infant
state, will make “Cape Cod in Color” interesting
entertainment for both scientist and summer
visitor.

FORTHCOMING ARTICLES IN “GENETICS”
(September)

Rhoades, M. M., A cytogenetic study of a chromo-
some fragment in maize.

Sonneborn, T. M., Factors determining conjugation
in Paramoecium aurelia. I. The cyclical factor
—the recency of nuclear reorganization.

II. Genetic diversities between stocks or races.

Hays, F. A., Studies on the inheritance of persis-
tency.

Chesley, P. and Dunn, L. C., The inheritance of tail-
lessness (Anury) in the house mouse.

Husted, L., An analysis of chromosome structure
and behavior with the aid of x-ray induced re-
arrangements.

Sturtevant, A. H. and Beadle, G. W., The relations
of inversions in the X-chromosome of Droso-
phila melanogaster to crossing over and dis-
junction.

Nebel, B. R., Chromosome structure.
experiment.

Steinberg, A. G., The effect of autosomal inversions
on crossing over in the X chromosome of Dro-
sophila melanogaster.

X. An x-ray

Aucust 8, 1936 ] _THE COLLECTING NET 165

Sr |

Here's a
Projector

You Can Use at Your Own Desk!

The Spencer Model “B” Delineascope permits you to lecture to your class, illustrate
specific points with glass slides—and still remain seated at your own desk in the front of
the room. No need to stand up to operate the projector yourself at the back of the room;
no need to have it operated by an inexperienced student. You sit facing your class, all
your lecture notes and facts at your finger tips, the projector on your desk ready for instant
use. It is the ideal way to use visual education in teaching.

In operating the projector, you place the glass slide right side up on the slide track.
The image on the screen is shown to your class exactly as the slide appears to you. Using
a pencil you can point out, on the slide, the specific object under discussion—and the image
of the pencil appears as a pointer on the screen.

MODEL “D”
For glass slides only. Can
be equipped to project
filmslides and _ micro-
slides. Ideal for daily
classroom use. MODEL “VA”

Three purpose combination
delineascope. Projects opaque
material or glass slides and

MODEL “B” Write for Folder K-78 which can be equipped to project
e d completely describes, with filmslides and micro-slides.
Overhead Delineascope prices, our complete line of A universal projector giving
projects glass slides Delineascopes. Please ad- brilliant pictures on the
and transparent bio- dress Dept. J-85. screen.

logical specimens.

Spencer Lens Company
Buffalo &3 New York

THE COLLECTING NET _

[ Vou. XI. No. 97

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLICATIONS
NEW EDITION OF POPULAR TEXT IN HUMAN PARASITOLOGY

INTRODUCTION TO HUMAN PARASITOLOGY,
Asa C. Chandler, Fifth Edition, xvi + 661 pp.,
308 figs. $5.00. 1936. John Wiley and Sons.

In the fifth edition of the “Introduction to
Human Parasitology,” Professor Chandler has re-
vised his popular text book to include advances
in the field, which during the past six years have
been so numerous and so important that the pre-
vious edition was no longer a correct and ade-
quate presentation of the subject. In the preface
to the new edition he lists some of the discoveries
which led him to prepare the revision. They in-
clude important contributions in all branches of
the subject, in protozoology, helminthology and
medical entomology.

The first three editions of the work (1917-
1926), published under the title, “Animal Para-
sites and Human Disease,” were written as a
semi-popular treatise designed to present the more
significant facts of human parasitology in a form
which would be useful and stimulating to the gen-
eral reader as well as to students. In the last two
editions (1930, 1936), published as a text book,
“Introduction to Human Parasitology,” the au-
thor has in large measure retained the style of the
earlier ones, and the subject matter is presented
in a clear and readable manner. The book is suf-
ficiently non-technical to be intelligible to the aver-
age college student and at the same time complete
and comprehensive enough to serve as a standard
text and reference work.

The book deals with the entire range of animal
parasitology and in this respect may be compared
with Leuckart’s, “Die Parasiten des Menschen,”
and Brumpt’s “Précis de Parasitologie.” It is
about equally divided into protozoology, helmin-
thology and medical entomology. There are more
complete works on human protozoology, e.g.,

those of Wenyon, Reichenow, and Craig; more
complete works on helminthology, e.g., those of
Faust, Sprehn, and the several monographs on
constituent groups; more complete works on
medical entomology, e.g., those of Matheson, Riley
and Johannsen, and the two volume treatise of
Patton and Evans; but the new edition of Chand-
ler contains in briefer form a statement of the
more important facts presented in the extensive
monographic studies. Professor Chandler is not
merely a compiler, but an original investigator
with the experience and judgment to make an ade-
quate selection and digest of the subject matter.
His “Sources of Information” is a valuable list of
periodicals and books.

In the consideration of each group and species
the same general method is followed. There is a
short historical review, a description of the para-
site with a statement of its morphology, life his-
tory and development, followed by an account of
pathology, treatment, prevention and control. It
is interesting to note that the spirochaetes are in-
cluded under the protozoa, although it is apparent
that the author does not entirely subscribe to such
an allocation. The filterable viruses, Grahamella,
Anaplasma and other inclusion bodies, and the
Rickettsia-like organisms are discussed in a chap-
ter on “Other Sporozoa, and Obscure or Invisi-
ble Parasites.’ The author is particularly inter-
ested in the biology and bionomics of the parasite
and the phenomena of resistance and immunity on
the part of the host.

The “Introduction to Human Parasitology” is
precisely what its title connotes. It is an authori-
tative survey of the animal parasites of man and
of the diseases induced by them.

H. W. StunKArRD

FORTHCOMING ARTICLES IN OTHER JOURNALS

“JOURNAL OF CELLULAR AND COMPARATIVE
PHYSIOLOGY”

(August, 1936)

C. A. Angerer. The effects of mechanical agitation
on the relative viscosity of Amoeba protoplasm.

G. Hall, D. B. Dill and E. S. G. Barron. Com-
parative physiology in high altitudes.

P. Laug and R. Hober. The excretion of bromide,
iodide, and thiocyanate by the perfused frog
kidney.

D. E. S. Brown and F. J. M. Sichel. The isometric

G

™

=

contraction of isolated muscle fibers.
. Saslow. Twitch tension and initial heat in caf-
feinized frog muscle.

J. H. Bodine and E. J. Boell. Respiration of em-
bryo versus egg (Orthoptera).
H. J. Clausen with the assistance of B. Mofshin.

The effect of aggregation on the respiratory
metabolism of the brown snake Storeria dekayi.

“THE JOURNAL OF MORPHOLOGY”
(September, 1936)

H. C. Ray. On the venous system of the common
Indian rat-snake Ptyas mucosus (Linn.).

C. Hodge, 4th. The anatomy and histology of the
alimentary tract of the grasshopper, Melano-
plus differentialis Thomas.

K. A. Siler. The cytological changes in the hypo-
physis cerebri of the garter snake (Thamnophis
radix) following thyroidectomy.

R. J. Bailey. The osteology and relationships of the
Phallostethid fishes.

H. L. Eastlick. The effect of fat extraction on Gol-
gi bodies of kidney cells of the frog.

H. T. Anderson. The jaw musculature of the Phy-
tosaur, Machaeroprosopus.

A. C. Scott. Haploidy and aberrant spermatogene-
sis in a coleopteran, Micromalthus debilis Le-
Conte.

S. M. Das. On the structure and function of the
ascidian tezt.

Avcust 8,1936] === ~~‘ THE COLLECTING NET 167

/\ew MACMILLAN Sook

*
S SS

Two New Books in the

Experimental Biology
Monograph Series

Neuroembryology

By SAMUEL R. DETWILER, Columbia University

This book is designed to meet the need for a monographic survey of the recent ad-
vances which have been made by the method of experimental surgery on the embryo, and
their application to an analytical study of this subject. In its fourteen chapters particular
attention is given to such significant problems as the factors influencing the proliferation
of nerves in vitro and in vivo, forces influencing the growth of nerve cells within the cen-
tral nervous system, and the relationship of developing morphological units of the nervous
system to general somatic activities. 2/75 pp., Ill. Cr. 850, $3.75.

The Eggs of Mammals |

By GREGORY PINCUS, Harvard University

A concise account of the experimental investigations dealing with the behavior of mam-
malian eggs during the various stages of their development. A critical account of ovogene-
sis is followed by an examination of the physiological factors governing the growth, matura-
tion, and atresia of ovarian eggs, and the relation of these processes to the follicular appar-
atus and the gonad-stimulating hormones of the anterior pituitary. The history of tubal
ova is given, with an account of the comparative behavior of fertilized and unfertilized eggs
im vivo and im vitro. An account is given of recently developed techniques for the experi-
mental manipulation of living mammalian ova. To be published in September. $3.75
( probable )

Published last Spring: PACEMAKERS IN RELATION TO ASPECTS OF BEHAVIOR,
by Hudson Hoagland. 138 pp., Ill., Cr. 800, $3.00

Projected and Forthcoming Volumes: THE RECEPTOR PROCESS IN VISION, by Selig
Hecht; AUTONOMIC NEURO-EFFECTOR SYSTEMS, by W. B. Cannon and Arturo
Rosenblueth; PHYTOHORMONES, by F. W. Went and K. V. Thimann; GEOTROPISM: A
STUDY OF DETERMINISM IN BEHAVIOR, by W. J. Crozier and Gregory Pincus; THE BI-
OLOGY AND CHEMISTRY OF OVARIAN HORMONES, by George W. Corner and Willard M.
Allen; THE MECHANISM OF HEARING, by Hallowell Davis; BIOLOGICAL OXIDATIONS,
by E. 8S. Guzman Barron; THE HYPOPHYSIS, by J.B. Collip, D.L. Thomson, and H. Selye;
NITROGEN METABOLISM IN ANIMALS, by Henry Borsook; TEMPERATURE CHARAC-
TERISTICS, by W. J. Crozier; CYTO-GENETICS AND PLANT PHYLOGENY, by Ernest B.
Babcock; BIOELECTRIC PHENOMENA IN PLANTS, by L. R. Blinks; PERIODICITY IN
ANIMAL BEHAVIOR, by T. J. B. Stier.

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 60 FIFTH AVENUE, NEW YORK

168

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vot. XI. No. 97

IL 1 EARIY MORN

, GREAT HARBOR:
EE. CAPECOD;

THE WOODS HOLE TRAFFIC PROBLEM

Residents in Woods Hole, particularly business
men, have long objected to the parking conditions
in the business section of the town. On streets
that are at best very narrow, cars are allowed to
park for an unlimited period on both sides; as a
result the trafic from both directions coming
through the main street must share in many cases
a single lane.

Our inquiring reporter in sounding out the feel-
ing of some of the business men found that all ex-
cept one objected very strenuously to parking on
both sides of the street; this one man felt that it
brought more business to his store but agreed that
the danger and inconvenience to general traffic
were very great. Most of them objected to hav-
ing people park their cars in front of places of
business while they take long boat trips. Their
suggestions are parking on one side only, a town
parking place and a limited parking period.

Mr. Dolinsky strongly favors a public parking
place; Mr. Cahoon and Mr. Savery, parking on
one side only; Mr. Higgins of the Woods Hole
Market, a limited period, such as one hour ; Mr.
Tsiknas, on one side only and for a limited per-
iod: the owner of The Twin Door is concerned
with the danger of parking on both sides so close
to the draw bridge and with motorists who park
for long periods in front of the place of business.
The Manager of the A & P store, thinks two side
parking is dangerous but more convenient to his
customers. Mrs. Thompson thinks one-side park-
ing is a practical and a necessary safety measure.
Mrs. H. M. Bradford approves of parking on one
side; she pointed out how effectively this system
worked on Depot Street. BT.

The Editor wouldn’t print my communication
last week; I was deeply offended. So much so,
in fact, that I resolved to cancel my subscription
to his magazine. Personally, I think his judg-
ment is not always sound when it comes to his
two pages of non-science which I understand his
conservative colleagues prefer to call “non-sense.”
Why, for example, give the chap (or is it a girl)

by the name of McInnis—or was it “I’m agin’ it”
—so much space to ramble along and because of it
not print my letters, or other important news that
the journal apparently chooses to overlook. I
sometimes suspect that the publisher of The Fal-
mouth Enterprise has bribed him not to print cur-
rent events. The former is an astute gentleman!
Could it be that he printed that “Stormy Petrel”’
as a reward for the Nevr’s Editor’s policy of
“hands-off” interesting news.

When I read that clever set of phrases joined
together by fancy words I thought he had paid
the Enterprise Editor for advertising space (like
I’m sure he did last week—something like a dozen
dollars, I hear). But I read it a second time and
I decided that it was rather derogatory and that
if I were he I would get pretty mad.

I almost forgot about the traffic situation! Why
does Honorable Harold Baker of the Falmouth
Police Department let cars park so close to that
corner where Main Street and Railroad Avenue
come together by the Woods Hole Market, I
wish he could do something about it before the
apex of that triangle marks the spot of two _bat-
tered cars. —C. N.

ee ____ mn |

CURRENTS IN THE HOLE

At the following hours (Daylight Saving
Time) the current in the Hole turns to run
from Buzzards Bay to Vineyard Sound:

Date INOW, 12) Wil:
August 10 .... 10:40 11223
August 11 1142, ee
August 12 ...... 12:30 12:41
PNoterete WEY cose 1:33 1:46
August 14 2.2... 2:34 2:42
August 1502. 0-22 ono
August 16 ...... . 4516. 4e27
August 17 228) 40cm
August 18 . =. O40) S57
August 19 Gal) gute)

In each case the current changes approxi-
mately six hours later and runs from the
Sound to the Bay.

Aucust 8, 1936 ] THE COLLECTING NET 169

If you are on your vacation and want to look
E. E. C. SWIFT co. nice but can’t do anything with your hair
WILL DELIVER CALL
QUALITY MEATS FINE GROCERIES MME. CURE’
TO WOODS HOLE Falmouth 598-W for an appointment
Call FE: th 22, — 421- A and your problem will be solved.
‘almou Ww BE! LORS New Malchman Block Falmouth

COMPLIMENTS OF

JOHNSON

THE JEWELER

ROBBINS LAUNDRY, INC.

Cape Cod’s Leading

Established 1918 erate a
Main Street Falmouth CLEANSERS
THE OASIS LUNCH ee
QUALITY LUNCH AND QUALITY SERVICE SAM CAHOON
Stationery HAS THE KIND OF
Sick Room and Photographic Supplies FISH AND LOBSTERS
Ballantyne’s Ale and Beer THAT MAKE YOU CALL FALMOUTH 660 - 661
— On Draught — AGAIN AND AGAIN!

— When In Falmouth Shop At —

ISSOKSON’S SANSOUCI’S BARBER SHOP

WALK-OVER SHOES, BATHING SUITS AND BEAUTY PARLOR
SPORT CLOTHES
Shoe Repairing While You Wait

Next to Post Office FALMOUTH, MASS.

SHOP AT
Lady PEPPERELL Shop

SPORTSWEAR
LORD PEPPERELL SHIRTS
SHEETS AND PILLOW CASES

MAIL ORDERS TAKEN
Phone 515
FALMOUTH Next to Post Office

Texaco Products
Gasoline and Oil

WOODS HOLE GARAGE
| COMPANY

| OPPOSITE STATION

IF YOU ARE
LOOKING FOR THE FORTUNATE PERSON IN WOODS
A HOLE IS THE ONE WHO EATS AT
COTTAGE

FOR THE The TWIN DOOR

REMAINDER OF THE SEASON

CALL THE WISE PERSON IN WOODS HOLE IS
THE ONE WHO HAS ONE OF THEIR

KATHRYN SWIFT GREENE SPECIAL MEAL TICKETS

Phone 17 FALMOUTH, MASS.

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI. No. 97

THE WOODS HOLE LOG

BEACH THEATRE

“Beyond the Terror,” a new psychological
melodrama with an intriguing metaphysical as-
pect, will be presented at the Beach Theatre next
week, starting August 12. The play was written
by Lawrence Terry, author of the daily column
“For the Games Sake.” It tells of a group of
talented and ambitious people gathered at the
home of a brilliant physicist. Every person who
wished to achieve his goal without a struggle is
offered the chance to do so at once. The story of
the lives of these people and their ambitions makes
an exciting and dramatic play.

The cast which has been in rehearsal two
weeks includes Ruth Hammond of last season’s
prize play, “Winterset,” William Post of the cast
of “Ah Wilderness,” Charles Bryant, leading man
for many seasons with Alla Nazimova, Virginia
Curley, star of “Personal Appearance” at the
Beach Theatre several weeks ago, Guido Nordzo
of the cast of ‘““The Vortex” and George Arliss’
presentation of the “Merchant of Venice,” Garry
Mohr, concert pianist, Jeanne Casselle of “Rus-
set Mantle” at the Beach Theatre this season and
Albert Hayes, better known as David Garrick of
the Lux Radio Theatre program. The play will
open on Boardway next season with the same cast.

Rehearsals are well under way for “Crab Ap-
ple” the drama to be presented by the Penzance
Players on August 25 and 26 at the Community
Hall. The author, Theodore Packard, who has
worked at the Yale drama school and the Glou-
cester Little Theatre, is directing the performance.
Alfred Compton replaces Thomas Faunce in the
tentative cast previously announced.

Tennis Club

Starting Monday, the preliminaries for three
tournaments will be in progress under the aus-
pices of the M. B. L. Tennis Club. Men's singles,
mixed doubles and women’s doubles will be run
off.

In the last tournament, Armstrong and Goldin
were the cup winners in the men’s doubles, Gold-
in’s effective lobbing amusing and interesting the
spectators. Miss Robertson is women’s singles
champion by her victory over Miss Hollings-
worth in the finals. Cups were presented to the
winners by Dr. Kindred. Bs I.

If you like to sing songs, old or new, come to
the Grammar School on School Street on Wednes-
day at 8:30 P. M. No charge—just fun. Bring
your music if you wish.

Monday Concert

Three artists will be featured at St. Joseph's
Church benefit concert to be held in the Marine
3iological Laboratory auditorium on Monday
night, August 10. F

Miss Helen McKenzie, of Woods Hole, will
give several violin solos. She was graduated from
Falmouth High School with honors last spring.
Miss Vilma Fakete Zaroodny, Russian concert
pianist, will play two Chopin numbers, “Waltz”
and “Mazurka” and a selection by Hubay Love.
Baritone Francis J. Burns, Worcester choir
leader, will sing a group of negro folk songs. Jo-
seph Nordlow will sing bass baritone.

The auxiliary cutter Valgerda II of Hunting-
ton, New York, ran aground in the Woods Hole
channel last Wednesday evening about 8:30.
With the aid of the coast guard and Glendon Hil-
ton, the boat was finally put afloat at 12:05 A. M.
Mrs. William Isom is the owner and Elbert C.
Isom the master; both are from Garden City,

New York.

AUTOMOBILE ACCIDENT ON SIPPEWISSETT
ROAD

The illustration shows the skid tracks on the ma-
cadam road and the path Dr. Donald K. McClusky’s
car took when it ran into a telephone post on the
edge of the road. The displaced pole is shown and
two pictures of the damaged car. Dr, McClusky’s
head made the hole in the windshield. The accident
was described on this page in an earlier number of
THE COLLECTING NET.

Aucust 8, 1936 ] : THE COLLECTING NET 171

i oe “

A NEW VALUABLE ACCESSORY FOR THE ULTROPAK

Special Ring Condenser for Relief Structures

_) The relief struc-
tures of many
colorless, opaque
objects such as
paper surfaces,

LO fine textile fab-
™ rics, wood, stones
j and ores, can of-
ten be revealed
to greatest ad-
vantage if at all
when illuminated by light of al-
most grazing incidence.

maven

Tama

Tumi

A new Ring Condenser for obser-
vation of surface relief can be at-
tached to every Ultropak dry ob-
jective. |
Relief Condenser Adapted to

Various Ultropak Objectives Bulletin No. 23 Upon Request

F. LEGQGGZ. Inc.
60 EAST 10th STREET NEW YORK CITY

Branches: Washington, D. C., Detroit, Michigan, Chicago, Illinois
Western Agents: poder and SaEERE, Inc., Los Angeles and San Francisco, California

FEISSIKON ||
CONTAX
The Candid Camera

NOW AVAILABLE IN TWO MODELS

Contax I in Black Finish
Contax II Chromium Plated

13 interchangeable objectives for either model.

In connection with Contax Phoku, the camera
box of Contax I or II serves admirably for photo-
micrographic work.

b | Zeiss apparatus will be exhibited at
/ Ve Mrs. Thompson's, Main Street, Woods Hole,
ie ad from August 3rd to August 14th.

CARL ZEISS, Inc.

485 Fifth Avenue, New York 728 So. a Street, Los Angeles

DOE SS OED OS 1S OED 0D OD 1 OD 0) eee ee OS OT OT OSE OSD CD64

2
fe:

172 __THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI. No. 97

Po 0 EE ET OS OS OE OOS OSS 0 O PO TG

(eee em emo em oem oemmo,

'LEA AND FEBIGER
PUBLICATIONS

On Exhibit August 12-20
Richard W. Foster in charge

Bell’s Text-Book of Pathology, 2nd edition

Boyd’s Pathology of Internal Diseases, 2nd
edition

Bridges’ Dietetics for the Clinician, 2nd edition

Bridges’ Food and Beverage Analyses

Calkins’ Biology of the Protozoa, 2nd edition

Cowdry’'s Histology

DeRivas’ Clinical Parasitology and Tropical
Medicine

DuBois’ Basal Metabolism, 3rd edition

Kuntz on The Autonomic Nervous System,
2nd edition

Laboratory Methods of the United States
Army, 4th edition

Musser’s Internal Medicine, 2nd edition

Nicholson’s Laboratory Medicine, 2nd edition

Scott and Kendall’s Microscopic Anatomy of
the Vertebrates

Visscher and Smith’s Experimental Physiology

Wiggers’ Physiology in Health and Disease

AND OTHER STANDARD TEXT-BOOKS

LEA & FEBIGER
600 Washington Square Philadelphia, Pa.

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE
BIBLIOGRAPHIC SERVICE AND
AUTHORS’ ABSTRACTS

If you publish in any Wistar Institute jour-
nal, your paper, in abstract form, is announced
on two separate occasions, prior to the ap-
pearance of the complete article in a journal:

ist. In the Advance Abstract Sheets of the
Bibliographic Service, issued on the
15th of each month.
2nd. In the form of Bibliographic Service
Cards, issued semi-monthly.
Subscription to the Advance Abstract
Sheets—$3.00 per year.
Subscription to the Bibliographic Service
Cards—$5.00 per year.
The following journals are published by The
Wistar Institute:
Journal of Morphology
The Journal of Comparative Neurology
The American Journal of Anatomy
The Anatomical Record
The Journal of Experimental Zoology
American Journal of Physical Anthropology
Journal of Cellular and Comparative Physiology
The Journal of Nutrition
Reprints of articles appearing in the above
journals may be purchased at prices quoted
on the Advance Abstract Sheets.
For further information address

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE OF ANATOMY
AND BIOLOGY
36th Street and Woodland Avenue
Philadelphia, Pa.

BAUR - FISCHER - LENZ. Menschliche Erb-
lehre u. Rassenhygiene. Band I: Mensch-
liche Erblehre. 1936. ill. 796 pp. $4.97.

EKMAN, Sven. Tiergeographie des Meeres.
1935. ill. 542 pp. $9.36.

FRANZ, Victor. Der biologische Fortschritt.
Die Theorie der organismengeschichtlichen
Vervollkommnung. 1935. 50 ill. 82 pp. $1.41.

FRENZEL, Gerhard. Untersuchungen ueber
die Tierwelt des Wiesenbodens. 1936. 8 ill.
130 pp. $2.01.

HASCHEK, E. u. HAITINGER, M. Farbmes-
sungen. Theoretische Grundlagen und An-
wendungen. 6 ill. and 14 tables, 86 pp. (Mon-
ographien a.d. Gesamtgebiete der Mikro-
chemie). 1936. $2.25.

LETTRE, H. u. IMHOFFEN, H. H. Ueber
Sterine, Gallensaeuren und verwandte Na-
turstoffe. 1936. ill. 320 pp. $8.19.

MEHELY, Ludwig. Naturgeschichte der Ur-
bienen. 1935. 60 tables. 214 pp. $9.10.

OPPENHEIMER, Carl. Hinfuehrung in die All-
gemeine Biochemie. 1936. 227 pp. $5.60.

PASCHER, A. Die Suesswasser-Flora Mittel-
europas. Heft 15: Pteridophyten und Phan-
erogamen, bearb. von H. Glueck. 1936. 496
pp. $5.70.

REIN, Hermann. Ejinfuehrung in die Physio-
ologie des Menschen. 1936. ill. 464 pp. $5.72.

G. E. STECHERT & CO.
31-33 EAST 10th ST. NEW YORK

Seal

et beet)

MICRO-CHEMICAL
APPARATUS

According to Pregl and as per latest speci-
fications.

Particularly as worked out at New York
University.

Advise in detail your require-
ments and we will send all
available descriptive literature.

EIMER & AMEND

Bst. 1851 Ine. 1897

HEADQUARTERS FOR LABORATORY
APPARATUS AND CHEMICAL REAGENTS

Third Ave., 18th to 19th St.
NEW YORK, N. Y.

Aucust 8, 1936 ] : THE COLLECTING NET

173

Me Li i Mr, Mr, Li, Li, Me, Lr, hr, hrs, PPPS SUCRE OV FV FF NG OOOO r

PROMAR~

Microscopic Projection and Drawing Apparatus

For all table and wall projection work except large lecture rooms

Excellent for

Laboratory demonstrations
Small lecture groups
Research workers
Scientific drawings

Wax reconstructions

office or classroom to another and can be supplied with |

built-in mechanical stage for 3x1 or 3x2 Slides.

PROSPECTUS AND OTHER CATALOGS

SENT ON REQUEST

CLAY-ADAMS COMPANY, Inc.

25 EAST 26th STREET

WHEN IN NEW YORK
VISIT OUR
DISPLAY ROOM

=> COLD SEAL

NON-CORROSIVE
MICROSCOPE

SLIDES

and

LASSES

DO NOT FOG
CLAY ADAMS CoO.

Exclusive Wholesale Distributors

25 EAST 26th STREET, NEW YORK

The apparatus can readily be shifted from one research
i
:

NEW YORK

RECTAN GULAR

0 OS OS OD 0-0-0 0-0 OD 0-0 OD OD OD OD OE 0 OD OES ODO SED - O-SEED-O

MUSEUM JARS

Made of clear white
glass, free from bub-
bles, stria or sand-
blows. The glass is
triple annealled to pre-
vent breakage result-
ing from temperature
changes or _ internal
strain when jars are on

responding numbers are
etched on covers and
jars, thus insuring per-
fect fit and sealing.

Complete Range of
Sizes in Stock

Write for Circular

CLAY-ADAMS COMPANY

25 East

26th Street New York

display or stored. Cor- |
|
4

VVVVVVVVVFVVVVVVTVVVVVVVVVTVCVVVVVVVVVY

IMMERSION
HEATERS

CAN BE BENT TO FIT ANY VESSEL
AMINCO LoLag immersion heaters may be bent
to fit the vessel... give symmetrical and uniform
distribution of heat... heating element in center
of heater is separated from outer sheath by insu-
lation resistance of several megohms.
QUICK HEATING,
COOLING

Low heat storage capacity
assures instant heating
when the current is turned
on, making LoLag immer-
sion heaters ideal for con-
stant temperature work.
Heating elements begin 8
inches from terminals, re-
moving danger of burn-out
in case bath liquid runs
low. Ends of sheath her-
metiecally sealed.

WRITE
FOR
BULLETIN

1500

AMERICAN INSTRUMENT CO., Inc.

8010-8020 Georgia Ave. Silver Spring, Md.

[ Vou. XI. No. 97

JENA FRITTED GLASS FILTER
FUNNELS

These funnels are made with a
Jena Fritted Glass Filter dise of $5
porosity, having’ an average pore |
diameter of 1.5/1000mm., over a
dise of #3 porosity. According to
the researches of Prof. Bechhold
these filters are assumed to be
dense enough to retain ordinary
bacteria. They are being used suc-
cessfully in the sterilization of ty-
rodes solution, and peptie digests
of protein and peptone and similar
types. Further details on request.

Number

Porosity 5/3
Diam. of disc, mm. 90
Height above disc, mm. 85
Capacity, ccm, 450
Price 13.50

Other forms and sizes on special order.
Available at all Leading Laboratory Supply Dealers,

FISH-SCHURMAN CORPORATION
230 East 45th Street New York City
JENA GLASS WORKS. SCHOTT &@ GEN.

CAMBRIDGE pH METER

This self-contained instrument, incorporating an electrometer tube, is
g

a simple, direct-reading unit for the hydrogen-ion determination of liquids

or paste materials—either opaque or clear.

measurements on physiological media.

OTHER CAMBRIDGE PRODUCTS

Moisture Indicators and Recorders
Surface Pyrometers
Galvanometers

| Gas Analysis Equipment

and other Mechanical and Electrical Instruments

It is particularly adapted to
It employs the glass electrode and

Physical Testing Instruments

Laboratory Instruments for A. C. and D. C.
Engineering Instruments

Physiological Instruments

paneer snscres (ANT BRIDGE

Instruments

eliminates danger of contaminating solutions under test. The range is 0-14
| pH units with readings possible to .01 pH. Send for further information.
.

3732 Grand Central
Terminal,
New York

Aucust 8, 1936] __ me EES COLLECHING NET) 175

One Micro-projector

7 SERVES THE ENTIRE GROUP

With from twenty to fifty students in a science class, it
is highly impractical to arrange for each of them to observe
a selected specimen through a single microscope. The
Micro-Projector is the only answer. With one of these
instruments an entire class can view a highly magnified
image while the instructor proceeds with the oral part of
the lesson.

The B & L line of Micro-Projectors includes several
models for various purposes. For complete details write

The B & L Model B Micro-Projector for lex m2) eerie 2 qe Ff S
WRicREConU be usSThOithiyauneoeese nein: for Booklet E-20. Jausch & Lomb Optical Co., 671 St.
croscope, thereby eliminating the expense Paul St., Rochester, N. Y.

of a separate optical system.

WE MAKE OUR OWN GLASS TO 6
INSURE STANDARDIZED PRODUCTION

FOR YOUR GLASSES, INSIST ON Ba&L
ORTHOGON LENSES AND B & L FRAMES

176

THE COLLECTING NET

EQUIPMENT YOU SHOULD KNOW.---

Microscopes and
Microtomes

All types of microscopes by
Reichert of Vienna, and
Microtomes by Reichert
and Sartorius.

Sartorius Balances

A complete range from the
micro-balance, accurate to
within one-millionth gram,
to the simple student’s bal-
ance.

pH Apparatus and
Buffer Tablets

For testing highly colored
or turbid solutions, or moist
solids. Range 1.4 to 12.6.
Buffer Tablets with range
3340) jxo) JO}

Fixanal Preparations

Analytical chemicals cor-
rectly weighed, standard-
ized, sealed in glass tubes,
ready for instant use.

Photo-electric
Apparatus

Colorimeter for rapid ob-
jective measurements of ab-
sorption and extinction to
within 0.1%. Reflection-
meter for measuring the
relative whiteness of sub-
stances.

Microscopic Stains

The celebrated Original
Gruebler-Hollborn and Gi-
emsa Stains. Combinations
for multiple staining.

Filtration Apparatus

F'mploying membranes of
cellulose esters, graduated
according to porosity, for
filtrations of bacteria, col-
loids, etc.

The Roland Camera

A miniature camera for
134x244” pictures, fitted
with the rapid Rudolph
“Plasmat” £2.7 lens.

Pfaltz & Bauer, Inc.

Sole Agents for U. S. A. and Canada

Empire State Building
New York

[ Vor. XI. No. 97

Special Supplement for the Officers, Trustees and Members of the Corporation

of the Marine Biological Laboratory

Special Supplement

TUESDAY, AUGUST 11, 1936

Complimentary

POSSIBLE MEMBERS OF THE CORPORA-
TION FOR THE BOARD OF TRUSTEES

Many members of the Corporation of the Ma-
rine Biological Laboratory are eligible for Trus-
teeship; it seems appropriate at this time to ac-
quaint the members of the Corporation with the

accomplishments of certain of
their fellow members who are
being considered as candidates
for election to the Board of
Trustees. The brief biograph-
ical sketches given, do not, of
course, even begin to exhaust
the many men who deserve to
be honored by trusteeship.

Dr. Henry Bryant Bigelow

Graduating from Harvard
in 1901, Dr. Bigelow carried
on further studies there and
has held various positions at
the University, his present title
being Curator of Oceano-
graphy. His first work was
at the Woods Hole Oceano-
graphic Institution.

During the World War, Dr.
Bigelow was a reserve officer

in the United States Army and served as special
expert on the U. S. Shipping Board from 1917

MW. B. LH. Calendar
TUESDAY, August 11, 8:00 P. M.
Seminar: Dr. Laura J. Nahm: “A

study of the cells of the adrenal
gland of the ewe during estrus
and pregnancy.”

Dr. E. A. Wolf and Grace Rieth-
miller: “Studies in calcification:
III. The shell of the hen’s egg.”

Dr. Alexander Sandow: ‘“Diffrac-
tion patterns of striated muscle
and sarcomere behavior during
contraction.”

Dro HW. JH. J. Kigge; “The effect
of some oxidation-reduction indi-
cator dyes on the eyes and pig-
mentation of normal and hypo-
physectomized amphibians.”

Dr. Robert Chambers: ‘The elim-
ination of neutral red by the
kidney tubules.’

FRIDAY, August 14, 8:00 P. M.

Lecture: Professor H. W. Stun-
kard: “Life cycles of digenetic
trematodes.”

THE ANNUAL MEETINGS OF THE MA-
RINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY

For many investigators of the Marine Biologi-
cal Laboratory, Tuesday is a busy day as three
official meetings will convene.
the Trustees of the Corporation elect two new

In the morning

members to their Executive
Committee, and the Chairman
of their board; they also elect
certain investigators at the
Laboratory to membership in
the Corporation. It is under-
stood that more applications
have been submitted for action
than is usual.

The Members of the Cor-
poration meet at half past
eleven in the morning and
when they adjourn, the Trust-
ees are given a special dinner
at the Mess Hall. The Trust-
ees will convene again in the
afternoon to assimilate the re-
sults of the Corporation meet-
ing and to consider any “‘con-
tinued” or “new” business
that may be brought before
them.

The Corporation meeting promises to be an in-
teresting one and it is unlikely that any member

to 1919, in Woods Hole will absent himself from the
He is a Fellow of the (Continued on page 3) Auditorium for the hour around noon. Trustees
TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE COLLECTING NET FOR AUGUST 8, 1936
Open Ocean and Coastal Sharks: Do They Invertebrate Class Notes ..cecsccssscessssseeeseen 161

Attack Men?, Dr. E. W. Gudger.................... 149

Lantern Slides for Illustrating Lectures, Dr.
Wires Bie OTSY ERC} ...-.ccces<oecereassaets

Biographical Notes on Possible Trustees of
the Marine Biological Laboratory ................ 159

Editorial Page

149 Items of Interest

PROFESSOR FRANK RATTRAY LILLIE

Dr, Frank R. Lillie, President of the Corporation and Chairman of the Board of Trustees of the
Marine Biological Laborator Dr. Lillie’s sixty-sixth birthday occurred this year on June 27.

THE COLLECTING NET SUPPLEMENT 3

The Collecting Net

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
at marine biological laboratories

Editorial: Ware Cattell, Elizabeth Thornton, Ur-
sula Reinhardt and Annaleida Snyder Cattell.

Business: Arthur C. Stirling, Amy Gamble, Boris
Gorokhoff and Marjorie Higgins.

Entered as second-class matter July 11, 1935, at
the U. S. Post Office at Woods Hole, Massachusetts,
under the Act of March 3, 1879.

ELECTION OF NEW TRUSTEES

It is the opinion of many members of the Cor-
poration of the Marine Biological Laboratory that,
in principle, nominations for Trustees of the Cor-
poration should be made by individuals as well as
by the nominating committee appointed by mem-
bers of the executive committee, themselves
Trustees. In this way one can be certain that the
choice of each Trustee represents the wishes of
the majority of the Corporation members; in the
past this has not always been the case. Since the
officers and trustees of the Corporation are elected
by the Corporation members, it should be the duty
of each one to encourage the selection of Trustees
by vote instead of by appointment. Individual or
collective opposition at the meeting to nominations
from the floor, such as has exhibited itself in the
past, emphasizes the real need for them. The fact
that such procedure is frowned upon by influen-
tial Trustees is unfortunate. The function of a
conscientious nominating committee is to serve in
an advisory, rather, than in a dictatorial capacity.

If nominations, other than those of the nomi-
nating committee, are submitted for consideration
at the annual meeting on Tuesday, a loyal member
of the Corporation should not vote for an individ-
ual for trusteeship simply because he was chosen
by the nominating committee; if other candidates
of worth are presented, they should be considered
with the same grace.

Many members of the Corporation, who have
not served on the Board, are eligible for Trustee-
ship. Nominations from the floor are construc-
tive; they should be a custom, not a novelty.

RECOMMENDATIONS OF THE INVESTIGATING
COMMITTEE

The report of the Committees appointed to
study “the matter of the nomination of officers and
trustees” of the Corporation of the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory of which Dr. W. C. Curtis was
chairman should be in the minds of all corporation
members today. They made a thorough study of
the situation. Some of their recommendations are
here reproduced :

(1) After considering various methods by which

those engaged in instruction might be represented
upon the Board of Trustees, it is believed that the

following action by the Corporation will be the best
means of insuring such representation:

“The Corporation affirms its position that instruc-
tion is a fundamental part of the work of the Lab-
oratory and hence this work should be adequately
represented upon the Board of Trustees.”

(2) “That the Committee of the Corporation for
nomination of Trustees consist of five members, of
whom not less than two shall be non-Trustee mem-
bers of the Corporation, and not less than two shall
be Trustee-members of the Corporation.”

(3) “That on or about July first of each year,
the Clerk shall send a circular letter to each mem-
ber of the Corporation giving the names of the
Nominating Committee and stating that this com-
mittee desires suggestions regarding nominations.

(4) “That the Nominating Committee shall post
the list of nominations at least one week in advance
of the annual meeting of the Corporation.”

(5) “That no trustee shall be elegible for re-
election until one year after the expiration of the
term for which he was elected.”

THE ANNUAL MEETINGS OF THE MARINE
BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY
(Continued from page 1)

must be selected by ballot this year, for one or
more Corporation members are submitting nomi-
nations to Dr. Packard, Clerk of the Corporation,
which must be considered by the Corporation as
a whole together with the eight candidates spon-
sored by the Nominating Committee which are:
H. B. Bigelow, Robert Chambers, Walter E. Gar-
rey, Caswell Grave, S. E. McClung, A. P. Math-
ews, C. R. Stockard and Samuel O. Mast. The
last-named candidate has been proposed to replace
Dr. Greenman who is uneligible for re-election
because he has reached the age limit; the Com-
mittee recommends that he be made Trustee Em-
eritus.

A number of desirable candidates made the se-
lection of a successor to Dr. Greenman a difficult
one. Dr. Mast was chosen because of his out-
standing work in biology, his constant attendance
at the Laboratory, and his productivity in gradu-
ate students. Someone has stated that Dr. Mast’s
opposition to certain phases of Jacques Loeb’s
work explains why the Laboratory has been so
long in officially recognizing his accomplishments.

POSSIBLE CANDIDATES FOR TRUSTEESHIP
(Continued from page 1)

American Academy of Arts and Sciences, of the
Royal Geographic Society of London and of the
Boston Society of Natural History.

Dy. Robert Chambers

Born in Turkey and a graduate of Robert Col-
lege of Constantinople, Dr. Chambers also studied
at Queens College in Kingston, the University of
Munich, and has done research work at Columbia
University. He has taught in Turkey, at the uni-
versities of Toronto and Cincinnati and at the
Cornell University Medical School. He is now

4 THE COLLECTING NET SUPPLEMENT

research professor of biology at the Washington
Square College of New York University.

Dr. Chambers has carried on summer investiga-
tions at various laboratories, both on this conti-
nent and abroad, but for the most part has de-
voted himself to experimental worl at the Marine
Biological Laboratory, first spending a summer
here in 1912. He is the recipient of scientific
honors in recognition of his research contribu-
tions, such as the Traill Medal presented by the
Linnean Society of London and the John Scott
medal.

Dr. W. C. Curtis

Dr. Curtis, a graduate of Williams College and
a former student at the Johns Hopkins University,
has been professor of zoology at the University of
Missouri since 1908. At Woods Hole he was in-
structor in the invertebrate zoology course before
being elected trustee of the Marine Biological
Laboratory in 1923. He was expert witness in
1925 at the Scopes trial in Dayton, Tennessee,
chairman of the biological division of the National
Research Council, as well as editor of the Journal
of Morphology and Physiology, and president of
the Union of American Biological Scientists.

Dr. Caswell Grave

Studying at the Johns Hopkins University af-
ter his graduation from Earlham College in In-
diana, Dr. Grave taught zoology there and at
Goucher College before transferring to the Uni-
versity of Washington, St. Louis, where he is
Rebstock professor of zoology and directs the
work of the department. He has also been Di-
rector of the United States Bureau of Fisheries
Laboratory at Beaufort, North Carolina, and
Shellfish Commissioner of Maryland. Dr. Grave
has been secretary-treasurer and vice-president of
the American Society of Zoologists. He first came
to Woods Hole in 1901 ; beginning in 1912 he was
instructor in charge of course work at the Ma-
rine Biological Laboratory for seven years.

Dr. W. E. Garrey

Dr. Garrey studied at Lawrence College, the
University of Berlin and the University of Chica-
go. He has held positions in the physiological
sciences at Cooper Medical College, Washington
University (St. Louis), Tulane University and
Vanderbilt University Medical School where he
has been professor of physiology since 1925. He
has held an instructorship in physiology at the
Marine Biological Laboratory since 1924. He is
a member of the Physiological Society and the
Society of Biological Chemistry. His work has
been largely in the field of comparative physiology.

Dr. S. O. Mast

Dr. Mast, professor of zoology at the Johns
Hopkins University, first studied at the Univer-

sity of Michigan, Harvard University and at the
Michigan State Normal College.
in the field of zoology successively at Hope Col-
lege, Goucher College, and the Johns Hopkins
University. He is on the research staff of the
course in invertebrate zoology at the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory of Woods Hole. Dr. Mast is
a long time resident of Woods Hole and many of
his graduate students have worked here.

Dr. A. P. Mathews

Dr. Mathews, professor and head of the depart-
ment of physiological chemistry at the University
of Cincinnati studied at the Massachusetts Insti-
tute of Technology, Cambridge University, the
University of Marburg and Columbia University.
He has held positions in the biological field at the
Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Harvard
Medical School, Tufts College, Harvard Univer-
sity, the University of Chicago and the University
of Cincinnati where he has been since 1919. He
is a member of the Society of Naturalists, Physio-
logical Society and Chemical Society. He was in
charge of the work in physiology at the Marine
Biological Laboratory from 1904 to 1916,

Dr. Charles R. Stockard

Dr. Stockard, a native of the state of Mississip-
pi, matriculated at Mississippi Agricultural and
Mechanical College. He studied, as well, at Colum-
bia University, the University of Cincinnati and
at the University of Witrzburg. He has held the
position of assistant in zoology at Columbia Uni-
versity and has since then been at the Cornell
University Medical College where he is now pro-
fessor and head of the department of anatomy.
He is managing editor of the American Journal of
Anatomy and co-editor of the Journal of Experi-
mental Zoology. He is on the Board of Science
Directors of the Rockefeller Institute. He has
been president of the Society of Zoologists, secre-
tary-treasurer of the Association of Anatomists

and secretary of the Society of Naturalists as well —

as member of the National Academy of Sciences.

Dr. Wim. Randolph Taylor
Dr. Taylor has been professor of botany at the

He has taught —

University of Michigan since 1930 and has been

in charge of the botany course at Woods Hole

since 1919, He received his Ph.D. degree from

the University of Pennsylvania in 1920 and taught
at that institution for ten years. He has had edi-
torial connections with such publications as Bo-
tanical Abstracts, Biological Abstracts, Stain
Technology, and others.

Dr. Taylor has done research work in cytology ;
the morphology of chromosomes; algae; marine
algae of Florida, the Caribbean, and South Amer-
ica; and fresh-water algae of British Columbia
and Newfoundland.

—s

——— = fi

Special Supplement

THURSDAY, AUGUST 20, 1936

Complimentary

FREIGHTER OF MYSTIC LINE GROUNDED ON GREAT LEDGE

A few minutes after noon on Monday the
freighter, 7homas P. Beal, grounded on the rocks
of Great Ledge about a mile off Juniper Point.
A representative of THE CoLLectinG Net board-
ed the vessel six hours later and after being
“thrown off” the steamer, the Captain hailed the
row boat from Woods Hole which was then pull-
ing away. It returned and the Captain, upon
being asked for a statement, made the crisp report
“Dense fog; congested traffic; grounded on great
ledge at noon.” He then courteously explained
that he had ordered that no “guests” be allowed
on board and stated that any further report must
come from headquarters, the Mystic Steamship
Company of Boston. He apologised for being able
to give our reporter so little information, but said
he was quite helpless in the matter. He was in
remarkably good humor considering the terrible
circumstances in which fate had placed him. In
a clean blue shirt, open at the neck, he presented
a picture of rugged health and complete self-com-
posure; one immediately felt that he could effi-
ciently command any situation. Outsiders meet-
ing the genial Captain were impressed with his
quiet, cultured manner—obviously British-bred—
and the cheerfulness with which he faced the dif-
ficult situation. The collier was manned by fine
men ; for example one sailor to whom the reporter
talked was a clean-cut Virginian with a cultured
southern accent. He had boarded the boat for the

first time a few days ago in Norfolk, which is his
home town. Of almost massive stature, he made
a striking picture; his muscled body, stripped to
the waist, was bronzed by the wind and sun; his
eyebrows and hair, bleached by the sun, emphasiz-
ed his darkened skin. It was difficult to reconcile
the conflicting pictures, visual and vocal, which
presented themselves: a symbol of human power
with a characterful face—his deep gentle voice
and aristocratic bearing.

A few minutes later a magnificent yacht ap-
peared on the horizon and cautiously approached
to within a quarter of a mile of the stranded
freighter. A symbol of wealth, colossal in propor-
tions, it was like a great swan with its snowy
lines of beauty and majestic grace; dwarfing the
rowboat it seemed as king to serf. Imagine the
shocked surprise of the inferiority-complexed re-
porter when, upon daring to approach within hail-
ing distance, a deep voice boomed out asking for
information about the freighter and the New York
Yacht Club boats which had been racing from
Vineyard Haven. The steam yacht was the
Nourmahal owned by Vincent Astor whose voice
it was that questioned the meek and admiring
occupants of the flimsy ten-foot row-boat.

The stranded freighter, Thomas P. Beal, con-
structed in 1921, is a steel-plated collier of 250
gross ton displacement with a crew of 34+ men.
The vessel is about 400 (Continued on page 2)

PATRONS AND PATRONESSES FOR “CAPE COD IN COLOR” PRESENTED BY THE COL-
LECTING NET FOR THE BIOLOGICAL SCHOLARSHIP ASSOCIATION.

for the Biological Scholarship Association :
Mrs. B. H. Atron

Mrs. Leroy CLark
Mr. Joun G. Hutcurinson

Biological Laboratory this evening.

As this supplement of THE CoLLectinG NET goes to press at nine o’clock on Wednesday
evening we are able to report that the following individuals have consented to act as sponsors

Circumstances have made it so far impossible to consult with more than a few interested
individuals and the above names represent only a portion of the sponsors of the colored motion
pictures of typical Cape Cod scenes which will be on exhibition in the auditorium of the Marine

Mrs. J. R. Jewerr
Dr. AND Mrs. ALFRED MEYER
Dr. CHartes R. STOCKARD

2 THE COLLECTING NET SUPPLEMENT

The Collecting Net

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
at marine biological laboratories

Editorial: Ware Cattell, Elizabeth Thornton, Ur-
sula Reinhardt and Annaleida Snyder Cattell.

Business: Arthur C. Stirling, Amy Gamble, Boris
Gorokhoff and Marjorie Higgins.

Entered as second-class matter July 11, 1935, at
the U. S. Post Office at Woods Hole, Massachusetts,
under the Act of March 3, 1879.

SCHOLARSHIPS IN THE BIOLOGICAL
SCIENCES

The Biological Scholarship Association is an
outgrowth ot [HE CoLtLectinG Net Scholarship
Fund which THe Cottectine Net organized in
1927. Since its foundation in 1926 1 HE COoL-
LectinG Net has awarded over four thousand
dollars in the form of scholarships to young in-
vestigators in the biological sciences. In order to
insure their permanency, an organization known
as [ue CottectinG Net Scholarship Fund As-
sociation was initiated, but so that THE COLLECT-
1nG NET might at no time be embarrassed by the
unfavorable reaction of the trustees of the Schol-
arship Fund Association toward certain of its in-
dependent policies, it was decided that the name
of Pur CotvectinG Ner should not appear in
connection with the organization, The new name
of the association is Ihe Biological Scholarship
Association. Its purpose is to encourage original
research in the biological sciences by beginning in-
vestigators. The money is given to selected
students and research workers of the several
marine biological laboratories in the United States
to assist them in returning to one of the marine
stations the following summer to investigate life
processes. The problem under study may be at
the moment of purely theoretical interest, but it 1s
often one which has a definite bearing upon the
solution of some current medical problem; thus
indirectly the scholarships contribute to the main-
tenance of health and the alleviation of disease.

The annual membership fee is $5.00, other
classes of membership will be provided for in-
dividuals who care to make a larger contribution.
Members will receive not less than four bulletins
a year reporting upon the condition of the fund
and the work carried out with its assistance. THE
CoLttectinG Net is undertaking to finance the
entire cost of administration so that membership
fees can be applied in full to scholarships.

It should be understood that the income from
“Cape Cod in Color” or other functions that THE
CoLLtectinG Net will present from time to time
are for the benefit of the Biological Scholarship
Association, and that in general that it will not be
awarded directly for scholarships. It will assist

in promoting the objects of the Biological Schol-
arship Association which is organized so that it
can spend no money of its own except to promote
research; that is, none of the income from mem-
bership fees can be spent on salaries, stationary or
other administrative expenses.

The executive committee, which at the moment
consists of Dr. Eric Ponder, in charge of the
Biological Laboratory at Cold Spring Harbor;
Dr. William H. Cole, director of the Mount Des-
ert Island Biological Laboratory; and Professor
C. E. McClung, professor and director of the
zoological laboratories at the University of Penn-
sylvania, met on August 11 to draw up a
constitution and a set of by-laws, with the latter
as chairman. The traveling expenses of the mem-
bers of the executive committee from out of town
are one of the items which must be covered by
the income from the various functions that THE
CotvectinG Net will present during the month.
Another rather large item of expense will be the
writing of a number of letters to interested in-
dividuals inviting them to join the Biological
Scholarship Association.

It is hoped that there will be individuals who
will decide that money to promote research work
in the biological sciences can be given for the sup-
port of the Biological Scholarship Association as
well as directly in the form of membership fees.
A contribution of $10.00 given in the form of a

membership fee will be a contribution of $10.00 to —

some competent young investigator to assist him
in his scientific work. A contribution of $10.00
given for the support of the Biological Scholar-
ship Association may reap dividends far greater
than $10.00; that is, because of such a gift it
would be possible to send more invitations to
people to join, to assist in printing a pamphlet re-
viewing the work of the scholarships which have
been awarded during the past nine years and in

S <i 5 & i
other ways directly and indirectly encouraging

people to join the Scholarship Association.

FREIGHTER GROUNDED ON GREAT LEDGE
(Continued from page 1)
feet long with a 54-foot beam. It is engaged in
the North Atlantic coal trade and Mr. R. C.
Goodwin reported that she followed no regular

route, plying between different ports as occassion —

arose.
9,500 tons of coal from Norfolk, Virginia to
Boston.

The Coast Guard cutters Colonel Greene from
Woods Hole and Harriet Lane from Province-
town, together with the Algonquin have been
standing by from time to time together with tug
boats from Boston. Time and again these rescue
vessels have futilly attempted to drag the rock-
bound collier from the reef. At eight o'clock last
night Mr. Goodwin reported by telephone that the

(Continued on Page 3)

On its present trip the Beal was carrying —

THE COLLECTING NET SUPPLEMENT 3

CAPE COD IN COLOR

This Thursday evening, August 20, at 8 o’clock
the Marine Biological Laboratory auditorium will
be the scene of a gala showing of a moving picture
that will be of interest to everyone who has ever
had any associations with Cape Cod. Rev. W. J.
Miller of Orleans, Massachusetts, will show the
moving picture “Cape Cod in Color’? which he
has taken during the four years that he has lived
in this region. The picture will show all the
spots of beauty, the places of historic interest and
numerous unusual scenes—all typically Cape Cod.

The picture includes all the towns along the
shore from Provincetown to Yarmouth and Hyan-
nis and Rey. Miller has recently been taking pic-

tures of Woods Hole and its vicinity which will
have their premier showing on Thursday evening.

The film begins with some lovely sun-rise shots,
then shows all the sights of Provincetown—the
most significant city on the Cape—including its
monuments, ports, and the oldest windmill on
Cape Cod, schools, gardens, churches and many
other significant points of interest. One then pro-
ceeds down the shore through the various towns,
with special attention to the unique and extraor-
dinary qualities that make each one differ from
the others, making the sum total of Cape Cod.
All the other points of interest are included—with
many beach scenes, unusual shots of birds in flight
and finally closes with beautiful sunsets.

FREIGHTER GROUNDED ON GREAT LEDGE
(Continued from page 2)

coal was being unloaded on to barges and that he
had every hope of successfully extracting the Beal
intact from Great Ledge shortly after dinner to-
day (Thursday). THE CoLLectinG Net hopes
to be able to print two or three pictures of the
episode in one of its next issues.

The cause of the accident seems difficult to
ascertain, but a combination of circumstances—
beyond the control of the captain—certainly play-
ed a large part in bringing it about. It
has been reported by persons who were on the
shores near Nobska light that there was a sudden
and peculiar formation of dense fog limited to a
surprisingly small-area. It is thought by many
that this circumstance, coupled with the fact, that
the waters about were almost clogged with 70 odd
visiting yachts and the accompanying boats of
many on-lookers, placed the Seal in the unfortu-
nate position of having to deviate from the
channel to avoid collision with the flocks of small-
er craft. The Nobska fog horn was not put into
action.

CHORAL CLUB CONCERT: A CRITIQUE

The Woods Hole Choral Club presented its
tenth annual concert on Monday evening, before
a large and appreciative audience

The program, in two parts, was unhackneyed

and of fine classical character. Mr. Gorokhoff
varied his program by an unusual arrangement of
the numbers—opening the Sacred Group with a
choral from “Die Meistersinger,” Wagner, which
was followed by “Christus factus est,’ Anerio
(1560-1614), “The Bells of St. Michael's Tower,”
Stewart, “Of Thy Mystical Supper,” Lvoff—a
Russian number of the last century—and closing
this group with Handel's “Then Round about the
Starry Throne.”
__Particularly—well. done was—“‘The. Bells. of St.
Michael’s Tower” which showed the basses and
tenors to good advantage—and “Of Thy Mystical
Supper,” performed with beautiful intonation,
. dynamics and balance.

The second group, consisting of secular songs
from early periods of 1238 to the modern 1924,
was charming and varied. In this group the altos
did some excellent work. The sopranos sang with
good quality but lacked volume in forte passages.

Margery Mitchell sang the soprano solo in
“The Blue Bird,” Stanford, with a clear, bell-like
voice which shows considerable promise.

A charming number, the early French “Robin
Loves Me,” Hale, which was done with artistic
simplicity, was followed by ‘The Beetle’s Wed-
ding,” which was cleverly descriptive of the
“buzz” of the beetle in the lower parts, while the
sopranos carried the happy tune.—This indeed
was a timely place for a light number and was ex-
ceedingly well done.

To close the program, the chorus was in its best
in “Moon Magic,” a Russian folk song, which was
lively and harmonically well balanced—One of
the most enjoyable things about the program was
the enthusiastic way in which the chorus sang,
combined with clear enunciation.

Most of the program was done a capella, with
good pitch, for which much credit must be given
Mr. Gorokhoff for his careful training in such a
short length of time.

Woods Hole music lovers have watched, with
interest and pride, the growth and progress of a
small group to an organization with 41 members,
and will look forward to hearing another splendid
program next summer.

—BLANCHE HuNTER NELSEN

PENZANCE POINT VS. NAUSHON

On Monday Messrs. Eric and Richard War-
basse were sailing the Halprev in a lively breeze
in Buzzards Bay when they suddenly caught sight
of a floundering “Manchester” similar to their
own vessel. Speeding to the scene they arrived
in time to rescue Mr. William Forbes of Naushon
Island, and two ladies from the choppy waters.
The two guests rescued from the sinking Loon
by the Warbasses were Miss Annie Emerson and
Mrs. Burnett.

4 THE

COLLECTING NET SUPPLEMENT

of eee eee eee eee Ce Ce Oe een eee aeRO RD Ome

,

MALCHMAN’S Annual Clearance Sale

WITH MORE GENEROUS REDUCTIONS THAN EVER

—IF YOU’RE KEEN

FOR VALUES —

YOU’LL APPRECIATE THE QUALITY AND PRICES OF OUR MARK DOWNS
SALE ENDS SATURDAY, SEPT. 5

j
: BEGINS THURSDAY, AUGUST 20th
i
i
i

MALCHMAN'S

2S SS) DO DD 0D OSD

SUMMER CLEARANCE SALE NOW ON
WATCH, JEWELRY and OPTICAL

REPAIRING
FALMOUTH JEWELRY SHOP
MAIN ST. Phone 567-J FALMOUTH

Falmouth

SANSOUCI’S BARBER SHOP
AND BEAUTY PARLOR

Next to Post Office

FALMOUTH, MASS.

THE FORTUNATE PERSON IN WOODS
HOLE IS THE ONE WHO EATS AT

THE TWIN DOOR
THE WISE PERSON IN WOODS HOLE IS
THE ONE WHO HAS ONE OF THEIR
SPECIAL MEAL TICKETS

ROBBINS LAUNDRY, INC.

Cape Cod’s Leading

LAUNDERERS
and
CLEANSERS

LOW PRICES AND GOOD VALUES
go hand in hand
at

THE NEW BEDFORD BARGAIN STORE

Across from Fire Station

Falmouth Mass.

WHETHER IT’S
A COTTAGE
NEAR-THE-BEACH
OR
A MANSION
ON-A-HILLTOP

KATHRYN SWIFT GREENE

CAN GET IT
Phone 17

FOR YOU
FALMOUTH, MASS.

summer sale — all shoes
$2.95 - $3.95 - $4.95

poughkeepsie e
hartford J a xX
falmouth

wellesley in

queen’s buyway falmouth

THE BARCLAY

ON CAPE COD
WEST FALMOUTH

ON ROUTE 28

Luncheon on the Terrace—a popular Rendezvous
for Cocktails:

Dinner and Bupcer each evening with dancing
Music by “JOE” SMITH
formerly of the Copley Plaza with
“SULLY” KENDIS at the Piano

Sunday Dinner served from Noon until 8 P. M.

Sunday Evening Concert during Supper
Special Menus for Luncheon, Bridge and
Dinner Parties

S. S. Pierce Liquors at our bar Telephone 1281

Vol. XI, No. 7

SATURDAY, AUGUST 22, 1936

Annual Subseription, $2.00
Single Copies, 30 Cents.

THE PLYMOUTH LABORATORY
G. P. WELLS
University College, London
The laboratory of the Marine Biological Asso-
ciation of the United Kingdom, at Plymouth, is
the chief marine research station in England. It
is often regarded as the English homologue of
Woods Hole. It is, however,

THE MOUNTAIN LAKE BIOLOGICAL
STATION IN 1936

Proressor Ivey F. Lewis, Director

The buildings of the Mountain Lake Biologi-
cal Station of the University of Virginia were
formally dedicated in July, 1934 in the presence
of representatives of many of the Southern col-
leges. The Station is located

much smaller than the Woods

one mile north of

Hole laboratory, from which it
dilfers in several respects.
The original building, now
known as the main building,
was completed and opened m
1888. It consists of two three-
story blocks with a two-story
connecting piece between them.
One of the end blocks contains
a residence for the director
and some research rooms. ‘he
middle portion houses a large
research room for naturalists
above, and a public aquarium
below. At the other end there
are several small laboratories,
a workshop, some offices and
store-rooms, and living quar-
ters for the engineer-caretaker.
Since the station was first

A.B. HL. Calendar |
MONDAY, August 24, 8:00 P. M. |

| Lecture: Dr. R. Weissenberg: “The |

lymphocystic disease of fishes |
and its significance for intracel- |
lular parasitism.” |

TUESDAY, August 25, 8:00 P. M.

Seminar: Dr. E. Eleanor Caro-
thers: ‘Cellular behavior in ab-
normal growths produced by ir-
radiation of grasshopper embry-
Os.”

Dr. K. Dan, Mr. T. Yanagita and |
Mr. M. Sugiyama: “The behavior
of cell surface during cleavage.”

Dr. T. H. Bissonnette: ‘Modified
sexual photoperiodicity in fer-
rets, raccoons and quail.”

Dr. E. Martin: “Asexual reproduc-
tion in Dodecaceria fimbriatus.”’

Mr. G. P. Wells: ‘Physiology of
the stomatogastric system of
arenicola.”

Mountain
Lake in Giles County, Virgin-
ia, at an elevation of approxi-
mately 4000 feet, on the divide
between the Mississippi and
the Atlantic draimage areas. In
the vicinity is a wide variety
of biological conditions vary-
ing from peat bogs and cran-
berry swamps to the dry Al-
leghany Mountain tops, in-
cluding mountain and lowland
streams and the nearby Moun-
tain Lake, said to be the only
natural lake in the Southern
mountains and one of the
highest in the East.

The buildings are of a rustic
type of construction, but pro-
vided with electric current
and running water obtained by

opened, a number of other buildings have been
added at various times. They form a group be-
hind the main building. (Continued on page 180)

TABLE OF

The Plymouth Laboratory, G. P. Wells..
The Mountain Lake Biological Station
Studies in Calcification III: Dr. E. Alfred
Wolf and Miss Grace Riethmiiler
The Permeability of the Erythrocytes of the
Ground Hog, Dr. AG KK. Parpart:......:-.5<<-ct: 182
Physiological Adjustments to Diving in
Beaver, Dr. Laurence Irving
A Possible Endocrine Role of the Eosinophil

CONTENTS

gravity from a spring above the Station on Bear
Cliff Mountain. These buildings include the John
B. Laing Laboratory, containing four class rooms,

The Relation Between Vitamins and Growth
in Goldfish, Dr. Gertrude Evans..................0. 183

Notes from The Biological Laboratory............ 184
Scholarship Fund Benefit
Program of the August Scientific Meeting at

the Marine Biological Laboratory.................. 187
Items of Interest
New Catalogues
Invertebrate Zoology Class Notes..............00... 189

The new library building, Mountain Lake Biological Station.

Catesby Cottage, Mountain Lake Biological Station.

“aed

Aucust 22, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING, NET

179

an office, a library and four research rooms. There
are also nine residential cottages, a dining hall,
two service buildings and garages. Good moun-
tain roads connect the Station with Newport,
eight miles away on the main east and west high-
way into West Virginia and with Pembroke on
the Norfolk and Western and Virginian railways.
The post office is Mountain Lake, Virginia.

The construction of the buildings was made
possible by the gift of 82 acres of land by Mr.
John B. Laing of Lewisburg, W. Va., and by a
grant from the General Education Board. ‘The
Station is expected to serve the Southern states,
but it is open to students from other sections.

The completion of three new cottages and of a
fireproof library has added much to the comforts
and facilities hitherto offered. The library 1s of
native stone and contains work rooms in addition
to the reading room. All that is needed now is
books and reprints for the shelves.

BRIEF NOTES ABOUT INVESTIGATORS

Dr. Mary S. MacDougall of Agnes Scott Col-
lege is leaving for Woods Hole after six weeks
of research on the cytology and life history of
Chilodonella.

The Rhabdocoele group is unusually large this
year. Dr. J. W. Nuttycombe of the University of
Georgia is completing his monograph on Steno-
stomum. Dr. Margaret Hess of Judson College,
Alabama, and Dr. 1. K. Ruebush of the Univer-
sity of Virginia are continuing their investigation
of Macrostomum and Dalyellia, while F. F. Fer-
guson and R. I. Bosman, graduate students, are
doing thesis work in the same group.

Dr. H. R. Totten of the University of North
Carolina, besides giving the course in Dendrology,
has been gathering material for a new edition of
Coker and Totten’s “Trees of the Southeastern
States.’ He recently found the rare shrub,
Buckleya or mountain privet, for the first record
in Virginia.

D. k. Hostetter is working out the life history
of the junco, which nests abundantly in the vi-
cinity.

Dr. J. Gordon Carlson of the University of
Alabama is collecting material for a continuation
of his studies on the cytology of grasshoppers.

Andrew L. Ingles is continuing his studies on
Blastocladia, a green alga growing on the cara-
pace of the musk turtle. He is spending the next
week-end in Washington at the “Zoo,” where Dr.
Mann, the Director, is permitting him to study
similar material in the extensive turtle collection
there.

Dr. and Mrs. J. R. Schramm have arrived for
a five weeks stay. Dr. Schramm is conducting
the seminar on the development of our knowledge
of protista, especially those with plant affinities.

Among recent visitors were Dr. and Mrs.
Austin H. Clark of the National Museum in
Washington and Dr. and Mrs. William Mann of
the National Zoological Park. Professors A. Bb.
Massey and A. L. Matthews of the Virginia Poly-
technic Institute joined the dendrologists recently
for a foray into western Giles County.

Cave enthusiasts at the Station have returned
from an exploratory trip into Porterfield’s Cave
at the foot of the mountain. The animals of the
cave were elusive, since neither the cave sala-
mander nor bats, usually common, were seen.

Dr. Thelma Matthews of Coker College has
arrived to continue investigation of the Phycomy-
cetes and to give the course on Mycology.

Mary Linda Vardell of Flora MacDonald Col-
lege is working on the taxonomy of the Composi-
tae of the vicinity.

Samuel L. Meyer of Vanderbilt University has
completed a study of the chromosomes of ‘Trau-
tvetteria. 3

DR. IVEY F. LEWIS

This year Woods Hole had only a brief oppor-
tunity to greet Dr. Ivey F. Lewis while he was
here for a few days to attend the annual Corpor-
ation meeting of the Marine Biological Labora-
tory. From 1910 to 1927 he was here every
summer, first as an instructor and later in charge
of the botany course. Since then his summer
work has been done at various places and most
recently at the Mountain Lake Biological Station
where he is director. He is studying a species of
Oedocladium found near the Station. This is the
first American record west of the Blue Ridge.

Dr. Lewis received his doctor’s degree from the
Johns Hopkins University in 1908 and for the
past twenty years he has been connected with the
University of Virginia, at present holding the
position of dean as well as professor of biology.

Until July 1 of this year Dr. Lewis was chair-
man of the Biological Division of the National Re-
search Committee; he has also held offices in the
Botanical Society of America, the Union of Bio-
logical Societies and other leading biological so-
cieties.

Besides his academic achievements, Dr. Lewis
has also established himself in the tennis world,
having held the Woods Hole tennis champion-
ship for a long time. —U. R.

THE COLLECTING NET has been entered as second-class matter July 11, 1935, at the Post Office

at Woods Hole, Massachusetts, under the Act of March 3, 1879.

marine biological laboratories.

It is devoted to the scientific work at

It is published weekly tor ten weeks between June 1 and September 15
from Woods Hole and printed at The Darwin Press, New Bedford.
the third floor of the Woods Hole station of the United States Bureau of Fisheries.

Its editorial offices are situated on
Between June 1

and October 1 communications should be addressed to Woods Hole, Massachusetts; at other times they
should be directed to THE COLLECTING NET, Garrison, N. Y. Single copies cost 30c; a subscription

(containing not less than 280 pages) costs $2.00.

-

180

THE (COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI. No. 98

THE PLYMOUTH LABORATORY
(Continued from page 177)

Of these, the chief ones are a large block equipped
for physiological and chemical work, the Allen

builaing housing the library, and a one-room
building in which classes are held.

The laboratory stands at the top of the cliffs
overlooking Plymouth Sound. The Association
owns two collecting vessels which bring in ma-
terial daily: the Salpa, a steam drifter, and the
Gammarus, a motor boat used mainly for shore
work.

When the laboratory was first opened it had a
scientific staff consisting only of a Director, a
Naturalist, and one scientific assistant. ‘his per-
manent staff, which is engaged all the year round
in research work, has gradually increased until at
the present time it numbers twelve. The research
programme covers a wide range of problems in
marine biology. A great variety of habitats is to
be found in the district, including rocky, sandy
and muddy shores and waters which vary from
the open sea through brackish estuaries to rivers
The fauna of the district is pretty well worked out
by now, although research is continuing on such
special problems in systematics as the ‘identifica-
tion of planktonic larvae.

Investigations are also carried out, as part of
the regular research programme of the station, on
the phy sics and chemistry of the environment, on
plankton numbers and movements and the condi-
tions determining plankton growth, on the biology
of food fishes, on the phy siology and behaviour
of marine animals, on the genetics of Gammarus,
and on a variety of other problems that change
from year to year. By collaboration between spe-
cialists in various fields important contributions
are being made to our understanding of the inter-
relations and life conditions of different types of
marine organisms. At present, to take an example,
chemists and biologists are combining to study in-
tensively the conditions determining diatom
growth and abundance, by integrating the results
of plankton counts, analyses of ‘the sea water and
of the diatoms, and laboratory culture experi-
ments.

The present Director of the Laboratory, Dr. E.
J. Allen, was appointed to his position in 1895.
Lo the great regret of everybody connected with
Plymouth, he has announced his intention of re-
tirig this summer. He has been responsible,
more than any other single man, for building up
the equipment and reputation of the laboratory,
and for planning the lines along which the re-
search work has progressed, and he will long be
remembered by all who have had the pleasure of
working at Plymouth for the real warmth of his
welcome to visitors, for his stimulating interest

and helpfulness in their work, and for the hospi-
tality with which the resources of the laboratory
were placed at their disposal.

The Plymouth laboratory has always been an
excellent centre for visiting scientists interested in
marine problems, either from other parts of Eng-
land or from abroad. By Woods Hole standards
their number is, however, never great. In the
summer there will perhaps be twenty to thirty
visitors and at other times there are fewer, al-
though there are usually several visiting workers
at all seasons of the year. The laboratory equip-
ment is good for most kinds of work, the collect-
ing boats are well up to their job, and the small
size and friendly atmosphere of the station make
it a very pleasant place to work in. One soon
gets to know everybody—the English afternoon
tea, which most people consume daily in the la-
boratory, being the chief mixing factor—and one
has direct access to the supplies of chemicals and
apparatus.

For those who do not work twenty-four hours
a day there is swimming at the foot of the cliffs
on which the laboratory ‘stands, hiking over Dart-
moor a few miles away, and splendid walking
along the cliffs in both directions from Plymouth,
Indeed, the whole of Devon and Cornwall, includ-
ing some of the lov eliest country in England, lies
almost at one’s feet. Every week in summer the
laboratory cricket team takes on, and is defeated
by, the team of one or another of the neighboring
towns and villages.

The classes are also small by Woods Hole
standards. In the Easter vacation there are two
consecutive classes in marine biology, each taken
by about twenty undergraduate students from dif-
ferent universities. The two classes cover the
same ground; they last for about a fortnight and
consist mainly of collecting and identifying bio-
logical material from different habitats. In addi-
tion, there is nowadays an “‘overflow” class, of the
same type, in the late summer. A few years ago,
a summer class in Comparative Physiology was
given annually by C. F. A. Pantin. This has
however now been dropped, as most of the Eng-

lish universities are themselves offering courses of |

similar scope.

Another important aspect of the activities of the
station is the supply of specimens of marine ani-
mals and plants to biologists in England and
abroad, both for research and for teaching pur-
poses. Expeditions and individual naturalists are
also capped with nets, dredges and other appara-
tus constructed and tested under the supervision
of the staff.

Aueust 22, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 181

The chief contrast between Plymouth and
Woods Hole lies, I think, not so much in the
smaller size of Plymouth as in the fact that it is
less of a social centre for biologists than Woods
Hole. There is usually a pretty large and assort-
ed group of visitors at Plymouth in the summer,
but all of them are working on marine material.
One does not get the phenomenon, observed here,
of workers on fresh-water and land forms, such
for instance as Drosophila, moving their material
down to a marine laboratory and there pursuing
their researches. It should be remembered that
Great Britain is a much smaller country than the
U.S. A., and that there are numerous societies—
the Royal, the Zoological, the Physiological, the
Biochemical, the Society for Experimental Biolo-
gy, the British Association, to mention but a few
—that meet in most cases at frequent intervals, in

various centres of research. Our distances are

relatively short and these meetings are easily ac-
cessible ; moreover, the numbers of workers in any
field is less in Great Britain than in the U.S. A.
For these reasons the opportunities for scientific
and social intercourse with one’s colleagues are
greater there than here, and one soon knows and
is known by everybody in one’s field. The need
for a summer meeting place for biologists is there-
fore not so urgent in Great Britain as it is here.
Those who wish for further information will
find a general account of the Plymouth laboratory
in the Journal of the Marine Biological Associa-
tion of the United Kingdom, Volume 15, 1928,
page 735. Since that account was written, vari-
ous enlargements and improvements have been
made, notably to the library and the physiology
laboratory. The Reports of Council, which ap-
pear annually and are bound up with the Journal,
will serve to bring this information up to date.

STUDIES IN CALCIFICATION III: THE SHELL OF HEN’S EGG
Dr. E. ALrrep Wotr Anp Miss Grace RIETHMILLER
Associate Professor of Biology and graduate student, University of Pittsburg, respectively

Last year, at the Marine Biological Laboratory,
Dr. McBride and Dr. Wolf reported on our
Studies of early stages of calcification of bone and
teeth in rat embryos. These studies were based
on the application of Gomori’s modification of the
silver nitrate method to calcified tissues. In this
method calcium is* replaced by black metallic
silver; thin sections can be made and _ striking
microscopical pictures result.

The ash of bone and teeth is composed mainly
of calcium phosphate (85%) and of about 6%
‘calcium carbonate. It is claimed by Gomori that
both phosphates and carbonates react to silver
‘mitrate. On this assumption we came to definite
conclusions as to the process of calcification of
‘bone, dentin and enamel formation in teeth. In
order to test out the method on calcified structures
\that are predominantly carbonates, we selected
[the shell of hen’s eggs in which 89-97% is cal-
cium carbonate and only 0.5-5% calcium phos-
phate.

The eggshell shows three layers: a thin, hard,
structureless outer membrane, the main calcareous
body and an inner fibrous layer, into which dip
the calcified nipples of the main body. Various
investigators have stated that the major part of
calcium phosphate is deposited at the beginning
of the shell formation; it should therefore be
found nearest to the fibrous layer. When the

shells were taken out of the reagents they were
dark on both surfaces showing where the silver
nitrate had reacted, but the main body of the shell
was untouched : it was still white and hard. Sub-
sequent decalcification caused the now blackened
fibrous membrane to slip off the main shell-body.
Cross sections through the main part of the shell
showed no traces of silver, except for a brown
color of the surface membrane. The fibrous
membrane under low power magnification had the
appearance of a leopard skin: a large number of
black spots were more or less evenly scattered
over the area of the membrane, the fibers of which
were light brown in color. Under igh magnifica-
tion (oil) it could be seen that the spots were due
to a precipitation of silver within the fibers them-
selves. This is taken as an indication of the
location of the calcium phosphate deposits in the
eggshell.

The failure of the calcium carbonate to react in
the case of the eggshell would then suggest that
our description of the process of calcium deposi-
tion in bone and teeth of rat embryos as it was
given last year, was incomplete since it did not
include the carbonate portion (6%) of the calci-
fying structures.

(This article is based upon a seminar report pre-
sented at the Marine Biological Laboratory on
August 11).

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI. No. 98

THE PERMEABILITY OF THE ERYTHROCYTES OF THE GROUND HOG

Dr.

A. K.

PARPART*

Assistant Professor of Physiology, Princeton University

The red cells of the ground hog have been
found to be very much more permeable to a varie-
ty of dissolved ‘substances than those of any other
species thus far examined. The penetration of
non-electrolytes from isosmotic solutions was
studied by the hemolysis method using photoelec-
tric recording. A few typical results are given
below together with a comparison with other
species.

Erythritol, in isosmotic solution, penetrates so
rapidly that 75% hemolysis requires but six sec-
onds. The erythrocytes of the mouse are the only
other cells known to allow a rapid penetration of
erythritol, and even in this species over five min-
utes is required to produce the same degree of
hemolysis.

When one examines the penetration of mannitol
or sorbitol into ground hog red cells, one finds
that these penetrate to the extent observed above
in about one minute, while with mouse cells about
sixty minutes is required, and no penetration into
the highly permeable red cells of man has been ob-
served.

The pentoses, arabinose and xylose, penetrate
ground hog cells at such a rapid rate as to pro-
duce 75% hemolysis in three minutes, whereas
with the cells of Be fifty minutes is required and
with mouse red cells about six hours.

Glucose, though it penetrates slowly, does
cause 75% hemoly sis in six hours. Man’s red
cells most nearly approach this, but here over six-
teen hours are required. The apes are the only
other species of mammals which are known to

* Dr. Parpart was a holder of a COLLECTING NET
Scholarship during the summer of 1929.

PHYSIOLOGICAL ADJUSTMENTS TO DIVING IN BEAVER

Dr. LAURENCE IRVING

have red cells that are at all permeable to glucose.

Discussion

Hober: These are very interesting ob-
servations. Only man and ape blood cells have
also this permeability to glucose. It seems re-
markable to me that in the case of the ground
hog permeability runs parallel the molecular vol-
ume, whereas in red cells of man and ape the
molecular volume rule does not fit at all, since
mannitol and other hexites do not enter. The ob-
servations on species specific permeability are
highly stimulating to find out, inasmuch permea-
bility depends on specific chemical and enzymic
properties.

Question: Is there any relation between the
systematic position of animals and the permeabil-
ity of their cells?

Dr. Parpart: It is similar in many respects in
the rat and mouse, but man falls into the same
category, so that this breaks down.

Dr, Hober: In mice the mannitol enters easi-
ly, but glucose not at all—and in others, for in-
stance man and ape, the contrary is true. It is
very difficult to explain from any of our present
views on permeability.

Question: I would be interested in knowing
whether other hibernating animals have been
studied ?

Dr. Parpart: The groundhogs I studied were
not hibernating. No, no other hibernating ani-
mals were studied, but I doubt if there is any
correlation.

(This article is based upon a seminar report pre-
sented at the Marine Biological
July 14).

Professor of Experimental Biology, University of Toronto

When a beaver ceases breathing its heart is like-
wise inhibited. The same response occurs in
other diving animals and has been regarded as a
means of conservation of the available oxygen.
To make the conservation effective adjustments
of the peripheral circulation are necessary and evi-
dence for the activity of vasomotor control is pre-
sented in rhythmical changes of blood flow
through the muscles of the hind leg. The physio-
logical elements which are concerned in respira-
tion appeared during periodic respiration when
the cessation of respiration was followed by a
slowing of the heart and fall in blood pressure.
These changes were synchronous but the synchro-

ny was probably abnormal.

Laboratory on |
-

:
:
'
Gentle inflation of the lungs caused a prolonged :

arrest of breathing movements.

With this inhi- —

bition of respiration there was associated a fifty —
per cent. decrease in blood pressure and a great —

reduction in blood flow through the muscles of
the leg. The association of this striking depres-
sor effect with the familiar Hering-Breuer reflex
indicates that the stimulus of inflation of the lungs
is dominant in controlling the various respiratory
adjustments which are essential in diving.

(This paper is based upon a seminar report pre-~

sented at the Marine Biological

Laboratory on
July 28).

Aucust 22, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

A POSSIBLE ENDOCRINE ROLE OF THE EOSINOPHIL LEUCOCYTES
IN THE FEMALE RAT

Dr. C. P. Kraarz
Assistant in Zoology, University of Cincinnati

Goat anti-rat thymus serum when injected into
adult female rats induced endocrine changes cor-
responding to an increased action of pituitary
luteinizing hormone on the ovaries. Pseudopreg-
nancy resulted. Daily injections of 4% cc. of anti-
thymus serum were effective, while single doses
of 14% to 3 cc. at the prooestrous stage of the
sexual cycle also evoked this result. Larger doses
of control goat serum failed. The invariable ac-
companiment of pseudopregnancy induced by in-
jections of this serum, primarily hematotoxic in
action, was eosinophilia, which was persistent even
following single injections.

To determine whether a further correlation ex-
isted between luteinizing hormone activity and
eosinophil leucocyte concentration in the blood, a
series of white cell and differential counts were
made on female rats in various stages of sexual
activity. The differential determinations of eosino-
phil percentage were based on counts of 500-1000
stained leucocytes made in a longitudinal direc-
tion in the center of the smear to eliminate errors
due to inevitable uneven distribution.

The averages for female rats with three differ-
ent degrees of ovarian activity were:

Eosinophil leucocytes
per c. mm. of blood

Inactive (immature ) 59

Active (normal ‘cycles ) 325

Hyperactive (cystic ovaries) 666

The adult females showed significant fluctuations

within the normal cycles. In pseudopregnancy
induced either by sterile copulation at the pro-
oestrous stage or by serum injection at the same
stage, the eosinophil concentration was increased
over the normal cycle. In all cases, the probable
concentration of pituitary luteinizing hormone in
the blood was paralleled approximately by the
concentration of eosinophil leucocytes.

White blood cell suspensions of varying eosino-
phil content were compared in their ability to
“augment” the action of follicular stimulating
pituitary hormone on the immature ovary, a
measure of luteinizing hormone. Eleven rats re-
ceived an average of 2,154,000 eosinophil leuco-
cytes each and demonstrated an average increase
in ovarian weight of 148.2% over the ovaries of
littermates receiving hormone alone. Nine rats
received an average of 513,000 eosinophils per
animal, the augmentation here being 39.6%. Thus
an increase of 319% in the number of injected
eosinophils induced a 274% greater ovarian re-
sponse. Apparently the luteinizing hormone in
the leucocyte suspensions was proportional to the
eosinophils present and therefore contained in
them.

The eosinophil leucocytes in the female rat con-
ceivably function in the control and transport of
the luteinizing hormone of the anterior pituitary
gland.

(This article is based upon a seminar report pre-
sented at the Marine Biological Laboratory on July
28).

THE RELATION BETWEEN VITAMINS AND THE GROWTH AND SURVIVAL
OF GOLDFISHES IN HOMOTYPICALLY CONDITIONED WATER

Dr. GERTRUDE EvANs
Research Assistant in Zoology, University of Chicago

To test whether the growth promoting effect
of homotypically conditioned water (water in
which other fishes of the same species have lived )
was due to vitamins excreted by the conditioning
fishes, small isolated goldfishes were fed on vita-
min-rich and vitamin-free diets in conditioned and
non-conditioned water. The synthetic diet used
consisted of casein, starch and salts, with haliver
oil, yeast and lemon juice added for the vitamin-
rich diet which was also fed to the conditioning
fishes. On both vitamin-rich and vitamin-free
synthetic diets the fishes grew significantly better
and survived longer in conditioned than in non-
conditioned water. The two series in conditioned
water grew equally well; the two series in non-

conditioned water showed equal failure in growth.
Better survival of the fishes on the vitamin-rich
than on the vitamin-free diet was indicated in both
types of water. An assay of fish-conditioned
water fed to white rats on vitamin deficient diets
showed that vitamins A, B, D and G, if present,
were present in very low concentrations. Goldfish
apparently can grow for a limited time without
vitamins, although growth ceased even in condi-
tioned water after 60 days. Vitamins are not the
essential factor in the growth stimulating power
of conditioned water.

(This article is based upon a seminar report given
at the Marine Biological Laboratory on July 28.)

THE ICOLEE CNG INEM

[ Vou. XI. No. 98

NY State Fish Hatcheries - Carnegie Institution

> Blackford Hall dormitory

Laboratory buildings - Main Building - Residences

at Cold

FROM THE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY
AT COLD SPRING HARBOR
(Received August 6, 1936)

The courses in Plant Sociology, and Marine
and Fresh Water Zoology, began on August 3rd.
Dr. and Mrs. Hl. T. Spieth, Dr. and Mrs. H. J.
Van Cleave and Dr. William A. Castle will be
here for the duration of the courses.

Dr. Max Poser, of the Bausch and Lomb Op-
tical Company, lectured on the evening of August
4th, on “Scientific Microscopy,” the use of Abbe
test plates being the basis of his talk.

Dr. and Mrs. Harry Goldblatt, Dr. and Mrs.
TV. L. Jahn, and Dr. and Mrs. William Cone are
at the Laboratory for a few weeks.

Dr. Florence Seibert is here for a short time to
work with Dr. Harold A, Abramson.

NOTES FROM THE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY
AT COLD SPRING HARBOR
(Received August 13)

Drs. A. M. Waterman, K. F. Aldrich, and J.
A. Miller, of the Department of Agriculture, are
staying at the Laboratory for a few days while
carrying on some investigations in the vicinity.

Dr. Hugo Fricke is expected back at the Lab-
oratory in the near future. He has been abroad
for several weeks.

Dr. Laurence Moyer has left the Laboratory ;
he will be married shortly.

Mrs. Samuel Morris, Samuel, Jr., and Mar-
garet, has jomed Dr. Morris at the Laboratory
for the remainder of the summer.

Mr. and Mrs. Edward Parrish and their daugh-
ter, Dorothy, are visiting Dr. and Mrs. J. R. Katz
for a few weeks.

Dr. Eric Ponder was at Woods Hole for the
iological Scholarship Association meeting. Dr.
David R. Climenko was also at Woods Hole for
a few days.

Abstracts of Some Symposium Papers

Pacemaker
Nervous

HoaGLtaAnpb: . “Some
Activity in the

Dr. Hupson
Aspects of Rhythmic
System.”

Spring

»

EN ae : , 2 =

: BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY

lnlicielsyeiia =

Since, in general, physiological rhythms are of
the nature of relaxation oscillations, it was as-
sumed that the frequency of such rhythms should
be directly proportional to the speed at which cri-
tical discharge potentials of the oscillators are
built up. Experimental results justifying this as-
sumption were presented. The Arrhenius equa-
tion relating chemical velocities to temperature
was discussed along with its application to a va-
riety of biological data.» Critical thermal incre-
ments (j values) for physiological processes were
found to group themselves in certain characteristic
modes both for direct chemical determinations of
cell respiration and for frequencies of physiologi-
cal rhythms. These » values were found to re-
quire interpretations in terms of comparatively
simple chemical steps which may be regarded as
the slowest, or pacemaker, steps in catenary chains
of essentialiy irreversible chemical systems in-
volved in maintaining steady state kinetics in pro-
toplasmic systems. This conception of a pace-
maker has not only proved of value in linking to-
gether certain biological rhythms with chemical
dynamics but, more generally, the temperature
method of analysis was shown to be of empirical
(taxonomic) value as a way of separating and
describing diverse physiological processes. Ex-
amples were given showing that, in addition, this
type of pacemaker concept is pertinent to psycho-
logical and clinical data.

Dr. Hersert H. JAsper: “Cortical Excitatory
State and Synchronism in the Control of Bio-
electric Autonomous Rhythms.”

Bioelectric potentials from the cerebral cortex
in man as recorded from the surface of the head
and in cats from the surface of the dura, have been
studied under various conditions of specific and
generalized excitation of the organism. ‘The
chronic cat preparation, when free from anaes-
thesia, restraint, and discomfort, gives autonom-
ous rhythms and reactions to stimulation from
various cortical regions similar in almost every
respect to those observed in man from the surface
of the head. The latencies, magnitude, and dura-
tion of the reactions of a given cortical area to ex-

AuGust 22, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

citation through external sense fields are a func-
tion of the intensity and duration of the stimulus.
The cortical excitatory state is conceived of as a
level of polarization of the tissue, which seems to
be a major factor in the control of the frequency,
regularity, and amplitude of bioelectric autonom-
ous rhythms from cortical ganglion cells. No new
mechanisms of reaction peculiar to ganglion cells
are necessary in order to explain most of the elec-
trical phenomena observed, since the same type of
activity (rhythmicity, increased frequency with
catelectrotonus, “‘on effect,” anode depression,
cathode blocking of rhythmic discharge, etc.) can
be demonstrated in the non-medullated excised
peripheral axon. The additional mechanisms of
the control of cortical rhythms by periodic exter-
hal stimulation, together with the complications of
synchronism and alternation in the production of
potentials led off from a complex group of gang-
lion cells, are also considered as fundamental
mechanisms in determining the observed brain po-
tential rhythms.

BIRD NOTES. III

Song birds are well represented here, with
some variations from inland. We miss the indigo
buntings and scarlet tanagers, while we are pleas-
antly surprised to find quail and hermit thrushes.
Pine warblers nest in the pitch pines.

The shore birds arrive rather late in the sum-
mer. Already noted were two solitary sandpipers
(Mashpee) and six turnstones (Nobska). Few
species nest here except the spotted sandpiper
and more rarely, the piping plover. At many of
the islands it is a wonderful sight in the fall to
see the large flocks, some of small sandpipers,
others of larger ones, and still others of plover.

The marshes have yielded a good crop of black
ducks this year.

F. N. WHitmMan

COLORED MOVIES OF CAPE COD SHOWN

On Thursday evening members of the Woods
Hole colony turned out in generous numbers to
see the Rev. W. J. Miller’s “Cape Cod in Color,”
and as a result THe CottectrnG Net was able to
realize a net profit of $125.00 to be used in ad-
ministering The Biological Scholarship Associa-
tion.

Acting as patrons and patronesses of the occa-
sion were Mrs. B. H. Alton, Mrs. LeRoy Clark,
Mrs. Murray Crane, Mr. J. G. Hutchinson, Mrs.
J. R. Jewett, Dr. and Mrs. Alfred Meyer, Mrs,
Seward Prosser, Mrs. Charles Stockard and Mrs.
Annie Whittemore.

During the intermission Dr. C. P. Kraatz put
up for auction three decorative marine panels in
tempora painted by Norris Jones and, though
protesting his amateur status in this role, succeed-
ed in keeping his audience delighted and amused
in the process of finding purchasers for them.

Mr. Miller’s moving pictures dealt with an in-
teresting theme. With but a few exceptions, the
shots were clear; and in several instances the
composition almost startling in its simplicity and
beauty. The unnatural depth of color, caused by
focusing the pictures for a screen smaller than is
ordinarily used, was not too vivid for enjoyment.
On the other hand, the lecturer’s running com-
ment left room for much improvement, in the
opinion of this department. It seems too bad that
such beautiful visual pictures should not be more
fittingly accompanied by a richer, more imagina-
tive and more colorful story, especially when there
are undoubtedly plenty of people within easy
reach of Mr. Miller well equipped to collaborate
with him. His moving picture is an artistic ac-
complishment. The comments, however, could be
freshened and enriched by suggestions from some-
one enthusiastically and imaginatively filled with
the lore of this countryside. die Se

OBSERVATIONS ON LENS REGENERATION IN AMBLYSTOMA

Dr. W. W. BaLrtarp
Assistant Professor of Biology, Dartmouth College

In the literature Amblystoma mexicanum is said
to be capable of Wolffian lens regeneration at all
stages in its life history. It is found that Ambly-
stoma punctatum loses this ability in late
embryonic stages. At stages 38-39, lenses are
regenerated very rapidly (4 days) in 100% of the
cases. At stage 43, six days later, practically no
lens regeneration is obtained. Similar results
were gotten from embryos of A. tigrinum and A.
muicrostomunt. During larval stag& of 4. punc-
tatum, A. tigrinum, A. microstomum, A. Jeffer-
sonianum, and A. opacum, no lens regeneration
was obtained over periods up to four months after
extirpation. Surprisingly, lens regeneration was
found in adult metamorphosed J. tigrinum two

months after extirpation.

Using uniform material, a greater per cent. of
A. punctatum embryos regenerated lenses in light
than in darkness, at 5°C. than at room tempera-
ture, in 6/8 Ringer’s solution than in 1/8 Ringer's.

Parabiotic twins were formed in Amblystoma
punctatum at stages 38-41 in which one lens lay
in the pupil between two eyeballs whose irises
were superimposed. Of these two eyeballs, the
one which had previously been deprived of its
lens regenerated a new one, in spite of the pres-
ence partly within it of the lens of the other eye.

(This paper is based upon a seminar report pre-

sented at the Marine Biological Laboratory on
July 21).

shee oe THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI. No. 98

The Collecting Net

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
at marine biological laboratories

Editorial: Ware Cattell, Elizabeth Thornton, Ur-
sula Reinhardt and Annaleida Snyder Cattell.

Business: Arthur C. Stirling, Amy Gamble, Boris
Gorokhoff and Marjorie Higgins.

Entered as second-class matter July 11, 1935, at
the U. S. Post Office at Woods Hole, Massachusetts,
under the Act of March 38, 1879.

The date of this issue of Tie CoLLectinG Net
has been altered to correspond more closely with
its date of publication. his number is the seventh
of the season and chronologically should have been
dated August 15. \We have done this because of
the lateness in publishing this issue, because we
wish to include some report of the general scien-
tific meetings to be hetd Thursday and Friday
and because we wish in a later issue to mclude an
account of the meetings of the Genetics Society of
American on September 4 and 5.

Introducing

GrorGE P. WELLS, lecturer in invertebrate physi-
ology at University College, London.

Mr. Wells was born in England and attended
the University of Cambridge from which he re-
ceived his degree. In collaboration with his fa-
mous father, H. G. Wells, and with Julian Hux-
ley, Mr. Wells has written, “The Science of Life,”
a well-known publication both in England and the
United States. He is a member of the Advisory
Council of the Plymouth Laboratory.

Primarily a scientist, however, he has worked
on the action of ions in inverterbrate muscle and
water relations of snails and slugs. At Woods
Hole he is continuing his work on the nerve phys-
iology of aranicola which he started abroad. He
will return to his post at University College in the
fall.

Dr. WittiAm WALTER Cort, head of the de-
partment of helminthology at the School of Hy-
giene and Public Health of the Johns Hopkins
University and editor of the Journal of Parasitol-
ogy, is continuing his researches on life cycles of
digenetic trematodes at the Michigan Biological
Station, Douglas Lake, Cheboygan, Michigan.

Professor J. Kenneth Donahue, head of the de-
partment of biology at the Collere of Charleston
is spending the summer at the Bermuda Biological
Station where he is endeavoring to determine the
presence of estrone in the ovaries of various
echinoderms. The extraction work will be carried
out at the College of Charleston in the fall with
the assistance of Dr. Earl Jennings of the depart-
ment of chemistry.

In the last issue of Stain Technology, Dr. C. E.
McClung briefly outlines a new microscopical
technique in which the reagent dioxan is used to
the exclusion of alcohol and xylol for dehydration,
clearing, and as a solvent for sandrac to form a
hew mounting medium. Formulae are also given
for the use of dioxan in fixing fluids, so that this
reagent may be utilized at every stage in the
technique of making microscopical slides.

Kk. Richard Johnson, who was a student at
Woods Hole in the summer of 1934, is spending
this summer in central and northern Europe. He
will visit, among other places, such botanical cen-
ters as Brtinn, Upsala, and Scalof.

M. B. L. CALENDAR FOR WEEK OF AUGUST 16

Tuesday, August 18, 8:00 P. M.

Seminar: Dr. H. P. Smith and Dr. E. D. Warner:
“Quantitative studies on blood clotting.”

Dr. Alan C. Burton: “The basis of the principle of
of the master reaction in biology.”

Dr. C. S. French: ‘Efficiency of photosynthesis in
purple bacteria.”

Dr. Alexander Hollaender: ‘‘Some effects of ultra-
violet radiation on bacteria.”

Wednesday, August 19, 8:00 P. M.
Lecture: Dr. J. R. Katz: ‘‘Submicroscopical struc-
ture of living organs (muscle, etc.) revealed by
X-rays.”

Friday, August 21, 8:00 P. M.

Lecture: Mr. John Z. Young: “Giant nerve fibres
in the squid.”

FORTHCOMING ARTICLES IN “THE BIOLOGI-
CAL BULLETIN” (October)

Parker, G. H., The Reactivation by Cutting of Sev-
ered Melanophore Nerves in the Dogfish, Mus-
telus.

Abramowitz, A. A., Physiology of the Melanophore
System in the Catfish, Ameiurus.

Zobell, C. E., Observations on the Multiplication of
Bacteria in Different Volumes of Stored Sea
Water and the Influence of Oxygen Tension and
Solid Surfaces.

Coe, W. R., Environment and Sex in the Oviparous
Oyster, Ostrea virginica.

Koonz, C. H., Some Unusual Cytological Phenomena
in the Spermatogenesis of a Haploid Partheno-
genetic Hymenopteran, Aenoplex smithii (Pack-
ard).

Cowles, R. P., and C. E. Brambel, A Study of the
Environmental Conditions in a Bog.

Trager, W., The Utilization of Solutes by Mosquito
Larvae. =

Heilbrunn, L. V., Protein Lipid Binding in Proto-
plasm.

Grafflin, A. L., Renal Function in Marine Teleosts.
IV. The Excretion of Inorganic Phosphate in the
Sculpin.

Mazia, D. and Jean M. Clark, Free Calcium in the
Action of Stimulating Agents on Elodea Cells.
Smith, G. M., and C. W. Coates, Cutaneous Melano-

sis in Lungfishes (Lepidosirenidae).

Program and Abstracts of Scientific Papers*, Pre-
sented at the Marine Biological Laboratory.

EY

200 to 1000 word summaries of most of these
papers can be found in the issues of THE COL-
LECTING NET for the present summer.

Aucust 22, 1936 |

THE RCOLCECTING NET

GENERAL SCIENTIFIC MEETING—PRELIMINARY PROGRAM

THURSDAY, AUGUST 27, 9:00 A. M.

F. R. Hunter and E. N. Harvey: “The effect
of lack of oxygen on the permeability of the egg
of Arbacia punctulata.”

B. Lucké, R. Ricca and H. K. Hartline: “Com-
parative permeability to water and certain sol-
utes of the egg cells of three marine inverte-
brates, (Arbacia, Cumingia and Chaetopterus ).”

S. dA. Corson: “Permeability of Ameba proteus
to ions.”

FB, J. M. Sichel and A. C. Burton: “A kinetic
method of studying surface forces in the egg of
Arbacia.”

R. Chambers: “Experimental studies on the oil
wetting property of the plasma membrane.”
M. J. Kopac: “Interfacial films between oil and

cytoplasm.”

P. S. Henshaw: “The question of recovery from
x-ray effects in Arbacia sperm.”

Anna K. Keltch, G. H. A. Clowes and M. E.
Krahl: ‘The respiratory effects of certain or-
ganic compounds in relation to their molecular
structure.”

M. E. Krahl, G. H. A. Clowes and J. F. Taylor:
“Action of metabolic stimulants and depres-
sants on cell division at varying carbon dioxide
tensions.”

\W. C. Allee and Gertrude Evans: “Further
studies on the effect of numbers present on the
rate of cleavage in Arbacia.”

A. K. Parpart and M. H. Jacobs: ‘Paradoxical
osmotic volume changes in erythrocytes.”

M. H. Jacobs, H: N. Glassman and A. K. Par-
part: “Further studies on specific physiologi-
cal properties of erythrocytes.”

THURSDAY, AUGUST 27, 2:00 P. M.

Demonstrations—to be announced later.

FRIDAY, AUGUST 28, 9:00 A. M.

C. C. Speidel: “Experiments on the contractile
substance of muscle fibers.”

Elsa M. Keil and F. J. M. Sichel: “The injection
of aqueous solutions, including acetylcholine,
into the isolated muscle fibre.”

E, Bosler: “Double refraction of smooth muscle.”

EO. Schmit, Kk. S. Beor andy JZ. Young:
“Some physical and chemical properties of the
axis cylinder of the giant axons of the squid,
Loligo pealu.”

G. Schoepfle and J. Z. Young: “Structure of the
eye of Pecten.”

H. K. Hartline: “The discharge of impulses in
the optic nerve fibres of the eye of Pecten ir-
radians.”

K. C. Fisher and J. A. Cameron: “The effect of
light on the CO-poisoned embryonic Fundulus
heart.”

Rk. Rugh: “Preliminary evidence as to a source
of the growth and the sex stimulating hormones
in the bullfrog.”

J. A. Cameron and K. O. Mills: “Behavior of
frog tadpole epidermal cells during seven suc-
cessive 24 hour regeneration periods.”

E. R. Clark and Eleanor L. Clark: “Observa-
tions on conditions affecting growth of cells and
tissues, from microscopic studies on the living
animals.”

Laura N. Hunter: “Some nuclear phenomena in
the Trichodina from Thyone briareus.”

S. Horstadius: “Investigations on determination
in the early development of Cerebratulus.”

P. B. Armstrong: “Mechanism of hatching in
Fundulus heteroclitus.”

B. H. Grave and J. Smith: “Hermaphroditism
and sexual inversion in Mollusca.”

Cape Cod is being swept this summer by the
biggest vacation boom since 1929, according to
reports from Hyannis. Business has taken a great
upturn and for rent signs are few and far be-
tween.

With the close of the first term Dr. and Mrs.
L. L. Woodruff have returned to their home in
New Haven en route to Woods Hole. Dr. Wood-
ruff was in charge of the class of twelve graduate
students in protozoology.

Dr. Franz Schrader, professor of zoology at
Columbia University, will be in Europe during
the approaching academic year on his sabbatical
leave of absence. Mrs. Schrader, who is teaching
in the biology department of Sarah Lawrence
College, will accompany him.

Dr. Morton Rubin will be at Clark University

as research associate in physiology during the
coming academic year.

Summer field courses at the University of
Colorado include limnology, ornithology, animal
ecology, and field botany. Part of the work is
carried on from the campus at Boulder, but most
of it is at the mountain laboratory 20 miles up the
hill, at an altitude of 9500 feet. Dr. Gordon
Alexander of the staff is working upon geographi-
cal and altitudinal distribution of grasshoppers
throughout the state; Dr. Francis Ramaley is en-
gaged in plant ecology studies in the San Luis
Valley and in the eastern Colorado sand _ hills;
Dr. Paul Shope is gathering fleshy fungi at vari-
ous points in the mountains.

Robert F. Pilts, an instructor in physiology at
New York University Medical College, is spend-
ing the rest of the summer at Tortugas.

_THE COLLECTING NET

ITEMS OF INTEREST

The department of zoology, University of Penn-
sylvania, has made several additions to its staff.
Dr. Phineas W. Whiting, formerly professor of
genetics at the University of Pittsburgh, has been
appointed associate professor. His wife, Dr. An-
na Rachel Whiting, has resigned as head of the
biology department, Pennsylvania College for
Women. Dr. Alice M. Russell of the IlIman
School and Mr. Daniel Havris will be instructors
for the coming year. Professor B. R. Nebel, plant
cytologist, will be working at the laboratory on a
Guggenheim fellowship.

Dr. Froyp J. Brrntey, assistant professor of
zoology at the University of North Dakota, has
recently been promoted to associate professor.
This summer Dr. Brinley has been working on
the transplantation of embryonic eyes of Fundu-
lus to the pericardial sacs of other Fundulus em-
bryos.

Dr. N. Boropin, for some time curator of fishes
at the Harvard Museum and a former investiga-
tor at the Marine Biological Laboratory, is now
associated with the Marine Biological Station of
the University of Southern California, where he
will continue his studies of the effect of anabiosis
on certain fishes of the Pacific waters. He hopes
also to finish several papers covering the work
done while in the East.

Proresssor Ipa L, REvELEy retired as head of
the biology department at Wells College (Aurora,
New York) in June and Dr. Eleanor C. McMul-
len has been promoted to the professorship.

Joun Futter, who has been working at the
Oceanographic Institution at Woods Hole this
summer, has been appointed instructor in anatomy
at Clark University. Mr. Fuller was instructor
in biology at Sarah Lawrence College during the
past academic year.

Dr. Morton Rusrn will be at Clark Univer-
sity as a research associate in physiology during
the coming academic year.

Dr. Edward DeSamater is assisting in a labora-
tory in New Jersey this summer. He is to be an
assistant at the College of Physicians and Sur-
geons in New York this winter. His wife, Dr.
Arlene Johnson DeSamater is spending the sum-
mer with him. In the winter she will assist Dr.
Chew at J. H. U.

Mrs. Lester G. Barth has been appointed tech-
nician to Dr. Barth who is assistant professor of
zoology at Columbia University.

Dr. Percy L. Johnson is teaching zoology at
Missouri Valley College, Marshall, Missouri, and
is spending the summer at Surry, Maine.

Dr. Rosert W. HEGNER, professor of proto-
zoology at the Johns Hopkins University, 1s va-
cationing in Spain.

Dr. W. Gardner Lynn, an instructor at Johns
Hopkins University, is at the university in Jama-
ica this summer on a grant-in-aid from the Na-
tional Research Council. He hopes to be in
Woods Hole late in August.

Mr. Archibald N. Solberg, who has been
working at the Marine Biological Laboratory for
several summers, has been awarded a university
fellowship. Mr. Solberg is assistant professor at
Columbia University.

T. T. Chen is Johnston Scholar at Johns Hop-
kins University. He will spend the summer and
next winter there.

Proressor Ersert C. Cote of Williams Col-
lege and a party of three students are spending
the summer in field study in Arizona. Limited
collections are being made with emphasis upon
the reptiles and amphibians of the region. How-
ever, the most important specimen found so far is
an Arizona weasel, J/ustela arizoniensis, a com-
paratively rare form. The party’s base camp is
at Flagstaff, Arizona, near where they are plan-
ning to stay until about September 1.

Prorressor A. M. Reese of the University of
West Virginia, who has been an investigator at
the Marine Biological Laboratory in other years,
reports that there has been a complete reorganiza-
tion in the departments of zoology and botany at
his Institution. Besides doing work on his special
study on the development of the notochord in the
alligator, Professor Reese is acting as chairman
of the West Virginia Biological Survey.

Dr. FRANZ SCHRAEDER of the department of
zoology at Columbia University will spend his
six-month sabbatical leave starting in February on
a trip to Mexico and Central America. His wife,
Dr. Sally Hughes Schraeder, member of the zool-
ogy department of Sarah Lawrence College, has
also obtained leave and will accompany him. They
plan to do field work and collect coccidae.

Professor Mark T. Crowley, Ph. D., of the
biology department of Fordham University, will
lead a group to collect small mammals, especially
bats, in the Gaspe peninsula. The party will spend

a whole month in this activity, beginning August
1.

According to Dr. Epwarp P. CHURCHILL, pro-
fessor of zoology, research at the University of
South Dakota during the past year, was mainly
concerned with the histology of the digestive sys-
tem of western fox squirrel, the histology of the
common toad and hermaphroditic specimens, gross
anatomy of the digestive system of a dozen of the
common minnows of South Dakota and of the
trout perch.

LE COLEE GING Nira

189

' Aucusr 22, 1936 ]
NEW CATALOGUES

Nore: As an added service to our readers we
are inaugurating in this issue the listing of new
catalogue of apparatus makers and dealers and the
announcement of publications pertinent to the bio-
logical sciences.

APPARATUS AND SUPPLIES

Eimer and Amend: Bulletin No. 553— Gramercy
One Drop Receptacle, for determination of pH
value of one drop of liquid, used with Beckman
Glass Electrode pH apparatus. June, 1936.

Clay-Adams Company, Ince.: Catalog No. 67 —
“Dustite Steel Display Cabinets” describes cabi-
nets for models, skeletons and other teaching ma-
terial. Catalog No. 66—‘Moulages’” concerns
models of pathological conditions, March, 19386.

Spencer Lens Company: M 76— Medical micro-
Scopes and accessories, June 1936. D 14—Film-
slide projectors only, May 1936. M 43—III Bal-
lastics, June 1936.

Pfaltz and Bauer, Inc.: Catalog on Micro-Balances;
describes the various models of analytical micro-
balances with detailed illustrations. July, 1936.

Barnstead Still and Sterilizer Co., Inc.: “Water
Stills,” “Solvent Stills,’ and “Alcohol Concentra-
tors” —catalog's contain complete data with prices.

International Equipment Co.: Bulletin A-1936
“Conical Heads for International Centrifuges” —
all types of centrifuges are described in detail.

Calibron Products, Inc.: Notebook No. 3—“Perspec-
tive and Optical Dlusions of Depth” (Price, 50
cents, additional copies 30 cents), Gauges of
depth, optical illusions, historical notes, perspec-
tive methods, object-observer-picture plane rela-
tionships, perspective rectification, curved objects
and shadows, aerial mapping, projection systems;
fully annotated. June 25, 1936.

General Biological Supply House, Inc.: No. 6—
“Turtox Biology Catalog and Teachers’ Manual,”
over 100 pages devoted to information on biologi-
cal problems of the high school teacher, catalog
Section contains a selected list of materials for
high school biology. August, 1936.

. New York Scientific Supply Co.: Supplement D—
“American Biological Models,’ models made a
special composition which is tough, light and very
durable, for human anatomy, embryology, botany
and zoology. February 1, 1936.

Spencer Lens Co.: M 65, 66, 67, 70, 72, 76 and 43-
Ill, K78, D14. These catalogs illustrate and de-
Scribe microscopes and accessories, and projectors
and accessories required for all types of labora-
tory work.

Harvard Apparatus Co.:
tus,” complete catalog,
ber 1, 1936.

‘Bausch & Lomb Optical Co.: E-21—“‘Photomicro-

graphic Equipment,” a 26-page book discussing

the factors in photomicrography and illustrating
equipments for various purposes; section on the

Orthro-Stereo Camera and the Euscope, July,

1936.

D-176—‘Medical Microscope,” a ten-page folder
describing monocular and binocular types of phy-
sician’s microscopes; June 1936.

D-28—‘Colorimeters,” this 40-page booklet on
colorimetry describes optical measuring’ instru-
ments for determining the concentration of sub-
stances in solution; the Hydrogen-Ion and Bio-
logical Colorimeters occupy six pages.

“Physiological Appara-
to be published Septem-

BOOKS AND OTHER PUBLICATIONS

The Macmillan Co.: D-85—‘“‘College Texts and Ref-
erence Books: Biological Sciences, 1936-37,’ com-
plete descriptive annual catalogue of books and
monographs of interest to students and research
workers in the various biological sciences. August
7, 1936.

Oxford University Press: “Catalogue of Oxford
Books on Science and Technology,” a catalogue of
the scientific and technical books published by the
Oxford University Press. January, 1936.

INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY CLASS NOTES

Now that we are starting in our third week on
the course, we feel as though we were seasoned
Invertebrates. We have completed a successful
all-day collecting trip—to Kettle Cove. Not only
was this trip successful from the point of view of
specimens obtained, noteworthy of which was the
relatively rare starfish Henricia, and the lunch
provided by the Mess, but also due to much sing-
ing to and from the Cove, with a fine rendition of
“Sweet Adeline” on the part of Dr. Matthews.
However this trip was marked by a few casualties
as practically all the angels fell and one ark
capsized.

Having been introduced properly to the lowest
phyla of the animal kingdom, we are now ready
for the annelid worms, which field will be sur-
veyed by Dr. Sayles, who recently demonstrated
to us how the sponge Microciona could regenerate
new individuals from one-cell fragments. The co-
elenterates offered us a number of interesting
observations, such as the feeding of the Portu-
guese-man-of-war. A number of students enjoyed
turning the lights off in order to observe the
luminescence of the ctenophore, Mnemiopsis.

The dance on Saturday night was a wonderful
success and a fitting climax to a week of hard
work. Experienced observers thought the enter-
tamer an interesting specimen. The only other
nightlife to speak of undertaken by members of
the class were occasional trips this week to the
Eel Pond to see the swarming of Nereis. Another
form of organized recreation which will be in-
dulged in this week will be a softball game, inas-
much as the south side of the lab challenged the
north side to a game. Be it noted that half of the
north side is composed of girls.

On Sunday the Invertebrates could be seen to
scatter all over the Cape and even to take to the
sea. A couple of beach parties attracted a number
of people; several drove up to Provincetown, and
a few could be found: very close to Martha’s Vine-
yard much later in the afternoon than many of
the Mess-hall customers might have wished.

On the basis of past work we are eagerly antic-
ipating the approaching field trips to Lagoon
Pond and to Cuttyhunk, which promise to be even
more fruitful than the previous ones—if also
somewhat more conducive to sea-sickness.

190 TA COREE CRINGIN ER [ Vou. XI. No. 98

A Page of New Physiological Apparatus

INDUCTORIUM

TIME MARKING CLOCK

TIME MARKING CLOCK
The laboratory Time Marking Clock con-
sists of a standard Warren Telechron Mo-
tor, geared to a set of contacts for the
transmission of time intervals to signal
magnets, or any device to which it is de-
sired to transmit timed impulses. The en-
tire assembly is mounted on a _ bakelite
panel, the motor mechanism proper being
neatly encased in a metal box. A switch
on the panel is provided for starting and
stopping the motor.

BTICe Grass scesccescnsne CAG iecstiseeeterstrecetoo $30.00

KYMOGRAPH
The Allied Kymograph is induction motor
driven from the regular 110-volt, 60 cycle
A.C. lighting circuit, therefore operates at
a substantial constant speed. A gear box
in the base allows for four speed changes.
The highest speed makes possible the use
of 100 vibrations per second tuning fork
for timing. The lowest speed is just suffi-
cient for proper use with second intervals.
erie; GACH ...:.:<:..ccoeetiasieccs- wenn OOLOO

Lots of 6 or more, discount—5%

RESEARCH TAMBOUR

INDUCTORIUM

This instrument consists of an induction
coil with all necessary control elements
housed in a metal case with panel of bake-
lite. This control of the secondary is by
means of a high resistance potentiometer
which allows for a convenient knob control
of the output voltage. A 3-position switch
in the secondary circuit provides for three
ranges of the knob. A secondary short
circuit key is built into the panel of the
instrument, thus making the entire unit
self contained. The primary and secon-
dary circuits have separate binding posts;
a convenient vibrator adjustment on the
outside of the panel is also built into the
instrument.

AUXILIARY DRUM

Auxiliary Drum for long paper consists of

a standard 6-inech drum mounted on %
inch steel rod.
DIPYIGCO 2. ...scccarnesesihus ssucseerechsccseccnseecestes $24.00

This Research Tambour is equipped with micrometer adjustment of amplification ratio

and base line.

The writing point is held in contact
gravity rather than by a spring in the pen point or arm.

with the writing surface by
This makes for constant

writing pressure regardless of whether the writing surface is absolutely smooth or not.

Price, each

$15.00

For complete information write

PHIPPS & BIRD, INC.

915 East Cary St.

Richmond, Virginia

Aucust 22, 1936 ] . THEVCOLLECTING NET =” es: 191

SE OS 0S OS ST) ASOT) SOS OE OT) EO SOE) TO TO LD 426

DISSECTING SETS

&

This is set No. A-195,
one of the ten dissecting
sets illustrated in our
catalog No. 38, from the
simplest to the most com-
plete. Also largest variety
of dissecting instruments,

as well as laboratory ma-

terials such as

Micro Slides and Cover Glasses

Slide Boxes---Magnifiers---Centrifuges

Insect Pins--Riker Mounts

Museum Jars--Petri Dishes--Rubber Tubing
Hemacytometers and Hemometers

We have separate catalogs, gladly sent on request, of Charts, Models, Specimens and
Preparations in the following fields: Human and Comparative Anatomy, Physiology,
Neurology, Zoology, Botany, Embryology, Entomology, Ecology, ete.

CLAY=“ADAMS COMBPARY. INC.

25> EAST 26th STREET, NEW YORK

*

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. XI. No. 98

Bailey’s HISTOLOGY

Famous standard text. Almost entirely re-
written new 9th edition. (August 1936). Edi-
ted by Professor Philip Smith with the collab-
oration of Professors Strong, Elwyn, Sever-
inghaus, Copenhaver, Carpenter and Goss, all

of Columbia University. $6.00
Krafka: ELEMENTARY
HISTOLOGY

Entirely new (April 1936) by Professor Joseph
Krafka, University of Georgia. Author urges
biologists to admit histology to the general
college curriculum on the same footing as
comparative anatomy, embryology and gen-
etics. $2.50

Mathews: PRINCIPLES OF

BIOCHEMISTRY

New up-to-date short concise yet reasonably
complete presentation of biochemistry by the
well known author of the larger standard
TEXTBOOK OF PHYSIOLOGICAL CHEMIS-
TRY. (August 1936). $4.50

Best and Taylor: PHYSIOLOGY
OF MEDICAL PRACTICE

Ready late in September. The new University
of Toronto textbook in applied physiology, of
the utmost value and highest authority for
both students and practitioners.

Roaf: PHYSIOLOGY

Second revised (1936) edition of a good Brit-
ish textbook by the Professor of Physiology,
University of Liverpool, formerly of Toronto.

$6.75

Stedman’s PRACTICAL MEDICAL
DICTIONARY, 1936

25th Year. New 13th thoroughly revised edi-
tion of this standard American medical dic-
tionary. Hundreds of new terms. New article
on Medical Etymology. Gives B. N. A., N. K.
and new British Anatomical Nomenclature.
Accords with U. S. Pharmacopoeia 1936, Na-
tional Formulary, British Pharmacopoeia, and
Bergey's bacteriological terminology. Index
of 217 tables, 1300 large pages, semiflexible
binding, thumb index. $7.50

WILLIAM WOOD & CO.

BALTIMORE, MD.

--- In Press ---

CHEMICAL ROOM
SUPPLEMENT

edited by
DR. OSCAR RICHARDS

24 Pages fie

THE NATURE OF GROWTH
b

FREDERICK S. HAMMETT
A provocative essay for the uncoagulated.
61 pp. 75 cents
THE SCIENCE PRESS, Lancaster, Penna.

WITH
VOLAND +800
weighings of
4 GRAMS 200 MILLIGRAMS
can be made without handling weights!

=) “ a ?

Capacity—200 gms. Sensitiveness 0.05 mg.
Patented vernier and grid, equilibrium adjuster,
which eliminate the handling of riders and all
weights below 4 grams 200 mg.

Manufactured in U. S. A. by

VOLAND & SONS, Inc.

NEW ROCHELLE, N. Y.

=

Aucust 22, 1936 |

2,
er

OD) SS OO OS) A) SO “

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE
BIBLIOGRAPHIC SERVICE AND
AUTHORS’ ABSTRACTS

If you publish in any Wistar Institute jour-
nal, your paper, in abstract form, is announced
on two separate occasions, prior to the ap-
pearance of the complete article in a journal:

1st. In the Advance Abstract Sheets of the :
Bibliographic Service, issued on the
15th of each month.
2nd. In the form of Bibliographic Service
Cards, issued semi-monthly.
Subscription to the Advance Abstract
Sheets—$3.00 per year.
Subscription to the Bibliographic Service
Cards—$5.00 per year.
The following journals are published by The i
Wistar Institute:
Journal of Morphology !
The Journal of Comparative Neurology |
The American Journal of Anatomy
The Anatomical Record |
The Journal of Experimental Zoology
American Journal of Physical Anthropology
Journal of Cellular and Comparative Physiology
The Journal of Nutrition
Reprints of articles appearing in the above !
journals may be purchased at prices quoted
on the Advance Abstract Sheets. |
For further information address |

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE OF ANATOMY
AND BIOLOGY
36th Street and Woodland Avenue
Philadelphia, Pa.

Ce ee ame came Camm oemn oem.

THE COLLECTING NET

CONSTANT TEMPERATURE
EQUIPMENT and SERVICE
high and low temperatures,

Sensitive Thermoregulators
easily adjustable for air or
liquid immersion

Supersensitive Relays
to control heavy heating
loads

LoLag Immersion Heaters
flexible, in copper and steel
sheaths; can be furnished
in any length up to 10 ft.,
and any power rating up
covering the range from

Constant Temperature Baths
general and special pur-

pose; constant to +0.02°C;

to 1500 watts
—10°C to 200°C; available
in all sizes and styles

Constant Temperature

Service
Aminco engineers can de-
sign constant temperature
baths of all descriptions.
Get our quotations on spe-
cial equipment and advice
on choice of
control units,

Above: Aminco
Refrigerated Bath
No. 1200-30

heaters or

Write for Aminco Catalog

AMERICAN INSTRUMENT CO., Inc.

8010-8020 Georgia Ave. Silver Spring, Md.

PFALTZ & BAUER, Inc.

Sole Agents for U.S. A. and Canada

Empire State Building

New York
Chicago

SARTORIUS

Analytical |
MICRO BALANCE MD4

With air damping and riders
manipulated from outside

READINGS to 1/100 mg. and 1/1000

mg. by estimate, of 20 g. load.
Special alloy beam with graduations
for rider. Knife edges and planes of
finest agate. Argentan pans, plati-
num plated, compensating suspen-
sion, gold plated.

Price, in mahogany case with

front slider and two _ side
(oKovonnsp, allap.< sya. ao coe ppeanaccecent $400
Set of precision weights (gold

plated)" ime. to 2002 er:

Prices f.0.b. New York
Catalog sent on request

194

x
ei

" BARCROFT- WARBURG GLASSWARE

Wie specialize in the construction of all types of
respirometer vessels and manometers, guarantees

ing uniform capacities and highest eS One
manship. Selentists employing manometric methods
measurement of cell respiration are cordi-
apparatus requirements
broad experience in
following:

for the
ally invited to submit their
upon our
such items

to us, and to che LW

the manufacture of as the

Warburg Vessels
(All shapes and capacities)
Warburg Manometers
Barcroft Differential Manometers
(As recommended by Dixon and Elliott)
Dickens-Simer and Dixon-Keilin Vessels
Dickens and Greville Constant-Volume Differential
Manometers and Vessels etc.

Write Stating Requirements

Ask for our Bulletin describing Warburg Glassware

E. MACHLETT & SON

Est. 1897
Special Glass Apparatus of Any Design Made to Order

220 Kast 23rd Street New York, N. Y.

ere arama lamvamiamr cms amram ema iene ae emmy 7

Turtox Skeletons
Are

Prepared in our own laboratory---
scientifically correct---durably mount-
ed---reasonably priced--accompanied

by fully labeled Turtox Key Cards.

ZN,
TURTO uit Paapucrs

The Sign of the Turtox
Pledges Absolute Satisfaction

GENERAL BIOLOGICAL SUPPLY HOUSE
(Incorporated)

i 761-763 EAST SIXTY-NINTH PLACE CHICAGO

om a me ce 0 000 0) 0-0 0 0 ee ee ee

OE OE EE OO) TE SE ED SE D4

THE COLLECTING NET |

__[ Vor. XT. No. 98)

>) OED 9°,
Og

BIOLOID
Embedding Paraffine

NOW IN TWO NEW RANGES

We are now able to offer for shipment from
stock two new ranges of BIOLOID Paraf-
fin, namely, 43-45 Degrees C., and 60-62
Degrees C. The addition of these ranges
permits selection of the exact melting point
required for any particular work or special
climatic conditions.
BIOLOID Paraffin is especially prepared for
embedding and will be found far superior to
the quality ordinarily offered. It is processed
from the best domestic wax; it is pure white
in color, filtered to eliminate impurities, free
from excess oil, and practically neutral in
reaction. The melting points have been care-
fully checked in accordance with methods of
the American Society for Testing Materials.
Each cake is individually wrapped in glassine
paper and packaged in substantial carton.
i It is available with the following melting
points:
43-45 Degrees C. (111-113 Degrees F.) *
47-49 Degrees C. (118-120 Degrees F.)
50-52 Degrees C.
53-55 Degrees C.
! 56-58 Degrees C.
i 60-62 Degrees C.
a
| Price—
1 Ib.
10-1 Ib.
25-1 Ib.
100-1 Ib.

(123-125 Degrees F.)
(128-130 Degrees F.)
(133-135 Degrees F.)
(141-143 Degrees F.)*

cake..:::dnccecmpes §
cakes

cakes...... ee
CARES. ....2.cccscenssnesees

* Prices for these two melting Bik: 5 cents
per pound more than for other ranges.

WILL CORPORATION

LABORATORY APPARATUS AND.CHEMICALS
ROCHESTER,N.Y.

Avousr 15, 1936 ] THE COLLECTING NET __ Reps 195

Increase the
usefulness
of your
Microscope
with

MmeECESSORIES

The range of usefulness of a inicroscope depends largely upon its equipment.
Perhaps you can use the microscope you now have to greater advantage if you
add to it an accessory or two.

Bausch & Lomb have prepared an Accessories Catalog listing all of the numerous
3 & L Microscope Accessories. You should have a copy of this catalog in your
files. Write for it now to BAvscir & LompB Opricat Co., 671 St. Paul Street,
Rochester, N. Y.

A PARTIAL LIST OF CONTENTS

Most of the items listed below include different types for various purposes. The
complete listing of these accessories is far too large to give here.

Objectives Nosepieces Counting Chambers
Eyepieces Mechanical Stages Haemacytometers
Body Tubes Micrometer Discs Slides & Cover Glasses
Condensers Micrometer Eyepieces Cross Section Mounts
Camera Lucidas Stage Micrometers

WE MAKE OUR OWN GLASS TO
INSURE STANDARDIZED PRODUCTION

FOR YOUR GLASSES, INSIST ON Bal
ORTHOGON LENSES AND 8B & L FRAMES

THE COLLECTING NET [ Vou. XI. No. 98

THE. SPENCER No: 13

odical Micwercopn
Designed for lifetime use, it offers four mechanical features “available only on
Spencer Microscopes” that permit full utilization of the superior Spencer optical
system. If you wish, you may purchase this Spencer No. 13 Medical Microscope
with the Single Body Tube and later add the Vertical Binocular or the Spencer
Inclinocular as your work grows more exacting.

For complete information and prices, write for our new
fully illustrated Folder M-76. Please address Dept. J-83.

Spencer Lens Company
Buffalo G3 New York

There is no Substitute for the Finer Resolution
Afforded by the Spencer Optical Systems

a

Vol. XI, No. 8

SATURDAY, AUGUST 29, 1936

Annual Subscription, $2.00
Single Copies, 30 Cents.

SOME PROBLEMS IN THE EEL-GRASS
SITUATION

Dr. CHARLES E, RENN
Junior Marine Bacteriologist, Woods Hole
Oceanographic Institution
Instructor Harvard University

The recently wasted marine eel-grass, with
limited local exceptions has not returned to the
degree anticipated by hopeful reports of the past
few springs. There are at present few localities
along the Atlantic coast where the growth is of
immediate significance, but there is undoubtedly
an increasing number of new beds discovered each
season, and it is from this evidence that the favor-
able expectations have arisen. Surveying for
foliated areas is tedious and unless repeated often
through the summer gives a wrong impression of
the very unstable condition that prevails in these
beds. In some regions, as in the estuaries of
eastern Chesapeake Bay, and Shinnecock Bay,
Long Island, the grass has persisted through the
period of the epidemic. The plants there are not
immune varieties ; they bear the symptoms of dis-
ease and undergo the premature sloughing of
leaves characteristic of infected beds. Apparently,
favorable environmental factors enable them to
iaintain a fortunate position in the host-parasite
balance.

It is notable that the persisting and returning
grass is small, with narrow, relatively short leaves
and thin stems. The extreme variation normally
shown by the plants under different environmental
conditions, makes it (Continued on page 200)

CURRENT FISHERY RESEARCH IN
AMERICA

Dr. LioNeEt A. WALFORD
United States Bureau of Fisheries

Before we can appreciate what fishery research-
ers are doing in America today, we should look
at what they were doing 40 or 50 years ago. This
is not very far back, reckoned in terms of the slow
tempo of a study that reaches long periods of

years into the past or even into the future. Al-
though since that time fishery research has

changed its character completely, the popular con-
ception of it has not changed along with it. People
still think of a fishery laboratory as a museum or
hatchery ; this is very much what it was 50 years
ago. Having something to do somehow with a
natural resource, it was proper in the beginning
for fishery students to determine first what this
resource was and to try somehow to control its
supply. Consequently, the earliest work in Amer-
ica was carried on either in museums, where the
taxonomy of the fishes was established, or in
hatcheries, which it was hoped might insure a
non-diminishing supply of fish. It is interesting,
then, that in the Bulletins of the Bureau of Fish-
eries published prior to 1900, 70% of the papers
dealt with taxonomic subjects. The first fishery
laboratory in America, that at Woods Hole, was
in the beginning devoted chiefly to hatchery work.

At the beginning of this century, as the number
of available new species diminished and the atten-
tion of biologists turned more to experimental
work, fishery students extended the scope of their

TABLE OF
Some Problems in the Eel-Grass Situation,
Pyrea Charles) Fy REMI) fi-f.)icccessscssoossesiscresresecese 197
Current Fishery Research in America, Dr.
OMe MACAW iA lL ONG! Eiteectea.snissarettersectttsesesorietney 197
Program of Genetics Society of America
IRE TAYE eect eb Pet eres eee ey a eee "gue 201
The Botany Course, Prof. William Randolph
ERATE oct SR eee ee 202

CONTENTS
Fertile Eggs from Pheasants in January by
“Night Lighting,’’ Dr. Bissonnette
A Demonstration of the Respiratory Control
of Seals, Dr. Laurence Irving...............-.::0:-+: 204
Biology in the Colleges ...
Editorial Page
Items of Interest ...

News from Other Biological Laboratories.......
Department of Publications::4.....5..:2..ce0c-..sccsso-0s

‘preyooyS “Y sefreyO ‘uosseH “D) ssod ‘UOSTIIM “d “A ‘3309S “aM
‘meSi0W “HL ‘UWI H Auer ‘sqooer “H “IW ‘uospreucd “HH ‘uewmueep ff W ell aH ydjey ‘1ese[D 0330 ‘sMmoyyeW ‘d “VY ‘Mod JUOI
-foqiey ‘WAM ‘SulAI] soUueINeT “HIBIO “YU A “ie ‘s33ngz uoseimey ‘uuniq[leH “A "T
‘SAR1D T1]2MSBD ‘UOWION ‘d “A ‘JONNM H aA ‘uosdaquty “YU °M ‘SUNTOOW “A ‘O ‘e°ITV “OM ‘queuuey ‘HC ‘BNApoOM “TJ "T :Mor [PPT
‘suIyTeO “N Arey ‘plreypeul (O “V ‘Japeiyog zueig “SPIN ‘OS ‘srequieyO jreqoy ‘SIMa'T AvAT ‘paeyoed so[seyO ‘epreds “OD ‘Mol yoRg

‘TT LSQDOV “ONILAGW TWONNY FHL AO
GWIL AHL LY GAHdVYDOLOHd *986T ‘AMNOLWUOUVI TVOIDOIOIS ANINVIW AHL 40 NOILVYHOdHOO AHL AO SAALSOUL AHL

Aueust 29, 1936 ]

THE COLEECTING. NET

199

work, and began to study the histology, embryolo-
gy and physiology, not only of fishes but of all
other marine organisms as well. The number of
taxonomic papers in the bulletin fell between 1900
and 1913 from 70 to 30% to make way for such
subjects as histology of the alimentary tract of the
squeteague, or behavior of the horseshoe crab un-
der abnormal conditions. In short, the Bulletin
became a convenient place to publish miscellane-
ous papers of a marine biological nature. As for
hatchery work, it was gradually becoming evident
that it was not the cure-all of depletion problems
that it was expected to be, and enthusiasm for it
was beginning to wane.

In Europe, meanwhile, things had been very
different. Europeans had had ample time in which
to become scientifically acquainted with their ma-
rine resources. Likewise they had been exploiting
them for centuries. With the introduction of mod-
ern machines into fishing boats, however, the rate
of this exploitation accelerated tremendously. Eu-
ropeans saw the danger of probable depletion, and
in practically all the sea-coast countries started in-
tensive studies into the biology of fishes on a scale
far larger than is ever applied to most classes of
animals.

Although this work began in Europe in about
1880, it did not reach America until about 1913,
when the Bureau of Fisheries undertook its Pa-
cific Coast salmon investigations. The improve-
ment in fishing methods, in refrigeration, in can-
ning processes and in rapid transportation, all had
been working together to expand the fishing in-
dustry into a $60,000,000 business. Since this in-
dustry makes use of a public property, it is not
merely to the interest of the industry to perpetu-
ate itself, it is more significantly the business of
the people to perpetuate its property. Hence gov-
ernment fishery laboratories with extensive pro-
grams of study have developed from necessity.

The significant difference between fishery re-
search of 20 or 30 years ago and that of today is
this: In the past it generally consisted of a num-
ber of disjointed studies made with no long-time
program in mind. Now it is concerned with pro-
jects of an almost permanent nature. Investiga-
tions once started must go on permanently if they
are to obtain worth-while results. Thus any work
proceeding since the last ten years is “current.”
It is “current” in the way a stream is. It started
somewhere back, goes on before us, and continues
on ahead.

The reason for the slow tempo of this work is
evident if you consider a typical fishery problem.
Here, for example, is a model: We are given a
population of aquatic animals (NX) in a state of
approximate numerical equilibrium. This equili-
brium depends on the relation of the population
to conditions which have established themselves
over a very long period of time, such as the

a

physical environment, the surrounding bios, etc.,
and on other conditions which vary from year to
year, such as the climate. We do not know: (1)
How many individuals there are in the popula-
tion. (2) The birth rate or the death rate (these
evidently are not constant from year to year).
(3) The exact ge ographic boundaries of the
Sica This “changes continually from the
very beginning of life until the end. Furthermore
the population is divided into numerous races
which may or may not intermingle.

We now introduce into the situation the follow-
ing new elements: (a) Large numbers of X’s
are removed periodically. What is the optimum
quantity that may be taken without endangering
the safety of the population? How can the vic-
tims be selected so as to make this optimum as
high as possible? (b) Large quantities of other
animals, (Y), on which X feeds, and of others,
(Z), which feed on X are periodically removed.
These changes are not in direct proportion to
those on the X population. The same problems
apply here as given under (a). Also, how many
Y’s and Z’s can be removed without adversely
affecting the X’s ?

These are typical fishery problems which are
being attacked separately for several species. In
the United States and Canada there are perhaps
a half dozen organizations engaged in fishery re-
search. The largest of these is the United States
Bureau of Fisheries, which is interested mostly
in species with interstate distribution. On the
Atlantic coast, Bureau investigators are studying
chiefly the cod, haddock, mackerel, seilsh a) 4.
flounder, scup, and oyster; on the Pacific coast,
they study the salmon, in the Gulf of Mexico the
shrimp, in Alaska the salmon and herring, in the
Great Lakes the whitefish and pike perches and
in inland streams the trout and bass. These are
all long-time projects which have no ending, for
as fast as one small sub-problem is solved, another
rises to take its place. The principal publications
of the Bureau are the Bulletin, which contains the
works of most lasting and general interest, and
the Reports, (more recently Investigational Re-
ports) which include miscellaneous shorter papers.
Aldmunstrative Reports contain the annual statis-
tics, annual accounts of progress in scientific in-
vestigations, and other activities of the various
divisions.

The Biological Board of Canada carries on re-
search of a similar nature but on a smaller scale
on those species listed above which inhabit Cana-
dian waters. Its chief publications are the Jowr-
nal, which contains articles of a strictly scientific
nature and the Bulletin, which is designed for the
“general fishery public,” and which is written in
a simpler style than the Journal. The Division of
Fisheries Research of the Department of Natural
Resources of Newfoundland likewise studies the

THE COLEECTING NET

[ Vor. XI. No. 99

200
cod, salmon and haddock and publishes an Annual
Report.

On the Pacific coast the halibut is a species of

great economic importance, which is distributed
between the United States and Canada. The In-
ternational Fisheries Commission has been en-
gaged exclusively in studying this fish for over
ten years. The results at irregular intervals are
published as Reports.

Although most states have fish and game com-
missions, few have extensive programs of re-
search. California is a notable exception in this
respect, having in addition to a staff working on
inland fishes, a marine fisheries laboratory. There
the Pacific sardine, the tuna, the mackerel, and the
flounder are being carefully studied. The scientific
results are published irregularly in the Fish Bulle-
ti. Michigan maintains an Institute for Fishery

Research at the State University, concerned with
problems in managing the supply of game fishes.
New York is engaged in extensive ecological
studies in its streams and lakes. Annual and oc-
casional scientific publications are issued.

The problems which these organizations face
are not easy. The methods of attack are indirect
and complex, for the events going on in the
depths of the ocean are mysterious and to us in-
visible. Vast quantities of observational data are
required that only governmental agencies general-
ly have the facilities for collecting. These agen-
cies are making headway in America and they are
succeeding because their purpose is definite. Their
work is no longer haphazard but it is organized
and planned to be permanent and, what is most
important to the people who are paying for it, it
is of practical value.

SOME PROBLEMS IN THE EEL-GRASS SITUATION
(Continued from page 197)

impossible at present to ascribe this to true varie-
tal differences in susceptibility—a possibility fre-
quently pointed out. Most of the new plants arise
from old stem stock, astonishingly few are de-
rived from seeds of the previous season, though
seeds are usually produced.

Explanations of the present epidemic state, now
that the extensive wasting has become appreciated,
tend toward cosmic causes and are a tribute to the
suppleness of human imagination. It seems wisest
to loolx for the most immediate factors first. The
symptoms and epidemic spread of the disease sug-
gest microbial parasitism, and a number of search-
es have been made for microscopic pathogens.
Several suspects have been found.

One specific parasitic protozoan, an unidentified
Labyrinthula, 1s- universally associated with the
disease. It is active chiefly in the leaves of the
plant, destroying the chloroplasts and rendering
them susceptible to the attack of saprophytes and
secondary invaders. This parasite still persists
with some local variations in density of infestation
over the whole range of the eel-grass’ habitat. It
is extremely active and may destroy beds within
a few days after the symptoms become evident.
The Labyrinthula may be found in the small win-
ter leaves of the plant during the cold months, and
it may produce slight streaking during this period.

3ut with the warming of the shallow waters in
late spring and early summer it becomes very ac-
tive and affects the premature wasting of the di-
seased beds. Prolonged cool weather, favorable
for the vegetative growth of the plant, inhibits the
parasite’s development, as does, apparently, the
decreased salinities in estuaries.

The changes in shore life dependent on eel-grass

are complicated by attending unrelated conditions.
This applies, for example, to the scallop which
was protected in many regions by dense growths
of leaves to which they attached themselves. Sea
brant and Canadian geese have not adequately ad-
justed themselves to the loss of what was formerly
their chief winter food and have consequently
grown more scarce. Considerable erosion of shal-
low, muddy bottoms, has followed the disappear-
ance of matted stem stock and roots. New plant
and animal associations characteristic of the ex-
posed floors have been developed, often producing
a substrate unsuited for the establishment of seed-
lings.

Barring the miraculous attenuation of the para-
site or the natural development of resistant strains
—conditions not indicated to date—it is likely that
the present equilibrium between the eel-grass and
the Labyrinthula will persist. Even under favor-
able conditions the spread of the beds from exist-
ing root-stock is at first very slow; this would ap-
ply as well to immune varieties, if such could be
found. There is hope that grass from the Pacific
coast, where there is no evidence of the disease,
may be established on the Atlantic. Several ex-
perimental plantings have been made by the U. S.
Biological Survey. Several plantations produced
seed; thus far there are no symptoms of the di-
sease. Apparently this eel-grass is of a different
variety than that found on the Atlantic coast. In
the fresher estuaries Ruppia is growing in great
abundance in the regions where it was formerly
unable to compete with the eel-grass.

(This article is based upon a lecture presented
at the Marine Biological Laboratory on July 24).

oe

Aueust 29, 1936] _

THE COLLECTING NET |

201

THE PROGRAM OF SUMMER MEETING OF THE GENETICS SOCIETY OF
AMERICA AT THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY, SEPTEMBER 3-5

Officers of The Genetics Society of America

President, P. W. Wuitinc, University of Penn-
sylvania, Philadelphia, Pa.

Vice-President, L. J. STApLER, Bureau of Plant
Industry, U. S. Department of Agriculture,
University of Missouri, Columbia, Mo.

Secretary-Treasurer, M. DeEmeEREC, Carnegie In-
stitution of Washington, Cold Spring Harbor,
ING) Y.:

Local Representative, B. R. SpEIcHeR.

Thursday Evening, September 3, 8:00 P. M.;
Auditorium

Marine Biological Laboratory Evening Lecture.

00-8 :45—Prof. Th. Dobzhansky, California In-

stitute of Technology, Pasadena, Cal. Genetic

nature of species differences.

:50-9 :10—Prof. Lee R. Dice, University of

Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich. Some types of

waltzing and epilepsy in mice of the genus

Peromyscus. (Motion picture).

(oe)

ig)

Friday Morning Session, September 4,9:30 A. M.
Auditorium
Round table conference: Progress in cytogenetics.

Leader, Karl Sax, Harvard University, Cam-
bridge, Mass.

Introducers, C. L. Huskins, McGill University,
Montreal, Canada and C. B. Bridges, Carnegie
Institution of Washington, California Institute of
Technology, Pasadena, Cal.

Friday Afternoon Session, September 4,
2:00 P. M., Old Lecture Hall
Demonstrations and Exhibits

(1) Anderson, Edgar, Missouri Botanical
Garden and Washington University, St. Louis,
Mo. Hybridization in Tradescantia.

(2) Baron, A. L. and Powsner, L., First In-
stitute of Podiatry, New York, N. Y. Genetics of

bacteria. (1) Preliminary studies on the nature
of variation.
(3) Bauer, Hans, Kaiser Wilhelm-Institut

fur Biologie, Berlin-Dahlem, Germany. Are the
chromonemata in salivary gland chromosomes ar-
tificial stress-lines ?

(4) Bauer, Hans and Th. Dobzhansky, Cali-
fornia Institute of Technology, Pasadena, Cal. A
comparison of gene arrangement in Drosophila
azteca and D. athabasca.

(5) Bridges, C. B. and G. C. Li, Carnegie
Institution of Washington, California Institute of
Technology, Pasadena, Cal. | Semi-homologous
inversions in Drosophila melanogaster.

(6) Child, G. P. and T. Albertowicz, Am-
herst College, Amherst, Mass. The effect of nipa-
gin on the wing size of vestigial of Drosophila
melanogaster.

(7) Child, G. P. and H. H. Plough. The in-
duction of mutations by high temperature.

(8) Clark, Frank H., University of Michi-
gan, Ann Arbor, Mich. ‘lwo hereditary types of
hair deficiency in the deer-mouse, Peromyscus
maniculatus.

(9) Cook, Robert, Journal of Heredity,
Washington, D. C. Methods of preparing illus-
trative material for publications.

(10) Demerec, M., Carnegie Institution of
Washington, Cold Spring Harbor, N. Y. A mu-
tability stimulating factor in the Florida stock of
Drosophila melanogaster.

(11) Dice, Lee R., University of Michigan,
Ann Arbor, Mich. Variation in the white-footed
mouse Peromyscus leucopus noveboracensis.

(12) Eigsti, Orie J., Carnegie Institution of
Washington, Cold Spring Harbor, N. Y. Pollen
tube studies in Reseda species.

(13) Fankhauser, G., Princeton University,
Princeton, N. J. The development of a haploid
(merogonic) larva of the Japanese salamander,
Lriturus pyrrhogaster.

(14) Goodale, H. D., Mount Hope Farm,
Williamstown, Mass. Evidence that size of head-
spot (headdot, Keeler) in the mouse is not: con-
trolled by modifiers distributed among many
chromosomes.

(15) Hoover, Margaret E., Carnegie Institu-
tion of Washington, Cold Spring Harbor, N. Y.
\ case of inversions in tandem in the X-chromo-
some of Drosophila melanogaster.

(16) Kaufmann, B. P., University of Alaba-
ma, University, Ala. Chromosome studies on
Drosophila ananassae.

(17) McBride, T. F., W. J. Harrison, and E.
Alfred Wolf, University of Pittsburgh, Pitts-
burgh, Pa. A contribution to the study of heredi-
tary olidontia in man. :

(18) Marshak, A., Deaconess Hospital, Bos-
ton, Mass. The structure of somatic chromo-
somes.

(19) Metz, C. W. and E. Gay Lawrence,

Carnegie Institution of Washington, Baltimore,

Md. Structure of salivary gland chromosomes
in Sciara.
(20) Nebel, B. R. and M. L. Ruttle, New

York State Agricultural
Geneva, N. Y. Chromosome structure,

(21) Plough, H. H. and G. P. Child, Am-
herst College, Amherst, Mass. Specific effects of
high temperature in inducing non-inherited varia-
tions in Drosophila melanogaster.

(22) Plough, Hi. H. and (© F. Holthansen,
High mutation frequency in Drosophila melano-
gaster without environmental change.

(23) Raffel, Daniel, Institute of Genetics,
Academy of Sciences, Moscow, USSR. Genes

Experiment Station,

202

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. XI. No. 99

and the bands of the salivary gland chromosomes
of Drosophila.

(24+) Seott, Allan C., Union College, Schen-
ectady, N. Y. The unipolar division in Micro-
malthus.

(25) Steinberg, Arthur G., Columbia Univer-

sity, New York, N. Y. The effect of autosomal
inversions on crossing-over in the X-chromosome
of Drosophila melanogaster.

(26) Warmke, Hl. E.,
South Orange, N. J. Cytology of the
Coast Trilliums.

(27)
sity, New York, N. Y. Crossing-over in Dro-
sophila pseudoobscura hybrids.

Seton Hall College,
Pacific

Friday evening, September 4, 5:00 P. M.

Excursion of the boat Winifred and Clam Bake
at Tarpaulin Cove. Boat will sail from the Eel
Pond. Swimming for those who desire.

Saturday morning session, September 5,
9:30 A. M.; Auditorium

Round table conference: The nature of mutations.

Leader, R. A. Emerson, Cornell University,
Ithaca, N. Y.

Introducers, L. J. Stadler, Bureau of Plant In-
dustry at the University of Missouri, Columbia,
Mo. and M. Demerec, Carnegie Institution of
Washington, Cold Spring Harbor, N. Y.

PRELIMINARY ANNOUNCEMENT OF THE
WINTER MEETING OF THE GENETICS
SOCIETY OF AMERICA

The regular winter meeting of the Society will
be held with the A. A. A. S. at Atlantic City,
December 29 to 31. The tentative program is as
follows:

‘Tuesday, December 29
Morning and afternoon: Demonstration papers.
Evening: Biologists’ Smoker.
\Vednesday, December 30
Morning: (tentative) Discussion session. Joint
session with the American Society of Zoolo-
gists.
Afternoon: Demonstration papers.
Thursday, December 31
Morning: Round table conference on: “Devel-
opment of resistant strains in animals and
plants.” Joint session with the American
Phytopathological Society.
Afternoon: Naturalists’ Symposium.

MackKnight, R. H., Columbia Univer-

THE BOTANY COURSE
Proressor WILLIAM RANDOLPH TAYLOR
Director of the Course; Professor of Botany,
University of Michigan

It has long been recognized among botanists
that a proper professional training involves among
other things detailed instruction in the morphol-
ogy and anatomy of the plants of all classes. In
zoology, insects and vertebrates usually receive
separate attention, as in botanical schedules do
fungi and higher vascular plants. While the
writer gathers that in zoological curricula there is
little attempt to cover all groups thoroughly,
there is in the larger botanical departments a real
effort made to avoid neglecting any class of plants.

It is relatively easy to do this for plants. The
algae are the hardest to provide for. Many are
difficult or impossible to preserve in liquid. All

lose more or less their essential characters or at-
tractiveness, even if they hold together. However,
the rapidly increasing interest in aquatic biology
and fisheries, with the fixed recognition accorded.
to algae as a very important plant group, has
caused a continued effort to give courses in the
systematic morphology of these plants during the
winter, and a recent great increase in the number
of summer courses offering similar instruction. In
all of these, since they are much less easily treated
than that of fresh water, the marine organisms are
largely neglected, though the flagellates of both
habitats also cause trouble.

It is only at marine stations that instruction in
the marine types can be adequately given, because
of the perishability of the material. There are few
laboratories which attempt it, and but one on each
side of the country has been able to do so over a
long period of years, for the demands on these sta-
tions are heavy and the men free to give advanced
instruction in the algae few.

It has been the policy of the Woods Hole staff
to treat the group as a whole, irrespective of the
marine or fresh water habitat, and it is the pecu-
liar advantage of this station to be able to secure
locally representatives of all algae classes, nearly
all orders and as many families as the length of
the course admits of study. A few of the more
striking tropical groups must be studied from pre-
served material and a few meristematic phenome-
na from prepared slides, but almost all instruction

(Continued on page 204)

THE COLLECTING NET has been entered as second-class matter July 11, 1935, at the Post Office

at Woods Hole, Massachusetts, under the Act of March 3, 1879.
It is published weekly for ten weeks between June 1 and September 15
from Woods Hole and printed at The Darwin Press, New Bedford.
the third floor of the Woods Hole station of the United States Bureau of Fisheries.

marine biological laboratories.

It is devoted to the scientific work at

Its editorial offices are situated on
Between June 1

and October 1 communications should be addressed to Woods Hole, Massachusetts; at other times they
should be directed to THE COLLECTING NET, Garrison, N. Y. Single copies cost 30c; a subscription
(containing not less than 280 pages) costs $2.00.

| Aucusr 29, 1936] _

THE COLLECTING NET

203

FERTILE EGGS FROM PHEASANTS IN JANUARY BY “NIGHT-LIGHTING” +

Dr. 2. HH.

3ISSON NETTE

Professor of Biology, Trinity College, Connecticut

Increased exposure to light in the long winter
season of quiescence activates the sex-glands of
juticos, canaries, starlings, crows, doves, mejiros,
sparrows, ducks, pheasants, quail, ruffed grouse,
iield mice, ferrets and other animals. But so far
Professor L. J. Cole alone seems to have secured
fertile eggs from wild birds in this way. Professor
tl. M. Scott of Kansas was able to induce tur-
keys to lay fertile eggs in January instead of
March, but not guinea fowl. “‘Night-lighting”’ is
used to obtain more eggs from poultry im autumn
and winter for economic reasons.

Pheasants have been induced to lay fertile eggs
earlier in spring so that chicks may reach full
plumage for liberation well before shooting season
opens. Controls were more than 25 pheasants at
shade Swamp Sanctuary, Farmington, Connecti-
cut, confined and fed as usual during the winter
and spring. One hybrid rimg-necked cock and
four hens (Phasianus colchicus + torquatus),
chosen at random, were kept outdoors in a pen of
usual type and fed like controls.

From December 16, they were lighted by a 60-
watt bulb for three hours per night for ten days,
for four hours for ten days, and for five hours per
night thereafter through spring and summer. Both
controls and experimental birds recetved normal
light each day.

Controls began to lay first on April 4+; many
layed much later.

During the first-week in January the cock as-
sumed the breeding conditions of head furnishings
and plumage and gave the mating call. Copula-
tions began; the first two eggs were laid on Janu-
ary 15; and all four hens were laying before the
25th. Laying reached the rate of about 314 eggs
in 24 hours before January 28 and over 30 eggs
were laid before February 3. Laying continued
at this rate in spite of severe weather till March

+ Aided by grants from the National Research
Council, Committee for Research in Problems of
Sex, 1935-6, and by cooperation and animals of the
Connecticut State Department of Fish and Game.
Albert G. Csech supervised the animals and Earl E.
Bailey the electrical arrangements.

THE MARINE EXPERIMENTAL
Dr. FREDERICK

The Marine Experimental Station of The Lan-
kenau Hospital at North Truro is continuing the
exploration of the part played by the naturally oc-
curring tissue constituents im developmental
growth—the work this season which lasts from
May first to October first is confined to study of
the reaction of Obelia geniculata to aspartic acid
—thymine—cytosine—and lysine—the workers in

+, when that of one hen became intermittent. She
layed at intervals till killed by the cock on April
3U aiter laying only about 35 eggs.

On April 15, over 240 eggs had been laid—
about 30 by the poor layer. So the others laid
about 70 eggs each in 91 days or less. Another
hen became lethargic and was removed before
June 29. On june 25, the three hens had laid
more than 316 eggs, over 105 each, and two were
still laying intermittently. (Compare with 15-17
eggs laid in the wild; 35-50 laid im not especially
lighted captivity ). ‘

On February 8, 37 eggs were set and 46 on the
24th, in an improvised electric incubator; but
electricity was irregular and no eggs hatched. Of
the frst 37, 32 were fertile and began develop-
ment (86.5%). Of the 46, broken at 32 days, 20
stll showed unmistakable evidence of develop-
ment. Six of the first fourteen eggs set under a
hen on March 1 were fertile and four hatched at
30 and 33 days; eight out of twelve set on March
20, hatched at 24 and 25 days, instead of the usual
23 days. ;

At 15 days after hatching, the birds requiring
30 days of incubation were far in advance of those
of similar age hatched at 23 days in stage of
feathering. So that, while they were delayed in
hatching, they appeared to be even in advance of
normal in feathering. Some were beginning to
assume adult plumage on June 29. This will re-
ceive further study.

It has been possible to induce pheasants to lay
fertile eggs from January 15 onward (79 days
early). By timing the “night-lighting” they may
be caused to lay at any desired time after, and
probably even before, that date. Percentages of
fertility and hatchability were quite satisfactory as
compared with normals. Young pheasants from
these eggs were reared successfully. Therefore
pheasants may be produced in full plumage for
release at any desired time in autumn.

(This article is a summary of a seminar report pre-
sented at the Marine Biological Laboratory on
July 21.)

STATION AT NORTH TRURO
S. HAMMETT

order of seniority dre—Miss Nevart Chatalbash—
Miss Margaret Elliott—Dr. Theodore Layine—
Marianne Lavine—and Hans Schlumberger. So
far the visitors though few have been noteworthy
—viz. Dr. S. P. Reimann and Dr. F. Bugbee of
Philadelphia—Professor Basile Luyet of St. Louis
—Professor Otto Glaser of Amherst—and Pro-
fessor Carl Voegtlin of Washington.

204

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI. No. 99

THE BOTANY COURSE
(Continued from page 202)
is given on living or freshly prepared local ma-
terial. The joining of marine and fresh water
types in one course admits of a much more con-
nected account of adaptations and presumed evo-
lutionary grouping. It also permits adequate em-
phasis of these autotrophic plants as the chief ori-
ginal source of organic material in both fresh and
salt waters. While the observations that form the
basis of the course are primarily morphological,
the plants are studied in entirety and in detail in
approximately systematic sequence, for relative
unfamiliarity of the students with these plants
makes it impractical to group structures and study
these in their variations in turn. There is offered
considerable opportunity to observe the plants in
the field, to collect many kinds and, outside of reg-
ular hours, to obtain experience in identification
of species in all the large groups. This involves
acquaintance with the American and European
manuals and monographs most appropriate to our
territory. Those students who develop research
interests in algae are encouraged to continue in
their chosen line here, and given every possible
facility to do this.

Dr. Witttam L. Doyte, who received his
Ph.D. from the Johns Hopkins University in 1934
has been granted an extension of his Rockefeller
fellowship. This year he has been studying in
Cambridge, England, but he will continue his
work at Copenhagen next winter.

Dr. McKeen Cattect, who was recently ap-
pointed professor of pharmacology at Cornell
Medical School, is now directing the worl of the
department.

M. B. L. CLUB NOTES

The annual ping-pong tournament has proceed-
ed to its final stage. In the men’s tournament, J.
Carmichael and Kk. Harvey are the finalists.

Programs of phonograph records have been
given ‘regularly every Monday and Wednesday
evening. Concertos by Bach and Elgar; sym-
phonic excerpts from Wagner; and symphonies
by Brahms and Sibelius have been among the re-
cent offerings. The Club wishes hopefully to sug-
gest that music lovers who own any favorite re-
cordings suitable for such concerts would add
much to the musical resources of the community
if they remember to bring them along when they
return to Woods Hole next summer.

Dr. Paul Henshaw, who is a member of the
Musicians Society of America, provided an eve-
ning of magic on Thursday last and held spell-
bound an unusually large audience. After his
performance there was informal dancing until
midnight. The proceeds of the evening’s enter-
taimment will be used by the Club to repair a hole
in the roof which has been sadly in need of atten-
tion for some time now.

‘The last regular Saturday night dance of the
series will take place this evening, with Mrs.
Specht as the hostess in charge.

Last Saturday night THE CoLLectinc NET
sponsored an Old Clothes Party which was, in
our opinion, the liveliest party the Clubhouse has
seen this season what with a really truly six-piece
orchestra and plenty of specialty features.

N.B.: Don’t forget it is still possible for
people to join the Club this summer. We are
anxious to get as many members as possible to
cover expenses incurred but not yet met.

W. W. BaALLarp

A. DEMONSTRATION OF THE RESPIRATORY CONTROL OF SEALS

Dr. LAURENCE IRVING
Professor of Experimental Biology, University of Toronto

The seals in the Fisheries pool show an inter-
esting combination of respiratory and cardiac ac-
tion. Their breathing is irregular and usually oc-
curs, even when they are lying on the float, in al-
ternating periods of breathing and apnoea. When
the breathing movements cease, it can be observed
that the frequency of the heart beat decreases to
about half of the frequency during breathing.
These observations can easily be made, for the
nostrils close after each inspiration, and the beat-
ing of the heart moves the thorax and sometimes
the entire seal. When the seals are lying just
awash in calm water, the pulsation of the heart
will set up a series of small waves on the water
surface with each heart beat. As these waves
slowly radiate from the seal they form an en-
circling series of concentric rings. The distance
which separates the rings is proportional to the
time interval between the heart beats, and closely

spaced rings record a rapid, more widely spaced
rings a slower beat. In this way the record of
the fluctuations in the frequency of the heart beat
can be observed on the surface of the water.

Retardation of the heart beat is a regular ac-
companiment of the interval between breathing
movements in beaver, ducks, seals and muskrats.
It seems to be controlled in the beaver by infla-
tion of the lungs, and it probably represents the
association of cardiac depression with the respira-
tory inhibition which is an important consequence
of the well known Hering-Breuer reflex. The
simultaneous inhibition of breathing and heart
movements is a significant physiological correla-
tion for diving, but it is probably not peculiar to
diving animals. I believe that the factor of car-
diac inhibition is only quantitatively more con-
spicuous in the divers, and that it also occurs to a
less noticeable degree in all mammals.

Aucust 29, 1936 | THE

COLLECTING NET 205

BIOLOGY IN THE COLLEGES

THE TREND OF BIOLOGICAL RESEARCH
AT AMHERST

While there is no formulated program of re-
search in biology at Amherst, the activities of the
staff lie in the general field of development. Work
in genetics, both for its own sake and as a tool
for the analysis of developmental and evolutionary
processes, is going on under the supervision of
Professor Plough and Dr. Child; operative ex-
perimentation on the phenomena of induction and
regeneration is directed by Professor Schotte;
studies on the physics and chemistry of ditferen-
tiation and growth are supervised by Professor
Glaser.

Through cooperation by the Rockefeller Found-
ation the material needs for these investigations
have recently been greatly improved. Added to
the accumulated stores of chemicals, glassware,
electrical and optical apparatus, some of it not to
be found everywhere, we now have a satisfactory
animal room, excellent photographic equipment,
and a constant temperature room which is a model
of its kind.

In addition to the undergraduate assistantships,
three graduate assistantships are available. The
salaries range from $600 to $1000. The gradu-
ates are usually candidates for the Master's De-
gree which in this department requires two years.
Candidates spend most of their time learning how
to work. They are permitted to take only two
formal cognate courses per year and to participate
in a small amount of teaching. Together with
undergraduate honors men and staff, the candi-
dates for the M.A. take part in a weekly seminar
devoted to the more significant current literature ;
to problems of general interest; and to work in
progress within the department. Library facili-
ties are necessarily limited. Annual departmental
expenditure for books and journals is about
$1200. These include, in addition to the leading
serials in our general sphere of interest, all of the
outstanding review journals and most of the ma-
jor handbooks. Orro GLASER

RESEARCH IN BIOLOGY AT UNION COLLEGE

During the past year biological research has
been carried on at Union College by the five fac-
ulty members and two graduate students. The re-
searches have been aided by grants from the so-
ciety of Sigma Xi and the Rockefeller Founda-
tion.

Dr. Ernest E. Dale is continuing his work on
variegation and segregation of genetic factors in
Petunia and Salpiglossis. He “has already dis-
covered a number of seerecting factors and an
allelomorphic series. Olive Reese Leonard
is cooperating with Dr. ibe in the study of the
cytology of the variegations.

Dr. Leonard B. Clark is continuing his work
on hght reactions in arthropods and is now en-
gaged in a quantitative study of the light reactions
of amoeba.

Dr. Samuel Leonard is continuing his work on
the endocrinology of reproduction and in this
work has been assisted by a graduate student, Mr.
Virgil Sager, who also undertook a problem of his
own on the effect of endocrines on the rythmical
contractions of the uterus of the rabbit.

Dr. Allen B. Scott is continuing the study of
some cytological problems arising from one of the
most unusual life histories to be found among the
insects. A further study is being made of a uni-
polar spermatocyte “division” and oogenesis in
two paedogenetic parthenogenetic larvae of the
beetle, Micromalthus.

Under the direction of Dr. James W. Mavor,
Mr. Peter Scyjkowski, a graduate student, in-
vestigated the variation of the latent period in the
contraction of the frog’s gastrocnemius muscle.

The results of these investigations were report-
ed at a special meeting under the auspices of Sig-
ma Xi which consisted of short papers and dem-
onstrations by the investigators.

James W. Mavor

Introducing

Proressor RicHARD WEISSENBERG, formerly ex-
traordinary professor of embryology and micro-
scopic anatomy at the Anatomical Biological In-
stitute of the University of Berlin.

Professor Weissenberg was born in Breslau and
attended the Universities of Freiburg and Berlin,
receiving his doctorate from the latter in 1906. He
Was assistant to Professor Oscar Hertwig at the
Anatomical-Biological Institute of Berlin for 16
years.

Professor Weissenberg has written a textbook
on human embryology from the point of view of
comparative embryology, besides some fifty other
papers. His research has been mainly in the fields
of virus diseases, parasitic protozoa, cytology and
embryology.

In the past year he has published two works,
researches concerning the schedule of organ rudi-
ments in the embryo of lamprey by the method
of localized vital staining (April and July, 1936).

Professor Weissenberg arrived in America on
August 8 and he will be in Woods Hole until
about Labor Day. His lecture at the Marine Bi-
ological Laboratory on Monday, August 24, was
on the subject of “The Lymphocystis disease of
Fishes and its Significance for Intracellular Para-
sitism: a Contribution to the Knowledge of the
Virus Diseases.” Before he sails for Germany on
October 10, he plans to visit several of the promi-
nent American universities. ais bi

206

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI. No. 99

The Collecting Net

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
2t marine biological laboratories

Editorial: Ware Cattell, Elizabeth Thornton, Ur-
sula Reinhardt and Annaleida Snyder Cattell.

Business: Arthur C. Stirling, Amy Gamble, Boris
Gorokhoff and Marjorie Higgins.

Entered as second-class matter July 11, 1935, at
the U. S. Post Office at Woods Hole, Massachusetts,
under the Act of March 3, 1879.

INITIAL GIFT TO SCHOLARSHIP FUND

We consider it a great privilege this week to
be able to announce our first gift of twenty-five
dollars to finance the work of The Biological
Scholarship Association. The sum was donated
by a distinguished medical man who asks that his
hame remain unknown.

It is our hope that this is the first of many
similar donations from people who realize the
worth of the program of The Biological Scholar-
ship Association.

GENETICS SOCIETY MEETING

The annual summer conference of the Genetics
Society of America will convene in Woods Hole
on Thursday, September 3rd. Dr. M. Demerec
of the Carnegie Institute of Washington at Cold
Spring Harbor, Long Island, has been appointed
to arrange the program of scientific meetings and
Dr. B. R. Speicher of Columbia, now doing sum-
mer work in Woods Hole, is the local representa-
tive.

For three successive years, ever since the inau-
guration of the summer sessions, the Society has
chosen to meet in Woods Hole because of the fa-
cilities available here and because of the central
location between Maine and Long Island where
many of the members are stationed. A large rep-
resentation is expected from Cold Spring Harbor
and there are several members who are already
summering here. The meetings, ordinarily held
during the last week of August, were moved
ahead this year so as to allow any members plan-
ning to attend the Tercentenary Celebration at
Harvard to proceed to Boston from Woods Hole.

The conference will open Thursday evening
with two lectures. On Friday morning there will
be a symposium. In the afternoon a series of
demonstrations will be given in the Old Lecture
Hall, the demonstration being a fairly new and
nore interesting method of presenting material
and takes the place of the formal paper. The
complete program is found on page 201 of this
Issue.

Dr. Speicher has planned a beach party for the
members Friday night and will take them in the
IVinifred to Tarpaulin Cove for swimming and a
clam bake,

NOTES FROM SCRIPPS INSTITUTION OF
OCEANOGRAPHY

(Received August 22)

Mr. Ursel S. Armstrong, who has been assis-
tant to Director Vaughan in the study of foramin-
ifera since last November, left the Institution on
Friday to enter the University of California at
Berkeley in graduate study and to be an assistant
there in the Museum of Paleontology.

Messrs. John Lyman and Theodore Winnick,
assistants in the chemical laboratory for the sum-
iner, have returned to the University of California
at Berkeley.

Mr, Embert Le Lacheur, U. S. Coast and Geo-
detic Survey, Division of Tides and Currents, and
Mr. Leshe G. Hubert of Santa Ana, were recent
visitors at the Scripps Institution.

Prof. Rk. R. Huestis, Department of Zoology,
University of Oregon, Eugene, visited the Insti-
tution on Tuesday of last week. Professor Hues-
tis was a research assistant and graduate student
here some years ago.

Prof. Leonard Loeb and family returned to the
University of California at Berkeley after a sum-
mer spent at the Institution.

Prof. T. Buck, Department of Mathematics at
the University of California, was a week-end visi-
tor at the Scripps Institution.

Mr. Bradley T. Scheer, assistant and graduate
student in the physiological laboratory at Scripps
Institution of Oceanography, was married on Iri-
day of last week to Miss Marlin Ray of Holly-
wood. The young couple are living on the
grounds of the Institution.

On Monday evening, August 24, at eight
o'clock, Prof. R. B. Cowles, University of Cali-
fornia at Los Angeles, will speak in the reading
room of the library of the Scripps Institution, on
the subject, “Beauty in unexpected places.” All
interested are cordially invited to attend.

Dr. and Mrs. T. Wayland Vaughan and Miss
Caroline Vaughan will be at home on Wednesday
afternoon, August 26th, at the Scripps Institution
Community House, in honor of the new director,
Prof. Harald Sverdrup, Mrs. Sverdrup, and Miss
Anne Margarethe Sverdrup, and to introduce
them to the members of the Institution and resi-
dents of San Diego and La Jolla.

Dr. H. U. Sverprup of the Geophysical Insti-
tute of Bergen, Norway, and Mrs. Sverdrup,
stopped briefly in Woods Hole as guests of Dr.
and Mrs. Henry B. Bigelow who are living in the
DuBois Cottage on Penzance Point. They were
on their way to La Jolla, California, where Dr,
Sverdrup will take over the duties of director of
the Scripps Institution of Oceanography on Sep-
tember 1.

I RS

Aucust 29, 1936 |

THE, COLLECTING NET

207

ITEMS OF INTEREST

Dr. FE, LozwEnsrern from Goettingen Univer-
sity, recently gave a demonstration lecture on the
newest developments in analytical and micro-bal-
ances.

Prorressor H. E. Crampron, head of the zool-
ogy department at Barnard College, ee
University, is at his home in Woods Hole for
short time continuing work on his South Sea te
lands study. Professor Louise Gregory, also of
the zoology department at Barnard College, has
been visiting Professor and Mrs. Calkins here for
a few days.

Dr. W. O. NELsoN, assistant professor of anat-
omy at Yale University, drove down by automo-
bile last week from New Haven in order to con-
fer with Dr. Edgar Allen, who has spent a large
part of the summer here. Dr. Walter Miles, head
of the psychology department at Yale, drove up
with Dr. Nelson. In the afternoon Drs. Allen,
Miles, and Nelson took a sailing trip on Dr. Al-
len’s boat.

Dr. THeEopor von Branp will be at the School
of Hygiene and Public Health of Johns Hopkins
University next fall.
stitute for Tropical Medicine in Hamburg, Ger-
many, and for the past two years he has been
working with Dr. August Krogh on metabolism of
invertebrates. Dr. von Brand came to the United
States in March.

Dr. SerGe Morcutis of the faculty of medicine
at the University of Nebraska and Mrs. Morgulis
recently announced the marriage of their daugh-
ter, Edwine, to Monsieur Pierre Racine, “Audi-
teur au Conseil d’Etat” at Marseilles, France.

Dr. Cuarces D, SNybeR, professor of physiol-
ogy at Johns Hopkins University, 1s spending a
few days in Woods Hole. He has been busy
writing up manuscripts on his experimental
studies, he has also just completed a_ statistical
study on the Olympic Games which will be of
much general interest.

Dr. AND Mrs. MeLvin KNIsLey will sail on
the S. S. American Banker for London on Sep-
tember 18. Dr. Knisley, who is a fellow of the
Rockefeller Institute, will work under Dr. August
Krogh, 1920 Nobel Prize winner, at the Institute
of Physiology, Copenhagen, in the field of experi-
mental physiology.

Dr. JouneBuck, who received his Ph.D. at the
Johns Hopkins University in 1936, was in Ja-
maica this summer on a grant-in-aid from the Na-
tional Research Council. He is to be at the Cali-
fornia Institute of Technology for the winter
1936-7 on a National Research Council fellowship.

He was formerly at the In-.

Dr. Ruri SrockinG LyNcH is teaching biology
at the Maryland State College in Towson, Mary-
land. She has spent the summer at her home
near Baltimore.

INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY CLASS NOTES

During the last two weeks the invertebrates
have been on display. The exhibition of speci-
mens brought back from the Hadley Harbor trip
took place m the lobby of the new laboratory
building. In spite of competition by the Choral
Society in the auditorium, the demonstration was
admired by many interested people. It is hoped
that the exhibit evoked as much enjoyment in
those who observed as it did in those who collect-
ed and prepared the material.

Our held trips continue to be successful. The
Lagoon Pond trip was even written up for one of
the Vineyard papers by a wide-awake, if desperate,
reporter. Our recent dredging excursion was note-
worthy in that the morning group, collecting in
dsuzzards Bay, while not returning with many
specimens, did bring back all the breakfast it
started out with, in spite of very rough weather ;
the afternoon section, collecting in the Sound,
struck better dredging grounds and returned with
a good haul. Among the rarer forms were the
pelecypod mollusks, Cardium and Pandora. Dur-
ing a recent private collecting trip one of the
members of the class found the interesting nudi-
branch mollusk, Scyllaea, a form seldom reported
here in the tide-water zone.

The fracas on the waterfront two weeks ago
which was witnessed by a large pre-lecture group
was the soft-ball game climaxing a week of heck-
ling between the challenging south-side polychetes
and the challenged north-side oligochetes. Though
this game was played as much in a marine envi-
ronment as possible, the oligochetes won by a
score of six to one, since which time there has
been no talk of soft-ball games. The only casualty
was one broken automobile window, smashed by
a line drive into left field.

The Invertebrate class entertained at tea one
evening last week. The members of the class,
seventeen of which wait in the Mess, feel capable
of serving tea to their instructors because mid-
night lunches are now a regular institution—a re-
vival for those spending the night in the lab, and
a lure to those desiring to leave at dusk. Any
student would say that the instructors and their
wives enjoyed the gathering, though it was evi-
dent that several were not used to the late hours
the students have been keeping. Our next social
gathering before the picnic, to which we are eager-
ly looking forward, will take place during the day
time. Dayip BisHop

208

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI. No. 99

NY. State Fish Hatcheries + Carnegie Institution - Blackford Hall dormitory

+ Main Building +

Laboratory buildings

Residences

vi wz wigan =
a2 FS

== aE Cold

FROM THE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY AT
COLD SPRING HARBOR
(Received August 20, 1936)

Mrcroscore ILLUMINATION SYSTEMS

At a recent seminar discussion meeting of the
Drosophila group at Carnegie Institution, Cold
Spring Harbor, the relative merits of various sys-
tems of microscope illumination and of available
lamps were discussed. Dr. Max Poser of the
Bausch and Lomb Company, a student and col-
league of Professor Abbe at Jena and long asso-
ciated with Zeiss, gave an exposition of the opti-
cal principles involved in critical illumination for
high-aperture condensers and objectives.
light source for alternating current he recom-
mended a six-volt ribbon-flament tungsten incan-
descent lamp and for direct current a 110 volt
“point-o-light.” Both these sources are large in
area and uniform in intensity within that area.
He emphasized that the lens of the lamp con-
denser should be of high quality-aspheric to give
a flat plane image of the source and achromatic
so that the different wave lengths should coincide
in focus in that plane. He described the standard
“Kohler system’ of illumination, which consists
in filling the aperture of the condenser (corre-
sponding to the aperture of the objective used)
with the image of the light source brought to a
focus in the plane of the iris of the substage con-
denser.

The other speaker was Dr. Calvin Bridges who
described the illuminating system developed by
himself and contrasted it with the Kohler system.
Here the light from the tungsten ribbon is brought
to a focus not at the iris of the substage condenser
but in air at a position some 30 Cm away from
the microscope condenser. In the plane at which
a sharp image of the ribbon filament is projected
into air an iris diaphragm is mounted. ‘Then the
immersed substage condenser is focused so as to
project into the plane of the object under exami-
nation images both of the ribbon filament and of
the circular opening of the closed-down iris.

Dr. Poser commented that this “field-iris” sys-
tem controls the quality of light in a manner not

BIOLOGICAL L

Spring

As a:

Harbor) >

attainable with the Kohler system, especially in
that only useful light is admitted and hence maxi-
mum contrast and brilliance without haze are se-
cured for the image under examination. How-
ever, for coiled-filament lamps the Kohler system
is advisable in order to iron out the inequalities
of brightness inherent in the source.

NOTES FROM THE SCRIPPS INSTITUTION
OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Dr. Blodwen Lloyd, lecturer in bacteriology at
the Royal Technical College, Glasgow, arrived on
Tuesday of last week to spend three months’
leave from her college work in study in the bac-
teriological laboratories of the Scripps Institution.
After working originally on phytoplankton, Dr.
Lloyd turned her attention to bacteriology. She
has studied at the Marine Station at Naples, the
Marine Station at Plymouth, England, and com-
bines her lecture work at Glasgow with labora-
tory work at the Marine Biological Station at
Millport, Buteshire.

Mr. Horace R. Byers, who recently spent a
year and a halt at the Scripps Institution work-
ing in meteorology with Prof. G. F. McEwen,
has received his doctor’s degree at the Massachu-
setts Institute of Technology, and has just been
appointed to an instructorship in the U. S.
Weather Bureau at Washington, D. C., where his
work will be to instruct the employees of the
Weather Bureau in modern methods of meteorol-
ogy.

Dr. R. B. Cowles, Assistant Professor of Biol-
ogy at the University of California at Los An-
geles, will lecture on Monday evening, Septem-
ber 2, at 8:00 o'clock in the library of the Scripps
Institution. His subject will be: “Natural history
of the South African Bush Veldt.” All persons
interested in the subject will be welcome.

Dr. B. M. Allen, Department of Zoology, Uni-
versity of California at Los Angeles, arrived at
the Scripps Institution on Monday. He expects
to use the facilities in the Institution laboratories
for research on the physiology of fishes.

Aucusr 29, 1936 | INBUS, (COMMIS CMU, INI

209

AABAdAedeee odes se sesssssessesesee seme

Excellent for

* Laboratory demonstrations

* Small lecture groups

° Research workers
Scientific drawings

Wax reconstructions

SENT ON REQUEST

25 EAST 26th STREET

The apparatus can readily be shifted from one research
office or classroom to another and can be supplied with

built-in mechanical stage for 3x1 or 3x2 Slides.

PROSPECTUS AND OTHER CATALOGS

PROMAR

Microscopic Projection and Drawing Apparatus

For all table and wall projection work except large lecture rooms

CLAY-ADAMS COMPANY, Inc.

NEW YORK

WHEN IN NEW YORK
VISIT OUR
DISPLAY ROOM

LD SEAL

NON-CORROSIVE
MICROSCOPE

LASSES

eee / DO NOT FOG
CLAY ADAMS CoO.

Exclusive Wholesale Distributors

25 EAST 26th STREET, NEW YORK

PE 0 OD 0D OT 0D 0) 0 0-0 0 01 1 1) 0-0-0 0-0-0 0-0-0000 0-0-0 C0 0 0) 0 ee ee ee) ee

VVUVVVVVVVVVVVVIVVUVVVVVVVVVUVVVVVVVVVCVICRT

RECTANGULAR

MUSEUM JARS

Made of clear white
glass, free from bub-
bles, stria or sand-
blows. The glass is
triple annealled to pre-
vent breakage result-
ing from temperature
changes or internal
strain when jars are on
display or stored. Cor-
responding numbers are
etched on covers and

jars, thus insuring per-
fect fit and sealing.

Complete Range of
Sizes in Stock

Write for Circular
CLAY-ADAMS COMPANY

25 East 26th Street New York

2 0S 1S EE 1 OES 0 OO OD | ED

210

THE COLLECTING NET

| Vor. XI. No. 99

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLICATIONS
RESUMES OF RECENTLY REVISED BIOLOGICAL TEXTS

COLLEGE ZOOLOGY, R. W. Hegner, Fourth Edi-
tion. xvi + 742 pp. 497 illustrations. The Macmil-
lan Company. 1936.

OUTLINES OF GENERAL ZOOLOGY, H. H. New-
man, Third Edition. xxvii + 661 pp. 277 illustra-
tions, The Macmillan Company. 1936.

FOUNDATIONS OF BIOLOGY, L. L. Woodruff,
Fifth Edition. xvi + 583 pp. 377 illustrations. The
Macmillan Company. 1936.

MANUAL OF BIOLOGY, G. A. Baitsell, Fifth Edi-
tion. ii + 434 pp. 12 plates. The Macmillan Com-
pany. 1936. :

A pretty inclusive assembly of zoological peda-
gogues is watching with interest the Macmillan
textbook derby, certainly “run off” impartially, in
which are entered the familiar quartet of texts by
Baitsell, Hegner, Newman and Woodruff; all
these were conditioned and passed under the wire
of new revisions last spring. Each is so well
known and widely adopted as to require no words
of introduction; quite otherwise. So, too, no re-
viewer may declare any one as especially “super-
ior,’ for each professor uses that designation for
the particular text which chances to parallel his
own whims and concepts as to a “best college
course.”

“With prejudice towards none,’ a few words
may be ventured regarding the main features of
the new editions :

“CoLLEGE ZooLocy’—R. W. Hegner.

The writer indicates his “continued conviction
that the method of teaching which directs attention
in phylogenetic groups and leads to the deduction
of general principles is superior to any other ;”
and his aim is to present such materials as will be
of mutual advantage to a) the many who will
take no other zoological courses and b) those
who will make biology in some form a life-interest
professionally.

The general plan of earlier editions has thus
been retained, i.e. a phylum-by-phylum presenta-
tion of the animal kingdom, from “lowest” to
“highest,” largely concerned with structure; with
less attention to physiology, embryology, life-his-
tories, and economics, though none of these con-
siderations is omitted. One may question the
allotment of 65 pages to protozoa, since this means
more than as much as is devoted to platyhel-
minths arachnids, molluses and echinoderms com-
bined. The special relation of protozoa to man,
of course, helps to justify some of this.

Furthermore, the reviewer seriously questions
the value of a “History of Zoology,” or of **Palae-
ontology,” when presented in the limits of three
pages each.

The postponement of “Heredity and Genetics”
to a more posterior portion of the text 1s doubt-

less a wise change; many new illustrations have
been added and others greatly improved. As a
textbook written frankly as an analysis of all the
phyla of animals each in its logical turn, Hegner
is probably the best available undergraduate text,
and the new edition will doubtless gain even wider
endorsement than those preceding; and that is
saying much.

“OUTLINES OF GENERAL ZooLocy’—H. H. New-
man.

This text, now metamorphosing on its 12th
birthday, comes forth almost as a mutation from
its preceding plan of organization and chapter
content. ‘Lhe general idea of emphasis on prin-
ciples, written up from a very broad point of view,
—Life units are put in their cosmic setting —1s
continued from previous editions; and, in the re-
viewer s opinion, is done in most excellent man-
ner.

Presented in six “Parts,” the first deals with
definitions, problems, nature of materials, values,
subdivisions, and history of biology, especially of
zoology. Certain persons may easily question
whether the student mind so early feels an inter-
est in the history of a field with which he is so
slightly familiar. If a story of the evolution of
the horse is in the cart, will it not be more inter-
esting after one knows something about the horse
in the shafts? However, other excellent texts
present similar historical reviews as introductory
matter.

The origin, nature, and organization of living
substance with its variety and classification (Part
11) is followed by a study of representative types
for about 275 pages, with a natural and desirable
emphasis on the chordates, via the frog (65 pp.).
After an excellent resumé of biological mechan-
isms for maintenance and adjustment, the final
section deals with the numerous factors which
contribute to an understanding of the most sig-
nificant of all biological concepts, viz evolution.

The writer has brought to the whole work his
usual excellent mastery of narrative, together with
a fine sense of pedagogical procedure and _ philo-
sophical values.

“FOUNDATIONS OF BioLocy’—L. L. Woodruff.

This rather unique and very extensively used
text now enters on its 15th year. No one can
doubt the fitness of its title, or offer more than the
least criticism of its remarkable prose composi-
tion; and this latter quality is cause for gratitude
in any text.

While the subject matter of the main body of
the new edition is presented under the same chap--

Aucust 29, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

ew MACMILLAN

4
Ss <r

GENERAL
BIOLOGY

James Watt Mavor
$4.00

and

LABORATORY MANUAL
IN GENERAL BIOLOGY

by
J. W. Mavor and L. B. Clark

To be published in Sep-
tember. $1.75 probable.

This new text presents a com-
plete course in general biology,

covering plants, animals, and
general principles. The whole
presentation is exceptionally

vivid and interesting, with em-
phasis on the particular impor-
tance of the science of biology
to man; and is especially well-
adapted to the modern general
course. One of its special fea-
tures is the close correlation, in
the section on vertebrates, of
the study of the anatomy and
physiology of the frog with that
of man. About a fifth of the
entire text is devoted to a clear,
well-coordinated study of prin-
ciples. The Laboratory Manual,
to be ready in September, will
be a useful adjunct to the text.
A wide choice of types is of-
fered, with detailed laboratory
directions and sets of printed
outline drawings which should
considerably increase the effi-
ciency and accuracy of the
student’s work.

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY

New texts and reference books
in the biological sciences

The Living World
By Samuel H. Wiliams To be published in the fall

A pioneer in its field, this book offers for the first time a
comprehensive text on nature study suitable for college
courses in nature study, field biology, or elementary ecology.
The book has been built upon material used in the author’s
courses given for a number of years at the University of
Pittsburgh and is in a very teachable form. The book is
fully illustrated, and contains useful appendices.

The Cranial Muscles of Vertebrates

By F. H. Edgeworth $30.00
A summary of the knowledge obtained, during the last cen-
tury and a half, on the comparative anatomy and embryol-
ogy of the cranial muscles of Vertebrates .. . ‘“Will become
an historic volume .. . Never before has such a vast accum-
ulation of knowledge . . .been summarized in a single vol-
ume.’’—The Medical Press.

Collected Scientific Papers of
Sir William Bate Hardy

Edited by E. K. Rideal $18.00
These papers, beginning with enquiries into the nature of
living matter, record Hardy’s investigations into the physico-
chemical properties of proteins and the theory and practice
of lubrications ... ‘“‘A veritable mine of information, enter-
tainment and stimulation.’’—Journal of the American Chem-
ical Society.

The Integration of the Endocrine
System

By Sir Walter Langdon-Brown 75¢:
A brief history of research and an account of the modern

knowledge of the ductless glands and their part in health
and disease.

60 FIFTH AVENUE, NEW YORK

212

Die THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI. No. 99

ter titles as used in the preceding edition and
chances to cover precisely the same number of
pages, scarcely a paragraph has not been some-
what modified, and always, it seems, in the direc-
tion of refinement. Not a little new material has
been added. Noticeable changes include the fol-
lowing: a) Replacement of Amoeba by Parame-
cium, as frontispiece; especially in this case, by
all means! b) Considerable change from former
editions in the discussion of germ cells, develop-
ment and inheritance. c) The relationships table
is less committal to special theory. d) von Haller
is added to the portrait gallery and the Comte de
Buffon looks out from a new frame. e) Through-
out the book the illustrations (increased by 81)
have been greatly improved as to size and dis-
tinctness (often by redrawing) and by an almost
consistent direct labelling of structures with names
rather than with letters or numbers referring to
explanatory legends. Many thanks for this! f)
Two new chapters appear: “Review of the Plant
Kingdom,” 24 pp.; and “Review of the Animal
Kingdom,” 55 pp., which, as outlines, leave the
instructor free to enlarge on this phase of the sub-
ject as much as he likes.

If one is presenting a course in biology, rather
than in zoology only, there is plenty of evidence
that few texts, if any, have met the approval of as
many teachers as has the “Foundation ;” the new
edition will further prove this statement.

“MANUAL OF BroLocy’’—G. A. Baitsell.

This volume as life-long companion to Wood-
ruff’s “Foundations” is also familiar to everyone.
Planned primarily as a laboratory guide, it is far
more than the terms “guide” or “manual’’ usually
connote,

Preceding the 63 pages of directions for labora-
tory studies of specific types, tissues and embryo-
logical material, are 348 pages of carefully written
descriptions of the same things, supplemented by
much important ecological information, plus dis-
cussions of associations, life-histories and bio-eco-
nomics.

The new edition has been extensively rewritten,
hardly a paragraph remaining as it was in the 4th
(1930) printing. A dozen interesting plates have
been added and a useful list of reference reading
has been appended to each section of descriptive
matter. Such an amount of new material has
been added that the total book pages have in-
creased from 369 to the above-mentioned 434; the
descriptive material is amplified by 120 pages. In-
sect study now includes the grasshopper as well as
the honey-bee ; vertebrates receive increased atten-
tion, but the echinoderms are not given place;
slightly more space is allowed the subject of para-

sitism, and insects as disease carriers are cited.
The laboratory direction pages are no longer per-
forated and blank pages for notes are not con-
tinued.

Again one must state that this book contains

as much zoological information as many a treatise
which moves under the name of “textbook.” The
designation “manual,” as that term is generally
understood, is too modest and inadequate for such

a

Fish-Schurman Corp.:

{. Machlett and Son:

volume as this. R. A. BupDINGTON

NEW CATALOGUES
APPARATUS AND SUPPLIES

254 HT—“Ultra Thermostat
after Hoeppler,” decribes use of the Ultra Ther-
mostat; for the maintenance of any desired tem-
perature at a set point over a range from —35 to
+300° C. with an accuracy of 0.02° C. by means
of a circulating liquid.

251 HV— “‘Hoeppler Viscosimeter,’”’ describes
viscosity determinations by the falling ball prin-
ciple of gases, fluids, oils and greases; readings
directly in centipoises; viscosity range 0.01 to
1,000,000 centipoises; accuracy 0.1 to 0.5%.

256 UV—describes Ubbelohde Viscosimeter —
viscosity determinations by the suspended level
principle; viscosity readings in centistokes on all
mineral oils; accuracy within plus minus 0.1%.

Cat. 4892E—‘‘Jena Colored Optical Filter Glass-
es,” special catalogue describing Jena optical fil-
ters; uniform, stable, selective transmission in all
regions of the spectrum, full description and
transmission values on each type of filter.

Cat. 232LE—“Jena Fritted Glass Filters,” cata-
logue describing the use of fritted glass filters of
various types and sizes for all filtration purposes;
suggestions for solving filtration problems.
“S"’—Schaerr Heavy Duty
Shaker. Describes a new and unusual laboratory
shaker, outstanding for its silent operation, ad- —
justability, sturdy construction, low maintenance
cost, portability, and self-anchoring characteris-
tics. January 1, 1936.

CURRENTS IN THE HOLE

At the following hours (Daylight Saving
Time) the current in the Hole turns to run
from Buzzards Bay to Vineyard Sound:

Date A.M. P.M.
August 29 a 2EOZ ees
August 30 ~ 2359) see
August 31 % 3:46 4:03
September 1 4:30 4:52
September 2 wail e 5V34K0)
September 3 6:03 6:30
September 4 6:49 7a
September 5 UBVi fh 211)
September 6 8:30 9:04
September 7 91:23) -10k06

In each case the current changes approxi-

mately six hours later and runs from the
Sound to the Bay.

Aucust 29,1936] = == =THE COLLECTING NET _ as

SIMPLIFIED MICRO-PROJECTION APPARATUS

COMPACT — BRILLIANT ILLUMINATION — PORTABLE

Carbon are, controlled by two coaxial milled knobs, permitting
single and joint movement by one hand while the position of
the crater is observed on a ground glass.

With Reversing
Prism, 100 Pairs
of Carbons and
Resistance, but
without micro-
scope.

For 110 V. D.C.
$148.50

For 110 V. A.C.
$157.00

Catalog Micro
451

728 So. Hill Street,
Los Angeles

New vor = CARE ZEISS. INC.

Cambridge
Mechanical Mallet

His Automatic Mallet for removing
rock from fossils of large and medium
size greatly reduces labor and time—in
some cases to one tenth what is ordinar-
ily required. Delivers up to 700 blows
per minute. Force of blow variable over
wide range by simple screw adjustment
and use of driving springs of different

strengths. These springs and different 4

size chisels are quickly and easily inter- j

changeable. i
Well balanced—free from vibration—

simple to use. '

1

1

:

!

|

|

|

Send for Further Information

CAMBRIDGE

3732 GRAND CENTRAL TERMINAL, NEW YORK

[ Vou. XI. Now ge

Ot ewes TRE COLLECTING NET

Apparatus for
Determining Dust in Air

Including IMPINGER APPARATUS
with Necessary Accessories
Complete listing of Microscopes and Micro-

scope Accéssories for the microscopic

test.

Write for details, specifying your
requirements.

EIMER & AMEND

Est. 1851 Inc. 1897

HEADQUARTERS FOR LABORATORY
APPARATUS AND CHEMICAL REAGENTS

Third Ave., 18th to 19th St.
NEW YORK, N. Y.

|| RESPIRATION
| GLASSWARE
}

cella <P

ba pe 1 amincor

ae i ~ °
wf )

| $7) $. |“ Interchangeable
“—~ Zl (TS) joints used

throughout
e

Made of
“Pyrex”
glass

Available
from
Stock

Above: the
Dixon-Keilin Flask |
(Cf. Dixon, ‘““Manometric |
Methods,” pp. 96-107 (1934). Vi

Z |

AMERICAN INSTRUMENT CO., Inc.

Silver Spring, Md.

8010-8020 Georgia Ave.

(ish

REINFORCED
for HIGH SPEED

High speed and large capacities demanded by many
centrifuge users today, call for greater strength in
heads, cups and protective guards. Proper rein-
forcement of our Size 1, Type SB and Size 2 Cen-
trifuges permits fifty per cent more speed with con-
tainers up to 250 ml. in capacity.

REINFORCED
Size 1, Type SB Centrifuge with Stand
Higher speed, with the resulting increase of two
and a half times the relative centrifugal force,
affords a tremendous advantage in the modern

laboratory.

THE MULTISPEED ATTACHMENT

has a maximum speed of 18,000 R.P.M. and can be
used in the Type SB and Size 2 Centrifuges, when
equipped with welded steel guard. Relative Cen-
‘ trifugal Force, about
nine times greater
than that of the ordi-
nary centrifuge, can be
obtained with the Mul-
tispeed Attachment for
samples of material up
to 40 ml. capacity.

Bulletins by mail or at your Dealer’s

INTERNATIONAL EQUIPMENT CO.

352 Western Avenue Boston, Mass.

Makers of Fine Centrifuges

———

y

Aucust 29, 1936 ]

_THE COLLECTING NET _

Choose Your Micros coyae

FROM THIS BOOKLET!

IF your work is in the field . . . in the
laboratory . . . or both, you'll want this
new catalog of Spencer Wide Field Bin-
ocular Microscopes and Accessories.
Listing over sixty different microscope
outfits, it shows equipment that will make
your work easier . . . more efficient. The
equipment ranges from the simplest out-

fits with plain stage or petri-dish to the
superb Inclinocular Body Tube and Mul-
tiple Revolving Nosepiece mounted on a
new elaborate stand that provides for
examining an object anywhere within a
circle four feet in diameter.

Write for this Catalog M-67 today.
Please address Dept. J-84.

Spencer Lens Company
Buffalo New York

216 THE COLLECTING NET _ [ Vou. XI. No. 99
Ait Vip

A PHOTOMICROGRAPH

Wil never forge,

Only the Camera can produce for you an exact photographic record. Notes
and sketches cannot! Your observations can be recorded by~the camera—in
most cases—as easily and as quickly as you can take snapshots of events you

!
Ki R E E 3 want to remember in every day life!

PEAS et UI B & L Photomicrographic Equipment GBVP represents the finest photomicro-
on 9% x 13” card. One graphic equipment money can buy.
Side CAnrTES plas mia Spring suspension, mounted in live rubber at all four corners eliminates vibra-
suggestions for install- ; 5 3 ; pears ca aA cae : 5‘ :
inowaldaricioonilistlor tion and gives the instrument its remarkable stability. Its permanently aligned

s Kae vee structure whereby the illuminating unit is mounted on the same bed which
equipment and _ esti- ts Rete t Sr Ss ge A 3 5 5

carries the microscope plate makes for rapid observations under identical con-

mates of costs. Other
side is a ‘Knock Be-
fore Entering”’ sign for
your dark room door Write for complete information and details of the accessories available for
with rules for using different types of work including the Ortho Stereo Camera for making stereo-
dark room. Sent on scopic peoromic OeTEDRS: Bausch & Lomb Optical Co., 671 St. Paul Street,
request. Rochester, ,

WE MAKE OUR OWN GLASS TO
INSURE STANDARDIZED PRODUCTION

ditions. The elements are always in position, ready to use. You need not be
an optical engineer to use this equipment.

FOR YOUR GLASSES, INSIST ON BaL
ORTHOGON LENSES AND B & L FRAMES

Vol. XI, No. 9-10

DECEMBER, 1936

Annual Subscription, $2.00
Single Copies, 30 Cents.

RESEARCH FACILITIES OF THE U. S.
BUREAU OF FISHERIES

ELMER HIGGINS
Chief of the Division of Scientific Inquiry,
U. S. Bureau of Fisheries

In response to the growing interest in the con-
servation of natural resources and through the in-
fluence of the newly formed American Fish Cul-
turists Society, now the American Fisheries So-
ciety, Congress created in 1871

RELATIONS OF SYMMETRY IN THE
DEVELOPING EMBRYO!

Proressor Ross G. HARRISON

Chairman of the Department of Zoology,
Yale University

Samuel Butler has answered the old riddle of
the egg and the hen by reminding us that a hen
is only an egg’s way of making another egg. This
remarkable anticipation of the Weismann theory at
once states one of the most

a Commission of Fish and : perplexing biological problems
Fisheries with the duty of de- RM. BH. H. Calendar in its simplest form. The mys-
termining to what extent the terious cycle of hens and eggs
fish supply of our coasts PERIOD OF INSTRUCTION is resolved into a row of par-
rivers and lakes had declined ROLE a a ae eee
S56 E ¢ 1e development of a single
gee the Mee Ens ee Physiology: June 16 - July 24 egg into a hen and all spring-
recommending remedial meas- Brofesdon Daurencerlavine BART rE car aR
ures to the Congress and to See detroit eins aR
the State Legislatures. The Protozoology: June 19 - July 31 The e fe ae oe a Aa ae
ay he . . =-re are i ases
first commissioner; Spencer Professor Gary N. Calkins c “ 1 ; ves
eon Baird then assis- problem of reproduction. The

tant secretary of the Smith-
sonian Institution, established
the work of the new commis-
sion upon a firm foundation by
undertaking a program of

scientific studies of the fisher-

ies, the commercial and game

fish species on which they de-

Embryology: June 22 - July 28
Professor H. B. Goodrich

Botany: June 27 - September 3 |
Professor Wm. Randolph Taylor

Invertebrate Zoology: July 30 -
September 8
Professor T. H. Bissonnette

one arises from the lucky cir-
cumstance that the cooperation
of two parent cells is usually
required to initiate develop-
ment and is concerned with
the mixing and reassortment
of qualities from generation to
generation. Its rules are sim-
| ple and capable of precise for-

|

pend, and the organisms upon
' which fish feed or which prey
upon them.
| extensive a basis as facilities permitted and in ac-
os with the (Continued on page 252)
|

[This work was prosecuted upon as -

mulation. It is the modern

1 Preliminary report of a paper read at the Harvard
Tercentenary Conference, to be revised before final
publication.

| TABLE OF

Relations of Symmetry in the Developing
Embryo, Dr. Ross G. Harrison ...................... 217
Research Facilities of the U. S. Bureau of
Fisheries, Elmer Higgins ...0..0....0.0..0:cccccccccees 217
On the Mode of Operation of the “Organ-
BSatoOr srs ans SPeMANM 2..s.cc...ccs0-0).scec-, 226
The Fundamental Nature of the Respiratory
Rhythm, Sir Joseph Barcroft ......00000cccc0. 230

CONTENTS

The Nervous System, Dr. E. D. Adrian

eesti 233
Determination in the Early Development of
the Sea-urchin, Dr. Sven HoOrstadius .......... 236

Progress in Cytogenetics, Dr. C. B. Bridges ..244

Genetic Nature of Species Differences, Th.
Dobzhansky

The Nature of Mutations, I., Dr. M. Demerec 246
(Continued on page 260)

nh s
*y ne a,
aii Oy 5

on

DeEcEeMBER, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

Zug)

RELATIONS OF SYMMETRY IN THE DEVELOPING EMBRYO

science of genetics. The other phase, which is
concerned with the development of the individual,
has only begun to be touched by genetics. Em-
bryology has gone its way independently, without
a master hypothesis like the theory of the gene to
guide it.

Embryonic development consists of a series of
events which may be conveniently dated from the
time of maturation and fertilization. The egg
is quite as specific as the mature organism, in
that it develops only into an adult of its own
species. Environmental factors may produce
modifications, they may even change the sex, but
they do not change one species into another. There
is abundant evidence that each species has definite
chemical characteristics. Experiments in hetero-
plastic grafting and in species hybridization, the
serological study of blood relationship and the
chemical and crystallographic study of similar pro-
teins from different species all point unequivocally
to this conclusion. We must, therefore, assume
some sort of chemical configuration characteristic
of the protoplasm of each species of organism.

Because of the visible complexities which arise
in the embryo it is often said that development is
a change from the simple to the complex. This is
illusory, for the egg has implicitly all the charac-
ters of the species. Egg and organism are but
different phases of the same entity. While the
changes which we observe involve chemical and
physical transformations in the original egg sub-
stance, the latter must be assumed nevertheless to
preserve throughout the essentials of its specific
configuration.

Cells have a dual organization. They are com-
posed of nucleus and cytoplasm. The exact rela-
tions between these two constituents are obscure,
but there are certain relevant facts that may help
toward an understanding.

1) Neither nucleus nor cytoplasm can func-
tion indefinitely without the other, as shown by
numerous experiments on Protozoa.

2) When nucleus and cytoplasm of different
origin are associated together, sooner or later the
nucleus assumes control of the characters devel-
oped.

3) Nucleus and cytoplasm must not be of too
diverse an origin if they are to cooperate. Even
in mixtures between different species of the same

genus, disturbances usually arise, less marked in
complete hybrids than in merogonic hybrids, in
which all of the nuclear material is of one species
and all the cytoplasm of the other.

4) Practically all visible differentiations un-
dergone by the developing embryo take place in
the cytoplasm. It is with respect to this consti-
tuent that the various types of tissue cells differ.

5) Changes in the nucleus due to cytoplasmic
influence have been only rarely observed and then
only in somatic cells in contrast with germ cells,
as in the so-called diminution phenomenon first
described by Boveri in Ascaris.

Since the nucleus can act only with cytoplasm
of its own or closely related species and since all
differentiations are carried out in the cytoplasm,
we cannot regard the latter as purely neutral or
plastic material which can be immediately molded
by the nucleus. We must assume some cytoplas-
mic configuration, based upon its chemical compo-
sition, which fits with the nuclear composition.
This is borne out also by the following facts now
generally recognized.

The nuclear material has a definite orderly ar-
rangement and is precisely divided at each mitosis
and evenly distributed to the daughter cells. There
is no fundamental nuclear differentiation except
at the maturation divisions. On the other hand
the cytoplasm may be very unevenly divided both
as to quantity and quality, since there are already
visible regional differences in the egg before seg-
mentation and even before maturation. It
would be false, however, to conclude that these
cytoplasmic differentiations are due merely to vis-
ible materials accumulated in the different regions
of the egg, for in many cases distribution may be
changed by centrifuging without interfering with
normal development. Whatever the basis for
these differences, the cleavage process produces an
embryo made up of cells in which the nuclei are
alike, but the cytoplasm different.

The methods most generally used in experi-
mental embryology consist in the amputation or
incomplete separation of parts of the embryo or in
their rearrangement by compression, transplanta-
tion or centrifuging. They were devised for the
study of what has now come to be known as the
‘determination problem,’ which concerns itself

THE COLLECTING NET has been entered as second-class matter July 11, 1935, at the Post Office

‘at Woods Hole, Massachusetts, under the Act of March 3, 1879.
It is published weekly for ten weeks between June 1 and September 15

marine biological laboratories.

from Woods Hole and printed at The Darwin Press, New Bedford.
'the third floor of the Woods Hole station of the United States Bureau of Fisheries.

It is devoted to the scientific work at

Its editorial offices are situated on
Between June 1

(and October 1 communications should be addressed to Woods Hole, Massachusetts; at other times they
| should be directed to THE COLLECTING NET, Garrison, N. Y. Single copies cost 30c; a subscription

‘(containing not less than 280 pages) costs $2.00.

220

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 100

with the temporal and spatial restriction of poten-
cies of the several parts of the embryo as develop-
ment proceeds. They do not touch upon the actual
nature of the physical and chemical changes un-
derlying differentiation.

From the large mass of work done by these
methods one important generalization stands out.
In practically all eggs a part has the power to give
rise to more than it would if left in its normal sur-
roundings, and in many cases a part may give rise
to a whole. This applies to egg fragments, when
the nucleus is left intact, or to whole blastomeres
separated in cleavage stages or, in many cases,
also, to circumscript areas in much later stages
of development. The power of regulation
changes rapidly with development, especially im-
mediately after fertilization. Eggs of different
species differ immensely in this respect and in
some cases the regulatory power is reduced almost
to nil.

Even when there are regional differences in the
embryo, the prospective fate of cells may be
changed by subjecting them to different surround-
ings either within the embryo itself or in the me-
dium. In the sea urchin egg, which Horstadius
has submitted to a most exhaustive study, there
are tiers of cells in planes perpendicular to the
axis of the egg. Each plays a definite role in
normal development and when separated each
gives rise to a certain type of defective embryo.
Recombined in abnormal ways, the resulting em-
bryos may be either abnormal or normal, depend-
ing upon the balance between materials from the
two hemispheres of the egg. The experiments all
point to the existence of two gradients running in
opposite directions from pole to pole, the intensity
of the potencies of the cell tiers being a function
of the distance from the poles. The original po-
larity of the material is either preserved or else
modified according to definite rules.

Other eggs behave similarly. In the amphibia
not only are early segmentation and gastrulation
stages capable of regulation, but also later em-
bryos, where particularly the ectodermal areas
have been shown each to have diversified prospec-
tive potencies, only one of which is normally re-
alized. This quality of ‘wholeness’ in the parts of
the organism, particularly the embryo, has led to
much speculation and even to a system of philoso-
phy. It is the capital problem of embryology to
find the physico-chemical basis for it.

Since each nucleus carries the whole genom of
the individual, one might be inclined at first sight
to attribute the quality of ‘wholeness’ solely to it.
For reasons stated above this is inadmissible. We
must seek also in the cytoplasm, which effects the
differentiation, a basis for the characters of the
organism. This must be assumed to be some kind
of a ‘repeat’ configuration, in each unit of which

the qualities of the whole, including its symmetry
and polarity, are in some way implied. We have
to explain, then, how such a system can shake out
of itself the macroscopic design, composed of dif-
ferent organs and tissues, characteristic of the
adult organism.

Confronted with something we do not under-
stand, we naturally look for models which re-
semble the system in certain respects and thus
lead to a better understanding of it. Crystal
models have been employed in morphology for
years, but their use has often met with scornful
criticism. A rigid and angular crystal seems very
different from the living organism. In recent
years, however, the concept, crystalline, has been
much extended and the sharp distinction between
crystalloid and colloid, even that between solid and
liquid, has broken down. X-ray analysis shows
that many substances, formerly regarded as col-
loidal, have crystalline arrangement. Also, a para-
crystalline state, in which the mobility of liquids
is combined with a definite configuration is now
recognized. In the crystalline state atoms or atom
groups are arranged, as in a space lattice, each
point of which has the same relation to surround-
ing points as any other point has to its surround-
ing points.

Nearly all animals, like crystals, have character-
istic symmetry relations, of which the most com-
mon form is the bilateral symmetry found in rep-
resentatives of many different phyla. This is a
very low degree of symmetry, such as is found in
hemihedral crystals of the monoclinic system, but
in many coelenterates and particularly in the ra-

diolarians, the symmetry is of a higher de-
gree. In many animals, however, the superficial

bilateral form merely masks a more fundamental
asymmetry, which comes to fullest expression in
the gastropods, but is quite definite throughout the
vertebrates and possibly obtains to some extent in
all organisms. The protein molecule which con-
tains many asymmetric carbon atoms is also
asymmetric.

In asymmetric species, which are usually so in
one sense, individuals occasionally arise which are
asyminetric in the opposite sense, that is, are the
mirror image of the normal. Left handedness con-
stitutes a partial inversion of this kind, and more
rarely in man and other vertebrates complete situs
inversus of the viscera may occur. In each spe-
cies of snail the shell of all individuals is usually
coiled in one direction but here again individuals
may arise which are oppositely coiled. Crystals
also occur as rights and lefts, as do many chemi-
cal compounds, particularly those with asymmetric
carbon atoms. When such compounds are formed,
the right and left enantiomorphs always oceur in
equal quantities except when either directly or in-
directly the product of living organisms.

DECEMBER, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

221

Genetic experiments of Boycott, Diver, Gar-
stang and Turner, made with the pond snail Lim-
naea, in which inversely coiled individuals were
crossed with the normal, show that there is a cyto-
plasmic basis for the inverse symmetry, which is
not overcome by the dominant normal form until
after a generation. Years before, embryological
observations of Crampton, Kofoid, and Conklin
had shown that the direction of coiling of the snail
could be traced back to the egg in maturation. The
direction of the polar spindles, as well as that of
the spiral cleavage, was found to be opposite in
right and left handed forms. From this it may be
concluded that there is a definite cytoplasmic basis
for the asymmetry, which is not changed imme-
diately by nuclear influence. In the following
generation, however, presumably during the
growth period of the egg, the nucleus does bring
about the inversion of the cytoplasmic configura-
tion. The gene concerned is probably asymmetric
and catalyzes at different rates the formation of
the two enantiomorphs in the cytoplasm, or pos-
sibly even one to the exclusion of the other.

In bilateral organisms there are many paired
organs which are asymmetric in themselves but
the mirror image of the corresponding organs on
the opposite side. Reversal of the asymmetry of
such structures can be readily induced experi-
mentally in amphibian embryos of appropriate age.

Time is inadequate for me to muster the large
array of facts bearing upon either of the two main
topics of this discussion. I shall therefore leave
the earlier stages of development, confident that
they will receive adequate treatment at the hands
of Professor Spemann, and consider a single or-
gan, the internal ear of the salamander embryo,
which has engaged my attention for several years
and which both illustrates the principle of locali-
zation and shows significant relations of sym-
metry.

As well known, the whole ectodermal pattern
of the embryo is either directly or indirectly
under the control of the organizer. The neural
plate develops only when in contact with it, or
with other organizing material that may be sub-
stituted for it. Lying outside of the neural plate,
particularly in the head, there are a number of
areas destined in normal development to become
sense organs and other structures.

There is another system of organ rudiments,
pronephros, limb, muscle plates, etc., which are
formed in the mesoderm, i.e., directly out of or-
ganizer material; and still another in the endo-
derm. The cells in each of these systems are as-
sumed to be at first potentially alike, the local re-
striction of the potencies gradually becoming more
and more definite. There is a difference in the
way this takes place in the different layers. In
the mesoderm and probably also in the endoderm
it is an autogenous process, whereas in the ecto-

derm it is dependent upon the underlying layer.

In studying the ear we are interested more par-
ticularly in the ectodermal localizations. What is
it, for instance, that makes the ear form at a par-
ticular spot; the nose, the lens, the balancer, and
other organs at other points definitely related top-
ographically to the embryonic axis and to each
other? This is, of course, but part of the general
problem of localization, one that lends itself read-
ily to experimental analysis. In the case of the
ear there are three possibilities that suggest them-
selves immediately. Its differentiation might be
due to its relation to the surrounding parts of its
own germ layer. It might be due to the under-
lying primary organizer, or again to a kind of
secondary organizer in the central nervous system.
Transplantation experiments with embryos in the
stage when the medullary plate is scarcely out-
lined (Stages 13-14) show that all three of these
factors may contribute towards the end result. In
other words, the presumptive ear ectoderm is al-
ready predisposed to form an ear although the
whole ectoderm is still totipotent. A certain spot
on the underlying mesoderm can initiate the for-
mation of an ear from strange ectoderm in the
absence of the medullary cord. On the other hand,
a certain region in the medullary cord, centered
at the level where Mauthner’s cell will differenti-
ate, also has the power of induction of an ear
when brought into contact with ectoderm from
any region. Even a half of the medullary cord
reconstituted, after removal, by the remaining
half, has this power. However, none of the ears
produced in this way by one agency alone, or by
two acting together, are perfect. According as
one or more different influences have been acting,
ear vesicles are formed with different degrees of
perfection. The most perfect cases are obtained
after operations in which the only thing done was
to remove the underlying mesoderm, leaving the
ectoderm and the medullary cord to cooperate
along with the small amount of mesoderm which
may move into the gap made by the removal of
the main portion of this tissue. The least perfect
seem to be those in which the hind-brain alone
acts upon strange ectoderm in the absence of
normal mesoderm.

A brief description of some of the experiments
will indicate how these conclusions have been ar-
rived at. The influence of the medullary tube is
eliminated by cutting out either unilaterally or bi-
laterally the presumptive hind-brain from the early
medullary plate and replacing it by ectoderm taken
from another part of the body. The missing half
of the hind-brain after unilateral operation 1s,
however, reconstituted to a remarkable extent and
may act as inductor directly upon the overlying
ectoderm to form a small ear, though usually the
ear is formed at some distance from the cord, pre-
sumably under the influence of the mesoderm. The

227?

Le COLLECRING NED

[ Vor. XI, No. 100

bilateral operation gives a more crucial experi-
ment. Then the underlying mesoderm is the only
possible agent that could stimulate the formation
of the ear vesicles which develop. In the experi-
ment just referred to, not only the medullary plate
but also the presumptive ear ectoderm was re-
moved. However, if the latter is left in place and
a narrower piece of abdominal ectoderm is grafted
over the wound caused by the removal of the
medullary plate, then frequently two ear vesicles
develop on each side, one induced in the graft
through the action of the substratum, the other
from the ear ectoderm of the host, either by self-
differentiation or possibly also influenced by the
substratum. If the wound in a unilateral operation
is covered by ear ectoderm instead of ectoderm
from the belly, then the ear vesicles that develop
are somewhat more perfect, showing again the
predisposition of this region to form an ear.

Before proceeding, it is appropriate to describe
what takes place as the ear area becomes more
and more definitely circumscribed. Three differ-
ent chains of events, which occur more or less in-
dependently, have been observed. First, there is
a gradual marking out of the disk from the gen-
eral ectoderm, as described in Amblystoma by
Kaan and Yntema. The second concerns the axial
or symmetry relations, which have been found to
change concomitantly with the segregation pro-
cess, but to some extent independently of it.
Finally there takes place a differentiation of
areas within the ear, which accompanies to some
extent some of the changes in symmetry relations.
The physico-chemical factors which underlie the
transformation of the disk of ectoderm cells into
the complicated labyrinth are entirely unknown.
The first changes, which consist in thickening fol-
lowed by the pitting in and folding of the original
plate, are probably accompanied by the taking up
of water and a change in shape of the cells, as in
the medullary plate according to Glaser. The
gross change is, roughly speaking, the transforma-
tion of a circular plate into a sphere. From the
walls of the latter, the semicircular canals and
other chambers are formed by unequal growth and
constriction.

Transplantation experiments show that at first
the ectoderm of the ear region and surround-
ings is isotropic about an axis perpendicular
to its surface. Just as the neural folds are closing
a change supervenes. The ear plate, which is still
not visibly differentiated from the surrounding ec-
toderm, undergoes a monaxial polarization. These
facts have been shown by the following simple ex-
periments. A square plate of ectoderm is lifted
and replaced in some particular orientation by a
similar piece of ectoderm from another embryo,
one of which has been stained intra vitam by Nile
blue sulphate. With rotations of 0° or 180° there
are four possibilities. The plate from the same side

may be grafted upside down or right-side up, thus
reversing both of the axes at the same time or
neither of them. When it is taken from the op-
posite side, either the dorso-ventral or the antero-
posterior axis is reversed, the remaining one not.
The conclusions which have been reached are
based upon over seven hundred experiments of
this kind made at eleven different stages of devel-
opment.

In the isotropic period, all orientations yield
normal ears with few exceptions. In the period
of monaxial polarization which lasts some hours
after closure of the neural folds two of the orien-
tations—grafts which are oriented normally and
those from the opposite side with antero-posterior
axis normal but dorso-ventral inverted—yield nor-
mal ears, while the other two orientations yield
ears which are disharmonic in that they are of the
side opposite to that on which they are placed.
This occurs irrespective of the side of origin of the
graft. A little later conditions again change, in-
dicating a transition from an indifferent dorso-
ventral axis to one which is definitely polarized.
When this axis is normally placed, a graft from
the right side always develops into a right, and
one from the left into a left, but when the graft
is placed with dorso-ventral inversion, a marked
disturbance arises in many cases. The vesicle
swells excessively, sometimes with almost com-
plete obliteration of partitions and sensory areas.
Finally, a stage is reached about the time the
vesicle is ready to be constricted off from the ec-
toderm, in which the transplanted ear develops
essentially as placed.

In the isotropic period and in that with monax-
ial polarization, the ear rudiment is an equipoten-
tial system, by which is meant that any part of
the rudiment can give rise to any part of the ear,
as shown by the following experiments. A frac-
tional part of the plate may give rise to a whole
ear; two may be fused together to form a single
one and a right ear may develop from a graft
taken from the left side. This forces the conclu-
sion that the vectorial properties of the organ, in
fact its whole configuration, are represented in
the ultimate structural units of the rudiment and
not by a mosaic of coarser grain.

Grafts made during the first critical stage, that
is, when the antero-posterior axis is becoming po-
larized, frequently result in enantiomorphic twins.
These are always mirrored across a_ transverse
plane and may consist of either two anterior
halves or two posterior halves. Partial twinning,
involving either the semi-circular canals, which
develop from the ventral half of the ear plate, or
the saccule, which develops from the dorsal half,
also occurs. There are 10 possible classes of these
twins, of which eight have been actually observed.
In these experiments twinning never takes place
across a horizontal plane, that is, along the dorso-

f

December, 1936 ]

DHE COLLECRING NED

223

ventral axis. Such twins can be produced, how-
ever, by grafting a second hind-brain on the outer
or lower side of the ear placode at a sufficiently
early stage. The latter is then under the influ-
ence of two hind-brains, acting in opposite direc-
tions. The ears which develop under these cir-
cunistances are irregular and badly distorted, since
it is difficult to gauge the proper amount of ecto-
derm to leave between the two hind-brains. A
number of cases with double endolymphatic ap-
paratus have, however, been obtained.

I have now reached ground where angels might
well fear to tread. The facts just assembled and
many others that might be added necessitate, in
my opinion, the assumption that the processes of
development, leading up to the final form of the
organism are but the expression of the forces in-
volved in the molecular configuration of the egg
protoplasm. Yet it seems wild to speculate about
this when students of the living cell cannot even
agree as to what the physical state of protoplasm
is—whether it is a fluid or is more of the nature
of a lyophilic colloidal gel. Many microdissec-
tionists and most observers of the streaming of
the protoplasm of the plant cell describe the living
substance as an emulsion with a liquid dispersion
phase. On the other hand it has been observed
to exhibit elastic properties (Seifriz) and recent
observations by Harvey on the Amoeba subjected
to high centrifugal force indicate that visible par-
ticles are moved through the protoplasm in a jerky
way, as if they were bumping against solid ob-
stacles. Again, Moore’s experiments in forcing
the myxomycete plasmodium through filters of
various degrees of fineness show that even this or-
ganism, which is about the most amorphous one
imaginable, is dependent for its existence upon the
structural integrity of its protoplasm. It has been
shown that many unsegmented eggs, when sub-
jected to fairly strong centrifugal force, still de-
velop normally even though visible particles may
be quite definitely stratified in an abnormal way.
Particularly striking in this connection are the
experiments of Conklin in centrifuging the egg of
Crepidula. The maturation spindle may be
stretched from its anchorage near the pole, so that
very large polar bodies are given off. On release
from the force the protoplasm returns to its origi-
nal form and development proceeds normally. It
seems to me quite impossible to explain such phe-
nomena as occurring in a purely fluid system.

Biochemists are recognizing more and more the
importance of molecular configuration and orien-
tation in the organization of protoplasm (Hardy,
Peters, Jordan Lloyd, Needham and others). The
work on the chemical side may now be woven in
with the results of x-ray crystal analysis to give
a picture, however hazy it may be, of the finer
structure of living matter.

Living protoplasm is a complex system, con-

sisting of water, electrolytes,
organi ymes, carbohydrates and
lipoids. There are many who think that protein,
as such, does not exist in protoplasm and that in
studying proteins we are only dealing with dead
material. But organic chemistry leans heavily on
the assumption that the structure of substances is
revealed by the character of their decomposition
products. It seems that we are justified in apply-
ing this same principle to the study of living mat-
ter. Proteins are certainly the most specific con-
stituents of protoplasm and the only ones which
can account for the innumerable varieties or
species in which the living substance occurs. A
consideration of the nature of the protein molecule
should, therefore, prove instructive.

Proteins, though of wide diversity, have one
fundamental feature in common. They are com-
posed of chains of amino acids joined in peptide
linkage, each segment or link consisting of a nitro-
gen and two carbon atoms. These constitute the
stem or backbone of the repeat design. One of
the carbons has ketone oxygen linked with it, the
remainder of the carboxyl group of the amino
acid. The other carbon has attached to it as a
sort of appendage or side chain, the amino acid
residue. Many of these segments are added to-
gether end to end in the protein molecule, into the
composition of which a number of different amino
acids usually enter, so that the side chains are of a
number of different kinds. The molecule may be
drawn out almost indefinitely, according to the
number of amino acid molecules which are linked
together. While it is potentially a fiber, Sved-
berg’s determination of dimensions and molecular
weight of a great variety of protein molecules by
means of the ultra-centrifuge, show them to be of
compact form, with molecular weights in multiples
or submultiples of ca. 34,500. Wrinch has shown
how the chain form may be folded into much more
compact cyclized configurations. The so-called
denatured proteins, such as fibroin from silk, kera-
tin, collagen, frequently assume fibrous form in
the organism. X-ray diffraction pictures show a
definite spacing of the molecular groups, indicat-
ing a crystalline structure that fits well with the
chemical structure described above. Astbury has
shown that there is a different spacing in the kera-
tin of stretched and in that of unstretched wool.
It is also known that in substances like rubber and
gelatine the molecules may be oriented by stretch-
ing. The stretched substance gives a very definite
x-ray picture like that from a single crystal,
while the unstretched form gives only a set of
concentric rings typical of the crystal powder pic-
ture.

There are other characteristics of the protein
molecule important in this discussion. At one end
of the amino acid chain there is an uncombined
carboxyl or acid group, while at the other there is

protein, and other

224 DAE COLEECLING SNE

[ Vou. XI, No. 100

an amino group, which is alkaline. As electrolytes
they are therefore amphoteric. They dissociate as
acids or bases according to the hydrogen ion con-
centration of the medium and at the isoelectric
point they form double or Zwitter-ions. More-
over, many of the amino acids have an unequal
number of basic and acid groups, giving basic or
acid side chains in the proteins into which they
enter. Thus, according to Jordan Lloyd, the pro-
tein molecule has a backbone which is chemically
stable and limbs which have possibilities of chem-
ical activity. In solutions and presumably in liv-
ing protoplasm the backbone is not highly solva-
ted, while the head, tail and side chains are—an
arrangement which gives physical stability com-
bined with diversified chemical activity. Indeed,
were Pangloss here, he would surely prove that ‘in
this best of all possible worlds’ the protein mole-
cule was designed to form living protoplasm.

In the cell such molecules would tend to become
oriented in a definite way, particularly at inter-
faces. Under certain conditions they would form
fibers with parallel arrangement, while under
other conditions they would assume the more
compact or folded form, which would likewise
tend to assume a definite para-crystalline conhigu-
ration, involving a large amount of water of cry-
stallization. Such a structure would be very ten-
uous and might even go oyer into the fluid state,
only to resume its structural form when intracel-
lular conditions again change.

Considering the relation of the protein molecule
to the developing egg and going back to the early
growth period of the oocyte, let us see how its
properties may be related to the qualities of polar-
ity and bilaterality. Such molecules as we have
described may be supposed to assume a polar ar-
rangement with one end anchored at the surface
of the cell at one pole and to run in parallel series
to the other pole, where the opposite ends are at-
tached, or they might have a less regular arrange-
ment in the intermediate zone. If the two ends
are 180° apart, and no further orientation occurs,
the figure is symmetrical about an axis and has an
infinite number of planes of symmetry. Let one
end shift even a short distance from the geometric
pole, then the symmetry is reduced macroscopic-
ally to the bilateral class, but a single plane of
symmetry remaining. Practically all eggs are bi-
polar, and the poles, in many cases at least, have
a definite relation to the attachment of the egg
in the ovary. This fact of being attached must
not, however, be assumed to create the polarity of
the egg but simply to orient its constituent par-
ticles.

Protein molecules are asymmetric. Not only
are the two ends different, but also the two sides
as well as the two remaining opposite surfaces.
If such molecules are oriented with reference both
to ends and to surfaces, then the dorsal and ven-

tral directions are represented in the finer struc-
ture as well as in the coarser visible arrangement.
The asymmetry in the third dimension might be
masked at first, by the outer configuration of the
cell, only to manifest itself later in development.
This is borne out by the fact, discovered by Spe-
mann, that in the amphibian embryo asymmetry
may be inverted by gross mechanical factors such
as rotation of the archenteric roof or longitudinal
division of the early embryo, in which latter case
it is the right hand twin that usually shows inver-
sion of the viscera. In eggs with spiral cleavage,
however, the asymmetric configuration is visible
from the time of maturation on.

During the growth period of the egg, a large
amount of material is transferred to it and, owing
to the polar arrangement of the primary proto-
plasmic molecules, as well as to its mode of at-
tachment in the ovary, the substances laid down
will form gradients, extending from one pole to
the other. We thus have superposed on the pri-
mary gradient, which is due to the presence of the
polar molecules, a second material gradient which
may be of a double nature, one material being
more concentrated at one pole and the remaining
one at the other. During maturation and fertili-
zation there is a solation of the egg con-
tents with resultant streaming and rearrange-
ment of materials before cleavage sets in. This
must involve a radical disturbance in the mol-
ecular set-up, but in the new state of equilib-
rium which supervenes there must be an arrange-
ment which again conforms to the molecular con-
figuration. Spek has shown that during this pro-
cess in some eggs basic substances accumulate at
the animal pole and acid substances at the vegeta-
tive pole, possibly due to electrophoresis. Some-
thing of the old configuration must remain how-
ever, for the polarity of the egg is not changed.

Even in the undivided cell further localized ac-
tivities may be assumed as due to the interaction
between the primary structural material and the
material constituting the secondary gradients.
Such reactions would, however, be more efficient
after cells had divided and cell walls intervened
between the different regions of the cytoplasm. In
order to account for these localized differentia-
tions it is suggested that the chemical composition
prevailing in a particular region activates certain
side chains in the molecules of that region more
than others. Thus new substances are formed
locally making the cells in the different regions
behave differently although their fundamental pro-
toplasmic composition still remain the same. Dif-
ferentiations of this kind, through the activation
of one type of side chain or another, produce new
situations which start up new side chain activities
regionally. These activities are all centered and
in themselves show a gradient inversely propor-
tional to some power of the distance from the cen-

DeEcEMBER, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

225

ter. As this type of change goes on through the
accumulation of the substances due to side chain
activity, the cells become saturated, so that dif-
ferentiation in other directions is inhibited, thus
leading to the condition which is now usually
called ‘determined.’ Yet the characters of the
specific molecules are left intact, since living pro-
toplasm has the way of working through agents
which it forms without changing itself essentially.
After the establishment of the original polarity,

the first differentiation of the above kind which
takes place in the amphibian egg is in the material
of the gray crescent, probably in that which is first
invaginated and which will become the roof of the
pharynx. The notochord is differentiated almost
at the same time, likewise extending across the
midline. The area for mesoderm is further off to
the side and later smaller areas for the muscle
plates, the limbs, and the pronephros are formed
within it. By the time the material of the border
zone is rolled in and gastrulation completed, these
areas, at least the main ones, have reached the
stage of differentiation when they are no longer
interchangeable. The whole animal hemisphere
of the egg at first is undifferentiated within
itself, though differentiated from the opposite
hemisphere through the primary polarity of the
egg. Its differentiation lags and in fact cannot be
detected until after the border zone material, which
constitutes the organizer, has been turned in.
Under the influence of the central part of the lat-
ter, consisting of the pharyngeal roof, notochord
and the more axial part of the mesoderm, a marked
change takes place in the overlying area and the
medullary plate is marked off. The further differ-
entiations, may be assumed to take place in the
ectoderm by this same process of activation of
different side chains in the protein molecules, but
here the agent which activates does not lie in the
layer itself so much as in the underlying layer,
the organizer. Many reactions must be due to
substances arising from the genes in the nucleus.
Others may be set up or intensified by conditions
in the external medium, as for instance when the
endodermal region of the sea urchin embryo is ex-
tended through the action of lithium salts (endo-

' dermization) or when the opposite effect (ecto-
| dermization) is produced by sodium thiocyanide.
In this concept of development we have, to a

| certain extent, a combination of the old theories
_ of preformation and epigenesis. It may be de-
' scribed as epigenetic in that the various characters
of the future organism do not appear at first as
such, but are realized through reaction between
| the several constituents of the egg and also be-
tween them and the environment. It is prefor-
mational in that there is something in the con-
| figuration which determines its physical arrange-
» ment and the kind of chemical action which will
| produce the end results. In other words the qual-

ities of the organism are traceable to the specific
properties of the molecule. To be included in this
category are all of the things that the molecule
may do when brought into relation with the sub-
stances that it may encounter within the bounds
of the developing organism.

Considerable stress has been laid on the study
of orientation in the investigations on the ear.
Its importance rests upon the fact that in rota-
tion experiments only a very simple vectorial
change is imposed, from which simple conclusions
may be drawn. You will recall that the ear rudi-
ment first passes through a stage which may be
described as isotropic about an axis perpendicular
to the surface ectoderm and that at a certain stage
there is evidence of definite antero-posterior po-
larization of this layer. The whole ectodermal re-
gion is, in fact, so plastic during the stages of gas-
trulation and early neurulation that neither local
nor vectorial differences in its qualities can be
readily detected. Just as the neural folds are
closing, something occurs which orients some
constituent of the protoplasm in an antero-poster-
ior direction and this becomes very definitely
fixed, since it is difficult to change it by rotation.
That this orientation is fundamental is shown by
the fact that at the same time the direction of the
ciliary beat of the ectodermal cells becomes fixed,
as well as the direction of the outgrowth of the
lateral line rudiment.

The orientation in question may be due to sev-
eral factors combined. In the first place it is quite
noticeable that the ectoderm of that region is
markedly stretched during this period, along with
the longitudinal stretching of the central nervous
system. This alone might have some orienting
effect as has been shown by the remarkable mol-
ecular changes which accompany the stretching of
wool, rubber, ete. Since the mechanical stretching
might effect a parallel arrangement without orient-
ing all of the individual elements in the same
sense, it is necessary to assume a further orient-
ing factor to account for the latter. Contact with
the central nervous system at a certain point may
play this role, for it is possible to reverse the
orientation of the ear simply by turning the me-
dullary plate, though not so regularly as when the
ear rudiment itself is rotated. When twinned
ears develop, as is most common in the critical
stages, some interaction between the elements of
the two halves must take place, such as occurs
when twin crystals are formed.

The technical difficulties of obtaining x-ray dif-
fraction pictures of living material are great, but
they have been overcome, at least in some meas-
ure, by Boehm and his associates, who have suc-
ceeded in obtaining pictures of living muscle, ten-
don and nerve, as well as pictures of the dried tis-
sues by exposures of only a few minutes. Muscle
shows a definite molecular spacing indicating ori-

226

THE COLLECTING NET

entation in a longitudinal direction, which largely
disappears on contraction. Its principal constitu-
ent, myosin, when drawn out into a thread, gives
a diffraction picture characteristic of crystalline
fibers.

In the hope that it might be possible to get
some evidence of oriented structures either in the
ear rudiment or in the medullary plate, which also
becomes rigidly polarized, x-ray diffraction photo-
graphs from dried specimens of these tissues
have been made but so far without success. No
more evidence of structure has been revealed than
might be found in unoriented gelatine gel. How-
ever, the technique which was employed in pre-
paring the tissues would probably have damaged
any delicate structure that might have been pres-
ent and further experiments with better technique,
especially with fresh tissues, now that short ex-
posures are possible, may give more definite re-
sults.

In summing up the views expressed this morn-
ing. I am fully conscious of their crudity and
onesidedness in contrast with the extremely deli-
cate and complex transformations they attempt to
describe. It may all seem to you but an echo of
Wagner, when he says to Mephistopheles as the
Homunculus is about to be created:

“Was man an der Natur Geheimnisvolles pries,
Das wagen wir verstandig zu probieren,
Und was sie sonst organisieren liess,
Das lassen wir kristallisieren.”

The data of experimental embryology have,
however, remained too long isolated and the prob-
lems peculiar to it have not attracted sufficiently
the attention of the general physiologist. Our
widening knowledge of the physico-chemical
properties of protoplasm and the vista opening up
through advances in organic chemistry and x-ray
analysis amply justify the attempt to bring these
fields into closer union. In endeavoring to reach
a physico-chemical description of life one is
baffled rather by the bewildering array of possi-
bilities than by such dearth of material as would
warrant the evocation of peculiarly vitalistic
forces. At least I am unwilling to accept the de-
featism of the vitalist, so long as means of in-
vestigation by experiment are available.

ON THE MODE OF OPERATION OF THE ‘ORGANISATOR”

Dr. HANs SPEMANN
Professor of Zoology, University of Freiburg

I intend to report to you on some investigations
of the past fifteen years which had their origin in
two simple experiments. These were carried out
on young embryos of different species of Amphi-

[ Vor. XI, No. 100 |

z

The principal thesis maintained in the foregoing —
is that the specific form of the organism is mainly —
an expression of the molecular configuration of
the protein constituents of its protoplasm. In the
egg cell these tend, through the action of molecu-
lar forces, to arrange themselves in a definite way
similar to the arrangement of atoms or atom
groups in liquid crystals. The large amount
of water associated with these crystalline sub-
stances — water which must enter into the
meshes of the crystalline network, that is, into
the actual lattice cells—gives them a very great
lability. But the intermolecular forces are suf-
ficiently constant to hold the molecules in their
characteristic configuration and even to restore

such configuration if mechanically disturbed. —
The changes which we call differentiation,
which is the transformation of a _ universal

repeat pattern to a macroscopic pattern of spe-
cialized organs and tissues, takes place through
the local activation of the particular side chains of
the protein molecules. One local change leads to
another until the end stage of what is called seg-
regation seems complete. But it is not a true seg-
regation. The original protein molecules must be
assumed to remain unchanged, at least to the ex-
tent that they still preserve the protoplasmic char-
acteristics of the species.

Such a theory combines various concepts that
have come into embryology in recent years: that
of the organization center and the hierarchy of or-
ganizers as conceived by Spemann, the idea of
morphogenetic fields, and the axial gradient theory
of Child. Others before me have, of course, used
the crystal analogy and Przibram has presented
the whole subject in a very interesting way. The
crystal has been usually taken as a model in these
discussions, but Needham goes much further,
when, near the end of his stimulating book on
“Order and Life” he says, “Liquid crystals, it is
to be noted, are not important for biology and em-
bryology, because they manifest certain properties
which can be regarded as analagous to those which —
living systems manifest (models), but because liv-
ing systems actually are liquid crystals, or, it would
be more correct to say, the paracrystalline state
undoubtedly exists in living cells.” This may be
an advanced position to take at the present time, —
but then progress is made only by taking advanced ~
positions.

bia and consisted in the removal of specific re-

1One of the papers in the symposium on “Biologi-
cal Sciences,” of the Harvard Tercentenary Confer-
ence of Arts and Sciences; from ‘“‘press’’ copy.

DecemeBeErR, 1936 |

THE COLLECTING NET

D7.

gions of the germ and the replacement of the part
by material from another place.

If one replaces a piece which later would be-
come brain, i.e., presumptive brain material, by a
piece of presumptive epidermis, (it is most satis-
factory when the two pieces are mutually inter-
changed), they develop corresponding to their
new position; presumptive brain does not become
brain according to its origin, but becomes epider-
mis in accordance with its position, and similarly,
the presumptive epidermis becomes brain when
placed in the region of the brain. This can be
established with certainty by previously vitally
staining one embryo, or, if one prefers, by making
the interchange of parts between two embryos of
different species which differ in color and pig-
ment-content, as was first done by Harrison in
other experiments. In the present case, for ex-
ample, between the dark-pigmented embryos of
Triton alpestris and the entirely or approximately
pigmentless embryos of Triton cristatus.

It follows from this that the interchanged pieces
still possess in that early stage of development,
capacities or potentialities of both sorts, that is,
both for the formation of brain and for that of
epidermis ; it follows further that in the positions
of the brain and epidermis respectively there re-
side forces of some sort which direct the foreign
material, impelling it in the direction of brain or
epidermis as the case may be.

The second experiment gives more detailed in-
formation concerning the determining of the me-
dullary plate, especially about the part of the em-
bryo from which the determining influences pro-
ceed. In normal development the ectoderm which
gives rise to the medullary plate is supported by
mesoderm. Its transformation into the medullary
plate could be dependent upon this. This hypo-
thesis can be tested by placing such mesoderm un-
der the ectoderm of a foreign region. It may be
shown that in this case a supernumerary medul-
lary plate arises. Mesoderm can, therefore, in-
duce a medullary plate and it is reasonable to as-
sume that the normal medullary plate also arises
by an induction from the site of the underlying
mesoderm. All later experiments have confirmed
this.

From these fundamental facts several sets of
questions are now derived the experimental an-
swers to which have led us deeper into the nature
of development.

First of all we should like to know in general
of what sort the influence is by means of which
medullary plate arises from indifferent ectoderm :
whether some sort of dynamic effect passes from
the mesoderm to the ectoderm, or whether a sub-
stance is given off by the mesoderm which arouses
the medullary potencies in the ectoderm.

The numerous experiments undertaken to solve

this problem agree in showing that the inductive
effect is mediated by means of some substance;
indeed it is clear that very different substances
can produce this effect, even substances of com-
paratively simple chemical constitution.

The experiments were made in such a fashion
that the piece whose capacity for induction was
to be examined was placed through a slit into the
segmentation cavity at the beginning of gastrula-
tion so that in the course of gastrulation it came
to lie under the ectoderm. Parts of the embryo
were tested whose structure had been disturbed
to various extents even to the point of destruction
of life, then animal tissues of the most diverse ori-
gins from tape-worm to man, finally chemically
pure materials of known constitution. In all three
groups countless cases of inductive effect were
observed.

Under the influence of a living inductor there
arose, however, not merely disorganized medul-
lary substance, but embryos which were entire
and normal in all essential respects with their
own sensitivity and motility. This organizing ef-
fect could be exerted by a piece of mesoderm
which had been taken from a completed gastrula
and placed into the blastocoele. Or the mesoderm
could be involuted into the host by a piece of the
dorsal hip of the blastopore transplanted into its
surface. This mesoderm which in one way or an-
other had come to be in the interior, then formed
the axial mesodermal organs, that is the chorda
and somites, partly out of its own material, and
partly by drawing to itself the tissue of the host.
These parts then induced in the overlying ecto-
derm of the host a medullary plate which subse-
quently developed into brain and spinal cord,
evaginated optic vesicles and its own lenses and
auditory vesicles, formed from the tissue of the
host. Thus an entire, highly developed embryo
can be organized by a little piece of one young
germ placed in another. This I summarized un-
der the preliminary concept of the “organizer.”

In this organizing action there is revealed a
capacity of the organism which has long been
known from other experiments, the capacity for
regulation and construction of a completed whole.
First of all as to the organizer: a fragment of the
mesoderm forms complete, bilaterally symmetri-
cal axial organs and, indeed, in two ways. It
regulates itself into a bilateral condition within
itself, as does the isolated half of the sea-urchin
egg, according to Driesch’s fundamental discovery
and it incorporates ‘from its immediate surround-
ings that which it lacks, as Roux, years ago, de-
scribed in his post-generation. With young or-
ganizers inner self-regulation preponderates; with
old ones, on the other hand, the appropriation of
foreign material is predominant. Only from these
bilaterally symmetrical axial-organs is a bilateral-
ly symmetrical medullary plate induced in the

228

overlying ectoderm. Whether the tendency to
form a whole is present also in the ectoderm, that
is, in the reaction-system, is a question which will
occupy our attention again at the close.

But, at present, there is still another point.
Even in the first cases observed by Hilde Man-
gold the secondary embryonic arrangement had
definite positional relationships to the primary.
Their axial organs were arranged exactly as those
of the host, and the characteristic cross-sections
of the two, through the auditory vesicles, for ex-
ample, lay in the same level. From this the ques-
tion arose as to what determined the position and
segmentation of the induced embryo. Numerous
experiments made to answer this question have
shown that this relationship is not an uncondition-
ally fixed one, but that evidently influences which
help determine the position and segmentation of
the secondary embryo proceed from the primary
embryo. This finding has in turn led to very in-
teresting discoveries for the understanding of
which, however, still another set of facts must be
presented.

As we have seen above, uncommonly diverse
agents may induce a medullary plate. Hence it is
now no longer difficult to understand, that the
medullary plate itself likewise belongs to these
possible inducing agents, indeed, that even the
brain can induce; further, that normal inductors,
namely the mesodermal axial organs, also retain
their capacity for induction far beyond the time
during which they can normally play a role. But
how does it happen then that medullary plates are
not continually induced in the normal epidermis,
which covers such potential inductors as spinal
cord or somites? The simple reason for this is,
as, above all, O. Mangold has shown that the
preparation conditions necessary for the formation
of medullary plate are present in the ectoderm
only during a short period of the development.
One could expect, therefore, that a piece of ecto-
derm capable of reacting would respond in the
same location by the formation of medullary plate.
That is, in fact, the case.

J. Holtfreter has grafted small pieces of ecto-
derm from the early gastrula into the sides of
older embryos from the stage of the neurula up to
that of the extended embryo and thereby obtained
the induction of medullary plate. But not only
that ; most diverse other organs such as the olfac-
tory pit, balancer, gills, musculature, notochord,
and pronephric canals were called forth in this
material of many potencies. However, they were
not distributed at random over the entire length
of the body, but arranged according to region.
This shows that the embryo itself, even in later
stages of development, is subdivided into active
fields which exercise no noticeable effect upon
their normal surroundings, yet become immediate-
ly recognizable as soon as a piece of reactive tis-

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 100

sue is brought into their sphere of influence.

One must regard as an instance of this field-
dynamics the case mentioned above, in which the
auditory vesicles of the induced embryo lie at the
same level as those of the primary embryo. Their
origin is therefore the effect of at least two fields;
one of which proceeds from the inductor without
which epidermis would have developed in this re-
gion and a second which proceeds from the prini-
ary embryo and determines which general level
of the medullary tube will arise.

The effect of this latter field or system of fields
which is always present in the host appears clear-
ly only when the orientation of the secondary em-
bryo is the same as that of the primary. This in
itself is not, however, a field-effect, but depends
simply on the fact that the implanted organizer is
carried along and extended by the mass move-
ments of the host during the time of involution.
This can be prevented and then secondary em-
bryonic axes develop which are transverse to, or
even the reverse of, the primary ones. In this
case the field-effect of the organizer predominates ;
its structure determines alone or nearly alone the
arrangement and structural composition of the
secondary embryo.

Very recently Holtfreter has described a case
of organ-induction which is not completely ex-
plained by this regional field-effect. A beautiful
lens with incipient fiber formation has been in-
duced in the region of the heart of a Triton larva
by means of a boiled heart of a larva of Salaman-
dra; that is, by means of an inductor, which can-
not be specific tor lens-formation, in a region
which surely lies nearer to other fields than the
lens-field. Here no explanation has been found
to date other than this: the epidermis in a definite
stage of development is to a certain extent loaded
to the highest degree with the ability to produce
a lens and that the inductor came into effective
activity in this moment of highest readiness for
reactivity for lens-formation. In a somewhat
earlier stage the same inductor would have
brought forth a medullary plate in the same place.
—Many a beautiful discovery is still to be made
here.

In closing may still another important question
be touched briefly. It has already been suggested —
above in connection with the powers of regulation
of the inductors and touches upon the question as
to whether the reaction-system works toward to-
tality; or more exactly expressed, whether the
totality-stimulus which the inducing system emits,
has a structure by means of which the structure
of the induced formation is brought forth point by
point, or whether the inductor acts as a homo-
geneous whole, to which the addressed system re-
sponds as a whole.

The fact just mentioned really already gives an
answer. The stimulus which proceeds from a

Decemser, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 229

piece of boiled salamander heart is certainly with-
out structure and yet it can call forth the forma-
tion of a well-differentiated lens with incipient
nuclear fibers. Other experiments point in the
saine direction.

As we have seen above, one can produce or-
gans of heterogeneous composition by means of
the interchange of tissue in the early stages of
development, for example, gills which are covered
by a kind of epidermis foreign to the species.
This epidermis would have formed brain in the
site of its origin; the new position has impressed
upon it the nature of epidermis, but has not how-
ever changed its species-character. If one now in
this fashion produces a structure which consists
wholly or for the most part of epidermis, such as
a balancer, or a lens, then one can test whether
a definite, especially simple totality-feature, name-
ly size, is determined by the inducing agent or by
the responding-system.

To this end E. Rotmann replaced presumptive
balancer-epidermis of Triton taeniatus with the
inverted ectoderm of Triton cristatus. The chim-
aerical balancers showed exclusively the character-
istics of the same species from which the ectoderm
originated and not those of the species which had
determined its becoming balancer-epidermis ; in-
deed this was so not only in respect to size, but
also in respect to the characteristic position of the
angle in relation to the head. The _ balancers
formed from cristatus-epidermis are directed an-
teriorly, those originating from the taeniatus-epi-
dermis posteriorly.

The lens was tested in the same fashion as the
balancer. Presumptive lens-ectoderm from Tvi-
ion taeniatus was replaced at the beginning of
gastrulation by inverted ectoderm from Triton
cristatus. The lens likewise followed in size and
tempo of development that species from which
the ectoderm originated and not that which de-
termined its becoming a lens. The lens-potency
was not evoked by the optic cup according to the
extent to which its invaginated retinal layer
touched the epidermis; rather, to a certain extent,
the lens is established as a whole by the epidermis.

In order to evaluate completely the significance
of this fact one must bear in mind that the epi-
dermis really does not lack the ability to accom-
modate the size of the lens which it yields to that
of the optic cup. For if one reduces the size of
the optic cup, the optic cup subsequently calls
forth a lens which is correspondingly reduced.
Rather the epidermis clearly does not receive the
correct stimulus in the chimaera. The entire eye
seems within limits to give out the command “en-
tire lens” and this lens is then delivered by the
cristatus-epidermis just too large for the taenia-
tus-eye, and vice versa.

Still more striking results are to be expected if

it should be possible to combine embryos which
stand systematically still further apart. With the
combination of different species of Tritons, it was,
after all, always a question of similar organs
which differed only in isolated character. On the
other hand, with animal forms which are system-
atically further apart, the larvae possess mani-
foldly different organs in the same position. Thus
the larva of a frog has, as is well known, suckers
in the place of balancers and in the place of teeth,
horny jaws and in their neighborhood horny
plates. What will now take place if an exchange
is made? But first is an exchange and reciprocal
action possible here ?

Fortunately this latter is really the case. How-
ever remarkable it may sound, compatibility and
reciprocal susceptibility to influence are both pres-
ent. Thus the result is what is to be expected
under these circumstances. If one removes a
piece of presumptive epidermis of the oral region
of the embryo of a Triton in the early gastrula-
stage and substitutes for it ectoderm from a toad-
embryo of like age, the organs of the toad, head,
suckers and horny jaws develop in the Triton-
larva in the exact region appropriate for them;
and if the piece is too narrow to cover also the
region of the balancers which are located further
to the side, these can also develop in their proper
place as well. With the reciprocal experiment,
Triton-ectoderm planted on toad-embryo, balanc-
ers arise instead of suckers. This has now been
completely established by the experiments of O.
Schotte, E. Rotmann, J. Holtfreter and O. Man-
gold.

That is indeed a result of great importance.
How is it possible that potencies of the toad-ecto-
derm respond to the induction-stimulus of the
Triton head, that is, potencies for organs which
Triton does not possess at all and stimuli which
otherwise release entirely different responses?
The releasing stimulus must in one respect be of
quite specific nature because it brings forth that
which corresponds to the region; in another re-
spect however, it must be of quite general nature,
because the induced structure arises in the man-
ner which is peculiar to the piece originally for-
eign to the place. Figuratively speaking, thus,
when the command, only a quite general “furnish
the mouth,” sounds, this is accomplished by the
ectoderm in a manner which has been provided
for in the inheritance of its species. However, as
to what that actually means, physiologically
speaking, it seems to me that we are, to date,
lacking any well-founded conception.

Thus systematically progressing analysis has
opened for us many a glance into the nature of
development, but has posed still more enticing
questions which can find an answer. One could
not be a true scholar and not find this condition
pleasing.

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 100

THE FUNDAMENTAL NATURE OF THE RESPIRATORY RHYTHM!

Sir Josep Barcrort, Professor of Physiology and D. H. Barron, the University of Cambridge

The essential nature of the respiratory rhythm
presents a problem which cannot but be of out-
standing interest to biologists. The words inspir-
ation and expiration have come to connote the
highest life and the ultimate dissolution of man.

The explanations put forward group themselves
around three principal conceptions.

(1) That each phase of respiration initiates a
inessage to the brain, checking that particular
phase and initiating its opposite. According to
this view, which is associated particularly with
the names of Hering and Breuer (1868) and of
Head (1889) (a) respiration once arrested would
never restart, and (b) in the absence of sensory
impulses from the respiratory tract to the brain
it would not take place.

(2) That there is in the central nervous sys-
tem a continual urge to inspire, but that the very
act of inspiration sets up sensory impulses which
check the effort. The lung then reverts passively
to its unexpanded condition. This view is asso-
ciated particularly with the names of Gad (1880,
1881) and Lewandowsky (1896). It differs from
the former in twa essential respects
(a) the central nervous system is the essential

seat of respiration and is not merely a tele-
phone exchange, and
(b) expiration is a purely passive movement.

(3) That respiration is due to rhythmic activ-
ity of the central nervous system. The modern
apologist for this view was Graham Brown, and
it was strengthened by the observation of Adrian
and Buytendijk (1931) that there existed in the
central nervous system of the goldfish an inherent
rhythm which had the same frequency as that of
the gill movements.

The observations which I am about to describe
support the third view. They were of a quite un-
expected character and materialized from an effort
in collaboration with Dr. Barron to investigate
the nature of the earliest movements of which the
sheep embryo is capable.

I need only make a passing reference to the
controversy which has centered around the initia-
tion of mammalian movement. Briefly, two views
have clashed: the first, based on the unassailable
work of Coghill (1929) on Amblystoma, holds
that ordinary movements have individualized out
of a generalized mass movement: the second, put
forward by Windle (1934, 1935) is that move-
ments have started in a localized way and become
integrated into more generalized manifestations
of activity. Our work on the large and slow
growing embryo of the sheep indicates an element

1 One of the papers in the symposium on “Biologi-
cal Sciences,” of the Harvard Tercentenary Confer-
ence of Arts and Sciences.

of unreality in this controversy. It has been as-
sumed that the two conceptions set forth above
were alternatives : actually they seem to us to rep-
resent successive stages in the life history of the
sheep. The mass movement is built up from lo-
calized movements and when built up becomes
resolvable into reflex or other movements of defi-
nite functional significance. It is with this mass
movement that I wish to take up my parable.

The movement itself may be evoked on the 36th
or 37th day in the sheep embryo whilst it is still
in the embryonic sac. The point of a fine glass
rod is thrust through the membrane—a procedure
which does not involve the escape of any consider-
able quantity of fluid—and the snout of the em-
bryo is tapped rather forcibly. The movement it-
self will be described shortly, but here let me say
that whilst at first, on the 36th day, a single move-
ment is elicited in response to the stimulus, a little
later tapping the snout will evoke a series of two
or three successive movements. By the 38th day
the picture has developed in two important re-
spects: firstly, the series has become a rhythm,
embracing perhaps twenty movements and lasting
it may be for half a minute: secondly, the neces-
sity for tapping the nose has disappeared: the ini-
tiation and continuation of this rhythm is “auto-
matic.” In using the word “automatic” no more
is meant than the movements appeared without
the application of any stimulus which we know-
ingly applied. Even that is perhaps an over-state-
ment because on one occasion we discovered acci-
dentally a method of eliciting them. For purposes
of photography we placed a sheet of glass on the
surface of the sac and then exposed the embryo to
the bright light. About half a minute after the
glass had been placed on the sac the movements
commenced. This we repeated several times, al-
ways with the same result except in so far as the
latent period might be rather more or less than
half a minute. Control experiments ruled out the
light and the heat of the lamp: the effect seemed
therefore to be due in some way which we did not
locate to the glass, possibly directly or indirectly
to the pressure it set up in the amniotic fluid.

From the 39th to the 49th days the properties
of the movements changed in two respects.

(1) they became more restricted in extent,

(2) they became progressively easier to elicit.
Let us take the first point, the increasing localiza-
tion of the movements.

On the 38th day the movements may be de-
scribed as follows.

“The head appeared to be extended, the trunk
straightened and the limbs and tail extended.
These (movements) appeared rhythmically—a
sharp contraction and a rather slow relaxation.

DeceMBeER, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

231

On one occasion they were definitely initiated by
extension of the hind foot of the left side with ab-
duction of the toes. This rhythmic extension and
relaxation of the leg occurred several seconds be-
fore the generalized extension took place.”

The movements are spoken of as of the general-
ized extensor type merely on the basis of the ap-
pearance which they presented. Whether the ex-
tensor muscles only were involved, or whether all
the muscles came into play and the extensor
muscles overbore the flexors, producing extension
as the net result, we cannot say: but in one ex-
periment Dr. Windle pointed out to us that the
head movement was of the following type, an ex-
tension which passed off rapidly, leaving the
movement to finish as a more drawn-out flexion.

The first obvious change was for the extensor
elements to disappear, and for the flexor ones
either to remain or to be developed according to
whether they did or did not form part of the ori-
ginal mass movement, thus.

“Sheep No. 110 = 41 days

“Immediately (on opening the uterus) rhyth-
mic movements were seen . . . Each movement
involved a flexion of the neck. Occasionally this
was preceded by an extension of the neck. Some-
times there would be two or three such flexions
without an extension to each flexion. The exten-
sion seemed sharper than the flexion.”’

By the 41st day then, the movements had as-
sumed a flexor type. The neck movements first
and then the leg movements ceased to be anything
but merely passive, and by the 46th day the spon-
taneous rhythm was confined to the trunk. The
body movements involved the drawing down of
the diaphragm, which is fully formed about the
46th day. The rhythmic descent of the diaphragm
is shown by the depression of the liver and the
drawing-in of the chest wall which at this stage is
quite soft. There is no appreciable negative pres-
sure set up in the thorax. Except for the draw-
ing-in of the chest wall, the movements after the
46th day closely resemble those of normal respira-
tion.

Let us turn to the ease with which the move-
ments may be elicited, if it is permissible to use
that expression about a rhythm which has already
been described as spontaneous. When we first
saw the rhythm, evoked by a definite stimulus. it
was in a 39 day foetus: it appeared sometime after
the sac had been exposed and about half a minute
after a glass plate had been placed thereon. Later,
in a 41 day foetus, the rhythm was observed im-
mediately on delivery of the sac, as soon as the
embryo could be seen at all. The question arose
whether actually in the uterus the embryo exe-
cuted these rhythmic movements. We were suc-
cessful on the 49th day in trans-illuminating the
unopened uterus: the foetus exhibited rhythmic
movements. It cannot be claimed even here that

Length 40 mm.

the foetus was entirely free from outside influence,
for though the uterus was unopened some degree
of manipulation was necessary in order to get the
light into a convenient place which would enable
us to “film” the shadow of the foetus. It must be
remembered, however, that at this stage the foetus
is floating quite freely in the sac (anchored only
by the cord), and though we cannot claim not to
have set up changes of pressure in the amniotic
fluid, these probably were not greater than nor-
mally take place in life.

3y the 49th day rhythmic movements of the na-
ture described become almost continuous, and are
to be observed in any foetus in good condition at
that stage of its existence.

We commenced the above discussion by show-
ing that on the 36th day an external stimulus
evoked a spasmodic extensor movement and that
at a slightly later date an extensor rhythm was
observed. We then showed that the extensor
rhythm might occur without the application of a
definite stimulus on our part, and from that time
our study took the form of observation of the
rhythm with no intentional and the least possible
degree of accidental stimulus. We now turn to
another line of investigation followed by one of us
(Barron) in which the stimulus, poking the em-
bryo on the nose with a glass rod, was persisted
with and the results observed.

Taking the matter up at the point at which the
stimulus produces an extensor rhythm, it is found
that about the 40th day only the first one or two
“beats” of the rhythm show extension of the head ;
after that the rhythm is of the flexor type. More-
over if the nose is stimulated on one side of the
middle line, the initial throw back of the head is
not a symmetrical movement, though the subse-
quent rhythmic movements are. But this is not
the beginning; as early as the 36th day (Sheep
65) faradic stimulation of the head in the region
of the facial artery produced certain definite re-
sults.

“Stimulation of the face in the area of the Vth.
nerve was followed by slight turning of the head
towards the stimulus and extension of the contra-
lateral foreleg at all the joints.” (the foetus was
removed from the membrane).

On the 37th day (Sheep 64) rotation of the
head was obtained with a less powerful tactile
stimtilus.

“The glass needle was inserted into the mem-
branes of the amniotic sac without loss of fluid
and when the nose was stimulated in the area of
the front anterial facial artery rotation of the head
occurred towards the stimulus.”

On the 38th day, the same embryo as had
shown spontaneous rhythmic movement when a
glass plate was placed upon the sac, gave the fol-
lowing response to stimulation of the nose with
the glass rod.

“A rotation of the head slightly toward the

232

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 100

stimulus anda... flexion of the head away from
the stimulus and (general) extension. In some
instances the mouth opened, the forelimbs extend-
ed at the shoulder joint, and the back straight-
ened; even the tail was extended.”

The point so far has been that an asymmetrical
stimulus, if it produces a result at all, produces an
asymmetrical movement, the direction of which
has a definite relation to the stimulus itself; this
movement is followed by a symmetrical rhythm.

When the foetus is on its side, as is usually the
case, gravity seems to become a component of tac-
tile stimuli at about this stage, so that on stimula-
tion the initial movement tends more and more to
be one in which the crown of the head is directed
upwards. The movements of the legs too are
characteristic.

In fact by the 47th day, if the foetus is tapped
vigorously either on the snout or the tail it will
make a movement, which suggests an effort to get
up, followed of course by the rhythm. On the
subsequent days this aspect of foetal activity be-
comes very much accentuated till about the 50th
day, when the movement produced by tapping the
foetus closely resembles that often made when,a
new born lamb rises from the ground, rising on
its forelegs and subsequently raising its hind quar-
ters. (Later the lamb rises in a rather different
way, getting on its fore knees, and then raising
the back of its body and getting on to its hind feet
before it gets one to its fore feet).

Seeing that this righting movement and the sub-
sequent rhythm are parts of the same original
complex, it is not surprising that the frequency
and force of the rhythm should depend upon the
vigour of the righting movement.

About the 49th day so lively is the foetus that
it is difficult to manipulate it at all without conse-
quent slight movements taking place, each fol-
lowed by a rhythm. The result is that rhythmic
movement scarcely ceases, and the foetus presents
the general appearance of an ordinary animal
breathing naturally; but when energetic move-
ment takes place as the result of a considerable
stimulus, as with a rod, the rhythm quickens and
deepens, giving the appearance of an animal out
of breath as a result of the effort it has made.

With these facts in mind it is interesting to re-
read the paper of Krogh and Lindhard (1913)
on “The regulation of respiration and circulation
during the initial stages of muscular work.”

The authors show conclusively that immediately
on effort there is a quickening and deepening of
respiration,—the same picture as is shown by a
foetus of 49 days. In their words ‘‘evidence is
brought forward to show that the rise in ventila-
tion... is not produced reflexly but by irradia-
tion of impulses from the motor cortex.” This
irradiation seems not to be the making of contact
between two mechanisms primitively independent,
but rather the removal of some factor which has

dissociated two parts of a mechanism primitively
one. This irradiation rather than any chemical
mechanism would appear to be the fundamental
regulatory mechanism.

After the 50th day, approximately, a great al-
teration takes place in the properties of the foetus,
and all its reflexes become more difficult to elicit.
On application of a glass rod it remains compara-
tively quiescent. We have come to an end of a
definite stage of development: we do not know
how these reflex activities become covered up,
though several obvious suggestions present them-
selves. They are “covered up” however, and not
really destroyed: this is shown by the fact that
they can be brought out by subjecting the foetus
to the appropriate degree of asphyxia.

Take a 68 day foetus (Sheep 149). That it
suffered from oxygen want was shown by little
haemorrhages on the skin which can be brought
on by pinching the cord; moreover it was receiv-
ing blood along the umbilical vein with an oxygen
saturation of 27%. It was as lively as the normal
49 day foetus.

It may seem remarkable that so little mention
has as yet been made of occlusion of the umbilical
cord. The fact is that up to this time (49 days)
pinching the cord does not initiate respiratory
movements. It has no other effect than to slow
the heart and kill the foetus. The earliest effects
of umbilical occlusion on respiratory rhythm were
seen in a 48 day foetus such as we described in
which it was otherwise impossible to reduce the
embryo to such a degree of quiescence as to abol-
ish the rhythm. Occlusion of the umbilical cord
did this: the rhythm stopped when the cord was
pinched and went on again when the cord was re-
leased. It would seem, therefore, that the effect
of oxygen want on the sheep’s foetus at about fifty
days is much the same as that found by Rosen-
feld and Snyder on the foetus of the rabbit even
when pregnancy was artificially prolonged.

REFERENCES

Adrian, E. D. and Buytendijk, F. J. J. 1931, J. Phy-
siol., 71, 121.

Coghill, G. E. 1929, ‘Anatomy and the Problem of
Behavior,” England, Cam. Univ. Press; New
York, Macmillan.

Gad, J. 1880, Arch. Anat. Physiol. (Physiol.)
1881, Ibid., 538.

Graham Brown, T. See Sherrington, C. S.
J. Physiol., 47, 196.

Head, H. 1889, J. Physiol., 10, 1 and 279.

Hering, E. and Breuer, J. 1868, Sitzb. Akad. Wis-
sensch. Wien., 57, 672; 58, 909.

Krogh, A. and Lindhard, J. 1913, J. Physiol., 47,
112

1913,

Lewandowsky, M. 1896, Arch. Anat. Physiol.
(Physiol.), 195.

Rosenfeld, M. and Snyder, F. F.
Exp. Biol. and Med., 33, 576.

Windle, W. F., Minear, W. L., Austin, M. F., and
Orr, D. W. 1935, Physiol. Zool., 8, 156.

Windle, W. F., Orr, D. W. and Minear, W. L. 1934,

Physiol. Zool., 7, 600.

1936, Proc. Soc.

DEcEMBER, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

233

THE NERVOUS SYSTEM‘

Dr. E. D. Aprtan
Foulerton Professor of the Royal Society (Physiology)
University of Cambridge

The lower creatures do not meet to discuss the
factors which determine their behaviour. ‘Know
thyself’ is a precept reserved for homo sapiens;
indeed the more academic our discussion the bet-
ter we shall demonstrate our true position in the
animal kingdom.

We are animals with powers of reflection and
foresight, who can use tools and form proposi-
tions. Our knowledge and attainments can in-
crease from one generation to another because our
children can learn from our successes and fail-
ures. In the last hundred years we have found
out so much about the material world that we
have acquired immense new powers of action on
it. What have we found out meanwhile about
ourselves ?

There have been no practical achievements
comparable to the radio set or the flying machine
but no one can doubt that ideas about human be-
haviour are vastly different from what they were
even 50 years ago. Our conduct is no longer as
right or wrong as it was. We think of it still as
the outcome of a conflict between opposing forces,
but we do not postulate forces wholly good and
wholly evil. In some lands they are now thought
of as racial or class instincts: here we have more
choice and are free, if we wish, to see ourselves
driven by the more primitive forces which Freud
has made respectable. But everywhere human
behaviour has become something to be studied by
the methods of natural science, as objectively as
possible.

As a foundation to this study there is a mass
of information about the mechanism of the body.
The behaviour of any animal must depend in part
on its general structure—its shape, size, number
of limbs, arrangement of sense organs, etc., and
with man there are the important structural modi-
fications which allow the forelimbs to be used for
wielding tools. Yet the chief factor which deter-
mines the range of our activities is the nervous
system. Every movement is the result of the
messages which pass from the central mass of
nerve cells to the muscles, and the outgoing mes-
sages are varied according to the reports sub-
mitted by the sense organs. These show what is
happening in the world outside and the central
nervous system must evolve a plan appropriate to

+ One of the papers in the symposium on ‘Factors
Determining Human Behavior,” of the Harvard
Tercentenary Conference of Arts and Sciences.

the occasion. But only the simplest plans are
possible if the central nervous system is ill de-
veloped. The earthworm can take to its burrow
when it feels the shock of footsteps on the grass
and such an immediate reaction needs only a few
hundred nerve cells and fibres; but we can sell out
an investment when we hear rumours that the
company is unsound and this reaction needs the
ten thousand million cells of the human cerebral
cortex.

Our concern is with behaviour of this charac-
teristically human type. It represents by far the
most complex synthesis achieved by any nervous
system. Neurology, therefore, is not to be blamed
because it cannot yet analyse such a product into
an affair of nerve networks and nerve impulses.
But from one aspect human behaviour is an affair
of networks and impulses; it may be useful to
picture it in these terms in spite of the fact that
we know far more about our thoughts and actions
than we do about the mechanisms in our brains.

The central nervous system may be divided into
the forebrain, the cerebral hemispheres which ela-
borate the general plan of behaviour, and the
brain stem and spinal cord which have to carry
out the plan and attend to the administrative de-
tails. The whole system is made up of cells with
thread-like extensions, some running as nerve
fibres to the periphery and some forming the in-

terlacing networks of the central apparatus. The
cells and their extensions are excitable; within

them are stores of available potential energy,
ready to be discharged as soon as the restraining
forces are weakened but replenished as soon as
the discharge is over. All nervous activity in-
volves discharges of this kind. Thus the long
distance signalling from sense organs to brain
and from brain to muscles is carried out by the
conduction down the nerve fibres of repeated im-
pulses, momentary waves of activity travelling like
the spark along a fuse. And everywhere in the
nervous system is liberated in brief outbursts
rather than in a continuous stream. This fact by
itself has little bearing on our actions, save that
it sets an upper limit to the rate at which activity
can change. What is of more importance is the
fact that in some nerve cells the outbursts seem to
occur spontaneously, without the need for an ex-
ternal stimulus to start the discharge.

The best example is the respiratory centre, the
group of cells in the brain stem which controls the

234

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 100

rhythmic movements of breathing. For these cells
the normal state is one in which periods of rest
and activity alternate regularly. There are vari-
ous devices for controlling the rhythm and pro-
longing one or other phase to suit the convenience
of the organism, but the regular cycle must return
in the end, and it can occur, not from a sequence
of reflexes, but from the cycle of breakdown and
repair in the nerve cells. The movements of
walking and running can be determined in the
same way by an automatic rhythm in a group of
nerve cells. With these, however, the organism
has a greater measure of control and can start or
stop the rhythm by the appropriate signals. The
work of Coghill and others on the development of
behaviour in the embryo has shown that many
complex activities have this same semi-automatic
origin, the outside world giving signals to begin
and end and the organization of the nerve cells
determining the general plan of response.
Admittedly there can be no real separation of
activities which are spontaneous from those which
are evoked by the environment. It is of interest
none the less to find that the region in which
spontaneous activity seems most ready to occur is
in the great surface network of the forebrain—the
cerebral cortex. Even in deep anaesthesia the
cortex is alive with the electrical pulsations which
are the index of nerve cell activity. They vary
from a simple rhythmic beat to an irregular suc-
cession of waves. The latter are not merely a re-
flection of the irregular world outside, for the
anaesthetic has cut off all incoming sensory mes-
sages; they are due rather to the automatic dis-
charges of nerve cells, linked together, but differ-
ing in position and structure and in the past his-
tory of their activities. In these cells a steady
state is impossible because their internal tension
is constantly increasing to the point of discharge.
Although the cortex cannot be kept completely
at rest for more than a few seconds, the degree of
activity in it can vary enormously. The variations
are due in part to the world outside and in part
to the internal necessities of the nerve cells. Ac-
tivity in one cell tends to foster activity in its
neighbours and so to build up the general level of
excitation. The level will rise until the process
is checked by the falling reserves of available
energy. Similarly rest breeds rest, and this pro-
cess is checked by the internal tensions rising ul-
timately to the point of breakdown. The sudden
increase of activity when we wake in the morning
illustrates the change of level brought about by
external stimuli acting on a recharged nervous
system, though other factors are concerned as
well. Inhibition, the process by which one cell
can suppress instead of enhancing the activity of
other cells, is no doubt a factor which helps to
shift the focus from one part of the cortex to an-
other. In general, however, we may think of the

forebrain as a complex society of nerve cells, the
units of which cannot remain for long either in
intense activity or in complete rest.

These electrical changes give a picture of cere-
bral activity which recalls certain features of men-
tal activity. The environment can start or stop a
train of thought and keep it within certain chan-
nels, yet the sequence of ideas is often dictated
almost entirely by past events and certain se-
quences seem to obtrude themselves unbidden.
Such comparisons are dangerous, for they suggest
that we have already a reasonable knowledge of
the connection between mental and neural events,
whereas in fact we know almost nothing. We
can be sure, nevertheless, that the connection is
extremely close.

The activity of the cerebrum, determined large-
ly by the past and continually changing even in a
steady environment is in sharp contrast with that
of the rest of the central nervous system. This
has no memory. Its function is to carry out the
plans dictated by the cerebrum and at the same
time to keep the machinery of the body running
smoothly. It must regulate the intake of food and
oxygen, the circulation of the blood, its tempera-
ture and acidity. It must keep the body in its
correct position in space, balancing it in spite of
its shifting centre of gravity. It must minimize
the disturbances which are likely to result from
great exertion or injury. For all this there is a
beautiful reflex machinery coordinating the mes-
sages from sense organs specially adapted to reg-
ister the blood pressure, the tension in muscles,
the pull of gravity, etc. But an animal without its
cerebrum is no more than an automaton: it can
stand and breathe and live after a fashion, but its
behaviour is reduced to a number of reflexes or,
at the most, habitual patterns of action.

Long ago Claude Bernard insisted that the in-
ternal environment must be constant if life is to
be unrestricted. His dictum has been supported
lately by two distinguished physiologists from the
two Cambridges. Cannon has shown how the
visceral nerves prepare the body for sudden emer-
gencies and Barcroft has studied the factors which
lead to a breakdown of normal activity. It is sig-
nificant that man has more need of a constant en-
vironment than any other animal, since it is the
cerebrum which has the most delicate organization
and can least withstand any change.

Human behaviour, then, is preeminently the af-
fair of the cerebral cortex. This is made up of
the same structures as the rest of the nervous
system though there are more nerve cells in it,
larger networks, in proportion to incoming and
outgoing pathways and more spontaneous dis-
charge. What is new is its power to combine
past activity with present. As Sherrington has
said, “The great new surface net of the brain is

DeceMBeER, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

235

educable. Before it, truly, there were educable
systems in the animal world but this is so edu-
cable as to be practically a new thing in the
world. In the dog it can acquire new links even
in a few repetitions and links can be combined
even to the third degree. In man it seems they
can develop almost without limit.”

The cortex can learn and can use its learning
to generalize and to solve new problems. But
even the simplest kind of learning involves a fac-
‘tor which must still be expressed in psychological
terms. As Pavlov’s work has shown there must
be interest, a prospect of reward or punishment,
an emotional stress which will change to satisfac-
tion when the lesson is learnt or the problem
solved.

We are still quite ignorant of the neural
changes which take place when new associations
are formed in the brain and we can only guess
why an incentive is necessary. Twenty or even
ten years hence we shall know much more, for
there are definite changes in the electrical activity
of different regions when we direct our attention
from the visual field to the auditory and vice ver-
sa. These are not beyond analysis. It is perhaps
too much to hope that in revealing the neural
mechanism of attention they will reveal that of
consciousness as well, but at least they may show
what kind of influence is exerted by emotional in-
terest and why that influence is exerted on par-
ticular mental and neural sequences.

We may guess that the state favourable to
learning involves an increase of excitability and
possibly a change in the chemical environment of
those parts of the brain in which the new con-
nections are established; and probably it is
brought about by the more primitive parts of the
forebrain, the hypothalamus and the basal ganglia.
These regions prepare the nervous system for its
cycle of sleep and waking; they are linked with
the hormone system and they control various
kinds of instinctive and emotional behaviour.
Sinister proof of their importance comes from
cases of injury or disease. But whatever the re-
gions concerned, it is safe to assume that there
must be some activity on the emotional or instinc-
tive level to direct the attention and prepare the
brain for new associations.

For discriminative behaviour, therefore, there
must be some interest; yet if there is too much
the behaviour will cease to be discriminative. Un-
der intense emotional stress the behaviour tends
to conform to one of several stereotyped patterns.
These are managed by the more primitive parts
of the forebrain and the cortex has little to do
with them beyond directing the behaviour towards
a particular object. Bard has shown that a cat
whose cortex has been destroyed may give all the
signs of rage, though it is a blind rage and useless
to the animal. With the brain intact the rage is

directed. It is still a stereotyped response, but it
is often the best response for the cat to make since
its cortex has not the capacity to plan more elab-
orately. In man, however, the cortex, when it is
allowed free play, can be far more potent, and
emotional reactions which force the behaviour
along one line and allow no scope for discrimina-
tion are far less so. Moreover emotional reac-
tions tend to spread through all the members of a
group and to build themselves up to higher and
higher levels.

There is no need to pursue a devious argument
to its certain but commonplace conclusion—that
our behaviour will be most effective when there is
enough emotional tension to arouse the activity of
the forebrain but not enough to submerge it in a
stereotyped response. We know well enough that
our emotions can cloud our judgment and the
psychologists have shown that they do so far more
than we suspect. We know that some interest is
necessary, that moral indignation supplies the
driving force for great reforms but that rage does
not help them. Need we care greatly whether the
neurologists can produce a scheme of nervous
mechanism which will account for these things?

Most of us, I think, would welcome the knowl-
edge gained but we might reasonably doubt
whether it would make us more effective units of
society. It is, in fact, unlikely that neurological
research will give new methods of control over
human behaviour. What it will certainly do is to
improve some of the methods which exist already
—tor instance the control of behaviour by drugs.
Tea and alcohol are homely examples, and the
new narcotics which can give peace of mind before
a surgical operation have shown what we may
expect in the future from this method of regulat-
ing our brains. For more continuous action there
are the drugs which the body manufactures for
itseli—the hormones. These, fortunately, have a
place reserved to themselves in to-day’s discussion.

But when all is said a knowledge of physiology
offers only one certain, though perhaps unattain-
able, method by which human behaviour could be
improved. That is to breed men with larger
brains. Our cerebral hemispheres are not so
much larger than those of the chimpanzee and
contain no new structures, but our behaviour is
of a different order. We can pile one box on an-
other without thinking! Professor Kohler’s
chimpanzees could succeed by chance but the es-
sentials of the problem were quite outside their
mental range. IJt is tantalizing to think of the
new relations we should see, of the new world of
thought we should live in, if our brains were but
twice their present size. Our behaviour would
then be superhuman! It would be determined by
the same physiological factors, but the importance
of the cortex would be so magnified that the re-
sult must be beyond the power of human thought.

236

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 100

DETERMINATION IN THE EARLY DEVELOPMENT OF THE SEA-URCHIN
Dr. Sven Horstapius
Associate Professor of Zoology, University of Stockholm

The sea-urchin egg has been one of the classical
objects of experimental embryology since the days
of Hans Driesch, Theodor Boveri, Curt Herbst
and Thomas Hunt Morgan, when these investiga-

tors in the "90s and the first decade of this
century worked at the Zoological Station of
Naples. Especially the results and concepts of

Hans Driesch aroused a world-wide interest and
exerted a great influence upon biological think-
ing. Driesch isolated fragments of early cleavage
stages by shaking in calcium-free sea water. He
came to the conclusion, that the sea-urchin egg
is a harmonic equipotential system; that is to say,
that practically every fragment could develop
into a whole larva. Let us take this vitalistic
idea of Driesch as a background and see what
results we will get with more modern technique
—the glass needles of Spemann combined with
the calcium-free sea water of Herbst, the local
vital staining of Vogt, and some specific methods
for cutting, staining and transplantation.

Before we proceed to experiments we need fair-
ly thorough knowledge of the normal development
of the sea-urchin (Fig. 1). The first two furrows
are meridional, the third equatorial, dividing the
egg into eight equal blastomeres. But sometimes

b5
the third furrow cuts through further toward the

Emocromarss
; »
. ’

mucromeres.

ists ¢ =

meen

FIGURE 1

vegetative pole and as a consequence the four
animal blastomeres will become larger than the
vegetative ones and will thus contain a part of
the material really belonging to the vegetative half.
The next cleavage is unequal, giving us one ring
of eight animal mesomeres, four big vegetative
macromeres, and four small micromeres. In the
32-cell stage the animal half consists of two rings
of eight cells each, which are designated as any
and an,. In the 64-cell stage the macromeres have
divided into two rings of eight cells each, which
we call veg; and veg». Thus we can divide the
egg into five layers—an;, anz, veg1, Vege and the
micromeres. The blastula soon acquires active
cilia. At the animal pole we find an apical tuft
of long stiff cilia. Even before gastrulation the
mater ial derived from the micromeres migrates
into the blastocoele as the primary mesenchyme,
which will later give rise to the skeleton. At
gastrulation, contrary to the old view of Boveri
and von Ubisch that the whole vegetative half
invaginates, only veg, will invaginate to form the
archenteron. At the tip of the archenteron the
secondary mesenchyme and the coelom are budded
off. At this stage we find the first traces of bi-
lateral symmetry, as the one side of the gastrula
is flattened and thickened to develop into the oral
field, surrounded by the ciliated band. At this
side we find also two spicules, the first rudiments
of the skeleton. From the oral field an ingrowth
of the ectoderm forms the stomodaeum, which
joins the tip of the archenteron. The archenteron
is divided into oesophagus, stomach and intestine.
3y interaction of the ectoderm and the primary
mesenchyme cells the four arms are formed, sup-
ported by skeleton rods. The egg axis in the fully
developed pluteus is indicated by the stippled line
in the last drawing of Fig. 1.

Zoja, Terni and yon Ubisch have already shown
that the isolated animal half does not gastrulate.
If we study the isolated animal half closely, we
will find that the majority of cases show a greatly
enlarged apical tuft, covering up to about three-
fourths of the surface. Others have a smaller
apical tuft and there are all kinds of intermediate
stages down to some animal halves with a normal
apical tuft. A couple of days later those with a
very large apical tuft develop into uniformly ciliat-
ed blastulae. Those with a slightly smaller apical
tuft produce blastulae with a ciliated field. Others
form blastulae with a ciliated band, and those with
a normal apical tuft develop into blastulae with a
ciliated band and a stomodaeum, without any
trace of an archenteron. The vegetative halves

DeEcEeMBER, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

237

also show different types. Most of them are some-
what ovoid, without mouth and arms and with a
very irregular skeleton. Others more or less re-
semble typical plutei.

To interpret these phenomena we will adopt the
hypothesis suggested by Runnstrom, that there
exist in the sea-urchin egg two overlapping gradi-
ents, one animal and one vegetative, which inter-
act mutually and are partially hostile to each
other. Let us see what kind of regulation takes
place in the isolated vegetative halves. Since we
have taken away two-thirds of the presumptive
ectoderm we ought, according to Driesch, to get
an ectodermization of the presumptive entoderm
in order to get a harmonic larva. But the con-
trary takes place: instead the animal gradient be-
comes partly suppressed by the vegetative, so that
a part of the presumptive ectoderm becomes con-
verted into entoderm. If we rear the animal and
vegetative halves from one egg together we will
find that, roughly speaking, the animal half with
enlarged apical tuft corresponds to the best de-
veloped vegetative halves; whereas the more rich-
ly developed animal halves correspond to the more
poorly differentiated vegetative halves. This we
explain as follows: The animal halves with
stomodaeum and ciliated band came from eggs
where the third furrow was translocated towards
the vegetative pole. The material they have thus
obtained from the vegetative half inhibits the ex-
tension of the apical tuft and causes the forma-
tion of the stomodaeum and ciliated band. On the
other hand the lack of the most animal part of
the vegetative half accounts for the poor develop-
ment as regards the ectoderm and skeleton of the
vegetative half. That this view is right we can
prove by the following experiment.

If we take eggs of a type, which produce animal
halves with very enlarged apical tufts and, later,
ciliated blastulae and isolate the entire presump-
tive ectoderm (an; + any + veg), we find that
this fragment always develops into a larva with
a normal apical tuft, ciliated band and stomodae-
um (Fig. 2). This experiment shows the power
of the veg; material. If instead of veg; we add
veg» to the animal half, we obtain a perfect plu-
teus. Thus veg, forms the archenteron, in ac-
cordance with its presumptive significance, and
also has the power to inhibit the apical tuft and
bring about the formation of a ciliated band and
stomodaeum ; moreover, by regulation it forms a
skeleton.

If four micromeres are implanted in an entire
presumptive ectoderm (an; + an, + veg, + 4
micromeres) (See Fig. 2), we obtain perfect
plutei. The micromeres themselves form the
skeleton and have induced an archenteron. The
sane thing happens if we implant the micromeres
in an animal half. The micromeres also have the

FIGURE 2

power to inhibit the apical tuft and to cause the
formation of the ciliated band and stomodaeum.
The entodermizing power of the vegetative mater-
ial can be shown in many ways; for instance, by
adding an animal half to a meridional half. A
larva so produced has the volume of a normal
larva but only half the vegetative material of a
normal egg. By vitally staining the animal half
we can follow the entodermization which produces
a perfectly typical pluteus.

If we greatly diminish the vegetative material,
thus leaving the animal half in contact with only
two macromeres and two micromeres ;—or two
macromeres without micromeres; or one macro-
mere and one micromere; or only one macromere ;
or only half a macromere (Fig. 3) ;—we find en-
todermization in the first four cases, stronger
when the micromeres are present, but only pro-
portionate to the vegetative material. The smaller
the amount of vegetative material, the smaller also
the amount of entodermization. That is contrary
to what we would expect according to Driesch
and in the last-mentioned experiment, an animal
half plus a half macromere, we sometimes find
that the presumptive entoderm of the half macro-
mere cannot express itself. It 1s ectodermised
(Fig. 3).

One of the main principles emerging from this
work is that the development of a typical larva
out of a fragment is due, not to the absolute
amount of animal or vegetative material present,
but to the relative amount. This may be illus-
trated by the following experiment. If we assume

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 100

FIGURE 3

that in the last-mentioned experiment the suppres-
sion of the presumptive entoderm has been
caused by the animal gradient, we ought to get
normal development if we diminish the animal
forces: that is to say, leaving only a few animal
cells (instead of the animal half) in connection
with the half macromere. This, as a matter of
fact, always gives us a good larva with digestive
tract and skeleton. Now the presumptive en-
toderm in the half macromere is not suppressed
any more but is able to express itself and to form
not only entoderm but also skeleton. The same
principle is altered also by the fact that if we
fill animal halves or entire eggs with micromeres,
they will develop to ovoid larvae which look like
vegetative halves.

If we now isolate the four layers spoken of be-
fore, we find an illustration of the gradients. The
whole surface of an, is covered with long stiff
cilia, an, only to about 3/4 of the surface; veg:
may tardily acquire an apical tuft and then de-
velop into a ciliated blastula, or it shows no
apical tuft but still later develops a small
archenteron. (Fig. +). Veg» is very interesting.
It gives us ovoid larvae with large bi- or tri-
partite archenteron and one or two small spicules.
Here for the first time we get in a vegetative frag-
ment ectoderm formed by regulation, from pre-
sumptive entoderm. This means a more animal
differentiation than is suggested by the prospec-
tive significance of the material. At the same
time, the skeleton is a more vegetative differen-
tiation. This illustrates another main principle
shown by many of these experiments: reorganiza-
tion of the gradient system that takes place in
fragments leads to a stronger concentration of the
gradients at both poles of the fragment than be-
fore.

Another interesting feature of this veg» larva is
the poor development of the skeleton. We have
seen in Fig. 2 that veg2, together with the pre-
sumptive ectoderm, can give a good skeleton for
a whole pluteus. Here the skeleton is very poor.

This is not because of lack of skeleton material,
but for lack of enough animal properties of the
ectoderm which has been formed by regulation.
The whole larva is too vegetative to develop a
good skeleton and normal ectodermal differentia-
tions.

If we add one or two or four micromeres to
veg, (Fig. +), the larva will be too vegetative to
gastrulate. It forms an exogastrula. Four mi-
cromeres together with veg, will give us a larva
of the same type as veg, isolated. Thus veg, plus
four micromeres seems to have the same constitu-
tion with regard to the gradient system as veg,
isolated. In order to get the most pluteus-like
larva we have to take veg, isolated, veg; plus one
micromere, at, plus two micromeres, or an, plus
four micromeres. An, plus one micromere is
highly interesting. The micromere first checks
the apical tuft; later there is the struggle between
the gradients) which results in the defeat of
the vegetative forces of the micromere. The apical
tuft enlarges and the animal forces suppress the
vegetative, so that no indication of an archenteron
appears, nor can the primary mesenchyme cells
produce a skeleton.

The gradients can also be illustrated in the fol-
lowing way. If we implant four micromeres in
the animal pole of an entire egg, we get only a
very small archenteron induced. If we put the
micromeres between ai, and ai, the archenteron
will become larger, bi-partite, and there will be
supplementary skeletons on the sides. If we place
the micromeres between am, and the vegetative
half, a still larger archenteron will invaginate at
the point of implantation, but this one will later
fuse with the normal archenteron.

Another experiment showing the struggle be-
tween the gradients involves the removal of the
micromeres from the vegetative pole and their
implantation into the animal pole of the same egg.
In that case we have added nothing to the egg,
only translocated the micromeres from one place

FIGURE 4

December, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

239

to another, resulting in an enlarged digestive tract
and a considerably enlarged coelom. In this case
the implanted micromeres do not induce an arch-
enteron but they weaken the animal gradient so
as to allow the vegetative gradient to express
itself further towards the animal pole. The same
explanation holds for some other cases when four
micromeres are implanted into the animal pole of
an animal half. In this experiment we sometimes
obtain larvae with two archentera, one induced
at the animal pole by the micromeres, one formed
at the most vegetative part of the animal half.
As isolated animal halves never gastrulate, this
invagination of the vegetative part of the animal
half seems also to be due to a weakening of the
animal gradient by the micromeres. The most
animal region of these larvae is situated between
these two vegetative centers; here we find the
apical tuft. In other cases there may be no in-
vagination at the vegetative side of the animal
half, but only at the point of implantation. A
skeleton and stomodaeum are ee eee in ac-
cordance with this animal archenteron and the
apical tuft may be developed at the most vegeta-
tive part of the animal half, which now constitutes
the new animal pole. This means that we have in
this animal half a complete reversal of the polarity
of the egg axis, brought about by the micromeres.

We now turn to the determination of the dorso-
ventral axis, that is, the bilateral symmetry. This
axis is not so stable as the egg axis. It can be
influenced by stretching or centrifuging the egg
(Boveri, Runnstrom, and Lindahl). We are not
going to deal with experiments of that kind. Our
problem will be to study whether there will be a
bilateral organization in the early stages of de-
velopment, traces of which we may recognize in
meridional fragments. We know by vital staining
that the first furrow may divide right halves from
left, or dorsal from ventral; or it may pass obli-
quely to the median plane. We isolate half
blastomeres, and when they form, in an early
cleavage stage, open half blastulae, we stain the
cut side by leaning it against a piece of agar. In
some pairs we evidently have to deal with right
and left halves with complementary deficiencies of
the skeleton and arms of the stained sides. In
other pairs both larvae are stained on the dorsal
side, but one is ahead in development as regards
differentiation of the ventral side (ciliated band
and skeleton). As the dorsal half is also stained
on the dorsal side, the dorso-ventral axis must
have been reversed. Then we get many pairs
where larvae are stained obliquely, dorso-
laterally. Sometimes the cut, stained side is less
well developed than the other one, but sometimes
it is better developed. These different types may
be explained by the fact that the furrow has pass-
ed more or less obliquely, and that in the most

dorsal partner the dorso-ventral axis may be re-
versed, or may be rotated slightly. We cannot
exactly analyze these factors, but they probably
account for the different types of development in
the pairs that we obtain.

If we isolate the four blastomeres of the four-
cell stage in four dishes in such a way as to know
which of the cells have been neighbors to each
other, we often find in the development of these
quartettes that two of the larvae, the ventral ones,
develop their ventral side faster and better than
do the other two, which we designate as dorsal.
In other cases we may find one ahead of the other
three or one decidedly the best, whereas the op-
posite one develops still more slowly than the
other two. In these cases we obviously have to
deal with one ventral, one right, one left, and one
dorsal blastomere. The great majority of the
quartettes in this way indicate a bilateral organiza-
tion in the early cleavage stages.

If we divide the egg into eight meridional parts
(with the exception of the micromeres which have
to be first removed) we find that such small frag-
ments may give rise to plutei. Whether some of
these small larvae which we isolated in the right
order of sequence correspond to the ventral, others
to the dorsal, side, is not easy to determine.

The old problem of whether the egg is bilateral-
ly organized before fertilization can be approached
by dividing the egg into meridional halves (orient-
ing by the aid of the pigment ring in Paracentro-
tus eggs) and subsequently fertilizing the two
halves. One will of course be haploid. Some pairs
show complementary deficiencies on the right and
left sides. Others differentiate like ventral and
dorsal halves; there are cases where the diploid
partner is the better developed larva (designated
as ventral), but also cases where the haploid part-
ner, which always develops more slowly than the
diploid, clearly shows itself to be ventral.

Schleip, Runnstr6m and Lindahl have suggested
that the cause of bilateral symmetry would be that
the vegetative gradient would be stronger on the
one side than the other. There are many facts
in favor of this view, but it is untenable since the
dorso-ventral axis is reversed in the dorsal halves.
According to the view in question, the dorso-
ventral axis ought to be kept in the dorsal half.
There are some indications that we have in the
sea-urchin egg two fields of high activity, one
larger on the ventral and one smaller on the dorsal
side. We may suggest that in the dorsal half the
new ventral side (the old dorsal field) may have
about the same properties in relation to the cut,
new dorsal side as has normally the ventral field
to the dorsal.

Tyler has shown that the smaller a larva is, the

more energy is required to bring it to a certain
stage of differentiation. He suggests that the fact

240

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 100

that small fragments (isolated eight-blastomeres )
cannot gastrulate is due to lack of energy. But
we have seen that fragments a little smaller than
one eighth of an egg can develop into a pluteus.
This is due to the fact, that in this case the
animal and vegetative forces are present in nearly
normal proportions, which they are not in isolated
right-blastomeres. Tyler has further shown that
giant eggs composed of two fused eggs develop
faster than normal ones, although we must pre-
sume that regulation takes place in them. Tyler
means that the well-known retardation of de-
velopment of fragments is not due to regulation,
as has always been believed, but to energy condi-
tions. We have clearly seen from the development
of half and quarter larvae, that there is a regula-
tion of the dorsal fragment which requires time.
It is possible, however, that both views may be
combined, that there is a general delay in frag-
ments due to energy conditions, and, moreover, a
specific delay, more marked in dorsal fragments,
due to regulation.

The Echinoderm larvae have a marked bilateral
asymmetry, the hydrocoele (which gives rise to
the ambulacral system) developing on the left side.
This asymmetry was studied in the starfish larva.
If such larvae were divided into right and left
halves at an early stage, the left halves always de-
veloped a hydrocoele on the left side, but in the
right halves we could get a hydrocoele on the left
side, the right side, or on both sides. This may
also be explained by two opposite gradients, the
left stronger than the right. It then appears to
depend upon the relative strength of the gradients,
whether in the right half the left or right will be
the stronger, or whether they will be equal.

Let us finally study how determination proceeds
in time. If we isolate animal halves every second
hour from the 16-cell stage (4 hours after fertil-
ization) up to the beginning of gastrulation (16
hours after fertilization) we will find, both
as regards the apical tuft and the differentiated
organs (ciliated band and stomodaeum), that the
animal half seems to become fully determined
comparatively early (about 8 hours after fertiliza-
tion). But if we isolate only the most animal
fourth of the egg, corresponding to an,, we find
the determination not completed until 14 or 16
hours after fertilization. This means that the de-
termination proceeds from the vegetative towards
the animal pole. The isolated vegetative half
shows the different types which we knew before
(ovoid larva - pluteus) until we get to 14 or 16
hours after fertilization, when suddenly a new
type appears, a pluteus with long, anal arms, but
completely without oral lobe. Thus also regard-
ing the vegetative halves determination seems to
be complete at about 14-16 hours. The same holds
for right and left halves. At 10 hours, for in-

stance, the complementary deficiencies are much
more marked than at the early stages we studied
before. A beginning gastrula, divided into right
and left halves, differentiates into two half-plutei,
looking exactly as if one had cut an already dif-
ferentiated pluteus into two halves. The dorsal
and ventral partners, isolated at about 10 hours,
show different types, some of which reverse the
dorso-ventral axis completely in the dorsal part-
ner. A skeleton is sometimes formed, not
only on the new ventral side, but also on
the new dorsal side. Others with two pairs
of skeletons may not reverse the dorso-ven-
tral axis, but form a ciliated band and mouth
on the presumptive most ventral part. Thus it
seems as if at this stage the dorsal halves do not
quite know how to develop. If we cut still later,
at the beginning of gastrulation, the dorsal and
ventral halves also develop exactly like dorsal and
ventral parts of the pluteus.

If we isolate a great number of animal halves
in the 16-cell stage (4 hours after fertilization)
and implant micromeres, in some of them im-
mediately, in others 2, + and up to 12 hours later,
(that is, 6 to 16 hours after fertilization), we ob-
tain different types of larvae—typical plutei with
small digestive tracts; larvae with an archenteron
that does not reach the stomodaeum; blastulae
with ciliated band, stomodaeum, skeleton and
arms ; the same kind of blastula but without arms;
blastulae with skeleton and ciliated band; ciliated
blastulae with small spicules. These different
types occur in a certain specific order of sequence
in relation to the time of implantation. The later
the micromeres are implanted, that is to say, the
longer the animals have been lying isolated before
implantation, the less they will be open to the
inducing influences of the micromeres. Already
six hours after fertilization the plutei will have a
small digestive tract only; at eight hours few
gastrulate any more, the majority are blastulae
with skeleton, arms, and stomodea. At 14 or 16
hours we find only ciliated blastulae with small
spicules inside. If we now, on the other hand,
instead of isolating in the 16-cell stage, isolate at
4-16 hours after fertilization and immediately im-
plant the micromeres, we find that the animal
halves will be able to respond to the induction at
a much later stage than in the former case. The
same difference holds also for the action of lithium
on the animal halves which have been lying iso-
lated some time before being put into lithium
compared to those which were isolated at a later
stage and immediately brought into lithium. Thus
the animal half develops faster in an animal di-
rection when it is isolated, than when all the time
connected with vegetative material.

All these experiments have shown that the sea-
urchin egg is not a harmonic equipotential system

DeEcEMBER, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

241

in the sense of Driesch, nor are the organs fully
pre-formed. We find systems of gradients and
fields of different activity, and we find that dif-
ferentiation is due to the interaction of these dif-
ferent parts of the egg.

With operative methods it is possible to map
out the prospective significance of the different egg
regions, to find out the potencies of small regions
when they are isolated, and when combined with
other parts of the egg, thus revealing the inter-
actions between the different regions. But we can
never get to the processes behind these phenom-
ena. Here the cell physiologist has to continue.
A good start in this way has been made by the
Echinoderm school of Stockholm, as it has been
called, under the inspired leadership of Dr. Runn-
strom. It is to be hoped that future work in this
field will give us valuable contributions to our
knowledge of development.

(This article is based upon a lecture presented
at the Marine Biological Laboratory on July 31).

DISCUSSION

Note: Dr. H6rstadius’ lecture was discussed in-
formally on August 14 by a group of workers at
the Marine Biological Laboratory, including Dr. T.
H. Morgan, Prof. Douglas M. Whitaker, Dr. P. B.
Armstrong, Dr. Oscar E. Schotté, Mr. A. B. Novik-
off, Dr. B. H. Willier, Prof. Ralph S. Lillie, Prof.
Robert Chambers, Dr. Ethel Browne Harvey, Dr.
Henry J. Fry, Dr. C. T. Kaylor, Dr. Felix Bernstein
and Prof. B. H. Grave. The following is not a
verbatim account of the discussion, some parts hav-
ing been left out because of minor interest and
others because they would be impossible to under-
stand without the drawings and slides that were
used. Professor Chambers acted as chairman.

Dr. Chambers: To what extent do you find
totipotency in the unfertilized sea-urchin eggs of
European forms? As I understand, you have
worked with a form which can be readily oriented
because of the presence of a pigment band about
the ovum.

Dr. Horstadius: Yes, Paracentrotus. We have
along the egg axis of the ripe egg even before
fertilization animal properties, the presumptive
ectoderm, occupying the upper three fourths of
the egg. If we speak of totipotency it is a little
bit difficult to define that picture. These three
fourths can give everything—but they cannot do
it by themselves. They may produce ectoderm,
but also entoderm if that is induced. And the
lower part of the egg, which ordinarily gives
entoderm, can also give ectoderm under certain
circumstances. As a matter of fact, it seems that
every part of the egg can give everything, but
not by its own power.

Dr. Whitaker: What do you get if you re-
move merely the micromeres and let all the rest
of the blastomeres remain together ?

Dr. Horstadius: You get a perfect pluteus,
because the skeleton-forming material goes up a
little higher than the material that normally forms
the micromeres.

Dr. Whitaker: Will you explain what you
mean by “regulation” ?

Dr. Horstadius: 1 mean redistribution of the
gradients to produce a gradient system which will,
as much as possible with the material present,
resemble a normal one.

Dr. Schotté: Will you please reconsider with
us the problem of the “organization center” in
the sea-urchin egg, which you spoke of in your
paper in 1928?

Dr. Horstadius: In that paper I spoke of an
organization center at the vegetative pole of the
egg, because if we isolate the animal half, which
ordinarily gives stomodaeum and ciliated band
and arms, we don’t get that out of the animal
half. Thus it seems as though something emanat-
ing from the vegetative half has not been able to
reach the animal part. That is one of the factors
that Spemann requires for an organization center.
If you put micromeres into an animal half you
get a whole pluteus. This resembles very much
the organization in the amphibian egg. Shortly
after, Runnstrom suggested the idea of the double
gradient system of forces partially hostile to each
other because of the activities which I have shown
here, and the experiments he himself performed
with lithium, concerning the animal forces in the
egg.

Now what about the organization center? We
cannot use the word “‘center,’’ but we could, if
we wanted to, speak of two organizers, animal
and vegetative. But I think it is better to speak
in terms of gradients in this case.

If we cut between the animal and vegetative
halves and turn the vegetative half upside down,
the vegetative part will form a-small blastula and
the animal will sit as a cap on top of the first.
Then the small vegetative blastula opens into the
cap and we get just one round blastula in which
the most vegetative material is now located im-
mediately under the equator. Gastrulation starts
with this most vegetative material. The result
will be a pluteus with a sort of gastrula hanging
outside the anus. This gastrula is derived from
the presumptive ectoderm and a part of the
presumptive entoderm of the reversed vegeta-
tive half. The entoderm of the pluteus also comes
from the vegetative half. Here the animal half
has incorporated a part of the presumptive ento-
derm of the vegetative half reversed at the opera-
tion, thus actually reversing the polarity of the
incorporated part. In that way the animal half
acts as an organizer, if you wish to say so, upon
the vegetative. .

242 THE COLLECTING NET

[ VoL. XI, No. 100

It is necessary to have a certain amount of
animal influence to get the formation of ciliated
band and stomodaeum; if a larva is too vegetative,
they won't be formed. On the other hand, if an
animal fragment is too animal, these organs won't
be formed either, although the prospective signifi-
cance of that material is to give ciliated band. If
we now add micromeres to the animal half we
get a pluteus with mouth, oesophagus, stomach,
intestine, skeleton and everything. Now the mi-
cromeres have caused the formation of these
organs. I think that might be called induction as
regards the archenteron. Do you think so?

Dr. Schotté: 1 think so.

Dr. Hérstadius; But if we now, instead of
adding the four micromeres to this animal half,
add, let us say, 12 or 16 micromeres, we get too
much of the vegetative power and the whole
individual will look like a vegetative half of an
egg which very often produces no mouth at all
and only a poor ciliated band. If we thus put
too much of this inducer into the animal half the
organ which will be induced by a smaller amount
will disappear again. Is that induction?

Another thing. Let us now put the micro-
meres, not down on the vegetative side, but up at
the animal pole of the animal half. In that case
we sometimes get an archenteron at the animal
pole, but also one at the vegetative pole. We see
by vital staining which are the two poles. The
animal archenteron has been induced by the im-
plant but this has also caused the formation of
the vegetative one, but a long distance from the
other pole. Is that induction? It is easy to
explain with the assumption that the animal gradi-
ent is weakened when the micromeres are 1m-
planted in the animal pole. and moreover it is so
much weakened that the vegetative gradient which
we always have in the animal half, but more or
less suppressed, is now able to form another
archenteron. I first thought this quite strange,
but when we think in terms of double gradients
it seems quite natural. Whether this agrees with
the term induction in its ordinary sense I do not
know.

Dr. Schotté: By induction we generally under-
stand formation of something essentially different
from what has been implanted. The micromeres
do not normally form the archenteron. There-
fore, if by their implantation a new archenteron
is obtained we have there a clear case of induc-
tion. But the differentiation of a second archen-
teron at the opposite pole of the implant cannot
be understood in the sense of a normal Spemann
induction but must be related to what you say:
that the embryo as a whole starts to influence this
region and a weakening of the animal influences
occurs. We have nothing similar in Amphibia.

Mr. Novikoff: Is it possible to use the other

end of the system, that is to implant or transplant
one of the ectoderm cells into the vegetative half?

Dr. Hérstadius: You can do that, but there,
you see, the animal properties are not so con-
centrated and you add there a part of the material
which will give itself the organs you want to
produce in the vegetative half. It is rather hard
to explain!

Mr. Novikoff: Suppose you take cells that
would form the apical tuft, which cells do not
have prospective significance of stomodaeum or
ciliated band, and implant that into the vegetative
half. Will that induce ectoplasmic structures ?

Dr. Horstadius: It will if the transplant is
large enough and strong enough. But it is very
hard to do. In the micromeres you -have small
cells which are very strong. In the animal half,
the forces are more diffuse and so it is difficult
to do such experiments. You can do it more
sasily in a chemical way—get an ectodermization
of vegetative material as Herbst and Lindahl have
shown. If you put the eggs before fertilization
into calcium-free sea water with sodium sulfo-
cyanate it is possible to make a whole egg develop
like an animal half, to give only a large apical
tuft and ectoderm.

Dr. Lillie: How do you use it?

Dr. Horstadius: You put the eggs in calcium-
free sea water and ten per cent isotonic solution
of Nal or NaSCN for about twenty hours before
fertilization, then you wash the eggs and fertilize.
If you afterwards isolate e.g. the most vegetative
quarter of the egg, the presumptive entoderm-
and skeleton-forming. material (which isolated
gives an exogastrula without any skeleton because
it is too vegetative), you get from that most
vegetative quarter of the egg some different types.
Some look like completely normal plutei!

Dr. Harvey: Cannot these animalized halves
be considered just as an arrested development,
just blastulae that do not develop further?

Dr. Horstadius: Not for several reasons. If
you have normal larvae, first day after fertiliza-
tion, say it is a gastrula with an apical tuft, and
the second day it is a pluteus. If you isolate an
animal half, the first day it has a very enlarged
apical tuft and some small cilia. The apical tuft
is much larger than normal, so it cannot be just
a normal development of this part. Secondly,
these eggs do develop further; the long stiff cilia
disappear and afterwards you get just small cilia
around. That is a further development, and most
of them are perfectly healthy—no pathological
cells at all. They swim healthily for a week. Then
in other cases, where the first furrow is not
equatorial but lower down, the animal halves may
also give larvae with a ciliated field and pavement
epithelium, or also larvae with ciliated band and
stomodaeum. So we have different types of dif-

DeEceMBER, 1936 |

THE COLLECTING NET

243

ferentiation and it is certainly a real development
we have.

Dr. Armstrong: Are there other criteria be-
sides differentiation by which we may demonstrate
these two gradients? What is the nature of the
gradient ?

Dr. Horstadius: Besides differentiation? Then
we get into the physiological side of it. We can
demonstrate in many of the slides I showed
the lecture the things I have been talking about.
On the physiological side, if you are interested,
I will mention a little of what has been done in
that way in Stockholm by Runnstrom and Lin-
dahl; some papers and preliminary notes are
published and a large paper by Lindahl is in press.
We know nowadays that in the animal half the
oxygen consumption is higher than in the vege-
tative half, so there are metabolic differences.
Carbon monoxide sensitizes to lithium; if you put
the eggs in carbon monoxide in darkness, this will
inhibit respiration, but, if you illuminate, that will
be reversed; the sensitizing effect will decrease.
Lindahl found that lithium alone will suppress to
a certain degree the oxygen consumption. War-
burg has shown that in the sea-urchin egg from
fertilization on there is a gradual increase in oxy-
gen consumption. Lindahl has found that, if you
put eggs in lithium, there is only little decrease
in oxygen consumption immediately after fertiliza-
tion but the decrease is augmented during de-
velopment. He also found that only one part of
the respiration can be inhibited by lithium.

Dr. Schotté: Would that explain why animal
and vegetative potencies manifest themselves, be-
cause the oxygen consumption at one or the other
pole decreases ?

Dr. Horstadius: It would in a way. I will
come to that. It has been found by Runnstrom
that potassium antagonizes lithium so that if you
add both K and Li to the sea water you will get
very little lithium effect. Lindahl found that this
adding of K also removes the inhibiting action
of lithium on the respiration, so that here we have
a parallelism between the metabolic changes and
the morphological. Then we have these experi-
ments with animalization which I mentioned be-
fore, the case of sulfocyanate. But this does not
act in an animalizing manner if respiration is
inhibited; if you put the eges into a milieu of
nitrogen for instance. And normal eggs respire
more than entodermized ones.

Dr. Lillie: Tf you have animalized them in
that way, do they respire more rapidly—have you
manometer experiments, for example ?

Dr. Horstadius: Yes. The animalized eggs
will respire more than the normal ones but, if you
animalize the eggs and after fertilization put them
into lithium (which will entodermize them), they
will come back practically to normal oxygen con-
sumption, as Lindahl has shown.

Dr. Whitaker: Do other respiratory stimu-
lants tend to animalize—methylene blue or things
like that ?

Dr. Horstadius: 1 don’t know. But it can be
done by sea water without sulfate ion. Then there
is another thing also in the recent research of
Lindahl. Herbst found this animalizing without
sulfate ion (together with increased Ca) and he
found that the sulfate ion is not necessary up to
the blastula stage. The eggs could develop per-
fectly well up to the blastula without sulfate ion.
Now Lindahl found also that up to the late blast-
ula stage there is no change of the respiration of
the eggs in sulfate-free sea water, but later from
the blastula with mesenchyme inside there was
about thirty per cent inhibition of respiration
when the sulfate ion was absent. Thus both
lithium and lack of sulfate ion inhibit respiration.
If he combines these two, he finds that the effects
are additive, and that seems to indicate that the
inhibition by lithium belongs to another sort of
reaction system than inhibition by lack of sulfate.
And still further he has found that there is in
the egg a phenol-sulfatase which seems to have
the function of “de-poisoning’” phenols when they
are formed. But if the sulfate ion is missing, there
won't be any “de-poisoning,” the phenols will
disturb the reactions, and the respiration is de-
creased. Lindahl explains the effect of the com-
bined lithium and sulfate ion in this way: the
vegetative reactions are inhibited by local poison-
ing by phenols if no sulfate ions are there; then
you have lithium in the water also, which will
prevent the extension of the animal tuft. But you
don't find any entodermization, which we ought
to have when there is lithium present, because
the vegetative reactions are disturbed by the
poisoning. Thus neither ento- nor ectodermiza-
tion, only a considerable decrease in oxygen con-
sumption occurs.

In this way Lindahl has been studying the
physiological differences between the two systems.
This is very hard to explain and to follow, I am
afraid, but it may give you an idea of lines along
which they are working to get at these things. I
think it indicates that there are physiological dif-
ferences which characterize the animal and vege-
tative parts. Lindahl comes to the conclusion,
that the animal type of metabolism, with the high-
er oxygen consumption, probably has to do with
the breaking down of the carbohydrates and mani-
fests itself in that part of the respiration which
can be inhibited by lithium, whereas the vegetative
type for example has to do with the formation of
phenol and another part of the respiration. A
further support of this view is given by the
following experiment by Lindahl (not yet pub-
lished). Lack of sulfate ion has no effect on
isolated animal halves—you remember that the

(Continued on page 265)

244

THE COLLECTING NET

[Vot. XI, No. 100

THE GENETICS SOCIETY OF AMERICA
PROGRESS IN CYTOGENETICS

IDs (Gy 13},

Carnegie Institution of Washington,

Judging from the past two years, these round-
table discussions consist mainly of hand-to-hand
battles, or “dog-fights.” And the function of the
so-called ‘introducer’ is to throw bones to these
dogs—the bones being highly controversial mat-
ters for them to fight about. But the introducer
should have another function too—of setting the
stage and reading the prologue, so that the non-
dog members of the audience can know better
what the fight is all about. For example, I am
sure that lots of people here have never seen a
salivary chromosome, though they may hope to
see one, and certainly, once this “dog-fight” gets
really going, they would rather see than be one.

What we mean by “progress in cytogenetics” is
deeper knowledge of the relation between two as-
pects of life—one is the characteristics of de-
veloped organisms, and how these characteristics
arise and are transmitted from generation to
generation. The other is the machinery behind
these phenomena, the physical structure of the
living units responsible for this inheritance. Until
about two years ago we could find out this relation
faster by breeding methods—for example, by
counting the kinds of children in families of flies
—than we could by directly looking at the cell
structure with the microscope.

What we saw by the microscope was chromo-
somes. Each cell of the female fruit fly has four
pairs of sausage-like bodies called chromosomes,
one of each pair from the father and the other
from the mother. What we found by counting
flies was that the determiners of the inherited
characters—the genes—were also in four groups,
the sizes of the four groups matching the sizes of
the four chromosomes. Also that the genes must
be assumed to be tied together end to end like
chains—and the lengths of these four chains
matched the lengths of the chromosomes.

But the internal distances within the maps were
found not to correspond very directly with the
internal distances along the chromosomes. In the
middle of chromosome 2 a long section of the
chromosome corresponds to a short section of the
map, while, near the end, a little of the chromo-
some corresponds to much of the map. That fact
tells us that the “coefficient of crossing-over”
(which is the ratio of length of chromosome in a
particular section to the length of map in that sec-
tion) is a variable and is high for the end regions
and is low for the attachment regions of the chro-
mosomes.

There the matter rested until the salivary chro-
mosomes were found and their huge size enabled

BRIDGES
California Institute of Technology

us to make the relation of the map to the physical
structure of the chromosome much more precise.

You will be hearing this morning about the
structure of the salivary chromosomes, so I'll
show you a photograph of pieces of them—in
which you see dark crossbands and also longi-
tudinal striations or threads running diagonally
along the chromosomes.

Each of the large strands is made by the fusion
or synapsis of the maternal and the paternal chro-
mosomes. Each paternal chromosome is supposed
to be compound, having several chromosomal
threads which arose by splitting of the original
single thread.

When the straightened-out salivary chromo-
somes are compared to the maps, the striking fact
is that the over-all length of each map matches
closely to the over-all length of the corresponding
salivary chromosome. Even the internal corre-
spondences match fairly well in the X-chromo-
some.

In comparing the end of the right half of chro-
mosome 2, and the corresponding map, the coeffi-
cient of crossing over is seen to be about normal ;
ie., 7 units of map distance between humpy and
plexus correspond to the same length of salivary
chromosome as do 7 units of map distance be-
tween plexus and speck. But here comes a dis-
tinctly new relation which it was only possible to
deduce from counting the bands of the salivary
chromosomes. You see that from humpy to
plexus the same number of bands are present as
in the sections from plexus to speck. But in the
latter section are 15 mutants on the map against
3 in the first. That is, the coefficient of mutation
is five times as high in the px-sp section as in the
hy-px section.

I hereby throw the first bone to the dogs, in the
contention that the reason for this difference in
coefficients of mutation lies not primarily in the
nature of the genes themselves but in the fact that
in certain regions the genes are not represented
only once but are also present elsewhere in the
chromosome as a duplication. In the left limb of
chromosome 2 are three such duplicating sections
of large size.

Many such duplications are now known or sus-
pected and their origin through unequal crossing-
over has been ascertained in the case of bar. They
may also arise through crossing-over between two
inversions which are semi-homologous—that is,
that fail to match exactly at one or both ends.

I was asked last night if anything of a startling
nature had arisen recently in the salivary work,

DeceMBER, 1936 |

THE COLLECTING NET

245

and I answered that something so surprising had
come up that I hadn't decided yet whether to be-
lieve it or not. It seems that in XXY females
part of the so-called nucleolus—a very large faint-
ly-staining structure—showed crossbanding and
longitudinal striations apparently of the same type
as the normal salivary chromosomes but tauch
more diffuse and distended with matrix material.
In the normal XX female the nucleolus is bag-like
and vacuolated and it is probable then that two

distinct structures, the true nucleolus and the nu-
cleolus-like Y-chromosome, have been confused
with one another. But this is only my working
hypothesis and sadly needs immediate testing and
checking by other material—especially with trans-
locations involving the Y.

(This article is an introduction to a round table
conference of the Genetics Society of America at
the Marine Biological Laboratory on September 4,
1936).

GENETIC NATURE OF SPECIES DIFFERENCES

slice
Professor of Genetics

The descriptive study of organic diversity may
now be considered well advanced. Approximate-
ly 822,000 animal and 240, 000 plant species have
been described and classified, and macroscopic as
well as microscopic anatomy of representatives of
main subdivisions of the living world has been in-
vestigated. The problem of organic diversity
must now be studied in a new aspect, namely as
a general property of the living matter.

The differences between any two individuals or
species are due to the fact that they carry differ-
ent genes. Each organism is characterized by
having a definite gene pattern, and the gene pat-
terns in different organisms may be unlike. This
statement does not represent, however, an ade-
quate solution of the problem of organic diversity,
for it fails to take into account the striking fact
that organisms are segregated into a finite num-
ber of discrete groups, species, which are prevent-
ed from interbreeding with representatives of
other similar groups. In other words, the exist-
ing organisms do not form a freely interbreeding
array in which all the possible gene combinations
may occur; the gene patterns characteristic for
each species are to a certain degree fixed, and ex-
change of genes between species is made difficult
or impossible.

On the other hand, new gene combinations are
constantly arising due to mutation and hybridiza-
tion. Evolution may be described as a resultant
of interaction of two opposing groups of forces:
those tending toward fixation of the established
gene patterns whose survival value has been
tested by natural selection, and those tending to
the production of new gene patterns.

Fixation of the established gene patterns is ac-
complished by a variety of causes preventing free
interbreeding of species with each other. All such
causes may be termed “isolating mechanisms.” It
is a remarkable fact that the isolating mechan-
isms which are observed in different groups of or-
ganisms are frequently different, and moreover
that interbreeding of a given pair of species may
be prevented by a cooperation of several isolating
mechanisms.

As an example of this situation the case of the

DoszHANSKY
California Institute of Technology

two “races” of Drosophila pseudodbscura may be
quoted. These “races, known as race A and
race B respectively, are partly isolated geographic-
ally, since B is found only on the Pacific Coast of
the United States and Canada, while A lives fur-
ther inland and Southward, up to and including
the Rocky Mountains and Mexico. Nevertheless,
in the Sierra Nevada-Cascade Mountains both
races occur together. Since race A has a higher
temperature optimum than race B, the former
tends to occupy lower elevations in mountains
than the latter—a partial ecological isolation. If
a choice of mates is available, race A males copu-
late predominantly with race A females; similarly,
race B females and males cross more freely inter
se than with individuals of race A. This is sexual
isolation. Crossing race A and race B results in
appearance in the F, generation of completely
sterile male and fertile female hybrids. The steril-
ity of the males is due in this case to interaction
of genes contributed by both parental races, and
not to dissimilarities in the gene arrangement in
the two races. The offspring obtained from back-
crosses of the F, hybrid females to the males of
either pure race consists of individuals whose via-
bility and fertility are very low. This decrease of
the viability is due to a maternal effect exerted by
the chromosomal complement of the hybrid mother
on the cytoplasm of her eggs.

The interbreeding of either race of Drosophila
pseudoobscura with another closely related species,
Drosophila miranda, is prevented by a different
set of isolating mechanisms. Sexual isolation is
present, that is individuals of either species mate
preferably with each other and not with individu-
als of the other species. The viability of the Fy
hybrids between pseudodbscura and miranda is
lower than that of each parental species; this dif-
ferential viability is especially pronounced in
males. Female as well as male hybrids are com-
pletely sterile. The mechanism of sterility is in
this case not established with certainty. It is
known, however, that the gene arrangement in the
chromosomes of miranda is very different from
that in either race of pseudodbscura. The differ-
ences are due predominantly to inversions which

246

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 100

alter the relative locations of genes within a chro-
mosome. However, some genes which in one of
these species lie in the same chromosome may in
the other species be located in different chromo-
somes; this is an evidence of translocations of
genic materials having taken place in the phylo-
geny. Finally, some chromosome sections present
in pseudodbscura can not be identified with cer-
tainty in miranda, and vice versa. The causation

of the last class of differences is unclear; they
may be due either to losses and duplications of
chromosome sections in the phylogeny, or else to
very profound alterations of the gene arrange-
ment in some sections by repeated inversions and
translocations.

(This article is a summary of a lecture delivered
before the Marine Biological Laboratory and the
Genetics Society of America on September 3, 1936).

THE NATURE OF MUTATIONS. I.
Dr. M. DEMEREC
Assistant Director, Department of Genetics
Carnegie Institution of Washington, Cold Spring Harbor, N. Y.

Mutation in its broadest sense may be defined
as an unexpected hereditary change. This defini-
tion includes various chromosomal abnormalities
as well as what are known as gene changes. A
satisfactory technique for investigating the first
mentioned group of mutations, viz. chromosomal
abnormalities, was available even before they
themselves were known, and consequently our
knowledge about these changes is good and well
substantiated. On the other hand, a satisfactory
technique for studying gene changes and point
mutations has not as yet been worked out, al-
though progress has been made along this line by
recent discoveries of x-ray effects and of the sali-
vary chromosomes. Consequently the work on
the genic part of the mutation problem is still in
its beginning stage and the evidence available at
present offers a chaotic picture of this field. In
such a situation there is an abundance of contro-
versial material which offers a productive field for
discussion.

Fast accumulating evidence indicates that so-
called gene mutations by no means form a homo-
geneous group of changes. There is positive evi-
dence to show that an effect identical to a gene
change may be due to a deficiency (yellow in
Drosophila melanogaster) or also to a duplication
(bar). Evidence has been presented, still requir-
ing confirmation, that a mere inversion of a min-
ute section of a chromosome produces a pheno-
typic effect comparable to a gene change. Data
are also accumulating to indicate that a great ma-
jority of lethal factors are deficiencies. All these
show beyond a reasonable doubt that a group of
changes called gene or point mutations consists of
a variety of types for the origin of which a similar
mechanism may or may not be responsible. In
order to study the nature of these mutations it is
essential to differentiate between the various types.
At present this is possible only in Drosophila and
other diptera which have large salivary chromo-
somes, whereas as yet no method has been dis-
covered which could be effectively used for mak-
ing such a differentiation for other organisms.
Even in the case of Drosophila the method now

available is laborious and requires a high degree
of skill and patience. However, by analyzing sal-
ivary chromosomes it is possible to differentiate
with a fair degree of accuracy between the differ-
ent types of changes and thus to obtain evidence
which is invaluable for the solution of the basic
problems of mutation.

The most frequent hereditary changes in Dro-
sophila are those producing a lethal effect. Be-
cause of their high frequency they have been ex-
tensively used in quantitative studies of mutation
rate and therefore a large body of data has been
accumulated in regard to them. Lethal changes
are not only the most frequent changes occurring
among random loci but they are also the most fre-
quent changes occurring among the known loci.
Similarity between the random lethals and _ the
lethals of known loci is such that it seems justified
to assume that all of them are similar in nature
and that all are produced by a similar mechanism.
About thirty lethals induced by x-rays and af-
fecting visible loci have been studied cytologically.
All were found to be deficiencies. This makes it
very probable that at least a large proportion of
lethals are of the same type, viz. that they are
deficiencies.

The salivary chromosome analysis of lethals re-
vealed one important fact, viz. that all which were
examined are deficiencies for more than one sali-
vary chromosome band, presumably for more than
one locus. This fact brings us to a basic problem
of the origin of these changes. There seem to be
two ways by which they may be originated. One
way is through a mechanical process, through the
formation of a loop and subsequent pinching-off
of a small piece of the chromosome, or through
breakage and subsequent union of the chromo-
some. The other way is through a chemical proc-
ess by which a chemical reaction either destroys
or inactivates a block of genes through some sort
of chain reaction or through a chemical change
developing in the gene environment and affecting
a whole block of genes. It seems very likely that
both of these processes are responsible for the ori-
gin of lethals. Their origin could hardly be ex-

DecempBer, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

247

plained by a mechanical process only. These de-
ficiencies are small taking from about 1/500 to
1/50 of the total length of the active X-chromo-
some region and consequently the loops for pinch-
ing-off such a small section must be exceedingly
minute. If such small loops can be formed at all,
it seems unlikely that they would be formed with
a high enough frequency to account for the num-
ber of lethals obtained in the material treated by
x-rays. The same holds for the breaking of chro-
mosomes. Moreover, available evidence indicates
that i certain regions of the chromosome there
may be a certain degree of regularity as regards
the bands involved in the deficiency. In the cut
region of the X-chromosome, for example, sixteen
deficiencies have been studied by Miss Hoover at
our laboratory. In all but one case the deficiency
is limited to a small section of three salivary chro-
mosome bands (7B2, 3, 4 of the Bridges’ 1935
map) which section is bordered on each side by a
heavy capsule (7B1 and 7C1). One case only has
been found so far where the deficiency involved
one of these capsules and extended over a section
of about nine bands. No other section of the
chromosome has been as extensively studied as the
cut region. The material analyzed so far suggests
that, in case of deficiencies in other regions, the
number of bands involved is more variable. In
the cut region, therefore, two bands, which hap-
pen to be heavy capsules, seem to have a blocking
effect for the spread of the deficiency. Such a
condition is readily visualized if a chemical reac-
tion is the mechanism by which deficiencies are
produced but it can hardly be explained on the
basis of the mechanical origin of deficiencies.

The “block effect” is evident not only among
deficiencies induced by x-rays, but also among
those occurring spontaneously. A number of such
deficiencies has been analyzed genetically and
some also cytologically, and the results indicate
the existence of block effects.

A close relationship between various changes
is suggested from the results of investigations
with lethals and chromosomal abnormalities. Fif-
ty-eight lethals, produced by x-rays and affecting
known loci, have been investigated cytologically.
In twenty-five cases it has been found that the
treatment produced simultaneously a lethal and a
chromosomal abnormality, either an inversion or
a translocation, in the same chromosome. Of
these, in twenty-three cases one of the breakage
points of the chromosome coincided with the
lethal change. This shows that these two changes
must have been produced by the same mechanism,
which means that either the process responsible
for a lethal change is frequently responsible for a
chromosome breakage or that the process respon-
sible for a chromosome breakage induces frequent-
ly a lethal change as well. If lethal changes are
responsible for some of the chromosomal break-

ages, then one would expect to find approximately
the same proportion of chromosomal abnormali-
ties among different groups of lethals irrespective
of their origin. This, however, is not the case.
Chromosomal abnormalities are rare among spon-
taneous lethals and among lethals obtained by
short x-ray treatment. Their frequency increases
with the dosage applied. This shows that the
mechanism responsible for the origin of lethals
does not induce chromosomal breakages, but that
the reverse process may be true, viz. that the
mechanism responsible for the production of chro-
mosomal abnormalities frequently induces a lethal
change at the point of chromosome breakage. For
at least two of these lethals it has been show n cy-
tologically that they are deficiencies. There are,
therefore, at least two types of lethals which may
be produced by two different though probably re-
lated mechanisms. In quantitative studies with
x-rays they were not differentiated and it may be
necessary to revise some of the conclusions based
on these studies if it should be shown that the ori-
gin of these two types of lethals is differently af-
fected by the treatment.
3efore concluding, I wish to call attention to
another important phase of the mutation problem,
viz. the close relationship between immediate gene
environment and changes in genes. Several cases
are known where a gene is unstable only at cer-
tain stages of ontogeny. For example, reddish of
Drosophila virilis is unstable only at a matura-
tion division of a heterozygous female; an allel of
miniature is known which is unstable in somatic
cells only, and lavender of Delphinium has been
shown to change with different rates at various
stages of ontogeny. Apparently in order that a
gene becomes unstable, it is essential for it to
have a certain environment and, for the cases
mentioned, such conditions are fulfilled at certain
stages of ontogeny. It has been shown by Emer-
son for maize, ‘and several similar cases are known
in Drosophila virilis, that the mutability of an un-
stable gene is greatly increased in the presence of
certain other genes. Here these genes help to
produce the environment in which a ‘particular un-
stable gene becomes still more unstable. Finally,
it has just been discovered that the Florida wild
stock of Drosophila melanogaster possesses a fac-
tor which increases the rate of mutability in this
stock almost ten times. This factor is located in
the second chromosome and indications are that it
Is active only early in the embryo. These muta-
bility stimulating: factors cannot have a direct ac-
tion on the genes they affect but must act through
the environment. This suggests that genes and
their immediate environment form an intimately
interacting system and also that the stability of
genes is affected by their environment.
In concluding this introduction I shall raise four
questions which may serve to start the discussion.

248 THE COLLECTING NET [Vout. XI, No. 100
(1) What is the mechanism by which changes (3) What is the possible mechanism of simul-

are induced by x-rays? Are they produced by a
direct hit of an electron or are they produced in-
directly through the environment of the gene?

(2) With the first question the second one
can be combined. How are chromosomal changes
produced? Are they produced through what may
be called an illegitimate crossing-over process or
through chromosomal breaks and the subsequent
fusion of the broken parts ?

taneous changes producing both a lethal effect and
a chromosomal abnormality ?

(4) What is the nature of block changes and
what is the mechanism of their origin?

(This article is an introduction to a round table
conference by the Genetics Society of America at
the Marine Biological Laboratory on September 5,
1936).

THE NATURE OF MUTATIONS. II.

PRor.

The conference this morning, although it bears
a different label, is essentially nothing more than
a continuation of yesterday's discussion (‘‘Prog-
ress in Cytogenetics”). There was a time, and
not so very long ago, when those who were in-
terested in mutation could sit smugly by while
chromosomes disrupted and cytologists wrangled,
secure in the knowledge that the really funda-
mental process, the mutation of the gene, had
nothing to do with these incidental distractions.
The gene was an independent particle, no doubt
a giant molecule, and true mutation was a change
in the chemical structure of this molecule. Other
hereditary variations were due to ‘chromosome
aberration,” but these had no connection, or at
most only an incidental connection, with the trans-
formation of the gene.

X-rays produced alteration of both kinds, but
it was elaborately proved that the gene mutations
produced by this treatment were due to changes
fundamentally different in kind from those in-
volved in the chromosomal derangements, and the
total of gene mutations, including recessives and
dominants, lethals and visibles, was taken as a
measure of the power of the radiation to change
the internal structure of the gene.

These gene mutations were extremely rare un-
der natural conditions, as far as most genes were
concerned, although there were some heterodox
genes in which mutation was not so rare. This
did concern us seriously; the explanation was
close at hand, they were simply highly mutable
genes. The reason that they changed so often
was simply that they mutated frequently. And in-
deed this sort of explanation is almost all that can
be looked for so long as we maintain the premise
that all gene mutation is due to change in the
gene-molecule. The chemical nature of these as-
sumed transformations of the hypothetical mole-
cules is as yet hopelessly beyond the reach of ex-
perimental analysis.

I take it that we are generally agreed that the
classical model of gene mutation must be modified
in certain respects. There is no question that the
chromosome is linearly differentiated. It is con-
venient to retain the name of gene for the hypo-

L. J. STADLER
Senior Geneticist, Bureau of Plant Industry, U.

S. Department of Agriculture

thetical unit of this differentiation, but it is no
longer safe to assume that every mendelizing va-
riation is due to a change in the internal structure
of one of these units, or even to assume that such
changes are generally responsible for mendelizing
variations and may be taken for granted when-
ever some grosser modification cannot be demon-
strated. The accumulating mass of evidence for
extra-genic alterations of various kinds, producing
genetic effects which meet all the tests of gene
mutation, forces us to consider the possibility that
some of our basic notions of gene mutation may
be in error. If the ultimate unit of differentiation
is to be called the gene, the point mutations at a
given locus may depend on changes (both intra-
genic and extra-genic) of several genes. If the
material basis of each mendelizing variation is to
be called the gene, it may be necessary to postu-
late smaller units within the genes so defined.

These extra-genic alterations are of 3 general
types, losses of genes, additions of genes, and
changes in the spatial relations of genes. The
shift in emphasis to the extra-genic types of mu-
tation is a hopeful development, for these, unlike
the intra-genic mutations, are subject to analysis
by methods now available. Perhaps the analysis
of these mutations (or pseudo-mutations) may
lead ultimately to the development of methods for
the analysis of the chemical changes which must
underlie the qualitative differentiation of the chro-
mosome.

It goes without saying that we are not yet in a
position to set up an acceptable model of mutation
which will provide for all sorts of processes cap-
able of producing variations of the type of which
we speak as gene mutations. The purpose of this
conference, I presume, is to discuss the sorts of
evidence which will be needed to enable us to con-
struct such a model.

I shall speak briefly of three types of evidence
which may be helpful in this task. These are con-
cerned with (1) the mechanism of gene rear-
rangement, or translocation in the broadest sense,
(2) methods for the study of minute losses, addi-
tions and rearrangements of genes, and (3) at-
tempts to separate the complex of mutations and

oe

DeceMBER, 1936 |

THE COLLECTING NET

249

OFFICERS OF THE GENETICS SOCIETY OF AMERICA AT WOODS HOLE
Left to Right: Dr. D. F. Jones; Dr. L. J. Stadler; Dr. R. A. Emerson; Dr. M. Demerec.

chromosomal aberrations by the use of different
physical agents to induce germinal alterations.

The mechanism of gene rearrangement was dis-
cussed in yesterday's conference. This problem
is of interest in connection with mutation because
of the association of mutations and chromosomal
derangements in progeny of x-rayed material.
Mutations occur frequently at points of chromo-
some breakage, although there are many muta-
tions which are not associated with detectable
chromosome derangements.

The hypothesis generally accepted is a modifica-
tion of Serebroysky’s and Dubinin’s hypothesis
suggested by Muller. This hypothesis accounts
for the chromosomal derangements by a sort of
illegitimate crossing over induced by the treat-
ment at points of contact between two chromo-
somes or between parts of the same chromosome.
This yields reciprocal translocations, internal in-
versions and internal deficiencies, derangements
which are frequently found among chromosomes
altered by irradiation.

The results of irradiation in maize suggested a
somewhat different mechanism. According to this
scheme the effect of the radiation is merely to
cause breaks in the chromosomes and the frag-
ments tend to reattach later at points of breakage.
If reattachment occurs, translocations, inversions
and deficiencies result, similar to those expected
on the basis of the other hypothesis. If the de-
tached fragment fails to become reattached before

it is lost from the nucleus, deficiencies result,
many of them being long terminal deficiencies.

This hypothesis appeared to fit the maize re-
sults more satisfactorily than the other, not merely
because it provided for the occurrence of terminal
deficiencies (which seem to be very common in
maize), but also because it provided a possible
mechanism for the phenomenon of “recovery,”
which apparently results from reattachment which
may be delayed through several cell generations.
Under this hypothesis we would expect that the
type of “gene mutation” which occurs at points
of breakage in translocations might occur also at
points showing no indication of chromosome
breakage, since in many cases a fragment would
reattach at the point of original breakage.

A crucial test of these two hypotheses is not
easily devised, since the derangements expected
are so nearly identical. Certain types of altera-
tion are much less frequently expected under one
than under the other, since complex inter-chromo-
somal or intra-chromosomal translocations would
require a very involved pattern of inter-crossing
strands under the crossover hypothesis but would
be expected not infrequently by chance recombina-
tion of detached fragments. This point, as re-
lated to intra-chromosomal translocations, has
been discussed by Glass. The clearest contrast
between the results of the two suggested mechan-
isms is in the occurrence of terminal deficiencies.
We have not relied too heavily on these in maize

=T

‘TING NE

EC

1 (COWL

7

THE

250

[ Vor. XI, No. 100

‘aTepood “H (18) “seA ‘O'S (08)
‘anwW1 OO (61) ‘ensoH ‘f W (LL) “MeysueH 'S ‘d (FL) “Wos}Ieqod “M ‘O (gL) ‘uepAog “v (ZL) “HeusIeIN “Vv (TL) ‘“Pleygeouel “A ‘d (OL)
pIUO “*D (69) ‘stloSuevw (89) ‘SheH “A (19) “SsiequIeIS “D “VW (99) “UlmMRS (79) “OUlpod “H Lf (9) “UlesUIeEM “V (09) ‘UesIOW “H ‘L (6S)
‘saaqjoreD “A (g¢) “Ateay “Vv (1G) ‘dereWIed “W (9G) “239IN “MO (FS) ‘TP4°N “UY “a (gg) “wmeqry “H (1g) ‘seJUemIeg "1D (6h) “UWS (8h)
‘QsS1q ‘f (1b) “X®8S “M ‘SIN (9F) “XBS “M (Gh) “OPBIYOS “A (FF) AIO “A "I (gp) “UOJTSUIS “UY (Zh) ‘UWeMpleaq “H (1h) ‘“UosuBeH “A (OF)
‘yaoduearq ‘dO (68) “SPH Wa (se) ‘PHeU d (LE) ‘ySnold ‘H ‘H (Fg) ‘“zeneg suey (gg) ‘“JepeIyOS-soysnH “S (Ze) “Peed “S (6Z) ‘uos
-19uIy “WU (8%) «= 18IPBIS “CT (1Z) + “PPB (97) “SSVID “AH (GZ) “AOAPWN “M LC (oz) ‘emyeig “M (61) “JUSIUMORIN “H “Y (81) ‘TsuAzIS
‘Gq (LI) ‘“JeA0OH “HW (9T) ‘SSH®M N (GT) “HOIPIOd “I (FT) ‘SHIeH “YU SIN (ET) “TOTeM ‘HO(ZT) ‘ejueg WV (IT) “Aysueyzqod ‘UL (OT)
‘OoId “YU “I (6) ‘sosplig ‘a ‘O (8) “SsunIDON aA 'O (LZ) ‘seuor “4d (9) “PpOOAA “L (¢) ‘de}sOy [I (§) “ABIININ “MM (Z) *3u01}S Koy tae (C10)

AYUOLVYYORVT TVOIDOTOIA ANIYVN
AHL JO Sd&LS AHL NO AIOH SGOOM LV VOINGWV HO ALAIOOS SOILLANHS AHL 4O SONILAAW AHL ONIGNGALLY SLSISOTOIa

DECEMBER, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

251

because in individual instances there is always the
possibility that the apparently terminal deficiency
is in fact non-terminal with one break very near
the end of the chromosome. This possibility
makes almost any individual instance questionable,
although the frequency of apparently terminal de-
ficiencies is so high that they cannot be accounted
for on this basis without a special hypothesis to
account for an extremely high frequency of breaks
near the end of the chromosome. In Drosophila
not many terminal deficiencies have been found,
but this may be due to factors affecting the via-
bility of long deficiencies or deficiencies of the end
region of the X-chromosome.

The chief reason for the general adoption of the
illegitimate crossover hypothesis seems to be the
relation of the frequency of chromosomal derange-
ments to dosage. It is assumed that the frequency
should increase with the square of the dosage if
rearrangements require the coincidental occur-
rence of two breaks. Oliver found that the fre-
quency of chromosomal derangements increased
with dosage but not much more than in direct
proportion, and Muller concluded that this is ir-
reconcilable with the hypothesis of translocation
by reattachment of fragments.

This argument is, I believe, wholly invalid, for
it is dependent on the assumption that the num-
ber of breaks is relatively small. We have no
way of estimating the number of breaks induced
by the radiation, since there is no way of telling
how many fragments are reattached in their ori-
ginal position. The expected frequency of trans-
location on the assumption of free interchange of
position among fragments may be calculated for
arly assumed frequency of breaks. With 40 breaks
per hundred cells we would expect 6 cells to have
2 or more breaks; with 80 breaks per hundred
cells 19 should have 2 or more breaks; with 160
breaks per hundred cells only 48 cells should have
2 or more breaks. Thus doubling the number of
breaks does not quadruple the number of oppor-
tunities for translocation; it approximates this
only when the number of breaks is low, and it falls
short of this relation more and more as the num-
ber of breaks increases. If the number of breaks
is large enough, the expected increase in translo-
cation may be even less than in direct arithmetic
proportion. The dosage relation therefore does
not help us to decide between the two hypotheti-
cal mechanisms of translocation.

The two hypotheses mentioned are not the only
possible mechanisms of induced gene rearrange-
ment, and certain types of derangement observed
are not satisfactorily accounted for by either. It
1s not improbable that other phenomena are in-
volved in the occurrence of such alterations as for
example, the deficiency and translocation of rnin-
ute chromosome segments. However, as far as
these two hypotheses are concerned, I think we

must consider the question still an open one, and
the evidence now available is, I believe, more fa-
vorable to the hypothesis of fragmentation and
subsequent reattachment than to that of illegiti-
mate crossing over.

I should like next to take up briefly the efforts
to produce for experimental study minute extra-
genic changes.

(Slide—showing two chromosomes exhibiting
non-homologous pairing. In such non-homolo-
gously paired chromosomes, if crossing-over may
occur in the regions of non-homologous pairing
one then has a chance for the production of minute
extragenic changes; for example, a crossover in
this region may result in the production of a new
deficiency in one of the chromosomes while the
other would have the original deficiency plus a
duplication. Various modifications of this are ob-
tainable depending upon the locus of the cross-
over. Some results have been obtained which can
only be interpreted upon the basis of non-homolo-
gous crossing-over. )

The third point which I want to bring up is the
results of studies with ultra-violet radiation in col-
laboration with Dr. G. F. Sprague. The ultra-
violet studies are interesting chiefly because of the
possibility of detecting different genetic effects of
different wave lengths. The corn plant is particu-
larly favorable material for these studies since
there are a number of endosperm characters which
can be used to give an indication of the critical re-
gions of the spectrum which are effective in in-
ducing deficiency.

Using unfiltered ultra-violet light, a great in-
crease in deficiencies is obtained, though the num-
ber is less than that produced by large x-ray
doses. Several differences between the results ob-
tained with x-rays and those produced by unfil-
tered ultra-violet may be noted. One important
difference is the frequent occurrence of fractionals
with ultra-violet. Also the frequency of mutation
at different loci differs with x-ray and ultra-violet
treatment.

(Slide—on the genetic effects of different wave-
lengths of filtered ultra-violet. Using 3 mercuric
chloride filters. Results: wave-length band 3130
and longer were found to be genetically ineffec-
tive; 2967 and shorter were effective; 3022 effec-
tive but reduced as compared to 2967. Ultra-vio-
let produced by a mercury discharge tube, wave-
length line 2537, was found to be ten to fifteen
times more effective genetically in power to give
deficiencies. ) ‘

(Slide—comparison of ultra-violet with x-rays.
Ultra-violet produces more fractionals than whole
chromosome losses. X-ray produces more whole
chromosome losses than fractionals. )

(This article is an introduction to a round table
conference of the Genetics Society of America at
the Marine Biological Laboratory on September 5).

bo
on
Les)

THE COLLECTING NET

[Vor. XI, No. 100

RESEARCH FACILITIES OF THE U. S. BUREAU OF FISHERIES
(Continued from page 217)

methods in vogue at the time].

To provide adequate facilities for these studies,
Baird chose Woods Hole as the location for the
first permanent marine biological station in Amer-
ica and secured vessels for marine research. The
schooner Grampus was the first, soon followed by
the steamer Fish-hawk and later by the steamer
Albatross which, it is said, has contributed more
to marine investigations during its many years of
service in both the Atlantic and the Pacific than
any other American vessel. Stimulated by Baird’s
activity Louis Agassiz established a summer lab-
oratory on Penikese Island which was later re-

of the commercial fisheries and their maintainence
on the basis of sustained yield, to the cultivation
of water crops in lakes and streams and to the
cultivation of shellfish. The organization of the
Division of Scientific Inquiry reflects these major
objectives in four sections engaged in commercial
fishery investigations on a geographic basis,
in two sections concerned with aquiculture, the
section on the fresh water sport fisheries and in
one engaged in the study of shellfish culture.
These sections under the direction of competent
and experienced biologists are staffed by some 45
permanent investigators and by varying numbers

FISHERY RESEARCH AT COLUMBIA, MISSOURI

A corner of one of the eight laboratories provided by the University of Missouri
for the study of the effects of stream pollution on fishes.

moved to Woods Hole and thus fathered the pres-
ent Marine Biological Laboratory, which with its
neighboring laboratory, The Woods Hole Ocean-
ographic Institution, has established Woods Hole
as the center of marine biological research in
America.

The U. S. Bureau of Fisheries has continued
the work initiated by Baird and fishery research
remains one of its major activities. The
research program of the Bureau of Fisheries (see
Walford, THE CoLLecTinG NET, Vol. XI, No. 8)
seeks the application of knowledge in the fields of
marine and fresh water ecology, oceanography,
fishery biology and aquiculture, to the problems

of temporary biologists and assistants housed in
field laboratories throughout the country. The
following is a brief account of the organization of
research facilities in the various sections.

WASHINGTON LABORATORIES

In addition to the administrative and clerical
staffs of the Division, laboratories are provided in
the Commerce Department building for Dr. H. S.
Davis, head of the section of aquicultural inves-
tigations, and Dr. Paul S. Galtsoff, head of the
section of shellfish investigations with their as-
sistants. These laboratories are equipped for
physiological investigations, chemical analyses and

DecemBeER, 1936 ] THE COLLECTING NET _

UNITED STATES QUARTER-BOAT 348 ON THE MISSISSIPPI RIVER

Provides a floating laboratory for the study of stream pollution and propagation
of fresh water mussels.

HATCHERY AND LABORATORY BUILDING AT THE EXPERIMENTAL FISH
HATCHERY NEAR CHARLESTOWN, WEST VIRGINIA

Extensive ponds and raceways are provided for experimental studies on the cul-
ture of trout and bass.

254

THE COLLECTING NET

| Vor. XI, No. 100

pathological researches. Another laboratory and
an extensive collection of fishes is also maintained
where Dr. S. F. Hildebrand and Isaac Gins-
berg are conducting studies in systematic ichthy-
ology. <A central library of more than 50,000
volumes and reprints is maintained and circulated
among the field laboratories.

Nortu

In offices and laboratories provided by Harvard
University, O. E. Sette, William C. Herrington,
and Robert A. Nesbit are conducting investiga-
tions of the mackerel fishery, the haddock fishery
and the shore fisheries of the North and Middle

ATLANTIC FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS

Atlantis to studies of Georges
waters.

Bank and adjacent

SoutH ATLANTIC FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS
Headquarters are maintained at New Orleans,
Louisiana, and Brunswick, Georgia, with a field
station at Aransas Pass, Texas, for similar studies
on the great shrimp fishery of the south Atlantic
and Gulf coast. A 65 and a 45 foot motor launch
are utilized in these studies and during the com-
ing year the Bureau’s 85 foot motor ship Pelican,
which is now being outfitted for oceanographic
research and experimental trawling, will be de-
tailed to the Gulf coast for this work. Milton J.

TEMPORARY FIELD LABORATORY AT YORKTOWN
For the study of the effects of pulp mill pollution on oysters.

Atlantic sections, respectively, together with a
staff of field observers, statistical clerks and assist-
ants. Until 1933 the steamer Albatross IT was
also utilized in the study of fishery biology and
of the fishing grounds of the North Atlantic area.
Major objectiv es of these studies are to determine
the condition and trend of these important fish-
eries and the natural factors that effect their yield
from year to year including the three major vari-
ables, birth rate, death rate and migration. In
recent years cooperation with the Woods Hole
Oceanographic Institution in these studies has
been afforded by detailing the Institution’s vessel

Lionel A. Walford

Lindner is in charge, and Dr.
Pearson are assistants.

and John C,

GREAT LAKES FISHERY INVESTIGATIONS

Laboratories are provided by the University of

Michigan as headquarters for the Great Lakes
fghea investigations. Dr. John Van Oosten, Dr.
Ralph Hile, and Dr. H. J. Deason are there en-
gaged in studies on the whitefish and lake trout
fisheries, biostatistical analyses of the net fisheries
in Michigan waters of the Great Lakes and in
studies of the fisheries for the pike-perches, re-
spectively. During the recent years the steamer

DeceMBER, 1936 | THE C JLLECTING NET

TEMPORARY FIELD LABORATORY AT MILFORD
For the study of shellfish culture and the control of oyster pests.

Sa

ONE OF THE TIDE-FILLED TANKS AT MILFORD
Used in shellfish culture experiments.

256 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 100

Shearwater was engaged in extensive cooperative
surveys of Lake Erie, and the motor ship Fulmar
was provided for extensive limnological studies in
Lake Michigan and experimental fishing to de-
termine the effect of various types of gear upon
the fish stock.

Pacitric Coast INVESTIGATIONS

The laboratory owned by the Bureau of Fish-
eries adjacent to the University of Washington at
Seattle with laboratory and office facilities pro-
vides for a staff of investigators engaged in the
study of the problems of the fisheries of the
Pacific coast states and Alaska. In Oregon and
Washington chief attention is given to the de-
velopment and protection of runs of salmon in
the Columbia River, in Puget Sound and in the
Fraser River of British Columbia. In Alaska
chief attention is given to studies of the red sal-
mon, the pink salmon and the herring. On the
basis of these studies the Bureau regulates and
maintains the valuable fisheries of Alaska. This
station is directed by Dr. F. A. Davidson, assisted
by Dr. G. A. Rounsefell, J. A. Craig, Hl. B.
Holmes, J. T. Barnaby and others. Various ships
of the Bureau’s Alaska patrol fleet are used in
investigations as occasion demands.

INVESTIGATIONS OF FRESH WATER FISHERIES

A study of the effect of stream pollution on
fresh water fishes is conducted by Dr. M. M.
Ellis, and assistants in laboratories provided by
the University of Missouri at Columbia, Missouri.
An 85 foot quarterboat with two launches provide
laboratory facilities on the Mississippi River and
its tributaries, and two auto trucks are equipped
with special laboratory equipment for field studies.

Aquicultural investigations under the direction
of Dr. H. S. Davis are concerned primarily with
improvements in hatchery technique, the nutrition
of game fishes in hatcheries, the combating of dis-
eases, and the rational stocking of lakes and
streams. In addition to the pathological labora-
tory maintained in Washington, studies of fish
diseases are conducted by Dr. F. F. Fish at the
Seattle laboratory and two experimental fish
hatcheries are maintained for study of hatchery
and stocking problems, one at Pittsford, Vermont,
under the direction of R. F. Lord, and one at
Charlestown, West Virginia, under E. W. Surber,
assisted by Dr. J. S. Gutsell. A field laboratory
for trout investigations in California is provided
by Stanford University under the direction of
Dr. Paul R. Needham, and cooperative studies in
fish nutrition under Dr. C. M. McCay of Cornell
University are conducted in the Laboratory of
Animal Nutrition of the State Agricultural Col-

iege and at the Bureau's experimental hatchery at
Cortland, New York.

SHELLFISH INVESTIGATIONS

Under the direction of Dr. Galtsoff with head-
quarters in the Washington Laboratory studies are
conducted at a number of field stations concerned
with the problem of shellfish culture, particularly
the cultivation of natural and planted beds of oys-
ters, the effects on oysters of industrial pollution,
and the control of shellfish pests. One of these lab-
oratories is located at Milford, Connecticut, under
the direction of Dr. V. L. Loosanoff, one at Olym-
pia, Washington for the study of the culture of the
commercial Pacific species of oysters under the
direction of Dr. A. E. Hopkins, one at Apalachi-
cola, Florida, under R. O. Smith, and one at
Yorktown, Virginia, under Dr. W. A. Chipman.
The Woods Hole laboratory in recent years, ow-
ing to lack of funds, has been closed except for
researches on the physiology of oysters conducted
by Doctor Galtsoff and assistants during the
summer months. The Beaufort, North Carolina,
Fishery Biological Laboratory also has been en-
gaged in various researches during many years.
At the present time under the direction of Dr. H.
F. Prytherch these facilities are utilized chiefly in
oyster investigation in the south Atlantic area.
Each of these stations is fully equipped for physio-
logical and biological studies of oysters, oyster
pests and oyster cultural problems.

In former years facilities of the laboratories at
Woods Hole, Mass., and Beaufort, North Caro-
lina, have been offered to private investigators
qualified for undertaking productive studies in the
field of marine biology. For the past three years,
as mentioned above, the Woods Hole laboratory
has been closed. Accommodation for study is
provided throughout the year to independent in-
vestigators, however, at the Beaufort, North Caro-
lina, laboratory, where the usual equipment of a
marine laboratory is available including running
sea water, the usual laboratory glass-ware and re-
agents, and excellent collecting facilities including
launches and rowboats. Laboratory and dormitory
quarters are provided free of charge to investiga-
tors who wish to pursue their own lines of in-
vestigation, selection being based upon the com-
petence of the applicants and the relation their
problems bear to the major program of the Bureau
of Fisheries.

Facilities are also provided where they are
available at other stations of the Bureau of Fish-
eries for private investigators but general re-
searches in marine biology are best conducted at
Beaufort and Woods Hole.

DeceMBER, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

257

A DECADE OF BIOLOGY AT HARVARD UNIVERSITY

Dr. ALpEN B. DAwson
Professor of Zoology, Harvard University

During the past ten years there has been a
steady increase in the scope and diversification of
the activities of the division of biology at Harvard
University. The development of physiological
botany and the further extension of the zoological
sciences into experimental fields characterize this
period. The nature of inheritance, the tropistic
responses of organisms to their environment and
other types of reactions have been increasingly
emphasized. Static morphology has been further
supplemented by the experimental study of form.
Descriptive embryology has been vitalized by the
experimental approach and the modern and im-
portant field of general physiology has been de-
veloped. In these newer experimental fields the
methods of physics and chemistry, supplemented
by mathematics, have become an integral part of
biological methodology. More recently the signi-
ficance of hormones in the reproduction, develop-
ment and behavior of organisms has also received
considerable attention.

However, in the midst of all these newer bio-
logical activities the older, classical disciplines
have not been neglected. Problems of taxonomy,
phylogeny, geographic distribution, life history
and the like have been under continuous investiga-
tion. Nor have the more practical aspects of bio-
logy failed to receive their merited attention.
Many members of the division have been acutely
aware of the increasing opportunities which a
knowledge of their science offers for the better-
ment of human welfare. This interest is expressed
in such fields of study as economic botany, econo-
mic entomology, forestry and forest pathology,
plant and animal genetics, plant and animal
nutrition, oceanography and plant and animal
parasitism.

Ten years ago the three main laboratories for
instruction in biology were located in the Uni-
versity Museum. The departments of botany and
physiology were accommodated in the Botanical
Museum while the department of zoology occupied
space in the Museum of Comparative Zooloyy.
Besides this nucleus there were several other
separately endowed units of the University which
were affiliated with the division of biology and
provided facilities for instruction and investiga-
tion. These included the two museums just men-
tioned, which form a part of the University
Museum and seven other institutions situated at
varying distances from the central laboratories in
Cambridge: the Botanic Garden, the Gray
Herbarium, the Bussey Institution, the Arnold
Arboretum, the Harvard Forest, the Farlow
Reference Library and Herbarium and the Atkins

: |

Institution of the Arnold Arboretum (Cuba).

With a rapid growth of biology and the intro-
duction of experimental methods the quarters and
equipment provided in the Museum rapidly be-
came inadequate and new laboratory space was
badly needed. Happily, in 1931, through the
generosity of the Rockefeller Foundation and the
Harvard Corporation the new Biological Labora-
tories were erected and excellent space and equip-
ment for instruction and investigation became
available.

With the relief from overcrowding it became
obvious that there was an opportunity for re-
organization to provide for a greater co-ordination
of effort. Accordingly an endeavor was made to
include in the central unit as many- workers as
possible from the outlying stations and much has
been accomplished in the past few years to unify
the work of the several independent groups and
to develop further co-operation in research and
instruction. As an additional step in this direc-
tion the departments of botany, physiology and
zoology were consolidated in 1934 into one de-
partment within the division of biology. At the
same time the curriculum was revised with a view
of facilitating the training of students from a
broader biological viewpoint and co-ordinating the
resources of the laboratories.

It is obviously impossible in the space of this
review to mention the many persons who have
been associated with the division of biology for
the past decade or to give a particularized account
of their varied biological interests. Many of the
staff giving instruction ten years ago are still
actively working at Harvard. There have been
relatively few resignations and the inevitable
losses due to retirement and death have not been
great in number. In several instances the losses
due to retirement have been greatly mitigated by
the continued residence and activity of the pro-
fessors emeriti. Certain new appointments have
filled in many of the gaps while other appoint-
ments representing newer fields of biological in-
terest have greatly increased the total number of
persons giving instruction and directing research.

The greatest addition to the material facilities
of the division of biology within the past ten years
is the new laboratory building in which thirty-five
members of the teaching staff and some ninety
graduate students are now accommodated. The
various units within the building include not only
working space assigned to members of the staff
and their students but also many common units
which serve the needs of all or of special groups.
Among these are stockrooms, student and staff

258

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 100

shops for both metal- and wood-working, and a
large fully equipped photographic suite. Special
darkrooms for experimentation and photography,
cold rooms providing a wide range of low tem-
peratures, constant temperature rooms for higher
temperatures and constant-temperature constant-
humidity rooms represent some of the more
specialized services. In addition a large series of
air-conditioned animal rooms provide for the
maintenance of colonies of mammals and_ birds
and the greenhouses on the roof supply both ter-
restrial and aquatic material for class and ex-
perimental needs.

These are supplemented by a number of aquar-
ium and terrarium rooms for aquatic and semi-
aquatic plants and animals. Sterilizing rooms
and culture rooms are also conveniently located.
Other units designed for more special uses include
sound-proof rooms, a physical exercise room and
a room with special foundation piers, free from
vibrations, for making delicate measurements.

To close with a tabulation of the material re-
sources for scientific work may seem to strike a
discordant note. Great genius may survive in an
attic but ordinary mortals may not disdain the aid
of an adequately equipped laboratory.

THE BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES AT PRINCETON UNIVERSITY

Dr. E. G. BuTLER
Associate Professor of Biology, Princeton University

All work in the biological sciences at Princeton
University is aggregated in the department of
biology. In this department courses are presented
and facilities for research provided in the funda-
mental fields of biology. The main laboratories
of the department are located in Guyot Hall. In
addition, a departmental vivarium adjacent to
Guyot Hall, provides facilities for the care of
experimental animals and work rooms and operat-
ing rooms for student instruction. In the vivar-
ium also, are aquaria for the maintenance of
aquatic animals. Two departmental green-
houses, one of which is connected with the
vivarium, are equipped for work in botany, and
near the greenhouses a large field has been set
apart and especially prepared for work in plant
genetics.

Within the last ten years several changes have
taken place, which have resulted in considerable
expansion of departmental activities. For the
most part, these changes have been concerned both
with a broadening of the scope of departmental
research and with an intensification of activity in
several fields long represented at Princeton. In
this connection it is important to note that an
extremely active program of investigation and
advanced instruction in endocrinology has been
instituted. At the same time the work in general
physiology and biochemistry has been greatly ex-
tended. More intensive research over a broader
field than heretofore has been introduced in the
general field of experimental biology, including
work and instruction in experimental cytology,
embryology and morphology. In addition, ex-
perimental research in genetics has been more
closely correlated with cytological work. It is
important to point out, however, that older bio-
logical fields, such as general invertebrate and
vertebrate morphology, continue as active fields of
endeavor at Princeton.

The entire biological program at Princeton has
been especially facilitated by the establishment of

the Scientific Research Fund of the University.
In 1928 an endowment of three million dollars,
one-third of which was contributed by the General
Education Board, was obtained for the promotion
of research in mathematics, physics, astronomy,
chemistry, and biology. The income of this fund
is allocated to the five departments concerned
under the general supervision of a Scientific Re-
search Committee. This income supplements ap-
propriations for research from the general funds
of the University. In a large measure it has been
through the resources offered by this new fund,
that the department of biology has been able to
inaugurate extensive programs of research in
several fields hitherto unrepresented at Princeton.
Moreover, together with the other scientific de-
partments, the department of biology has spon-
sored during the last few years cooperative pro-
grams of research in fields which overlap the
boundaries of two or more departments, especial-
ly in the fields of biochemistry and biophysics.

Correlated with the general expansion and in-
crease in intensity of the research program there
has been, necessarily, an increase in the size of
the biological staff. This has involved not only
an increase in teaching members of the staff, but
especially an increase in advanced investigators,
research associates and research assistants. In
connection with the matter of staff changes, it is
particularly gratifying to report that Professors
E. G. Conklin and C. F. W. McClure, although
they have reached the statutory retiring age and
have been relieyed of teaching responsibilities,
remain, nevertheless, active and important mem-
bers of the departmental group.

In the field of graduate instruction in biology
provision is made both for beginning and for ad-
vanced graduate students, including post-doctoral
research students. To aid the beginning graduate
student in acquiring a broad biological back-
ground a group of graduate courses are offered,
which cover, so far as possible, the main funda-

DecemBeR, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

259

mental fields of biology. Other more advanced
courses afford opportunity for instruction and
beginning research in certain specialized fields,
especially, general and mammalian physiology ;
endocrinology ; biochemistry ; experimental cytol-
ogy; experimental embryology and morphology ;
and genetics. Particular emphasis at Princeton
has long been placed upon individual instruction,
both for graduate and for undergraduate students.
For many years, therefore, the enrolment of grad-
uate students, as well as of undergraduates, has
been restricted. In association with the restriction
of enrolment in the Graduate School as a whole,
the enrolment of graduate students in each de-
partment is limited to a definite maximum. The
quota for the department of biology is fifteen
students. Because of the policy of limitation it is
always possible to provide graduate instruction in
small groups, and, in all cases, to arrange a grad-
uate program to suit the needs of each individual
student. Moreover, in a relatively small graduate
group it is possible, especially in advanced grad-
uate years, to lay particular emphasis upon the

research program of each student, rather than
upon general course work.

The department has been especially fortunate
in the intimate association which has grown up
between it and neighboring biological laboratories.
The division of animal pathology of the Rocke-
feller Institute for Medical Research when first
established at Princeton utilized laboratories made
available by the University in Guyot Hall. The
present extensive and well equipped laboratories
of the Institute, both for animal and for plant
pathology, are now situated about two miles from
Guyot Hall. Seminars at the Institute are open
to members of the staff and advanced students in
the department of biology, and likewise workers at
the Institute regularly attend the seminars of the
department. More recently the establishment of
the Morris Biological Farm of the Wistar Institute
near Bristol, Pennsylvania, about fifteen miles
from Princeton, has added another biological
laboratory with which the department has formed
an intimate and important relationship.

BIOLOGY AT CLARK UNIVERSITY

PRoressor Hupson Hoacianp, Chairman of the Department of Biology, Clark University

The Clark University biology department offers
courses of instruction in botany, zoology, com-
parative and general physiology. The physiologi-
cal courses require fairly extensive prerequisites
in the physical and biological sciences and this
fortunately has tended to break down department-
al boundaries and broaden the significance of the
undergraduate science instruction. A number of
undergraduates majoring in biology go on to
graduate work in physiology or enter medical
schools. The department offers the M. A. degree
in biology and the Ph. D. in general physiology.
The graduate work has been facilitated by certain
Clark scholarships and fellowships which are an-
nually available. Relations with the psychology
department have been especially cordial. Gradu-
ate students in psychology during the past five
years have done their minors in general physio-
logy, and several of them on receiving their
doctorates in psychology have obtained research
positions in physiological laboratories.

The research program centers around the rather
diverse interests of members of the staff. In the
field of animal biology these interests are, how-
ever, sufficiently homogeneous to give the program
a certain coherence. The botanical research of
the department consists of an active program un-
der the direction of Dr. David Potter concerning
problems in taxonomy and plant distribution,
especially of plants from the northeastern portion
of Canada, one study being concerned with the
Hudson Bay region and another with the flora
of Newfoundland Labrador. Potter and_ his

students have made extensive collections in these
regions and have been able to suggest answers to
certain interesting questions concerning the geo-
logical history of the land masses from their bo-
tanical data.

Charles M. Pomerat assisted by Meyer Zarrow
is engaged in studies of the respiration of small
intact organisms by means of the Warburg techni-
que. They have obtained precise temperature
characteristics for respiration of newts with a
view to observing shifts in the metabolic tempera-
ture characteristic as a result of endocrine opera-
tions and endocrine therapy. Assuming that the
temperature characteristic serves as a pacemaker
index regulating cellular (predominantly muscle)
respiration, its modifications by way of shifts of
endocrine balance are highly suggestive. In ad-
dition, Pomerat is continuing his work on aspects
of homogamy. During the present academic year
he is on leave of absence and his vacancy has
been filled by Dr. John T. Fuller who is giving
courses in zoology.

During the past five years much of the research
in the department has centered about certain prob-
lems of nerve physiology. This work has been
greatly expedited by grants to Hudson Hoagland
from the Rockefeller Foundation and by smaller
apparatus grants from the National Research
Council, the American Academy of Arts and
Sciences, and the Bache Fund of the National
Academy of Sciences.

Dr. C. Ladd Prosser is continuing his studies

(Continued on page 264)

260

THE COLLECTING NET

[Vor. XI, No. 100

The Collecting Net

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
at marine biological laboratories

Editorial: Ware Cattell, Elizabeth Thornton, Ur-
sula Reinhardt and Annaleida Snyder Cattell.

Business: Arthur C. Stirling, Amy Gamble, Boris
Gorokhoff and Marjorie Higgins.

Entered as second-class matter July 11, 1935, at
the U. S. Post Office at Woods Hole, Massachusetts,
under the Act of March 3, 1879.

THE HUNDREDTH ISSUE

This is the 100th issue of THE COLLECTING
Net; when the first number appeared in 1926
little did one expect that ninety-nine others would
come after it. Beginning as a local laboratory
news sheet eleven years ago it has developed into
a recognized journal with characteristics peculiar-
ly its own. Each year its circle of readers widens,
indicating that it fulfills the need for an informal
journal devoted to the work and the workers at
biological laboratories.

We have been fortunate in our contributors to
this anniversary issue of THE CoLLecTInG NET;
to them and to the advertisers in it we express
our appreciation for their support.

EVANS’ RECENT ADVANCES IN PHYSIOLOGY,
revised edition by W. H. Newton. 500 pp. Blak-
iston. 1936. $5.00.

For many years “Recent Advances in Physiol-
ogy” has given useful surveys of the physiological
topics which are being subjected to the most ac-
tive investigation. We have become accustomed
to using “Recent Advances” for the preparation
of our lectures and we usually refer to “Recent
Advances” in order that the lectures when given
may be understandable.

The idea which is behind the book is not
modified by Dr. Newton, who has prepared this
edition. Four chapter headings of the previous
edition are retained. These chapters deal with
the coronary circulation, the carotid sinus, the
carriage of carbon dioxide: by the blood and con-
duction and excitation in nerve. Each chapter has
been revised to include the most recent work and
the summary of the newer research is surprising-
ly complete for such a concise form of expression.

Among the new chapters it seemed to me that
the one dealing with the spinal reflex was the best.
It gives a clear view of the simple scheme of the
spinal reflex, of the methods by which it can be
studied and of the critical considerations which af-
fect the data and the conclusions.

There is an excellent review of the methods for
studying the action of the enzyme carbonic anhy-

drase. I feel that such a detailed discussion is
hardly necessary, for the extent of the physiologi-
cal role of the enzyme can only be suspected at
present. It is probably well to discuss the meth-
ods of careful study, but it is the implications of
the importance of viewing physiological reactions
for kenetic processes rather than for equilibrium
states which is the really valuable contribution of
the work of Roughton and his associates.

In regard to all of the subjects in the book, it
seems unfortunate that it is usually considered
necessary to describe so much physiological de-
tail without a clear attempt to designate the physi-
ological organization of the details. In the chap-
ter on the metabolism of cardiac muscle many re-
sults of chemical analyses are summarized, but
there seems to be no attempt to define the physio-
logical problem of how the chemical energy is ap-
plied to the contractile activity which is not chem-
ical. Again, in the chapter on the carotid sinus
it is apparent that sensory impulses from pres-
sure, oxygen lack and carbon dioxide variously
influence cardiac, vasoniotor and respiratory ac-
tivity. Those facts are important and it is de-
sirable that the fine experiment on the functions
of the carotid sinus should be made familiar. But
it is possible that the importance of the carotid
sinus is at present over-rated, just as it was en-
tirely missed during so many years. The possi-
bility of other similar sensory areas should be re-
garded and it should be considered that there are
many other sensory nerves which affect the circu-
lation and respiration. I believe that our present
information is adequate to permit an estimate of
the function of the carotid sinus in relation to the
whole system of respiratory control and that to
view the details in such a light would allow the
elimination of some details and would suggest the
course along which further advances are likely to
proceed. The purpose of such a book might well
include careful speculation on future advances, for
it is written for progressive students.

LAURENCE IRVING

TABLE OF CONTENTS
(Continued from page 217)

The Nature of Mutations, II., Dr. L. J. Stadler 248
A Decade of Biology at Harvard University,

Dr. Alden B. Dawson 257
The Biological Sciences at Princeton, Dr. E. G.
Butler ois: oi cce. cc cusvalectsiectente loners teocasenette ase ee 258

land
Items of Interest

Endocrinology During the Last Ten Years, Dr.
Wrederiek: Ty; Visa W: <2c)r-civarsnescoassncceesssecee tere eee 262

Diffraction Patterns of Striated Muscle and
Sarcomere Behavior During Contraction, Dr.
Alexander Sandow? ccc. sisccn-ceesisecckensexss eee 263

DEcEMBER, 1936 |

THE COLLECTING NET

261

ITEMS OF INTEREST

Proressor EF. B. WiLson of Woods Hole and
Columbia University was awarded the Carty
medal and prize by the National Academy of
Sciences at the Chicago meeting. Professor Wil-
son was unable to attend the Chicago meeting and
the medal and prize were presented to him at a
luncheon at the University Club in New York
City on December 5th. Those present at the lunch-
eon were: Drs. Frank B. Jewett, Ross G. Harri-
son, Simon Flexner, Gary N. Calkins, W. kK.
Gregory, J. McKeen Cattell and C R. Stockard.
Professor Harrison gave a summary of the ac-
ceptance speech which he had given in Chicago
where he received the medal for Professor Wilson.

At the time of the meetings of the American
Zoological Society in Atlantic City, Dr. S. O.
Mast, professor of zoology at the Johns Hopkins
University, was the guest of honor at a dinner
given to him by his students in commemoration
of his twenty-five years of service to the univers-
ity. The group was joined by colleagues and
friends, as well as by Mrs. Mast and their daugh-
ters, Louise and Elizabeth. (Margaret, their third
daughter, is studying economics at the University
of Munich). His portrait in oils, the work of
Hans Schlereth, was unveiled, and Dr. Mast was
presented with bound volumes of testimonial
letters and of his 130 reprints. The head of Dr.
Mast’s department, Professor H. S. Jennings,
acted as toastmaster and toasts were given by
Drs. L. M. Bertholf, C. E. Bills, W. L. Dolley,
Jr., S. W. Geiser, W. N. Hess, C. L. Prosser, O.
S. Reimold and J. P. Visscher.

The University of Kentucky celebrated the
seventieth birthday of Professor T. H. Morgan
on September 25. Dean Fernandus Payne of the
University of Indiana—a former pupil—paid tri-
bute to him at a morning convocation; in the
afternoon a bronze plaque marking Dr. Morgan’s
birthplace was unveiled at Hopemont in Lexing-
ton, Kentucky.

On the occasion of its Tercentenary celebration
Harvard University conferred doctorates of sci-
ence upon Dr. Ross G. Harrison as “An embry-
ologist whose method of transplantions yields new
insight into the process of development’”—and
on Dr. John H. Northrup as “A chemist turned
biologist, a skilled manipulator of those catalysts
on which life depends.”

Dr. Ferix A. BERNSTEIN took up his work in
October as professor of statistics at New York
University.

Dr. B. J. Luyer of St. Louis University has
been advanced from associate professor to profes-
sor of biology.

The Waterman Institute of Indiana University
has added Dr. W. R. Breneman to its staff as
assistant professor. He is devoting his full time
to research in endocrinology.

Dr. Joun W. Gowen, has been appointed pro-
fessor of genetics at Iowa State College. For a
number of years he has been research geneticist
for the Rockefeller Institute for Medical Research
at Princeton University.

Dr. H. J. VAN Creave, professor of zoology,
University of Illinois, is chairman of an executive
committee in charge of the department in the
absence of Dr. Charles Zeleny who is on leave
of absence because of illness.

Rev. MicnHart FronczaK—who took the em-
bryology course at Woods Hole this summer—
has been added to the teaching staff of Seton Hall
College where he is in charge of embryology.

Dr. F. K. Sparrow, Jr. formerly assistant
professor of biology at Dartmouth College is now
assistant professor of botany at the University of
Michigan. During the past summer he studied
marine fungi at the Woods Hole Oceanographic
Institution.

Dr. EvizazetH ApaAms, who is on leave of
absence from the department of zoology at Mount
Holyoke College, is visiting the centers of endo-
crine research in this country. Professor Ellinor
H. Behre of the Louisiana State University is
carrying on Dr. Adams work at the College while
she is away.

Proressor Rosert A. Bupincton, for twenty-
three years head of the department of zoology at
Oberlin College, has been succeeded in that posi-
tion by Dr. Charles G. Rogers who is professor
of comparative physiology in the department. This
change has been made in order to give Dr. Bud-
ington more time for his research and teaching
program.

Proressor Ratpu S. Livwie of the University
of Chicago has been elected a vice-president of the
American Association and chairman of the section
of zoological sciences. Professor George A. Bait-
sell of Yale University has been elected secretary
of the section.

Rhode Island State College has received a grant
from the State government enabling it to estab-
lish a marine biological laboratory on the shore of
Narragansett Bay in the vicinity of Fort Kearney.

Proressor W. C. ALLEE and ScumiprT are
bringing out a revised American edition of
Hesse’s “Tiergeographie auf Ockologischer
Grundlage.”

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 100

ENDOCRINOLOGY DURING THE LAST TEN YEARS

Dr. FreperIcK L. Hisaw

Professor of Zoology, Harvard University

If advancement is measured by the number of
new ideas, discoveries and published reports it
seems quite probable that no other biological
science has equaled the record established by en-
docrinology for the last ten years. This remark-
able advancement was made possible, of course,
by previous physiological and clinical work. At
the beginning of this period the basic physiology
of the thyroid, parathyroids, adrenals, pancreas,
pituitary, gonads and a few of the gastro-intesti-
nal hormones Was known. The recent advances
in thyroid physiology have been the synthesis of
thyroxin and the influence of the thyroid on other
endocrine reactions. The parathyroid hormone
was isolated in 1923 but during the last decade its
effects on calcium metabolism have been studied
extensively. Epinephrine or adrenalin was syn-
thesized about 25 years ago but the adrenal, corti-
cal hormone, Cortin, the defficiency of which
produces Addison’s disease, was isolated only re-
cently and is now used extensively in the clinic.
Although the relation of the pancreas to carbo-
hydrate metabolism has been known for many
years the actual isolation of insulin was not ac-
complished until 1922. Studies of the physiologi-
cal action and therapeutic use of this hormone
have been greatly advanced during the present
decade.

Studies of pituitary physiology, during the pe-
riod under consideration, have been exceedingly
fruitful. In 1926 it was known that extracts of
the posterior lobe of the pituitary possessed oxy-
tocic, vasopressor and anti-diuretic properties and
were useful clinically while now it is known that
the oxytocic and vasopressor actions, at least, are
due to two distinct hormones. However, the nor-
mal function of the posterior lobe remains a ques-
tion. Also in 1926 the anterior lobe of the pitui-
tary was known to secrete a hormone which had
an effect on body growth and perhaps another
which regulated activities of the gonads. Now,
in the literature, we find not only the growth hor-
mone and two gonadotropic hormones but others,
such as, thyrotropic, diabetogenic, adrenotropic,
parathyrotropic, and lactogenic. It is not possible
at present to conjecture, with any degree of cer-
tainty, as to whether or not all these known ef-
fects are due to individually different hormones as
very few if any of the preparations thus far pre-
pared are physiologically pure. Yet it is aston-
ishing, to say the least, that so small a gland can

be of such importance in so many body functions.

In addition to the gonadotropic hormones of the
anterior pituitary other active substances of simi-
lar nature have been isolated from the urine of
castrated men and women, urine of women past
the menopause, urine, blood and placentas of
pregnant women and the blood of pregnant mares.

The physiology of the gonads has been ad-
vanced remarkably during the last ten years. The
oestrogenic hormone, oestrin, from the Graafian
follicle was the only- one of this group that had
been isolated previous to this period. Since then,
the progestational hormone of the corpus luteum
and the male hormone of the testis were isolated.
Also oestrogenic hormones were discovered in the
blood, urine and placental tissues. At the present
time all these hormones, as well as many related
oestrogenic substances, have been crystalized and
synthesized.

Endocrinology is relatively young and it is not
possible to predict just when it will reach maturity
or what position it will be given among the bio-
logical sciences. However, the present application
of endocrinological ideas and methods to many
related fields of research indicates the possibility
of a brilliant future. It seems certain that medi-
cine will profit from endocrine research. It is true
that endocrine therapy in some respects has not
been as successful as hoped for though there are
many instances of remarkable results. However,
the information at hand has been of great value in
making diagnoses and will become more impor-
tant with new discoveries. Endocrinological tech-
niques and theories are now being applied with
advantage to several other allied biological sciences
including animal husbandry and veterinary medi-
cine, genetics, experimental embryology, neuro-
physiology, and abnormal growths.

The present trend of endocrinology, contrary to
popular opinion, is not so much one of discovering
new hormones but rather that of determining the
functions of those already known. Much will be
learned, during the next ten years, of the interre-
lationship of hormonal actions. That is, the ob-
served effects of a given hormone often depend
upon the presence or absence of others or whether
or not it has been preceded by the action of an-
other, etc. It seems certain that much will be ac-
complished in this direction regardless of other
developments.

_ DeceMBer, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

263

DIFFRACTION PATTERNS OF STRIATED MUSCLE AND SARCOMERE BEHAVIOR
DURING CONTRACTION

Dr. ALEXANDER SANDOW

Instructor in Biology, Washington Square College, New York University

The first observations of diffraction patterns
formed by striated muscle were reported by Ran-
vier in 1874. He placed a flattened frog sartori-
us in the path of a beam of white light and found
that the transmitted light consisted of the directly
transmitted beam and also two sets of spectral
bands at various angles of diffraction disposed
symmetrically on the two sides of the undeviated
beam. He correctly attributed this diffraction
pattern to the striated structure of the sartorius;
the muscle was acting like an optical transmission
grating. The angles of diffraction could be ac-
counted for by means of the grating equation:
nA = s sin 6, where: n is the order of the spec-
trum; A, the wave length of the light at 6,, the
angle of diffraction of the nth order spectrum;
and s, the stria distance (i.e. length of sar-
comere) of the muscle. Ranvier’s experiments
with contracting muscle were very limited since
he used no objective recording system. He was
able to observe directly, however, a momentary
divergence of the lateral spectral orders during
contraction, from which the conclusion followed
that the sarcomeres shorten under contraction.

Although more than sixty years have passed
since this original work only three other muscle
diffraction publications have appeared. Only one
of these, the work-of Bernstein in 1895, dealt with
contracting muscle. He obtained his records by
superimposing on sensitized paper carried on a
revolving drum, 5-10 successive photographic ex-
posures to the patterns produced by the contract-
ing muscle. These records clearly show the di-
vergence of the lateral orders and also a general
increase in transmission of light by the muscle
during contraction. In May of this year, how-
ever, Nicolai, working in Germany, and the au-
thor reported work with apparatus devised to re-
cord on moving photographic film the diffraction
patterns along with the myograms produced dur-
ing single contractions of the frog sartorius.

Nicolai uses the conventional optical system of
the grating spectrograph, the muscle taking the
place of a transmission grating. This necessitates
the use of a 1 cm. broad beam on the muscle. This
is ill-adapted to the study of contracting muscle
since, if propagated contraction waves are present,
the 1 cm. length of muscle forming the diffraction
pattern will at each instant include various por-
tions in different phases of contraction.

_In the writer’s apparatus somewhat unorthodox
diffractrometric optics is employed which, how-

ever, permits a very intense and narrow beam to
be incident on the muscle. This beam at the
muscle is 1 mm. wide; hence only about 400
striations form the diffraction pattern and these are
practically in the same phase during a contraction.
The apparatus is devised so that the beam may be
placed at different points along the length of the
muscle. Thus through an examination of the pat-
terns formed, this beam is used as a sort of probe
for the study of sarcomere behavior within the
ditferently placed 1 mm. segments along the mus-
cle length.

The experiments so far have been made with
the frog sartorii held at the im sitw length and
stimulated with supermaximal break inductorium
shocks. The m situ length was chosen because
experiments with resting muscle on the relation
between sarcomere length and muscle stretched to
various lengths showed that while the sarcomeres
are not in parallel alignment at less than in situ
lengths, they are brought to this condition when
the muscle has been stretched to in situ (and
greater) lengths.

The set of patterns produced by a set of differ-
ent segments at various levels of the sartorius
undergoing isometric twitch include the following :
all records have first order spectra of practically
unchanged intensity over the whole course of the
twitch ; the displacements of the first orders pro-
duced by the segments of the tibial two-thirds of
the muscle indicate (through use of the grating
equation) that the corresponding sarcomeres, in
relation to their resting lengths, are shortening,
whereas the patterns of the pelvic-third seg-
inents show that here the sarcomeres are being
stretched. The detailed nature of the short-
ening and stretching of the sarcomeres at the va-
rious muscle levels indicates that the muscle wave
is initiated at the nerve plexus and then spreads
through the muscle away from this region.

During moderately loaded isotonic twitches the
patterns show first orders similarly unchanged in
intensity, but with very great displacements indi-
cating sarcomere shortening up to 20% of the
resting length. Contraction, however, takes place
at all levels of the:muscle.

During both isometric and isotonic contractions
the Oth order increases, and the 2nd order de-
creases in intensity.

The above results, particularly the intensity
variations, are interpreted to mean that Jordan's
description of contracting sarcomere behavior

264

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 100

(Physiol. Rev., vol. 13, p. 301, 1933) does not
hold for the frog sartorius; but that during con-
traction of this muscle: (1) a sarcomere, in the
sense of consisting of a Q band flanked at each
end by one-half of each of the adjoining I (or J)
bands remains intact, although (2) it may be
stretched as well as contracted depending on its
position in the muscle and the nature of the con-
traction; and (3) there occurs an unequal change
in the refractive indices of the Q and I substances,
or a variation in the ratio of the lengths of Q and
I bands, or both of these modifications. Future
research may help define these modifications more
exactly.

Preliminary experiments show that the sar-
comere behavior during contraction is a function
in general of muscle length, tension of lever, posi-
tion of electrodes and direction of flow of exciting
current. It is hoped that investigation of these
points will lead to information concerning such
features of contraction as internal muscle move-
ments, sarcomere latent period and contraction
wave velocity.

(This article is based upon a seminar report pre-
sented at the Marine Biological Laboratory on
August 11).

BIOLOGY AT CLARK UNIVERSITY
(Continued from page 259)

of the transmission of nerve impulses across single
synaptic junctions and, in addition, in collabora-
tion with Dr. Walter Hunter, he has recently used
electrical recording methods in connection with
the conditioned reflex technique. He has also
turned up some interesting things concerning the
factors controlling “‘spontaneous” discharges of
nerve impulses from comparatively simple arthro-
pod ganglia.

Dr. Hoagland’s research centers primarily
about considerations of the pacemaker control of
rhythmic activity in the nervous system. The
frequencies of certain electrical brain waves (alpha
rhythms) in general paretic patients and in nor-
mals has been investigated at the Worcester State
Hospital. The evidence indicates that the rhythms
are of the nature of ‘‘relaxation oscillations” oc-
curring at frequencies proportional to respiratory
pacemaker master reactions in the cortical cells.
Progression of the spirochete infection appears at
intervals of its advancement to shift abruptly the
pacemaker (slowest reaction in the chain of res-
piratory links). This work is being continued
during the present year with the assistance of Dr.
Morton Rubin.

The question as to why repetitively discharging
units such as constantly stimulated sense organs
(mechanoreceptors) show a gradual decline in
frequency of nerve impulse discharge (sensory
adaptation) has also been under investigation at

Clark University for some time and constitutes
another phase of pacemaker studies. Dr. Hoag-
land and Dr. Rubin have obtained evidence that
mechanoreceptors “adapt” principally owing to
the release of potassium under mechanical stress
from cells adjacent to the receptor nerve endings.
Potassium thus accumulating around a nerve end-
ing, lowers its excitability determining ratio of
potassium inside the nerve fiber to that outside to
such a degree that the sensory nerve fiber rever-
sibly loses its responsiveness.

During the academic year visitors from outside
institutions have been especially generous in com-
ing to Clark University to describe their re-
searches at the afternoon weekly departmental
meetings. These discussions have proved most
stimulating to staff and students. They often con-
tinue deep into the evening under the catalytic
facilitation of appropriate beverages.

ITEMS OF INTEREST

Dr. R. P. BrGeLow, emeritus professor of
zoology, Massachusetts Institute of Technology,
is engaged with the surviving author, Dr. H. W.
Tyler, in a revision of “A Short History of Sci-
ence’ by Sedgwick and Tyler. He would wel-
come reprints of any papers dealing with the his-
tory of biology or of medicine. His address is:
72 Blake Road, Brookline, Mass.

Proressor A. C, Kinsey of the University of
Indiana, who took part in the Naturalist’s Sym-
posium at Atlantic City is the author of a recently
published volume on “The Origin of Higher
Categories in Cynips.”

Dr. Cuartes R, StocKarp of the Cornell Uni-
versity Medical College presented one of the
“Lectures to the Laity” in December for the New
York Academy of Sciences. He spoke on the
“Mechanisms of Heredity.”

PROFESSOR A. FRANKLIN SHULL of the Uni-
versity of Michigan addressed, in December, the
Zoology Club of Northwestern University on
“Developmental Genetics in Aphids.”

Dr. AND Mrs. Sven Horstapvius who spent
the past year in research at the Osborn Zoological
Laboratory of Yale University and the Marine
Biological Laboratory sailed for Stockholm on
December 8.

Dr. WaLTeR E, Garrey, son of Professor W.
E, Garrey, has completed his five-year internship
at Massachusetts General Hospital, having been
most recently resident surgeon there. Dr. Garrey
has set up his office for general surgery at 279
Clarendon Avenue in Boston and has taken over
his duties as assistant surgeon in the department
of public health at Harvard University.

DeEcEMBER, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

DETERMINATION IN THE EARLY DEVELOPMENT OF THE SEA-URCHIN
(Continued from page 243)

role of this ion was ascribed to the vegetative part.
But if animal halves are treated with lithium,
which will cause them to develop like plutei in-
stead of giving only blastulae, then they are sus-
ceptible to lack of sulfate.

Mr. Novikoff: Do you think there would be
any point in doing experiments such as those with
the dead amphibian organizer? Kill the micro-
meres and coagulate them and put the animal half
on top of them, or some such thing?

Dr. Horstadius: Well, I have tried experi-
ments similar to that—using eggs with a pig-
mented band. I cut off the most vegetative
material of an uncleaved fertilized egg which cor-
responds to the micromere material and implanted
that in an animal half in 64-cell stage. But it
would not stay there. The blastomeres bent down,
caught this mass and pushed it outside. However,
if one takes micromeres, thus intact cells with
nuclei inside, this mass remains. The blastomeres
are able to distinguish the cells with nuclei from
those without! So I became a little more cunning.
I waited until the opening of the animal half was
nearly closed before I implanted the cytoplasm,
and now they remained, but I did not find any
action at all. One might try to put down the
animal half on some dead cytoplasm, but that is
very difficult because the blastulae very soon begin
to swim; and we know that the action, both of
lithium and micromeres, requires a very long
time. It must start pretty soon after fertilization
and must go on up to about the gastrula stage if
an entodermizing action is to take place.

Dr. Morgan: The lower part of the unfertil-
ized egg is not necessarily of the same material as
that which goes into micromeres, because, as the
micromeres form at the vegetative pole, a lot of
material from the interior of the egg of Arbacia
wells up into that region. Which means that
material from inside the egg comes to the surface.
All I mean by that is to point out that this
material which is cut off from the unfertilized egg
is not necessarily the same as that which goes into
the micromeres.

Dr. Horstadius: If you cut away this material
in the uncleaved egg of Paracentrotus you get
exactly the same effect as if you cut away the
micromeres later. It may be different in Arbacia.

Dr. Morgan: Tf you cut away the material of
the vegetative half of the unfertilized egg, do you
get no micromeres later in Paracentrotus ?

Dr. Horstadius: No micromeres. The region
where micromeres can be formed is then missing ;
and also the skeleton-forming material. They

seem to correspond to each other. And this is
even before fertilization.

Dr. Chambers: We get some results from
cutting Arbicia eggs into very small fragments
which would be about the size you mention for
the piece you cut off. In about four out of a
dozen cases you get micromeres forming from a
very small piece which would suggest that their
material must have been very close to the cortex.
In Arbacia you have no means of orienting the
egg. Some fragments have micromeres, others do
not.

Dr. Horstadius: In small fragments like that,
if you get small cells, are those cells always com-
parable to real micromeres, or are they formed
because of other factors ? y

Dr. Chambers: In these small fragments non-
pigmented blastomeres appear at about the time
the micromeres should form. These tend to be
about as large as the other blastomeres and we
have identified them as micromeres, simply be-

cause they are non-pigmented.

Dr. Willier: How about the differences in the
dorso-ventral axis? I am particularly interested
in the question of reversal within the dorsal half.
What is your explanation of this?

Dr. Horstadius: Dr. Bernstein has a very in-
teresting explanation to give us.

Dr. Bernstein: I want to give a very tentative
explanation of it. Let us first consider what the
experiment means if considered in terms of the
potentials. If the cut is made (Fig. 5) in the
frontal plane, the ventral side, v, and the dorsal
side, d, being separated by the cut, then we have,
according to the observation of Horstadius, the
reversal of the gradient in the dorsal half. This

M

Cc
FIGURE 5

266

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 100

means that, instead of the gradient represented by
the slope of the line Mim falling off from the ven-
tral maximum, J/, of the potential to the dorsal
minimum, 7, of the potential, we have now two
partial gradients: that of the ventral half repre-
sented by a line of a slope like that of MC and
that of the dorsal half represented by a line with
a slope like that of amc.

That suggests the hypothesis that the gradients
with which we are dealing have a material back-
ground. We may assume that there exists some
substance, S, whose concentration decreases from
the maximum J of,the dofsal side to the mini-
mum m of the ventral side. sy the cut a new
surface is formed to which the sea water has
access, and the substance still unfixed can be re-
moved and lost into the sea water. As the con-
sequence of the loss, the concentration would
become zero at the cut surface in C and c, and
the gradient of the ventral half would be the slope
of M/C, meanwhile the gradient of the dorsal half
would be the slope of mc. The gradient of the
ventral half would become steeper, and in the
same sense, meanwhile the gradient of the dorsal
half less steep and reversed in sign. Observations
of Horstadius show that after the cut the ventral
half develops faster, and the dorsal half develops
slower and not so well. This can be attributed
to the changes in steepness of the gradients, the
loss of the substance S also playing some role.

Such an assumption can perhaps be tested by
using an oiled glass thread for the separation,
from which a thin film might spread to cover
immediately the newly formed surface so that the
communication with the sea water may be shut
off. The vital stain in this case of course has to
be applied, if possible, not to the cut side, but to
the outside. Perhaps no liberation would occur
, then.

Dr. Horstadius: We are here dividing the egg
in the two-cell stage and then of course no new
cell wall is formed, because we cut between cells,
but new parts of the cell walls will be exposed to
the sea water. We know that there are certain
interactions going on between these two cells, but
now the inner surface will be in contact with the
sea water instead of the other cell; then an ex-
change with the sea water, instead of with the
fellow blastomere, is possible. I think it is a very
good idea. The explanation we had before was
the following: I said that there are some indica-
tions that there exist on the dorsal and ventral
sides two fields. It has been found by Foerster
and Orstrém that if you treat an uncleaved egg
with KCN you get two depressions, one larger
one and one smaller one. If you stain them vital-
ly, the larger one always becomes the ventral side.
This may indicate that we have a sort of gradient
like Dr. Bernstein’s. The explanation we gave is

that, after the cut, perhaps the new ventral side
of the dorsal half has the same properties in rela-
tion to the cut side as the presumptive ventral had
before to the presumptive dorsal side. This ex-
planation that something may come out into the
sea water which leads to a physical loss would
account for the phenomenon we observe.

Dr. Schotté: Couldn't this theory of Dr. Bern-
stein’s be verified by separating blastomeres and
after a short while putting them together again?

Dr. Horstadius: The halves first show open
half-blastulae, but they soon close again. After
some hours they form a small closed blastula.

Dr. Schotté: 1 didn’t mean hours; I meant

minutes.
Dr. Horstadius: I don’t believe that would be
enough. I have isolated dorsal and ventral halves

from the beginning of development up to the be-
ginning of the gastrula stage, every second hour,
and it is not until 10-12 hours after fertilization
that you will no longer find reversal of the dorso-
ventral axis in the dorsal half.

Dr. Harvey: Wow do you get your cells to
stick together when you take out micromeres and
implant them?

Dr. Horstadius: If your eggs have been in
calcium-free sea water and are brought back into
normal medium they stick. They don’t stick if
you put them on the outside. You have to make
a small opening between some cells and put the
implant in between them.

Dr. Lillie: Have you any clear conception of
just what the gradient is in the physiological
sense? Is it a diffusion field? or some kind of
structural field? or an electrical field, in the sense
of potential gradient ?

Dr. Hoérstadius: I cannot come to any con-
clusion concerning it with this kind of work.

Dr. Lillie: \When you say “weakening a gradi-
ent,” what do you mean experimentally ?

Dr. Horstadius: I just judge from the result:
which and how much of the animal and vegetative
organs are formed.

Dr. Lillie: Without forming any conception
as to the physiological nature of the gradient?

Dr. Horstadius: No, I cannot do that, no
further than those things I read you before.

Dr. Whitaker: Do you think there 1s any pos-
sibility that vital stains, when applied to one side
in a certain critical concentration, might in any
way effect the dorsal determination ?

Dr. Horstadius: Yes, that has been shown by
Lindahl. He sucks an egg into a pipette so that it
will be elongated. Boveri showed that if you
stretch an egg the median plane of the egg will
follow this stretched axis. And Lindahl finds the
same. He stained the free end and then pushed

DecEMBER, 1936 |

the egg out again. He found that it was always
the free end that became the ventral side. He
concludes from that there must be some stream-
ing of the protoplasm when the egg is pushed in
and, by means of the course of this, we get a dif-
ferent character in the ends. Probably there are
different conditions of metabolism at the two poles.
If now the free end is stained very strongly so
as to hurt the egg, this will be the dorsal side.

Dr. Whitaker: Heavy staining tends to de-
velop the dorsal side?

Dr. Horstadius :

Dr. Whitaker: And is it just possible since
you do stain that region in order to later identify
it, that the stain may have played some part in
the reversal ?

Dry. Horstadius: No, because we have tried
staining both sides. I foresaw that and so in
some experiments we stained the outside of the
half blastula instead of the inside and got the
same result.

Dr. Whitaker: One question about the energy
relations that you referred to—from Tyler's work,
which showed that smaller fragments require more
energy to attain a given stage of development and
tend to develop more slowly; nevertheless you
showed that you could isolate small meridional
fragments and some will be retarded more than
others. I was wondering if it might be that, in
different parts of the embryo, the available energy
differs, so that, for that reason, two equal sized
fragments can be retarded to different extents.
It would mean that the additional delay which
you ascribe to rearganization changes might really
be the result of less available energy in that
region.

Dr. Horstadius: Do you mean that on the
ventral side you ought to have more energy than
on the dorsal side ?

Dy, Whitaker: Yes, I mean that the retarda-
tion might be due to the fact that there is less
energy available on the dorsal side.

Dr. Horstadius: 1 think that is very hard to
get at. Isn't it very probable that the formation
of the ventral side on the wrong side is a regula-
tion which requires time? I think that both
Tyler’s idea and the old one of time required for
regulation may be true. There may be first a
delay which is due to energy lack and another
which may be due to regulation.

Dr. Whitaker: That is partly what I am
getting at. I wonder if the two things might not
be the same in this sense: you say that it requires
time for regulation, but doesn’t that mean that
you have to wait for something to happen which
perhaps requires energy ?

Or rather inhibits the ventral.

THE COLEECIING NET

267

Dr. Horstadius: For something to happen, for
something that is not in the egg before—or in that
part of the egg—I think it very likely that that
should take time. Very possibly it may be as you
say, but it is hard to reach a conclusion.

Dr. Grave: \Vhat do you think of the mosaic
theory of development? To what extent was that
theory right, and what is its relation to regula-
tion?

Dr. Horstadius: The difference between the
mosaic and the regulative type of development is
nowadays considered to be only a gradual one,
depending upon the stage of the development at
which determination is completed. For example,
the uncleaved egg of the nemertine Cerebratulus
can produce a perfect larva both from the animal
and the vegetative half, whereas in the 8- and
16-cell stage we find the mosaic type: isolated
animal and vegetative parts differentiate just into
what they would have given in the normal larva.
In the uncleaved sea-urchin egg we already have
the segregation of different potencies along the
egg-axis, so that the animal half cannot give an
archenteron. In the cleavage stages we do not,
as in Cerebratulus, find a mosaic of fully deter-
mined anlagen for organs, but a mosaic, so to
say, of different potencies, different activities,
which will form the organs after first interacting
between themselves. Thus the uncleaved Cere-
bratulus egg is less than the sea-urchin egg a
mosaic, but in the 8 or 16-cell stage it is a more
strictly determined mosaic. In other “mosaic”
eggs, such as those of ctenophores, annelids, mol-
lusks, etc., the determination seems to occur still
earlier.

Dr. J. Holtfreter, who left Woods Hole shortly
before the discussion took place, has in a letter
sent the following contribution: In the sea-
urchins, the determination of the animal half de-
pends upon the vegetative, that is to say, early
isolated presumptive ectoderm reacts in another
way to later implanted micromeres than does pre-
sumptive ectoderm which has all the time re-
mained in contact with the vegetative part. This
is not so in the amphibians. Here the course of
determination in the ectoderm is independent of
the other part of the embryo: early isolated ecto-
derm loses the capacity to react to implanted in-
ducers at the same time as the ectoderm in the
embryo. This seems to have to do with the fact
that the sea-urchin ege probably is a less stable
system than the amphibian egg—compare all the
differences in differentiation that you can obtain
in the sea-urchin egg by the removal and adding
of animal and vegetative material. In the am-
phibians the inducers act chiefly by contact, when
underlying the ectoderm. In the sea-urchin per-
haps we have to do with a lateral diffusion.

268

,
re!

2,

F
—

°,
o>

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 100

NEW BOOKS YOU NEED
Bailey’s HISTOLOGY

Famous standard text. Almost entirely re-
written new 9th edition. (August 1936). Edi-
ted by Professor Philip Smith with the collab-
oration of Professors Strong, Elwyn, Sever-
inghaus, Copenhaver, Carpenter and Goss, all

of Columbia University. $6.00
Krafka: ELEMENTARY
HISTOLOGY

Entirely new (April 1936) by Professor Joseph
Krafka, University of Georgia. Author urges
biologists to admit histology to the general
college curriculum on the same footing as
comparative anatomy, embryology and gen-
etics. $2.5)

Mathews: PRINCIPLES OF

BIOCHEMISTRY

New up-to-date short concise yet reasonably
complete presentation of biochemistry by the
well known author of the larger standard
TEXTBOOK OF PHYSIOLOGICAL CHEMIS-

TRY. (August 1936). $4.50
Best and Taylor: PHYSIOLOGY
OF MEDICAL PRACTICE

Ready late in September. The new University
of Toronto textbook in applied physiology, of
the utmost value and highest authority for
both students and practitioners.

Roaf: PHYSIOLOGY

Second revised (1936) edition of a good Brit-
ish textbook by the Professor of Physiology,
University of Liverpool, formerly of Toronto.

$6.75

Stedman’s PRACTICAL MEDICAL
DICTIONARY, 1936

25th Year. New 13th thoroughly revised edi-
tion of this standard American medical dic-
tionary. Hundreds of new terms. New article
on Medical Etymology. Gives B. N. A., N. K.
and new British Anatomical Nomenclature.
Accords with U. S. Pharmacopoeia 1936, Na-
tional Formulary, British Pharmacopoeia, and

Bergey’s bacteriological terminology. Index
of 217 tables, 1300 large pages, semiflexible
binding, thumb index. $7.50

WILLIAM “WILLIAM WOOD & CO. & CO.

BALTIMORE, MD.

Compliments
and
Best Anniversary Wishes

Clay Adams Company,

Inc.

New York

bx

JUST PUBLISHED!

Culture Methods for

Invertebrate Animals

COMPENDIUM prepared _ by

American zoologists under the di-
rection of a committee of Section F of
the American Association for the Ad-
vancement of Science:

Frank M. Lutz

Paut S. GALTSOFF

Paut S. WELCH

James G. NEEDHAM, Chairman

650 pages approx., 85 illus., $4.00

| COMSTOCK PUBLISHING CO., INC.
ITHACA e NEW YORK

hr) SS ——— ——

|

DecemBeR, 1936 | _THE COLLECTING NET

269

4 FEATURES

clusively
SPENCER'S

in new Medical Microscope

The new Spencer Medical Microscope No. 33 MH offers the
medical student and doctor four specific features ‘available only on
Spencer Microscopes." These features are important—for they permit
full utilization of the superior Spencer Optical Systems.

These features ‘exclusively Spencer’s’’ are:

1. Spencer-Type Fine Adjustment —
smooth, delicate, accurate operation
assured for life of microscope.

2. Dual Cone Nosepiece—twice the
usual bearing surface, practically
doubles life of bearing, assures correct
alignment of objectives always.

3. “Balanced” Optical System—the Abbe
condenser, furnished as standard
equipment, has a numerical aperture
of 1.25 matching the N. A. 1.25 of
oil immersion objective. Greater
detail of specimen is resolved.

4. Fork-type Substage —holds substage
accessories firmly in place with abso-
lutely no chance of their being tilted
out of alignment or jamming in the
holder as is the case where condenser
is held by Friction in the usual ring.

These mechanical features are definite
reasons why the Spencer Microscope will
serve you for years with the perfection of
a new instrument. For complete descrip-
ee tion of all features write for Folder M-76.
sous Sa aie : : Please address Dept. J-91.

Spencer Lens Company
Buffalo New York

THE COLLECTING NET

[Vot. XI, No. 100

This New series of charts edited by Professors The dra

NEW GENERAL BIOLOGY CHARTS

GBI1L

Chart GB9 Perch

24 Wall Charts, Containing 202
Figures---Sizes 44x32 inches

List of Charts in This Series

One Celled GB12
Animals GB13
Hydra and Biss
Jellyfish sskeiat
Flatwormsand GB15
Roundworms GB16

Earthworm GBI17
Crayfish GBI18
Insect GB19
Structures GB20
Honeybee Tage
Clam el
Perch G ui
Frog Devel- GB22
opment GB23

Frog Anatomy GB24

Bird Studies
Cell Division
Algae
Wheat Rust
Liverwort
Moss
Fern
Pine
Germination
of Seeds
Roots
Stems
Leaves
Flowers

Complete set on durable Manila in steel

solid charthead with tripod $2825
stand and Teacher’s Manual

vings are labeled on the charts and an

Goddard, Kenoyer and Hinds of Western Michigan adequate Teacher’s Manual is furnished. The charts
State Teachers College fills a very definite need. The are large size, clearly lithographed in a rich dark
illustrations selected after a critical study of the brown and may be had in handmounted form or in
latest biology texts reflect present day trends in the the inexpensive, durable manila edition priced

teaching of Biology. above,

Write for Circular S4 Illustrating and Describing These Charts

DENOYER GEPPERT CoO.

5235 RAVENSWOOD AVENUE

CHICAGO, ILLINOIS

]

NEW WARREN=-KSIGHT

LETTERING GUIDES

° for Cutting Stencils
° for Any Make Duplicating

Machine

AAG

4 0 ED:

PISZAXMA

7 Styles . . . Sizes %” to 34”
Prices Are Low to Suit Reduced Budgets

BEFGHIKLMN@RXSTU

THE, HEYER CORPORATION .CHICAGO.U.S.A,

If you use duplicating equipment write for descriptive circular

CN=218to

WARREN-KNIGHT CO.

136 N. 12th STREET

WRICO Lettering Guides

Distributors for

PHILADELPHIA, PA., U.S.A.

PLASTICO Moulage Materials

0) SE OS OS A) DD AT) SD (>

> > 1 1S 1D 0D 0D OED 620

DeceMBeR, 1936 ] THE COLLECTING NET 271

rote

I OT DE DD DOCOMO CRED CDT CCRC OS (5

DD OD)

Send Best Wishes To
THE COLLECTING NET

on the Occasion of the
100th Issue

NEW MICROSCOPES

Are Now Available in 3 Distinct Types
!
!

LARGE MODEL L FOR RESEARCH
MEDIUM MODEL Lg FOR LABORATORY
SMALL MODEL Lr FOR TRAVELING

L and Lg can be supplied with various substages and
condensers, different stages, straight or inclined mon-
ocular or inclined binocular tube. An outstanding
feature of the Binocular L is that it increases the
normal total magnification of objectives and eyepieces
by 50 percent.

The available range is from 22.5x to 5400x.

485 Fifth Avenue Cc 4 Ri y FIiss ae Cc 728 So. Hill St.,
New York & ® Los Angeles

x > > 2) > SE De ee a ee ee a eS ee ee

er

72 , tt RE COLERCRING NEL

bia} we
To THE CoLLECTING NET:
Congratulations on your past success
and best wishes for your continued
growth!
SPECIAL APPARATUS
b

___[Vor. XI, No. 100

Interchangeable
(ST) joints used
throughout

Made of
“Pyrex?
glass

Available
from

Designed---Developed---Constructed

to Order

Above: the
Dixon-Keilin Flask ‘
(Cf. Dixon, ‘“Manometric
Methods,” pp. 96-107 (1934).

Mechanical and Electrical Engineering
Research in Applied Physics

CALIBRON PRODUCTS, INC.

West Orange, New Jersey

AMERICAN INSTRUMENT CO., Inc.

8010-8020 Georgia Ave. Silver Spring, Md.

WITH |
VOLAND #800
weighings of
4 GRAMS 200 MILLIGRAMS
can be made without handling weights!

The Standard of Excellence for 96 Years

“Without tools biological research would
be at a standstill.”

No. 10 Analytical Balance

Capacity—200 gms. Sensitiveness 0.05 mg.
Patented vernier and grid, equilibrium adjuster,
which eliminate the handling of riders and all
weights below 4 grams 200 mg.

Manufactured in U. S. A. by

VOLAND & SONS, Inc.

NEW ROCHELLE, N. Y.

911 Arch St.
CATALOG NO. 1929-N

CHEMICAL—ASSA Y—ANALYTICAL—
PULP—BALANCES—WEIGHTS
OF PRECISION

HENRY TROEMNER

SINCE 1840
Philadelphia, Pa.

DecemBer, 1936 ] THE COLLECTING NET

2 met SU tere

my

The CARVER

LABORATORY
PRESS

Vinee

ith Se z

=
LE Ta
GSS
~

for CHEMICAL
BIOLOGICAL
and PHYSICAL
LABORATORIES

Some of its many uses

Dehydrating—Separating Liquids and Solids—Pres-
sure Filtering of Thick Fluids—Pressing out Oils,
Stearines and Waxes—Splitting of Oils, Stearines
and Waxes—Fatty Acid Determinations—Pressing
Wax from Mineral Oils—Pressing Oil and Moisture
from Wax—Pressing out Plant and Fruit Saps,
Juices, and Extracts—Pressing out Concentrated
Extracts—Pressing out Spent Extractions—Pressing
Mother Liquids from Crystals—Pressing out Fluids
from Animal Tissue—Pressing Bacteria—Pressing
out Vaccines and Viruses—Pressing of Plastics and
numerous Mechanical Applications.

Standard Press Accessories
provide for many applica-
tions. Our catalog gives
full details. May we send

| FRED S. CARVER

HypDRAULIC EQUIPMENT

341A HUDSON ST., NEW YORK

wees

_THE COLLECTING NET

REINFORCED
for HIGH SPEED

High speed and large capacities demanded by many
centrifuge users today, call for greater strength in
heads, cups and protective guards. Proper rein-
forcement of our Size 1, Type SB and Size 2 Cen-
trifuges permits fifty per cent more speed with con-
tainers up to 250 ml, in capacity.

REINFORCED

Size 1, Type SB Centrifuge with Stand
Higher speed, with the resulting increase of two
and a half times the relative centrifugal force,
affords a tremendous advantage in the modern
laboratory.

THE MULTISPEED ATTACHMENT

has a maximum speed of 18,000 R.P.M. and can be
used in the Type SB and Size 2 Centrifuges, when
equipped with welded steel guard. Relative Cen-

G3. a trifugal Force, about
nine times’ greater
than that of the ordi-
nary centrifuge, can be
obtained with the Mul-
tispeed Attachment for
samples of material up
to 40 ml. capacity.

Bulletins by mail or at your Dealer’s

INTERNATIONAL EQUIPMENT CO.

352 Western Avenue Boston, Mass.

Makers of Fine Centrifuges

DIAPHANE

THE
IDEAL

MOUNTING
MEDIUM

Diaphane is a synthetic
medium made of resins
and solvents which is
superior in a number of
ways to balsam for
mounting.

DIAPHANE

WILE CORPORATION
ROCHESTER N.Y

UD

Diaphane is neutral to all stains. The refrac-
tive index of 1.483 makes it suitable for the
most delicate work, permitting viewing ob-
jects which are totally invisible in the usual
mount.

It is more convenient than balsam. Objects
may always be mounted directly from abso-
lute alcohol, frequently from 709% alcohol,
and usually from 95% alcohol. It is thus
possible to mount specimens without em-
ploying dangerously volatile preparations.
For the most delicate work, Diaphane Solv-
ent may be employed in place of alcohol of
high concentration.

Diaphane is non-oxidant, works easily, and
preserves delicate stains. Mounts made with
it keep perfectly without scaling.

Diaphane is available in two forms, colorless
and green. The latter contains a copper salt
which serves to intensify hematoxylin stains.

Diaphane, colorless. . : . 25 mi. .60
100 ml. 1.50
500 ml. 6.00

Diaphane, green, containing a
color which intensifies Hema-

toxylin stains. . : . 25 mi. .75
100 ml. 2.00
500 ml. 7.50

Diaphane Solvent, for thinning

Diaphane and for use as a clear-

ing agent before mounting with

Diaphane , F é D . 500 ml.
1000 ml.

WILL CORPORATION

Cee ee ee SS
LABORATORY APPARATUS AND CHEMICALS

ROCHESTER,N.Y.

__[Vor. XI, No. 100

vce ce cena emrecemcesoeoa

o
"

December, 1936 |] ____ THE COLLECTING NET _

Ms

@rtending Zo the Collecting Net’

OUR BEST WISHES

for continued S“CCeESS

| Ewer Z, ENC.

60 East 10th Street
New York City

rd
i .

PANOPAK ILLUMINATOR

»)
| It’s New... a combination illuminator for
| opaque objects, permitting almost instantaneous

change from Vertical to Ultropak illumination
while the objective remains in focus.

° eZ INC. xew sone ws |

WASHINGTON CHICAGO DETROIT

Western Agents:

Spindler and Sauppe, Inc. Los Angeles San Francisco

—

—___— —--— SS bed
RT EC

Lie THE COLLECTING NET [Vor. XI, No. 100
FORMULAE AND METHODS

Edited by DR. OSCAR W. RICHARDS

Instructor Biology, Yale University

SSE

Reducing Valve

When maintaining special
atmospheres; when running
combustions; in pH work;

In charge of = Usea
Marine Biological Laboratory Chemical Room :
Table of Contents =

General Information
General Formulae
Killing and Fixing Fluids

with your oxygen burner,
Osmium and Platinum Containing Fluids ete.
Stain Solubilities Several models, for various
Staining Solutions

q purposes; with different in-
lets for different gases, in-
eluding HeS and NHs.

Ask for folder NC

Preparation of Standard Solutions
H-ion Standards and Buffer Solutions
, olutions

iphic Solutions

Miscellaneous Information

Solubility of Compounds Hoke Inc.
25 octavo pages Price 75 cents .
Publishedepy: 122 Fifth Ave., New York
THE COLLECTING NET Woods Hole, Mass.

==

FILTRATION PROBLEMS
Solved by eS aN the use of

JENA FRITTED Reo] GLASS FILTERS

BOWTIE SESS Convenient and exact weighing.

1. Insoluble (except to hydrochloric acid and z Complete drying —constant weight at
hot concentrated alkalies). 110°C.

2. Complete visibility during filtration and 5. Large filtering surface.
extraction. 6. Can easily be cleaned.

7. Not affected by filtration of liquids such as Fehling Solution, Am-
monia, Concentrated Hydroxide and Concentrated Sulphuric Acid
all of which attack filter paper.

Jena Fritted Filters are available in various forms and porosities.

JENA BUECHNER FUNNELS, porosity G 5/3, are recommended for Bac-
teria Free Filtration. The average pore diameter of the disc is 1.5/1000
mm. They are being used in the sterilization of tyrodes solution, pep-
tic digests of protein and peptone, serums, etc.
JENA GAS DISTRIBUTION TUBES for the distribution of air and gases

BucchnenFunnel in liquids. Delivers a stream of uniform size bubbles which varies with =
the porosity and liquid used.

JENA MICRO-FILTERS for Micro Chemistry with fused-in fritted glass
filter discs for the filtration of small quantities of liquid, according to
the workings of: Pregl, Emich, Lieb, Chamot, and others.

INDRA. S5oseagncooabarada 12G3 12G4 91G3 30aG3 30aG4
IDET, Kost Chih agehioaoaodean 10 10 9 10 10
Height above disc ....... 30 30 30 10 10
Capacity, cem. ........... 2 2 Immersion 0.8 0.8
IA Sanaagusddcsacoccanue $ 2.50 2.50 2.30 2.50 2.50

Catalogue 232 LE Available on Request

ULIRA THERMOSTAT
AFTER HOEPPLER

Uniform and Accurate Regulation of Temperature. Completely Auto-
matic and Easily Adjustable. Delivers to the Instrument for Continuous
Service Five Liters of Constant Temperature Liquid per Minute.

Range —35° +300°C. Accurate within 0.02°C.

—— For ——
BACTERIOLOGY—REFRACTOMETRY—SEROLOGY— VISCOSIMETRY
Special Bulletin. HT 254 upon Request
Available at all Leading Laboratory Supply Dealers

FISH-SCHURMAN CORP." 5088"

NEW YORK CITY

DeceMBeER, 1936] |

i

THE COLLECTING NET

STANSCIEN
QUALITY LABORATORY SPECIALTIES

HUETTNER PARAFFIN
DESK OVEN

6601

6601. OVEN, Huettner Paraffin, for embed-
ding purposes. Designed by Prof. Alfred F.
Huettner of New York University. This is an
efficient and reliable paraffin oven incorporating
many features not found in any manufactured
today. Recommended for individual or class
use, for such work as embedding, filtering par-
affin, spreading sections, and drying slides.
Many institutions have adopted this oven for
laboratory use. Some of the important fea-
tures are: ‘

Constructed of non-rusting monel metal.
Uses heating coil instead of lamps.

Has a thermostat for automatic temperature
control.

Pilot light illuminates the inside of oven.
Separate drying chamber accommodating 50
slides.

Convenient size:—16” x 8” x 6” inside.

Can be used for Feulgen reaction.

PEMACG Me Se ccates i cartes teesescesstvncins sosserseaswweeibavinnses’ $32.00

QUANTITY DISCOUNTS

Quantities of 6
Quantities of 12

AS oe NE

Less 10%
Less 15%

STANSCIEN WARMING TABLE
NEW @ IMPROVED @ RELIABLE
FOR STUDENT AND RESEARCH WORK

6602

This warming table has been designed to meet

exacting conditions for spreading paraffin sec-

tions. The following improved features are in-

corporated:

1. Temperature range from room to 70° Cen-
tigrade.

Controlled temperature assured by accurate
thermostat operated by simple dial.

Heavy copper plate insures uniform heat.

Pilot light indicates when heat is on.

Size of plate: 9”’x20”. Accommodates 60
standard 3’x1” slides. Height 4”.

Rigid construction thruout. Panels of 4”
transite asbestos.

Operates on A.C. or D.C. 110 V. Current.

May be used as a warming plate for imbed-
ding tissues.

Suitable for keeping stains at various tem-
peratures for silver nitrate, feulgen, mal-
lory and other staining reactions.

© MIN DP AAW Nw

No. 6602—Warming table without thermometer
$22.50.

No. 6603—Special thermometer with curved
mercury bulb $3.00.

No. 6604—Cover of heavy japanned metal fit-
ting over top of oven to protect
slides from dust. Each $5.00.

QUANTITY DISCOUNTS

Quantities of 3 ...Less 10%
Quantities of 6................ ....Less 15%

OTHER STANCIEN SPECIALTIES include

Research Purposes, such as:

American Made Micro Slides—Plain and Cavity
Handi-stack Dishes

Cover Glasses
Pipettes—regular and to order

Ovens
Precision Thermometers for all purposes
Naturalists’ Supplies

many items for Routine Laboratory and

Incubators Warming Tables

Chemicals Stains

— Write for literature and prices —

Standard Scientific Supply Corporation

34-38 West Fourth Street

New York, N. Y.

THE COLLECTING NET _[ Vor. XI, No. 100

<n
REFRIGERATED
Barcroft -W arburg Bath

For temperatures as low as —20°C,
or as high as 60°C. This bath can be
equipped for either 7 or 14 manometers.

Constant Temperature, = 0.05°C or better,
throughout the bath, at any tempera-
ture within the range stated above

Variable Speed and Amplitude of shaking
give this instrument great flexibility

Manometers and Flasks are of ‘Pyrex”
glass, and are equipped with inter-
changeable (ST) joints throughout

A Wide Variety of glassware is available,
including that tor the methods of:
Warburg; Barcroft; Dickens & Simer;
Dixon & Keilin;; Dickens & Greville;
Fenn; and others

AMERICAN INSTRUMENT CO., Inc.

8010-8020 Georgia Ave. Silver Spring, Md

R. & J. Beck’s Apochromatic Objectives

11% inch, 0.16 N.A.

$35.00 1/, inch, 0.95 N.A., adjustable........ 90.00

2/3 inch, (16 impr.) 0.35 N.A. 60.00 1/, inch, 1.20 N.A., oil imm. 5 LUPO}
*/; inch, (14 impr.) 0.35 N.A. 60.00 1/1 inch, 1.20 N.A., oil imm. 135.00
173 inch, 0.65 N.A. 70.00 1/,. inch, 1.30 N.A., oil imm. 135.00
1/6 inch, 0.95 N.A., fixed mount.. 82.00 1/49 inch, 1.40 N.A., oil imm......... 187.50

11 X

COMPENSATING EYEPIECES

$15.75 ZO XK ara $18.75
15.75 aY/ SX 9 ZREV
18.75 50 X ee a 23162
18.75 100 x uae wey olen)

ALLAN UHLER OPTICAL WORKS

1531 JOHN STREET

BALTIMORE, MARYLAND

.

D>

> 0 aD Oe
oe

_ Decemser, 1936 ] THE COLLECTING NET 279

acmnillan’s new texts and reference
books in the biological sciences

COLLEGE ZOOLOGY by Robert W. Hegner. Fourth edition. A thorough

revision of this standard text for introductory zoology. $3.50

OUTLINES OF GENERAL ZOOLOGY dy H. H. Newman. Third Edition.
The revision makes this text an outstanding one for the new general survey
courses. $3.50

A LABORATORY MANUAL FOR GENERAL ZOOLOGY by Katherin Mc-
Clure Roehl and H. H. Newman. To accompany the new edition of New-
man’s text. $1.00

GENERAL BIOLOGY by James W. Mavor. Thorough and exceptionally in-

teresting presentation of both botany and zoology, and their general biological

principles. $4.00
LABORATORY MANUAL FOR GENERAL BIOLOGY by James WV’. Mavor

and Leonard B. Clark. To accompany Mayor's text. $1.75
FOUNDATIONS OF BIOLOGY by Lorande Loss Woodruff. Fifth Edition.

|| | Thorough revision of one of the most widely used texts in the field. $3.50
MANUAL OF BIOLOGY by George A. Baitsell. Fifth Edition. With many

new illustrations, and considerable new material. $2.50

THE INVERTEBRATA by L. A. Borradaile and F. A. Potts. Revised edition.

About fifty pages of new material were added in the new edition of this highly

praised text, and the price reduced. $4.00
NEUROEMBRYOLOGY by Samuel R. Detwiler. The second volume to be
published in the Experimental Biology Monograph Series. $3.75
THE EGGS OF MAMMALS by Gregory Pincus. The most recent volume in
the Experimental Biology Monograph Series. $3.75
THE LIVING WORLD by Samuel H. Williams. The first text to be prepared
especially for a college course in nature study. Coming this fall.
EVOLUTION AND HEREDITY by Charles E. Walker. A critical analysis of
recent facts and theories. $2.10

THE CRANIAL MUSCLES OF VERTEBRATES by 7. H. Edgeworth. A

reference book on the anatomy and development of the cranial muscles. $30.00

BRITISH STEM- AND LEAF-FUNGI by J’. B. Grove. A detailed account of

the British Fungi Imperfecti. $7.00
THE COLLECTED SCIENTIFIC PAPERS OF SIR WILLIAM BATE
HARDY. $18.00
HEREDITY AND THE ASCENT OF MAN by C. C. Hurst. A review of the
fascinating science of genetics written for the layman. $1.50

THE COMPARATIVE ANATOMY OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM OF
VERTEBRATES INCLUDING MAN Dy C. U. Kappers, G. Carl Huber,
and Elizabeth C. Crosby. The newest and most comprehensive work in the
field. In two volumes. Set, $16.00

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 60 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. XI, No. 100

SPECIAL APPARATUS

CHE solution of new scientific problems
frequently calls for new and hitherto unheard
of apparatus. Our experience of practically
forty years in the manufacture of special
technical glassware readily enables us to ac-
complish the unusual, and is an enormous
aid to scientists seeking the proper source of
supply.

Master glassblowers, grinders, and en-
gravers with lifelong experience in their re-
spective fields account for the exceptional
high class workmanship of all Machlett-made
apparatus. More and more are scientists
specifying “Machlett” because of the high
degree of satisfaction they derive from care-
fully made and trustworthy apparatus at no
premium in cost.

Send Us Your Sketches for Quotation

E. MACHLETT & SON

Scientific Glassware and Apparatus

220 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK, N. Y.

G. E. STECHERT & CO.

31 EAST 10th STREET,
NEW YORK

If in need of any Book or Periodical

Domestic or Foreign

NEW --- SECONDHAND.---
OUT OF PRINT

try our very large stock in New York
or our facilities for importing. Our
own staffs are maintained in Leipzig,
London and Paris.

For the

BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

MODELS
SKELETONS
CHEMICALS
LANTERN SLIDES
DISPLAY MATERIAL
PRESERVED MATERIAL
NATURALISTS’ SUPPLIES
STAINS AND REAGENTS
MUSEUM PREPARATIONS
LABORATORY GLASSWARE
BIRD SKINS AND MOUNTS
DISSECTING INSTRUMENTS
BACTERIOLOGICAL SUPPLIES
MICROSCOPE SLIDE PREPARATIONS
CHARTS, BOTANICAL AND ZOOLOGICAL

INSECT LIFE HISTORIES and COLLECTIONS
MICROSCOPES, MICROTOMES ACCESS E
=,

and ACCESSORIES
Guaranteed Quality
A copy of our 300-page illustrated Catalogue

Prompt Service

No. 7 will be sent on request to teachers of
the biological sciences.

New York Scientific Supply Co.

Formerly N. Y.
111-113 East 22nd Street

Biological Supply Co.
New York, N. Y.

*,
* >) “ye ne

Biological Supplies

You can depend upon Turtox sup-
plies for Biology because Turtox ma-
terials are prepared in modern, properly
equipped laboratories by a trained and
experienced staff which has a sincere
desire to contribute to the advance of
teaching methods in Biology.

a i: O

TU pronto yep UCTS

The Sign of the Turtox
Pledges Absolute Satisfaction

GENERAL BIOLOGICAL SUPPLY HOUSE

(Incorporated )

761-763 EAST SIXTY-NINTH PLACE CHICAGO

S

DECEMBER, 1936 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 281

You need THIS DEPENDABLE

Above: The B & L Microscope HSA with
a built-on mechanical stage and divisible

body tube.

MICROSCOPE

You should have the B & L Model
HS Microscope. This instrument will
fulfill all of your routine microscopy
as well as most of your needs for re-
search work.

Here are some of the features of the
HS Microscope:

1. A fine adjustment built for a life-
time of service.

2. Parfocal Objectives mounted in
threadless self-centering cells.

3. An extra large stage 115mm x

130mm.

4. A full ring condenser holder that
will give positive centering 50
years from now.

5. A stable, well-balanced base.
Various models of this HS model are
available for your particular work.

Write for complete details to Bausch
& Lomb Optical Co., 671 St. Paul
Street, Rochester, New York.

Bausch & Lomb

WE MAKE OUR OWN GLASS TO ‘
INSURE STANDARDIZED PRODUCTION

FOR YOUR GLASSES, INSIST ON B&L
ORTHOGON LENSES AND B & L FRAMES

282 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. XI, No. 100

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE BIBLIOGRAPHIES
SER VICE -AND AUTHORS ABSTRACTS

If you publish in any Wistar Institute journal, your paper, im abstract form, is announced
on two separate occasions, prior to the appearance of the complete article in a journal:

Ist. In the Advance Abstract Sheets of the Bibliographic Service, issued on the
15th of each month.

2nd. In the form of Bibliographic Service Cards, issued semi-monthly.

Subscription to the Advance Abstract Sheets—$3.00 per year.

Subscription to the Bibliographic Service Cards—$5.00 per year.

The following journals are published by The Wistar Institute:

Journal of Morphology The Journal of Experimental Zoology

The Journal of Comparative Neurology American Journal of Physical Anthropology
The American Journal of Anatomy Journal of Cellular and Comparative Physiology
The Anatomical Record The Journal of Nutrition

Reprints of articles appearing in the above journals may be purchased at prices quoted
on the Advance Abstract Sheets.

For further information address

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE OF ANATOMY AND BIOLOGY
36th STREET AND WOODLAND AVENUE PHILADELPHIA, PA.

hn, Me My i Mn hr, oy, Mi Mr, Mtr Mr hr, hrm Mr Mir Ar A, Mi, Ml, Ml, Ml, Mr, Mr, Mr, Mir, Ms, Min, Mir, Mn, Mir, Lr, Mn, Mn, Ms, Mn, Mn, Lr.

Congratulations to “The Collecting Net”
from the Printer

THE DARWIN PRESS

Printers « Publishers
69 School St. New Bedford, Mass.

We will gladly submit estimates on your
books, magazines and catalogs. We will
guarantee quality workmanship at fair prices.

PRINTERS OF THE COLD SPRING HARBOR SYMPOSIA ON QUANTITATIVE BIOLOGY
VVUVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVTVVVVVVTVVVUTGT

DeceMBER, 1936 |

THE COLLECTING NET

283

A Page of New Physiological Apparatus

TIME MARKING CLOCK

TIME MARKING CLOCK

The laboratory Time Marking Clock con-
sists of a standard Warren Telechron Mo-
tor, geared to a set of contacts for the
transmission of time intervals to signal
magnets, or any device to which it is de-
sired to transmit timed impulses. The en-
tire assembly is mounted on a_ bakelite
panel, the motor mechanism proper being
neatly encased in a metal box. <A switch
on the panel is provided for starting and
stopping the motor.

Price $30.00

KYMOGRAPH
The Allied Kymograph is induction motor
driven from the regular 110-volt, 60 cycle
A.C. lighting circuit, therefore operates at
a substantial constant speed. A gear box
in the base allows for four speed changes.
The highest speed makes possible the use
of 100 vibrations per second tuning fork
for timing. The lowest speed is just suffi-
cient for proper use with second intervals.
BREICOMCACH 5.0 fssccs cre cosscee sas cuiceens ese $56.00

INDUCTORIUM

This instrument consists of an induction
coil with all necessary control elements
housed in a metal case with panel of bake-
lite. This control of the secondary is by
means of a high resistance potentiometer
which allows for a convenient knob control
of the output voltage. A 3-position switch
in the secondary circuit provides for three
ranges of the knob. A secondary short
circuit key is built into the panel of the
instrument, thus making the entire unit
self contained. The primary and secon-

dary circuits have separate binding posts;
a convenient vibrator adjustment on the
outside of the panel is also built into the
instrument.

$16.50

AUXILIARY DRUM

Auxiliary Drum for long paper consists of
a standard 6-inch drum mounted on %
inch steel rod.

Tlis Research Tambour is equipped with micrometer adjustment of amplification ratio

and base line.

The writing point is held in contact with the writing surface by
gravity rather than by a spring in the pen point or arm.

This makes for constant

writing pressure regardless of whether the writing surface is absolutely smooth or not.

Price, each............

$15.00

For complete information write

PHIPPS & BIRD, INC. _

915 East Cary St.

TO

INDUCTORIUM

KYMOGRAPH
=

AUXILIARY DRUM
a1

Richmond, Virginia

284 THE COLLECTING NET

[Vor. XI, No. 100

LOLAG
IMMERSION
HEATERS

CAN BE BENT TO FIT ANY VESSEL

AMINCO LoLag immersion heaters may be bent
to fit the vessel... give symmetrical and uniform
distribution of heat . heating element in center
of heater is separe ited from outer sheath by insu-
stance of several megohms.

QUICK HEATING, COOLING

Low heat storage capacity
assures instant heating
when the current is turned
on, making LoLag immer-
sion heaters ideal for con-
stant temperature work.
Heating elements begin 8
inches from terminals, re-
moving danger of burn-out
in case bath liquid runs
low. Ends of sheath her-
metically sealed.

Write for
Bulletin 1500

AMERICAN INSTRUMENT CO., Inc.

Silver Spring, Md.

8010-8020 Georgia Ave.

__—_—_—

List of a Few Recent Books

BAUR - FISCHER -LENZ. Menschliche Erb-
lehre u. Rassenhygiene. Band I: Mensch-
liche Erblehre. 1936. ill. 796 pp. $4.97.

EKMAN, Sven. Tiergeographie des Meeres.
1935. ill. 542 pp. $9.36.

FRANZ, Victor. Der biologische Fortschritt.
Die Theorie der organismengeschichtlichen
Vervollkommnung. 1935. 50 ill. 82 pp. $1.41.

FRENZEL, Gerhard. Untersuchungen ueber
die Tierwelt des Wiesenbodens. 1936. 8 ill.
130 pp. $2.01.

HASCHEK, E. u. HAITINGER, M. Farbmes-
sungen. Theoretische Grundlagen und An-
wendungen. 6 ill. and 14 tables, 86 pp. (Mon-
ographien a.d. Gesamtgebiete der Mikro-
chemie). 1936. $2.25.

LETTRE, H. u. IMHOFFEN, H. H. Ueber
Sterine, Gallensaeuren und verwandte Na-
turstoffe. 1936. ill. 320 pp. $8.19.

MEHELY, Ludwig. Naturgeschichte der Ur-
bienen. 1935. 60 tables. 214 pp. $9.10.

OPPENHEIMER, Carl. Einfuehrung in die All-
gemeine Biochemie. 1936. 227 pp. $5.60.

PASCHER, A. Die Suesswasser-Flora Mittel-
europas. Heft 15: Pteridophyten und Phan-
erogamen, bearb. von H. Glueck. 1936. 496
pp. $5.70.

REIN, Hermann. Einfuehrung in die Physio-

ologie des Menschen. 1936. ill. 464 pp. $5.72.

G. E. STECHERT & CO.
NEW YORK

31-33 EAST 10th ST.

FILTRATION PROBLEMS

SOLVED BY THE USE OF

JENA FRITTED GLASS FILTERS

Jena Biichner Funnels, porosity 5/3 for Bac-
teria Free filtration. Average pore diameter
of the disk is 1.5/1000 mm. These funnels
are being used in the sterilization of tyrodes
solution and peptic digests of protein, pep-
tone, etc.

Jena Gas Distribu-
tion Tubes, for the
distribution of air
and gases in liquids.
Deliver a stream of
uniform size bubbles
which varies with
the porosity of the
disk and liquid used.

Further information
on request.

Buchner Funnel

Gas Tube

Available at all Leading Laboratory Supply
Dealers

FISH-SCHURMAN CORPORATION
230 East 45th Street New York City
U. S. Agents
JENA GLASS WORKS, SCHOTT & GEN., JENA

Excitation Phenomena

Volume IV of

COLD SPRING HARBOR SYMPOSIA
OF QUANTITATIVE BIOLOGY

36 papers (370) pages including edited discussion
and a large number of text-figures; and an index.
Covers fundamental physico-chemical phenomena

related to the excitatory state; physical, chemical,
and mathematic ets of excitation in muscle

s ; ure; properties of the
cerebr, al potentials; ete. Authors: W. R.
7+. H. Bishop, H. A. Blair, L. R. Blinks,
. W. Bronk, D. Brown, McK. Cattell,
G. Coppee, H. J. Curtis, H. H. Dale,
AY. O. Fenn, E. Fischer, A. Forbes, R.
, H. Grundfest, E. Hill, H. Hoagland,
Jasper, G. Kato, L. Lapicque, L. G. Longs-
worth, D. A. MacInnes, A. M. Monnier, W. J. V.
Osterhout, G. H. Parker, C. L. Prosser, N. Rashev-
sky, A. Rosenblueth, F, O. Schmitt, T. Shedlovsky,
. C. Speidel, J. Z. Young.

Volumes I (Surface Phenomena), II (Growth),
and III (Photochemical Reactions) still avail-
able. Single copies of any volume: $4.50.
New subscription orders for all volumes as
they appear: $3.75 per volume. Tables of
Contents can be obtained from THE BIOL-
OGICAL LABORATORY, COLD SPRING
HARBOR, L. I., N. Y.

December, 1936 ] THE COLLECTING NET 285

How Particular
Are You About

Temperature Control?

WuenN you get under way with im-
portant investigations which involve
tedious preparation, how much thought
and care do you expend on the matter
of heat control?

Of course the success of a great deal
of biological work does not depend on
the temperature factor, but when it
does, why not insist upon the kind of
equipment you can rely on—equipment
you know will handle the heat control
job for you with no let-down?

In biological laboratories all over
the world Freas Constant Temperature
Equipment is depended upon because
of its consistent performance—day in Tlustrated above
and day out—year in and year out. Sa " is a Mechanical

You can trust it too. a { T i Convection Incu-

| bator, only one
COUPO
EREAS | Ae WILL BRING YOU

Incubators, Ster-
ilizers, Ovens,
Humidity Cabi-
nets and Constant
Temperature
Baths.

of the many types

ae A NEW CATALOG
-~ CONTAINING FULL DATA
~ ON FREAS LABORATORY OVENS

line, which covers

See

\ ee
: \ CEDAR) ci hae Sane oa a, #2 ane a Meee YA

Freas Con-

0 REN OLDER UD) OR 5
perature Lab- ’

(ESS) Ge CULE 0 ee a
ment formerly POSITION as

Miuy the breds ON ee :

Thermo-Electric Co..\ CUE Fo

Fo wamanutactired ames mo ee ter ra Fe

by the Precision Scien-\ STATE..............-

tific Company. w~ A

286 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. XI, No. 100

TRANSPARENT
CELLULOSE COVERS

These covers are made of heavy gage material that will
not discolor, embrittle or distort with age. The tops of the
cylindrical covers are made by neatly molded convex con-
struction, surmounted by a convenient transparent knob,
A firm aluminum rim surrounds the bottom edge for rein-
forcement. The weight of a 10” diameter by 16” high cover,
suitable for the average microscope, is but 14 oz., replacing
the awkward 9 to 10 lbs. necessary when using a glass bell.
The advantages and ease of handling, safety to instrument,
and eliminations of breakage hazard are quite apparent. The
covers are made of the same material as safety film, to reduce
fire hazard.

Cylindrical covers are offered in sizes ranging from 214” high by 10” diameter to 18”
high by 12” diameter. Covers are also available for Analytical Balances, Microtomes, etc.

Bulletin with complete list of sizes and prices furnished on request.

HOWE & FRENCH, Inc.

BOSTON, MASS.

99 BROAD STREET

Cambridge Heavy Water Analyzer

In THIS instrument for analysing heavy
water, use is made of the difference in
thermal conductivity of hydrogen and deu-
terium. The hydrogen deuterium mixture
is produced by electrolysis of the heavy
and ordinary water mixture; the concentra-
tion of deuterium in the gas being propor-
tional to the concentration of heavy water

in the liquid. Two small electrolytic cells,
each holding about 1 cc. of liquid are ar-_
ranged so that the gas from the negative
electrode of each cell passes through one
of the two chambers of a differential ther-
mal conductivity meter. If one chamber
contains hydrogen and the other a hydro-
gen deuterium mixture, the bridge will not
be in balance, the out-of-balance current
being a measure of the concentration of
the deuterium in the mixture. This con-
centration is proportional to the concentra-
tion of heavy water, which may be either
indicated or recorded.

SEND FOR FURTHER INFORMATION

CAMBRIDGE
TINSTRUMENT CO I°¢|

3732 Grand Central Terminal, New York, N. Y.

DECEMBER, 1936 ] THE COLLECTING NET 287

theid K. ath

— Proves New Pohodium PMating
of Spencer Metal Pacts More
Feeagent Proof

GUEMERGED seven days — 168 hours —in a

bath of hydrochloric acid, the new Rho-
dium Plated metal parts of Spencer micro-
scopes emerged untouched by acid reaction.
Here, for the first time, are metal parts that

are truly chemically inert.

Rhodium is» a precious metal of the platinum
family — widely used in jewelry. Adding new
beauty to Spencer Microscopes, it resembles
and has the warmth of silver. But its great
value to you is that it has the indestructibility
and resistance to chemical reagents so desira-
ble in a laboratory instrument.

Rhodium plated metal parts are only one
feature of superiority offered by Spencer
microscopes. It is typical of our designers’
attention to even the most inconsequential de-
tails which make the Spencer microscope a
better microscope to work with.

Our new catalog M-66 gives complete in-
formation on the Spencer series of research
microscopes. Write for it today. Please ad-
dress Dept. J-82.

Spencer Lens Company
Buffalo &3 New York

ss,

atelyt i
Haseaies( (iatiy
Het vad ae
St

ue H
f
Heath
Heels \
t u

Hii ye tase i!
Ea
Aptana
as

UF y t
ett Ti diet
aa
ay
fii

ante

SHH ARAN
fiw) bh bach
it